initial commit of ebook 19538HEADmain

12 files changed, 29286 insertions, 0 deletions

diff --git a/.gitattributes b/.gitattributes
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..6833f05
--- /dev/null
+++ b/.gitattributes
@@ -0,0 +1,3 @@
+* text=auto
+*.txt text
+*.md text
diff --git a/19538-8.txt b/19538-8.txt
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..7b8a7a9
--- /dev/null
+++ b/19538-8.txt
@@ -0,0 +1,9182 @@
+The Project Gutenberg EBook of The Broncho Rider Boys with Funston at Vera
+Cruz, by Frank Fowler
+
+This eBook is for the use of anyone anywhere at no cost and with
+almost no restrictions whatsoever.  You may copy it, give it away or
+re-use it under the terms of the Project Gutenberg License included
+with this eBook or online at www.gutenberg.org
+
+
+Title: The Broncho Rider Boys with Funston at Vera Cruz
+       Or, Upholding the Honor of the Stars and Stripes
+
+Author: Frank Fowler
+
+Release Date: October 14, 2006 [EBook #19538]
+
+Language: English
+
+Character set encoding: ISO-8859-1
+
+*** START OF THIS PROJECT GUTENBERG EBOOK THE BRONCHO RIDER BOYS WITH ***
+
+
+
+
+Produced by Juliet Sutherland, Suzan Flanagan and the
+Online Distributed Proofreading Team at http://www.pgdp.net
+
+
+
+
+
+[Illustration: "THIS IS NO PLACE FOR ME," COMMENTED BILLIE AS HE
+KEPT HIMSELF WELL HIDDEN BEHIND A GIANT CACTUS.
+
+_The Broncho Rider Boys with Funston at Vera Cruz. Page 33._]
+
+               The Broncho Rider Boys
+
+               With Funston at Vera Cruz
+
+                         OR
+
+     Upholding the Honor of the Stars and Stripes
+
+                    By FRANK FOWLER
+
+                       AUTHOR OF
+
+"The Broncho Rider Boys with the Texas Rangers," "The Broncho
+  Rider Boys at Keystone Ranch," "The Broncho Rider
+    Boys Down in Arizona," "The Broncho Rider Boys
+       Along the Border," "The Broncho Rider
+            Boys on the Wyoming Trail."
+
+[Illustration]
+
+       A. L. BURT COMPANY
+           NEW YORK.
+
+-----------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+        Copyright, 1916
+     BY A. L. BURT COMPANY
+
+THE BRONCHO RIDER BOYS WITH FUNSTON AT VERA CRUZ
+
+-----------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+
+
+
+THE BRONCHO RIDER BOYS WITH
+  FUNSTON AT VERA CRUZ.
+
+
+
+
+CHAPTER I.
+
+A DARING ADVENTURE.
+
+
+"Let me look, Billie," and Donald reached out his hand for the
+field glass through which Broncho Billie was gazing down from the
+summit of Real del Monte upon the plain of Quesco, through which
+the Pachuca river winds its way. "Maybe I can make out who they
+are."
+
+Billie handed over the glass without a word and stood expectant,
+while Donald scrutinized closely a body of horsemen--twenty or
+more in number--which had halted beside the railroad that
+connects the little city of Pachuca with the City of Mexico.
+
+"They are not soldiers, that's certain," was Donald's comment
+after he had inspected the riders carefully for a couple of
+minutes.
+
+"That's what I thought," from Billie. "They look like a bunch of
+_vaqueros_ to me; but what would a crowd of fifty cowpunchers be
+doing in a country where the only cattle are goats?"
+
+"That's right!" laughed Donald, greatly amused at Billie's odd
+expression, "but still that is what they appear to be. Perhaps
+they are expecting a drove of cattle up on the train."
+
+"More likely they are expecting a load of bullion going down to
+the City of Mexico," remarked the third of the party. "What do
+you think, Pedro?" turning to the fourth of the boys who composed
+the quartette.
+
+"I am afraid you are right, Adrian," replied Pedro, with an
+accent which denoted that of the four he was the only one who was
+not of an English-speaking race.
+
+"You don't think they would hold up a train in broad daylight,
+and that not more than five miles from town, do you?" queried
+Billie.
+
+"If they are what I suspect," declared Pedro, "I think they would
+hold it up at the station, if there were only a few more of
+them."
+
+"And what do you think they are?"
+
+"I think they are Zapatistas."
+
+"What are they?" asked Donald.
+
+"Followers of the bandit leader, Emilio Zapata."
+
+"Which side does he belong to?" asked Adrian. "Huerta or
+Carranza?"
+
+"Neither. He is simply a bandit, and his followers prey upon any
+whom they find unprotected."
+
+"And do you really think they are going to hold up and rob the
+train from Pachuca?"
+
+"_Sin duda!_" meaning without doubt.
+
+"Then we must prevent them," declared Donald emphatically.
+
+"What business is it of ours?" asked Billie. "If one bunch of
+Mexicans wants to rob another bunch, especially if the second
+bunch are Huertistas, I don't know that it is for us to
+interfere. I'm not looking for trouble."
+
+"You're not afraid, are you? If----"
+
+"Say, Don," interrupted Billie, "what's the use of always asking
+such foolish questions? If I remember rightly, the last time you
+asked me that question was up on the Rio Grande a year ago, about
+the time that I was swimming rivers and breaking into prisons
+with the Texas Rangers to get you and Ad out of trouble. Now
+why----"
+
+Donald held up both hands.
+
+"That's enough, Billie," he laughed. "I'll take it all back. Of
+course you're not afraid. But I insist we must prevent this
+hold-up."
+
+"And again I ask, why?"
+
+"Because there may be women and children on the train and----"
+
+"That's enough," exclaimed Billie. "You needn't go on with the
+rest. But what's the plan? We're a good ten miles from those
+chaps--unless we had an airship."
+
+"And then how far do you think it is?" queried Adrian.
+
+"Well," replied Billie slowly, as he squinted up one eye, "I
+should say they are about four miles away as the crow flies. But
+we are not crows. By the Real road, it is at least ten miles."
+
+"There must be a short cut somewhere," insisted Donald.
+
+"There is," explained Pedro. "Just around the next turn in the
+road there is a goat path that leads down to the river. If you
+are not afraid of getting wet----"
+
+"There you go," laughed Billie. "Afraid of getting wet! Just
+let's settle it once for all that we are not afraid of anything
+that it is right for us to do."
+
+Pedro laughed good-naturedly.
+
+"Well, then, since we are not afraid of getting wet, we can
+follow the river for about two miles by fording it several times,
+and emerge on the plain a mile this side of the clump of trees
+which hides those fellows from the highway."
+
+"And then what?" from Billie.
+
+"That is as far as I've gone."
+
+"Then you'll have to do better. Just as soon as we emerge from
+behind those trees, we'll be a fair target. Four against twenty
+is 'most too much on an open plain."
+
+For several minutes no one spoke. It was Adrian who broke the
+silence.
+
+"I think I see a way, not only to save the train, but possibly to
+capture the bandits."
+
+The boys looked up in surprise.
+
+"Do you notice how the railroad curves in toward the hills just
+after it crosses the river bridge?" he continued, pointing out
+the place he meant.
+
+"Sure, we see it," from Billie.
+
+"Well, when we leave the river, instead of riding toward that
+bunch of trees, we'll ride the other way. That will bring us to
+the railroad track near the curve. Then we'll ride up the track.
+If we do not reach the station before the train leaves, we can
+flag it. There is sure to be at least half a dozen guards aboard.
+We will make ten. Most of the men aboard will have revolvers. The
+result will be that instead of the bandits taking the train by
+surprise, we will take them by surprise, and----"
+
+"And the army that takes the other by surprise wins," finished
+Billie, taking off his sombrero and bowing to Adrian in mock
+gravity. Then to Pedro, "Let the scout lead the way and the army
+will fall in behind, with the general at the head."
+
+A laugh followed Billie's words, and putting spurs to their
+horses, the four lads dashed down the mountain road upon their
+self-appointed mission, which was by no means the first daring
+adventure in which they had engaged; for the stories of the
+doings of the three American lads in the quartette have furnished
+interesting reading for thousands of American boys.
+
+It is because of their numerous adventures and their skill as
+horsemen that the trio has become known as the Broncho Rider
+Boys. Their names are Donald Mackay, Adrian Sherwood and William
+Stonewall Jackson Winkle, better known as "Broncho Billie." This
+latter name was given him some two years before when he went to
+visit his cousin Donald at the latter's home on the Keystone
+Ranch in Wyoming. It was not given him because he was such an
+expert rider, but because he could fall from his broncho pony
+easier than any boy in that section. Rotund in appearance, he was
+as jolly as he was fat, and his chief failing was his appetite.
+No matter what the hour, no one ever mentioned eats that Billie
+was not hungry.
+
+When he first came West he was supposed to be in poor health. It
+speedily developed that such was not the case. He was simply
+hungry. Months in the open air had enabled him to eat without
+fear and he was now about the most robust specimen of boy that
+any one ever saw.
+
+Donald, the oldest of the trio, was one of those level-headed
+chaps who had a knack of doing the right thing at the right time.
+His judgment had been proven good in many a tight place and under
+many thrilling conditions. As a result, he was generally looked
+up to as a leader by the others, although it must be admitted
+that Adrian was also a lad of sense and plenty of nerve.
+
+Adrian was the owner of a large Wyoming ranch, and one of the
+books which has proved most interesting to American boys is known
+as The Broncho Rider Boys on the Wyoming Trail, a story of how
+Adrian saved his property from being taken away from him by a
+dishonest uncle.
+
+About a year previous to the time this story opens, these three
+boys had been on a trip along the Rio Grande, when they fell in
+with Capt. June Peak and a company of Texas Rangers, who had been
+detailed to keep watch of the actions of a band of cattle
+smugglers. Sent across the river into Mexican territory on a
+secret mission, the Broncho Rider Boys had the good fortune to
+rescue Pedro Sanchez, the fourth member of the quartette, from
+the hands of a band of ruffians. Pedro turned out to be the son
+of Gen. Sanchez of the Mexican army, who was visiting an uncle in
+northern Mexico. After a series of thrilling adventures, which
+are told in full in The Broncho Rider Boys with the Texas
+Rangers, Donald, Adrian and Billie returned to their homes,
+promising to visit Pedro in the City of Mexico whenever the time
+was ripe.
+
+During the time that the boys were scouting in Mexico they had
+learned to speak Spanish quite well, and this knowledge had been
+so improved during their visit with Pedro that they now spoke the
+language well, an accomplishment which proved of much value to
+them later on.
+
+About a month prior to the day upon which this story opens, the
+three Americans had met by appointment at New York City and had
+come to Vera Cruz by boat and thence to the City of Mexico, where
+they found everything in a greatly disturbed condition because
+of the revolution which had been started some months previous by
+Gen. Carranza.
+
+It might be well right here to state briefly the history of the
+previous few months in Mexico, so that all may understand how it
+happened that none of the four boys had a very high opinion of
+Gen. Huerta, at that time dictator of Mexico.
+
+For nearly 35 years, up to 1911, Mexico had a peaceful existence
+under a republican form of government. During the last 32 years
+of that time Porfirio Diaz was president. Just prior to 1912 a
+revolution was begun against what had come to be called the Diaz
+government, and Diaz was compelled to flee from Mexico. The
+revolution was headed by Francisco Madero, who was then made
+president.
+
+In February of 1913 a revolution was started against President
+Madero by Felix Diaz, nephew of Porfirio Diaz, and the City of
+Mexico was attacked. At that time Gen. Huerta was in command of
+Madero's forces in the City of Mexico. He proved a traitor to
+Madero, went over to Diaz, arrested Madero and confined him in
+prison. Two days later, April 22, 1913, President Madero was shot
+by order of Huerta, who then declared himself dictator. At the
+same time he asked that the other nations of the earth recognize
+him as the head of the Mexican government, a thing which the
+government of the United States refused to do.
+
+March 26, 1913, another revolution was started, this time
+against Gen. Huerta by Gen. Carranza, governor of the state of
+Chihuahua. This revolution had been in progress more than a year
+when this story opens.
+
+Pedro's father, Gen. Sanchez, had been a friend of President
+Madero. When Madero was shot, Gen. Sanchez fled to Pachuca where
+he had a large hacienda and also owned vast interests in the
+silver mines at Real del Monte, some six miles up the mountains.
+Later, however, he was promised protection by Gen. Huerta, who
+was anxious to have the friendship of such a prominent man, and
+returned to the City of Mexico. It was some time after this,
+about March 1, 1914--when matters had quieted down in the City of
+Mexico--that the three American boys went to visit Pedro.
+
+A few days previous to the one on which we find the four boys
+headed for the railroad to foil the would-be train robbers, they
+had come to Pachuca, which is located some sixty miles from the
+City of Mexico, on horses furnished them by Gen. Sanchez, to see
+the mines and the beautiful mountains overlooking the plains of
+Quesco. Every day they took long rides in various directions, in
+spite of the unsettled condition of the country--a condition
+which compelled them always to go armed with their trusty Marlins
+and Colts--and that is how they happened to be on the Real road
+at such an opportune time.
+
+With these explanations, it is no wonder that the boys were keen
+for the adventure upon which they were now embarked.
+
+A sharp ride of fifteen minutes brought them to the river and
+into it the horses plunged. At places it was only knee deep and
+at other places where they were obliged to cross it was necessary
+for the horses to swim; but this was only fun for the Broncho
+Rider Boys.
+
+Half an hour after sighting the bandits, the boys halted on the
+railroad track, well secreted from their quarry by the curve
+before mentioned.
+
+"And none too soon," declared Donald as the sharp whistle of the
+engine was heard perhaps half a mile away.
+
+"How shall we flag her?" asked Pedro.
+
+"With that red bandana handkerchief on Billie's neck," replied
+Donald as he reached over and snatched the neckwear from its
+place.
+
+Springing from his horse, he ran up the track waving the red
+signal as he ran.
+
+A sharp blast from the whistle a couple of minutes later gave
+proof that the danger signal had been seen, and the grinding of
+the brakes told that the train was coming to a stop. Even before
+this was an accomplished fact the conductor swung himself from
+the front car and came running down the track to see what was the
+matter, while the guards covered the boys with their carbines.
+
+"What do you mean by stopping the train?" he demanded angrily.
+
+Donald explained in as few words as possible.
+
+The conductor signalled the guards to him and told them what
+Donald had said.
+
+"What had we better do?" asked the conductor.
+
+"We had better go back to Pachuca for help," replied the guards.
+
+"And let the Zapatistas escape!" exclaimed Billie hotly. "What do
+you want to do that for?"
+
+"We have only six guards," the conductor explained, "and----"
+
+"And that, with us, makes ten," interrupted Billie.
+
+The conductor regarded the boy with surprise.
+
+"Do you mean you will join us to help capture the bandits?"
+
+"What do you think we're here for?" asked Billie.
+
+"Yes," chimed in Adrian. "What do you suppose we stopped the
+train for?"
+
+"But even ten are no match for twenty or more," declared the
+guard.
+
+"Of course they are," said Donald, "if the twenty are taken by
+surprise."
+
+"Which they will not be if we don't act pretty quick," insisted
+Billie. "Come on! Let's go after them," and he climbed up onto
+the car.
+
+"That's what I say," said Pedro, following Billie's example.
+
+Without more words the others followed and the conductor gave the
+signal to go ahead.
+
+"How about the horses?" asked Donald, turning to Pedro.
+
+"They'll be all right; but if we capture the Zapatistas we'll
+have horses enough any way."
+
+"And if we don't," remarked Billie grimly, "there'll be some
+riderless horses any way."
+
+"Let us hope that they will not be the ones we have left behind,"
+said Donald gravely.
+
+
+
+
+CHAPTER II.
+
+A STRANGE MIX-UP.
+
+
+While the train was gathering headway the conductor and the
+guards rounded up all the men they could find on the train who
+were armed. There were more than a dozen, so that in point of
+numbers, the force on the train nearly equalled the Zapatistas.
+These were so stationed at the windows that they could give the
+would-be robbers a warm reception.
+
+"We must use some strategy," declared Adrian, "or we will simply
+succeed in killing a few and scaring away the others. That will
+not be a very brilliant deed."
+
+"No," from Donald, "but it will save the bullion. What's your
+plan?"
+
+"Well, I was thinking it would be a good plan to separate the
+train."
+
+"How?"
+
+"You can see it is all down grade from here to where the bandits
+are waiting for us."
+
+"Yes."
+
+"As soon as we get to running a good speed, Billie and I will go
+into the express car with the three guards. You and Pedro stay
+here with the other guards and the passengers. As we near the
+bandits, uncouple the train, put on the brakes and stop the
+coaches. We will rush by with the engine and express car, firing
+as we go----"
+
+"Which will be all right," interrupted Billie, "if they don't
+ditch the engine."
+
+Adrian's face fell.
+
+"I hadn't thought of that."
+
+"Well, you'd better."
+
+After a moment Adrian's face brightened.
+
+"They might better ditch the engine and express car than the
+whole train," he declared.
+
+"Right you are," from Donald. "If you and Billie are game enough
+to try it, I say it is the proper thing. If they ditch the
+engine, we will be back a ways and can run down to your
+assistance. If they don't ditch you, we will have them between
+two fires."
+
+"Just what I thought," replied Adrian. "How about it, Billie?"
+
+"I'm game. My head may be a little thick, but I can see just as
+far through a two-inch plank as the next one."
+
+"All right, then. Come on," and Adrian led the way into the car
+ahead, while Donald and Pedro stood by to uncouple as soon as
+they passed the clump of trees before alluded to.
+
+Almost at the same instant several sharp blasts from the whistle
+gave the danger signal, and Donald threw over the coupling lever
+and put on the brake. The coaches slowed quickly down, but the
+engine and express car dashed in between the horsemen stationed
+on either side of the track.
+
+Prepared for what they knew was coming, the engineer and fireman
+had thrown themselves down on the floor of the cab, while Adrian,
+Billie and the three guards poured a volley into the robbers as
+they passed and several horses lost their mounts.
+
+This fire was followed by a fusillade from the horsemen and a
+minute later the engine, striking an unspiked rail, rolled
+completely over into the ditch, wrenching itself clear from the
+express car, which, after bumping over the ties for several
+seconds, suddenly ceased its antics and glided smoothly along.
+
+As by a miracle it had run completely over the space from which
+the rail had been loosed and landed upon the good track, down
+which it now sped.
+
+So unexpected was the change from ties to track that Adrian and
+Billie were unable for a few moments to understand what had
+happened. Then Billie rushed to the door and seized the hand
+brake.
+
+"Grab hold and help stop this car," he yelled to Adrian, "or
+there is no knowing where we'll land."
+
+Adrian hastened to obey, but the wrench that had been given the
+car when the engine broke loose had put the brake out of
+commission and the car sped on.
+
+The three Mexican guards now appeared on the platform and gazed
+wildly up the track where they could see the fight going on
+between the bandits and their companions.
+
+"What shall we do, Seņor?" asked one of them.
+
+"Search me," from Billie. "How long is this grade?"
+
+"It is down hill all the way to Pitahaya."
+
+"How far is that?"
+
+"Ten kilometers from Pachuca."
+
+"That must be about three miles farther," said Adrian.
+
+"Correct," from Billie, "but unless it's a mighty steep up-grade
+the other side of Pita-what's-its-name, we're going so fast we'll
+not stop till we've run away past it."
+
+"Well, what of it? We can coast back, can't we?"
+
+The car gave a lurch to one side that almost threw the boys off
+the platform.
+
+"We're certainly going some," called Adrian. "Hang on!"
+
+And hang on they did until they dashed past the little station of
+Pitahaya and after several minutes began to slow down.
+
+"This is a little better," Adrian finally remarked as the car
+showed some sign of coming to a stop.
+
+"Yes, indeed," from Billie. "I suppose we'll come to a dead stop
+soon. Do you think she'll start back on her own hook, or shall we
+have to start her?"
+
+"We'll soon see," and see they did, for a couple of minutes later
+the car came to a stop.
+
+For some minutes the five occupants of the car waited to see if
+it would start back down the grade. When it did not they got off
+to decide what could be done.
+
+"It's a mighty steep hill," Billie ventured. "Looks as though the
+five of us ought to start it. Let's try."
+
+The five put their shoulders against the car and pushed with all
+their might, but it refused to budge.
+
+"If we only had a crowbar," said Adrian, "we could start it in a
+jiffy. Suppose some of you look in the car. There might be one
+there."
+
+The three Mexicans jumped to obey.
+
+Directly they appeared in the doorway with a large claw-bar in
+their hands.
+
+"Will this do?" asked one.
+
+"Sure! Throw it off," said Billie, "and I'll soon start the old
+caboose."
+
+Picking up the bar, Billie inserted the claw under one of the
+wheels while Adrian stood with his hand on the car rail ready to
+spring aboard.
+
+At the first attempt the claw slipped and nothing happened, but
+at the second attempt the wheels yielded a little.
+
+"This time she'll go," Billie called. "All aboard!"
+
+Adrian sprang onto the car as Billie bore down upon the bar and
+the wheels began to revolve.
+
+"Never mind the bar," cried Adrian as he saw that Billie was
+raising the implement to throw it onto the platform. "Jump
+aboard!"
+
+Billie started to obey, but the advice came too late. As he
+dropped the bar it struck one end of a tie, flopped over and hit
+him on the shin.
+
+"Wow!" he yelled, grabbing his ankle with both hands.
+
+"Never mind your leg," shouted Adrian. "Jump on or you'll be
+left."
+
+Billie tried to obey, but the car was now under headway and
+although he sprinted his best, he was soon left behind.
+
+Adrian started to jump off the car, but seeing his intention
+Billie called to him not to do it.
+
+"I'll get there some time," he called. "Just tell them I'm
+coming," and he stood in the middle of the track looking ruefully
+after the rapidly disappearing car.
+
+After some moments he picked up the claw-bar and threw it
+spitefully into the ditch beside the track, as much as to say,
+"Lay there! You're the cause of all the trouble." Then he started
+slowly after the car.
+
+In the meantime Adrian was flying as fast back toward Pachuca as
+he had been flying away from it only a few minutes before. It
+could not have been more than ten minutes altogether since the
+wreck of the engine and Adrian figured that if the grade were
+steep enough the car might gain momentum enough to carry it back
+to the scene of the trouble; but he had little hope that it
+would.
+
+When he shot through Pitahaya on his return trip, however, he saw
+that the car was going at a terrific rate of speed.
+
+"What do you think?" he asked one of the Mexicans. "Do you think
+we'll get all the way back?"
+
+"Cierto," was the reply. "When they first built this road they
+used to have mules haul the car to the top of this hill and then
+turn it loose and it would run almost to Pachuca. That was before
+it had any engines."
+
+Adrian looked at the man and winked one eye very slowly.
+
+"Seņor, it is true," spoke up another. "I was a guard at the
+time."
+
+Adrian could scarcely believe the statement, but he afterward
+learned that the men spoke the truth.
+
+"Well, then," he said, "we had better look to our arms, for we
+may need them. There is no knowing how this affair has turned
+out."
+
+The advice was well taken, for as they drew near the scene of the
+wreck, they saw that they were badly needed. More than a dozen
+horsemen were in sight at some distance from the wreck and with
+their long-range rifles were doing their best to pick off any one
+who showed his head.
+
+"Our party must be out of ammunition," suggested Adrian, "or they
+would give a better account of themselves."
+
+"Our carbines would not carry that far," explained one of the
+guards.
+
+"Our Marlins will," replied Adrian, and as he spoke there were
+two simultaneous flashes from two of the car windows and two of
+the bandits fell, one shot from his horse and the other with his
+horse shot under him.
+
+For a moment the other horsemen hesitated as to the course they
+should pursue and then, putting spurs to their horses, they
+dashed toward the train, just as the express car, having reached
+the end of the track, bumped onto the ties and came to a stop.
+
+"Now!" cried Adrian as the riders drew near, firing as they came,
+and four shots rang out.
+
+The volley from so unexpected a quarter took the horsemen
+completely by surprise, and they pulled up with a jerk. The
+action proved their undoing, for as they stood thus for a moment,
+they gave those in the train the opportunity they desired and the
+volley that followed turned four more riderless horses upon the
+plain.
+
+It was more than flesh and blood could stand, and the seven or
+eight remaining horsemen turned and fled, followed by at least
+three whistling bullets from as many Marlins.
+
+The fight was over and the bullion had been saved, but what of
+Broncho Billie, who had been left at the top of the hill four
+miles away?
+
+That was the first question asked by Donald when he greeted
+Adrian two minutes later.
+
+"Oh, he's all right," was the laughing reply. "He's just taking a
+little walk for his health."
+
+But when Billie failed to put in an appearance an hour later, the
+boys mounted their horses and started up the track to meet him,
+leading Billie's mount between them.
+
+
+
+
+CHAPTER III.
+
+BILLIE LOSES HIS NERVE.
+
+
+Broncho Billie was not a rapid walker. In fact, if there was any
+one thing in which Billie was not a success, it was walking. He
+could ride a horse all day, but when it came to depending upon
+his own legs as a means of locomotion, he was a dead failure.
+
+Therefore he walked slowly along, counting the ties as he went.
+
+"They certainly do lay 'em thick," he mused after some minutes.
+"Three hundred and one, three hundred and two, three hundred and
+three, three hundred and four, three hun----"
+
+He stopped short and looked behind him.
+
+"I sure thought I heard some one," he muttered. "It must have
+been a bird."
+
+He turned and started forward.
+
+"Let's see, where was I? Oh, yes, three hundred and five, three
+hundred and six, three hundred and----"
+
+Again he stopped, but did not turn around. Instead he stooped
+down as though to pick up a stone, which enabled him to look
+backward between his knees.
+
+He caught a movement in the grass at the edge of the right of
+way.
+
+"I thought so," he muttered. "Now to find out who it is, and what
+he wants."
+
+He picked up a small stone and threw it at a tall cactus which
+grew near the track some distance ahead.
+
+"Good shot," he said aloud as the stone hit the stalk. "I wonder
+if I could do it again."
+
+He stooped down and picked up another stone, taking a good look
+backward from his stooping position. There was not a movement to
+indicate the presence of a living thing.
+
+"This is getting on my nerves," the boy mused as he picked up
+several small stones and again walked forward. "I don't mind
+being followed by a white man, but I'm a whole lot leary of these
+greasers. They're bad enough when they're friendly."
+
+Then aloud, as he threw a couple of stones: "I'll never get
+anywhere if I don't make better time than this. I'll just sprint
+a few."
+
+Suiting the action to the word, he started on a run.
+
+Almost immediately he was aware of a soft pat-pat in his rear. He
+had heard a similar sound in the wilds of Wyoming and he
+recognized it at once.
+
+It was the footfall of a four-legged animal.
+
+"So!" he ejaculated. "I wonder what it is. If there were wolves
+down here I would say it was a wolf, but I don't believe there
+are." Then a minute later, "Well, whatever it is, I'm going to
+find out."
+
+He whipped out his automatic and turned suddenly.
+
+As before, not a single living thing was in sight, only in the
+grass a movement as before.
+
+Without a moment's aim, he fired a single shot at the spot. It
+was an act born of fear and Billie knew it, but for the life of
+him he could not have done otherwise, so nervous had he become.
+
+The report was followed by a cry of pain and an instant later
+there came running directly toward him out of the tall grass a
+figure so weird that Billie stood as one paralysed.
+
+The figure was that of a man not more than two feet high, with
+long arms and a head of diminutive size. While it stood upright
+at times, at others it came forward on all fours. To Billie it
+seemed a cross between a man and a monkey.
+
+Gathering his wits in an instant, Billie would have fired
+again--in fact, raised his revolver to do so, when the strange
+creature fell to its knees and raised its hands in supplication.
+
+"By George!" exclaimed the lad as he stood with lowered weapon.
+"What kind of a thing is this? I wonder if it can talk?"
+
+Then as he took a step toward it: "I'm not going to hurt you.
+Come here."
+
+The creature arose to its feet and came slowly toward him. As it
+did so Billie noticed that blood was running from a wound in its
+scalp.
+
+"Poor thing," he said. "That must have been where the bullet hit
+him. It was a close shave."
+
+"Can you talk?" he finally asked.
+
+The strange creature turned its head to one side and eyed him
+closely, but no sound came from its lips.
+
+"It must be an ape of some sort," mused the boy; "but how did it
+become so tame?"
+
+He slowly returned his automatic to its holster, thinking in the
+meantime how he could dress the creature's wound; but no sooner
+had his hand left his weapon than the ape sprang at him with the
+utmost fury. It landed on his shoulder, wound its legs about his
+neck, and with its long arms made a wild grab for the revolver.
+
+Then began a strange and terrible struggle for the possession of
+the weapon. Even as he fought the beast, Billie realized that in
+some manner the ape had learned to fear firearms, but whether it
+had ever learned to use them he could not venture a guess. He
+felt certain if he could draw the weapon and point it at the ape,
+it would at once cringe in fear. What might happen if the ape
+should get possession of it, he could only imagine.
+
+For a youth of eighteen, there were few whom Billie met that were
+his match physically, but this diminutive man-animal held him as
+in a vise. Billie exerted every ounce of his strength to free
+himself from the terrible hold, while the ape fought even more
+fiercely to retain its grip and to gain possession of the weapon.
+
+It was a weird and fearful struggle waged there in the stillness
+of the tropical woodland--a stillness broken only by the
+occasional wild scream of the ape, or the hoarse breathing of the
+boy as he fought to free himself from that horrible grasp.
+
+The struggle must have lasted for two or three minutes--to Billie
+it seemed hours--when by a sudden wrench the lad managed to free
+his left arm sufficiently to get the beast by the throat. For an
+instant it loosed its hold on his right arm and that act decided
+the battle.
+
+Finding his right arm free, Billie seized his revolver and
+without drawing it from the holster pulled the trigger.
+
+At the sound of the shot, the ape uttered a plaintive cry,
+relaxed its hold upon the lad and fell upon its knees on the
+ground with its hands raised in supplication as previously.
+
+"I ought to shoot you," declared the lad between his gasps for
+breath as he drew the weapon from its holster and pointed it at
+the animal, "but I won't. I'll take you with me and maybe I can
+sell you for enough to pay me for the scare you've given me. Now,
+march!"
+
+He pointed with his finger down the track, but the beast would
+not stir.
+
+"Don't you intend to do what I tell you?"
+
+The animal perked up his head and kept his eye upon the revolver.
+
+"Well," exclaimed Billie as he drew a long breath, "this is the
+limit. I can't make you mind and I won't hurt you. I guess the
+only thing I can do is to go and leave you."
+
+Suiting the action to the word, Billie turned and started down
+the track, his revolver still in his hand.
+
+He had not gone more than a dozen steps, before he heard the soft
+pat-pat behind him, and on looking back could see nothing but the
+waving grass to indicate the whereabouts of his erstwhile
+assailant.
+
+"So I am to be followed, am I? Well, all right." Then, as an
+afterthought: "I wonder how I can catch him when I want him. I
+wonder if this will do," and he raised his weapon and pointed it
+toward the moving grass.
+
+With the same plaintive cry which Billie had come to recognize
+as one of fear, the animal ran toward him and sank to his knees.
+
+Billie smiled.
+
+"It's all right, old chap. As long as I know how to handle you,
+why you can follow me right back to the train."
+
+Again he started down the track at a brisk walk, it having just
+occurred to him that there might be something doing at the other
+end of his journey.
+
+Twenty minutes later he reached the station at Pitahaya where he
+had expected to find Adrian and the three Mexicans awaiting him,
+but, as we know, they had gone on to the scene of the wreck. Not
+realizing just what had happened, but always on the alert for the
+unexpected, Billie, therefore, began an inspection of the
+station.
+
+It did not take him long to discover that Pitahaya was little
+more than a siding with a one-room building, which was used as a
+freight house and a waiting room. It did not even boast of a
+station master.
+
+"There must be some reason for having a building here," he mused.
+"There must be some sort of a settlement around somewhere. But
+what's that to me? I might as well be jogging along towards
+Pachuca."
+
+Then he bethought him of the ape, which he had no mind to lose
+after his exciting experience. But the animal was nowhere to be
+seen.
+
+"I wonder if I could raise him with a shot," soliloquized
+Billie.
+
+He raised his weapon, which he still carried in his hand, and
+fired aimlessly, while he turned his eyes in various directions,
+but there was nothing to be seen.
+
+"Oh, well," he thought, "what's the difference? He'd just be a
+nuisance anyway. I might as well be trudging along."
+
+He jumped off the station platform and proceeded down the track,
+filling the magazine to his automatic as he went. Then having
+finished the task, he returned it to his holster and once more
+began counting the ties.
+
+"One, two, three, four, five, six----"
+
+Bing! And a stone whistled by his head.
+
+Billie turned, and as he did so a second stone from the same
+source struck him on the temple, and he fell to the ground.
+
+A second later the ape sprang from a palm beside the station and
+ran toward him, stopping every few feet to see if the lad would
+rise.
+
+When within a few feet of the prostrate lad the animal made a
+leap and landed upon his body. In another instant it had gained
+possession of Billie's weapon, which it examined curiously for a
+moment, ere it sprang away and stationed itself some two rods
+distant, where it sat watching with the weapon aimed directly at
+him.
+
+For perhaps five minutes the two retained their relative
+positions and then Billie began to regain consciousness. Several
+times he moved uneasily and then he suddenly sat up and looked
+around.
+
+"I wonder what happened," he finally thought, and then he became
+conscious of a pain in his head.
+
+He raised his hand to the aching spot and his fingers encountered
+a big lump.
+
+The truth came upon him like a flash. He dropped his hand to his
+holster, and sprang to his feet.
+
+As he did so he caught sight of the ape and found himself looking
+into the business end of his own weapon.
+
+With a yell he dropped to the ground as though the expected had
+happened.
+
+But when no shot followed, he began to regain his wits and lay
+still trying to figure out once more just how much the ape might
+know about the use of the weapon.
+
+He remembered the old saying that a gun was a dangerous weapon
+without lock, stock or barrel, because a man killed his wife
+with the ramrod; and so he figured that an animal which had
+intelligence enough to throw a stone and knock him senseless,
+might have sense enough to fire a revolver.
+
+"If I only knew something about his history," soliloquized
+Billie, "I might be able to guess how much he knew. But he is a
+perfect stranger to me. I don't even know his name."
+
+After several minutes and nothing had happened, Billie decided to
+make some effort to get away.
+
+"I might as well be shot as to be prisoner to an ape," he
+thought, and so he arose to a sitting posture and surveyed the
+scene.
+
+There sat the ape as before, with the automatic pointed at
+Billie, but with a puzzled look upon its face. When the lad
+finally arose, the ape appeared still more puzzled and at length,
+turning the weapon away from Billie, looked into the muzzle.
+
+"That settles it," exclaimed Billie. "He doesn't know how to fire
+it. I'll go and take it away from him."
+
+He started toward the animal, which at once pointed the revolver
+in Billie's direction. There came a sharp report and a bullet
+whizzed by the boy's head.
+
+"Worse and more of it," exclaimed Billie. "He doesn't know how to
+use the thing, but he's liable to shoot me as long as I stay in
+range. I'll just make myself scarce."
+
+Stooping down, he picked up a good-sized stone and hurled it at
+the ape and then, without waiting to see the result of his throw,
+jumped into the jungle which lined both sides of the track,
+determined to make a detour and if possible lose his unpleasant
+companion.
+
+He had not run far before he realized that the ape was following,
+but this he did not mind. There were plenty of trees between
+them, and he felt sure he would soon be able to reach some sort
+of a habitation, when he suddenly found himself on the edge of a
+deep basin into which he plunged before he was able to gain his
+equilibrium.
+
+
+
+
+CHAPTER IV.
+
+THE ROSARIO VIEJO.
+
+
+To be suddenly pitched head-foremost down a rocky declivity into
+a mass of prickly pear bushes and other tropical brambles is by
+no means pleasant; and as a result Billie was not in the best of
+humor when he picked himself up and looked to the top of the
+60-foot embankment down which he had slid.
+
+"It's a wonder they wouldn't hang out a red light when they dig a
+hole like this," he declared angrily, "and not let a fellow most
+break his neck, to say nothing of scratching his eyes out! This
+is worse than a subway cave-in."
+
+He pulled himself together and surveyed his surroundings.
+
+The basin looked very much like an old quarry--so old that the
+shrubbery on the sides had grown into good-sized trees, and the
+whole place was covered with herbage of one sort or another. In
+one corner of the excavation, which must have covered some two
+acres, there was the ruin of an adobe house, while near the
+center was a stone structure made of four stone pillars about
+twenty feet apart and roofed over with two huge stone slabs, set
+so as to form a gable roof. Except for its size, it had the
+appearance of the old-fashioned well houses, which were once so
+common in New England.
+
+"It's a tough-looking place, whatever it is," was Billie's
+comment. "I wish the fellows were here."
+
+And then for the first time in more than half an hour Billie
+bethought him of his companions. His strange experience with the
+ape had driven all other thoughts out of his mind.
+
+"By George!" he exclaimed aloud, "I wonder how the fight with the
+bandits came out?"
+
+Almost as in answer to his words, there appeared upon the edge of
+the excavation into which he had fallen, but upon the opposite
+side from that on which he had taken his slide, ten horsemen,
+three of whom carried across the pommel of their saddles the
+bodies of three men. They halted and surveyed the basin
+critically. Then, single file, they slowly descended into the
+quarry.
+
+Billie recognized them the minute he laid eyes upon them. They
+were the remnant of the bandit band, and the bodies carried
+across the pommels of the saddles were three of their wounded
+companions.
+
+"This is no place for me," commented Billie as he kept himself
+well hidden behind a giant cactus. "It reminds me of Ali Baba and
+the forty thieves. I hope I have better luck than Ali Baba."
+
+As though to carry out the trend of Billie's thoughts, the
+horsemen halted near the ruin of the adobe house before mentioned
+and two of their number dismounted and entered. A minute later
+the rest of the band rode into the ruins and disappeared,
+followed by the riderless horses of the two dismounted men.
+
+Billie rubbed his eyes.
+
+"I wonder if I'm getting dippy," he muttered. "Maybe that crack
+on the side of my head has made me see things."
+
+He sat down to think.
+
+"If I only had some kind of a gun," he mused, "I wouldn't feel so
+everlasting helpless. Confound that ape! If I ever see him again
+I'll break his neck."
+
+Then, after a moment's thought: "I don't believe the beast would
+give up the chase. He's likely to show up at any minute.
+Something has to be done."
+
+The boy scanned the edge of the embankment, if perchance he might
+see anything of his persecutor. There was nothing in sight and he
+decided to go on a tour of inspection. As quietly as possible he
+stole along the side of the excavation toward the spot where the
+ruin stood, when once more he had that sense of being watched.
+
+Turning his head quickly, he saw the ape about twenty paces to
+one side aiming the revolver at him.
+
+Then Billie lost his temper.
+
+"This thing has got to stop," he exclaimed. "I'll be doggoned if
+I'm going to stand for it any longer."
+
+He ran quickly toward the ape, and fell on his knees as he had
+seen the ape do, and raised his hands in supplication.
+
+The animal quirked its head and fairly beamed with pleasure as it
+slowly advanced and stood beside him.
+
+But its simian smile was quickly turned to surprise, for like a
+flash Billie snatched the weapon from its hand and aimed it at
+the animal's head.
+
+"Now," he said, "you come with me."
+
+The animal made no move.
+
+"We'll see whether you will come or not," said Billie, and
+stooping down he broke off a good-sized sprout from a live oak.
+"Now, march!" and he raised the whip.
+
+It was the one thing needed. The beast had evidently felt the
+touch of a whip before, for it raised its arm and danced about as
+though going through some circus maneuver.
+
+"The first mystery is solved," laughed Billie. "Now for the
+second one. Come on, Ab," unconsciously naming his companion
+after the hero of Stanley Waterloo's famous story.
+
+The ape seemed to know what was wanted and the two proceeded
+slowly and silently toward the ruin.
+
+"I've been in a whole lot of queer scrapes," mused Billie as he
+crept along, "but this is surely the queerest--tramping around
+with an ape to solve the disappearance of ten cutthroats. I hope
+I wake up pretty soon."
+
+But it was no dream, as Billie was soon to discover.
+
+Arriving at the ruined building, Billie crawled along by the wall
+until he came directly under what had once been a window. Then,
+after listening a long time and hearing no sound, he ventured to
+raise his head and peep in.
+
+The old ruin was as empty as though there were not a living
+person within fifty miles.
+
+"Great Scott!" gasped the boy. "What do you think of that! Now I
+know I'm dreaming!"
+
+He turned to the ape, waving his whip.
+
+"Here you, Ab," he said, "go in there and see what you can find."
+
+He pointed to the window and the animal sprang lightly in and a
+minute later perched itself on one of the decaying rafters.
+
+"If there were any one around, they would certainly see Ab,"
+reasoned Billie, "and would make some noise about it. I guess
+it's safe to go in."
+
+He crawled around to the door and entered. There were the tracks
+of the horses, but the horses had disappeared as completely as
+though they had been swallowed up.
+
+Billie called softly to Ab, who did not see fit to obey until he
+waved his whip. Then the animal sprang lightly to the ground.
+Billie showed him the tracks.
+
+"Where do you suppose they went?" he asked.
+
+Ab blinked his eyes and, for the first time since Billie had
+become acquainted with him, made a noise in his throat, much like
+the voice of a child.
+
+Billie smiled in spite of himself.
+
+"I'm glad you've decided to become sociable," he said, "What do
+you make of this? You look as though you could think."
+
+Ab blinked his eyes stupidly and then suddenly became alert as
+though listening.
+
+"What is it?" asked Billie, impressed by the ape's attitude.
+
+For a reply Ab sprang through the window and made straight for
+the structure in the middle of the quarry. In another instant he
+was on the roof.
+
+Billie followed as fast as he could and as he stepped beneath the
+roof started back in the utmost amazement, for up through what
+looked like a huge well there came the distinct sound of human
+voices.
+
+For several seconds he stood as one in a spell and then he
+started forward to peer into the well, but on a second thought
+did not.
+
+"I couldn't see anything if I did," he thought, "but any one
+looking up could see me. I'll do better by listening."
+
+The words came to him almost as distinctly as though he were in
+the same room with the speakers, and there was no longer any
+doubt that the voices were those of the Zapatistas who had
+attempted to rob the train.
+
+From their conversation Billie learned the outcome of the fight,
+and he was greatly amused at the attempt of the bandits to figure
+out who had betrayed them. Each one had a different theory, but
+all agreed that there must have been a traitor in the band. It
+was all the lad could do to prevent himself from calling out to
+them, just to see what effect his words would have.
+
+After discovering from the conversation that the bandits felt
+themselves perfectly secure where they were and that they were
+likely to stay there for some time, he finally decided to get
+back to the railroad and thence to Pachuca and give the alarm.
+
+Acting upon the decision, he made his way across the basin to
+where he had slid down the embankment and slowly and laboriously
+climbed to the top, followed by Ab.
+
+Retracing his steps, he soon reached the railroad and looking
+down the track toward Pachuca gave a shout of delight as he saw
+his three chums approaching, leading a fourth horse between them.
+
+"Just in time," he said, as they drew near enough to exchange
+greetings.
+
+"Just in time for what?" queried the others as one.
+
+"To capture the bandits that you let escape."
+
+"How do you know that we let any escape?" asked Adrian.
+
+"I'm a mind reader."
+
+The other three looked incredulous.
+
+"Oh, it's a fact," declared Billie. "I can tell you all about the
+fight just as well as though I had been there," and he proceeded
+to prove his words.
+
+"Some one told you," said Adrian.
+
+"Sure," laughed Billie, thoroughly enjoying the perplexity of
+his companions. "My friend Ab. Come here, old man, and be
+introduced," and Billie waved his whip, which he still carried.
+
+With a little cry the ape sprang to his side, an act which only
+added to the amazement of the others.
+
+"Allow me," said Billie with mock gravity, "to introduce my
+friend Mr. Ab from No-man's-land. Ab, these are the rest of the
+Broncho Rider Boys. How would you like to join the company?"
+
+Ab scratched his ear and looked wise.
+
+"Oh, come," interrupted Donald. "Tell us what's up and what we
+must do to capture the rest of this band of cutthroats."
+
+Thinking that he had carried the joke far enough, and realizing
+also that he might be wasting valuable time, Billie related his
+adventure, describing the place he had discovered.
+
+"It is the Rosario viejo," said Pedro, as soon as Billie had
+finished his story.
+
+"What's that?" asked Billie.
+
+"An abandoned mine. It is called the old Rosario to distinguish
+it from the new Rosario, which is now one of the most valuable
+mines in this region. The station at Pitahaya was built
+especially to serve it."
+
+"I see," said Billie. "Where is the new mine?"
+
+"Down there," and Pedro pointed to a trail leading in the
+opposite direction. "It is just about as far from the station on
+that side of the railroad as the old Rosario is on this."
+
+"Don't you think we had better summon some assistance from the
+mine workers?" asked Adrian.
+
+"They may be in cahoots with the bandits," laughed Donald. "I
+have lost my confidence in about every one in this bandit-ridden
+land."
+
+"I don't blame you," said Pedro, "and I hope the day will soon
+come when all this trouble will be over."
+
+"Then you agree with me that we should tackle the bandits alone,
+do you?" asked Donald.
+
+"It is the only safe way."
+
+"All right, then," exclaimed Billie. "Let's be off. If we use a
+little strategy, I'm sure we shall succeed."
+
+He turned to mount the horse, which a minute before had been
+standing a few feet away, but it was gone.
+
+"Where's my horse?" he cried.
+
+The others turned in surprise.
+
+"It certainly was here a minute ago," declared Adrian.
+
+"Then it can't be very far away," insisted Donald.
+
+"It's so far I can't see it," replied Billie.
+
+"There it goes!" shouted Pedro, who had jumped his mount across
+the track as soon as he heard Billie's cry.
+
+The others looked in the direction indicated, and sure enough,
+there went the horse about a quarter of a mile away on a dead run
+and on its back was Billie's late acquaintance, Ab.
+
+"By George," exclaimed Billie angrily as he snatched a rifle from
+Donald's holster, "I've had enough of that ape. I'll put a stop
+to his foolishness," and he leveled the rifle.
+
+But ere he could press the trigger, there was a report from
+another quarter and the horse and its rider hit the dust.
+
+
+
+
+CHAPTER V.
+
+WHEN THE OLD WAS NEW.
+
+
+A cry of astonishment went up from the quartette and then they
+stood silent to see what would be the next move.
+
+They did not have long to wait, for presently a tall, gaunt
+figure strode out of the brambles some yards from the fallen
+horse and uttered a hoarse shout, upon which Ab sprang from the
+spot where he had fallen and ran toward the newcomer, giving vent
+to shrill cries as he ran.
+
+"That must be his master," muttered Billie. "I'm glad I didn't
+shoot the little beggar."
+
+"I'm more interested in the master than in the monkey," said
+Donald. "He is evidently not a Mexican. Who and what do you
+suppose he is?"
+
+"An animal trainer from a circus," replied Adrian.
+
+"There are no circuses in this part of the world," commented
+Billie.
+
+"If he only had a hand organ instead of a gun, I could place
+him," laughed Donald. "What do you make out of him, Pedro?"
+
+"It's a _saltimbanco_."
+
+"What is that?"
+
+"A man who goes about making people laugh."
+
+"Oh!" from Adrian. "You mean a mountebank?"
+
+"I think so."
+
+"And this chap," ventured Billie, "isn't satisfied with making a
+monkey of himself, but carries a real one with him."
+
+Pedro laughed. "That seems to be it."
+
+"I'm sorry he killed the horse," said Donald. "We need him."
+
+"Perhaps he didn't," suggested Adrian. "Suppose we ride over and
+see."
+
+Suiting the action to the word, the boys rode out into the open,
+much to the newcomer's surprise and consternation.
+
+"Seņors," he exclaimed, as he came running toward them, "I am
+sorry I had to hurt your horse; but I couldn't lose my brother."
+
+"Your what?" asked Billie.
+
+"My brother. My little brother. Could I, Ambrosio?" and he patted
+the ape on the cheek.
+
+"What do you call him?" asked Donald.
+
+"I call him Ambrosio because he is so sweet."
+
+"Bah!" exclaimed Billie. "I called him Ab, but he ought to be
+named Diabolo. But how about the horse?"
+
+"I am afraid I have rendered him quite useless for the present,
+Seņor. I may have broken his leg."
+
+An examination of the fallen animal revealed the fact that while
+the leg was not splintered, it was so badly injured that the
+animal was quite useless.
+
+"Have you far to go, Seņors?" queried the mountebank.
+
+"Only as far as the Rosario viejo for the present," answered
+Adrian. "After that----"
+
+"After that," interrupted Billie, "we may not want to go
+anywhere."
+
+The mountebank looked at Billie questioningly.
+
+"That's what I mean," reiterated Billie. "We are going there to
+capture a band of cutthroats, but we may have a fight."
+
+The man made a grimace, which was intended for a smile.
+
+"I understand. Can I be of any service?"
+
+Donald eyed him suspiciously.
+
+"What do you think?" he asked.
+
+"You may have noticed how I stopped the runaway," he remarked.
+
+"Very neatly."
+
+"Sure," from Billie. "It was a short stop."
+
+"I perceive that you are an American. I am also a fan."
+
+"What!" from the three Americans.
+
+"True. I am even worse. I formerly shot the pill in one of the
+bush leagues. I aspired to a place in the box of one of the major
+league clubs, but instead I joined the Madero revolution. I had
+all the sport I wanted and finding my brother in this forsaken
+land, I joined him as a public entertainer. Shall we give you a
+sample of our performance?"
+
+"Not now," from Donald. "Let's go and round up this bunch of
+revolutionists first."
+
+"But why?" queried the mountebank. "To-morrow they may be the
+government."
+
+The boys looked at each other with an expression that said as
+plainly as words: "True! We never thought of that."
+
+"Now, I have a better plan," continued the mountebank. "Let's go
+and entertain the revolutionists. Let's be neutral."
+
+"I'm afraid we are already belligerents," laughed Adrian. "We
+have had one brush with them."
+
+The mountebank heaved a sigh.
+
+"Of course, if you have declared war, we shall have to fight to a
+finish, unless," with a grin, "we can intrench."
+
+"It is they who are intrenched," explained Billie. "They are at
+the bottom of the old mine, although I don't know how they got
+there."
+
+"So," laughed the mountebank. "Suppose we go and find out."
+
+Arrived at the shaft house, for that is what the gable-roofed
+building was, the boys and their new-found friend approached and
+listened to the sound of voices which still arose to the top of
+the shaft.
+
+Evidently considering themselves free and safe, the bandits were
+preparing their evening meal, for it was now well on toward
+sunset. They were singing and joking as though they had not just
+lost half or two-thirds their number.
+
+From a few remarks made now and then, it appeared that they
+proposed on the following day to recruit the band up to its
+former strength.
+
+"That is the thing we must prevent," declared Donald.
+
+"A very easy thing," said the mountebank, "if we had enough
+provisions to remain here for twenty-four hours, or more."
+
+"How so?" asked Billie.
+
+"Why, they will doubtless send out two or three to do the
+recruiting. We can capture them as they leave the ruins."
+
+Billie glanced at the man from under his broad-rimmed sombrero as
+he asked: "How did you know they came out through the ruins?"
+
+The mountebank smiled.
+
+"Now, don't go to mistrusting me, young fellow, for I'm on the
+level. But I've been in this place before, and I know that the
+only way to where your friends down there are camping is through
+the ruins."
+
+"Have you ever been down there?"
+
+"Yes. They are only about sixty feet below the ground, in a
+chamber which was originally a gallery in the mine. The shaft
+over which this house is built is over two hundred feet deep."
+
+"I'd like to explore it," remarked Adrian.
+
+"Do you think you have the nerve?" and the stranger bent upon him
+a penetrating gaze.
+
+Billie laughed softly.
+
+"Say, stranger," he finally said. "I guess you never heard of the
+Broncho Rider Boys. We've got the nerve to do anything that any
+other human being dare do."
+
+"Then we'll get rid of these bandits in short notice," declared
+the mountebank emphatically. "You are just the chaps I have been
+looking for."
+
+He leaned over the mouth of the shaft and gave a shrill whistle.
+
+In an instant all was silent below.
+
+Half a minute later he repeated the whistle thrice.
+
+There was a clatter below of arms and accoutrements.
+
+"Over behind those big cactus with you, quick," was the next
+command. "If you insist on fighting these men later, you can.
+Now let's get rid of them."
+
+For just a moment the boys hesitated, but there was something in
+the man's manner that seemed to force obedience and they obeyed.
+
+They were not a moment too soon, for they had no more than
+secreted themselves than the back wall of the ruin flew open and
+the men rode out. Of those who had been at the mouth of the shaft
+only a few moments before, only the mountebank with his ape was
+in sight.
+
+"What is it?" asked one of the band, riding up to him.
+
+"Guard the track at the summit. Let no train pass, even if you
+have to tear up the track."
+
+"By whose order?"
+
+The mountebank made a mysterious sign with his left hand.
+
+"_Bueno!_" from the horseman. "Close up the doors and care for
+the wounded," and putting spurs to his horse, he led the bandits
+from the basin.
+
+As soon as they were out of sight, the mountebank summoned the
+boys to the shaft house by a wave of his hand.
+
+"Now," he said, "you'll have a chance to test your nerve, and we
+must work rapidly to get where we wish to go before dark."
+
+He took from a crude knapsack which he wore upon his shoulders a
+coil of cord about half the size of a lead pencil, but evidently
+of much strength. Then seizing the ape, he fastened one end of
+the cord to the belt about the animal's body, and despite its
+unwillingness to be thus treated began to lower it into the
+shaft.
+
+Totally unable to account for his actions, the boys stood
+speechless, watching the operations.
+
+After some minutes, the cord slackened.
+
+"He's reached the bottom," was the information vouchsafed. Then a
+moment later: "Help me to pull him up, one of you."
+
+Billie hastened to lend a hand and in a short time the head of
+the ape appeared above the edge of the shaft. In his hand he held
+one end of a good-sized rope, which the mountebank took and tied
+around one of the stone pillars which supported the roof.
+
+"Now, then," he said, "we are ready to descend into the old mine.
+Which one of you will go first?"
+
+The boys looked at each other, but there was no reply until
+Donald asked:
+
+"Why should we go down at all?"
+
+"Why," was the somewhat quizzical reply, "to show your nerve."
+
+"Unless there is some good reason other than that, there are
+plenty of ways to show our nerve without lowering ourselves to
+the bottom of an old mine."
+
+"There is a good reason," was the reply.
+
+"Then tell us. If it is good, there can be no objection."
+
+"The object of this descent," said the stranger calmly, "is to
+see if we cannot solve the mystery of the abandonment of the
+mine."
+
+"Have you ever been down?" asked Billie.
+
+"Often."
+
+"There is no foul gas at the bottom?"
+
+"Not now, as you may see by the condition of Ambrosio, who has
+been clear to the bottom."
+
+"Then I am willing to be the first to descend; but first I must
+know more about you than I do."
+
+"What difference does that make? You will have three friends here
+with me. They are all armed and I can see they know how to use
+their weapons. I cannot possibly harm you. I will be the third to
+descend. I assure you that the descent and the ascent are
+comparatively easy for athletic young chaps, as the sides of the
+shaft are very uneven. By the aid of this rope you can come up
+almost as easily as you would climb a ladder. The adventure is
+well worth your while."
+
+"And you won't tell us who you are?"
+
+"I have already told you. I am an American soldier of fortune. My
+name, if that means anything to you, is Francis Strong, and I
+have assumed this character of a mountebank solely for the
+purpose of going about the country without being molested. What I
+hope to do, is of no interest to any one but myself."
+
+It was a straightforward statement and the boys saw no reason to
+doubt its truthfulness.
+
+"All right, then," exclaimed Billie. "Here goes!"
+
+He grasped the rope and lowered himself over the side. It was as
+Strong had said and in a very few minutes he found himself at the
+bottom. He could see nothing except the dim light at the mouth of
+the shaft.
+
+Giving the rope a vigorous shake, as had been agreed upon, he saw
+another figure begin to descend, and in a short time Pedro stood
+beside him. Strong was next to descend, then came Ambrosio, and
+after him Adrian and Donald in the order named--Donald having
+determined to be the last, that he might be sure that everything
+was safe above ground.
+
+"I should have given you this," was Strong's first remark upon
+alighting at Billie's side, and he drew from his pocket an
+electric torch. "But it slipped my mind."
+
+"We all have them in our trunk in the City of Mexico," replied
+Billie, "but I doubt if either of us has one with him."
+
+"This is sufficient, for I shall light some torches I have
+prepared as soon as we are ready for our work."
+
+When Donald had descended, Strong led the way through a lateral
+about thirty or forty feet, at the end of which another vertical
+shaft had been sunk. Around the mouth of this Strong had set a
+number of torches, which he now proceeded to light. By their
+glare it was possible to see part way down the hole.
+
+"The thing I hope to find," explained Strong, "is at the bottom
+of that hole, if it exists at all."
+
+"What is that?" asked Billie.
+
+"I think I can best answer your question," was the reply, "by
+reading you a translation of a paper which is said to have been
+found in the shaft above, where the bandits have made their
+rendezvous. How it came into my possession, matters not. I
+believe there are now enough of us here to prove or disprove its
+truthfulness, unless some one has been here before us."
+
+Seating himself on a jutting boulder, Strong took from his
+pocket a paper, which he read as follows under the flickering
+torchlight:
+
+  "Being about to leave this world, I desire to obtain forgiveness
+  for the great and only crime of my life, hence this confession.
+
+  "There were five of us. Names do not matter. They were my fellow
+  workmen. We had been entrusted with the output of the Rosario for
+  the year and had promised to guard it with our lives. We heard
+  the soldiers of Maximilian coming. We were not enough to
+  withstand them. We determined to hide the treasure in the western
+  shaft. We carried it to the edge and threw it in. My four
+  companions went down to cover it over with dirt, which I brought
+  from the other shaft and gave them, shovel by shovel. A mad idea
+  seized me. If they were dead, no one but I would know the hiding
+  place of the treasure. I would kill them; but how? I glanced
+  about. Great pieces of rock were on every hand. Without stopping
+  to consider the foulness of the deed I rolled a huge piece to the
+  mouth of the shaft and pushed it in. There was a cry of terror
+  and I heard a voice call out to know what had happened. I said a
+  piece of rock had broken loose and asked what damage it had done.
+  Only one replied. The others had been stricken down. Madly I
+  pushed over another rock and then another and still another. Then
+  there was silence and I fled. The soldiers found me unconscious
+  at the bottom of the shaft. Ere I became conscious, Maximilian
+  was no more. When I returned hither, the mine had been abandoned.
+  Here I have lived for years alone with my misery. Now I die. May
+  God forgive me.
+
+                                                    JOSÉ RODRIGUEZ.
+
+
+
+
+CHAPTER VI.
+
+A FEARFUL EXPERIENCE.
+
+
+"Well?" queried Donald when Strong had finished reading the
+paper, "what are we going to do about it?"
+
+"We are going to find out, if we can, whether José Rodriguez told
+the truth, and if he did, whether any one else has tried to prove
+it."
+
+"What do you think of it, Pedro?" asked Billie, indicating the
+opening at their feet.
+
+"Exactly."
+
+"Have you ever been down in it?" asked Adrian of Strong.
+
+"No! I did not feel equal to the task and I was afraid to ask
+help of any of these cutthroats."
+
+"What do you think of it, Pedro?" asked Billie, turning to the
+Mexican lad, who had made no comment whatever.
+
+"It's an old tale," was the reply, "this story of the Rosario
+viejo. I have heard it many times and I presume this shaft has
+been explored by every prospector in this section. In my opinion
+it is a huge hoax."
+
+At Pedro's words, Strong's face became ashen.
+
+"Are you telling the truth?" he asked hoarsely.
+
+"Indeed I am. My father knows of several who have searched the
+place and nothing has ever been found."
+
+Strong drew a long breath and passed his hand over his face.
+
+"I have believed it true," he finally said, "ever since I first
+came into possession of this paper. There is something about it
+that rings true and I have counted upon finding sufficient wealth
+to enable me to achieve a long cherished plan. If what you say,"
+turning to Pedro, "is true, my chance of attaining my ambition is
+very slim."
+
+"I'm sorry, sir, but if I had known for certain what your object
+was in coming down here I might have saved you the trouble.
+Isn't there any other way you might obtain the money you wish?"
+
+"If there is, I don't know it."
+
+"Pedro may be right," spoke up Billie suddenly, "but I am in
+favor of making an inspection of our own, now that we are here.
+What do you say, Don?"
+
+"I'm with you." Then to Strong: "How are we to get to the
+bottom?"
+
+Strong reached over and from behind a nearby boulder produced
+another bundle of rope.
+
+"I had intended making a rope ladder," he said.
+
+"All right, then," from Donald, "a rope ladder it shall be."
+
+The boys set to work and in the course of an hour had made a rope
+ladder more than fifty feet in length. Lowering it into the
+shaft, it seemed to reach to the bottom and Billie started to go
+down, but Strong prevented him.
+
+"I shall go first," he said. "If there is any danger from
+poisonous gas, or from reptiles, I shall take the risk. You boys
+have parents and homes. I have no one. If I should suffer any
+mishap, do not attempt to rescue me. It would not be worth
+while."
+
+"Nothing will happen," declared Adrian. "I have a hunch and my
+hunches are usually right."
+
+The rope having been properly fastened and warded off the side by
+an ingenious arrangement of several large rocks, Strong began his
+descent. In his left hand he carried a flaming torch and Donald
+leaned over the edge, looking down, with rifle sighted, to fire
+upon any reptile which might be brought to light by the torch's
+ruddy glare.
+
+Step by step Strong went down, stopping every now and then to
+hold his torch below him, if perchance it might come into contact
+with fire damp or any other noxious gas.
+
+He had descended at least three-fourths of the way, when, as he
+swung his torch below, he uttered a cry that was almost a shriek
+and the torch fell from his hand.
+
+At the same instant Donald gave vent to a loud exclamation and
+his rifle cracked.
+
+"Hold on," he cried as he arose from the ground, "as you value
+your life, don't lose your hold."
+
+"What is it?" asked the others in one voice.
+
+"Snakes! Dozens of them," replied Donald. "Climb up, Strong, as
+fast as you can."
+
+"All right," came a feeble reply, followed almost immediately by
+a louder call of "Help!"
+
+"Hold fast," called Donald. "I'm coming."
+
+But before he could turn to step down the ladder, a chattering
+figure sprang past him and shot down the rope.
+
+It was the ape. He had heard his master's call and had gone to
+his assistance.
+
+A moment later came a joyful cry that told as plainly as words
+that Ambrosio had reached his master in time.
+
+"Are you all right now?" called Donald.
+
+"Yes. I'll be up in a minute. Good old boy," the last remark
+evidently addressed to the ape.
+
+When Strong's head appeared above the edge of the shaft a couple
+of minutes later he was as pale as a ghost and when he at length
+came into the full light of the torches, it was seen that his
+hair was as white as snow. The fright had completely changed its
+color.
+
+"Let's get out of here," he gasped as soon as he was helped to
+his feet. "I wouldn't go down into that place again for all the
+gold and silver in the world."
+
+"It was pretty rough for sure," admitted Donald. "I just caught a
+glimpse as the torch fell among them, but it was so quickly
+extinguished by the wriggling mass I only shot once for fear of
+hitting you."
+
+"It was the darkness that frightened me," Strong explained
+feebly. "If I hadn't let go my torch to hold on with both hands,
+I don't think I would have minded so much. But the darkness hid
+what was below and it just seemed as though they were right after
+me. I'd have been a goner sure if it hadn't been for good old
+Ambrosio," and he laid his hand affectionately on the ape's head.
+
+"Do you think you'll be able to climb out of the mine?" asked
+Billie as they reached the main shaft.
+
+"Yes, with Ambrosio's aid; but I'm going out first. I don't think
+I have nerve enough left right now to be the last out."
+
+The exit from the mine was much slower than the descent had been,
+but in the course of an hour they were all once more out under
+the stars.
+
+"What about the bandits?" queried Billie.
+
+"Take my advice," said Strong, "and let them alone. This is none
+of your quarrel. If the Mexicans want to fight among themselves,
+let them. It's a family quarrel and you will only make matters
+worse by interfering. The time may come when these very men may
+prove your best friends."
+
+"That's the advice I gave when we first discovered them to-day. I
+wish now we had all followed it."
+
+"If we are not going to do anything," declared Adrian, "the
+quicker we get out of here the better."
+
+"I consider that more good advice," laughed Billie, "especially
+as I am just reminded that I haven't had a bite to eat since
+noon. But I have no horse."
+
+"That's easily remedied," replied Strong.
+
+He went into the old ruin and in a few minutes returned with a
+very good animal, all saddled and bridled.
+
+"It will not be missed," he said. "Now ride for your lives. Take
+the trail to the left and don't let moonlight catch you within
+five miles of here."
+
+"Aren't you coming with us?" asked Donald.
+
+"No! I am better off here."
+
+"How will you account for your white hair?"
+
+"I'll tell them it is a charm. They'll believe it and it will
+make me that much more valuable. Now go!"
+
+Without wasting more words the boys put spurs to their horses and
+were soon out of the basin and on their way to Pachuca.
+
+"It seems like a year since we came down here," remarked Adrian
+to Billie as they galloped along.
+
+"It sure does," was the reply as Billie rubbed his stomach
+suggestively. "I'll never go out again as long as I'm in this
+revolutionary republic without a haversack full of grub."
+
+"Who said grub?" called back Donald.
+
+"What a question," laughed Adrian. "Who is it that's always
+hungry? It's all he thinks about."
+
+"Oh, it is, eh?" from Billie. "Well, I'm thinking about something
+else now. There's the moon coming up over the valley and we're
+not three miles from the old Rosario. We'd better keep our eyes
+peeled and see that our shooting irons are in shape. We may have
+to fight our way home even yet."
+
+As though to verify the prediction there appeared at the moment
+the figure of a solitary horseman silhouetted against the rising
+moon.
+
+"You're a prophet of evil all right," said Adrian. "Now what?"
+
+"Just keep on riding."
+
+"But that chap is right in our way."
+
+"Then ride him down. He'll be worse scared than we are."
+
+The advice seemed good and the boys spurred forward.
+
+"If you think he means us any harm," Donald remarked, "I might
+take a shot at him."
+
+"I don't believe he does."
+
+Again Billie proved a good prophet as the rider rode directly
+toward them, waving his hat in his hand.
+
+"It's Tony," exclaimed Pedro as the rider approached a little
+nearer.
+
+Tony was one of Gen. Sanchez' servants.
+
+"Why, so it is," laughed Donald. "I suppose he is out looking for
+us."
+
+Which was exactly the case. The news of the fight had reached
+Pachuca along with the part the boys had played in saving the
+bullion, and Pedro's father had heard it along with the others.
+
+Later, word had been brought that one of the boys was missing and
+the others had gone to look for him. When none of them returned
+after all these hours, Gen. Sanchez had organized a searching
+party, of which Tony proved to be the advance guard.
+
+A few minutes later, several horsemen dashed up and the boys were
+given a rousing reception.
+
+"The _Jefe politico_ is waiting to greet you," Tony told the
+boys.
+
+The jefe politico is the mayor.
+
+Billie smiled broadly and once more rubbed his stomach.
+
+"This begins to look encouraging," he remarked to Pedro. "I think
+I can taste the good things already."
+
+Half an hour later the boys reached the city and were given a
+cheer as they passed through the main street and up to Gen.
+Sanchez' home, which was located half a block from the plaza. And
+in another ten minutes Billie was facing the mayor over a plate
+of steaming soup, while a mozo stood at his back waiting to serve
+the leg of a twenty-five pound turkey. Raising his eyes from the
+table, he caught sight of what was coming and gave Donald, who
+sat next to him, a dig in the ribs with his elbow.
+
+"How's this for a prophet of evil?" he asked.
+
+Donald took a look at the great bird which was rapidly falling
+into pieces under Gen. Sanchez' skillful hand, and remarked with
+a wink:
+
+"Great!"
+
+
+
+
+CHAPTER VII.
+
+THE INSULT TO THE FLAG.
+
+
+A week later, or, to be more exact, on April 10, 1914, the
+Broncho Rider Boys and their friend Pedro were back in the City
+of Mexico. During the two weeks they had been at Pachuca, many
+changes had taken place and on the morning in question they had
+just finished their coffee in the breakfast room when Guadalupe,
+Pedro's sister, brought in the morning paper.
+
+"What's the news?" asked Adrian.
+
+Guadalupe glanced at the paper and hid it behind her back without
+making any reply.
+
+"Why, Sister!" exclaimed Pedro with all the dignity of his
+sixteen years. "How can you be so rude?"
+
+"She's only joking," laughed Billie, who was always found on
+Guadalupe's side when any argument took place. "Come, tell us!
+What is it?"
+
+Guadalupe shook her head.
+
+"Oh, I can't," she replied in a pained voice.
+
+"Why not?" from Billie.
+
+"It says we are going to have war with the United States and I
+don't believe it."
+
+"Of course you don't," replied Billie. "Neither does any one
+else."
+
+"Let me see," said Pedro sternly.
+
+Slowly the girl handed her brother the paper.
+
+He opened it and read.
+
+"A party of American marines was arrested in Tampico yesterday
+for landing on Mexican soil with arms in their hands. They were
+marched through the streets under a heavy guard and lodged in
+jail. After a parley with the American Admiral, Mayo, the
+commandant of the city finally released them upon the assurance
+of the Admiral that it should not occur again."
+
+"Well, if it was only a mistake, that doesn't mean war," laughed
+Billie, but Donald's face took on a more serious look.
+
+"That isn't all," said Pedro.
+
+"Well," from Billie, "let's have the rest of it."
+
+"The American Admiral has now declared that the men did not land
+on Mexican soil with arms in their hands, but that they were in
+their boat at the pier when arrested. He claims that they were
+taken from under the American flag----"
+
+"What?" almost shouted Billie, springing to his feet. "Taken
+from under the American flag? Well, I'll bet that will mean
+war--unless," he added after a brief pause, "Gen. Huerta
+apologizes."
+
+"Why should he apologize?" asked Pedro.
+
+"For insulting the American flag."
+
+"That's what the American Admiral says," interrupted Guadalupe,
+"and he threatens to fire on the city."
+
+"And I'll bet he'll do it," said Adrian.
+
+"If he does we'll sink his ships," said Pedro.
+
+"What with?" asked Billie sarcastically. "Why, Admiral Mayo could
+blow Tampico out of the water."
+
+"If he does, the Mexicans will march on Washington," from Pedro.
+
+"What?" from Donald. "March on Washington? Why, Huerta can't
+hardly keep Carranza out of the City of Mexico."
+
+"But if your admiral fires on Tampico, Carranza will help Gen.
+Huerta," declared Pedro.
+
+"Do you really think so?" asked Adrian.
+
+"I know it. We may have our little family troubles down here in
+Mexico, but if the United States should interfere, we'd all turn
+in and fight her."
+
+Billie was about to reply when Gen. Sanchez entered the room.
+
+"I see you have been reading the news," he said calmly.
+
+"And discussing it too," said Donald.
+
+"Which we had better not at present," replied the General. "You
+boys are our guests and as long as you are, you are our friends;
+but I am afraid there is serious trouble coming and I think it
+will be much better if you make arrangements at once to return to
+the United States. As you know, I am not a favorite with the
+present administration and I might not be able to protect you."
+
+"We can ask the protection of the American Ambassador," said
+Donald.
+
+Gen. Sanchez smiled kindly.
+
+"The American Ambassador may be asked to leave."
+
+The boys looked serious.
+
+"Do you really think it is as bad as that?" asked Adrian.
+
+"I fear so. Later dispatches from Tampico state that the American
+Admiral has demanded a salute of twenty-one guns to the American
+flag. I know Gen. Huerta well enough to know that he will never
+order the salute."
+
+"Then what will happen?" asked Donald.
+
+"No one can say. I understand that the American government has
+placed the matter in the hands of Admiral Fletcher, the ranking
+officer, who is in charge of the Atlantic fleet off Vera Cruz."
+
+"Do you think we should go at once?" queried Billie.
+
+"Yes, I think it would be better. I will make such arrangements
+as I can for your transportation to Vera Cruz. In the meantime
+you had better go and register yourselves at the United States
+Embassy. I am never sure of Gen. Huerta."
+
+Without further discussion the boys prepared to take Gen.
+Sanchez' advice, and, donning their hats, started for the
+embassy, leaving Pedro much chagrined and Guadalupe in tears.
+
+"I can't see why there has to be war!" she declared. "Why can't
+men behave themselves?"
+
+"What do girls know about war?" asked Pedro.
+
+"They know it's terrible and takes their fathers and brothers,
+that's what they know, and they wish they didn't have to know
+that."
+
+Pedro made no reply, but went to his room, where he selected from
+among his most cherished belongings a gift for each of his
+guests--three beautiful opals--and laid them upon their
+respective suit cases.
+
+When the Broncho Rider Boys arrived at the embassy they found a
+large crowd of Americans already assembled. Word had been
+circulated that it would be wise for all of them to leave Mexico
+and those who could were going, while many men whose business
+detained them in Mexico were sending their families. All had come
+to the embassy for information and to register.
+
+As a result it was late in the afternoon before the boys returned
+to Gen. Sanchez' residence. But late as they were, the general
+had not yet come in. They went to their room and when they saw
+the gifts which Pedro had laid on each valise, they could not
+keep back the tears.
+
+"Well, there's one thing," declared Billie as he drew the back of
+his hand across his eyes, "we don't have to fight Pedro, no
+matter what comes. I'm going to hunt him up and tell him so."
+
+And he did.
+
+It was some hours later when Gen. Sanchez returned and announced
+that it would be impossible for the boys to get transportation to
+Vera Cruz for two or three days, as the track had been torn up in
+the neighborhood of Cordoba, but that he had been promised that
+they would be given safe conduct as soon as the track was
+repaired.
+
+It was three days later, therefore, before the boys were able to
+leave, during which time they remained in the house at Gen.
+Sanchez' request to avoid any unpleasantness, which might make
+trouble for him.
+
+On the morning of the 13th the boys bade good-bye to their host
+and his family and were driven in an automobile to the station.
+Already there were more than enough persons to fill four trains,
+and the guards were permitting only those to board the cars who
+had passes signed by the Mexican provost marshal.
+
+Thanks to Gen. Sanchez, our boys had been provided with such
+passes, but they were not allowed to take their rifles or
+revolvers aboard the train. They had no more than found seats and
+made themselves comfortable than the conductor shouted "Vamanos,"
+and the train pulled slowly out of the shed.
+
+"Well," remarked Donald as they rolled slowly along, "this is a
+pretty tough ending to a friendly visit. I think I've seen about
+all I want of Mexico for some time to come."
+
+"What do you suppose will happen?" asked Billie. "Do you think
+we'll really go to war with Mexico unless Gen. Huerta orders the
+salute?"
+
+"I don't know," was Donald's cautious reply. "I hope not."
+
+"And I hope we do!" exclaimed a somewhat florid gentleman who sat
+in the seat ahead and who had overheard the conversation. "I'd
+just like an opportunity to come down here with an army and wipe
+the whole nation off the earth."
+
+Donald made no reply, but Adrian asked sympathetically: "Have
+they treated you badly, sir?"
+
+"Have they treated me badly? Well, I should say so. They wouldn't
+let me out of my hotel for two days and now they have refused to
+carry my trunk and made me leave it with the express company. I
+guess they don't know who I am."
+
+"I'm sure they do not, sir."
+
+"Well, I'll show them who I am as soon as I get to Vera Cruz and
+can see Admiral Fletcher. He'll know how to protect Americans!"
+
+"I'm sure he will, sir."
+
+"And when the first marine lands, I want to be right there with a
+rifle to help drive the Mexicans off the earth."
+
+"It would be wise not to say too much," whispered Adrian. "I see
+that officer in the end of the car has his eye on you. He may
+speak English."
+
+"I don't care who hears me," said the florid man angrily. "I mean
+it."
+
+At the same moment a guard who had approached from the other end
+of the car laid his hand upon the angry man's shoulder.
+
+"If the Seņor is not satisfied," he said, "we shall be pleased to
+send him back to the City of Mexico."
+
+"Oh, no-no-no," was the stammering reply. "I am very well
+satisfied. All I want is to get out of the country."
+
+"Let us hope there will be no trouble about that," was the polite
+response, and the florid man lapsed into silence.
+
+Ordinarily it is a pleasant day's journey from the City of Mexico
+to the seaport city of Vera Cruz; or if one prefers he may make a
+night ride of it in times of peace. The train which left the City
+of Mexico that April morning made no such time. After a tiresome
+all-day ride with numerous aggravating stops, when darkness fell
+they were still on the plateau of Mexico, some miles west of
+Orizaba, running slowly for fear some stray bunch of Carranzistas
+or Zapatistas might have torn up a length or two of track.
+
+It was possibly an hour later that the engine gave a furious
+jerk, followed by a bump and another jerk, and then the train
+came to a dead stop.
+
+In a minute everybody was on his feet asking everybody else what
+had happened. As no one knew, there was a general movement for
+the doors, as it was too dark to see much from the windows.
+
+"Sit down, everybody," ordered the guard. "There is no danger,
+but we have stopped on a high trestle."
+
+The passengers obeyed, realizing the danger of leaving the
+coaches. There was a general round of conversation, and then as
+the train did not start, people settled back in their seats and
+tried to sleep.
+
+Some minutes later Billie gave Adrian a nudge with his elbow.
+
+"Are you asleep?" he asked.
+
+"No. Why?"
+
+"I've just been looking out of the window. We're not on a
+trestle."
+
+"No? Well, what of it?"
+
+"Only that the guard was lying. What did he do it for?"
+
+"I don't know. Because he was a Mexican, I guess. Go on to
+sleep."
+
+"That isn't the answer, although it's pretty good. They have some
+scheme. I wouldn't be surprised if they were going to keep us
+prisoners somewhere around here."
+
+"Nonsense. Go on to sleep."
+
+But Billie was not satisfied. He leaned over and tried to talk to
+Donald, but he was fast asleep.
+
+"I think I'll go on a little scouting expedition," he muttered.
+"I need some exercise."
+
+He arose, stretched himself and walked slowly toward the door,
+which stood wide open.
+
+"I wonder where the guard is?" he thought. "It's mighty funny
+he'd go and leave the coach like this."
+
+He stepped on to the coach ahead. The same condition existed.
+
+Billie's curiosity got the best of him and he jumped out onto the
+ground. It was pitch dark, but he had not advanced more than
+twenty steps before he discovered groups of men seated upon the
+grass. A second glance convinced him they were armed.
+
+He drew back and stood beside the coach, where he thought fast.
+
+"There's one of two things," he soliloquized. "We are either
+prisoners or else we are being guarded against an expected
+attack. Whichever it is, this is no time for the Broncho Rider
+Boys to be asleep. I'll go and tell the others."
+
+He started to climb onto the car, but a guard appeared on the
+platform and ordered him away at the point of his bayonet.
+
+"I'm a passenger," explained Billie.
+
+"Go away!" was the reply, emphasized by a quick advance of the
+bayonet.
+
+Seeing that it was no time to argue, Billie slid back into the
+darkness.
+
+
+
+
+CHAPTER VIII.
+
+TREACHERY FOILED.
+
+
+Broncho Billie had been in too many unpleasant places to be at
+all worried over his predicament, but he was much concerned about
+the condition of the train and its passengers, practically all of
+whom were Americans and a large majority of whom were women and
+children.
+
+"It would be fierce," he mused, "to have them held here, or in a
+detention camp as prisoners; and it would be worse if we should
+be attacked by an overwhelming force of revolutionists. I've just
+got to know the truth."
+
+He glanced up at the coach with its dimly lighted windows.
+
+"I wish I could talk to old Don. He most always knows what to do.
+But how can I get at him?"
+
+He sneaked out to where he could see the coach platform. The
+guard was still there, as well as the guard on the other car.
+
+"Worse and more of it," he exclaimed.
+
+Then he examined the car, trying to determine at which window he
+had been seated. Several were open, and he determined to try and
+speak to some one.
+
+"Our seats are not far from here," he thought as he stopped under
+the second one. "I'll try this."
+
+He picked up a stone about as big as an egg and tossed it into
+the window. A howl from a child followed the act and Billie
+ducked under the car. He could hear the mother pacifying it, but
+evidently she, too, had been asleep and had not discovered the
+stone.
+
+"I think I know just which child it is," said Billie with a grin,
+"and this next open window must be ours."
+
+He picked up another stone and tossed it in to his second choice,
+this time with better results.
+
+Donald had just aroused from a nap, and, missing Billie, was
+looking for him. Not seeing him in the car, he was about to look
+out of the window when the stone hit him on the chin.
+
+"Ouch!" he exclaimed as he started back.
+
+Billie heard the exclamation and gave the familiar whistle.
+
+Donald was on the alert in an instant. Looking up and down the
+car to be sure he was not being watched, he stuck his head out of
+the window.
+
+"What is it?" he asked.
+
+"Trouble," was Billie's laconic reply. "Come out."
+
+"How can I? The guard is at the door."
+
+"Jump out of the window."
+
+"They might see me."
+
+Billie thought fast.
+
+"Let Ad stand between you and the door."
+
+"Great," from Donald.
+
+He aroused Adrian and told him the situation.
+
+"You stay in the train," he said, "and we'll keep you posted as
+to what is going on outside. If there is any real danger we will
+give the alarm."
+
+He picked up his overcoat and pretended to be fixing a pillow.
+Adrian did the same. Then, while the guard's back was turned, he
+dropped out of the window.
+
+Billie was beside him when he rose to his feet.
+
+"This way, Don," he whispered. "Let's get out into the dark and
+hold a council of war."
+
+They glided out into darkness, but where they could keep their
+eyes on the engine.
+
+"Now tell me about it," said Don.
+
+Billie told him what he had discovered.
+
+"It does look strange," Donald admitted. "Have you any plan?"
+
+"I haven't an idea above an oyster," was the characteristic
+reply.
+
+Donald scratched his ear reflectively.
+
+"How would it do," he finally asked, "to sneak over by the
+soldiers and see if we can't pick up some scrap of conversation
+that may give us a clue as to what is going on?"
+
+"Fine. We must keep together, though. We might never find each
+other in the dark if we should become separated."
+
+Silently they crawled toward the spot where Billie had seen the
+soldiers. When they did not hear any sign of them after several
+minutes' crawling they stopped to listen.
+
+"There surely was a squad here a few minutes ago," declared
+Billie. "They must have moved."
+
+They remained silently thoughtful for several minutes, but all
+was as silent as a graveyard.
+
+"That's mighty funny," said Billie. "I know I was not mistaken.
+Let's go back by the train."
+
+They turned for that purpose and could see a group of figures at
+the platform of each coach.
+
+"That's the answer," exclaimed Billie. "They have surrounded the
+train. Now let's see what will happen."
+
+They had not long to wait as an officer shortly boarded each car
+and a minute later there was a commotion among the passengers.
+
+Drawing a little nearer, the boys could hear the officer in the
+car nearest them explaining that the passengers would be obliged
+to alight and change trains.
+
+"The track has been torn up ahead of us," he said, "and we shall
+have to walk nearly a mile to where the train is that came up
+from Vera Cruz."
+
+This had been quite the customary thing in Mexico for some months
+and the passengers prepared to obey.
+
+"I don't believe it is true," said Billie to Donald.
+
+"We can soon find out," declared Donald. "Let's walk down the
+track a piece. We can easily keep ahead of the crowd."
+
+Avoiding the glare of the locomotive's headlight, the boys
+hurried down the track and when far enough away from the train to
+feel secure, they took the middle of the track.
+
+"This is far enough ahead," said Donald, "to keep out of sight
+and the track is all right so far. I don't believe it is torn up
+at all."
+
+"Then what is up?"
+
+"That is what I've been trying to decide for nearly an hour,"
+replied Billie. "It looks as though they intended to make all the
+Americans prisoners."
+
+"But what for?"
+
+"Why, for hostages, to be sure. Don't you remember how Cæsar took
+a lot of the Helvetians for hostages?"
+
+"By George!" from Donald. "I believe you are right. Do you
+suppose it is Huerta's orders?"
+
+"I expect so. He hates Americans."
+
+While the boys had been talking the passengers had been taken
+from the train and were now coming toward them.
+
+"Let's keep just far enough ahead to see what will happen," said
+Donald. "We must get in touch with Adrian somehow."
+
+They started ahead, but it speedily developed that the others
+were not following. Instead they had been halted a short distance
+from the locomotive, back from the track, and surrounded by
+soldiers.
+
+"There seems to be a hitch somewhere," Don finally remarked.
+"They don't seem to know just what they do want to do."
+
+"Come on back and find out," said Billie. "It's up to us to do
+something."
+
+Cautiously they crept back to where they could hear the
+conversation among the passengers and the questions they
+asked the guard. Some were laughing and more were expressing
+indignation. A few of the women were crying, but above all they
+could hear the voice of the florid-faced man telling what he
+would do as soon as he could get into touch with Admiral
+Fletcher.
+
+"Which won't be very soon, unless I'm mistaken," laughed Donald.
+
+Presently some one began to whistle a popular air, but in such a
+way that the boys recognized the well-known whistle of Adrian.
+
+"Do you hear that?" asked Billie. "Ad wants to know what we are
+doing."
+
+"He'll have to want for the present," said Don, "but there go a
+couple of officers back to the train. Let's follow them."
+
+The boys darted into the shadow of the coaches and crept back
+only a few steps behind what proved to be the captain in charge
+of the company and his second lieutenant.
+
+"If I only had my automatic, I'd soon settle this whole matter,"
+declared Billie.
+
+"You wouldn't hurt anybody, would you?"
+
+"I'd capture the officer and make him take us to Vera Cruz."
+
+"Of course," from Donald. "Why didn't I think of it before? Let's
+do it."
+
+"But we have no weapons."
+
+"Then we must get some."
+
+"How?"
+
+"Keep your eyes open. There must be some way."
+
+The officers kept on their way until they reached the first
+Pullman, where they stopped for a minute.
+
+"Are the orders in here?" asked the captain.
+
+"No; the conductor has them. He wouldn't stop the train without I
+gave them to him."
+
+"Carramba! Why didn't you tell me so before? Go and take them
+from him and bring them here at once."
+
+"Bueno, Capitan! Will you wait here?"
+
+"Yes, I'll go inside. Hurry."
+
+The lieutenant turned and hurried back. The boys only saved
+themselves from being detected by throwing themselves flat on the
+ground.
+
+For a moment the captain remained looking after his companion and
+then turned and entered the car.
+
+"We must have that order," said Donald.
+
+"We must!" echoed Billie.
+
+"Then we'll get it," they exclaimed as one.
+
+So alike were the thoughts that passed through their minds that
+they did not even feel obliged to speak the plan aloud.
+
+"Which one of us will stop him?" asked Donald.
+
+"You'd better. I'm heavier and I can handle him easier."
+
+They walked back some ten feet, where Donald stopped, while
+Billie went about ten feet farther and drew off into the
+darkness.
+
+A couple of minutes later they heard the lieutenant coming. He
+passed Billie without seeing him.
+
+Then Donald advanced and met him as by chance.
+
+"Who comes there?" asked the lieutenant in a sharp tone, drawing
+his revolver.
+
+"Why, hello, lieutenant," said Donald as he came close to him.
+"What's happened?"
+
+The lieutenant eyed him suspiciously.
+
+"Where did you come from?" he asked.
+
+"From the rear sleeper. I woke up and found myself all alone."
+
+"Humph!" grunted the lieutenant. "You must have been overlooked.
+Come with me."
+
+He started to replace his revolver in its holster when a slight
+noise behind him caused him to turn his head. As he did so,
+Billie's fist caught him under the chin and he fell in a heap
+without making a sound.
+
+"Good work!" muttered Donald as he picked up the revolver which
+the lieutenant had let fall. "Now to business."
+
+
+
+
+CHAPTER IX.
+
+DONALD'S STRATEGY.
+
+
+Lifting the unconscious man in their arms, they bore him into the
+darkness away from the train, where he was soon deprived of his
+coat, hat, and weapons. Then he was gagged and securely tied with
+his own sabretasche.
+
+Donald, being nearest the lieutenant's size, donned his uniform,
+buckled on his sword, and with the order in his hand hastily
+entered the car, closely followed by Billie, with the ready
+revolver in his hand.
+
+The captain had thrown aside his hat and was smoking a cigarette
+in one of the easy seats as the boys entered. He gave them only a
+hasty glance as he blew a cloud of smoke into the air, and the
+next minute he was covered by Billie's weapon.
+
+"Up with your hands!" was the stern order.
+
+The captain hesitated, but a sharp prick from Donald's sword sent
+the hands into the air.
+
+In another minute the captain was disarmed.
+
+"Now," said Donald sternly, "we'll see what all this trouble is
+about."
+
+He opened the telegram he held in his hand and read:
+
+  "American Admiral has given an ultimatum. Hold train and
+  passengers until further orders.
+                                                    Maas."
+
+"Who is Maas?" asked Donald sternly.
+
+The captain shrugged his shoulders, but said nothing.
+
+"You'll answer in just one minute, or you'll never have a chance
+to answer another question," said Donald, as he stood with drawn
+sword, while Billie covered the captain with his revolver.
+
+"Would you murder an unarmed man?" asked the captain.
+
+"I wouldn't consider it murder. Answer."
+
+The look in Donald's eyes was not to be mistaken.
+
+"Gen. Maas is in command of Vera Cruz," the captain said.
+
+"Good. I think I see it all. If it is decided not to accede to
+the ultimatum, it is proposed to hold the train load as
+hostages."
+
+The captain smiled.
+
+"Now listen!" and Donald spoke very slowly so that every word
+might find lodgment. "You have one chance for your life. Can you
+guess what it is?"
+
+The captain shook his head.
+
+"To do just exactly as I bid. Just one little attempt to do
+differently, and you are a dead man."
+
+The captain scowled, but made no reply.
+
+"Put on your hat and come with me. Order the passengers back on
+to the train and give your engineer instructions to cover just as
+much of the distance between here and Vera Cruz by daylight as he
+knows how!"
+
+The captain shrugged his shoulders as he arose from his seat.
+
+"I see you think it will be easy to escape. Just put any such
+idea out of your mind. There is no possible chance."
+
+Donald turned to Billie.
+
+"This is what must be done. We shall walk directly back to where
+the passengers are. The captain will give his order without any
+hesitation. Otherwise I shall shoot him through my pocket. You
+will keep right behind us. If I fire, you fire also. One of us
+will be sure to kill him."
+
+Donald led the way from the car and Billie brought up the rear.
+
+Through the dark they marched, each with a hand on the captain,
+so they might feel his slightest tremor.
+
+Arriving at the engine the captain summoned the sergeant.
+
+"Order the passengers to board the train," was the brief command.
+
+The sergeant hastened to obey.
+
+"Bueno!" said Donald, as the passengers rushed back.
+
+Then under his breath to Billie: "Call Adrian."
+
+Billie did so.
+
+"Where are you?" Adrian called back.
+
+"Down near the engine."
+
+A moment later Adrian appeared coming through the crowd of
+hurrying passengers.
+
+"Where's Don?" he asked as soon as he caught sight of Billie.
+
+"Not far. Stay here. We may need you."
+
+Adrian's face showed some surprise, but he said nothing.
+
+"Now, captain," said Don quietly, "your orders to the engineer,"
+and under cover of the darkness he pushed the point of his
+revolver into the captain's side, while Billie touched him
+significantly in the back.
+
+The captain gave the order as he had been instructed.
+
+"Now for the conductor," ordered Donald.
+
+The order was given, but the conductor refused to obey.
+
+"I must have a written order," he said.
+
+"Why?" asked Donald, in his rôle of lieutenant.
+
+"To countermand the order of Gen. Maas."
+
+"Captain," was Donald's quiet hint, "don't you think it would be
+well to place the conductor under arrest?" and again he poked his
+revolver into the captain's side.
+
+The order for the conductor's arrest was quickly given.
+
+"Now, then, vamose," called Adrian. Then to the engineer, "I will
+act as conductor."
+
+The guards and extra soldiers who had been detailed for this
+special service, sprang aboard; the engineer pulled open the
+throttle and the train began to move.
+
+"Aren't you going, too?" asked Adrian.
+
+"Yes," whispered Billie to Donald, "hurry aboard with your
+prisoner."
+
+The captain was evidently of the same mind, for he started to
+board the already moving train.
+
+"No you don't," exclaimed Donald, pulling him back. "You're going
+to stay here with us!"
+
+"Do you mean it, Don?" asked Billie in surprise.
+
+"Sure! What do you think he'd do to us as soon as it was light?"
+
+By this time the train was under headway; a second later the last
+coach passed them and in another minute the tail lights were
+disappearing in the darkness.
+
+"It looks to me," remarked Adrian with a long breath, "as though
+we were in the consommé."
+
+"Perhaps," was Donald's laconic reply, "but those women and
+children will be safe in Vera Cruz under the guns of Admiral
+Fletcher's fleet by daylight, or I'm greatly mistaken."
+
+"And what are we going to do with our friend the captain?"
+queried Billie.
+
+"He'll have to accept our hospitality under the stars until
+morning and then we'll see."
+
+In telling about his experiences later Billie said it was the
+longest and the shortest night he ever knew. It seemed a long
+time for daylight, but it seemed a short time for the train which
+was bearing his countrymen to safety.
+
+When day finally began to break, the first thing that became
+visible was the snow-tipped peak of Mt. Orizaba, against which
+the sun threw his brilliant rays long before he could be seen
+above the horizon. It was a beautiful sight and the boys voiced
+their admiration with many exclamations of delight. Then they
+turned their attention to the more serious thoughts for the day.
+
+The first thing they did was to release the lieutenant from his
+unpleasant predicament and restore to him his uniform.
+
+"We should like to return you your arms also," said Donald, "but
+your government took ours from us and I think we shall have to
+keep yours in their place."
+
+Neither of the officers made any reply, but their dark looks
+boded no good for the boys.
+
+"You might just as well look pleasant," laughed Billie. "All is
+fair in love and war."
+
+"We'll make you sing a different song when we get you in Vera
+Cruz," said the captain.
+
+"And when do you think that will be, Captain?" queried Adrian.
+
+"As soon as the next train comes along."
+
+"Oh, that's it, is it?" said Donald. "That being the case, I
+guess we will not wait for another train. By the way, how far is
+it to Vera Cruz?"
+
+"About a hundred kilometers."
+
+"That's about eighty-four miles, isn't it, Ad?"
+
+"Just about."
+
+"And it's down hill pretty much all the way, isn't it?"
+
+"I should say so by looking down the valley."
+
+"A right nice little walk, Captain. Let's be going. We ought to
+make it easily in four days."
+
+At this cordial invitation the captain lost his temper.
+
+"Carramba!" he exclaimed. "Am I a boy to be made sport of? I will
+not go. If you wish me to go you will have to carry me," and he
+deliberately laid himself down on the ground.
+
+In spite of themselves the boys were obliged to laugh.
+
+"We carried the lieutenant last night, but we don't desire your
+company badly enough to carry you," laughed Billie. "If you don't
+want to go, I for one vote to leave you. We have to forage for
+something to eat and the fewer there are, the easier it will be.
+And speaking of eats, it seems to me I smell something cooking
+right now."
+
+At Billie's words the others sniffed up their noses.
+
+"It's a fact as sure as you're born," declared Donald.
+
+"And I'm going to find out where the odor comes from," said
+Billie. "There must be a house around here somewhere."
+
+Again he sniffed the air and smiled jubilantly.
+
+"The wind's in the east," he laughed. "It must be somewhere in
+this direction. Come on, Captain."
+
+The captain refused to move, but Billie led the way, followed by
+the two boys. They had not gone many rods when through an opening
+in the trees they beheld a good-sized adobe house. Pushing
+hastily toward it, they soon reached a cleared space, and there,
+gathered about a bunch of some forty or fifty horses, were a
+dozen men, while through the open door of the house many more
+were to be seen seated at a table--eating.
+
+"Come on!" exclaimed Billie. "I'm going to have something to eat;
+I don't care who they are."
+
+"We might as well make the best of it," declared Donald. "We are
+discovered any way and the best thing we can do is to put on a
+bold front."
+
+Without further words the three boys walked boldly toward the
+house.
+
+
+
+
+CHAPTER X.
+
+A TIMELY RESCUE.
+
+
+The minute the boys' presence became known, there was a commotion
+in the house and in the clearing surrounding it. Those in the
+yard sprang toward their guns and those in the house jumped from
+the table.
+
+"Don't move," called out Billie. "We are friends."
+
+But the men were not sure and at once surrounded the boys.
+
+They appeared to be soldiers, but their uniforms were of a great
+variety and many hues. Only the officer in command had anything
+the appearance of a real soldier.
+
+"Who are you?" he demanded as he came forward.
+
+"Friends! Americanos!" replied Donald.
+
+"Yes; and hungry ones," added Billie with a gesture that brought
+a smile to the officer's face.
+
+"Where did you come from?" was the next inquiry.
+
+Donald explained that they had been left by a train that had
+stopped nearby. He did not think it necessary to enlighten the
+officer as to the circumstances.
+
+"If you don't believe us," broke in Billie, "you can ask the
+officers we left back there by the track."
+
+Donald made a gesture of impatience, which Billie failed to
+understand, but which the officer was quick to interpret.
+
+"Officers? Of which army?" he quickly asked.
+
+"Gen. Huerta's."
+
+"Carramba!" exclaimed the officer in command. "Go quick,
+corporal, and bring them to me."
+
+Then to Billie: "If you are telling me the truth you have done me
+a great favor."
+
+The boys looked surprised.
+
+"How is that?" asked Donald.
+
+"Do you not know that we are of the army of Gen. Carranza?" was
+the interrogative reply.
+
+"Why, no!" exclaimed the boys in unison.
+
+"It is true," said the officer. "I am Captain Lopez. Now tell me,
+who are you?"
+
+Briefly Donald told of their acquaintance with Gen. Sanchez and
+of their adventures of the night before, at which the captain
+laughed heartily.
+
+"You are smart boys," he declared.
+
+"And hungry ones," again added Billie.
+
+"You must be. Here, Juan," calling a soldier to him. "Take these
+_muchachos_ to the house and feed them. I'll have a look at these
+rebels."
+
+"Rebels," said Adrian to Donald under his breath as they walked
+toward the house. "Now what do you think of that?"
+
+"That's his viewpoint," replied Don. "He thinks of the men who
+overthrew President Madero as rebels."
+
+By this time they were near enough the house for Billie to smell
+the aroma of the coffee and he quickened his pace.
+
+"I'll talk politics after I've sampled the breakfast," he
+declared. "If the breakfast is good, I'll join the band."
+
+It was nearly half an hour later that the boys stood before the
+captain. With a good breakfast under their belts they felt fit
+for anything that might offer.
+
+"I'm afraid you boys are in a bad fix," said Captain Lopez. "I
+suppose you want to get to Vera Cruz and on to some ship that
+will take you to the United States; but I don't know how you are
+going to make it."
+
+"Why, can't we get another train somewhere down the line?" asked
+Adrian.
+
+"There may not be any more trains for some time."
+
+"How's that?"
+
+"We are here to stop them."
+
+"Does that mean you are going out to tear up the track?"
+
+"Not right here, but a little nearer Vera Cruz. There is a much
+larger body of troops about five miles below."
+
+Billie uttered a prolonged whistle.
+
+"That does look bad, sure enough," he declared. Then, after a
+pause: "What's the matter with walking?"
+
+"It's a long ways and the mountains are full of our men."
+
+"Can't you give us a safe passage? You say we have done you a
+favor by turning these two officers over to you," suggested
+Donald, indicating with a nod of his head the captain and
+lieutenant of the train guard who were now held prisoners.
+
+"I'll do the best I can," was the reply, "but you will have to
+remain with me to-day. We are on scout duty and shall not return
+to the main body until to-night."
+
+"That'll suit me all right," laughed Billie, "and if you don't
+mind I think I'll go into the house somewhere and take a nap."
+
+"Bueno," laughed the captain. "You might as well all take a nap.
+If we have occasion to leave the neighborhood we will call you."
+
+Ten minutes later the three were fast asleep on a pile of Mexican
+blankets in the best room in the house.
+
+Three hours later they were awakened by a fusillade of shots.
+
+They sprang to their feet and looked around. For just a moment
+they could not remember where they were. Then they recalled their
+situation and became on the alert.
+
+"Trouble outside," was Don's laconic statement.
+
+He and Billie drew the revolvers they had captured the night
+before.
+
+"Put 'em up," advised Adrian. "We're not here to fight."
+
+"We might have to," from Billie.
+
+"Not at all. If one side wins, we are safe. If the other side
+wins, we are prisoners and the attackers will be our rescuers."
+
+"Great head, Ad," was Billie's comment. "But I'd like to know
+what is going on," as another fusillade was heard.
+
+"Better stay where we are till the shooting stops," said Don.
+
+It was good advice and the boys waited as quietly as they could.
+
+A few minutes later there was a volley and a shout, followed by
+the sound of rushing feet. Then there was quiet as the shots were
+heard receding.
+
+When none of their friends returned after a few minutes, the boys
+ventured to the door. There was no one in sight.
+
+"I wonder where they have all gone?" ventured Billie.
+
+"I expect that our friends have run away and some of Huerta's
+soldiers are chasing them."
+
+"If they do, they will run into an ambush," said Adrian.
+
+Which is exactly what happened.
+
+"That won't do us any good," said Don. "Now that we are alone, I
+vote that we get back to the railroad track. We won't get lost if
+we follow that and a train may come along."
+
+The advice seemed good and they started to go.
+
+"Hold on," exclaimed Billie. "Let's see if we can't find some
+grub to take with us."
+
+"Great head!" laughed Adrian.
+
+"Great stomach, you mean," from Donald. "It never lets him
+forget."
+
+The boys plundered through the house. The owners must have been
+scared away, for nothing had been disturbed. In the kitchen they
+found a big plate of _tortillas_, half a baked kid, and some
+wheat bread. This they appropriated.
+
+"We might as well have a blanket apiece," said Donald. "It is
+only another case of a fair exchange. The Mexicans have our suit
+cases."
+
+Each took a blanket and Adrian was so fortunate after searching
+all over the house as to find a shotgun and a belt full of loaded
+shells that went with it.
+
+"If those shells were loaded with buckshot you'd be all right,"
+said Billie. "They're the----"
+
+His speech was interrupted by a cry that fairly made their blood
+run cold.
+
+"What's that?" and the three stopped as though they had been
+paralysed.
+
+Again came the cry, and with a single bound the boys were out in
+the open, each with his weapon ready for instant use.
+
+They could see no one, but there was the sound of something
+crashing through the brush which hid the railroad from the house.
+
+"Sounded like a wild cat," declared Donald.
+
+"Or a coyote," said Billie.
+
+"I'm sure it was a human voice," remarked Adrian. "Do you
+remember the Zuņis?" referring to another adventure told in the
+story of the "Broncho Rider Boys Along the Border."
+
+Even as he spoke there emerged from the brush the figure of a
+woman carrying in her arms a small child. Winged by fear, she was
+bounding along like an antelope.
+
+A moment later, and not two rods behind her, came forth a figure
+which the boys instantly recognized as a mountain lion.
+
+How the woman had succeeded in escaping it even for a moment was
+a mystery.
+
+In a second the three weapons spoke. The report was followed by a
+scream from the beast and a cry from the woman, both of whom fell
+lifeless to the earth--the beast dead and the woman in a swoon.
+
+"Take care of the woman, you two," said Adrian. "I'll examine the
+beast."
+
+No one stopped to question the order.
+
+Billie picked up the child which the woman had let fall, while
+Donald stooped down and felt the woman's pulse. Then he darted
+into the house and was back in a minute with a bucket half filled
+with water. With it he bathed the woman's temples and poured a
+little down her throat.
+
+In a couple of minutes she revived and looked around.
+
+"Mi niņa!" she gasped.
+
+"She's asking for her child," said Donald.
+
+Billie carried the little one over and stood it beside her.
+
+With a glad cry she snatched it in her arms and burst into tears.
+
+"She's all right," laughed Donald. "Now let's have a look at that
+animal."
+
+They walked over to where Adrian was watching the inanimate
+carcass.
+
+"Where did we hit him?" asked Billie.
+
+"I can see three places and one is big enough to throw a baseball
+through it."
+
+"That's from the shotgun," said Donald. "It's what did the
+business. Must have been buckshot and we were so close it didn't
+have a chance to scatter."
+
+"I'd sure like that hide," said Adrian.
+
+"We'll be in luck if we save our own," remarked Billie. "Unless
+we can do something for the woman, we'd better be jogging along."
+
+By this time the woman had risen to her feet and the boys could
+see that she was not a peon as they had supposed, but of the
+better class.
+
+"Where could she have come from?" queried Donald under his
+breath.
+
+"Suppose you ask her," laughed Adrian.
+
+Donald did so. At first she was too dazed to answer, but after
+Donald spoke a few words quietly and in his very best Spanish,
+she was able to answer his questions.
+
+"Is this your house?" he asked.
+
+"No, Seņor; my house is down the mountain."
+
+"What are you doing here alone?"
+
+She gave him a startled glance and then hugged the child closer
+to her breast.
+
+"You need not fear us," were the reassuring words.
+
+"The soldiers came," she said slowly. "They had already killed
+the others. They would have killed me."
+
+"The soldiers?"
+
+"Yes. They were looking for my husband. They said he was hidden
+in the house; but he was not. He is with Gen. Carranza."
+
+"When was this?"
+
+"Yesterday. I have been in the mountains all night. There was a
+fight a few minutes ago and I saw them pass. Then I came here,
+when the awful beast sprang out," and again she drew the child to
+her.
+
+"Are you hungry?"
+
+"Si, seņor!"
+
+It was the child that answered.
+
+In an instant Billie's hand was in his pack and he held out the
+_tortillas_, which both mother and child took and ate ravenously.
+
+After their hunger had been appeased, they questioned the woman
+further, telling her they were going to Vera Cruz.
+
+"If you will come with me down the mountain, you can hide in my
+house," she said.
+
+"We don't want to hide," laughed Billie. "We want to get to Vera
+Cruz. However, we'll see you home, if you don't mind."
+
+Without more words the woman led the way, Billie insisting upon
+carrying the little girl.
+
+After a walk of more than two hours, the woman stopped in a
+little clearing from which a view of the mountainside for miles
+could be gained.
+
+"There is my house," she said, pointing to the roof of a really
+noble mansion constructed of stone. "But what is that flag I see
+on top of it?"
+
+The boys took one good look at it and then they let out a wild
+yell.
+
+"Hurrah!" they cried. "It's the Stars and Stripes."
+
+"I don't know what it means away out here," said Donald, "but
+wherever it is it means something. Come on!" and he dashed down
+the mountainside, followed by the others.
+
+
+
+
+CHAPTER XI.
+
+FRIENDS IN DISTRESS.
+
+
+Half an hour later the boys stopped beside a ruined wall in which
+was a still more ruined gate.
+
+It was the home of Gen. Luiz Blanco, whose wife and child it was
+that the boys had saved from the mountain lion.
+
+Above the house, on a lofty turret, waved the American flag--a
+fact which caused the boys to enter the gate and approach the
+house without hesitation.
+
+But when they reached the great front door leading into the
+patio, they found it shut and barred.
+
+Here they knocked loudly.
+
+For some minutes there was no reply, despite repeated knocks, but
+finally a voice called out in English:
+
+"Who's there?"
+
+"American boys in trouble."
+
+"What?" was the surprised reply. "Say it again, till I see if it
+is true."
+
+"It's true all right, all right," said Billie. "If you don't
+believe it we'll sing the 'Star Spangled Banner,' or 'Hail
+Columbia'."
+
+They could hear some one removing the bars and a moment later the
+gate swung open, and a huge, bewhiskered man in ragged garments
+and a Winchester rifle in his hand stood before them.
+
+"Come in quick," he commanded, "and let's get this gate barred.
+There is no knowing when that band of robbers will be back."
+
+"Robbers?" queried Billie, as he set the little girl on the
+ground and extended his hand to the man. "What robbers?"
+
+"They call themselves soldiers," and the man seized Billie's hand
+and gave it a mighty grip, which made even Broncho Billie wince,
+"but what do we care for them? With four Americans we can defy a
+hundred of them." Then, as Donald and Adrian finished barring the
+gate: "It's certainly good for sore eyes to see such faces," and
+he grasped each boy in turn.
+
+"Well, we're mighty glad to see you," replied Donald. "We
+expected to find the place deserted."
+
+"How did you know anything about the place?"
+
+"This lady told us it is her home."
+
+"What?" from the man. "Do you mean to tell me this is the Seņora
+Blanco?"
+
+"Even so, Seņor," replied the lady. "No one would recognize me in
+these rags and grief. Oh, Seņor, had it not been for these brave
+Americans I should have been devoured by a lion."
+
+"You don't tell me. But I'd know they were the real thing. Their
+faces show it. But come, let's go into the house. You'll excuse
+me, Seņora, for taking possession of your castle."
+
+"It is yours, Seņor. Do with it as you will. But will you not do
+me the favor of your name?"
+
+"I beg your pardon, Seņora. I had forgotten. I am Ebenezer Black,
+who owns the ranch across the valley. My daughter and I were out
+on a hunt for some lost cattle when we were waylaid by this
+so-called company of soldiers. I drove them off but my daughter
+was wounded and I made for this place. Finding no one at home, I
+took possession."
+
+"I am so glad, Seņor. And where is your daughter now?"
+
+"Sitting in a big armchair, nursing a wounded arm."
+
+"Oh, let us hasten," cried the seņora. "I may be of some
+assistance."
+
+They hurried into the house and into the great library, now all
+in disorder and strewn with bits of cigars and cigarettes. In one
+of the big leather chairs sat a girl of some sixteen or
+seventeen, with her left arm in a sling, but in her right hand
+she held a glistening revolver. She was very slight, but dressed
+in a riding costume of unique design, and with a wealth of soft
+brown hair hanging just to her collar. With just a touch of
+pallor due to the wound, the boys thought her the most beautiful
+girl they had ever seen, not excepting Pedro's sister Guadalupe.
+
+That the girl was surprised at the addition to the party goes
+without saying. She looked first at her father, then at the
+newcomers and then back to her father, as much as to ask: "Who
+are they?"
+
+"This," said Mr. Black as the seņora came forward, "is the lady
+of the house and her daughter. These are American boys, as you
+can see, although you haven't had a chance to know many American
+boys. I don't know their names, but names don't count. I'll vouch
+for them."
+
+"We are very highly complimented," laughed Donald, "but I shall
+be pleased to introduce us. I am Donald Mackay. Now that you know
+me, I will introduce my friends, Adrian Sherwood, ranch owner and
+good fellow, and William Stonewall Jackson Winkle, better known
+as 'Broncho Billie.' We are known as the Broncho Rider Boys."
+
+"Oh, Father," exclaimed the girl, "I've read about them. I have a
+book some one sent me from the United States telling about their
+adventures at the Keystone ranch."
+
+"You don't say so," from her father. "I didn't know they were
+such celebrities. Such being the case, young gentlemen, allow me
+to introduce my daughter, Josephine, commonly called Josie. Now
+then, how did you all come here?"
+
+As briefly as possible Adrian related their adventures since they
+left the City of Mexico the previous morning; told about the
+information contained in the telegram from Gen. Maas, and wound
+up by saying: "We may be at war with Mexico right now for all we
+know."
+
+"Well, now what do you think of that?" exclaimed Mr. Black. "I
+just knew I had a reason when I hoisted that flag. It's one Josie
+always carries in her saddle bags. It makes her feel safer, she
+says."
+
+"And I hope she is safer," exclaimed Billie, "with it waving over
+her to-day, than she would be without it."
+
+"At any rate she has more protection than she had a few hours
+ago," ventured the seņora. "I shall never forget how I was
+protected."
+
+"I'd feel a whole lot better," said Donald, "if I had some other
+weapon. A Colt does very well in a tight place; but I certainly
+miss my Marlin."
+
+"We formerly had quite a supply of arms," was the explanation
+offered by the seņora, "but when Gen. Blanco went to join Gen.
+Carranza he armed all his men and it took about everything we
+had. However, there are a few weapons left--unless," she added as
+an afterthought, "the Huerta soldiers have discovered their
+hiding place."
+
+She led the way to the cellar and pointed to a spot at one side.
+
+"If you will brush away the dirt that covers the floor about
+there," she said, "you will find a large slab. This can be
+raised, and underneath there should still be several good
+rifles."
+
+Donald and Billie, who had accompanied her, while Adrian remained
+up stairs with the others, quickly followed her instructions. The
+edges of the slab were exposed to view and after some effort the
+opening was revealed. In it were four rifles and an old-fashioned
+cannon. The rifles were not of the latest make, but two were
+magazine rifles and were a decided improvement over revolvers in
+case it came to defending the house.
+
+"I suppose that old cannon might be mounted on the roof somehow
+and made effective," said Donald after he and Billie had
+inspected the other arms. Then to the seņora: "Is there any
+ammunition?"
+
+"There was powder in that wine cask," she replied, "but I don't
+know whether there is any left. The balls for the cannon are on
+the roof."
+
+The boys examined the cask and found it contained quite a
+quantity of powder. Then they all returned to the library and
+made their report.
+
+"Not a very heavy armament to withstand a siege, is it?" was Mr.
+Black's comment. "Half a dozen rifles with about a hundred
+cartridges, an old cannon that might explode any minute, and four
+revolvers. It won't do."
+
+"What else can we do?" asked Billie.
+
+"Why, now that there are four of us, we'll cross the valley to my
+house. It is just as well located to withstand a siege as this
+and it is thoroughly armed and provisioned."
+
+"Suppose we have to fight?"
+
+"Then we'll fight."
+
+"But you forget your daughter and the seņora and her child."
+
+"I didn't forget Josie," was the reply, "and, wounded as she is,
+she can take care of herself; but I don't know about the others.
+They would be a handicap. Have you anything better to offer?"
+
+Billie scratched his head.
+
+"Not for the moment."
+
+"Well, I have," exclaimed Adrian.
+
+"I thought it was about time Ad woke up," laughed Donald. "Let's
+have it."
+
+"Captain Lopez told us that there was a large body of Carranza's
+troops down the railroad a short distance. If he meant by a short
+distance six or eight miles they can not be more than a couple of
+miles from where we now are. I feel sure that the skirmish we
+passed through has proved disastrous to the Huerta forces and I
+am willing to go out and find Captain Lopez and bring relief."
+
+"And I'll go with you," said Billie.
+
+"I can do just as well alone. If I am not captured by the other
+side I shall make it easily, and," he added, "I am sure I shall
+not be captured, for I can lick any squad of peons that I'm
+likely to meet."
+
+"You are a brave boy," said Josie, a bit of praise which brought
+the color to Adrian's cheeks and was an added incentive for
+bravery.
+
+"But why shouldn't I go?" insisted Billie.
+
+"You may be needed here. This house is a marked place and if a
+small band of the Huerta forces has escaped, this will be one of
+the places where they will rally."
+
+"Your friend is right," agreed Mr. Black. "I admire the pluck of
+all of you, but his plan is best. The sooner he goes the better
+and we will make the house as impregnable as we can. Let us hope
+he is successful."
+
+"You can bet on me," was Adrian's reply as he shouldered his
+rifle, looked to the fastening of his belt, and descended to the
+gate, where Mr. Black let him out.
+
+After Adrian had gone the others inspected the house and its
+approaches for the purpose of determining where they might mount
+the cannon. They finally decided upon a spot in an angle of the
+roof, where a chimney offered some protection and from which it
+commanded the main approach to the house.
+
+"I'm not sure we will be able to get the cannon up there,"
+laughed Billie as they passed through the library on their way to
+the cellar, "but we'll do the best we can."
+
+"Don't worry," was Josie's reply. "You don't know how strong Dad
+is."
+
+The boys thought they could guess, but when they saw Mr. Black
+pick up the cannon as though it had been a log of cord wood and
+carry it upstairs they concluded that Josie was right.
+
+"When I was a young man," was Mr. Black's only comment, "I was
+considered the strongest man in our county. I reckon if it came
+to a pinch I'd be a pretty hard man to handle even yet."
+
+The boys had no doubt of it.
+
+By the time the cannon was mounted and loaded the sun was nearing
+the top of the mountains behind them and a few minutes later it
+sank from sight.
+
+"It won't be long now until we shall have to depend upon our ears
+instead of our eyes for our protection," said Donald. "Where is
+the best place to watch?"
+
+"I'll tell you what I think," said Billie. "Let one watch from
+the roof and the other down by the gate. The one on the roof can
+hear noises from a distance. The one by the gate can hear any one
+who may be sneaking around."
+
+"I'll watch on the roof," said the seņora. "I know the chirp of
+every bird that belongs here. I shall know in a minute if
+anything happens that is unusual."
+
+"And I'll watch by the gate," declared Donald.
+
+"Only till midnight," said Billie, "when I'll relieve you."
+
+"And I'll relieve the seņora," said Josie.
+
+"Where do I come in?" queried Mr. Black.
+
+"You are the general, Dad. You can be everywhere."
+
+Sentry duty is always nerve-racking business. If you have ever
+been obliged to sit alone in the dark and watch with your ears,
+you will understand this and you will understand how Donald felt
+sitting alone by the barred gate in the dark, 3,000 miles from
+home and in the midst of a war-stricken country.
+
+Even the north star looked unfamiliar, so close was it to the
+northern horizon. Once in a while he fancied he could hear the
+seņora weeping, but for at least three hours this was all he
+heard.
+
+Then he heard a distinct "S-s-s-s," which was the signal agreed
+upon between him and the seņora if she heard anything unusual.
+
+In an instant he was on the alert. Yes, he was sure he heard
+footsteps near the gate, without. Then there were some minutes of
+silence, then the hiss of a fuse and a moment later an explosion
+which blew the gate from its hinges.
+
+
+
+
+CHAPTER XII.
+
+A NIGHT ATTACK.
+
+
+Realizing in an instant that the hiss of the fuse, like the
+rattle of the snake, betokened danger, Donald drew hastily back
+into the patio in time to be out of reach of the explosion which
+splintered the gate and tore it from its hinges.
+
+Then, with finger on trigger, he awaited the coming of the foe.
+
+It was a tense moment and the boy's heart beat fast. He had been
+in many trying situations, but never in one where the safety of
+so many others seemed to depend upon him.
+
+He heard the sound of oncoming feet and intuitively threw himself
+upon the ground behind a little stone paling which surrounded a
+dismantled fountain.
+
+The act undoubtedly saved his life, for an instant later there
+was a scattering volley and he could hear the bullets hit against
+the stone wall of the house behind him.
+
+In an instant he pressed the trigger and a yell which followed
+gave evidence that the bullet found a mark.
+
+He fired again, but evidently without effect, and a minute later
+a light at one side of the patio told him that the enemy, or a
+part of them at least, were inside the gate.
+
+As the light flared up Donald fired again, but again without
+avail; but a moment later the cannon on the roof spoke.
+
+"So," he thought, "Billie and Mr. Black are at last awake."
+
+At the report of the cannon the light went out and there was the
+rush of scurrying feet, followed by a shout.
+
+The shout indicated that those within the patio had withdrawn to
+the other side of the gate.
+
+Feeling sure that the patio was now free of the enemy for a time
+at least, Donald retreated in the dark to the house and was soon
+inside. At the first landing he encountered Josie, sitting on a
+step with a ready revolver. He was able to see her by the dim
+light of an oil lamp which hung from the ceiling.
+
+"Where are the others?" he asked.
+
+"On the roof. They are trying to locate the enemy."
+
+Donald ascended to the roof.
+
+"I have a plan," he said, "which will enable us to get in another
+shot. Load with shrapnel and I will see if I can't make some sort
+of a light outside the gate. Be ready on the instant."
+
+He ran downstairs and again crept out into the dark patio. He had
+noticed in the afternoon that there were several bundles of straw
+in the stable.
+
+Taking one of these under his arm, he approached the angle in the
+wall near the outer gate. He lighted a match and as the flame
+caught the straw he flung the bundle over the wall, at the same
+time darting inside the stable.
+
+He had hardly found a safe position when the cannon spoke again
+and evidently with telling effect.
+
+But before those inside the walls had time to think, the enemy
+rushed in, determined to capture the place.
+
+In the dark they rushed to the house, but once under the gallery
+which extended all around the inside of the patio, they produced
+a light which enabled them to find the doors.
+
+The light also enabled Donald to see those at the door and he
+fired from the stable.
+
+For a moment the fire in the rear disconcerted the enemy and
+several fled, but others took possession of the doorway and
+forced their way in.
+
+The first one who entered fell by a bullet from Josie's revolver;
+but realizing her weakness she jumped and fled to the floor
+above, where she met her father coming down.
+
+"They have gained possession of the house," Mr. Black told Billie
+as he and the seņora also descended from the roof. "We must now
+guard the stairway. We should be able to hold it indefinitely."
+
+This prediction seemed correct, as the first four or five men who
+attempted to reach the second story never got more than their
+heads above the floor.
+
+After several trials of this sort, they withdrew and held a
+council of war. The result was that a few minutes later a voice
+called out from below:
+
+"If you will surrender, your lives will be spared."
+
+In reply Mr. Black shouted: "If you do not withdraw and leave us
+in peace you will meet a fearful punishment."
+
+His reply was greeted with jeers.
+
+"I wonder how many of them there are?" queried Billie.
+
+"Quite a bunch from the sound." Then, a moment later, "They seem
+to be going out."
+
+"Maybe they think we will come down," said Josie.
+
+"But we must not," exclaimed the seņora. "They would kill us.
+Surely our friend must bring us aid soon."
+
+"Let us hope so," was Mr. Black's reply.
+
+And hope was the best they could do.
+
+There was no further attack, although they could hear the sound
+of voices in the patio below.
+
+After a long period of quiet Mr. Black ventured the assertion
+that they were waiting for daylight, and his surmise proved
+correct.
+
+No attempt was made to force an entrance until the first faint
+light of day began to appear. Then there was renewed activity
+below and a few minutes later the sound of a single shot.
+
+"I wonder what that was," exclaimed Billie.
+
+No one could answer, but had Billie been where he could see, he
+would have known that it was Donald who fired.
+
+As the light came, Donald, peering through a crack in the stable,
+had seen a man climbing up the side of the house toward the roof.
+Without a moment's hesitation he fired and the man dropped, shot
+through the right hand.
+
+But the shot was Donald's undoing. The flash of his gun was
+detected and half a dozen men rushed his hiding place and took
+him prisoner.
+
+He was at once taken before the captain of the band and
+questioned as to the number of defenders and as to the
+whereabouts of Gen. Blanco.
+
+To all the questions Donald gave an evasive answer.
+
+"If you will tell me where Gen. Blanco is," said the captain, "I
+will give you your freedom."
+
+"That's easy," was Donald's reply. "He is with Gen. Carranza."
+
+"I don't believe it."
+
+"Well, I can't help that, nor does what you believe make any
+difference. It is the truth and what you may believe has nothing
+whatever to do with it."
+
+The captain scowled.
+
+"Who is it then, that is defending the house?"
+
+"Americans. You had better let us go, or it will be the worse
+for you. We had a safe conduct from Gen. Huerta, but we were
+betrayed."
+
+"If I had my way," said the captain, "I'd shoot every American in
+the whole of Mexico."
+
+"I don't see why," from Donald. "We have nothing against you."
+
+"Take him away," ordered the captain, "and see that he does not
+escape. Now let us capture the others."
+
+There was a rush for the house as Donald was led back to the
+stable.
+
+Billie and Mr. Black heard them coming.
+
+"Go to the roof," commanded Mr. Black, speaking to the two
+females, "and keep yourselves and the little girl out of sight.
+We will hold them back here as long as we can and then we will
+also come to the roof."
+
+The command had hardly been obeyed than the Mexicans began to
+crowd up the stairs. They were met with shot after shot, but at
+last all the weapons were empty.
+
+"Run for the roof," said Mr. Black as he arose to his feet and
+with his heavy boot kicked a head which was just coming up the
+stairs.
+
+Billie obeyed and a minute later the fugitives had gathered upon
+the last place of safety left.
+
+"If we only had some ammunition," moaned Billie. "Can't we do
+something?"
+
+Then, as in answer to his own query, he picked up a twelve-pound
+cannon ball that lay on the roof and, raising it above his head
+with both hands, hurled it through the opening upon those below.
+
+This unexpected attack caused the besiegers to draw back, but
+only for a moment. Then they came on again. In his desperation,
+Mr. Black, with almost superhuman strength, picked up the cannon
+itself, just as Billie had picked up the ball, and hurled it down
+the stairs.
+
+Half a dozen men fell beneath its weight, while the others,
+frightened at such an exhibition of strength, fell back in
+dismay.
+
+A shout from the captain urged them forward, but ere they could
+gather their courage for another rush there came the sound of a
+volley in the patio below and a minute later Adrian rushed up the
+stairs, followed by Captain Lopez and a squad of his soldiers.
+
+Taken in the rear and entirely by surprise, the Huerta forces
+threw down their arms and cried for mercy, and in less than five
+minutes after the arrival of Captain Lopez and his men, the
+entire force, or as many as remained, were prisoners.
+
+
+
+
+CHAPTER XIII.
+
+A NARROW ESCAPE.
+
+
+Two days later the three boys sat on the verandah of Mr. Black's
+commodious house awaiting the call to breakfast. Under escort of
+Captain Lopez' men they had crossed the valley between Mr.
+Black's and Gen. Blanco's the day after the night attack and had
+spent the time since in getting a much needed rest.
+
+"It's less than four days since we left the City of Mexico,"
+remarked Donald, "but it seems like a month. I wonder how matters
+stand at Vera Cruz?"
+
+"From that telegram from Gen. Maas, that we took from the
+lieutenant, Admiral Fletcher may have taken the city," said
+Billie.
+
+"I hope not," from Adrian.
+
+"Why?" asked both the others.
+
+"'Cause I'd like to be there when it happens."
+
+"Yes, so would I," echoed Billie.
+
+"If he has taken it," ventured Donald, "we may have difficulty
+getting through the Mexican lines."
+
+"Well, the best thing we can do," asserted Adrian, "is to get
+somewhere and find out what is going on just as soon as we can."
+
+The call to breakfast interrupted their conversation, but as soon
+as they were seated at the table, they broached the matter to Mr.
+Black.
+
+"I expect you are right," he said, "but I'd like to have you stay
+with me a while. It's mighty lonesome here for Josie and me."
+
+"If we are at war with the Mexicans," remarked Billie, "this will
+be an unhealthy place for an American, I imagine. I should think
+you would want to take your daughter away from here."
+
+"Oh, Josie and I are not afraid, are we, Josie?"
+
+"No indeed, Dad. We are a match for a regiment of Mexicans when
+we are on our own ground."
+
+But in spite of the assertion made by Mr. Black he admitted to
+the boys after breakfast when Josie was not present that he
+wished his daughter was safe in Vera Cruz.
+
+"Why don't you go with us?" asked Adrian. "We should be pleased
+to act as an escort."
+
+"Yes," echoed Billie. "We'll see you through."
+
+"I'll tell you what I had thought of doing," said Mr. Black.
+"It's only a good day's ride a-horseback to Moreno. We have many
+friends there with whom I could leave her. If you boys would act
+as an escort that far you would be no farther from Vera Cruz than
+you are now and I believe you would have a better chance in
+reaching the port over the Tierra Blanca division than on the
+main line."
+
+"Whether we would or not," replied Adrian, "we should be glad to
+act as your escort."
+
+"There is another thing in favor of that route," continued Mr.
+Black. "The farther we keep from the main line of railroad, the
+less likely we are to fall in with the Huerta forces. The
+southern territory as far as Santa Lucrecia is practically in the
+hands of Carranza."
+
+"From what you say," was Donald's comment, "it is greatly to our
+advantage to do as you wish. Let's consider the matter settled
+and start at once."
+
+"It's too late in the day to start now," was Mr. Black's reply.
+"We shall wait until to-morrow morning and be on our way by
+daylight. I don't want to be riding through the mountains after
+dark. There are wild animals that are worse than the soldiers."
+
+"As the Seņora Blanco can testify," laughed Billie. "Every time I
+think of what a close shave she had, it gives me a chill."
+
+That afternoon Mr. Black brought out half a dozen horses for the
+inspection of his guests.
+
+"A day's ride on a strange horse isn't always an easy task," he
+explained, "and I thought you might amuse yourself trying these.
+You can each pick out the one that suits him best."
+
+It was a task which suited the boys better than any they had
+undertaken in days, and as they had not only Mr. Black, but Josie
+and the General's wife for spectators, they were more than
+pleased to show their dexterity after true cowboy fashion.
+
+The remainder of the afternoon was therefore spent in riding,
+throwing the lariat and in shooting, much to the gratification of
+Mr. Black, who declared he had never seen a better exhibition of
+its kind.
+
+As a result of their experience, the boys picked out three
+medium-sized horses, which Mr. Black emphatically stated showed
+their good judgment of horse flesh, as completely as their riding
+had proved their horsemanship.
+
+They were all in the saddle early the following morning, Josie's
+wound having healed sufficiently to permit her to ride without
+danger.
+
+Early morning in the tropics is the pleasantest time of the day,
+and although the road from Mr. Black's hacienda to Moreno would take
+them from an altitude of over four thousand feet down to about two
+thousand feet above sea level, they would be sufficiently up in
+the mountains to make riding fairly comfortable.
+
+The route chosen took the little party first to the headquarters
+of the Carranza force operating in that section. They were warmly
+greeted by General Dorantes, the commanding officer, who
+furnished them with a guard of four men and passes through the
+lines, "if," he added as he bade them good luck, "you should find
+it necessary to pass our lines. If my reports are correct, we are
+in possession of all the territory to the south."
+
+For hours the cavalcade rode on without incident, stopping only
+long enough to partake of a mid-day meal at the hacienda of Don
+Alvaro Flores, a friend of Mr. Black's. Late in the afternoon,
+however, when about six miles from their destination, there came
+to their ears the sound of heavy firing--of field pieces mingled
+with the occasional roll of a machine gun.
+
+They stopped and listened intently.
+
+"Which direction do you make the firing to be?" asked Mr. Black
+of the corporal in command of the escort.
+
+"In the direction of Tierra Blanca, sir. It sounds as though our
+forces might have been attacked."
+
+"How will that affect our journey?"
+
+"Hard to tell, sir. If we win, as we shall, the enemy may fall
+back toward Santa Lucrecia, or they may retreat toward Moreno. If
+you will take my advice, you will halt here until the action is
+over."
+
+The advice seemed most excellent and the cavalcade came to a halt
+and the riders dismounted to give themselves a much-needed rest.
+
+The firing lasted something like twenty minutes, then suddenly
+ceased, with the exception of an occasional "Boom!"
+
+"It sounds as though we had beaten them off," said the corporal.
+
+"Is there any way that we can tell in which direction they have
+retreated?"
+
+"Only by a reconnoiter."
+
+"Which is our long suit," declared Billie. "You just stay here
+with the guard, Mr. Black, and we three will soon have a report."
+
+Looking to their arms, with which they had been well supplied by
+their host before leaving the hacienda, the boys rode forward
+toward an elevation something like a mile distant. From this they
+hoped to get a view of the country.
+
+There was a fairly level road and they dashed along at a good
+rate despite their long ride. The horses were as hard as iron and
+the boys did not know the meaning of the word tired.
+
+Reaching the top of the hill, they found a space, from which they
+could see clear across the valley through which ran the railroad
+from Santa Lucrecia to Vera Cruz. To the right, some miles away,
+they could see a good-sized little city which their common sense
+told them must be Tierra Blanca. To the left, but nearer, was the
+smaller town of Moreno, for which they were headed.
+
+Between the two towns, and coming directly toward them, was a
+band of galloping horsemen, probably one hundred or more in
+number.
+
+"Great Scott!" was Billie's ejaculation as he caught sight of the
+horsemen, "they're coming right at us."
+
+"I believe you are right," from Donald. "They seem to be on this
+very road."
+
+"What would you take them to be?" was Billie's next question.
+
+"Give it up," replied Donald.
+
+"I'll bet I can make a good guess," said Adrian. "They are a
+flying column of Huerta cavalry, sent out to test the Carranza
+lines. They have paid their respects to Tierra Blanca and now
+they are headed for Cordoba."
+
+"They'll never get there," said Billie. "They'll run into General
+Dorante's men."
+
+"But if it's a surprise, they'll cut their way through."
+
+"It's up to us to see that it is not a surprise!" cried Donald.
+"Come on!" and he turned and dashed back the road they had come.
+
+In less than five minutes they were where they had left their
+companions. In another two minutes they had told their story and
+in another minute the corporal and his men were on their way back
+toward General Dorante's headquarters.
+
+"It's only a question of whose horses are the best," said Mr.
+Black. "And now let us to cover."
+
+Leaving the highway, the Americans turned sharply to the left and
+dashed for the shelter of a piece of woodland something like a
+half a mile away. Pell-mell they went over rocks and shrubs,
+regardless of themselves or their horses, and succeeded in
+reaching the friendly cover just about three minutes before the
+cavalry came into sight over the hill.
+
+"We're all right now," said Mr. Black, "if the troopers will
+stick to the road, but if they should take it into their heads to
+scatter, we might have trouble."
+
+With eager eyes the boys watched the oncoming horsemen, prepared
+to flee for their lives if they should be discovered, as they
+realized how useless would be any resistance.
+
+Nearer and nearer they came until the leaders were at the very
+spot they had just left, and then with a rush they passed by,
+turning neither to the right nor to the left.
+
+Every one in the party heaved a deep sigh of relief.
+
+"It's a wonder some of them didn't stop," said Billie.
+
+"Oh, I don't know," laughed Adrian. "Look yonder," and he pointed
+to the brow of the hill, where another, but much smaller body of
+horsemen had appeared. "They evidently didn't intend to have
+their mission interfered with by fighting a rear-guard skirmish."
+
+"I think the best thing we can do," said Mr. Black, "is to
+surrender ourselves to the pursuers. They are evidently
+Carranzistas and our passes will protect us."
+
+Breaking off a piece of bamboo, Mr. Black tied a handkerchief to
+it and raising it above his head the little party rode out of the
+woods. They were sighted at once and a party of horsemen dashed
+toward them, and surrounded them.
+
+It was as they had expected and Gen. Dorantes' passes were
+immediately recognized by the officer in command. He was much
+pleased at the information given him concerning the corporal and
+thanked the boys in the name of Gen. Carranza for their good
+offices. He furthermore detached an escort of a dozen men to see
+that they reached Moreno in safety and commended them to the care
+of the jefe politico, with the verbal instruction that the boys
+be allowed to proceed on their way to Vera Cruz at their will.
+
+
+
+
+CHAPTER XIV.
+
+APRIL TWENTY-ONE.
+
+
+"Boys," said Mr. Black the following morning as they were
+preparing to pay a visit to the jefe politico, "I want you to do
+me a favor."
+
+The boys looked at him in surprise.
+
+"Well, what is it?" asked Donald, when Mr. Black did not
+immediately continue.
+
+"I want you to accept, as a mark of my appreciation of your
+bravery and good services, the horses upon which you are mounted
+and the accoutrements."
+
+The look of surprise on the faces of the boys deepened.
+
+"I am sure, sir," replied Donald, speaking for the others, "we
+should be pleased to accept them if we were expecting to remain
+in the country. We hope, however, to leave Vera Cruz in a very
+few days."
+
+"Boys," and Mr. Black's face was most serious, "there is no
+knowing when you will reach Vera Cruz; much less leave it."
+
+"What do you mean?" from Billie.
+
+"I had a long talk with my friend, Don Ramon, last night after
+you were in bed and he tells me that the railroad between here
+and Vera Cruz is in the hands of Gen. Maas, the other side of
+Guayabo, and there is almost no chance of your being allowed to
+pass through the lines."
+
+"Why not?" from Adrian.
+
+"Well, you see, since we have heard anything, relations between
+the two countries have become more and more strained and the
+United States has practically declared a blockade on Vera Cruz.
+The entire Atlantic fleet is assembled outside and there is
+liable to be a clash at any time."
+
+"Then we'll accept the horses, Mr. Black," spoke up Donald, "and
+we'll ride to Vera Cruz. It can't be more than fifty miles."
+
+"Forty-six by rail," said Mr. Black. "I kind of thought you might
+like to try and make it, is why I want to give you the horses,"
+and the speaker smiled knowingly.
+
+"The sooner we start the better, I expect," said Adrian.
+
+"Yes; after you pay your respects to the mayor."
+
+The foregoing conversation explains how it happened that on the
+morning of April 21, 1914, the Broncho Rider Boys looked down
+from a little hill, the top of which was covered by tropical
+foliage, upon the harbor of Vera Cruz, with the American fleet in
+the offing.
+
+By a circuitous route and by two nights of riding, hiding in the
+day, the boys had reached this spot about an hour after sunrise.
+
+"Whew!" was Billie's exclamation as he looked out across the
+harbor at the men-of-war flying the American flag. "There's a
+bunch of them, isn't there?"
+
+"Sure is," from Adrian, "and they look peaceable, too."
+
+"You never can tell by the looks of a toad how far it will jump,"
+laughed Donald. "But peaceable or warlike, I'd like mighty well
+to be on board one of them."
+
+"Here, too," from Billie. "I wonder how we're going to make it."
+
+"How would it do for one of us to try and get into town and find
+the American consul?" queried Adrian.
+
+"Fine," from Donald, "if he succeeded; but bad if he did not."
+
+"Then what had we better do?"
+
+"Give it up. Suppose we wait here a while and something may turn
+up."
+
+"I'd like to know what can turn up?" asked Billie.
+
+"I don't know; but I was thinking that one of the ships might
+happen to send a boat ashore for something. If we saw it coming,
+we could ride quickly into town."
+
+Adrian laughed. "I reckon it would be just as hard to get through
+the Mexican lines then as now. No! I'm going out to reconnoiter."
+
+It was an hour later when he returned.
+
+"I've found a way," he said as he threw himself on the ground and
+fanned himself vigorously with his hat. "It's down by the water
+works. There are several Americans down there."
+
+"Good," said Billie. "Let's go. I'm getting mighty hungry."
+
+"Now don't be in a rush," cautioned Adrian. "There's a picket
+between here and there. We'll have to ride easy. You put the
+saddles on the horses. I'm pretty well tired. I want to tell you
+it's hot."
+
+Billie was busy with the horses when Don suddenly pointed out
+toward the American men-of-war.
+
+"Look!" he exclaimed. "There's something doing."
+
+And sure enough there was.
+
+Out from behind two of the largest vessels there suddenly darted
+a number of launches loaded with blue-jackets and marines.
+
+In another instant they had headed for the shore, while out
+behind them trailed the American flag.
+
+The boys sprang to their feet and watched the approaching boats
+with the utmost interest.
+
+"There must be a thousand of them!" exclaimed Billie.
+
+"More than that," said Donald, as his eyes ran over the oncoming
+boats. "There's nearer fifteen hundred."
+
+"And look there," cried Adrian. "See those two smaller ships
+moving in toward shore."
+
+"What do you suppose they are going to do?" asked Billie, all in
+a tremor of excitement.
+
+"Looks to me," replied Donald, "like they were going to capture
+the town."
+
+"Why, that's war!" from Adrian.
+
+"Well, isn't that what we've been expecting? I wish I knew what
+it all means."
+
+As some of the readers may not know what was the cause of the
+action it may be explained that a German steamship had arrived
+the night before loaded with arms for Huerta's army. Admiral
+Fletcher had no right to seize the German ship, so he determined
+to seize the port of Vera Cruz. Then if the arms were landed they
+would be in the hands of the Americans.
+
+"Well," declared Adrian, "whatever else it means, it means
+business."
+
+"Do you suppose the Mexicans will try to prevent the landing?"
+asked Billie.
+
+"We'll know in a minute, for they are most ashore," said Donald.
+
+Donald was right and in another minute a shot rang out followed
+by a rattle of musketry.
+
+"Flash! Flash! Bang! Bang!" spoke the howitzers in the foremost
+of the launches.
+
+Boom! Boom! Boom! came the sound of three guns from the ship
+nearest the city, which proved to be the _Prairie_.
+
+The crash of the six-inch shells as they struck in the city could
+be heard above the rattle of the rifle fire which had now become
+continuous.
+
+"It's a sure enough battle," cried Billie. "Come on! Let's go
+down!" and he flung himself onto his horse.
+
+"What would you do?" cried Donald, seizing Billie's horse by the
+bridle. "You'd be killed by the fire from our own guns. This is
+the best place we could be in while the firing is going on. As
+soon as our men have driven the Mexicans out of town, then we can
+go in."
+
+"But I want to take a hand in the fun," said Billie.
+
+"It's no fun, as you'll find after it's all over. No knowing how
+many of our boys are being lost, to say nothing of the Mexicans."
+
+"Look!" cried Adrian, who had not taken his eyes from the scene
+in the harbor. "There are a couple of other ships going into
+action."
+
+Billie turned at sound of Adrian's words. Sure enough, there came
+flashes from more guns, as the _Chester_ and _San Francisco_
+moved up into striking distance, although at that time the boys
+did not know the vessels' names.
+
+"What show will the Mexicans have against those guns!" exclaimed
+Donald. "They'll be driven out of town in short order."
+
+Once more Donald was right and after some minutes of firing, the
+boys realized that the rifle fire was becoming less.
+
+"If they retreat, which way do you suppose they will go?" queried
+Adrian.
+
+"I was just thinking about that," was Donald's reply. "What do
+you think, Billie?"
+
+"I should think along the main line of railroad."
+
+"And I imagine they'll retreat in every direction," said Adrian.
+
+"In which case," advised Donald, "we'd better be prepared to make
+a dash through."
+
+"Look here," from Billie. "Can't you see that the shots are all
+aimed at one particular place? I'm sure if we come around by the
+south, we can get in behind our men some way. It's a good deal
+better chance than to stay here to be shot down by the retreating
+Mexicans."
+
+The others were forced to admit the wisdom of Billie's advice and
+they proceeded to follow it.
+
+Mounting their horses, they rapidly retraced their steps for a
+couple of hundred yards and then headed for the harbor.
+
+They had not gone more than half a mile when they caught a
+glimpse of foot soldiers forming in line on what appeared to be a
+parade ground.
+
+"This is no place for us," exclaimed Donald. "Back to the woods."
+
+"I'm afraid it's too late," from Adrian.
+
+"I hate to run for it," was Billie's comment, "but it's the best
+we can do. I have no mind to fall into Mexican hands right now."
+
+He put spurs to his horse and dashed through a little clump of
+trees which grew by the way, closely followed by the other two.
+
+They seemed to have done just the right thing and were
+congratulating themselves upon their lucky escape, when they
+heard horses coming from the other way.
+
+Billie drew his horse up with a sudden turn.
+
+"It looks as though we'd have to fight for it, boys! If we do
+let's give a good account of ourselves."
+
+They drew their Winchesters for instant use.
+
+The sound of hoofbeats drew nearer and then there burst into
+sight from around a turn in the road a sight which caused the
+boys nearly to fall from their horses with laughter.
+
+Riding on a mule and followed by several peons on burros was the
+florid-faced gentleman whom they had met on the train the day
+they left the City of Mexico. He was bare-headed and his coat
+tails streamed out in the breeze. He had no saddle and was
+clinging onto the mule by grasping him around the neck.
+
+"Help! Help!" he cried as he caught sight of the boys. "I
+surrender. I surrender."
+
+Seeing the boys' horses directly in his path, the mule came to a
+sudden stop, with both feet stuck out before him. The result was
+that the florid-faced gentleman, who wished to head a company of
+marines to drive the Mexicans off the earth, shot forward over
+the mule's head and landed in a cactus bush.
+
+Now a cactus is not a pleasant thing to sit upon, even when the
+greatest care is used; but to be shot into it as from a catapult
+is more than any one can bear.
+
+With a yell that might have been heard half a mile, had it not
+been for the noise of the guns, the man scrambled to his feet and
+darted away down the hill, while the peons stopped at the
+unexpected sight of the boys.
+
+"Americanos!" they cried, and, tumbling off their burros, fell on
+their knees in abject terror, as though expecting that their end
+had come.
+
+
+
+
+CHAPTER XV.
+
+THE INSULT AVENGED.
+
+
+Perceiving that the advantage was on their side, the boys did not
+hesitate to profit by it.
+
+"Do as we bid," ordered Donald sternly, "and your lives will be
+saved. Disobey and we will not answer for the consequences."
+
+The kneeling peons uttered never a word, but raised their eyes
+with a look of surprise.
+
+"Get up," was the next command.
+
+The peons obeyed.
+
+"Now conduct us to the water front by a route where there are no
+Mexican soldiers."
+
+"Do you think you can trust them?" asked Billie.
+
+"At any sign of treachery, our first shot will be for them." Then
+to the peons: "Now march."
+
+Without a word the peons, five in number, started back over the
+route by which they had come but a minute before.
+
+"Where did the other American come from?" asked Billie of the
+peon nearest him as they rode along.
+
+"Quien sabe, seņor," was the hesitating response. "We saw him
+riding by and we followed him."
+
+"That's the way with loud talkers," remarked Adrian. "When the
+test comes they usually weaken."
+
+The firing, which had somewhat subsided for a few minutes,
+suddenly began again with renewed vigor, especially on the part
+of the ships.
+
+"Our boys are getting ready for another advance," said Billie,
+and his manner became greatly excited. "Let's get there in time
+to take part."
+
+"I'm willing," declared Adrian. "Come on!"
+
+The two boys dug their spurs into their horses and dashed
+forward, upsetting a couple of the peons in their flight.
+
+"Hold on!" called out Donald. "You'll get into trouble."
+
+Billie and Adrian paid no attention to his cry, whereupon he
+also put spurs to his horse, leaving the peons gaping with
+astonishment in the middle of the road.
+
+And now the boys came into sight of the water front where the
+fighting was going on. It was at the instant that the order had
+been given to clear the space around the custom house, and the
+boys saw the marines advance on the double quick.
+
+The Mexicans gave way, but volley after volley was poured down
+upon the advancing Americans from the roofs of houses and from
+nearby church towers.
+
+There were several shots in rapid succession from the _Chester_,
+which had drawn in more closely, every one of which struck a
+tower where a large force of Mexicans had gathered.
+
+The tower toppled and fell, carrying many with it.
+
+"Hurrah!" cried Billie. "Give it to them!" and, firing his rifle
+as he went, he rode right down into the main street.
+
+"He'll be killed by our own men!" cried Donald.
+
+But he was not. Instead he dashed into the open space in front of
+the custom house, just as the marines swept by, his hat off and
+his rifle cracking as fast as he could fire.
+
+Seeing that the danger from the marines was past, Donald and
+Adrian fell in behind Billie, just as an officer came around the
+corner at the head of another company.
+
+Espying the boys, he halted his command.
+
+"What are you doing here?" he demanded.
+
+"We just came to town," replied Billie, "and we're trying to help
+avenge the insult to the flag."
+
+"Good!" was the emphatic reply. "Fall in behind us. You may be of
+service."
+
+The boys obeyed and followed the company as it swept up the
+street. Presently they came to a barricade, behind which the
+marines had taken a stand. The boys expected the command to halt,
+but instead they passed the barricade and pushed onward toward
+the outskirts of the city.
+
+All the time there was a continuous fire upon them by men
+secreted on the roofs of houses.
+
+"I'd clean out those snipers if I were in command," said Donald
+to his companions.
+
+The words were hardly out of his mouth ere another company of
+marines made its appearance and the men dashed into the houses on
+either side of the street.
+
+"Somebody has the same idea, Don," was Billie's comment as they
+rode along.
+
+Two blocks farther came the order to halt and entrench. A minute
+later the officer called the boys toward him.
+
+"Would you rather lend us your horses, or act as orderlies?" he
+asked.
+
+"If it's all the same to you," was the reply, "we'll serve as
+orderlies."
+
+"Very well. Will you," turning to Adrian, "go back to the custom
+house and tell Captain Rush that we have reached our position.
+You," to Billie, "ride with all speed to the landing and say that
+the enemy has retreated toward the water works. They should not
+be allowed to stop long enough to do any damage."
+
+The two boys were off like the wind to carry the orders.
+
+"Anything for me?" asked Donald.
+
+"Not for the present. Better dismount and get behind something."
+
+Two minutes later Adrian pulled up in front of the Custom House
+and delivered his message, while Billie kept on to the water's
+edge.
+
+"Do you know where the water works are?" asked the officer to
+whom Billie gave his order.
+
+"Yes, sir!"
+
+"Then lead us to it."
+
+Without a word Billie obeyed and the Jackies followed on the run.
+
+The information was evidently received none too soon, for they
+encountered quite a force of Mexicans, guarding the works.
+
+A volley from the bluejackets was returned by a scattering fire
+and the Mexicans turned and fled.
+
+But the volley had been sufficient to lose Billie his mount, as
+his horse came to his knees with a bullet in his shoulder.
+
+Without waiting to see the cause of Billie's fall any more than
+to ask if he was hit, the Jackies pushed on toward the water
+works, leaving Billie to look out for himself as best he could
+until the work in hand was completed.
+
+"This is sure enough tough luck," was Billie's comment as he
+helped the horse to his feet and examined the wound. "It will lay
+him up for a week."
+
+He took the horse by the bridle and led him slowly back toward
+the Custom House, where he reported to an officer and hunted up
+Adrian.
+
+"What had we better do now?" he asked. "I'd like to find a place
+to tend to my horse."
+
+"The fighting seems about over," was Adrian's reply, "and I
+reckon the horse will be given attention by some one."
+
+"Oh, I don't want to make any trouble, Ad! If nobody objects,
+suppose we go hunt a stable."
+
+They were about to leave when a sergeant stopped them.
+
+"You're to follow me to the Captain," he said. "Here," to a
+marine who stood by, "take charge of these horses and see that
+the lame one is cared for."
+
+"I wonder if they will take our horses away from us?" muttered
+Adrian as they followed the sergeant.
+
+"Give it up. I wonder what he wants of us?"
+
+It did not take them long to find out.
+
+"Are you the boys that brought the messages from Lieutenant
+Blunt?" asked Captain Rush.
+
+"Yes, sir."
+
+"Will you undertake another mission?"
+
+"With pleasure," replied Adrian.
+
+"Same here, sir," from Billie, "but my horse has been wounded."
+
+"That's bad. However, I guess we can find another."
+
+"Sure, sir. I can borrow Don's."
+
+"Who is Don?"
+
+"He's the other one of us, sir. He is still out with Lieutenant
+Blunt."
+
+"Well," said the Captain, "either two of you will do. What I want
+is to find out to just what point the Mexican army is falling
+back. Do you think you can find out?"
+
+"Sure."
+
+"Very well. My compliments to Lieutenant Blunt and give him this
+order. He will pass two of you through the lines. The other can
+remain with him. Sergeant, their horses."
+
+Five minutes later, both astride Adrian's horse and leading the
+other, they appeared at the outpost and delivered the order.
+
+"Which two shall it be?" laughed the lieutenant as he looked the
+boys over.
+
+"I guess it will have to be Adrian and Don," replied Billie
+ruefully. "I've had glory enough for one day. The insult to the
+flag has been avenged and the Stars and Stripes are floating over
+Vera Cruz."
+
+"I think it's only fair that Don, as you call him, should share
+in the adventure," said the lieutenant, "and the sooner you go
+the better. It is almost sundown now."
+
+Then as Donald and Adrian started on their mission:
+
+"Success to you and report here when you return."
+
+"Is there any place near here where I can care for my horse?"
+asked Billie as soon as the others had passed out of sight.
+
+"Why, yes. There are stables in almost any of these houses. Here,
+try this one," and the lieutenant indicated the one before which
+they were standing.
+
+Billie knocked on the big door, but there was no reply.
+
+"Knock louder," laughed the lieutenant. "Use your boot."
+
+Billie used his foot and with such vigor that the gate flew open.
+
+When no one appeared to answer his summons, he stuck his head
+inside the patio and called lustily.
+
+"Must be deserted," he finally remarked. "Such being the case,
+lieutenant, I reckon I might as well take possession."
+
+"Sure. Go ahead. If every one has gone, I may join you later."
+
+Billie led his horse within and looked around. It was a large
+house and the patio was the most elaborate Billie had ever seen.
+He had thought that Pedro's home in Mexico City was fine, but
+this was much finer.
+
+"They must be swells," was the lad's comment. "I reckon they
+became frightened and have run away with General Maas."
+
+He started to lead the horse to the stable and then stopped.
+
+"I might as well shut this big gate," he thought. "I'll leave the
+little gate open so the lieutenant can come in."
+
+He pushed the big gate together and dropped the bolt in its
+place.
+
+"Now to do something for the horse," and he turned to the animal
+which stood patiently by.
+
+Then he stopped and stood in mute astonishment at what his eyes
+beheld.
+
+In the center of the patio, with rifle in hand, aimed squarely at
+his head, stood a figure he had last seen on the banks of the Rio
+Grande more than a year before--the figure of a man whom he had
+known only as Santiago.
+
+The recognition was mutual, but instead of the friendliness which
+had always before marked the attitude of the strange man, there
+was now upon his face a look of the most bitter hatred.
+
+
+
+
+CHAPTER XVI.
+
+SHADOWING AN ARMY.
+
+
+When Donald and Adrian left the city they rode slowly along for
+some distance without any sign of the retreating Mexicans,
+except the occasional sight of some camp utensil which had been
+thrown aside as too heavy to carry. Occasionally they met peons
+or women, who looked at them curiously, but all of whom were more
+than willing to tell of the army that had so recently passed.
+
+"How many men do you suppose General Maas has?" queried Adrian.
+
+"The lieutenant said it was supposed he had about seven thousand.
+It may be more, and it may be less."
+
+"Well, they're certainly light-footed," laughed Adrian. "Don't
+you think we ought to get closer?"
+
+"If we can without being seen."
+
+They put spurs to their horses and for a mile or more galloped
+along at a fair speed.
+
+Then from a little eminence they saw the rear guard of the
+retreating army.
+
+"This is near enough," cautioned Donald.
+
+They halted and watched the marching men.
+
+"How far would you say we are from town, Don?"
+
+"At least seven or eight miles."
+
+"Do you know what towns are in this direction?"
+
+"Not the slightest idea. That's the next thing we must find out."
+
+The enemy having by this time passed out of sight, they again
+spurred forward, but holding their distance.
+
+Darkness had now fallen and the boys were obliged to pick their
+way more carefully.
+
+For half an hour they rode silently and then Donald spoke:
+
+"They certainly will not march all night. They must have some
+place in mind."
+
+"So I think," from Adrian. "But there seems no sign of a halt."
+
+Ten minutes later, however, they caught sight of a fire light.
+
+"That looks like it might be a camp," suggested Adrian.
+
+They rode cautiously forward.
+
+"It surely is," affirmed Donald a couple of minutes later. "We'd
+better dismount and do a little reconnoitering on foot."
+
+The suggestion was immediately put into effect.
+
+Leaving their horses tethered beneath a giant palm, which would
+serve as a landmark, the boys crept stealthily forward. In a few
+minutes they were near enough to see figures about the fire.
+
+"They are evidently getting ready to pass the night," said
+Donald.
+
+"Yes," from Adrian, "and there is another fire off yonder," and
+he pointed to the right.
+
+"They are getting ready to post their pickets," explained Donald.
+
+"Then we'd better get busy, Don. There must be some way of
+finding out where the army is going to stop."
+
+As with one accord they drew still nearer the camp, they could
+smell the coffee and their appetites began to assert themselves.
+
+"Wish I had some," whispered Adrian.
+
+"You'll get to be as bad as Billie first thing you know," was the
+retort. "But, hush! There comes some one."
+
+They lay flat on the ground and listened.
+
+Whoever it might be was coming directly toward them.
+
+Not a move did the boys make, hoping that they might not be
+discovered, but ready to act if they were.
+
+When within ten feet of them the footsteps halted and they heard
+a voice say:
+
+"This will be far enough. You are the end man on the line."
+
+"Bueno, caporal!"
+
+"Keep a close watch," cautioned the corporal. "You never know
+what these Americans may do."
+
+"Si, Seņor. How far are we from Vera Cruz?"
+
+"About four leagues" (twelve miles). "General Maas will make a
+stand at Tejeria, about a league further on."
+
+Then as he moved away. "Remember now, no sleeping. This is a real
+war."
+
+"Bueno, mi caporal. I understand."
+
+The corporal departed and the sentry, shouldering his rifle,
+began pacing his station.
+
+A minute later Donald gave Adrian a dig with his elbow as a
+signal, and they slowly crawled away.
+
+"That's the information we are after," whispered Donald when they
+were out of earshot. "Now to get back to Vera Cruz as quickly as
+possible."
+
+They rose to their feet and ran swiftly but silently toward the
+palm tree, where their horses were tethered.
+
+Suddenly Adrian stopped and grabbed Donald by the arm.
+
+"What is it, Ad?" asked Donald.
+
+"Can't you see! There is some one there with the horses."
+
+They both peered through the darkness and Donald quickly
+perceived that Adrian was right.
+
+Then as by one impulse they drew a few steps nearer.
+
+In the dim starlight they were able to make out the figures of
+several men.
+
+"Do you think they are soldiers?" whispered Don.
+
+Adrian shook his head.
+
+"Camp followers. Thieves," he whispered.
+
+Donald nodded his head in acquiescence.
+
+The boys lay down upon the ground and put their heads together.
+
+"It wouldn't be any trick at all," whispered Donald, "if it were
+not for the pickets. But any noise will bring down upon us a
+couple of hundred men. Maybe more. We have simply got to dispose
+of that outfit without noise. But how?"
+
+"Bad job," was Adrian's only reply.
+
+"If the horses were only our Wyoming cow ponies, they'd come at
+our call."
+
+"But they're not," replied Adrian.
+
+For several minutes neither spoke, but lay silently watching the
+movements of the men about the horses.
+
+"How many can you make out, Ad?"
+
+"Five."
+
+"I don't see but four."
+
+Adrian pointed to the left, about ten or twelve feet, to one who
+stood alone.
+
+"What's he doing there?"
+
+"Give it up." Then a moment later: "I have it!"
+
+"Well, what is it?"
+
+"He's watching for us to return. That's what they're all waiting
+for. They think we'll be a great catch."
+
+"That's just it," from Donald. "Let's fool them!"
+
+"Well, first, let's capture the one yonder. We'll show them a
+Wyoming Indian trick."
+
+Slowly and silently the boys wiggled their way to where the lone
+robber stood. Then as silently as a ghost Donald arose, while
+Adrian bent on his knees.
+
+There was a swift movement and Donald's arm was around the
+Mexican's neck, shutting off his wind, while Adrian pulled his
+feet from beneath him. In another minute he was bound by his own
+sash and gagged with a handful of grass.
+
+"That's one!" exclaimed Donald, as he sat upon his prisoner's
+chest. "Now, how about the others?"
+
+"Not so easy, Don."
+
+"But it has to be done," declared Donald. "Scratch your head."
+
+Adrian did so, but to no avail.
+
+Time was passing and they did not know how long ere something
+would turn up, when Donald gave Adrian a kick.
+
+"Look! They're getting uneasy."
+
+This was undoubtedly true, as the men were moving about and one
+of them even had the temerity to light a cigarette.
+
+Then of a sudden Adrian spoke.
+
+"I've got it!" he exclaimed under his breath. "Help drag this
+chap farther away."
+
+They picked him up bodily and carried him fifteen or twenty feet.
+
+"Now, listen," said Adrian, "both of you. You, Don, sneak as near
+the horses as you dare. I'll give you just five minutes by my
+watch. Then I am going to give this man one chance for his life.
+I am going to take the gag from his mouth and let him give one
+call for help. If he makes another sound, it will be his last."
+
+"Then what?"
+
+"Those fellows have waited so long that they are tired. They will
+all rush to where they expect to find him. Then you will rush in
+and cut the tethers. By the time they find this man I will be
+with you. Sabe?"
+
+"Good!" from Donald. "I'm off."
+
+In exactly five minutes by his watch Adrian gave the prisoner a
+rough shake.
+
+"You know what I said?"
+
+The man nodded his head.
+
+"Well, I am now going to take out your gag. If you make more than
+one cry, or utter more than one word, your own knife will finish
+you."
+
+He held the knife before the man's eyes. Then with the knife in
+one hand, Adrian pulled the wad of grass from between the
+prisoner's teeth.
+
+No sooner had the man drawn one long breath than he let out a
+yell that might have been heard half a mile and which he was
+about to repeat with variations, when with a swift movement,
+Adrian forced the grass back into his mouth and the yell died in
+a dismal gurgle.
+
+"I ought to use the knife," said Adrian, "but I guess this will
+do."
+
+With a bound he sprang to his feet and dashed to where Donald was
+already performing his part of the work.
+
+The plan had worked exactly as Adrian had figured, and in another
+moment the boys were astride the horses and away toward Vera
+Cruz.
+
+But one thing they had not taken into consideration. That single
+yell of their erstwhile prisoner had aroused the Mexican pickets
+and from half a dozen directions came the sound of rifle shots
+and then the sound of a bugle calling to arms.
+
+Even while Adrian was running toward the horses, the excitement
+had begun, and as the boys started on their homeward ride, a
+volley from the encamped forces sent the bullets whistling by
+their ears.
+
+"This is no place for us!" cried Donald. "Don't be afraid to use
+the spur. It is our only chance."
+
+And now as they rode furiously forward, came the sound of firing
+on their left and some distance ahead.
+
+"What does it mean?" called out Adrian as they rode neck and neck
+through the darkness.
+
+"Search me, Ad; but our only chance is in our horses," and Donald
+again plied the spur.
+
+Outlined against the sky at the top of a small knoll, they could
+see a small body of horsemen.
+
+"Keep away to the right," said Donald. "Keep in the valley and in
+the shadow," and he drew off the beaten highway, with Adrian
+close behind.
+
+On the soft earth their horses' hoofs made no sound and in a
+couple of minutes more they descended into a little valley and
+the noise of the alarm passed out of hearing.
+
+"It was a mighty close shave," declared Adrian a few minutes
+later, when they pulled their horses down to a walk to allow them
+to catch their breath.
+
+"Sure was," from Donald, "but we got the information we went
+after."
+
+Half an hour later they were challenged by the American pickets,
+which had been thrown even further forward than where the boys
+had passed through the lines. They stated their mission and were
+at once sent under guard to the officer of the day.
+
+"Oh, it's you!" was the lieutenant's salutation as he saw who it
+was. "Did you get what you went after?"
+
+"Yes, sir," from Donald. "The enemy has halted at Tejeria,
+fifteen miles away."
+
+"Well done. I'll send an orderly to carry the report to
+headquarters. You boys are entitled to a rest."
+
+"Where's Billie?" asked Adrian, looking around after the orderly
+had departed.
+
+"Who?"
+
+"Billie. Our chum."
+
+"Oh, yes," replied the lieutenant. "He's disappeared."
+
+"Disappeared?"
+
+"Yes. He went into this house here," pointing to the building
+before which he had stationed himself, "and when I went in later
+to see how he was coming on with his wounded horse, I found the
+horse standing in the middle of the patio, but your chum had
+disappeared."
+
+"And then what?" queried Donald.
+
+"Nothing. I made up my mind he had gone after something to put on
+his horse and I haven't thought much about him since."
+
+"Then it's up to us to find him. Can we go inside?"
+
+"Sure," laughed the lieutenant. "Go as far as you like, only keep
+inside the lines."
+
+Without more words the boys entered the patio.
+
+
+
+
+CHAPTER XVII.
+
+BILLIE GETS A SURPRISE.
+
+
+When Billie found himself looking into the muzzle of a rifle in
+the hands of Santiago, his first impulse was to call out; but the
+expression on Santiago's face caused him to remain silent.
+
+While the strange man owed his life to the lad, as is related in
+the story of the "Broncho Rider Boys with the Texas Rangers,"
+there was that in the man's face which told that he was under a
+severe mental strain, and Billie did not think it wise to presume
+upon his former friendship.
+
+Therefore, he remained quiet, waiting for Santiago to speak.
+
+If he recognized Billie, he gave no intimation of the fact; but
+in a harsh voice commanded: "Up with your hands!"
+
+Billie obeyed.
+
+"Turn to the left and march. In there," he continued a moment
+later as Billie approached an open door in the rear of the patio.
+
+Into the house Billie went--into a large room, but dimly lighted.
+Santiago followed, closing the door behind him with a kick.
+
+"Why shouldn't I shoot you down like a dog?" asked Santiago as
+soon as the door was closed.
+
+"I can't see any reason," was the reply, "except that it might
+cause you a lot of trouble when it was found out. I imagine that
+Admiral Fletcher is going to be pretty severe upon snipers and
+others who shoot Americans."
+
+"Bah!" exclaimed Santiago angrily. "I spit upon Americans! Bah!"
+
+"That's all right," Billie agreed, "if it's the way you feel
+about it."
+
+"Just because you Americans have driven away a few soldiers with
+the guns of your great fleet, you don't think you can conquer
+Mexico, do you?"
+
+"I hadn't thought much about it."
+
+"Then it's time you did, as you may never have another chance."
+
+"Well, then," explained Billie, "I'll tell you how it looks to
+me. You might a great deal better be governed by the United
+States than by a man like Huerta."
+
+"Huerta! Huerta!" fairly screamed Santiago. "He is not the
+governor of Mexico."
+
+"No," from Billie. "He calls himself the provisional president.
+In reality he is a dictator."
+
+"He is a murderer!" shouted the thoroughly excited man.
+
+"Then what are you worrying about? All that the Americans want is
+to get rid of Huerta. They don't want Mexico. Didn't you know
+that, Santiago?"
+
+"What? Who calls me Santiago? I am Ixtazhl, Prince of the Aztecs
+and guardian of the treasures of Montezuma. Who calls me
+Santiago?"
+
+In his excitement he rested the stock of his rifle upon the floor
+and bent upon Billie a gaze so fierce as greatly to disconcert
+him for the moment.
+
+But Billie was not a lad to be easily unnerved and after a moment
+he replied calmly:
+
+"I call you by the only name I know. It was the one you used on
+the Rio Grande when you sent me on a mission to Pancho Villa."
+
+"Villa! Villa!" repeated Santiago, as though trying to recall
+something that had passed from his memory. "Villa! Where have I
+heard that name before?"
+
+"On the Rio Grande is all I can tell you. Do you remember Don
+Rafael?"
+
+At mention of the name the expression on Santiago's face changed
+again, this time to one of fiercest rage.
+
+"Don Rafael!" he cried. "Don Rafael! Now I know you! You are Don
+Rafael. That is why I should kill you!"
+
+"Great Scott, no, I am not Don Rafael!" shouted Billie as
+Santiago again raised his rifle and the lad perceived that he had
+to do with a crazy man. "I'm the boy that saved your life when
+Don Rafael tried to kill you. Don't you remember?"
+
+Again Santiago lowered his weapon, and again there came upon his
+face that puzzled expression.
+
+"Tell me, Santiago--I mean Prince Iztazil, or whatever you call
+it, what are you doing here?"
+
+Santiago eyed him suspiciously, but finally laid his rifle across
+a table in the center of the room and approached nearer the lad.
+
+"Listen!" he said in a whisper. "I am the guardian of the
+treasure of Montezuma. It is to be used to free Mexico from the
+Spaniard. He must be driven out. The land belongs to the Aztec."
+
+"But where is the Aztec?" queried Billie. "I know him not."
+
+"I am he. The peons are my people. The Spaniard--bah! He owns the
+houses and he owns the lands; but he must be driven out."
+
+"Isn't that what Villa says?"
+
+"Villa? Villa?" again repeated Santiago, and again he lapsed into
+silence.
+
+For some minutes he remained motionless ere he stepped back,
+picked up his rifle and started for a door leading to a stairway.
+
+"Come!" he commanded. "I will show you."
+
+"Hadn't we better take care of the horse first?" asked Billie,
+not at all anxious to be wandering around with an armed lunatic.
+"He may die."
+
+"What is a horse when the future of Mexico is at stake, my son?
+Come with me and you shall hear a strange tale."
+
+"I have heard one already," was Billie's mental comment, but
+realizing by the term son which Santiago had applied to him that
+he was in no immediate danger and trusting to his wits to finally
+overcome the strange man should it become necessary, he followed.
+
+At the head of the stairs was another door, which Santiago opened
+and entered. It was a sort of ante-room, much like the entrance
+into a lodge room. Around the walls was a motley collection of
+firearms, swords, spears and smaller weapons.
+
+Stopping in front of one of the racks, Santiago placed his rifle
+in it, and then from another took a couple of small swords, one
+of which he handed to Billie.
+
+"This is a bug house sure enough," muttered the boy as he took
+the sword and examined it curiously. "I wonder what next?"
+
+He had not long to wait, for opening a closet, Santiago took
+therefrom two beautifully embroidered robes, one of which he
+threw over his own shoulders and the other of which he put on
+Billie.
+
+"It doesn't hardly match my hat," laughed Billie.
+
+Without a word, Santiago removed Billie's sombrero and hung it
+on a peg in the closet, which he closed.
+
+Then he opened another door and led Billie into a large,
+brilliantly lighted room, hung with the richest tapestries.
+
+"Looks like we had strayed into some Turkish bath house," thought
+Billie, "but I might as well see the thing through."
+
+"Sit here beside me, my son," Santiago finally said. "You shall
+become my heir. I will introduce you to the court."
+
+Santiago clapped his hands, as though bidding a servant to
+attend; but there was no response.
+
+He turned his head from one side to the other as though in
+amazement and again clapped his hands, this time with vigor.
+
+After a moment's delay, there was a movement behind one of the
+draperies and presently the curtain was drawn back and a man's
+face appeared.
+
+"Come hither," commanded Santiago.
+
+The man obeyed.
+
+"Where are the others?" demanded Santiago.
+
+"Oh, seņor," cried the man, "the others have hidden themselves in
+the cellar!"
+
+"Slaves! Cowards!" exclaimed Santiago. "What do they fear?"
+
+"The great guns, seņor. We might all be killed."
+
+"You will certainly be killed if you do not mind what I say," was
+the reply as Santiago drew his sword. "Now summon the court that
+I may introduce my son."
+
+The man bowed and left the room, and in a few minutes returned
+accompanied by two more men and several women, all arrayed in
+fantastic costumes.
+
+All bowed as they entered, and Santiago waved his hand.
+
+"This is my son and heir," he said. "Come and kiss his hand."
+
+They all came forward and kissed Billie's hand, which he held out
+in order to facilitate the job.
+
+"Now," said Santiago, "we----"
+
+"Now," interrupted Billie, "if it is all the same to you, Prince,
+we'll have supper. I haven't had a mouthful to eat since
+daylight. I'm 'most starved to death."
+
+"It is well," agreed Santiago. "It is well that my heir should
+not die of hunger. Let the table be placed."
+
+The order seemed to meet with general approval, and in the course
+of half an hour there was spread what would have proved a feast
+at any time, but which was beyond description to a hungry boy;
+and the way he waded into the food was a caution.
+
+During all this time Santiago had uttered never a word, nor would
+he eat but the smallest portion of food--a taste of every dish
+which he set before his guest.
+
+"My son tells the truth," Santiago finally remarked as Billie
+pushed back his chair with the single word "Bastante," meaning
+enough.
+
+"I always try to," was the smiling rejoinder, for Billie was now
+in the very best humor. Eating was his strong point and he had
+gone the limit.
+
+"Clear away the feast and then reassemble," was Santiago's next
+order.
+
+This order was carried into effect, and the servants also must
+have enjoyed a square meal, for it was more than an hour ere they
+again assembled, during which time Billie sank back in his chair
+and slumbered peacefully.
+
+He was finally awakened by a hand laid upon his arm.
+
+"Awake, my son," were the words he heard. "It is now time that I
+reveal to you the secret of my life. It is now time that I should
+tell you the secret of the treasure of Montezuma."
+
+"That's right, Prince," said Billie sleepily. "Let her go."
+
+Santiago regarded him interrogatively.
+
+"What said my son?"
+
+"Oh, yes, Prince. I forgot you only understood good English. Let
+her go, means proceed with the secret."
+
+"Let her go. Let her go," Santiago repeated a couple of times.
+"Yes," he continued, "I had forgotten about her."
+
+He clapped his hands and the same servant who had first appeared
+approached his chair.
+
+Santiago gave an order in a language which Billie did not
+understand, but which he imagined was Indian, and the servant
+withdrew, only to reappear a few minutes later with a young woman
+who greatly resembled Santiago and who was also arrayed in a
+gorgeous costume.
+
+She had evidently not expected to meet a stranger, for she drew
+back upon seeing Billie and the color rushed to her face.
+
+"Come hither, daughter," was Santiago's command.
+
+The young woman obeyed.
+
+"Lucia," said Santiago, "this is the honorable young man whom I
+have chosen for my heir. Henceforth consider him your betrothed.
+The marriage shall take place one new moon from to-day."
+
+"Oh, Father," cried the girl, her face becoming even more scarlet
+than before, "I cannot----"
+
+"No!" interrupted Billie, springing to his feet, "neither can I.
+You ought to be ashamed of yourself, Santiago----"
+
+"What!" cried Santiago, springing to his feet and again drawing
+his sword. "Who calls me Santiago? I am Prince Ixtazhl of the
+great Aztec nation and guardian of the treasure of Montezuma!"
+
+He raised his sword and would have stricken Billie down ere the
+boy could have prevented had not the young woman thrown herself
+between them and seized his arm.
+
+At the same instant the door from the ante-room opened and Donald
+and Adrian entered.
+
+
+
+
+CHAPTER XVIII.
+
+A MISSION FOR FUNSTON.
+
+
+"Santiago!" exclaimed Donald.
+
+"By all that's great!" from Adrian.
+
+"Help!" cried Lucia. "He will do something desperate!"
+
+Donald and Adrian sprang forward, but their assistance was not
+needed. Billie had by this time gathered his wits and in a
+twinkling the mad-man was disarmed.
+
+"Shall we bind him?" asked Adrian as they came forward.
+
+"No, indeed," replied Billie as the now helpless man sank down
+upon the chair. "He isn't dangerous."
+
+"What's it all about?" queried Donald.
+
+"Oh, nothing much! He simply wanted to make me his heir and marry
+me to his daughter."
+
+Donald and Adrian cast an admiring gaze upon Lucia, who was now
+kneeling at her father's side.
+
+"Well," said Adrian in an aside, "I don't see why you should
+object to that."
+
+"Who said I objected?" demanded Billie. "It is the young woman
+who objects."
+
+"But whoever supposed he had a daughter?" said Donald.
+
+"Not I," from Billie. "But this is certainly a queer mess."
+
+Then to Lucia: "How long has he been in this way, Seņorita?"
+
+"Only a few days. Since this trouble with the Americanos."
+
+"But how could that affect him?"
+
+"It is a long story, seņor. For years he has been trying to
+overthrow the government. When Madero was made president, he was
+happy. Then came that awful tragedy, by which Madero was killed.
+Since that time he has not been himself. But when it became
+evident that the United States would interfere he became as you
+have seen him to-day."
+
+"When I told him that all the United States wanted was to get rid
+of Huerta, he was much pleased," explained Billie. "That was when
+he proposed to make me his heir."
+
+Lucia's cheeks grew red, as she asked: "And did you accept his
+proposal?"
+
+"I neither accepted nor rejected. I just followed him in to see
+what would happen next."
+
+"But would you accept?" insisted Lucia.
+
+"That depends," replied Billie, with a touch of color in his own
+face. "But what had we better do now? You and I will discuss the
+other question later."
+
+"The best thing we can do," interposed Donald, "is to report to
+Lieutenant Blunt. Isn't there some place, Seņorita, where your
+father can be placed for safe-keeping?"
+
+"He will be perfectly safe here with me, seņors, if the servants
+are allowed to remain."
+
+"They certainly will be," declared Billie. "I will personally
+vouch for that. We have done Captain Rush a good turn to-day and
+I know he will be glad to do that much for us. And besides, the
+Americans will harm no one."
+
+Lucia gave Billie a grateful look as she replied:
+
+"Ah, seņor, I shall trust it all to you. I can see that you are a
+friend of my father and I know you are telling the truth."
+
+"You bet you can trust me," was Billie's emphatic reply. "Come
+on, fellows, let's go look after my horse."
+
+In the door Billie turned:
+
+"I'll leave my robe in the cupboard, Seņorita; and, if you don't
+mind, I'll ask Lieutenant Blunt to make himself at home in the
+patio."
+
+"The house is yours, seņor. Do as you think best."
+
+"By George!" exclaimed Adrian as they descended the stairs to the
+patio, "this is getting serious."
+
+"What?" queried Donald.
+
+"Why this affair of Billie and the young lady we have just
+left."
+
+"Nonsense!" from Billie. "It isn't half as serious as what I saw
+at Moreno."
+
+"No!" laughed Donald. "I saw that myself; but Josie is an
+American. Hey, Ad?"
+
+"I don't think it's very nice to be making remarks about young
+ladies in their absence," retorted Adrian, bristling up.
+
+"Oh, come now, Adrian!" laughed Billie. "You started it. But what
+do you make out of Santiago?"
+
+"He's evidently a rich old chap with a bug. That's all."
+
+"Well," commented Billie, with a nod of his head, "strange things
+do happen when you travel. Who'd have thought we'd ever see the
+old chap again, and at a time like this?" and he went back to
+where Adrian and Donald had stabled the horses, to see if there
+was anything he could do for the wounded animal.
+
+When Lieutenant Blunt was made acquainted with the conditions
+prevailing in the house, he immediately took possession of the
+lower floor and from that time on until the arrival of General
+Funston with the Fifth Brigade, it was made one of the official
+residences.
+
+The week following the occupation of Vera Cruz by the American
+forces was a busy one for our boys. Because of their intimate
+knowledge with the Spanish language, they were continually in
+demand. There was never a verbal message from the American
+Admiral to some Mexican official but what they were called upon,
+and they very soon made friends of every Jackie and marine in the
+city.
+
+Ten days later the boys stood upon the wharf awaiting the arrival
+of the first boatload of General Funston's regulars from the big
+transports which had anchored in the harbor the night before.
+Because of the shallowness of the water, everything in Vera Cruz
+harbor has to be brought ashore in small boats, known as
+lighters. As the boys watched the first of these to approach
+there was something in the face and bearing of the officer in
+command which attracted their attention.
+
+"By George!" exclaimed Donald, "I seem to know that face. Don't
+you, Billie?"
+
+"Does look kind o' familiar. Where have we seen him?"
+
+"I'll tell you!" cried Adrian. "It's the lieutenant who was in
+charge of the patrol on the Rio Grande."
+
+"Lieutenant Grant!" exclaimed Billie. "Sure as you're born. Well
+this is luck!"
+
+"Luck? What do you mean?"
+
+"Why, maybe he'll be able to tell me whatever became of those
+drafts for ten thousand pounds that I took from old Don Pablo."
+
+His companions laughed.
+
+"Still thinking about that, are you?" said Donald. "Why of course
+you'll never hear of them again. The bank is simply in that
+much."
+
+"Maybe so," admitted Billie, "but I'll get something official."
+
+And he did.
+
+It was several days later, though, after the regulars had taken
+possession of the city and the navy forces had withdrawn to their
+ships. The boys were sitting in Lieutenant Grant's quarters, to
+whom they had offered their services as soon after his landing as
+they were able, and were laughing over their adventures on the
+border.
+
+"It was certainly a close call you boys had," the lieutenant was
+saying. "I'm not sure but our neutrality was mighty near a
+breaking point. What do you think, Billie?"
+
+"Possibly so; Americans will be Americans. But say, Lieutenant,
+whatever was done about those drafts I took from Don Pablo? I've
+never been called upon to tell my story, nor have they ever come
+back to me."
+
+"That's because you were out of the United States," replied
+Lieutenant Grant. "It was less than a month ago that I was asked
+if I knew your whereabouts. Uncle Sam has decided that he has no
+claim to the drafts and they were returned to me. I have them in
+my army chest. If they are any good to you, I shall be pleased to
+hand them over."
+
+"I guess they are not much use to any one," sighed Billie
+mournfully. "My father says no bank would cash them without Don
+Pablo's signature, and no one can get that."
+
+"I'm glad you take it so philosophically," laughed the
+lieutenant. "I hope you'll have better luck next time."
+
+The boys arose to leave.
+
+"Which way?" asked the lieutenant.
+
+"No place in particular. We thought we'd go home."
+
+"You mean to the United States?"
+
+"Not to-night," laughed Adrian. "Just to the house where we are
+living. It belongs to old Santiago."
+
+"Who is he?"
+
+Briefly the boys narrated what they knew about him on the Rio
+Grande, how they had met him here, and why they were staying at
+his house.
+
+"Has he no other name?"
+
+"Why, yes, I suppose so," replied Billie. "We always call him
+Prince to his face, and his daughter as the Princess Lucia. Of
+course, it is all make-believe, but it is one way of keeping him
+quiet."
+
+He called to one of Santiago's servants, whom Lucia had lent them
+to look after their horses.
+
+"Oh, Chomo!" he said. "Do you know what Santiago's surname is?"
+
+"Si, seņor. It is Ojeda."
+
+"What?" cried all the boys at once. "Ojeda? Why, that was old Don
+Pablo's name."
+
+The boys stood and eyed each other in speechless wonder. The same
+thought was in all their minds.
+
+"Do you think it is possible?" asked Billie at last.
+
+"Do I think what is possible?" asked Lieutenant Grant.
+
+"Why, that Santiago could have given those drafts to the stranger
+so as not to be known in the matter."
+
+"Possibly. He seems a man of mystery."
+
+"Well," declared Billie, "I am going to find out."
+
+"How, I should like to know," asked Donald. "He's too crazy to
+remember anything, even if he wanted to tell you."
+
+"You forget Lucia," said Billie.
+
+"Oh, no, I haven't," laughed Donald, "and I have no doubt she
+would tell you all about it if she knew; but I do not believe she
+does. Santiago is too deep to have entrusted his secrets to a
+girl not yet out of her teens."
+
+"You never can tell," remarked the lieutenant. "Men with a
+hobby do strange things. You'd better ride along with me to
+headquarters. I'd like to introduce you to General Funston. He's
+a man after your own hearts. You know how he went out and
+captured Aguinaldo when he was in the Philippines."
+
+"I've read about it," replied Adrian. "It was a bold deed."
+
+"Sure was," said Donald. "We'll be mighty glad to meet him."
+
+It may also be said that General Funston was glad to meet the
+Broncho Rider Boys, especially after Lieutenant Grant told him in
+a few words of the good work they had done on the border and on
+the day that Vera Cruz was taken.
+
+"And when do you expect to return to the United States?" asked
+the general.
+
+"Just as soon as we can obtain passage," replied Donald.
+
+"I think we can arrange that for you in a few days," replied the
+general. "In the meantime come in occasionally."
+
+The boys thanked him and started to leave, when the telephone in
+the general's quarters rang. He looked for some one to answer,
+but no one being at hand, he picked up the 'phone himself.
+
+"What's that?" he asked after a brief moment. "The water works.
+You think they are attempting to cut you off. All right, I'll
+rush help."
+
+He set down the 'phone and turned to Lieutenant Grant.
+
+"The enemy has gathered in force about the water works," he said
+sharply. "They evidently intend cutting off the water supply.
+Tell Colonel Bright to send them reinforcements at once. Do you
+boys know the way there?"
+
+"Yes, sir," from all three.
+
+"Then show the men the nearest way! Now go! The safety of the
+city may depend upon you!"
+
+
+
+
+CHAPTER XIX.
+
+AN UNUSUAL RIDING PARTY.
+
+
+Flinging themselves into the saddle, the boys rode rapidly after
+Lieutenant Grant and were at Colonel Bright's quarters by the
+time the bugle had called to boots and saddle. In another minute,
+at the head of a squadron of cavalry, they dashed over the road
+they had come to know so well.
+
+What happened during the next twenty minutes is history.
+
+Guided by the boys, the reinforcements arrived opportunely to
+stop the advance of a large body of Mexicans who would have
+destroyed the water works and have left the inhabitants and the
+American troops entirely without water.
+
+A few minutes later two batteries with rapid-fire guns put in an
+appearance, and in less time than it takes to tell it, the
+Mexicans turned and fled.
+
+It was not General Funston's mission in Vera Cruz to overrun any
+more Mexican territory, so the Mexicans were allowed to retreat
+without pursuit; but the lines were strengthened so that from
+that time on there was never any danger from Huerta's forces,
+although there were numerous alarms and plenty of scout duty.
+
+During the few minutes of fighting, the boys were in the midst
+of it and all came through it without a scratch. But it was
+exciting work and when it was over they were publicly thanked by
+Colonel Bright for their good work.
+
+"Well," laughed Billie as the three rode slowly back to their
+home, "that's glory enough for one day. I don't care to be a
+soldier."
+
+"Nor I!" agreed Donald. "I prefer a quiet life on the ranch."
+
+"Which we are in a fair way to see in a few weeks," commented
+Adrian. "I have no doubt that General Funston will do as he
+agreed and find us passage."
+
+"I for one shall be glad to return to the States," said Donald.
+
+"So shall I after I have found out about Santiago's connection
+with that ten thousand pounds."
+
+"That's right," was the laughing rejoinder. "Stick to it, Billie,
+and who knows what may happen?"
+
+"Do you know," remarked Adrian slowly, "I'm beginning to be
+considerably worried for the Americans scattered throughout
+Mexico."
+
+"Why should you be?" from Donald.
+
+"I remember Pedro's words that, if the United States did
+anything, Carranza would unite with Huerta."
+
+"I don't believe he would."
+
+"Maybe not. But the Zapata brothers will think this a good time
+to make the Americans trouble. I was thinking of Mr. Black and
+Josie."
+
+"I'll bet you were," laughed Billie. "I wouldn't be surprised if
+they were thinking about you. Hey, Don?"
+
+"Well, they might do worse," said Donald. "There are worse
+fellows than Adrian."
+
+"That's right," retorted Adrian good-humoredly. "I can stand it.
+But, just the same, I wish I knew they were safe."
+
+"Well, what's the matter with our paying them a visit?" queried
+Billie.
+
+"Nix," from Donald. "We'll stay inside the lines. I've had enough
+of this bush fighting."
+
+They approached Santiago's residence, where they had decided to
+remain until they sailed, when they perceived a peon on a pony
+standing by the gate. As they drew near they recognized him as
+one of the peons who had served as Mr. Black's mozo.
+
+"Why, hello, José!" exclaimed Donald. "What brings you here?"
+
+The mozo drew a letter from beneath his poncho and handed it to
+Donald.
+
+"For me?" asked Donald. "I thought it must be for Adrian. I
+didn't think the----"
+
+"It is from the jefe," interrupted the mozo.
+
+"Oh, it's from Mr. Black!" with an accent on the Mr. "That's
+different."
+
+Donald opened the letter and read it hastily.
+
+"Well, by George!" he exclaimed, "what do you think of that?"
+
+"I can tell you better when I know what that is," replied Billie.
+
+"Why, Mr. Black is becoming alarmed over the activities of the
+Carranza forces and wants us to ask General Funston if he won't
+send out enough cavalry to escort him and his daughter to Vera
+Cruz in safety."
+
+"Of course we'll ask him!" exclaimed Adrian. "Let's do it at
+once."
+
+"Now wait a minute," said Donald. "Let's see about it."
+
+"What is there to see?"
+
+"There's a good deal to see. You remember our experiences on the
+Rio Grande?"
+
+"But this is different! We are at war with Mexico now."
+
+"No, we are not. We have simply seized one port as a reprisal. To
+send a cavalry force out into the country might bring on more
+trouble."
+
+"Well, I don't care!" exclaimed Adrian hotly. "I'll go and ask
+him alone if you are afraid to go with me. I'm not going to leave
+Jos--I mean Mr. Black and his daughter out there at the mercies
+of these greasers. You hear me!"
+
+"Oh, we'll go with you, all right!" said Billie. "But don't be
+surprised if you don't get what you ask."
+
+Accordingly the trio started for General Funston's headquarters.
+After some delay they were admitted to his presence and Donald
+showed him Mr. Black's letter.
+
+The general perused it carefully and then remained silently
+thoughtful for some moments.
+
+"I wish I could do what our countryman asks," he finally said,
+"but I do not see how I can. To send a force out nearly fifty
+miles, even for such a service, would be overstepping the purpose
+for which I am here. I----"
+
+"But you wouldn't leave them out there to be mistreated and
+perhaps killed, would you?" interrupted Adrian.
+
+The general smiled.
+
+"Such is not my intention; but we must plan some other way. We
+must use a little strategy."
+
+"That's right!" exclaimed Billie, "and I'll bet the man who went
+out and rounded up Aguinaldo will know how to do it!"
+
+Again the general smiled broadly, evidently well pleased at the
+implied compliment.
+
+"I'll do the best I can," he said quietly, "but I am not very
+familiar with the lay of the land. You boys have had some
+experience. Perhaps you can suggest something."
+
+Adrian said nothing, and Donald scratched his head. It was Billie
+who spoke.
+
+"I was just wondering, General," he said, "if some of the men
+wouldn't like to take a little horseback ride and see something
+of the country."
+
+"Well, now, perhaps they might," assented the general.
+
+"We could show them some mighty fine scenery, sir."
+
+"By the moonlight, I suppose?"
+
+"Yes, sir. By the moonlight and early sunrise."
+
+"And about how many would you like to take on this picnic?"
+
+"Well," replied Billie, squinting up one eye, "I was thinking
+that Adrian and I might take out about ten to-night. Then about
+the same time to-morrow night Don could take another ten. We
+would probably meet somewhere in the mountains and watch the sun
+rise."
+
+"A very nice plan," said the general, "and one of which I
+approve. You may ask Lieutenant Grant to make enquiries among the
+men in his company and see if there are any who would like to be
+given two or three days' leave for such a purpose."
+
+"Thank you, sir!" and Billie touched his hat in true military
+style.
+
+"And you might say to the lieutenant," was General Funston's
+parting words, "that I should be glad to hear later how the men
+enjoyed their ride. I think, now that the boys are down here,
+they should be given a chance to see the country."
+
+"Billie, you have the making of a great general," was Donald's
+comment as they left the general's quarters. "How did you think
+of it?"
+
+"I remembered my experience when I wanted men to help me get you
+and Ad out of trouble in Presidio. Lieutenant Grant will know all
+about it."
+
+And so he did. In less than half an hour ten regulars, some of
+them but very little older than Billie and Adrian, were ready for
+the ride which Billie had proposed and which in his mind would be
+as far as Moreno.
+
+"You are sure ten will be enough?" asked Lieutenant Grant.
+
+"Sure! Twelve Americans are enough to lick fifty Mexicans if it
+comes to that; and besides we shall have Mr. Black and Josie.
+He's as good as four."
+
+"And don't forget the reinforcements, if they are needed,"
+laughed Donald. "We will be right on the spot where we saw the
+sun rise the first morning after we left Moreno."
+
+"It looks all right," was Lieutenant Grant's comment, "but it is
+always well to have a big enough force. Success to you!"
+
+"You'll make all the necessary explanations to the crowd you
+bring out, Don," was Billie's parting words. "Adrian and I will
+explain the nature of the trip to our fellows as we ride along."
+
+This they did, and gave the soldier boys a little history of
+their own troubles in reaching Vera Cruz.
+
+"No explanations are necessary," remarked a young chap by the
+name of Brooks, a corporal. "We saw you out at the water works
+and we know you are made of the right stuff. You lead! We'll
+follow, won't we, boys?"
+
+"You bet!" replied the others in one voice.
+
+
+
+
+CHAPTER XX.
+
+ADRIAN FOILS A TRAITOR.
+
+
+It was nine o'clock of the second night that Adrian and Billie,
+accompanied by Mr. Black's mozo, José, and the ten troopers,
+reached the outskirts of Moreno.
+
+They had made good headway the first night, had slept in the
+hills during the day and had come this far without molestation.
+
+"If everything goes to the end as it has this far," remarked
+Corporal Brooks to Billie as they neared the little town, "it
+will be nothing but a pleasant outing, sure enough."
+
+Arriving at the edge of the town, the boys sent José forward to
+see how the land lay and to bring them word.
+
+"Do you think you can trust him?" asked the corporal.
+
+"We'll have to," replied Adrian. "I believe he is loyal, and Mr.
+Black seems to have complete confidence in him."
+
+"Let's hope so, anyway," said Billie. "It seems to be the best we
+can do to get word to Mr. Black of our presence."
+
+"Hurry back, José," urged Adrian as the mozo departed.
+
+"Si, seņor," was the brief reply. "You may depend on me."
+
+"It ought not to take him more than half an hour," explained
+Billie. "It isn't more than a mile."
+
+But a half hour passed and then another and still no José.
+
+"Something must have happened to him," said Adrian.
+
+"That's the charitable way to look at it," laughed the corporal.
+"It's more likely, however, that he's making arrangements to have
+something happen to us."
+
+"I hardly think so," was Billie's comment, "but, if he is, we'll
+fool him."
+
+"How?"
+
+"We'll move."
+
+"But he may come back."
+
+"We'll leave one man here on guard. The rest of us will go around
+to the other side of town."
+
+"Good!" from the corporal. "You are a strategist."
+
+The plan was at once carried into effect.
+
+"Now then," said Billie, "I'm going in to town myself."
+
+"Not much," declared Adrian. "I'm going."
+
+"I'd offer to go myself," laughed the corporal, "but I don't know
+the place."
+
+"We'll toss for it," said Billie.
+
+"All right," and Adrian produced a coin. "Heads I win. Tails you
+lose."
+
+"No funny business," said Billie. "Choose heads if you want."
+
+Adrian flipped the coin. It came down heads up.
+
+"All right," agreed Billie. "Now for some set of signals."
+
+"Our old Broncho Rider whistle if I need help," said Adrian. "If
+everything is O. K., I'll give the whip-poor-will."
+
+Adrian slid from his horse.
+
+"What are you doing?" asked Billie.
+
+"I'm going afoot. I didn't spend my boyhood among the Indians for
+nothing. Good-bye!" and a moment later he disappeared in the
+fading moonlight.
+
+"Whatever the conditions," said Billie, "we'll soon know," as he
+settled back in his saddle.
+
+Running swiftly along, Adrian made straight for the barracks in
+which he knew would be found whatever soldiers might be in the
+city.
+
+"If I find everything quiet at the barracks," was his thought, "I
+can go straight to where Mr. Black is stopping without fear. If I
+find there is any disturbance, I'll be more careful."
+
+Ten minutes of running brought him to the barracks. All was as
+quiet as the hour demanded. He stood under the shadow of the back
+wall long enough to hear the sentry's call and then he turned in
+the direction of the house where the two Americans were stopping.
+
+It was only a few blocks away and he reached it without incident.
+
+"Kind o' funny," he mused, "that I haven't seen or heard a soul
+on the street. I wonder what's become of José?"
+
+He stopped a minute to ponder.
+
+"Things are going almost too smooth. I'll just stop a bit."
+
+He stole past the house and a moment later threw himself into the
+gutter, where he lay as one dead.
+
+The wisdom of his action soon became apparent.
+
+He hadn't been lying there two minutes until a solitary figure
+passed him and stopped in front of the house, evidently listening
+to hear what might be going on inside.
+
+A moment later he was joined by another figure. Adrian could just
+make them out in the darkness.
+
+"Have they come?" was the whispered question.
+
+"I can't tell," was the whispered reply.
+
+Adrian heard both the question and the answer distinctly.
+
+"It's José," he said to himself. "He knew that it was the plan
+for Billie and I both to come to the house. The traitor! I have a
+notion to shoot him in his tracks."
+
+Only the fear of creating a disturbance kept the lad from
+carrying out his notion.
+
+"Why don't you knock and tell the Gringo you are here?" was the
+next question.
+
+"They might be in there."
+
+"Well, what of that? You can tell them you were stopped by the
+guard and have just been released. That'll seem reasonable."
+
+José stepped to the door and knocked.
+
+There was no response and he knocked again.
+
+"Who is there?" asked a voice.
+
+"José. I just come from Vera Cruz. Let me in."
+
+There was a movement within and presently the door opened and
+José entered, closing the door behind him.
+
+Adrian slowly arose to a kneeling posture.
+
+"I wonder what the other will do now?" he wondered.
+
+He did not have long to wait, for the other knocked on the
+pavement with his gun and presently several more figures
+appeared. Adrian had just time to throw himself to the ground and
+escape detection.
+
+The men in front of the house exchanged whispered confidences and
+then all but one started to leave.
+
+"If any one attempts to leave the house," was the command, "fire!
+If any one attempts to enter, allow them to do so and then give
+the customary call."
+
+"Bueno!" was the response, and all but the one withdrew.
+
+A minute later Adrian again arose to a crouching posture and as
+the sentry cautiously approached the door, he crept up behind
+him. An instant more and he was upon the man and had him by the
+throat.
+
+The man was a wiry Mexican and evidently in training, for he
+squirmed and kicked vigorously; but Adrian's grip was too firm
+upon him and in a couple of minutes he sank down limp upon the
+ground.
+
+The noise of the scuffle must have been heard inside, for the
+door cautiously opened and a head peered out.
+
+Without a question Adrian sprang within, dragging the lifeless
+form of the sentry with him.
+
+"Quick, bar the gate!" he commanded.
+
+The command was obeyed.
+
+"Now where is Mr. Black?" he asked.
+
+"Upstairs talking with José."
+
+"All right. Bind this man while I go up. Don't let him escape or
+he is liable to cut your throat."
+
+"_No temer V, seņor_" was the response, meaning "Have no fear."
+
+Adrian ran lightly up the stairs, revolver in hand. He heard
+voices talking and had no doubt that José was narrating some
+trumped-up story.
+
+"Yes, seņor," he heard the mozo say, "they are expecting you. It
+is necessary that you go at once."
+
+Adrian flung open the door and covered José with his revolver.
+
+"Put up your hands," he commanded. Then to Mr. Black, to whom
+José was talking: "Take his weapons away from him, Mr. Black."
+
+Realizing at once that something was wrong, Mr. Black obeyed.
+
+"Now tie him."
+
+This was also quickly done, Mr. Black asking at the same time
+what had happened.
+
+"I can't tell you exactly, Mr. Black, but this man has betrayed
+us and we are now watched by a squad of soldiers."
+
+Mr. Black's face turned as black as his name.
+
+"Is that true?" he demanded, seizing José by the shoulder with
+such a powerful grip that the man cried out with pain.
+
+"Oh, seņor," he cried, "don't kill me! I will tell you all."
+
+"See that you do," was the command. "One lie and I will wring
+your neck as I would a chicken. You know me."
+
+"I'll tell the truth. I told the captain at the barracks. He is
+going to capture all the Americanos and hold them for ransom and
+I am to have half."
+
+"That is evidently the truth," declared Adrian, and he proceeded
+to tell Mr. Black what was being done to get him and his daughter
+to Vera Cruz, and how José had played them false.
+
+For a moment it looked as though Mr. Black might wreak his
+vengeance on José, but after a minute he thought better of it.
+
+"You ought to die this minute," he declared, "but I'll wait till
+I have more time." Then to Adrian: "What had we better do now?"
+
+Before Adrian could reply the clear note of a bugle rang out upon
+the night air.
+
+
+
+
+CHAPTER XXI.
+
+ADRIAN HAS AN ACCIDENT.
+
+
+"What do you suppose that means?" asked Adrian.
+
+Mr. Black made no reply and a moment later the bugle call was
+repeated.
+
+"It sounds to me," said Mr. Black, "as though some fresh troops
+were coming in."
+
+"That's bad," was Adrian's comment.
+
+"Perhaps not, my lad, if we act quickly."
+
+"How so?"
+
+"The new arrivals may take up the attention of the gang of
+bandits outside and we may get away ere they return."
+
+"Good," was Adrian's comment. "Where is Miss Josie?"
+
+"Waiting in the next room with the family of my host."
+
+Mr. Black stepped to the door and called to those within. In a
+few words he explained the situation and in less than three
+minutes he and the girl were mounted and ready to ride.
+
+"Where is your horse?" he asked Adrian.
+
+"I left it with the boys at the cocoanut grove."
+
+"But we can't go and leave you here."
+
+"Of course not. I shall run alongside of your horse, holding to
+its mane, Indian fashion. Now then, are we ready?"
+
+"All ready!"
+
+The great gate was opened noiselessly and, bidding a subdued
+good-bye to the family, the three passed out into the night.
+
+"I should have throttled José ere I left," declared Mr. Black as
+they passed down the street.
+
+"I wish we were as safe as he is," laughed Adrian.
+
+For three blocks they wended their way as silently as possible
+and just as they came out into the open there came another bugle
+call.
+
+"That's for us," said Adrian. "There is no mistaking that
+command. Now to run for it."
+
+The two riders put spurs to their horses and Adrian bounded along
+at their side, running as lightly as an antelope. They were
+rapidly nearing the spot where the Americans were in waiting,
+when Adrian stepped into a hole and pitched forward onto his
+face.
+
+"Don't stop for me!" he called. "I'll be there as quick as you
+are!"
+
+He picked himself up and started to run, but his ankle gave him
+such a pain that he almost fainted.
+
+"Great Scott!" he exclaimed, "I've sprained my ankle."
+
+He sat down and rubbed the maimed member for a couple of minutes
+and then attempted to hobble on. It was more than he could bear
+and he sat down again.
+
+"By George," he groaned, "this is tough! I'll have to call for
+help."
+
+He gave the well-known whistle, but there was no response.
+
+He gave it again; but still no answer.
+
+"Worse and more of it," he muttered. "Something has happened to
+Billie."
+
+What it might be Adrian could not imagine, but he was sure that
+his chum was not at the appointed spot, as he was near enough to
+have heard the whistle and would surely have answered.
+
+"Well, I can't stay here. The greasers will be coming pretty
+soon. I must get along some way."
+
+He got up and walked a few steps and again sat down. There was no
+sound of a pursuit and the hoofbeats of Mr. Black's horses had
+ceased.
+
+"They have reached the grove," Adrian muttered. "I must get there
+some way."
+
+Once more he arose to his feet and took several steps and then
+sank down in a faint, so great was the pain.
+
+When he came to himself he was lying upon a matting of some kind
+and to his ears came the faint sound of a guitar, followed a few
+moments later by sounds of girlish laughter.
+
+He sat up and looked around, but could see nothing, except a ray
+of light coming in through a little crack between a couple of
+blankets that formed a curtain in a doorway.
+
+"Where in the name of common sense am I?" he muttered.
+
+He attempted to get to his feet, but the pain in his ankle
+brought him quickly to himself.
+
+"Now I remember!" he exclaimed. "I fell and sprained my ankle.
+But how did I get here?"
+
+He started to call, but at that moment the music ceased and a
+minute later he heard voices saying good night. Then a door was
+closed and immediately the curtains were thrown open and a peon
+woman stood in the door.
+
+"Oh!" she exclaimed, upon seeing Adrian sitting up and looking at
+her. "Then you are not dead?"
+
+"I should say not. Did you think I was?"
+
+"I was afraid so."
+
+"Why?"
+
+"Because your death might be laid at my door."
+
+"Evidently she hasn't discovered I am an American," thought
+Adrian. "Well, I'll not tell her until I have to."
+
+The woman turned around and called to some one in the other room
+and another figure appeared in the door--that of a girl some
+fifteen years of age.
+
+"Look, Peppita," and the elder woman pointed at Adrian.
+
+The girl gave a little scream.
+
+"_Madre mia!_" she exclaimed. "Who is it?"
+
+"I know not, my child. I found him unconscious at our back door
+and dragged him inside."
+
+"I beg your pardon," said Adrian. "I didn't know I was near any
+house."
+
+"It is a very poor one, seņor. I and my daughter are all alone
+since my poor Leocadio was killed."
+
+"Who killed him?" asked Adrian, becoming interested.
+
+"The Huertistas. He was a soldier under Gen. Dorantes."
+
+"Is that so?" exclaimed Adrian. "I know Gen. Dorantes well. He is
+a fine man. But you will soon be avenged, for Huerta's days are
+short."
+
+The woman's eyes snapped.
+
+"_Es verdad?_" meaning, "Is it true?"
+
+"It certainly is. Since the Americans have taken Vera Cruz, Gen.
+Huerta will have to go. It is only a question of a few days."
+
+"_Bienissimo!_ The Americans are brave men! My Leocadio was fond
+of the Americans."
+
+"I am glad of that, seņora, for I am an American."
+
+The woman and girl both started back as in fear and then came
+forward again.
+
+"How did you come here, seņor?"
+
+"I fell from a horse and sprained my ankle. I tried to walk and
+must have fainted."
+
+"Have you friends in Moreno?"
+
+"I did have, but they have gone and I want to get to Vera Cruz."
+
+"Vera Cruz is a long way, seņor. I never expect to go that far
+from home--me and my little Peppa."
+
+Adrian smiled.
+
+"I expect it does look like a long ways to you, seņora; but it is
+not far. Do you think I can stay here with you until my ankle is
+well enough to walk? I have a little money. I will pay you
+something."
+
+"Oh, Mother!" exclaimed the girl, who now spoke for the first
+time. "You will let him stay, won't you?"
+
+"The wife of Leocadio would not turn a lame dog out, much less a
+lame boy."
+
+"_Mil gracias, seņora!_" exclaimed Adrian, with much gratitude.
+"Yes, more than a thousand thanks. You will never regret it."
+
+"The wife of Leocadio is not learned," was the reply, "but she
+knows an honest youth when she sees one. Come, Peppita, let the
+young man go to sleep. We will make our bed out here."
+
+She drew the curtains together and Adrian was left alone to his
+own reflections.
+
+"By George!" he exclaimed under his breath, "if I ever get out of
+this measly country, I'll be glad. I wonder what has become of
+Billie? Of course he'll look for me, and old Don, too; but it
+looks as though it might be weeks before I could walk. Well, I
+don't care. If Mr. Black and Josie got away, that's glory enough
+for one day."
+
+He settled himself down and tried to go to sleep, but his leg
+hurt him so that he could not. In fact, the pain was so great
+that every once in a while he groaned.
+
+After a few of these groans the woman appeared in the door with
+an earthen vessel filled with hot water.
+
+"If the seņor will bind this on his ankle, it will do it much
+good," she said.
+
+"I'll do anything to get rid of this pain," said Adrian.
+
+He took the jar and, dipping his handkerchief in it, bathed his
+ankle freely and finally bound the cloth around the swollen part.
+
+"There," he muttered as he at last succeeded in finding a
+comfortable position, "now I think I can get a little sleep."
+
+How long thereafter it was before he came to himself he did not
+know, but when he opened his eyes the first streak of daylight
+was creeping in through a little window.
+
+A minute later there was the rattle of musketry, followed by a
+hearty American cheer. He raised up to look out of the window,
+when the side of the room came in with a crash.
+
+
+
+
+CHAPTER XXII.
+
+A RESCUE AND A SURPRISE.
+
+
+It would be hard to describe Adrian's surprise at the unexpected
+event which closed the preceding chapter. His first thought was
+that a cannon ball had struck the house, but a second thought
+convinced him that such was not the case. Before he had time to
+think further he heard a big voice call out:
+
+"Here he is!"
+
+A moment later Mr. Black burst in through the opening in the wall
+and, picking Adrian up in his arms as though he had been a baby,
+started on a run with him for the nearest horse.
+
+"There you are!" he exclaimed as he set the boy on the horse.
+"Now to run for it!"
+
+Adrian needed no second bidding, but digging his heels into the
+horse's side he dashed away toward the cocoanut grove, his flight
+being protected by the Americans with Billie at their head.
+
+A couple of minutes after, the entire band had rallied in the
+shelter of the trees, where they stopped to plan for the next
+move.
+
+"How did you ever find me?" asked Adrian as he and Billie peered
+out toward the town.
+
+"Mr. Black knew about where he lost you and we tracked you by
+your trail. Whoever dragged you into the house, left a trail as
+wide as your body."
+
+"It was a woman," explained Adrian, "and she was hiding me. But
+where were you when I whistled for help?"
+
+"That's a long story," was the reply, "which I will tell you when
+we have time; but briefly we were on the other side of the town,
+where we left the man on guard. It appears that our friend José
+was a first-class traitor."
+
+"As I discovered," said Adrian.
+
+"Yes," continued Billie, "he sent a bunch of soldiers to capture
+us. The sentry heard them coming and gave the alarm. We went to
+his aid and succeeded in rescuing him, but that is what got us
+into this trouble."
+
+"And now what?"
+
+"Now we have to get away just as soon as we can."
+
+"Right," said Mr. Black. "There is no enemy in sight at this
+moment and the best thing we can do is to run for it. If we can
+cross the valley safely, we shall have little trouble."
+
+"I'd like to stay and give them a few shots," said the corporal,
+"but it would probably be unwise."
+
+"I'll tell you what, Brooks," suggested Billie, "suppose you and
+I remain behind until we see the others well across the valley.
+If there is any pursuit, we can hold them back for a few
+minutes. They will not know how many we are and it will give the
+others a chance to escort Mr. Black and his daughter to a place
+of safety. You know that is what we really came for."
+
+"Fine!" was the corporal's reply.
+
+Mr. Black and Adrian protested, but they were overruled.
+
+"It's a good idea," said the oldest of the troopers, "and now to
+run for it."
+
+It was fully five minutes after the others had left that Billie
+and Brooks saw the Mexican infantry, some fifty in number, emerge
+from the town and come slowly toward them.
+
+Looking across the valley, they could perceive that the little
+band under the direction of Mr. Black was nearing the protection
+of the forest that covered the next hillside.
+
+"Two minutes more and they will be safe," said Billie.
+
+"Then we'll give them the two minutes," replied the corporal.
+"Cut loose at the bunch as soon as it is near enough."
+
+A moment later two rifles spoke out and then they turned loose
+their automatics, to give the impression of a much larger force.
+
+Two men fell and a minute later two more, as the boys'
+Winchesters again spoke.
+
+"Now for the horses!" cried Billie as the Mexicans threw
+themselves upon the ground.
+
+They sprang to their horses and dashed away down the valley.
+
+They were not discovered until they had cleared the shelter of
+the trees and then a volley was fired after them. The bullets
+sang all around them, but they escaped unhurt, and before another
+volley they were out of range.
+
+"It's a good thing for us that they have no cavalry," said Brooks
+as they sped along.
+
+"Sure is," was the response, "and I hope they don't succeed in
+getting word ahead of us."
+
+"We'll fix that," said Brooks. "We cross the railroad just at the
+foot of the hill and I'll climb up and cut the telegraph wires."
+
+"They may have sent word already."
+
+"Hardly. They may have tried to, but it's dollars to doughnuts
+that there was nobody at Joachin or Rio Blanco to receive it. The
+nearest night operator, I imagine, is at Piedras Negras."
+
+"They may send a force from there to head us off," suggested
+Billie.
+
+"That's so; but I'm not sure whether Piedras Negras is held by
+the Carranza or the Huerta forces."
+
+"It's a terrible mix-up, isn't it?" laughed Billie. "But I guess
+either side would be glad to get us."
+
+They had reached the tracks by this time and a couple of minutes
+later Brooks was up a pole and with the aid of his bayonet broke
+the wires.
+
+"If it isn't too late, that'll hold 'em for a while," he remarked
+as he descended from the pole and mounted his horse.
+
+When they joined the main company, Billie told Mr. Black what
+they had done and repeated to him what Brooks had said.
+
+"I think he is right," said Mr. Black, "and my advice is that we
+should give Piedras Negras a wide berth."
+
+"We can't get too far away from the railroad," explained Billie,
+"or we shall miss Don and his company. They are coming out for
+just such an emergency."
+
+They rode rapidly forward for a couple of hours and then, turning
+sharply off the highway, took to the woods which now grew dense
+all along the mountain sides.
+
+About ten o'clock they stopped for breakfast and then all took a
+nap until the sun drew near the western horizon.
+
+"We should reach our rendezvous with Don about dark," explained
+Billie, "and that would get us into Vera Cruz about daylight."
+
+As they approached the appointed spot, Billie and Adrian, ever on
+the alert, noticed almost as one that the place had a changed
+appearance and mentioned it to the others.
+
+"What do you mean?" asked the corporal.
+
+"I can't exactly explain," was Adrian's reply, "but my prairie
+training always warns me to go slow when I sense danger."
+
+"A mighty good idea," muttered one of the troopers, an old
+campaigner who had seen service with Funston in the Philippines.
+"These are slippery chaps."
+
+"If I could walk," was Adrian's comment, "I'd soon find out what
+is wrong; but you can't scout on horseback."
+
+The cavalcade came to a halt and the men examined their weapons
+to be sure they were in order.
+
+"What do you think we'd better do, Ad?" queried Billie.
+
+"I don't know. How far are we from the rendezvous?"
+
+"Not more than half a mile."
+
+"If it were not for the possibility of making matters worse,"
+suggested Adrian, "I'd fire a few shots; but of course what we
+want is to get into Vera Cruz without a fight. What do you think,
+Mr. Black?"
+
+"This is new business to me, boys," was the reply. "I'll have to
+leave it to you."
+
+"What's the matter with my going on a scout?" asked Billie.
+
+"Nothing the matter with your going," laughed Adrian, "but there
+might be with your coming back. No, I shall have to go, ankle or
+no ankle."
+
+He slid from his horse, and almost before any one realized what
+he was doing he had slipped away on his hands and knees.
+
+"He is certainly a brave boy," was Josie's remark, "and I hate to
+think of his taking all this risk on my account."
+
+"Not so much risk for him as for us, I'm thinking," muttered the
+old trooper. "They are looking for mounted men--if they're
+looking at all--and not for crawling boys."
+
+The old trooper was right, and ten minutes later Adrian returned
+to say that there was a small body of horsemen at the next turn
+of the road.
+
+"Did you see anything of Don?" queried Billie.
+
+"Not a sign."
+
+"That's mighty funny. Where do you suppose he can be?"
+
+"He may be hiding back in the woods, just as we are."
+
+"Well," said the corporal, "now that we know where the greasers
+are, what's the matter of going forward?"
+
+"No matter at all," replied Adrian. "We can easily bear away to
+the left and give them the shake, but I don't know what to do
+about the others."
+
+"The others will have to look out for themselves," replied
+Brooks. "They are able to do it."
+
+The words had hardly left his lips ere there came the sound of a
+single shot away to the left.
+
+"There they are!" cried Billie. "Come on!"
+
+The little cavalcade started forward, but ere they had gone a
+dozen rods they could hear the sound of approaching horsemen,
+crashing through the woods to their right.
+
+"The Mexicans!" said Adrian.
+
+"To cover, every man!" cried the corporal.
+
+A minute later every horse lay flat on the ground with his rider
+concealed behind him.
+
+
+
+
+CHAPTER XXIII.
+
+A DINNER AND ITS RESULT.
+
+
+With a shout the Mexicans broke into the clearing which the
+Americans had just left. They were a motley crowd, not much like
+the cavalry that forms such a great part of Uncle Sam's army.
+
+"It seems a shame to hurt them," muttered the corporal. "They
+look as though they would run if you said boo!"
+
+Seeing no one, the Mexicans, some twenty or twenty-five in
+number, came to a halt and their leaders held a council of war.
+
+The Americans, a couple of rods back in the woods, partly
+concealed by the trees and partly by the deepening twilight,
+watched them silently.
+
+After a couple of minutes' confab, the captain of the band gave
+an order which the boys could not hear and a couple of Mexicans
+dismounted and began carefully to examine the ground. They were
+looking for the prints of horses' hoofs.
+
+"_Aqui'sta!_" exclaimed one of the men on foot, pointing to the
+ground.
+
+The captain drew near and leaned over from his horse to see more
+clearly.
+
+He was evidently satisfied, for he straightened up and gave
+another command and the two horsemen sprang to their saddles.
+
+Another command and every man's sabre flashed in the air.
+
+Raising his own sabre aloft, the captain was about to give
+another command, when there was the sound of a single shot from
+the rear and the captain's sabre went flying from his hand,
+struck by a rifle ball.
+
+"_Carramba!_" he cried. "_Emboscado!_" meaning "an ambush," and
+putting spurs to his horse he turned and fled in the direction
+from which he had come, followed by the entire band, while the
+Americans fired a volley into the air.
+
+"They'll never stop running," laughed the corporal, "until they
+reach home--wherever that is."
+
+"And in the meantime we'll get out of here," said Mr. Black.
+
+The men sprang to their feet and to their horses. At the same
+moment there came from the woods to the left the well-known
+whistle of the Broncho Rider Boys.
+
+"It's Don!" cried Billie, as he gave the answering call, and an
+instant later Donald came into view through the trees, closely
+followed by half a score of Uncle Sam's troopers.
+
+"Just too late," said Adrian.
+
+"Too late for what?" queried Donald.
+
+"To see a masterly retreat," and in a few words he told Donald
+what had occurred.
+
+"Well," was the rejoinder, "I am glad no blood was shed. But who
+fired the shot from the rear?"
+
+"I," came a voice, and out of the shadows appeared a figure which
+had a most familiar appearance. "If you don't recognize me," he
+continued, "you may recognize Ambrosio."
+
+"By George!" exclaimed Billie, "if it isn't our old friend
+Strong. Where on earth did you come from?"
+
+"I suppose I might ask you the same thing," was the laughing
+reply. "Briefly, I am on my way to Vera Cruz. I heard there was a
+band of American brigands out in the mountains and I thought I
+might fall in with them."
+
+"So that's what they call us, is it?" said Billie. "I never
+expected to be called a brigand."
+
+"Strange things happen to men who travel," declared Strong
+facetiously; "but you'd better be going. There are some good
+troops in this section and they are on the lookout."
+
+"Good advice," muttered the old trooper. "This ain't no pleasure
+excursion."
+
+"Sorry we haven't a horse for you," said Adrian to Strong, "but I
+guess you are used to walking."
+
+"A good deal more so than riding. But, if one of you don't mind
+giving Ambrosio a lift, it will help some."
+
+Several expressed their willingness to take the ape on behind,
+but he would go to no one but Billie.
+
+"All right, old man," laughed the boy; "but no funny business,"
+and he broke off a twig and shook it at Ambrosio. "You see this."
+
+Now that the two companies had united, they broke away from the
+railroad and made a bee line toward Vera Cruz, arriving in sight
+of the city at daybreak.
+
+"Here's where we part company with the troopers," explained
+Donald. "We six and Ambrosio will ride into town together and the
+boys will come in as they wish. There must be no suggestion of a
+military expedition."
+
+"I see," said Mr. Black, "and I want to thank you all for your
+kindness to my daughter and to me. That is about all I can do
+now. Perhaps some day I can do more."
+
+"That's enough," muttered the old trooper, "unless you can get us
+all sent back home. I can't see any use of keeping us here."
+
+"That's all right, old man," laughed the corporal. "You know you
+would not go home if you could."
+
+"Better not give me a chance," was the grumbling reply, as the
+trooper bit off a big piece of tobacco and tucked it away in his
+cheek.
+
+Reveille was just sounding when the boys, accompanied by their
+three friends and Ambrosio, perched upon Billie's horse, drew up
+in front of Lieut. Grant's quarters. They had been recognized and
+passed through the lines, and as the men caught sight of them
+they were given a hearty cheer.
+
+"You seem to have made friends," laughed the lieutenant as he
+greeted them, "and there is every reason why you should. The
+general will be glad to see you and hear your report. I have no
+doubt you have a good story to tell, and he likes a good story."
+
+When the boys reached home they found the gate still locked,
+although it was now considerably past the time when the household
+was astir. Their knock was answered by the _portero_, who, in
+response to a question by Billie, said that Santiago was
+seriously ill and had been for thirty-six hours.
+
+"What is the matter?" asked Donald.
+
+"Fever."
+
+"I am not surprised," declared Adrian. "The strange thoughts he
+has been thinking so many days were bound to result in something
+serious."
+
+"Perhaps it is not convenient for us to remain here," said Mr.
+Black. "We can, I am sure, find some other place."
+
+But at this moment Lucia appeared at the head of the stairs.
+When made acquainted with Mr. Black's words she would not hear of
+his taking Josie to any other house and gave orders for making
+her perfectly at home. The only one who did not remain was
+Strong.
+
+"I'll come back this evening," he said. "I have a strange story
+to tell you boys and I may need your help in locating a man I am
+most anxious to find."
+
+But he did not come back that evening, and when he did come the
+next night the boys were not there, having been invited to dine
+with Gen. Funston. Had things not happened thus, a part of this
+story could never have been written, for it was while dining with
+the general that the boys were given a duty to perform, which was
+the most arduous of all their adventures in the land of the
+Montezumas.
+
+And this was the manner of it.
+
+They were just finishing dinner and Billie was congratulating
+himself that he had had his fill of good American cooking, when
+an aide announced that a Mexican gentleman, Don Esteban Mendoza,
+craved an immediate audience with Gen. Funston.
+
+"I am sure you young gentlemen will excuse me a few minutes,"
+said the general, "as Don Esteban is one of the prominent bankers
+of the city and I know his business must be of importance."
+
+The boys were glad to accept the proffered excuse and the general
+withdrew, leaving them in the company of several members of his
+staff, to whom they briefly related their recent adventure. When
+they told of the "ambush" there was much amusement.
+
+In the midst of their conversation the general returned
+accompanied by Don Esteban.
+
+"These are the young gentlemen to whom I referred," explained the
+general, introducing the boys. "They are typical Americans and,
+being civilians and speaking Spanish fluently, will be just the
+ones to help you in your trouble."
+
+Then to the boys: "Don Esteban has a very delicate mission for
+which he asks the assistance of Americans. He wished me to detail
+three young officers for the work, but this I do not feel I can
+do, as it is strictly a private mission. If you feel that you can
+undertake it, he will be glad to explain it to you."
+
+"Anything that you recommend, General, we shall be glad to
+undertake," replied Donald, acting as spokesman for the trio.
+
+"Then I shall turn you over to Don Esteban, and as his business
+is pressing, I will excuse you if you wish to accompany him
+home."
+
+"A thousand thanks, General," said Don Esteban effusively. Then
+to the boys: "My automobile is at the door. If you will take
+seats in it, we shall be speedily at my house. You will pardon me
+if I speak nothing but Spanish, as I know very little English,
+although"--with an expressive glance at Gen. Funston--"I hope to
+know it better."
+
+Following Don Esteban, they were soon speeding through the
+streets and five minutes later entered a handsome patio.
+
+"This is my house," said Don Esteban. "Be pleased to consider it
+your own. Now, if you will follow me to the library, I will
+explain the mission I wish you to undertake."
+
+The boys followed without a word, but as they passed up the
+stairs Billie muttered under his breath:
+
+"Did you notice, boys, that this house backs right up against
+Santiago's?"
+
+
+
+
+CHAPTER XXIV.
+
+DON ESTEBAN'S STRANGE LOSS.
+
+
+"Before I explain to you the mission I wish you to undertake,"
+said Don Esteban, "I must narrate briefly a story that has been
+handed down from the days of Montezuma. It is to the effect that
+when the Spanish conqueror, Cortez, was about to capture the City
+of Mexico, most of the treasure of the Aztecs was sunk in the
+lake, which at that time covered a portion of the Mexican
+plateau.
+
+"A part of this treasure is said to have been recovered, but the
+mine from which the gold of Montezuma was taken has never been
+discovered, although search has been made for upward of five
+hundred years. Some have supposed that the mine was adjacent to
+the City of Mexico and that it was flooded at the time the
+treasure was sunk in the lake. Others have thought it was located
+in the state of Michoacan, while still others have believed it
+located in the vicinity of Mt. Orizaba.
+
+"My reason for telling you this is that some years ago a strange
+appearing man came to our bank and made a large deposit of money,
+all in gold. He did not deposit it all at once, but brought it in
+a few thousand dollars at a time until it amounted to more than a
+million dollars. Then he disappeared and we have never seen him
+since."
+
+"And has he never called for any of the money?" asked Billie.
+
+"Not in person, although he has drawn upon it at frequent
+intervals. The name under which it was deposited is James Moon."
+
+"An American?" asked Donald.
+
+"I could not say whether he was an American or an Englishman. We
+took him for the latter. But now I am coming to the real part of
+the story.
+
+"In addition to the money which he deposited, he also left with
+us a small brass-bound box, in which he said there were valuable
+papers. He gave orders that it should be delivered to no one but
+himself in person, or until the expiration of ten years. The ten
+years will be up in a few days and this afternoon I bethought me
+of the box. But when I went into the vault in which it has been
+kept for so many years, the place upon an upper shelf, where it
+has always stood, was vacant. The box was gone!"
+
+"Gone?" exclaimed all the boys in unison. "Do you mean stolen?"
+
+"So it would appear."
+
+"How could it have been done?" asked Adrian.
+
+"I cannot say; but the strange thing about the whole matter
+is that in place of the box, there lay upon the shelf an
+envelope--yellow with age, upon which was written in ink that had
+scarcely faded the words: 'Montezuma's Mine.'"
+
+"Well, what do you think of that?" queried Billie, looking at the
+others in amazement.
+
+"I don't think," laughed Adrian. "It's up to you to do the
+thinking."
+
+"Is there no clue whatever?" asked Donald.
+
+"Not that could be really called a clue. The only suspicious
+thing that has happened to-day at all, was that a mountebank came
+into our bank----"
+
+"A mountebank!" from all.
+
+"Yes."
+
+"Did he have an ape with him?"
+
+"No! He was quite alone. He did not come in to make merry, but to
+get a bill changed. While he was there he was observed to
+scrutinize the place very closely."
+
+"But he did not go into your vault?"
+
+"No! He took his change and went peaceably out."
+
+"Then, why should you suspect him?" insisted Donald, casting a
+knowing glance at the other boys.
+
+"Because, an hour later, he came in again and said that one of
+the bills we gave him as change was a counterfeit."
+
+"Was it?"
+
+"No, it was not, although it was an old issue. The teller who
+waited upon him had no recollection of ever having seen the bill
+before, but rather than have a scene, we gave him another bill
+for it."
+
+"How large a bill was it?" asked Adrian.
+
+"Only a peso"--that is a dollar--"and it seemed hardly worth
+talking about; but you'd have thought it was a hundred."
+
+"Perhaps it seemed a large amount to him," ventured Billie.
+
+"Perhaps," admitted Don Esteban. "But be that as it may, I should
+like to see the man again, and especially would I like to know
+where he got that old dollar."
+
+"Why?"
+
+"Because it may have come out of that box."
+
+"Well, yes," said Donald, with a shake of his head, "it might
+have; but how could the mountebank have gotten the box?"
+
+"That is the mystery," was Don Esteban's reply.
+
+"And how do you wish us to help you?" asked Adrian.
+
+"Why," explained the banker, "I asked Gen. Funston to find the
+mountebank for me. He said you boys would do better than any one
+else."
+
+"But why us? Why not a Mexican policeman?"
+
+"Because the mountebank was an American. He may even have been a
+soldier and have hidden himself among your men."
+
+"Oh, he was an American, was he?" laughed Donald. "Then I believe
+we can put our finger on him with ease. But the man we have in
+mind always carried with him an ape."
+
+"Then it may not be the same," replied Don Esteban, "for this one
+had no ape with him either time."
+
+"It certainly does look like a mystery," was Adrian's comment.
+"Where is the vault from which the box was taken?"
+
+"On the other side of the patio."
+
+"May we examine it?"
+
+"Certainly. I'll show it to you now."
+
+Don Esteban led the way downstairs and across the patio. Opening
+the rear door of the bank, he escorted them within and closed the
+door.
+
+Passing behind the counter, he opened the iron door of the vault,
+disclosing within a good-sized chamber, in the rear of which was
+set the great steel safe, locked with a time lock.
+
+"There," explained Don Esteban, pointing to an upper shelf, "is
+where the box stood."
+
+"Oh, it was not a large box, then!" said Adrian.
+
+"Oh, no! Not more than eight or nine inches cube."
+
+The boy examined the vault carefully by the light of a gas jet.
+
+"There seems no way that any one could have entered except by the
+door," said Donald.
+
+"None whatever!"
+
+"You are sure there is no opening in the ceiling?"
+
+"Absolutely."
+
+Don Esteban led the boys out and locked the door of the vault.
+
+"Well," declared Donald as they came out into the patio after
+finishing their inspection, not only of the vault but of the rest
+of the office, "I guess we had better go home and study over the
+matter a little. I should not be surprised if we could put our
+hands upon the mountebank with very little trouble; but I feel
+sure he had nothing to do with the disappearance of the box."
+
+"I wish I could feel that way," said Adrian after they were out
+of hearing of Don Esteban. "I have never quite trusted Strong.
+There is something strange about him."
+
+"Yes, he is a bit queer; but how on earth could he have stolen
+the box if he did not even go behind the counter?"
+
+"He couldn't; but still I mistrust him."
+
+"I wonder where Ambrosio was all this time?" mused Billie.
+
+"Tied up at home, most likely. An American among Americans would
+hardly feel like traveling around with a hand organ and a
+monkey," was Don's emphatic reply.
+
+Upon arriving at Santiago's residence they were told that
+Strong had been there earlier in the evening and seemed much
+disappointed at not finding them at home.
+
+"Did he leave any word?" asked Billie of the portero.
+
+"None, seņor; but Donna Lucia would like to see you in the
+library."
+
+"What is the matter? Is Santiago worse?"
+
+"No, seņor. He is sleeping quietly. I could not say what she
+wants, but she seemed considerably disturbed."
+
+"Better go up alone, Billie," said Donald. "If we are needed, you
+can call us. We'll wait here in the patio for a few minutes
+before we turn in."
+
+Billie ran up the stairs and tapped at the library door. He was
+immediately admitted by Lucia and the door was closed behind him.
+
+"It is getting to be a good deal of a family affair," laughed
+Adrian.
+
+"Yes," replied Donald, with a grin. "I wonder where Josie and Mr.
+Black are?"
+
+Adrian colored.
+
+"I don't know why you should have thought of them!"
+
+"Oh," replied Donald nonchalantly, "speaking of family affairs
+naturally reminded me that you----"
+
+"Oh, Don!" came Billie's voice, breaking in upon the
+conversation.
+
+"Yes. What is it?"
+
+"Come up here, the both of you! Quick!"
+
+The boys ran up the stairs two steps at a time.
+
+"In here," and Billie held the library door open. "I've something
+I want to show you."
+
+He led the way to the table, and there, under the glow of the
+lamp, stood a brass-bound box about eight or nine inches cube.
+
+
+
+
+CHAPTER XXV.
+
+DONALD IS KIDNAPED.
+
+
+"Great Scott!" was the spontaneous exclamation of both the
+newcomers. "Where did it come from?"
+
+"You tell," replied Billie. "Lucia says it was not here an hour
+ago. Neither has any one been in the room so far as she knows."
+
+"Has she been here all the time?" asked Adrian.
+
+"No, she was with Josie in her room for a time; but the door into
+the patio was locked."
+
+"Some one might have come in through the window."
+
+"A fat chance, isn't there!" laughed Billie, pointing to the only
+window in the room which was protected with long and heavy iron
+bars, set so closely together that a child would have had trouble
+in squeezing through--much less a man.
+
+"Does look a little difficult," replied Adrian.
+
+"Worse than difficult. Impossible," was Donald's comment.
+
+"Did you hear any noise?" asked Billie of Lucia.
+
+"None whatever."
+
+"And you have never seen the box before?"
+
+Lucia wrinkled her brows and thought deeply.
+
+"Do you know," she finally said, "I have a sort of a dim
+recollection that, away back in my childhood somewhere, I have
+seen it or one just like it."
+
+"Away back in your childhood," laughed Donald, "couldn't have
+been so very far, Seņorita."
+
+Lucia made a little grimace.
+
+"I'm nearly seventeen," she said.
+
+"Botheration!" said Billie. "We are not here to discuss ages, but
+to find out how this box came here. I have no doubt that Lucia
+has seen many similar boxes in her time."
+
+"Well," asked Donald, somewhat nettled, "what do you propose to
+do?"
+
+"In the first place, I want to search the house."
+
+"That's a good idea," declared Adrian. "Donna Lucia, will you
+lead the way?"
+
+"Certainly. Right this way; but don't go into father's room. I
+know there is no one in there. One of the servants has been with
+him every minute of the time."
+
+Headed by Lucia, the boys explored the house from top to bottom,
+but not a sign of any one could they find. So far as they could
+determine, the box must have come in of its own self.
+
+"I'll tell you one thing we can and must do," said Billie, after
+they had returned to the library. "We must keep a watch in this
+room to-night. Whoever put the box here may return."
+
+"Right!" from Don. "You do have occasional lucid intervals,
+Billie."
+
+Billie grinned, but made no reply.
+
+"I think we may all stay here for a few hours," suggested Lucia.
+"Father is so much better that I think we may have a little
+music. I will play some accompaniments on the guitar and Josie
+can sing."
+
+"That will seem a good deal like being back in the States,"
+declared Adrian. "With the Stars and Stripes flying over my head,
+a brigade of American troops on guard and an American girl
+singing, I can almost forget I am on Mexican soil."
+
+"How about the accompanist?" queried Billie.
+
+"Oh!" laughed Adrian, "we're quite willing to adopt her. Hey,
+Donald?"
+
+"Don't ask me, Ad. Ask Billie."
+
+"I am sure we could do no better," was Billie's gallant reply.
+
+Lucia's suggestion was carried out and for a couple of hours
+there was a merry little party under Santiago's hospitable roof.
+Even the mysterious box was forgotten and the young people were
+giving themselves up to a jolly good time, when suddenly there
+came a scream which caused every one to turn their eyes toward
+the room in which the sick man was supposed to be lying.
+
+But there in the doorway he stood, his long night robe reaching
+nearly to the floor and his thin black hair standing almost on
+end.
+
+"Father!" cried Lucia, rushing toward him "What is it?"
+
+He waved her off, but made no reply, while with his long bony
+finger he pointed at the brass-bound box.
+
+"Where did it come from?" he asked in a shrill, querulous tone.
+"Who brought back my secret casket?"
+
+"Yours?" came from every one in the room.
+
+"Yes! Mine! Mine!!" he almost screamed.
+
+"He's raving!" cried Josie. "Can't some one do something for
+him?"
+
+"No," he replied, and his voice became more calm, "I am not
+raving. I know whereof I speak. Quick! Let me look within it to
+see that all is safe."
+
+"It is locked, Father," said Lucia, coming to his side, "and we
+have no key."
+
+"I can unlock it," he cried. "I can unlock it. Give it to me.
+Give it to me."
+
+He staggered forward and seized the box in his hands. For several
+seconds he fumbled with it, turning it first upon one side and
+then upon another, and at last raised the lid. He thrust in his
+hand and then stopped as one stupefied.
+
+"Empty! Empty!" he gasped in an almost audible whisper. "The plan
+of Montezuma's mine is gone! Gone!!"
+
+A moment he stood and gazed around upon the faces of those in the
+room and then collapsed upon the floor.
+
+Quickly the boys picked him up and carried him to his bed and the
+attending physician was summoned.
+
+Billie picked up the box and examined it curiously.
+
+"I wonder how he opened it?" he mused. "There must be some sort
+of a spring somewhere."
+
+He felt the box all over, but could find nothing. Then he closed
+it and set it upon the table. A moment later Donald picked it up
+and tried to open it, but it was locked fast.
+
+"Nothing but mysteries," he said. "I'm getting tired of them. But
+before anything else happens, I'm going around and notify Don
+Esteban that the box is here."
+
+"I'll go with you," said Adrian.
+
+"No, you'd better stay here. I'll take a mozo with me."
+
+He ran hastily down the stairs and a minute later the boys heard
+the gate close behind him.
+
+"I guess this is the quickest way," thought Donald as he gained
+the sidewalk. "I'll not bother with a mozo. With American
+soldiers on guard and my automatic in my pocket, I have nothing
+to fear."
+
+A couple of minutes later he was ringing the bell at Don
+Esteban's house. He was hastily admitted and at once conducted to
+that gentleman's presence, where he narrated hastily what had
+occurred at the other house.
+
+"Who is this old man?" Don Esteban asked of Donald.
+
+Donald explained as best he could.
+
+"Which is mighty little," he declared when he had finished. "He
+is the greatest mystery we have ever encountered. There is no
+doubt that he is an Indian, but he speaks English like an
+Englishman."
+
+"I must go and see him at once," declared Don Esteban, rising.
+
+"I don't think you can, sir, to-night. I don't think the
+physician would permit it."
+
+"Well, then, the first thing in the morning. I thank you, young
+sir. Won't you have a glass of wine before you go?"
+
+"No, I think not," replied Donald. "I've never acquired that
+Mexican habit yet. Good night, sir."
+
+He left the house feeling greatly relieved that he had reported
+the finding of the box and walked slowly along whistling merrily.
+As he turned off the street upon which Don Esteban lived he heard
+soft footsteps behind him and turned hastily.
+
+But he was too late.
+
+Before he could see who it was, or ere he could cry out, a cloak
+was thrown over his head and he was picked up and carried away
+bodily.
+
+Donald was not the boy to give in without a struggle, but kick
+and squirm as he might, he could not free himself. Presently
+those who were carrying him stopped and laid him on the sidewalk.
+Then he heard a knock and a gate opened. Then he was lifted up
+again and, almost before he knew it, he was thrust into a little
+room--a closet it seemed--and the door closed upon him.
+
+It was a hot night and the little place was stifling.
+
+"I'll smother if I don't get out of this," he muttered.
+
+Slowly he unwrapped the cloak from about his head and at last
+freed himself completely from its folds; but he secured little
+relief from the heat.
+
+The room could not have been more than six feet square and it did
+not take Donald long to run his hand clear around the wall.
+
+There was only one door, that through which he had been thrust,
+and it was locked. He pounded upon it, but to no avail. Then he
+sat down to think.
+
+"There is certainly no use to sweat myself to death," he told
+himself. "I'd better be as quiet as I can. There is air enough
+coming under the door so I won't suffocate, so I might just as
+well wait and see what will turn up."
+
+He ran his hand all over his automatic and found it in good
+shape. Then he leaned back against the wall opposite the door and
+waited. Ten minutes later the door was suddenly yanked open,
+another figure was bundled into the closet and the door slammed
+shut, almost before Donald could think.
+
+
+
+
+CHAPTER XXVI.
+
+A PLOT AGAINST FUNSTON.
+
+
+A muttered imprecation was the only intimation that the figure
+which had been so unceremoniously bundled into the closet was
+alive.
+
+"Who are you?" asked Donald in Spanish.
+
+"Let me out of this," was the unsatisfactory response in English.
+
+"Oh!" from Donald. "You are an American. Well, keep still and
+I'll help you to get rid of the blanket."
+
+He grabbed hold of the covering and the newcomer was soon
+uncovered.
+
+"Now, then, who are you?" asked Donald again.
+
+"I'll show you who I am if I get hold of you," was the uncivil
+answer, and an arm shot out.
+
+"Now look here," said Donald, "if you don't stop that I'll let
+daylight through you. We are in a bad box and the only thing to
+do is to make the best of it."
+
+"We?" exclaimed the newcomer. "Why do you say we?"
+
+"Because I am a prisoner the same as you are. Now, who are you?"
+
+"I'm Lieutenant Grimes of the general's staff. Who are you?"
+
+"I am Donald Mackay, on a special mission for Gen. Funston."
+
+"How did they get you?"
+
+"Kidnaped me on the street. How did they get you?"
+
+"Same way. I had just left the general's quarters."
+
+"I can see that some one might want to capture you, lieutenant,
+but I cannot see what they want of me."
+
+"How long have you been here?" asked the lieutenant.
+
+"About half an hour. By the way, are you armed?"
+
+"No; they took away my weapons. How about you?"
+
+"I have my automatic. I'd have used it when you came in, only
+you were dumped in so suddenly."
+
+"What do you suppose the game is?"
+
+"I don't know; but we'll find out. I've been in tighter places
+than this--but no hotter," after a pause.
+
+"Have you tried to get out?"
+
+"Yes; but it was too hot work. The door seemed pretty strong."
+
+"Perhaps the two of us might force it," suggested Grimes. "I'm a
+pretty husky chap."
+
+"We might try," replied Donald. "The place is so narrow we can
+get a good brace."
+
+They put their feet against the opposite wall and pushed against
+the door.
+
+"We'll never make it that way," said the lieutenant. "We'll have
+to throw ourselves at it."
+
+"Not much room for that, Lieutenant, but you give the word and
+we'll have a try."
+
+Getting their bearings as well as they could in the dark, they
+drew themselves back and then literally threw themselves at the
+door. It gave way with a snap and both fell to their feet on the
+outside.
+
+Quick as a flash they were on their feet, Donald with his weapon
+ready for instant action.
+
+But there was no one in sight.
+
+"That's mighty funny!" exclaimed the lieutenant. "Lock two strong
+men up in a place like that and not guard it."
+
+"It's a mighty good thing for us they didn't," laughed Donald. "I
+wonder where we are?"
+
+He glanced about the room which was dimly lighted by a couple of
+lamps, fastened to the wall by brackets. It was well--yes,
+elegantly furnished. At one side of the room was the closet out
+of which they had just emerged, while at the opposite side were
+three doors. On a third side were two windows and the fourth side
+was a plain wall.
+
+"Not a bad-looking place," observed the lieutenant.
+
+"Not at all," echoed Donald, "and there seem plenty of means of
+exit."
+
+"Sure, my boy; and if it's all the same to you, we'll go. The
+sooner I get back the quicker I'll be able to start something in
+this direction. Come on!"
+
+They crossed over to the doors and tried the first one. It was
+locked. They tried the second and it opened into another closet.
+
+"Three times and out," laughed Donald as he took hold of the knob
+of the last door.
+
+It yielded to his touch and he opened it gently. Then he quickly
+and quietly closed it.
+
+"What's up?" asked the lieutenant.
+
+Donald put his fingers to his lips.
+
+"How many?" queried Lieut. Grimes.
+
+"Three," was the whispered response. "Let's hear what they have
+to say."
+
+He opened the door a crack, through which they could see three
+men seated at a table. One wore the uniform of a Mexican officer,
+the other was dressed in Mexican costume, while the third was
+unquestionably an American, although they could only see his
+back.
+
+"I have carried out my part of the agreement," the American was
+saying, "and now I want my money."
+
+"How do we know you have?" asked the officer.
+
+"Haven't I put Gen. Funston into your hands?"
+
+"We are not sure it is Funston," said the other.
+
+"Then bring him out and look at him. You know the general when
+you see him, don't you?"
+
+"I think so, although I've never seen him but once."
+
+"Well, that is he, all right," declared the American.
+
+Donald turned and looked at his companion. Then he chuckled.
+
+The lieutenant said nothing, but stroked his whiskers which he
+wore in exact imitation of his chief.
+
+"Lucky for the general," he whispered, and Donald nodded his head
+that he understood.
+
+The two Mexicans exchanged a few words under their breath which
+Donald could not hear and then the officer took from his breast
+pocket a large wallet, from which he counted out ten bank notes.
+They were yellow backs and Donald was not at all surprised when
+the officer said:
+
+"Here are ten one-thousand-dollar bills in American money. We
+believe you are telling us the truth, as your words are
+corroborated by the men who brought him here. But if you are
+playing us false, we shall know how to reach you."
+
+The American shrugged his shoulders as he took the bills, rolled
+them up nonchalantly and placed them in his trousers pocket.
+
+"You can find me at the Hidalgo Hotel whenever you want me," he
+said, "and now I must be going."
+
+He arose from his seat, and as he did so, Donald caught sight of
+his face. It was the mountebank, Strong, but in his stylish
+clothing Don had failed to recognize him.
+
+"Great Scott!" he muttered to himself, "the plot thickens!"
+
+"What's that?" queried the lieutenant, who caught the muttered
+exclamation.
+
+"Nothing much," replied Donald as the three men walked toward a
+door in the farther end of the room and he was enabled to speak
+without being heard, "only that is the man I'm looking for. Let's
+get out of the window and see if we can't head him off."
+
+He closed the door and turned the key which he had quietly taken
+from the other side.
+
+The windows were open and they looked out. They were on the side
+of the house overlooking a good-sized lawn.
+
+"That's the reason they are not barred," explained Donald. "Had
+they been front windows, we might as well have been in jail. You
+go first and I'll cover the retreat."
+
+Lieut. Grimes sprang into the window and lowered himself to the
+ground, just as a hand turned the knob.
+
+"Good-bye!" muttered Donald. "Sorry I can't wait to receive you,"
+and he followed the lieutenant.
+
+On the ground they could hear the men trying to open the door and
+as they sped across the lawn toward a high brick wall, the door
+gave way with a crash and they could hear surprised voices.
+
+"They have discovered our wreckage!" cried Donald. "Over the wall
+you go!"
+
+"You first this time," said the lieutenant.
+
+"No, you first. I can boost you up, but I couldn't pull you. You
+can pull me."
+
+The argument was good and the lieutenant acted upon it.
+
+A minute later he was on top of the wall.
+
+"Great Cæsar!" he exclaimed. "There's nothing under me but
+water."
+
+"Never mind that," was the response. "Haul me up."
+
+The lieutenant leaned down and gave the lad a hand.
+
+"Here we are," he said a minute later. "We can't jump in, for
+there is no knowing where we are."
+
+"Sure," from Donald. "Let's run along the wall."
+
+This they did for about a hundred yards and then the wall ended
+abruptly against what appeared to be an abutment.
+
+"We must act quickly," declared Donald. "They think you are
+Funston and won't hurt you. Keep up the deception. I'm going to
+swim for it. I'll have help here just as quick as I can. So
+long," and, throwing off his coat, he jumped into the water some
+twenty feet below.
+
+
+
+
+CHAPTER XXVII.
+
+THE ADMIRAL TO THE RESCUE.
+
+
+When Donald struck the water he allowed himself to go clear to
+the bottom, as he wanted to find out just about how deep it was.
+
+It was, as he had expected, about the depth of the water in the
+harbor and he made up his mind that he could not be far from some
+of the wharves that constitute the water front.
+
+When he came to the surface, he struck out away from the wall,
+and by the light of the moon was soon able to see the vessels in
+the offing. He could also see that he was well north of the
+principal docks.
+
+"I guess I'll land at the first place that offers," he thought,
+"and find my way to headquarters from there."
+
+He struck out lustily, but had not been swimming more than a
+couple of minutes, when he heard the sharp exhaust of a gasoline
+launch.
+
+Realizing that it must be an American craft, he shouted at the
+top of his voice.
+
+At first there was no response, but as the boat came nearer and
+he shouted even more loudly, a friendly hail came over the
+waters.
+
+"Where are you?" came the voice as the boat came to a stop.
+
+"Here, to your port side," he replied.
+
+The launch was started again slowly and Donald was soon able to
+make himself visible.
+
+"Who are you?" was the first question pumped at him by the
+officer in command.
+
+"Special messenger for Gen. Funston," was the response.
+
+"Where is your uniform?"
+
+"I'm not a soldier. I am a civilian."
+
+"A likely story," snapped the officer, who chanced to be an
+ensign.
+
+"I can't help how likely it is," snapped Donald in return. "It's
+true, and I want to be put ashore as quickly as possible. I have
+an important message and the safety of one of his staff is
+involved. There is also a plot on foot to capture the general
+himself."
+
+"Nonsense! And besides, I can't put you ashore. I am carrying a
+message to Admiral Fletcher."
+
+"But my business is important," insisted Donald.
+
+"So is mine," declared the ensign.
+
+He ordered his launch full speed ahead in the direction of the
+flagship.
+
+"It's pretty tough," commented Donald, "but I'll prove I am right
+when I get to the ship."
+
+"I hope so," was the reply. "I haven't anything against you and
+you may be telling the truth, but I can't take any chances."
+
+Fifteen minutes later they drew up beside the flagship.
+
+"Up you go," said the ensign, motioning Donald up the ladder.
+"I'll present you to the officer of the deck," which he quickly
+did.
+
+"Here's a man I picked up in the water, sir, who says he has a
+message for Gen. Funston, but I had no time to put him ashore."
+
+"Looks more like a boy than a man," replied the officer. Then to
+Donald: "What's this about you having a message for Gen.
+Funston?"
+
+Donald repeated what he had told the ensign.
+
+"What's that?" asked another officer, coming forward out of the
+shadow of the after turret.
+
+The first officer saluted.
+
+"Tell the Admiral your story, my lad," he said.
+
+Again Donald repeated his story, this time going more into
+detail.
+
+"Come with me," ordered the Admiral, and he led the way to the
+wireless operator.
+
+"Get into communication with Gen. Funston at once," was the
+admiral's order.
+
+"Here he is, sir," was the report a couple of minutes later.
+
+"Ask him if he has three American boys on a special mission."
+
+The answer came back promptly that he had.
+
+"Ask him if Lieut. Grimes is missing."
+
+Again came back the answer that he was.
+
+"Tell the general that we have one of the lads on the _Arkansas_,
+and that he has had a strange adventure. Tell him I will send the
+lad ashore immediately."
+
+"Thank you, sir," said Donald. "I knew some one would know what
+to do."
+
+"You're a brave lad," was the Admiral's comment, "and I shall be
+glad to hear the end of the adventure. You and your companions
+must come out and dine with us as soon as your mission is ended."
+
+Donald thanked him for his kindness and hastened to the launch
+which was to take him back.
+
+Twenty minutes later he stood before Gen. Funston.
+
+"You seem to have been in the water," was the general's first
+words.
+
+"Yes, sir," laughed Donald. "I jumped from a wall north of town,
+leaving Lieut. Grimes on top of it."
+
+"What! Lieut. Grimes on top of a wall? How did he get there?"
+
+"He was kidnapped, sir! It was a case of mistaken identity!"
+
+"Mistaken identity! I don't understand!"
+
+"They took him for you, sir, because his beard is trimmed like
+yours."
+
+The general smiled grimly.
+
+"Think I shall have all my staff officers do the same," he
+commented. Then more seriously: "Can you lead us to the house?"
+
+"I'm not sure about the house; but I can take you to the stone
+wall from which I jumped. That ought to guide us to the house."
+
+"Right," said the general.
+
+He called another member of his staff and gave a few brief
+orders.
+
+In another ten minutes two launches loaded with regulars and
+armed with a rapid-fire gun in each, steamed swiftly up the
+harbor.
+
+"There's the wall!" exclaimed Donald a few minutes later, "and
+there's where I jumped," pointing to a spot near the abutment.
+
+The officer in command headed the boats for the shore.
+
+"It is not only a question of freeing Lieut. Grimes," said the
+officer, "but we also want to capture the conspirators. This is
+a much more serious matter than Gen. Funston is willing to
+admit."
+
+"Then if you will take my suggestion, sir," said Donald modestly,
+"I would let a few soldiers go over the wall as well as entering
+the front of the house."
+
+The officer looked up twenty feet. The wall was absolutely
+perpendicular and as smooth as the side of a house.
+
+"I'm afraid none of my men can scale it," he said.
+
+"Can't we throw a grapnel over it, sir?"
+
+"We might; but it would be a very slight hold."
+
+"If you can make it hold at all," laughed Donald, "I'm willing to
+make the effort. At best I can only fall back into the water."
+
+"True," declared the officer. "We'll try it."
+
+A grapnel was tied to a long line, such as is used in tying the
+launch to the shore, and after several vain attempts the grapnel
+caught in the top of the wall.
+
+Donald sprang forward and tested it with his weight and it held.
+Then, without another word, he braced his feet against the wall
+and in almost less time than it takes to write it, he was at the
+top.
+
+"Do you see any one?" asked the officer from below.
+
+"No, sir; but there is the sound of pacing footsteps on the walk
+that runs along the side of the house."
+
+"Good! Now make fast the grapnel and we will see if there are a
+dozen men here who can climb to the top."
+
+The dozen were quickly found and they were soon at the top of the
+wall. The officer finally decided to add to their armament one of
+the rapid-firers.
+
+"If there is any resistance," he said, "we'll knock the side of
+the house in."
+
+"What shall I do?" asked Donald.
+
+"You'd better come back into the boat. You can help us to enter
+the house in front."
+
+Donald slid down the rope and the expedition quickly made a
+landing. Silently, so as not to alarm those within the house, the
+men took their way to the front of the mansion, which was at once
+recognized as one of the finest in Vera Cruz.
+
+"Do you know who lives here?" asked the officer.
+
+"No, sir," replied Donald.
+
+"I was told it was the residence of one of Huerta's generals,"
+said a soldier. "It was pointed out to me the first day we
+landed."
+
+"Good!" from the officer. "I shall now have no compunction about
+entering the place."
+
+With Donald and a couple of soldiers, the officer approached the
+door and gave a vigorous knock.
+
+There was no response and he knocked again.
+
+"Who is there?" finally came a voice, evidently a mozo.
+
+"An American officer. Open the door in the name of the law."
+
+There was a still further delay and then another voice asked:
+"How do we know it is an officer?"
+
+"Open and find out, before I force the door."
+
+There was a still further delay.
+
+"It's a good thing we guarded the rear," said Donald. "They are
+evidently trying to gain time to spirit Lieut. Grimes away,
+thinking it is Gen. Funston."
+
+"True," said the officer. "We'll wait no longer. Corporal, force
+the door!"
+
+The corporal placed a small stick of dynamite under the door and
+fixed a fuse.
+
+"Step back a little," he said.
+
+All obeyed, when at the instant the door was thrown open and a
+hand, in which was an automatic revolver, was thrust out,
+directly in the face of the officer.
+
+But quick as was the action, Donald was not taken off his guard.
+
+With a single swift blow he struck the weapon into the air.
+
+At the same instant a fusillade from the rear of the house gave
+evidence that the men stationed upon the wall had done their
+work.
+
+
+
+
+CHAPTER XXVIII.
+
+BILLIE MAKES A DISCOVERY.
+
+
+Having released Lieut. Grimes and taken the plotters into
+custody, the next task was to locate Strong, the mountebank, and
+to solve the mystery of the box.
+
+Outside the one exclamation which Donald had uttered when he
+recognized Strong as the third of the plotters, he had not
+betrayed his secret to any one, and when Lieut. Grimes told his
+story to Gen. Funston and described the American, Donald
+vouchsafed no information which might help to apprehend him.
+
+"The plotter told the Mexicans that he could be found at the
+Hidalgo Hotel whenever he was wanted," explained Lieut. Grimes.
+"While he may have lied about it, I think we should send a force
+and try to locate him."
+
+The advice was acted upon and a corporal and four soldiers sent
+to the hotel, but to no purpose. No such man was known there.
+
+"What was the use of my saying anything about it?" asked Donald
+of the other two boys when he returned to Santiago's house and
+narrated to them the story of his evening's adventure. "I was
+sure he was not there and I have no idea where he is; but we'll
+find him and the ten thousand dollars given him by the Mexicans
+for his treachery."
+
+"That's right, Don," was Billie's comment. "If you can get that
+money and I can get my ten thousand pounds, this trip won't be so
+bad."
+
+"In the meantime," said Adrian, "I propose that some of us go to
+bed. It's nearly two o'clock and there is mighty little chance
+that any one will try to steal the box again."
+
+"I think you are right," said Billie. "We might as well all go.
+The doctor is still with Santiago and will stay until he is
+better. It isn't at all likely that any one will try to come into
+this room while he is here."
+
+Billie voiced the unanimous opinion, and a few minutes later the
+young people had all sought their beds, leaving instructions with
+the physician and the servants that they were to be called if any
+change for the worse occurred in Santiago's condition.
+
+It was probably two hours later, just about daylight, that the
+entire household was awakened by a terrible shriek and one of the
+maids rushed out into the patio.
+
+The boys came to their feet with a bound and hurried from their
+room on the ground floor, while the others appeared at the head
+of the stairs.
+
+"What is it?" asked Donald as soon as he could quiet the
+shrieking maid. "What are you yelling about?"
+
+"Oh, seņor!" she cried. "I have seen the devil."
+
+"Nonsense," laughed the boy. "You had a nightmare."
+
+"No, seņor. It was the devil. He had horns and a tail and he had
+the little box under his arm. I saw him!"
+
+"The box!" cried Billie. "Quick, Lucia, look and see if the box
+is gone!"
+
+The girl rushed back into the library and she, too, gave a
+shriek.
+
+"It's gone!" she cried. "It's gone!"
+
+The boys sprang up the stairs three at a time and into the
+library. Lucia was right. The box was gone.
+
+"It must be the old boy, sure enough," said Billie, "or at least
+one of his imps." Then to the maid: "How did he get in?"
+
+"I don't know, seņor. I only saw him go out. He went right
+through the door without opening it."
+
+"Nonsense!" from Donald. "His Satanic majesty might go through
+a solid door, but the box wouldn't. There is some other
+explanation."
+
+"But who could it be?" queried Lucia in great fear.
+
+"Some one who knows the house," declared Adrian emphatically. "He
+may have put on some masquerade costume just to frighten these
+superstitious servants in case he was discovered."
+
+"I believe Ad is right," agreed Donald. "What do you think,
+Billie?"
+
+"Maybe, Don; but I have a theory of my own. If I am right, I can
+work it better if I tell no one."
+
+At this moment the physician entered the room.
+
+"How is Santiago?" asked Donald.
+
+"Better! He has gone to sleep, and if he is not disturbed, I
+expect him to be greatly improved when he awakens. I should not
+be surprised if this were the turning point in his illness."
+
+"Then we had all better go down on to the first floor and leave
+him alone with his nurses."
+
+"I'd give a good deal to know where Strong is," remarked Donald
+as they were drinking their coffee an hour later.
+
+"So would I," declared Billie. "I believe, if we can find him, we
+can solve this entire mystery."
+
+"As soon as we finish our coffee," suggested Donald, "let's get
+busy and find him. He can't be far."
+
+"That's right," said Adrian. "We'll round him up in short order.
+Hey, Billie?"
+
+"We ought to; but I'll tell you what. You fellows go out and see
+if you can get a line on him, and I'll hang round the house to
+see that the devil doesn't come and steal the rest of the house."
+
+"Especially Lucia," laughed Donald.
+
+"That's all right," was the good-natured reply; "but I have an
+idea that the devil and Strong may have something in common."
+
+"You don't think it was Strong who came and took the box, do
+you?" queried Adrian.
+
+"I don't know just what I do think, Ad; but I'm going to do a
+little detective work and I want to give the impression that we
+are all out. When you fellows go out, don't say anything that
+would cause any one in hiding to think we are not all going out
+together. Do you sabe?"
+
+"Sure. I hope you'll get a clue if we do not."
+
+When the others had gone, Billie sat quietly in his room for a
+long time. He could easily have gone to sleep, as he had had only
+a couple of hours' rest, but he made up his mind that he would
+not be caught napping again if anything should happen.
+
+But nothing happened.
+
+The minutes passed into hours and it was rapidly nearing noon
+when Billie made up his mind that it was a bad job.
+
+"We had our chance at daylight," he muttered, "and now we will
+not get another. Whoever is after the box, has it and is not
+going to take any further chance of being caught."
+
+He went out into the patio and looked up at the sun. It was
+almost in the zenith and the air was stifling.
+
+"Any one would be a fool to go out at this time of day," he
+mused. "I wonder where the fellows are?"
+
+He stepped back under the shade of the arcade that extended clear
+around the patio and threw himself onto a stone seat.
+
+"Queer old place," he thought, "and a queer old seat."
+
+He laid his hand on one of the carved arms and mechanically toyed
+with an eagle's head that formed one of the decorations. To his
+surprise the head turned in his hand.
+
+"I hope I haven't broken it," he said as he examined it more
+closely.
+
+It was clearly made to revolve and so he turned it clear around,
+when of a sudden the arm of the seat fell apart and the bottom
+collapsed, disclosing to Billie's astonished eyes a pair of
+stairs.
+
+Almost thrown to the pavement by the giving way of the seat,
+Billie picked himself up and looked about to see if he were
+observed.
+
+There was no one in sight and he stooped down and examined the
+stairs carefully. Then he straightened up and rubbed his chin as
+a sudden gleam of intelligence passed through his brain.
+
+"So," he muttered, "this is why Santiago dwells in a house that
+is directly back of the banker's. That was his box and he is the
+strange man who made the million-dollar deposit in Don Esteban's
+bank."
+
+Then he stopped and pondered.
+
+"But who stole the box? Not Santiago, for he has not left his
+room for days. If it was Strong, he must have entered the bank
+from some direction other than this. I don't understand, but I'm
+going to make some further investigation."
+
+He reëntered his room, buckled on his automatic and took from his
+suit case--which, by the way, he had located at the railway
+station along with that of his companions after the occupation of
+the city by the marines--his electric torch. Then he went out and
+descended the stairs, which he discovered were twenty-four in
+number.
+
+Reaching the bottom he found himself upon a landing some six or
+eight feet square, from the opposite side of which another flight
+of stairs ascended.
+
+"I reckon I better see where they lead to," was his comment as he
+slowly began their ascent.
+
+After going up eighteen stairs his head touched the floor above.
+He counted the remaining steps by the light of his torch and
+found that there were six more. This would make the floor over
+his head on an exact level with the floor of Santiago's house.
+
+"It's just as I expected," he muttered. "If I can get
+through this floor, I shall find myself in Don Esteban's
+residence--somewhere. But just where? That's the question."
+
+He pushed upon the stone above his head, but it refused to move.
+Then he held up his torch and examined the ceiling carefully.
+Whatever the method by which the stones could be moved, it was
+carefully concealed.
+
+Much chagrined, Billie at length decided to retrace his steps and
+await the coming of his companions. He reached the landing and
+crossed over to the steps by which he had descended.
+
+Glancing up, he uttered an exclamation of surprise, for there at
+the opening and peering down the stairs was Ambrosio, the ape.
+
+With a cry of recognition the simian started to descend the
+stairs, but at a noise from above he hesitated and then sprang
+back and out of sight.
+
+An instant later the opening was closed and Billie was left in
+the darkness, except for the light of his torch.
+
+
+
+
+CHAPTER XXIX.
+
+THE MYSTERY DEEPENS.
+
+
+While Billie was making his discoveries Donald and Adrian had
+also been busy.
+
+When they left the house, at Donald's suggestion, they went first
+to the bank and told Don Esteban about the disappearance of the
+box and what the maid had seen. He was much disappointed until it
+was explained to him that they also had another clue.
+
+"We shall spend our time in the slums," said Donald, "while our
+chum keeps watch at the house. We feel sure that between us we
+shall solve the mystery."
+
+"I hope so," was Don Esteban's response. "Do you think I might be
+able to see this man Santiago?"
+
+"I'm afraid not, sir! The doctor wants him to sleep as long as
+he can. We will let you know later in the day."
+
+Leaving Don Esteban, the boys started for the plaza, intending to
+play the part of sightseers and visit every place in which a
+mountebank might reasonably expect to go. They felt certain that
+Strong would keep away from the more aristocratic places.
+
+Keeping their eyes open and ever on the alert, they wandered
+about the streets and into many public places, but up to eleven
+o'clock had made no discovery. Then they entered a cantina for
+breakfast, purposely choosing one that was little frequented by
+Americans.
+
+Seating themselves at a table in one corner where they could see
+without being seen, the boys ordered a hearty breakfast and then
+turned their attention to the others in the place.
+
+At the table nearest them were three men of ordinary appearance,
+busy with their meal. Beyond them was an American soldier, who
+seemed to have dropped in out of curiosity. He was paying very
+little attention to his meal, but was eyeing a young woman who
+was seated behind the cash counter.
+
+On the other side of the room, and partially hidden from our boys
+by the cash counter, was another man, smoking, and evidently
+waiting for some one. He kept his eye on the door and every once
+in a while glanced nervously at his watch.
+
+"Not much going on in here," said Donald in English.
+
+"No; but we are a little early. There may be more in before we
+finish our breakfast."
+
+It was a true prediction, for within the next five minutes as
+many more persons entered and disposed themselves around the
+various tables. Then the boys' breakfast was served and for a few
+minutes they were more absorbed in the food than in the guests.
+
+As Donald raised his eyes for a moment, however, he caught sight
+of a man talking to the one sitting back of the cash counter.
+They were evidently arguing about something in an undertone and a
+minute later the newcomer took a seat with his back to the boys.
+
+"Look!" was Donald's smothered exclamation, "over there by the
+cashier. Isn't that our man?"
+
+Adrian raised his eyes and gazed hard at the back of the man's
+head.
+
+"I could tell better if he would remove his hat. It does look
+like him, but he has disguised himself some way."
+
+"Sure," laughed Donald. "That's part of his trade; but I'm dead
+sure it is Strong."
+
+"What had we better do?"
+
+"I don't know. He'll recognize us the minute he sees us. If he is
+keeping away from us, he will leave. If he is not, he may come
+over and speak to us. There is no reason why he should not, so
+far as he knows."
+
+"How would it do to make ourselves visible?"
+
+"I hardly know." Then after a pause: "I'll tell you what. As soon
+as we finish we'll go out, as though we did not see him, but we
+will be sure to make enough commotion to attract his attention.
+Then we'll station ourselves where we can see him as he comes
+out."
+
+"That's all right, Don; but suppose he doesn't come out?"
+
+Donald scratched his head.
+
+"Oh!" he exclaimed, "I knew I had a thought back of that. When he
+sees us, if he is not trying to avoid us, he will speak to us. If
+he does not speak to us, we will know there is something wrong
+and take immediate steps to have him arrested."
+
+"But he may escape."
+
+"How can he?"
+
+"I suppose he could go out through the kitchen if he had to," was
+the ready reply.
+
+"Yes, I suppose he could. We must do better than that."
+
+"I'll tell you," said Adrian. "I'll go over and speak to that
+soldier in English. If it is Strong, he will hear me and will
+involuntarily make some move. If he wants to make himself known,
+he will. If he does not do so, we will simply sit here till he
+goes out and then shadow him."
+
+"That sounds good. Go over and say 'Howdy' to the soldier."
+
+Adrian arose from his seat and stepped over to the soldier.
+
+"Hello, partner!" was his somewhat noisy greeting. "Won't you
+come over to our table?"
+
+"Why, sure, neighbor! I was just thinking that I was getting
+mighty lonesome."
+
+He arose from his chair and took a seat beside Donald, who had
+been observing Strong closely. There could be no doubt that he
+had been attracted by Adrian's voice, but he gave no intimation
+that he knew the boys.
+
+"Glad to see you," said Donald, without taking his eyes from his
+man. "Won't you have another cup of coffee?"
+
+"Bet your life, neighbor!" Then as he lighted a fresh cigarette:
+"Smoke?"
+
+"Never learned!" laughed Donald. "Seems mighty funny down here,
+doesn't it?"
+
+"Sure does; but you're just as well off without it. Live here?"
+
+"No," replied Adrian; "we were on our way home and got stuck!"
+
+"What's the matter?" asked the soldier, with much concern. "Out
+of coin?"
+
+"We haven't much; but Gen. Funston has promised to find us
+passage home in a few days. Our friend saw him early this
+morning," this latter remark expressly for Strong's ears.
+
+"If he told you he'd do it, he will," said the soldier. "You can
+bet on him every time."
+
+It was very evident from Strong's actions that he was taking in
+every word of the conversation, which was in English and in an
+unusually loud voice. He pretended to eat, then leaned over and
+said something to his companion, and a minute later arose from
+the table and hastily quitted the place.
+
+But the boys were not to be fooled. They sprang from the table
+and hastily followed, Donald throwing a greenback to the cashier
+which more than doubly paid the bill.
+
+Their sudden action did not escape the soldier, who, attributing
+it to another cause, also hastily quitted the cantina.
+
+As the boys emerged into the street, they saw Strong hastening
+away in the direction of the custom house.
+
+"Going to lose himself in the crowd," said Donald. "Don't let him
+get out of your sight."
+
+"What's the matter?" asked the soldier, running to catch up with
+the boys. "Ugly greasers?"
+
+"No," replied Donald, "we're shadowing a man who is wanted by
+Gen. Funston. That's him," pointing; "keep your eye on him."
+
+"I thought you chaps had something on," laughed the soldier. "You
+can bet on me!"
+
+Now that they approached nearer the center of the business
+portion of the city, there were more people on the street; but
+they were so near their quarry that they easily kept him in
+sight. Only once had he glanced back, but that was enough to
+convince him that he was followed.
+
+"He's headed for somewhere," said Adrian. "He doesn't expect to
+get away from us simply by walking."
+
+"Right," agreed Donald. "There he goes into the post office."
+
+"Yes," from Adrian, "and it has two doors. You stop at the first
+one and I'll run to the other."
+
+He started on a run and the soldier followed suit.
+
+The sight of a man running and a soldier following, quickly
+attracted attention and pedestrians began to stop and see what
+the matter might be. In less than a minute a crowd had collected,
+among them several soldiers, who quickly brought Adrian to a
+halt.
+
+"What's the matter?" asked one. Then as the soldier came up:
+"What are you chasing him for?"
+
+"I'm not chasing him," laughed the seeming pursuer. "He and I are
+after another chap."
+
+The delay occasioned by this interference was not great, but it
+was sufficient to allow Strong to escape, had it not been for
+Donald. He had seen the crowd gathering and, realizing what would
+happen, ran around the other way, just in time to see Strong
+disappearing around the corner of the street on which the bank
+was located.
+
+Madly he dashed down the street and turned the corner in time to
+see Strong enter the big gate leading into the patio of Don
+Esteban's residence.
+
+Putting on more steam, a couple of minutes later Donald also
+dashed into the patio; but Strong was nowhere to be seen.
+
+"He must be in the bank," muttered the boy, and he quickly
+entered the door.
+
+But Strong had disappeared as completely as though the earth had
+opened and swallowed him up.
+
+
+
+
+CHAPTER XXX.
+
+THE MYSTERY SOLVED.
+
+
+When the opening at the head of the stairs had closed upon Billie
+and he realized that he was shut in a subterranean passage, for a
+minute his heart sank within him.
+
+He had tried to find an opening at the top of the opposite stairs
+and had failed, and he did not know that he would have any better
+success in trying to find a way to open the place through which
+he had descended.
+
+"Nobody on earth knows that I am down here," he thought, "and
+with Santiago sick and maybe dying, no one on earth probably
+knows that there is such a passage."
+
+But Billie was not the lad to sit down and cry. He had been in
+tight places before and he had an abiding faith in his own
+ability to do things. Therefore, he called up his courage and
+slowly mounted the stairs leading to Santiago's patio.
+
+At the top of the stairs he found himself confronted by exactly
+the same condition as he had found on the opposite side.
+
+"But there is this difference," muttered Billie. "I know that
+there must be some sort of a crack where that slab fell back."
+
+He held the electric bull's-eye close to the stone and
+scrutinized every spot.
+
+Not a single crack could he spy.
+
+Then he took out his big jack-knife and prodded with it clear
+across the width of the stairway.
+
+There was nothing but solid stone.
+
+"Looks kind o' desperate," he told himself, "but I have simply
+got to find an opening."
+
+Again he prodded the place over without result.
+
+"It's no use," he finally said to himself. "If I am to get out of
+here, help will have to come from somewhere outside. But how can
+it?"
+
+He sat down on the stairs and thought deeply.
+
+"If it is as I think," he mused, "these stairs have been used
+recently. The very fact that Ambrosio is prowling around here is
+proof that Strong must have been here at some time. But where is
+Strong?"
+
+He slid down several steps and threw the light of his torch
+across to the opposite stairs.
+
+"Bang!" went something that sounded like a falling stone.
+
+Billie sprang to his feet.
+
+"Click! Bang!" and down the opposite stairway streamed a ray of
+light.
+
+Billie shut off his electric torch and waited.
+
+Then on the steps there appeared a foot, then another, until a
+whole human body was in sight. Then "click, snap!" and the light
+disappeared.
+
+"By George!" exclaimed Billie under his breath, "there's a man on
+the stairs right opposite to me. Who on earth can it be?"
+
+His first inclination was to turn on the light, but on second
+thought he decided not to.
+
+"I'll let him set the copy," thought Billie. "It's a mighty good
+thing to be able to spring the surprise."
+
+He drew his automatic and stood ready for any emergency.
+
+It was still as a tomb.
+
+He could hear his own heart beat and he could also hear the heavy
+breathing of the other man.
+
+"Sounds like he had been running and was just catching his
+breath," was Billie's mental comment.
+
+After some minutes the man's breathing became more quiet and
+Billie heard him slowly descending the stairs.
+
+"This won't do," thought Billie. "He probably has some kind of a
+light, and if he gets on the landing and I'm up here, I'll be
+like a man up a tree."
+
+The lad sat down and slowly slid toward the bottom.
+
+Being only a few steps from the landing, Billie was down first.
+He crowded to the right and listened.
+
+The other was now nearly on the landing. Now he was on the
+landing, hugging the wall on the side opposite Billie. Now they
+passed each other, or rather the man passed Billie, for Billie
+stood perfectly still.
+
+It seemed as though he must hear Billie's breathing, but if he
+heard anything he must have thought it his own echo, never
+dreaming that he was not alone in the passage.
+
+Now Billie could hear him ascending the stairs leading to
+Santiago's house, and his hope rose high.
+
+"He must know how to open the floor," thought Billie. "I'll be
+right there when he does."
+
+Silently as a cat Billie crept up the stairs behind his unknown
+companion.
+
+Near the top the man stopped and a minute later he flashed an
+electric light against the stone overhead. Another minute and he
+heaved with the top of his head and the slab slid back.
+
+"And now," exclaimed Billie in a deep voice, "put your hands over
+your head!"
+
+Whether from fear or from the unparalleled surprise caused by
+hearing a human voice at such a time and in such a place, instead
+of obeying Billie's command, Strong's hands--for Strong it
+was--fell limp at his side and his electric torch fell to the
+stones beneath his feet.
+
+"All right," continued Billy, "if that's the way you feel about
+it; but just remember that a single false move and I'll cut this
+automatic loose among your ribs. Now climb out a step at a time."
+
+With face as white as marble at the shock he had just sustained,
+Strong obeyed implicitly and Billie was soon standing on the
+stone patio, looking Strong in the face.
+
+"You're a good one, you are," he said sarcastically. "I should
+think you'd be ashamed to call yourself an American."
+
+"What do you mean?" asked Strong in a trembling voice.
+
+"Why, first of all, stealing from the bank, and then selling your
+own countrymen to the Mexicans."
+
+"Who have I sold?"
+
+"Do you mean to say that you didn't sell Gen. Funston to the
+greasers for ten thousand dollars?"
+
+"Of course I do!" in a somewhat stronger voice.
+
+"Perhaps you'll deny that you are Strong, the mountebank. You
+don't think for one minute that I don't know you in spite of your
+make-up, do you?"
+
+"No, I'll admit that I'm the mountebank. As for my name that is
+of small importance in a country like this. But I did not sell
+Gen. Funston, as you put it. I knew the man I pointed out was not
+Funston and I knew that as soon as the Mexicans found it out they
+would let him go. Some one might have told them rightly. As it
+was I spoiled their game and I got the money. Do you think it any
+crime to do that?"
+
+"That's a matter I am not in a position to discuss," was Billie's
+answer. "But how about robbing the bank?"
+
+"I had as much right to the box as any one."
+
+"You'll have to prove that to some one besides me; all I can do
+is to turn you over to the authorities."
+
+"Never!" cried Strong. "I'll die before I'll rot in a Mexican
+jail!"
+
+He uttered a peculiar noise and before Billie could imagine what
+it meant, he felt himself seized from behind by a pair of hairy
+hands.
+
+He had been in that clutch once before and recognized in an
+instant that he was in the grip of the ape.
+
+He gave one loud cry for help and then turned loose with his
+automatic.
+
+The tumult which followed is beyond description. Billie's shout
+was as nothing compared to the cry of the ape as one of the
+bullets struck him in the leg and another pierced his foot.
+Loosing his hold upon the lad, he grabbed for the weapon, but
+Billie managed to evade him and would undoubtedly have slain the
+animal had not Strong sprung to his assistance, with the result
+that in another minute Billie was disarmed.
+
+Ill would the lad have fared then, at the hands of his two
+assailants, had not the noise attracted to the scene several
+soldiers, while an instant later came a loud shout as Donald and
+Adrian dashed into the patio.
+
+On the other side of the square they had heard Billie's shout,
+followed by the automatic, and had rushed to his aid.
+
+In another minute both Strong and his hairy friend were overcome
+and securely bound.
+
+"Where did you find him?" asked Donald, pointing to Strong.
+
+"Down there," was Billie's reply, as he pointed toward the still
+open underground passage way.
+
+"How did he get there?"
+
+"I suppose he entered from a similar entrance in Don Esteban's
+patio. I have had an idea all the time that there was some reason
+for the position of these two houses."
+
+"But it doesn't lead into the bank. How could he steal the box
+out of the vault?"
+
+"There is the real thief!" exclaimed Billie, pointing to the ape.
+"He sneaked in while Strong kept the bank employés engaged. By
+some mistake in his understanding he put the envelope back in the
+bank the next day instead of putting back the box. It was he who
+crawled through the bars into Santiago's library. He was also the
+devil who scared the maid almost into fits."
+
+"Well! Well!" exclaimed a voice from the gateway. "I never could
+have believed it."
+
+The voice was that of Don Esteban, who had entered while Billie
+was speaking.
+
+"I have come to see this strange man, Santiago Ojeda," he
+explained. "What says the doctor?"
+
+"Here comes the doctor now," announced Adrian as the physician
+made his appearance in the gateway. "He can speak for himself."
+
+
+
+
+CHAPTER XXXI.
+
+THE TREASURE OF MONTEZUMA.
+
+
+The shadows of evening had fallen and a cool breeze was blowing
+in off the Gulf of Mexico when a group of persons, among whom
+were the Broncho Rider Boys, gathered around the bedside of the
+sick man.
+
+It was as the physician had predicted, and when Santiago had
+awakened after his long sleep, he had regained his senses,
+although he was very weak. But as the day declined and the heat
+lessened he had become stronger, and now at his own request,
+Lucia and her friends drew around to listen to his tale.
+
+At one side of the bed stood Lucia, the three boys and Don
+Esteban. At the other stood Mr. Black, Josie and the physician,
+while at the foot of the bed was Strong, with Ambrosio in his
+arms, and a couple of soldiers who had the mountebank in
+custody.
+
+"As my daughter knows," began Santiago in a feeble voice, "I am a
+direct descendant of the great Montezuma. My ancestor was the
+guardian of the treasure which had been accumulated by the Aztec
+kings for years. After the overthrow of my race by the Spanish
+conquerors, there was given to my first great ancestor the
+keeping of the secret of the source of the gold which had made
+the city of Anahuac such a rich prize.
+
+"This secret has been handed down through all these generations,
+the one object being to use this knowledge in freeing Mexico from
+the Spanish yoke. This secret I, as the last of my race,
+possess."
+
+The aged man paused, his strength being hardly able to the task
+he had set himself.
+
+"It is much as I suspected," whispered Don Esteban to Donald,
+while Lucia bent over and smoothed the brow of the sick man.
+
+"A few years ago," Santiago finally continued, "I began to see an
+opportunity for the people to assert their rights. In our good
+Seņor Madero I saw the one who should lead the common people out
+of their bondage. I went to him and offered him all the wealth at
+my command. He accepted the trust and we began our work. It was
+at that time that I placed the money with Don Esteban. Also the
+box, containing the secret of the mine, of which only I and
+Madero knew.
+
+"You all know what has happened since that time. Madero won, but
+he was betrayed. His betrayer now seeks to rule the republic, but
+he can never do it. He must be overthrown."
+
+The aged man became greatly excited and the physician cautioned
+him to be careful. In a few minutes he became more peaceful and
+continued:
+
+"I have always been a great friend of the Americans. I admired
+their integrity and their government. I spent many years of my
+youth in the United States. I have known many of their great men.
+I was sure they would be pleased with Madero, and they were. But
+after he was betrayed, then I began to fear them, as I was told
+that the usurper, Huerta, had been helped by them."
+
+"Who told you that?" asked Billie, almost without thinking.
+
+"That man there," and Santiago pointed with his long bony finger
+at the mountebank, Strong. "That man, Francisco Rodriguez, who
+claims to be an American, but who is a traitor to his country. He
+fed me with lies, as I now know, and he wormed out of me the
+secret of Montezuma's Mine."
+
+Again the aged man's excitement nearly overcame him, but again he
+rallied with an almost superhuman effort.
+
+"It was because of his lies that I made him my trusted agent;
+but he betrayed me as he has others. It was to him I gave the ten
+thousand pounds which the young seņor took away from my servant,
+Pablo Ojeda--who is not an Ojeda, but whom I have allowed to use
+that name. I desire that the money become the property of the
+young seņor," and he feebly extended his hand toward Billie, "who
+has always been such a good friend to me and mine. The secret of
+the mine is to be found in the box which I left with Don Esteban.
+I am getting to be an old man, and if you will now bring in the
+box, I will turn it over to my daughter Lucia, who is my only
+descendant."
+
+Don Esteban made no move to comply with the request, but looked
+at the boys in such a perplexed manner that the sick man was
+quick to take notice.
+
+"What is it?" he asked, rising on his elbow and looking at Don
+Esteban with burning gaze. "What is it? Has anything happened to
+the box?"
+
+"Yes," faltered the banker, "it has been stolen."
+
+"Stolen!" almost shrieked Santiago. "Stolen! Then there stands
+the thief!" and he pointed to Strong, who stood with blanched
+face.
+
+"We know that," said Billie, "but the box has been stolen again
+and no one knows where it has gone."
+
+"You are wrong," muttered Strong. "It has not been stolen. It is
+in the bank where it always was."
+
+"Impossible!" cried Don Esteban. "How could it be back in the
+vault?"
+
+"Ask Ambrosio," replied Strong, with a wan smile. "He can tell."
+
+"Of course he cannot tell," almost shouted Don Esteban.
+
+"Then we shall never know; but I am sure the box is there."
+
+"Send for it! Send for it!" cried Santiago. "Send for it at once
+that I may turn over to my daughter the secret of the mine."
+
+"That you will never be able to do," said Strong. "It has been
+destroyed."
+
+"Destroyed!" burst from almost every lip. "Destroyed? How?"
+
+Strong shook his head.
+
+"I can't tell. Again you'll have to ask Ambrosio. It is he who
+destroyed it."
+
+"By George!" exclaimed Billie, "I knew I ought to have killed
+that monk the first time I had any dealings with him. I'm sorry
+now that I didn't."
+
+"At any rate," declared Don Esteban, "I shall send for the box."
+
+He turned to Santiago, who had fallen back upon his pillow, and
+over whom the physician was bending and feeling his pulse.
+
+"I shall send for it at once," he repeated.
+
+Slowly the physician raised his head and loosed his hold upon the
+sick man's wrist.
+
+"It is too late," he said. "He will not need it. He is dead."
+
+       *       *       *       *       *
+
+On board a returning army transport bound for New York stood the
+Broncho Rider Boys casting their last glance shoreward as the sun
+was setting behind the mountains that form the background of the
+city of Vera Cruz. Over the city still waved the Stars and
+Stripes, and as the darkness fell and the tip of Mt. Orizaba
+gradually faded from sight, Billie turned to the others and in a
+voice tinged with sadness remarked:
+
+"There's only one thing about the whole country that I admire."
+
+"What's, that?" asked Adrian. "Lucia?"
+
+"No; it's the wholesome respect the Mexicans show for
+Brigadier-General Funston."
+
+"Yes, and if he is let alone, he'll make them respect the
+American flag," echoed Donald.
+
+"Long may it wave!" was Adrian's sententious comment.
+
+But it did not wave long over Vera Cruz, for the following
+November, Huerta having been obliged to leave the country in the
+meantime and Gen. Carranza having established himself for the
+time being in the City of Mexico, the American forces were
+withdrawn and the Carranza forces took possession of Vera Cruz.
+Some months later Carranza was recognized by the United States,
+and at this writing is establishing his government, which
+promises to be a continuation of the one established by Madero.
+
+Thus it will be seen that Santiago's work for his country was
+productive of good, as are all efforts to bring liberty to the
+people and to free them from the rule of a few.
+
+Before sailing for home, the boys had the satisfaction of knowing
+that the man known as Strong had been properly punished, and
+that, in accordance with Santiago's dying wish, the ten thousand
+pounds which he had practically given to Billie months before on
+the Rio Grande, were placed to the lad's credit in the banking
+house of Don Esteban.
+
+The fate of Ambrosio, the ape which caused so much trouble, was
+left in the hands of the keeper of the prison to which Strong was
+sentenced. It is to be hoped that his behavior will improve.
+
+THE END.
+
+-----------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+TRANSCRIBER'S NOTES
+
+Page 48: Removed extra quotation mark.
+
+Page 60: Changed "moso" to "mozo."
+
+Page 62: Changed typo "gaurd" to "guard."
+
+Page 87: Changed typo "variey" to "variety."
+
+Pages 123, 132: Left words "blue-jackets" and "bluejackets" as
+printed.
+
+Page 140: Added closing quotation mark.
+
+Page 197: Added missing period.
+
+Pages 206, 214, 224: Left words "kipnaped" and "kipnapped" as
+printed.
+
+
+
+
+
+
+End of the Project Gutenberg EBook of The Broncho Rider Boys with Funston at
+Vera Cruz, by Frank Fowler
+
+*** END OF THIS PROJECT GUTENBERG EBOOK THE BRONCHO RIDER BOYS WITH ***
+
+***** This file should be named 19538-8.txt or 19538-8.zip *****
+This and all associated files of various formats will be found in:
+        http://www.gutenberg.org/1/9/5/3/19538/
+
+Produced by Juliet Sutherland, Suzan Flanagan and the
+Online Distributed Proofreading Team at http://www.pgdp.net
+
+
+Updated editions will replace the previous one--the old editions
+will be renamed.
+
+Creating the works from public domain print editions means that no
+one owns a United States copyright in these works, so the Foundation
+(and you!) can copy and distribute it in the United States without
+permission and without paying copyright royalties.  Special rules,
+set forth in the General Terms of Use part of this license, apply to
+copying and distributing Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works to
+protect the PROJECT GUTENBERG-tm concept and trademark.  Project
+Gutenberg is a registered trademark, and may not be used if you
+charge for the eBooks, unless you receive specific permission.  If you
+do not charge anything for copies of this eBook, complying with the
+rules is very easy.  You may use this eBook for nearly any purpose
+such as creation of derivative works, reports, performances and
+research.  They may be modified and printed and given away--you may do
+practically ANYTHING with public domain eBooks.  Redistribution is
+subject to the trademark license, especially commercial
+redistribution.
+
+
+
+*** START: FULL LICENSE ***
+
+THE FULL PROJECT GUTENBERG LICENSE
+PLEASE READ THIS BEFORE YOU DISTRIBUTE OR USE THIS WORK
+
+To protect the Project Gutenberg-tm mission of promoting the free
+distribution of electronic works, by using or distributing this work
+(or any other work associated in any way with the phrase "Project
+Gutenberg"), you agree to comply with all the terms of the Full Project
+Gutenberg-tm License (available with this file or online at
+http://gutenberg.org/license).
+
+
+Section 1.  General Terms of Use and Redistributing Project Gutenberg-tm
+electronic works
+
+1.A.  By reading or using any part of this Project Gutenberg-tm
+electronic work, you indicate that you have read, understand, agree to
+and accept all the terms of this license and intellectual property
+(trademark/copyright) agreement.  If you do not agree to abide by all
+the terms of this agreement, you must cease using and return or destroy
+all copies of Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works in your possession.
+If you paid a fee for obtaining a copy of or access to a Project
+Gutenberg-tm electronic work and you do not agree to be bound by the
+terms of this agreement, you may obtain a refund from the person or
+entity to whom you paid the fee as set forth in paragraph 1.E.8.
+
+1.B.  "Project Gutenberg" is a registered trademark.  It may only be
+used on or associated in any way with an electronic work by people who
+agree to be bound by the terms of this agreement.  There are a few
+things that you can do with most Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works
+even without complying with the full terms of this agreement.  See
+paragraph 1.C below.  There are a lot of things you can do with Project
+Gutenberg-tm electronic works if you follow the terms of this agreement
+and help preserve free future access to Project Gutenberg-tm electronic
+works.  See paragraph 1.E below.
+
+1.C.  The Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation ("the Foundation"
+or PGLAF), owns a compilation copyright in the collection of Project
+Gutenberg-tm electronic works.  Nearly all the individual works in the
+collection are in the public domain in the United States.  If an
+individual work is in the public domain in the United States and you are
+located in the United States, we do not claim a right to prevent you from
+copying, distributing, performing, displaying or creating derivative
+works based on the work as long as all references to Project Gutenberg
+are removed.  Of course, we hope that you will support the Project
+Gutenberg-tm mission of promoting free access to electronic works by
+freely sharing Project Gutenberg-tm works in compliance with the terms of
+this agreement for keeping the Project Gutenberg-tm name associated with
+the work.  You can easily comply with the terms of this agreement by
+keeping this work in the same format with its attached full Project
+Gutenberg-tm License when you share it without charge with others.
+
+1.D.  The copyright laws of the place where you are located also govern
+what you can do with this work.  Copyright laws in most countries are in
+a constant state of change.  If you are outside the United States, check
+the laws of your country in addition to the terms of this agreement
+before downloading, copying, displaying, performing, distributing or
+creating derivative works based on this work or any other Project
+Gutenberg-tm work.  The Foundation makes no representations concerning
+the copyright status of any work in any country outside the United
+States.
+
+1.E.  Unless you have removed all references to Project Gutenberg:
+
+1.E.1.  The following sentence, with active links to, or other immediate
+access to, the full Project Gutenberg-tm License must appear prominently
+whenever any copy of a Project Gutenberg-tm work (any work on which the
+phrase "Project Gutenberg" appears, or with which the phrase "Project
+Gutenberg" is associated) is accessed, displayed, performed, viewed,
+copied or distributed:
+
+This eBook is for the use of anyone anywhere at no cost and with
+almost no restrictions whatsoever.  You may copy it, give it away or
+re-use it under the terms of the Project Gutenberg License included
+with this eBook or online at www.gutenberg.org
+
+1.E.2.  If an individual Project Gutenberg-tm electronic work is derived
+from the public domain (does not contain a notice indicating that it is
+posted with permission of the copyright holder), the work can be copied
+and distributed to anyone in the United States without paying any fees
+or charges.  If you are redistributing or providing access to a work
+with the phrase "Project Gutenberg" associated with or appearing on the
+work, you must comply either with the requirements of paragraphs 1.E.1
+through 1.E.7 or obtain permission for the use of the work and the
+Project Gutenberg-tm trademark as set forth in paragraphs 1.E.8 or
+1.E.9.
+
+1.E.3.  If an individual Project Gutenberg-tm electronic work is posted
+with the permission of the copyright holder, your use and distribution
+must comply with both paragraphs 1.E.1 through 1.E.7 and any additional
+terms imposed by the copyright holder.  Additional terms will be linked
+to the Project Gutenberg-tm License for all works posted with the
+permission of the copyright holder found at the beginning of this work.
+
+1.E.4.  Do not unlink or detach or remove the full Project Gutenberg-tm
+License terms from this work, or any files containing a part of this
+work or any other work associated with Project Gutenberg-tm.
+
+1.E.5.  Do not copy, display, perform, distribute or redistribute this
+electronic work, or any part of this electronic work, without
+prominently displaying the sentence set forth in paragraph 1.E.1 with
+active links or immediate access to the full terms of the Project
+Gutenberg-tm License.
+
+1.E.6.  You may convert to and distribute this work in any binary,
+compressed, marked up, nonproprietary or proprietary form, including any
+word processing or hypertext form.  However, if you provide access to or
+distribute copies of a Project Gutenberg-tm work in a format other than
+"Plain Vanilla ASCII" or other format used in the official version
+posted on the official Project Gutenberg-tm web site (www.gutenberg.org),
+you must, at no additional cost, fee or expense to the user, provide a
+copy, a means of exporting a copy, or a means of obtaining a copy upon
+request, of the work in its original "Plain Vanilla ASCII" or other
+form.  Any alternate format must include the full Project Gutenberg-tm
+License as specified in paragraph 1.E.1.
+
+1.E.7.  Do not charge a fee for access to, viewing, displaying,
+performing, copying or distributing any Project Gutenberg-tm works
+unless you comply with paragraph 1.E.8 or 1.E.9.
+
+1.E.8.  You may charge a reasonable fee for copies of or providing
+access to or distributing Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works provided
+that
+
+- You pay a royalty fee of 20% of the gross profits you derive from
+     the use of Project Gutenberg-tm works calculated using the method
+     you already use to calculate your applicable taxes.  The fee is
+     owed to the owner of the Project Gutenberg-tm trademark, but he
+     has agreed to donate royalties under this paragraph to the
+     Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation.  Royalty payments
+     must be paid within 60 days following each date on which you
+     prepare (or are legally required to prepare) your periodic tax
+     returns.  Royalty payments should be clearly marked as such and
+     sent to the Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation at the
+     address specified in Section 4, "Information about donations to
+     the Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation."
+
+- You provide a full refund of any money paid by a user who notifies
+     you in writing (or by e-mail) within 30 days of receipt that s/he
+     does not agree to the terms of the full Project Gutenberg-tm
+     License.  You must require such a user to return or
+     destroy all copies of the works possessed in a physical medium
+     and discontinue all use of and all access to other copies of
+     Project Gutenberg-tm works.
+
+- You provide, in accordance with paragraph 1.F.3, a full refund of any
+     money paid for a work or a replacement copy, if a defect in the
+     electronic work is discovered and reported to you within 90 days
+     of receipt of the work.
+
+- You comply with all other terms of this agreement for free
+     distribution of Project Gutenberg-tm works.
+
+1.E.9.  If you wish to charge a fee or distribute a Project Gutenberg-tm
+electronic work or group of works on different terms than are set
+forth in this agreement, you must obtain permission in writing from
+both the Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation and Michael
+Hart, the owner of the Project Gutenberg-tm trademark.  Contact the
+Foundation as set forth in Section 3 below.
+
+1.F.
+
+1.F.1.  Project Gutenberg volunteers and employees expend considerable
+effort to identify, do copyright research on, transcribe and proofread
+public domain works in creating the Project Gutenberg-tm
+collection.  Despite these efforts, Project Gutenberg-tm electronic
+works, and the medium on which they may be stored, may contain
+"Defects," such as, but not limited to, incomplete, inaccurate or
+corrupt data, transcription errors, a copyright or other intellectual
+property infringement, a defective or damaged disk or other medium, a
+computer virus, or computer codes that damage or cannot be read by
+your equipment.
+
+1.F.2.  LIMITED WARRANTY, DISCLAIMER OF DAMAGES - Except for the "Right
+of Replacement or Refund" described in paragraph 1.F.3, the Project
+Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation, the owner of the Project
+Gutenberg-tm trademark, and any other party distributing a Project
+Gutenberg-tm electronic work under this agreement, disclaim all
+liability to you for damages, costs and expenses, including legal
+fees.  YOU AGREE THAT YOU HAVE NO REMEDIES FOR NEGLIGENCE, STRICT
+LIABILITY, BREACH OF WARRANTY OR BREACH OF CONTRACT EXCEPT THOSE
+PROVIDED IN PARAGRAPH F3.  YOU AGREE THAT THE FOUNDATION, THE
+TRADEMARK OWNER, AND ANY DISTRIBUTOR UNDER THIS AGREEMENT WILL NOT BE
+LIABLE TO YOU FOR ACTUAL, DIRECT, INDIRECT, CONSEQUENTIAL, PUNITIVE OR
+INCIDENTAL DAMAGES EVEN IF YOU GIVE NOTICE OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH
+DAMAGE.
+
+1.F.3.  LIMITED RIGHT OF REPLACEMENT OR REFUND - If you discover a
+defect in this electronic work within 90 days of receiving it, you can
+receive a refund of the money (if any) you paid for it by sending a
+written explanation to the person you received the work from.  If you
+received the work on a physical medium, you must return the medium with
+your written explanation.  The person or entity that provided you with
+the defective work may elect to provide a replacement copy in lieu of a
+refund.  If you received the work electronically, the person or entity
+providing it to you may choose to give you a second opportunity to
+receive the work electronically in lieu of a refund.  If the second copy
+is also defective, you may demand a refund in writing without further
+opportunities to fix the problem.
+
+1.F.4.  Except for the limited right of replacement or refund set forth
+in paragraph 1.F.3, this work is provided to you 'AS-IS', WITH NO OTHER
+WARRANTIES OF ANY KIND, EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO
+WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTIBILITY OR FITNESS FOR ANY PURPOSE.
+
+1.F.5.  Some states do not allow disclaimers of certain implied
+warranties or the exclusion or limitation of certain types of damages.
+If any disclaimer or limitation set forth in this agreement violates the
+law of the state applicable to this agreement, the agreement shall be
+interpreted to make the maximum disclaimer or limitation permitted by
+the applicable state law.  The invalidity or unenforceability of any
+provision of this agreement shall not void the remaining provisions.
+
+1.F.6.  INDEMNITY - You agree to indemnify and hold the Foundation, the
+trademark owner, any agent or employee of the Foundation, anyone
+providing copies of Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works in accordance
+with this agreement, and any volunteers associated with the production,
+promotion and distribution of Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works,
+harmless from all liability, costs and expenses, including legal fees,
+that arise directly or indirectly from any of the following which you do
+or cause to occur: (a) distribution of this or any Project Gutenberg-tm
+work, (b) alteration, modification, or additions or deletions to any
+Project Gutenberg-tm work, and (c) any Defect you cause.
+
+
+Section  2.  Information about the Mission of Project Gutenberg-tm
+
+Project Gutenberg-tm is synonymous with the free distribution of
+electronic works in formats readable by the widest variety of computers
+including obsolete, old, middle-aged and new computers.  It exists
+because of the efforts of hundreds of volunteers and donations from
+people in all walks of life.
+
+Volunteers and financial support to provide volunteers with the
+assistance they need, is critical to reaching Project Gutenberg-tm's
+goals and ensuring that the Project Gutenberg-tm collection will
+remain freely available for generations to come.  In 2001, the Project
+Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation was created to provide a secure
+and permanent future for Project Gutenberg-tm and future generations.
+To learn more about the Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation
+and how your efforts and donations can help, see Sections 3 and 4
+and the Foundation web page at http://www.pglaf.org.
+
+
+Section 3.  Information about the Project Gutenberg Literary Archive
+Foundation
+
+The Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation is a non profit
+501(c)(3) educational corporation organized under the laws of the
+state of Mississippi and granted tax exempt status by the Internal
+Revenue Service.  The Foundation's EIN or federal tax identification
+number is 64-6221541.  Its 501(c)(3) letter is posted at
+http://pglaf.org/fundraising.  Contributions to the Project Gutenberg
+Literary Archive Foundation are tax deductible to the full extent
+permitted by U.S. federal laws and your state's laws.
+
+The Foundation's principal office is located at 4557 Melan Dr. S.
+Fairbanks, AK, 99712., but its volunteers and employees are scattered
+throughout numerous locations.  Its business office is located at
+809 North 1500 West, Salt Lake City, UT 84116, (801) 596-1887, email
+business@pglaf.org.  Email contact links and up to date contact
+information can be found at the Foundation's web site and official
+page at http://pglaf.org
+
+For additional contact information:
+     Dr. Gregory B. Newby
+     Chief Executive and Director
+     gbnewby@pglaf.org
+
+Section 4.  Information about Donations to the Project Gutenberg
+Literary Archive Foundation
+
+Project Gutenberg-tm depends upon and cannot survive without wide
+spread public support and donations to carry out its mission of
+increasing the number of public domain and licensed works that can be
+freely distributed in machine readable form accessible by the widest
+array of equipment including outdated equipment.  Many small donations
+($1 to $5,000) are particularly important to maintaining tax exempt
+status with the IRS.
+
+The Foundation is committed to complying with the laws regulating
+charities and charitable donations in all 50 states of the United
+States.  Compliance requirements are not uniform and it takes a
+considerable effort, much paperwork and many fees to meet and keep up
+with these requirements.  We do not solicit donations in locations
+where we have not received written confirmation of compliance.  To
+SEND DONATIONS or determine the status of compliance for any
+particular state visit http://pglaf.org
+
+While we cannot and do not solicit contributions from states where we
+have not met the solicitation requirements, we know of no prohibition
+against accepting unsolicited donations from donors in such states who
+approach us with offers to donate.
+
+International donations are gratefully accepted, but we cannot make
+any statements concerning tax treatment of donations received from
+outside the United States.  U.S. laws alone swamp our small staff.
+
+Please check the Project Gutenberg Web pages for current donation
+methods and addresses.  Donations are accepted in a number of other
+ways including checks, online payments and credit card
+donations.  To donate, please visit: http://pglaf.org/donate
+
+
+Section 5.  General Information About Project Gutenberg-tm electronic
+works.
+
+Professor Michael S. Hart is the originator of the Project Gutenberg-tm
+concept of a library of electronic works that could be freely shared
+with anyone.  For thirty years, he produced and distributed Project
+Gutenberg-tm eBooks with only a loose network of volunteer support.
+
+Project Gutenberg-tm eBooks are often created from several printed
+editions, all of which are confirmed as Public Domain in the U.S.
+unless a copyright notice is included.  Thus, we do not necessarily
+keep eBooks in compliance with any particular paper edition.
+
+Most people start at our Web site which has the main PG search facility:
+
+     http://www.gutenberg.org
+
+This Web site includes information about Project Gutenberg-tm,
+including how to make donations to the Project Gutenberg Literary
+Archive Foundation, how to help produce our new eBooks, and how to
+subscribe to our email newsletter to hear about new eBooks.
+
+*** END: FULL LICENSE ***
+
diff --git a/19538-8.zip b/19538-8.zip
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..b53cafe
--- /dev/null
+++ b/19538-8.zip
diff --git a/19538-h.zip b/19538-h.zip
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..c7d2140
--- /dev/null
+++ b/19538-h.zip
diff --git a/19538-h/19538-h.htm b/19538-h/19538-h.htm
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..8d04cc1
--- /dev/null
+++ b/19538-h/19538-h.htm
@@ -0,0 +1,10906 @@
+<!DOCTYPE html PUBLIC "-//W3C//DTD XHTML 1.0 Strict//EN"
+    "http://www.w3.org/TR/xhtml1/DTD/xhtml1-strict.dtd">
+
+<html xmlns="http://www.w3.org/1999/xhtml">
+  <head>
+    <meta http-equiv="Content-Type" content="text/html;charset=iso-8859-1" />
+    <title>
+      The Project Gutenberg eBook of The Broncho Rider Boys with Funston at Vera Cruz, by Frank Fowler.
+    </title>
+    <style type="text/css">
+/*<![CDATA[  XML blockout */
+<!--
+    p {  margin-top: .75em;
+         text-align: justify;
+         margin-bottom: .75em;
+         }
+    h1,h2,h3,h4,h5,h6 {
+         text-align: center; /* all headings centered */
+         clear: both;
+         }
+    hr { width: 33%;
+         margin-top: 2em;
+         margin-bottom: 2em;
+         margin-left: auto;
+         margin-right: auto;
+         clear: both;
+       }
+
+    table {margin-left: auto; margin-right: auto;}
+
+    body{margin-left: 10%;
+         margin-right: 10%;
+        }
+
+    .pagenum  { /* uncomment the next line for invisible page numbers */
+            /*  visibility: hidden;  */
+               position: absolute; right: 2%;
+               font-size: 75%;
+               text-align: right;
+               text-indent: 0em;
+               font-style: normal;
+               font-weight: normal;
+               color: silver; background-color: inherit;
+               font-variant: normal;} /* page numbers */
+
+    .pagenum a {text-decoration: none; color: silver; background-color: inherit;}
+
+    .blockquot{margin-left: 5%; margin-right: 10%;}
+
+    .center   {text-align: center;}
+    .smcap    {font-variant: small-caps;}
+
+    .caption  {font-weight: bold;}
+
+    .figcenter   {margin: auto; text-align: center;}
+
+    .toc a    {text-decoration: none;}
+    .letter   {text-align: right;}
+
+    // -->
+    /* XML end  ]]>*/
+    </style>
+  </head>
+<body>
+
+
+<pre>
+
+The Project Gutenberg EBook of The Broncho Rider Boys with Funston at Vera
+Cruz, by Frank Fowler
+
+This eBook is for the use of anyone anywhere at no cost and with
+almost no restrictions whatsoever.  You may copy it, give it away or
+re-use it under the terms of the Project Gutenberg License included
+with this eBook or online at www.gutenberg.org
+
+
+Title: The Broncho Rider Boys with Funston at Vera Cruz
+       Or, Upholding the Honor of the Stars and Stripes
+
+Author: Frank Fowler
+
+Release Date: October 14, 2006 [EBook #19538]
+
+Language: English
+
+Character set encoding: ISO-8859-1
+
+*** START OF THIS PROJECT GUTENBERG EBOOK THE BRONCHO RIDER BOYS WITH ***
+
+
+
+
+Produced by Juliet Sutherland, Suzan Flanagan and the
+Online Distributed Proofreading Team at http://www.pgdp.net
+
+
+
+
+
+
+</pre>
+
+
+
+
+<div class="figcenter" style="width: 275px;">
+<img src="images/cover258tn.jpg" width="275" height="329" alt="Cover" title="Cover" />
+</div>
+
+<hr style="width: 65%;" />
+
+<div class="figcenter" style="width: 275px;">
+<img src="images/frontis257tn.jpg" width="275" height="427" alt="Frontispiece" title="Frontispiece" />
+<span class="caption">"THIS IS NO PLACE FOR ME," COMMENTED BILLIE AS HE KEPT HIMSELF WELL HIDDEN BEHIND A GIANT CACTUS.<br /> <i>The Broncho Rider Boys with Funston at Vera Cruz. Page 33.</i></span>
+</div>
+
+<hr style="width: 65%;" />
+<p><span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_1" id="Page_1" href="#Page_1">[Pg 1]</a></span></p>
+<h2>The Broncho Rider Boys<br />
+With Funston at Vera Cruz</h2>
+
+<h4>OR</h4>
+
+<h4>Upholding the Honor of the Stars and Stripes</h4>
+
+<h3>By FRANK FOWLER</h3>
+
+<h4>AUTHOR OF</h4>
+
+
+<h4>"The Broncho Rider Boys with the Texas Rangers," "The Broncho<br />
+Rider Boys at Keystone Ranch," "The Broncho Rider<br />
+Boys Down in Arizona," "The Broncho Rider Boys<br />
+Along the Border," "The Broncho Rider<br />
+Boys on the Wyoming Trail."</h4>
+
+
+<div class="figcenter" style="width: 404px;">
+<img src="images/illus2tn.jpg" width="404" height="200" alt="Illustration" title="Illustration" />
+</div>
+
+
+<h2>A. L. BURT COMPANY</h2>
+<h3>NEW YORK.</h3>
+
+
+<hr style="width: 65%;" />
+<p><span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_2" id="Page_2" href="#Page_2">[Pg 2]</a></span></p>
+
+<h4>Copyright, 1916</h4>
+<h4><span class="smcap">By A. L. Burt Company</span></h4>
+
+<h4>THE BRONCHO RIDER BOYS WITH FUNSTON AT VERA CRUZ</h4>
+
+<hr style="width: 65%;" />
+
+<h2>Table of Contents</h2>
+<div class='center'>
+<table border="0" cellpadding="4" cellspacing="0" summary="Table of Contents" class="toc a">
+ <tr>
+  <td align='left'><a href="#CHAPTER_I"><b>CHAPTER I.</b></a></td>
+  <td align='left'>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;</td>
+  <td align='left'><a href="#CHAPTER_XII"><b>CHAPTER XII.</b></a></td>
+  <td align='left'>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;</td>
+  <td align='left'><a href="#CHAPTER_XXII"><b>CHAPTER XXII.</b></a></td>
+ </tr>
+ <tr>
+  <td align='left'><a href="#CHAPTER_II"><b>CHAPTER II.</b></a></td>
+  <td align='left'>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;</td>
+  <td align='left'><a href="#CHAPTER_XIII"><b>CHAPTER XIII.</b></a></td>
+  <td align='left'>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;</td>
+  <td align='left'><a href="#CHAPTER_XXIII"><b>CHAPTER XXIII.</b></a></td>
+ </tr>
+ <tr>
+  <td align='left'><a href="#CHAPTER_III"><b>CHAPTER III.</b></a></td>
+  <td align='left'>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;</td>
+  <td align='left'><a href="#CHAPTER_XIV"><b>CHAPTER XIV.</b></a></td>
+  <td align='left'>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;</td>
+  <td align='left'><a href="#CHAPTER_XXIV"><b>CHAPTER XXIV.</b></a></td>
+ </tr>
+ <tr>
+  <td align='left'><a href="#CHAPTER_IV"><b>CHAPTER IV.</b></a></td>
+  <td align='left'>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;</td>
+  <td align='left'><a href="#CHAPTER_XV"><b>CHAPTER XV.</b></a></td>
+  <td align='left'>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;</td>
+  <td align='left'><a href="#CHAPTER_XXV"><b>CHAPTER XXV.</b></a></td>
+ </tr>
+ <tr>
+  <td align='left'><a href="#CHAPTER_V"><b>CHAPTER V.</b></a></td>
+  <td align='left'>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;</td>
+  <td align='left'><a href="#CHAPTER_XVI"><b>CHAPTER XVI.</b></a></td>
+  <td align='left'>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;</td>
+  <td align='left'><a href="#CHAPTER_XXVI"><b>CHAPTER XXVI.</b></a></td>
+ </tr>
+ <tr>
+  <td align='left'><a href="#CHAPTER_VI"><b>CHAPTER VI.</b></a></td>
+  <td align='left'>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;</td>
+  <td align='left'><a href="#CHAPTER_XVII"><b>CHAPTER XVII.</b></a></td>
+  <td align='left'>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;</td>
+  <td align='left'><a href="#CHAPTER_XXVII"><b>CHAPTER XXVII.</b></a></td>
+ </tr>
+ <tr>
+  <td align='left'><a href="#CHAPTER_VII"><b>CHAPTER VII.</b></a></td>
+  <td align='left'>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;</td>
+  <td align='left'><a href="#CHAPTER_XVIII"><b>CHAPTER XVIII.</b></a></td>
+  <td align='left'>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;</td>
+  <td align='left'><a href="#CHAPTER_XXVIII"><b>CHAPTER XXVIII.</b></a></td>
+ </tr>
+ <tr>
+  <td align='left'><a href="#CHAPTER_VIII"><b>CHAPTER VIII.</b></a></td>
+  <td align='left'>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;</td>
+  <td align='left'><a href="#CHAPTER_XIX"><b>CHAPTER XIX.</b></a></td>
+  <td align='left'>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;</td>
+  <td align='left'><a href="#CHAPTER_XXIX"><b>CHAPTER XXIX.</b></a></td>
+ </tr>
+ <tr>
+  <td align='left'><a href="#CHAPTER_IX"><b>CHAPTER IX.</b></a></td>
+  <td align='left'>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;</td>
+  <td align='left'><a href="#CHAPTER_XX"><b>CHAPTER XX.</b></a></td>
+  <td align='left'>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;</td>
+  <td align='left'><a href="#CHAPTER_XXX"><b>CHAPTER XXX.</b></a></td>
+ </tr>
+ <tr>
+  <td align='left'><a href="#CHAPTER_X"><b>CHAPTER X.</b></a></td>
+  <td align='left'>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;</td>
+  <td align='left'><a href="#CHAPTER_XXI"><b>CHAPTER XXI.</b></a></td>
+  <td align='left'>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;</td>
+  <td align='left'><a href="#CHAPTER_XXXI"><b>CHAPTER XXXI.</b></a></td>
+ </tr>
+ <tr>
+  <td align='left'><a href="#CHAPTER_XI"><b>CHAPTER XI.</b></a></td>
+  <td align='left'>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;</td>
+  <td align='left'>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;</td>
+  <td align='left'>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;</td>
+  <td align='left'>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;</td>
+ </tr>
+</table></div>
+
+<hr style="width: 65%;" />
+<p><span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_3" id="Page_3" href="#Page_3">[Pg 3]</a></span></p>
+<h1>THE BRONCHO RIDER BOYS WITH<br />
+FUNSTON AT VERA CRUZ.</h1>
+
+<h2><a name="CHAPTER_I" id="CHAPTER_I"></a>CHAPTER I.</h2>
+
+<h3>A DARING ADVENTURE.</h3>
+
+
+<p>"Let me look, Billie," and Donald reached out
+his hand for the field glass through which Broncho
+Billie was gazing down from the summit of Real
+del Monte upon the plain of Quesco, through which
+the Pachuca river winds its way. "Maybe I can
+make out who they are."</p>
+
+<p>Billie handed over the glass without a word and
+stood expectant, while Donald scrutinized closely
+a body of horsemen&mdash;twenty or more in number&mdash;which
+had halted beside the railroad that connects
+the little city of Pachuca with the City of Mexico.</p>
+
+<p>"They are not soldiers, that's certain," was Donald's
+comment after he had inspected the riders carefully
+for a couple of minutes.</p>
+
+<p>"That's what I thought," from Billie. "They
+look like a bunch of <i>vaqueros</i> to me; but what
+would a crowd of fifty cowpunchers be doing in a
+country where the only cattle are goats?"</p>
+
+<p>"That's right!" laughed Donald, greatly amused<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_4" id="Page_4" href="#Page_4">[Pg 4]</a></span>
+at Billie's odd expression, "but still that is what they
+appear to be. Perhaps they are expecting a drove
+of cattle up on the train."</p>
+
+<p>"More likely they are expecting a load of bullion
+going down to the City of Mexico," remarked the
+third of the party. "What do you think, Pedro?"
+turning to the fourth of the boys who composed the
+quartette.</p>
+
+<p>"I am afraid you are right, Adrian," replied
+Pedro, with an accent which denoted that of the
+four he was the only one who was not of an English-speaking
+race.</p>
+
+<p>"You don't think they would hold up a train in
+broad daylight, and that not more than five miles
+from town, do you?" queried Billie.</p>
+
+<p>"If they are what I suspect," declared Pedro, "I
+think they would hold it up at the station, if there
+were only a few more of them."</p>
+
+<p>"And what do you think they are?"</p>
+
+<p>"I think they are Zapatistas."</p>
+
+<p>"What are they?" asked Donald.</p>
+
+<p>"Followers of the bandit leader, Emilio Zapata."</p>
+
+<p>"Which side does he belong to?" asked Adrian.
+"Huerta or Carranza?"</p>
+
+<p>"Neither. He is simply a bandit, and his followers
+prey upon any whom they find unprotected."</p>
+
+<p>"And do you really think they are going to hold
+up and rob the train from Pachuca?"</p>
+
+<p>"<i>Sin duda!</i>" meaning without doubt.</p>
+
+<p>"Then we must prevent them," declared Donald<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_5" id="Page_5" href="#Page_5">[Pg 5]</a></span>
+emphatically.</p>
+
+<p>"What business is it of ours?" asked Billie. "If
+one bunch of Mexicans wants to rob another bunch,
+especially if the second bunch are Huertistas, I
+don't know that it is for us to interfere. I'm not
+looking for trouble."</p>
+
+<p>"You're not afraid, are you? If&mdash;&mdash;"</p>
+
+<p>"Say, Don," interrupted Billie, "what's the use of
+always asking such foolish questions? If I remember
+rightly, the last time you asked me that question
+was up on the Rio Grande a year ago, about the
+time that I was swimming rivers and breaking into
+prisons with the Texas Rangers to get you and Ad
+out of trouble. Now why&mdash;&mdash;"</p>
+
+<p>Donald held up both hands.</p>
+
+<p>"That's enough, Billie," he laughed. "I'll take
+it all back. Of course you're not afraid. But I
+insist we must prevent this hold-up."</p>
+
+<p>"And again I ask, why?"</p>
+
+<p>"Because there may be women and children on
+the train and&mdash;&mdash;"</p>
+
+<p>"That's enough," exclaimed Billie. "You needn't
+go on with the rest. But what's the plan? We're
+a good ten miles from those chaps&mdash;unless we had
+an airship."</p>
+
+<p>"And then how far do you think it is?" queried
+Adrian.</p>
+
+<p>"Well," replied Billie slowly, as he squinted up
+one eye, "I should say they are about four miles
+<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_6" id="Page_6" href="#Page_6">[Pg 6]</a></span>
+away as the crow flies. But we are not crows. By
+the Real road, it is at least ten miles."</p>
+
+<p>"There must be a short cut somewhere," insisted
+Donald.</p>
+
+<p>"There is," explained Pedro. "Just around the
+next turn in the road there is a goat path that leads
+down to the river. If you are not afraid of getting
+wet&mdash;&mdash;"</p>
+
+<p>"There you go," laughed Billie. "Afraid of getting
+wet! Just let's settle it once for all that we
+are not afraid of anything that it is right for us
+to do."</p>
+
+<p>Pedro laughed good-naturedly.</p>
+
+<p>"Well, then, since we are not afraid of getting
+wet, we can follow the river for about two miles
+by fording it several times, and emerge on the
+plain a mile this side of the clump of trees which
+hides those fellows from the highway."</p>
+
+<p>"And then what?" from Billie.</p>
+
+<p>"That is as far as I've gone."</p>
+
+<p>"Then you'll have to do better. Just as soon
+as we emerge from behind those trees, we'll be a
+fair target. Four against twenty is 'most too much
+on an open plain."</p>
+
+<p>For several minutes no one spoke. It was Adrian
+who broke the silence.</p>
+
+<p>"I think I see a way, not only to save the train,
+but possibly to capture the bandits."</p>
+
+<p>The boys looked up in surprise.</p>
+
+<p>"Do you notice how the railroad curves in toward
+<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_7" id="Page_7" href="#Page_7">[Pg 7]</a></span>
+the hills just after it crosses the river bridge?" he
+continued, pointing out the place he meant.</p>
+
+<p>"Sure, we see it," from Billie.</p>
+
+<p>"Well, when we leave the river, instead of riding
+toward that bunch of trees, we'll ride the other way.
+That will bring us to the railroad track near the
+curve. Then we'll ride up the track. If we do
+not reach the station before the train leaves, we
+can flag it. There is sure to be at least half a dozen
+guards aboard. We will make ten. Most of the
+men aboard will have revolvers. The result will be
+that instead of the bandits taking the train by surprise,
+we will take them by surprise, and&mdash;&mdash;"</p>
+
+<p>"And the army that takes the other by surprise
+wins," finished Billie, taking off his sombrero and
+bowing to Adrian in mock gravity. Then to Pedro,
+"Let the scout lead the way and the army will
+fall in behind, with the general at the head."</p>
+
+<p>A laugh followed Billie's words, and putting
+spurs to their horses, the four lads dashed down
+the mountain road upon their self-appointed mission,
+which was by no means the first daring adventure
+in which they had engaged; for the stories
+of the doings of the three American lads in the
+quartette have furnished interesting reading for
+thousands of American boys.</p>
+
+<p>It is because of their numerous adventures and
+their skill as horsemen that the trio has become
+known as the Broncho Rider Boys. Their names
+are Donald Mackay, Adrian Sherwood and William
+<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_8" id="Page_8" href="#Page_8">[Pg 8]</a></span>
+Stonewall Jackson Winkle, better known as
+"Broncho Billie." This latter name was given him
+some two years before when he went to visit his
+cousin Donald at the latter's home on the Keystone
+Ranch in Wyoming. It was not given him because
+he was such an expert rider, but because he could
+fall from his broncho pony easier than any boy
+in that section. Rotund in appearance, he was as
+jolly as he was fat, and his chief failing was his appetite.
+No matter what the hour, no one ever mentioned
+eats that Billie was not hungry.</p>
+
+<p>When he first came West he was supposed to be
+in poor health. It speedily developed that such was
+not the case. He was simply hungry. Months in
+the open air had enabled him to eat without fear
+and he was now about the most robust specimen of
+boy that any one ever saw.</p>
+
+<p>Donald, the oldest of the trio, was one of those
+level-headed chaps who had a knack of doing the
+right thing at the right time. His judgment had
+been proven good in many a tight place and under
+many thrilling conditions. As a result, he was generally
+looked up to as a leader by the others, although
+it must be admitted that Adrian was also
+a lad of sense and plenty of nerve.</p>
+
+<p>Adrian was the owner of a large Wyoming ranch,
+and one of the books which has proved most interesting
+to American boys is known as The Broncho
+Rider Boys on the Wyoming Trail, a story of how
+<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_9" id="Page_9" href="#Page_9">[Pg 9]</a></span>
+Adrian saved his property from being taken away
+from him by a dishonest uncle.</p>
+
+<p>About a year previous to the time this story
+opens, these three boys had been on a trip along the
+Rio Grande, when they fell in with Capt. June Peak
+and a company of Texas Rangers, who had been
+detailed to keep watch of the actions of a band of
+cattle smugglers. Sent across the river into Mexican
+territory on a secret mission, the Broncho Rider
+Boys had the good fortune to rescue Pedro Sanchez,
+the fourth member of the quartette, from the hands
+of a band of ruffians. Pedro turned out to be the
+son of Gen. Sanchez of the Mexican army, who was
+visiting an uncle in northern Mexico. After a
+series of thrilling adventures, which are told in full
+in The Broncho Rider Boys with the Texas Rangers,
+Donald, Adrian and Billie returned to their homes,
+promising to visit Pedro in the City of Mexico
+whenever the time was ripe.</p>
+
+<p>During the time that the boys were scouting in
+Mexico they had learned to speak Spanish quite
+well, and this knowledge had been so improved during
+their visit with Pedro that they now spoke the
+language well, an accomplishment which proved of
+much value to them later on.</p>
+
+<p>About a month prior to the day upon which this
+story opens, the three Americans had met by appointment
+at New York City and had come to Vera
+Cruz by boat and thence to the City of Mexico,
+where they found everything in a greatly disturbed
+<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_10" id="Page_10" href="#Page_10">[Pg 10]</a></span>
+condition because of the revolution which had been
+started some months previous by Gen. Carranza.</p>
+
+<p>It might be well right here to state briefly the history
+of the previous few months in Mexico, so that
+all may understand how it happened that none of
+the four boys had a very high opinion of Gen.
+Huerta, at that time dictator of Mexico.</p>
+
+<p>For nearly 35 years, up to 1911, Mexico had a
+peaceful existence under a republican form of government.
+During the last 32 years of that time
+Porfirio Diaz was president. Just prior to 1912 a
+revolution was begun against what had come to be
+called the Diaz government, and Diaz was compelled
+to flee from Mexico. The revolution was
+headed by Francisco Madero, who was then made
+president.</p>
+
+<p>In February of 1913 a revolution was started
+against President Madero by Felix Diaz, nephew
+of Porfirio Diaz, and the City of Mexico was attacked.
+At that time Gen. Huerta was in command
+of Madero's forces in the City of Mexico. He
+proved a traitor to Madero, went over to Diaz, arrested
+Madero and confined him in prison. Two
+days later, April 22, 1913, President Madero was
+shot by order of Huerta, who then declared himself
+dictator. At the same time he asked that the other
+nations of the earth recognize him as the head of
+the Mexican government, a thing which the government
+of the United States refused to do.</p>
+
+<p>March 26, 1913, another revolution was started,
+<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_11" id="Page_11" href="#Page_11">[Pg 11]</a></span>
+this time against Gen. Huerta by Gen. Carranza,
+governor of the state of Chihuahua. This revolution
+had been in progress more than a year when
+this story opens.</p>
+
+<p>Pedro's father, Gen. Sanchez, had been a friend
+of President Madero. When Madero was shot,
+Gen. Sanchez fled to Pachuca where he had a large
+hacienda and also owned vast interests in the silver
+mines at Real del Monte, some six miles up the
+mountains. Later, however, he was promised protection
+by Gen. Huerta, who was anxious to have
+the friendship of such a prominent man, and returned
+to the City of Mexico. It was some time
+after this, about March 1, 1914&mdash;when matters
+had quieted down in the City of Mexico&mdash;that the
+three American boys went to visit Pedro.</p>
+
+<p>A few days previous to the one on which we find
+the four boys headed for the railroad to foil the
+would-be train robbers, they had come to Pachuca,
+which is located some sixty miles from the City of
+Mexico, on horses furnished them by Gen. Sanchez,
+to see the mines and the beautiful mountains overlooking
+the plains of Quesco. Every day they took
+long rides in various directions, in spite of the unsettled
+condition of the country&mdash;a condition which
+compelled them always to go armed with their
+trusty Marlins and Colts&mdash;and that is how they
+happened to be on the Real road at such an opportune
+time.</p>
+
+<p>With these explanations, it is no wonder that
+<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_12" id="Page_12" href="#Page_12">[Pg 12]</a></span>
+the boys were keen for the adventure upon which
+they were now embarked.</p>
+
+<p>A sharp ride of fifteen minutes brought them to
+the river and into it the horses plunged. At places
+it was only knee deep and at other places where they
+were obliged to cross it was necessary for the horses
+to swim; but this was only fun for the Broncho
+Rider Boys.</p>
+
+<p>Half an hour after sighting the bandits, the boys
+halted on the railroad track, well secreted from
+their quarry by the curve before mentioned.</p>
+
+<p>"And none too soon," declared Donald as the
+sharp whistle of the engine was heard perhaps half
+a mile away.</p>
+
+<p>"How shall we flag her?" asked Pedro.</p>
+
+<p>"With that red bandana handkerchief on Billie's
+neck," replied Donald as he reached over and
+snatched the neckwear from its place.</p>
+
+<p>Springing from his horse, he ran up the track
+waving the red signal as he ran.</p>
+
+<p>A sharp blast from the whistle a couple of minutes
+later gave proof that the danger signal had
+been seen, and the grinding of the brakes told that
+the train was coming to a stop. Even before this
+was an accomplished fact the conductor swung himself
+from the front car and came running down the
+track to see what was the matter, while the guards
+covered the boys with their carbines.</p>
+
+<p>"What do you mean by stopping the train?" he
+demanded angrily.</p>
+
+<p>Donald explained in as few words as possible.<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_13" id="Page_13" href="#Page_13">[Pg 13]</a></span></p>
+
+<p>The conductor signalled the guards to him and
+told them what Donald had said.</p>
+
+<p>"What had we better do?" asked the conductor.</p>
+
+<p>"We had better go back to Pachuca for help,"
+replied the guards.</p>
+
+<p>"And let the Zapatistas escape!" exclaimed Billie
+hotly. "What do you want to do that for?"</p>
+
+<p>"We have only six guards," the conductor explained,
+"and&mdash;&mdash;"</p>
+
+<p>"And that, with us, makes ten," interrupted
+Billie.</p>
+
+<p>The conductor regarded the boy with surprise.</p>
+
+<p>"Do you mean you will join us to help capture
+the bandits?"</p>
+
+<p>"What do you think we're here for?" asked Billie.</p>
+
+<p>"Yes," chimed in Adrian. "What do you suppose
+we stopped the train for?"</p>
+
+<p>"But even ten are no match for twenty or more,"
+declared the guard.</p>
+
+<p>"Of course they are," said Donald, "if the twenty
+are taken by surprise."</p>
+
+<p>"Which they will not be if we don't act pretty
+quick," insisted Billie. "Come on! Let's go after
+them," and he climbed up onto the car.</p>
+
+<p>"That's what I say," said Pedro, following Billie's
+example.</p>
+
+<p>Without more words the others followed and
+the conductor gave the signal to go ahead.</p>
+
+<p>"How about the horses?" asked Donald, turning<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_14" id="Page_14" href="#Page_14">[Pg 14]</a></span>
+to Pedro.</p>
+
+<p>"They'll be all right; but if we capture the Zapatistas
+we'll have horses enough any way."</p>
+
+<p>"And if we don't," remarked Billie grimly,
+"there'll be some riderless horses any way."</p>
+
+<p>"Let us hope that they will not be the ones we
+have left behind," said Donald gravely.</p>
+
+
+
+<hr style="width: 65%;" />
+<h2><a name="CHAPTER_II" id="CHAPTER_II"></a>CHAPTER II.</h2>
+
+<h3>A STRANGE MIX-UP.</h3>
+
+
+<p>While the train was gathering headway the conductor
+and the guards rounded up all the men they
+could find on the train who were armed. There
+were more than a dozen, so that in point of numbers,
+the force on the train nearly equalled the
+Zapatistas. These were so stationed at the windows
+that they could give the would-be robbers a warm
+reception.</p>
+
+<p>"We must use some strategy," declared Adrian,
+"or we will simply succeed in killing a few and
+scaring away the others. That will not be a very
+brilliant deed."</p>
+
+<p>"No," from Donald, "but it will save the bullion.
+What's your plan?"</p>
+
+<p>"Well, I was thinking it would be a good plan to
+separate the train."</p>
+
+<p>"How?"<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_15" id="Page_15" href="#Page_15">[Pg 15]</a></span></p>
+
+<p>"You can see it is all down grade from here to
+where the bandits are waiting for us."</p>
+
+<p>"Yes."</p>
+
+<p>"As soon as we get to running a good speed, Billie
+and I will go into the express car with the three
+guards. You and Pedro stay here with the other
+guards and the passengers. As we near the bandits,
+uncouple the train, put on the brakes and stop the
+coaches. We will rush by with the engine and express
+car, firing as we go&mdash;&mdash;"</p>
+
+<p>"Which will be all right," interrupted Billie, "if
+they don't ditch the engine."</p>
+
+<p>Adrian's face fell.</p>
+
+<p>"I hadn't thought of that."</p>
+
+<p>"Well, you'd better."</p>
+
+<p>After a moment Adrian's face brightened.</p>
+
+<p>"They might better ditch the engine and express
+car than the whole train," he declared.</p>
+
+<p>"Right you are," from Donald. "If you and Billie
+are game enough to try it, I say it is the proper
+thing. If they ditch the engine, we will be back a
+ways and can run down to your assistance. If they
+don't ditch you, we will have them between two
+fires."</p>
+
+<p>"Just what I thought," replied Adrian. "How
+about it, Billie?"</p>
+
+<p>"I'm game. My head may be a little thick, but
+I can see just as far through a two-inch plank as
+the next one."</p>
+
+<p>"All right, then. Come on," and Adrian led the<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_16" id="Page_16" href="#Page_16">[Pg 16]</a></span>
+way into the car ahead, while Donald and Pedro
+stood by to uncouple as soon as they passed the
+clump of trees before alluded to.</p>
+
+<p>Almost at the same instant several sharp blasts
+from the whistle gave the danger signal, and Donald
+threw over the coupling lever and put on the
+brake. The coaches slowed quickly down, but the
+engine and express car dashed in between the horsemen
+stationed on either side of the track.</p>
+
+<p>Prepared for what they knew was coming, the
+engineer and fireman had thrown themselves down
+on the floor of the cab, while Adrian, Billie and the
+three guards poured a volley into the robbers as
+they passed and several horses lost their mounts.</p>
+
+<p>This fire was followed by a fusillade from the
+horsemen and a minute later the engine, striking an
+unspiked rail, rolled completely over into the ditch,
+wrenching itself clear from the express car, which,
+after bumping over the ties for several seconds, suddenly
+ceased its antics and glided smoothly along.</p>
+
+<p>As by a miracle it had run completely over the
+space from which the rail had been loosed and
+landed upon the good track, down which it now
+sped.</p>
+
+<p>So unexpected was the change from ties to track
+that Adrian and Billie were unable for a few moments
+to understand what had happened. Then
+Billie rushed to the door and seized the hand brake.</p>
+
+<p>"Grab hold and help stop this car," he yelled to
+<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_17" id="Page_17" href="#Page_17">[Pg 17]</a></span>
+Adrian, "or there is no knowing where we'll land."</p>
+
+<p>Adrian hastened to obey, but the wrench that had
+been given the car when the engine broke loose had
+put the brake out of commission and the car sped on.</p>
+
+<p>The three Mexican guards now appeared on the
+platform and gazed wildly up the track where they
+could see the fight going on between the bandits and
+their companions.</p>
+
+<p>"What shall we do, Se&ntilde;or?" asked one of them.</p>
+
+<p>"Search me," from Billie. "How long is this
+grade?"</p>
+
+<p>"It is down hill all the way to Pitahaya."</p>
+
+<p>"How far is that?"</p>
+
+<p>"Ten kilometers from Pachuca."</p>
+
+<p>"That must be about three miles farther," said
+Adrian.</p>
+
+<p>"Correct," from Billie, "but unless it's a mighty
+steep up-grade the other side of Pita-what's-its-name,
+we're going so fast we'll not stop till we've
+run away past it."</p>
+
+<p>"Well, what of it? We can coast back, can't
+we?"</p>
+
+<p>The car gave a lurch to one side that almost
+threw the boys off the platform.</p>
+
+<p>"We're certainly going some," called Adrian.
+"Hang on!"</p>
+
+<p>And hang on they did until they dashed past the
+little station of Pitahaya and after several minutes
+began to slow down.</p>
+
+<p>"This is a little better," Adrian finally remarked<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_18" id="Page_18" href="#Page_18">[Pg 18]</a></span>
+as the car showed some sign of coming to a stop.</p>
+
+<p>"Yes, indeed," from Billie. "I suppose we'll
+come to a dead stop soon. Do you think she'll start
+back on her own hook, or shall we have to start
+her?"</p>
+
+<p>"We'll soon see," and see they did, for a couple
+of minutes later the car came to a stop.</p>
+
+<p>For some minutes the five occupants of the car
+waited to see if it would start back down the grade.
+When it did not they got off to decide what could
+be done.</p>
+
+<p>"It's a mighty steep hill," Billie ventured.
+"Looks as though the five of us ought to start it.
+Let's try."</p>
+
+<p>The five put their shoulders against the car and
+pushed with all their might, but it refused to budge.</p>
+
+<p>"If we only had a crowbar," said Adrian, "we
+could start it in a jiffy. Suppose some of you look
+in the car. There might be one there."</p>
+
+<p>The three Mexicans jumped to obey.</p>
+
+<p>Directly they appeared in the doorway with a
+large claw-bar in their hands.</p>
+
+<p>"Will this do?" asked one.</p>
+
+<p>"Sure! Throw it off," said Billie, "and I'll soon
+start the old caboose."</p>
+
+<p>Picking up the bar, Billie inserted the claw under
+one of the wheels while Adrian stood with his hand
+on the car rail ready to spring aboard.</p>
+
+<p>At the first attempt the claw slipped and nothing
+<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_19" id="Page_19" href="#Page_19">[Pg 19]</a></span>
+happened, but at the second attempt the wheels
+yielded a little.</p>
+
+<p>"This time she'll go," Billie called. "All aboard!"</p>
+
+<p>Adrian sprang onto the car as Billie bore down
+upon the bar and the wheels began to revolve.</p>
+
+<p>"Never mind the bar," cried Adrian as he saw
+that Billie was raising the implement to throw it
+onto the platform. "Jump aboard!"</p>
+
+<p>Billie started to obey, but the advice came too
+late. As he dropped the bar it struck one end of a
+tie, flopped over and hit him on the shin.</p>
+
+<p>"Wow!" he yelled, grabbing his ankle with both
+hands.</p>
+
+<p>"Never mind your leg," shouted Adrian. "Jump
+on or you'll be left."</p>
+
+<p>Billie tried to obey, but the car was now under
+headway and although he sprinted his best, he was
+soon left behind.</p>
+
+<p>Adrian started to jump off the car, but seeing his
+intention Billie called to him not to do it.</p>
+
+<p>"I'll get there some time," he called. "Just tell
+them I'm coming," and he stood in the middle of the
+track looking ruefully after the rapidly disappearing
+car.</p>
+
+<p>After some moments he picked up the claw-bar
+and threw it spitefully into the ditch beside the
+track, as much as to say, "Lay there! You're the
+cause of all the trouble." Then he started slowly
+after the car.</p>
+
+<p>In the meantime Adrian was flying as fast back
+<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_20" id="Page_20" href="#Page_20">[Pg 20]</a></span>
+toward Pachuca as he had been flying away from
+it only a few minutes before. It could not have
+been more than ten minutes altogether since the
+wreck of the engine and Adrian figured that if the
+grade were steep enough the car might gain momentum
+enough to carry it back to the scene of the
+trouble; but he had little hope that it would.</p>
+
+<p>When he shot through Pitahaya on his return
+trip, however, he saw that the car was going at a
+terrific rate of speed.</p>
+
+<p>"What do you think?" he asked one of the Mexicans.
+"Do you think we'll get all the way back?"</p>
+
+<p>"Cierto," was the reply. "When they first built
+this road they used to have mules haul the car to
+the top of this hill and then turn it loose and it
+would run almost to Pachuca. That was before it
+had any engines."</p>
+
+<p>Adrian looked at the man and winked one eye
+very slowly.</p>
+
+<p>"Se&ntilde;or, it is true," spoke up another. "I was a
+guard at the time."</p>
+
+<p>Adrian could scarcely believe the statement, but
+he afterward learned that the men spoke the truth.</p>
+
+<p>"Well, then," he said, "we had better look to
+our arms, for we may need them. There is no
+knowing how this affair has turned out."</p>
+
+<p>The advice was well taken, for as they drew near
+the scene of the wreck, they saw that they were
+badly needed. More than a dozen horsemen were
+in sight at some distance from the wreck and with
+<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_21" id="Page_21" href="#Page_21">[Pg 21]</a></span>
+their long-range rifles were doing their best to pick
+off any one who showed his head.</p>
+
+<p>"Our party must be out of ammunition," suggested
+Adrian, "or they would give a better account
+of themselves."</p>
+
+<p>"Our carbines would not carry that far," explained
+one of the guards.</p>
+
+<p>"Our Marlins will," replied Adrian, and as he
+spoke there were two simultaneous flashes from two
+of the car windows and two of the bandits fell, one
+shot from his horse and the other with his horse
+shot under him.</p>
+
+<p>For a moment the other horsemen hesitated as
+to the course they should pursue and then, putting
+spurs to their horses, they dashed toward the train,
+just as the express car, having reached the end of
+the track, bumped onto the ties and came to a stop.</p>
+
+<p>"Now!" cried Adrian as the riders drew near,
+firing as they came, and four shots rang out.</p>
+
+<p>The volley from so unexpected a quarter took
+the horsemen completely by surprise, and they
+pulled up with a jerk. The action proved their undoing,
+for as they stood thus for a moment, they
+gave those in the train the opportunity they desired
+and the volley that followed turned four more riderless
+horses upon the plain.</p>
+
+<p>It was more than flesh and blood could stand, and
+the seven or eight remaining horsemen turned and
+fled, followed by at least three whistling bullets
+from as many Marlins.</p>
+
+<p>The fight was over and the bullion had been<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_22" id="Page_22" href="#Page_22">[Pg 22]</a></span>
+saved, but what of Broncho Billie, who had been
+left at the top of the hill four miles away?</p>
+
+<p>That was the first question asked by Donald when
+he greeted Adrian two minutes later.</p>
+
+<p>"Oh, he's all right," was the laughing reply.
+"He's just taking a little walk for his health."</p>
+
+<p>But when Billie failed to put in an appearance an
+hour later, the boys mounted their horses and started
+up the track to meet him, leading Billie's mount
+between them.</p>
+
+
+
+<hr style="width: 65%;" />
+<h2><a name="CHAPTER_III" id="CHAPTER_III"></a>CHAPTER III.</h2>
+
+<h3>BILLIE LOSES HIS NERVE.</h3>
+
+
+<p>Broncho Billie was not a rapid walker. In
+fact, if there was any one thing in which Billie
+was not a success, it was walking. He could ride
+a horse all day, but when it came to depending upon
+his own legs as a means of locomotion, he was a
+dead failure.</p>
+
+<p>Therefore he walked slowly along, counting the
+ties as he went.</p>
+
+<p>"They certainly do lay 'em thick," he mused after
+some minutes. "Three hundred and one, three hundred
+and two, three hundred and three, three hundred
+and four, three hun&mdash;&mdash;"</p>
+
+<p>He stopped short and looked behind him.</p>
+
+<p>"I sure thought I heard some one," he muttered.<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_23" id="Page_23" href="#Page_23">[Pg 23]</a></span>
+"It must have been a bird."</p>
+
+<p>He turned and started forward.</p>
+
+<p>"Let's see, where was I? Oh, yes, three hundred
+and five, three hundred and six, three hundred
+and&mdash;&mdash;"</p>
+
+<p>Again he stopped, but did not turn around. Instead
+he stooped down as though to pick up a stone,
+which enabled him to look backward between his
+knees.</p>
+
+<p>He caught a movement in the grass at the edge
+of the right of way.</p>
+
+<p>"I thought so," he muttered. "Now to find out
+who it is, and what he wants."</p>
+
+<p>He picked up a small stone and threw it at a
+tall cactus which grew near the track some distance
+ahead.</p>
+
+<p>"Good shot," he said aloud as the stone hit the
+stalk. "I wonder if I could do it again."</p>
+
+<p>He stooped down and picked up another stone,
+taking a good look backward from his stooping
+position. There was not a movement to indicate
+the presence of a living thing.</p>
+
+<p>"This is getting on my nerves," the boy mused
+as he picked up several small stones and again
+walked forward. "I don't mind being followed by
+a white man, but I'm a whole lot leary of these
+greasers. They're bad enough when they're
+friendly."</p>
+
+<p>Then aloud, as he threw a couple of stones: "I'll
+<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_24" id="Page_24" href="#Page_24">[Pg 24]</a></span>
+never get anywhere if I don't make better time
+than this. I'll just sprint a few."</p>
+
+<p>Suiting the action to the word, he started on a
+run.</p>
+
+<p>Almost immediately he was aware of a soft pat-pat
+in his rear. He had heard a similar sound in
+the wilds of Wyoming and he recognized it at once.</p>
+
+<p>It was the footfall of a four-legged animal.</p>
+
+<p>"So!" he ejaculated. "I wonder what it is. If
+there were wolves down here I would say it was
+a wolf, but I don't believe there are." Then a minute
+later, "Well, whatever it is, I'm going to find
+out."</p>
+
+<p>He whipped out his automatic and turned suddenly.</p>
+
+<p>As before, not a single living thing was in sight,
+only in the grass a movement as before.</p>
+
+<p>Without a moment's aim, he fired a single shot
+at the spot. It was an act born of fear and Billie
+knew it, but for the life of him he could not have
+done otherwise, so nervous had he become.</p>
+
+<p>The report was followed by a cry of pain and
+an instant later there came running directly toward
+him out of the tall grass a figure so weird that Billie
+stood as one paralysed.</p>
+
+<p>The figure was that of a man not more than two
+feet high, with long arms and a head of diminutive
+size. While it stood upright at times, at others it
+came forward on all fours. To Billie it seemed a
+cross between a man and a monkey.</p>
+
+<p>Gathering his wits in an instant, Billie would have<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_25" id="Page_25" href="#Page_25">[Pg 25]</a></span>
+fired again&mdash;in fact, raised his revolver to do so,
+when the strange creature fell to its knees and raised
+its hands in supplication.</p>
+
+<p>"By George!" exclaimed the lad as he stood with
+lowered weapon. "What kind of a thing is this?
+I wonder if it can talk?"</p>
+
+<p>Then as he took a step toward it: "I'm not going
+to hurt you. Come here."</p>
+
+<p>The creature arose to its feet and came slowly
+toward him. As it did so Billie noticed that blood
+was running from a wound in its scalp.</p>
+
+<p>"Poor thing," he said. "That must have been
+where the bullet hit him. It was a close shave."</p>
+
+<p>"Can you talk?" he finally asked.</p>
+
+<p>The strange creature turned its head to one side
+and eyed him closely, but no sound came from its
+lips.</p>
+
+<p>"It must be an ape of some sort," mused the boy;
+"but how did it become so tame?"</p>
+
+<p>He slowly returned his automatic to its holster,
+thinking in the meantime how he could dress the
+creature's wound; but no sooner had his hand left
+his weapon than the ape sprang at him with the
+utmost fury. It landed on his shoulder, wound its
+legs about his neck, and with its long arms made
+a wild grab for the revolver.</p>
+
+<p>Then began a strange and terrible struggle for
+the possession of the weapon. Even as he fought
+the beast, Billie realized that in some manner the
+<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_26" id="Page_26" href="#Page_26">[Pg 26]</a></span>
+ape had learned to fear firearms, but whether it
+had ever learned to use them he could not venture
+a guess. He felt certain if he could draw the weapon
+and point it at the ape, it would at once cringe
+in fear. What might happen if the ape should get
+possession of it, he could only imagine.</p>
+
+<p>For a youth of eighteen, there were few whom
+Billie met that were his match physically, but this
+diminutive man-animal held him as in a vise. Billie
+exerted every ounce of his strength to free himself
+from the terrible hold, while the ape fought
+even more fiercely to retain its grip and to gain
+possession of the weapon.</p>
+
+<p>It was a weird and fearful struggle waged there
+in the stillness of the tropical woodland&mdash;a stillness
+broken only by the occasional wild scream of the
+ape, or the hoarse breathing of the boy as he fought
+to free himself from that horrible grasp.</p>
+
+<p>The struggle must have lasted for two or three
+minutes&mdash;to Billie it seemed hours&mdash;when by a
+sudden wrench the lad managed to free his left
+arm sufficiently to get the beast by the throat. For
+an instant it loosed its hold on his right arm and
+that act decided the battle.</p>
+
+<p>Finding his right arm free, Billie seized his revolver
+and without drawing it from the holster
+pulled the trigger.</p>
+
+<p>At the sound of the shot, the ape uttered a plaintive
+cry, relaxed its hold upon the lad and fell upon
+<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_27" id="Page_27" href="#Page_27">[Pg 27]</a></span>
+its knees on the ground with its hands raised in
+supplication as previously.</p>
+
+<p>"I ought to shoot you," declared the lad between
+his gasps for breath as he drew the weapon from its
+holster and pointed it at the animal, "but I won't.
+I'll take you with me and maybe I can sell you for
+enough to pay me for the scare you've given me.
+Now, march!"</p>
+
+<p>He pointed with his finger down the track, but
+the beast would not stir.</p>
+
+<p>"Don't you intend to do what I tell you?"</p>
+
+<p>The animal perked up his head and kept his eye
+upon the revolver.</p>
+
+<p>"Well," exclaimed Billie as he drew a long
+breath, "this is the limit. I can't make you mind
+and I won't hurt you. I guess the only thing I can
+do is to go and leave you."</p>
+
+<p>Suiting the action to the word, Billie turned and
+started down the track, his revolver still in his hand.</p>
+
+<p>He had not gone more than a dozen steps, before
+he heard the soft pat-pat behind him, and on looking
+back could see nothing but the waving grass to
+indicate the whereabouts of his erstwhile assailant.</p>
+
+<p>"So I am to be followed, am I? Well, all right."
+Then, as an afterthought: "I wonder how I can
+catch him when I want him. I wonder if this will
+do," and he raised his weapon and pointed it toward
+the moving grass.</p>
+
+<p>With the same plaintive cry which Billie had come
+<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_28" id="Page_28" href="#Page_28">[Pg 28]</a></span>
+to recognize as one of fear, the animal ran toward
+him and sank to his knees.</p>
+
+<p>Billie smiled.</p>
+
+<p>"It's all right, old chap. As long as I know how
+to handle you, why you can follow me right back
+to the train."</p>
+
+<p>Again he started down the track at a brisk walk,
+it having just occurred to him that there might be
+something doing at the other end of his journey.</p>
+
+<p>Twenty minutes later he reached the station at
+Pitahaya where he had expected to find Adrian and
+the three Mexicans awaiting him, but, as we know,
+they had gone on to the scene of the wreck. Not
+realizing just what had happened, but always on
+the alert for the unexpected, Billie, therefore, began
+an inspection of the station.</p>
+
+<p>It did not take him long to discover that Pitahaya
+was little more than a siding with a one-room building,
+which was used as a freight house and a waiting
+room. It did not even boast of a station master.</p>
+
+<p>"There must be some reason for having a building
+here," he mused. "There must be some sort
+of a settlement around somewhere. But what's that
+to me? I might as well be jogging along towards
+Pachuca."</p>
+
+<p>Then he bethought him of the ape, which he had
+no mind to lose after his exciting experience. But
+the animal was nowhere to be seen.</p>
+
+<p>"I wonder if I could raise him with a shot," soliloquized
+Billie.</p>
+
+<p>He raised his weapon, which he still carried in<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_29" id="Page_29" href="#Page_29">[Pg 29]</a></span>
+his hand, and fired aimlessly, while he turned his
+eyes in various directions, but there was nothing
+to be seen.</p>
+
+<p>"Oh, well," he thought, "what's the difference?
+He'd just be a nuisance anyway. I might as well
+be trudging along."</p>
+
+<p>He jumped off the station platform and proceeded
+down the track, filling the magazine to his automatic
+as he went. Then having finished the task,
+he returned it to his holster and once more began
+counting the ties.</p>
+
+<p>"One, two, three, four, five, six&mdash;&mdash;"</p>
+
+<p>Bing! And a stone whistled by his head.</p>
+
+<p>Billie turned, and as he did so a second stone
+from the same source struck him on the temple,
+and he fell to the ground.</p>
+
+<p>A second later the ape sprang from a palm beside
+the station and ran toward him, stopping every few
+feet to see if the lad would rise.</p>
+
+<p>When within a few feet of the prostrate lad the
+animal made a leap and landed upon his body. In
+another instant it had gained possession of Billie's
+weapon, which it examined curiously for a moment,
+ere it sprang away and stationed itself some two
+rods distant, where it sat watching with the weapon
+aimed directly at him.</p>
+
+<p>For perhaps five minutes the two retained their
+relative positions and then Billie began to regain
+<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_30" id="Page_30" href="#Page_30">[Pg 30]</a></span>
+consciousness. Several times he moved uneasily and
+then he suddenly sat up and looked around.</p>
+
+<p>"I wonder what happened," he finally thought,
+and then he became conscious of a pain in his head.</p>
+
+<p>He raised his hand to the aching spot and his
+fingers encountered a big lump.</p>
+
+<p>The truth came upon him like a flash. He dropped
+his hand to his holster, and sprang to his feet.</p>
+
+<p>As he did so he caught sight of the ape and
+found himself looking into the business end of his
+own weapon.</p>
+
+<p>With a yell he dropped to the ground as though
+the expected had happened.</p>
+
+<p>But when no shot followed, he began to regain
+his wits and lay still trying to figure out once more
+just how much the ape might know about the use
+of the weapon.</p>
+
+<p>He remembered the old saying that a gun was a
+dangerous weapon without lock, stock or barrel,
+because a man killed his wife with the ramrod;
+and so he figured that an animal which had intelligence
+enough to throw a stone and knock him senseless,
+might have sense enough to fire a revolver.</p>
+
+<p>"If I only knew something about his history," soliloquized
+Billie, "I might be able to guess how much
+he knew. But he is a perfect stranger to me. I
+don't even know his name."</p>
+
+<p>After several minutes and nothing had happened,
+Billie decided to make some effort to get away.</p>
+
+<p>"I might as well be shot as to be prisoner to an
+<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_31" id="Page_31" href="#Page_31">[Pg 31]</a></span>
+ape," he thought, and so he arose to a sitting posture
+and surveyed the scene.</p>
+
+<p>There sat the ape as before, with the automatic
+pointed at Billie, but with a puzzled look upon its
+face. When the lad finally arose, the ape appeared
+still more puzzled and at length, turning the weapon
+away from Billie, looked into the muzzle.</p>
+
+<p>"That settles it," exclaimed Billie. "He doesn't
+know how to fire it. I'll go and take it away from
+him."</p>
+
+<p>He started toward the animal, which at once
+pointed the revolver in Billie's direction. There
+came a sharp report and a bullet whizzed by the
+boy's head.</p>
+
+<p>"Worse and more of it," exclaimed Billie. "He
+doesn't know how to use the thing, but he's liable
+to shoot me as long as I stay in range. I'll just
+make myself scarce."</p>
+
+<p>Stooping down, he picked up a good-sized stone
+and hurled it at the ape and then, without waiting
+to see the result of his throw, jumped into the jungle
+which lined both sides of the track, determined to
+make a detour and if possible lose his unpleasant
+companion.</p>
+
+<p>He had not run far before he realized that the
+ape was following, but this he did not mind. There
+were plenty of trees between them, and he felt sure
+he would soon be able to reach some sort of a habitation,
+when he suddenly found himself on the edge
+<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_32" id="Page_32" href="#Page_32">[Pg 32]</a></span>
+of a deep basin into which he plunged before he was
+able to gain his equilibrium.</p>
+
+
+
+<hr style="width: 65%;" />
+<h2><a name="CHAPTER_IV" id="CHAPTER_IV"></a>CHAPTER IV.</h2>
+
+<h3>THE ROSARIO VIEJO.</h3>
+
+
+<p>To be suddenly pitched head-foremost down a
+rocky declivity into a mass of prickly pear bushes
+and other tropical brambles is by no means pleasant;
+and as a result Billie was not in the best of
+humor when he picked himself up and looked to
+the top of the 60-foot embankment down which he
+had slid.</p>
+
+<p>"It's a wonder they wouldn't hang out a red
+light when they dig a hole like this," he declared
+angrily, "and not let a fellow most break his neck,
+to say nothing of scratching his eyes out! This is
+worse than a subway cave-in."</p>
+
+<p>He pulled himself together and surveyed his
+surroundings.</p>
+
+<p>The basin looked very much like an old quarry&mdash;so
+old that the shrubbery on the sides had grown
+into good-sized trees, and the whole place was covered
+with herbage of one sort or another. In one
+corner of the excavation, which must have covered
+some two acres, there was the ruin of an adobe
+house, while near the center was a stone structure
+made of four stone pillars about twenty feet apart
+<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_33" id="Page_33" href="#Page_33">[Pg 33]</a></span>
+and roofed over with two huge stone slabs, set so
+as to form a gable roof. Except for its size, it had
+the appearance of the old-fashioned well houses,
+which were once so common in New England.</p>
+
+<p>"It's a tough-looking place, whatever it is," was
+Billie's comment. "I wish the fellows were here."</p>
+
+<p>And then for the first time in more than half an
+hour Billie bethought him of his companions. His
+strange experience with the ape had driven all other
+thoughts out of his mind.</p>
+
+<p>"By George!" he exclaimed aloud, "I wonder how
+the fight with the bandits came out?"</p>
+
+<p>Almost as in answer to his words, there appeared
+upon the edge of the excavation into which he had
+fallen, but upon the opposite side from that on
+which he had taken his slide, ten horsemen, three
+of whom carried across the pommel of their saddles
+the bodies of three men. They halted and surveyed
+the basin critically. Then, single file, they slowly
+descended into the quarry.</p>
+
+<p>Billie recognized them the minute he laid eyes
+upon them. They were the remnant of the bandit
+band, and the bodies carried across the pommels of
+the saddles were three of their wounded companions.</p>
+
+<p>"This is no place for me," commented Billie as
+he kept himself well hidden behind a giant cactus.
+"It reminds me of Ali Baba and the forty thieves.
+I hope I have better luck than Ali Baba."</p>
+
+<p>As though to carry out the trend of Billie's
+<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_34" id="Page_34" href="#Page_34">[Pg 34]</a></span>
+thoughts, the horsemen halted near the ruin of
+the adobe house before mentioned and two of their
+number dismounted and entered. A minute later
+the rest of the band rode into the ruins and disappeared,
+followed by the riderless horses of the two
+dismounted men.</p>
+
+<p>Billie rubbed his eyes.</p>
+
+<p>"I wonder if I'm getting dippy," he muttered.
+"Maybe that crack on the side of my head has made
+me see things."</p>
+
+<p>He sat down to think.</p>
+
+<p>"If I only had some kind of a gun," he mused,
+"I wouldn't feel so everlasting helpless. Confound
+that ape! If I ever see him again I'll break his
+neck."</p>
+
+<p>Then, after a moment's thought: "I don't believe
+the beast would give up the chase. He's likely to
+show up at any minute. Something has to be done."</p>
+
+<p>The boy scanned the edge of the embankment, if
+perchance he might see anything of his persecutor.
+There was nothing in sight and he decided to go
+on a tour of inspection. As quietly as possible he
+stole along the side of the excavation toward the
+spot where the ruin stood, when once more he had
+that sense of being watched.</p>
+
+<p>Turning his head quickly, he saw the ape about
+twenty paces to one side aiming the revolver at him.</p>
+
+<p>Then Billie lost his temper.</p>
+
+<p>"This thing has got to stop," he exclaimed. "I'll
+<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_35" id="Page_35" href="#Page_35">[Pg 35]</a></span>
+be doggoned if I'm going to stand for it any
+longer."</p>
+
+<p>He ran quickly toward the ape, and fell on his
+knees as he had seen the ape do, and raised his
+hands in supplication.</p>
+
+<p>The animal quirked its head and fairly beamed
+with pleasure as it slowly advanced and stood beside
+him.</p>
+
+<p>But its simian smile was quickly turned to surprise,
+for like a flash Billie snatched the weapon
+from its hand and aimed it at the animal's head.</p>
+
+<p>"Now," he said, "you come with me."</p>
+
+<p>The animal made no move.</p>
+
+<p>"We'll see whether you will come or not," said
+Billie, and stooping down he broke off a good-sized
+sprout from a live oak. "Now, march!" and he
+raised the whip.</p>
+
+<p>It was the one thing needed. The beast had evidently
+felt the touch of a whip before, for it raised
+its arm and danced about as though going through
+some circus maneuver.</p>
+
+<p>"The first mystery is solved," laughed Billie.
+"Now for the second one. Come on, Ab," unconsciously
+naming his companion after the hero
+of Stanley Waterloo's famous story.</p>
+
+<p>The ape seemed to know what was wanted and
+the two proceeded slowly and silently toward the
+ruin.</p>
+
+<p>"I've been in a whole lot of queer scrapes," mused
+Billie as he crept along, "but this is surely the queerest&mdash;tramping
+<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_36" id="Page_36" href="#Page_36">[Pg 36]</a></span>
+around with an ape to solve the disappearance
+of ten cutthroats. I hope I wake up
+pretty soon."</p>
+
+<p>But it was no dream, as Billie was soon to discover.</p>
+
+<p>Arriving at the ruined building, Billie crawled
+along by the wall until he came directly under what
+had once been a window. Then, after listening a
+long time and hearing no sound, he ventured to raise
+his head and peep in.</p>
+
+<p>The old ruin was as empty as though there were
+not a living person within fifty miles.</p>
+
+<p>"Great Scott!" gasped the boy. "What do you
+think of that! Now I know I'm dreaming!"</p>
+
+<p>He turned to the ape, waving his whip.</p>
+
+<p>"Here you, Ab," he said, "go in there and see
+what you can find."</p>
+
+<p>He pointed to the window and the animal sprang
+lightly in and a minute later perched itself on one
+of the decaying rafters.</p>
+
+<p>"If there were any one around, they would certainly
+see Ab," reasoned Billie, "and would make
+some noise about it. I guess it's safe to go in."</p>
+
+<p>He crawled around to the door and entered.
+There were the tracks of the horses, but the horses
+had disappeared as completely as though they had
+been swallowed up.</p>
+
+<p>Billie called softly to Ab, who did not see fit to
+obey until he waved his whip. Then the animal
+<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_37" id="Page_37" href="#Page_37">[Pg 37]</a></span>
+sprang lightly to the ground. Billie showed him
+the tracks.</p>
+
+<p>"Where do you suppose they went?" he asked.</p>
+
+<p>Ab blinked his eyes and, for the first time since
+Billie had become acquainted with him, made a noise
+in his throat, much like the voice of a child.</p>
+
+<p>Billie smiled in spite of himself.</p>
+
+<p>"I'm glad you've decided to become sociable," he
+said, "What do you make of this? You look as
+though you could think."</p>
+
+<p>Ab blinked his eyes stupidly and then suddenly
+became alert as though listening.</p>
+
+<p>"What is it?" asked Billie, impressed by the ape's
+attitude.</p>
+
+<p>For a reply Ab sprang through the window and
+made straight for the structure in the middle of the
+quarry. In another instant he was on the roof.</p>
+
+<p>Billie followed as fast as he could and as he
+stepped beneath the roof started back in the utmost
+amazement, for up through what looked like a huge
+well there came the distinct sound of human voices.</p>
+
+<p>For several seconds he stood as one in a spell and
+then he started forward to peer into the well, but
+on a second thought did not.</p>
+
+<p>"I couldn't see anything if I did," he thought,
+"but any one looking up could see me. I'll do better
+by listening."</p>
+
+<p>The words came to him almost as distinctly as
+though he were in the same room with the speakers,
+and there was no longer any doubt that the voices
+were those of the Zapatistas who had attempted to<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_38" id="Page_38" href="#Page_38">[Pg 38]</a></span>
+rob the train.</p>
+
+<p>From their conversation Billie learned the outcome
+of the fight, and he was greatly amused at the
+attempt of the bandits to figure out who had betrayed
+them. Each one had a different theory, but
+all agreed that there must have been a traitor in
+the band. It was all the lad could do to prevent
+himself from calling out to them, just to see what
+effect his words would have.</p>
+
+<p>After discovering from the conversation that the
+bandits felt themselves perfectly secure where they
+were and that they were likely to stay there for
+some time, he finally decided to get back to the railroad
+and thence to Pachuca and give the alarm.</p>
+
+<p>Acting upon the decision, he made his way across
+the basin to where he had slid down the embankment
+and slowly and laboriously climbed to the top, followed
+by Ab.</p>
+
+<p>Retracing his steps, he soon reached the railroad
+and looking down the track toward Pachuca gave
+a shout of delight as he saw his three chums approaching,
+leading a fourth horse between them.</p>
+
+<p>"Just in time," he said, as they drew near enough
+to exchange greetings.</p>
+
+<p>"Just in time for what?" queried the others as
+one.</p>
+
+<p>"To capture the bandits that you let escape."</p>
+
+<p>"How do you know that we let any escape?"
+asked Adrian.</p>
+
+<p>"I'm a mind reader."<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_39" id="Page_39" href="#Page_39">[Pg 39]</a></span></p>
+
+<p>The other three looked incredulous.</p>
+
+<p>"Oh, it's a fact," declared Billie. "I can tell you
+all about the fight just as well as though I had been
+there," and he proceeded to prove his words.</p>
+
+<p>"Some one told you," said Adrian.</p>
+
+<p>"Sure," laughed Billie, thoroughly enjoying the
+perplexity of his companions. "My friend Ab.
+Come here, old man, and be introduced," and Billie
+waved his whip, which he still carried.</p>
+
+<p>With a little cry the ape sprang to his side, an act
+which only added to the amazement of the others.</p>
+
+<p>"Allow me," said Billie with mock gravity, "to
+introduce my friend Mr. Ab from No-man's-land.
+Ab, these are the rest of the Broncho Rider Boys.
+How would you like to join the company?"</p>
+
+<p>Ab scratched his ear and looked wise.</p>
+
+<p>"Oh, come," interrupted Donald. "Tell us what's
+up and what we must do to capture the rest of this
+band of cutthroats."</p>
+
+<p>Thinking that he had carried the joke far enough,
+and realizing also that he might be wasting valuable
+time, Billie related his adventure, describing the
+place he had discovered.</p>
+
+<p>"It is the Rosario viejo," said Pedro, as soon as
+Billie had finished his story.</p>
+
+<p>"What's that?" asked Billie.</p>
+
+<p>"An abandoned mine. It is called the old Rosario
+to distinguish it from the new Rosario, which is
+now one of the most valuable mines in this region.
+<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_40" id="Page_40" href="#Page_40">[Pg 40]</a></span>
+The station at Pitahaya was built especially to
+serve it."</p>
+
+<p>"I see," said Billie. "Where is the new mine?"</p>
+
+<p>"Down there," and Pedro pointed to a trail leading
+in the opposite direction. "It is just about as
+far from the station on that side of the railroad
+as the old Rosario is on this."</p>
+
+<p>"Don't you think we had better summon some assistance
+from the mine workers?" asked Adrian.</p>
+
+<p>"They may be in cahoots with the bandits,"
+laughed Donald. "I have lost my confidence in
+about every one in this bandit-ridden land."</p>
+
+<p>"I don't blame you," said Pedro, "and I hope the
+day will soon come when all this trouble will be
+over."</p>
+
+<p>"Then you agree with me that we should tackle
+the bandits alone, do you?" asked Donald.</p>
+
+<p>"It is the only safe way."</p>
+
+<p>"All right, then," exclaimed Billie. "Let's be off.
+If we use a little strategy, I'm sure we shall succeed."</p>
+
+<p>He turned to mount the horse, which a minute
+before had been standing a few feet away, but it
+was gone.</p>
+
+<p>"Where's my horse?" he cried.</p>
+
+<p>The others turned in surprise.</p>
+
+<p>"It certainly was here a minute ago," declared
+Adrian.</p>
+
+<p>"Then it can't be very far away," insisted Donald.</p>
+
+<p>"It's so far I can't see it," replied Billie.</p>
+
+<p>"There it goes!" shouted Pedro, who had jumped<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_41" id="Page_41" href="#Page_41">[Pg 41]</a></span>
+his mount across the track as soon as he heard Billie's
+cry.</p>
+
+<p>The others looked in the direction indicated, and
+sure enough, there went the horse about a quarter
+of a mile away on a dead run and on its back was
+Billie's late acquaintance, Ab.</p>
+
+<p>"By George," exclaimed Billie angrily as he
+snatched a rifle from Donald's holster, "I've had
+enough of that ape. I'll put a stop to his foolishness,"
+and he leveled the rifle.</p>
+
+<p>But ere he could press the trigger, there was a report
+from another quarter and the horse and its
+rider hit the dust.</p>
+
+
+
+<hr style="width: 65%;" />
+<h2><a name="CHAPTER_V" id="CHAPTER_V"></a>CHAPTER V.</h2>
+
+<h3>WHEN THE OLD WAS NEW.</h3>
+
+
+<p>A cry of astonishment went up from the quartette
+and then they stood silent to see what would
+be the next move.</p>
+
+<p>They did not have long to wait, for presently a
+tall, gaunt figure strode out of the brambles some
+yards from the fallen horse and uttered a hoarse
+shout, upon which Ab sprang from the spot where
+he had fallen and ran toward the newcomer, giving
+vent to shrill cries as he ran.</p>
+
+<p>"That must be his master," muttered Billie. "I'm<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_42" id="Page_42" href="#Page_42">[Pg 42]</a></span>
+glad I didn't shoot the little beggar."</p>
+
+<p>"I'm more interested in the master than in the
+monkey," said Donald. "He is evidently not a
+Mexican. Who and what do you suppose he is?"</p>
+
+<p>"An animal trainer from a circus," replied Adrian.</p>
+
+<p>"There are no circuses in this part of the world,"
+commented Billie.</p>
+
+<p>"If he only had a hand organ instead of a gun,
+I could place him," laughed Donald. "What do you
+make out of him, Pedro?"</p>
+
+<p>"It's a <i>saltimbanco</i>."</p>
+
+<p>"What is that?"</p>
+
+<p>"A man who goes about making people laugh."</p>
+
+<p>"Oh!" from Adrian. "You mean a mountebank?"</p>
+
+<p>"I think so."</p>
+
+<p>"And this chap," ventured Billie, "isn't satisfied
+with making a monkey of himself, but carries a
+real one with him."</p>
+
+<p>Pedro laughed. "That seems to be it."</p>
+
+<p>"I'm sorry he killed the horse," said Donald.
+"We need him."</p>
+
+<p>"Perhaps he didn't," suggested Adrian. "Suppose
+we ride over and see."</p>
+
+<p>Suiting the action to the word, the boys rode out
+into the open, much to the newcomer's surprise and
+consternation.</p>
+
+<p>"Se&ntilde;ors," he exclaimed, as he came running
+<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_43" id="Page_43" href="#Page_43">[Pg 43]</a></span>
+toward them, "I am sorry I had to hurt your horse;
+but I couldn't lose my brother."</p>
+
+<p>"Your what?" asked Billie.</p>
+
+<p>"My brother. My little brother. Could I, Ambrosio?"
+and he patted the ape on the cheek.</p>
+
+<p>"What do you call him?" asked Donald.</p>
+
+<p>"I call him Ambrosio because he is so sweet."</p>
+
+<p>"Bah!" exclaimed Billie. "I called him Ab, but
+he ought to be named Diabolo. But how about the
+horse?"</p>
+
+<p>"I am afraid I have rendered him quite useless
+for the present, Se&ntilde;or. I may have broken his leg."</p>
+
+<p>An examination of the fallen animal revealed the
+fact that while the leg was not splintered, it was so
+badly injured that the animal was quite useless.</p>
+
+<p>"Have you far to go, Se&ntilde;ors?" queried the mountebank.</p>
+
+<p>"Only as far as the Rosario viejo for the present,"
+answered Adrian. "After that&mdash;&mdash;"</p>
+
+<p>"After that," interrupted Billie, "we may not
+want to go anywhere."</p>
+
+<p>The mountebank looked at Billie questioningly.</p>
+
+<p>"That's what I mean," reiterated Billie. "We
+are going there to capture a band of cutthroats, but
+we may have a fight."</p>
+
+<p>The man made a grimace, which was intended for
+a smile.</p>
+
+<p>"I understand. Can I be of any service?"</p>
+
+<p>Donald eyed him suspiciously.</p>
+
+<p>"What do you think?" he asked.</p>
+
+<p>"You may have noticed how I stopped the runaway,"<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_44" id="Page_44" href="#Page_44">[Pg 44]</a></span>
+he remarked.</p>
+
+<p>"Very neatly."</p>
+
+<p>"Sure," from Billie. "It was a short stop."</p>
+
+<p>"I perceive that you are an American. I am
+also a fan."</p>
+
+<p>"What!" from the three Americans.</p>
+
+<p>"True. I am even worse. I formerly shot the
+pill in one of the bush leagues. I aspired to a place
+in the box of one of the major league clubs, but
+instead I joined the Madero revolution. I had all
+the sport I wanted and finding my brother in this
+forsaken land, I joined him as a public entertainer.
+Shall we give you a sample of our performance?"</p>
+
+<p>"Not now," from Donald. "Let's go and round
+up this bunch of revolutionists first."</p>
+
+<p>"But why?" queried the mountebank. "To-morrow
+they may be the government."</p>
+
+<p>The boys looked at each other with an expression
+that said as plainly as words: "True! We never
+thought of that."</p>
+
+<p>"Now, I have a better plan," continued the mountebank.
+"Let's go and entertain the revolutionists.
+Let's be neutral."</p>
+
+<p>"I'm afraid we are already belligerents," laughed
+Adrian. "We have had one brush with them."</p>
+
+<p>The mountebank heaved a sigh.</p>
+
+<p>"Of course, if you have declared war, we shall
+have to fight to a finish, unless," with a grin, "we
+can intrench."</p>
+
+<p>"It is they who are intrenched," explained Billie.<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_45" id="Page_45" href="#Page_45">[Pg 45]</a></span>
+"They are at the bottom of the old mine, although
+I don't know how they got there."</p>
+
+<p>"So," laughed the mountebank. "Suppose we go
+and find out."</p>
+
+<p>Arrived at the shaft house, for that is what the
+gable-roofed building was, the boys and their new-found
+friend approached and listened to the sound
+of voices which still arose to the top of the shaft.</p>
+
+<p>Evidently considering themselves free and safe,
+the bandits were preparing their evening meal, for
+it was now well on toward sunset. They were singing
+and joking as though they had not just lost
+half or two-thirds their number.</p>
+
+<p>From a few remarks made now and then, it appeared
+that they proposed on the following day to
+recruit the band up to its former strength.</p>
+
+<p>"That is the thing we must prevent," declared
+Donald.</p>
+
+<p>"A very easy thing," said the mountebank, "if we
+had enough provisions to remain here for twenty-four
+hours, or more."</p>
+
+<p>"How so?" asked Billie.</p>
+
+<p>"Why, they will doubtless send out two or three
+to do the recruiting. We can capture them as they
+leave the ruins."</p>
+
+<p>Billie glanced at the man from under his broad-rimmed
+sombrero as he asked: "How did you know
+they came out through the ruins?"</p>
+
+<p>The mountebank smiled.</p>
+
+<p>"Now, don't go to mistrusting me, young fellow,<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_46" id="Page_46" href="#Page_46">[Pg 46]</a></span>
+for I'm on the level. But I've been in this place
+before, and I know that the only way to where your
+friends down there are camping is through the
+ruins."</p>
+
+<p>"Have you ever been down there?"</p>
+
+<p>"Yes. They are only about sixty feet below the
+ground, in a chamber which was originally a gallery
+in the mine. The shaft over which this house
+is built is over two hundred feet deep."</p>
+
+<p>"I'd like to explore it," remarked Adrian.</p>
+
+<p>"Do you think you have the nerve?" and the
+stranger bent upon him a penetrating gaze.</p>
+
+<p>Billie laughed softly.</p>
+
+<p>"Say, stranger," he finally said. "I guess you
+never heard of the Broncho Rider Boys. We've
+got the nerve to do anything that any other human
+being dare do."</p>
+
+<p>"Then we'll get rid of these bandits in short notice,"
+declared the mountebank emphatically. "You
+are just the chaps I have been looking for."</p>
+
+<p>He leaned over the mouth of the shaft and gave
+a shrill whistle.</p>
+
+<p>In an instant all was silent below.</p>
+
+<p>Half a minute later he repeated the whistle thrice.</p>
+
+<p>There was a clatter below of arms and accoutrements.</p>
+
+<p>"Over behind those big cactus with you, quick,"
+was the next command. "If you insist on fighting
+<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_47" id="Page_47" href="#Page_47">[Pg 47]</a></span>
+these men later, you can. Now let's get rid of
+them."</p>
+
+<p>For just a moment the boys hesitated, but there
+was something in the man's manner that seemed to
+force obedience and they obeyed.</p>
+
+<p>They were not a moment too soon, for they had
+no more than secreted themselves than the back wall
+of the ruin flew open and the men rode out. Of
+those who had been at the mouth of the shaft only
+a few moments before, only the mountebank with
+his ape was in sight.</p>
+
+<p>"What is it?" asked one of the band, riding up
+to him.</p>
+
+<p>"Guard the track at the summit. Let no train
+pass, even if you have to tear up the track."</p>
+
+<p>"By whose order?"</p>
+
+<p>The mountebank made a mysterious sign with
+his left hand.</p>
+
+<p>"<i>Bueno!</i>" from the horseman. "Close up the
+doors and care for the wounded," and putting spurs
+to his horse, he led the bandits from the basin.</p>
+
+<p>As soon as they were out of sight, the mountebank
+summoned the boys to the shaft house by a
+wave of his hand.</p>
+
+<p>"Now," he said, "you'll have a chance to test
+your nerve, and we must work rapidly to get where
+we wish to go before dark."</p>
+
+<p>He took from a crude knapsack which he wore
+upon his shoulders a coil of cord about half the size
+of a lead pencil, but evidently of much strength.
+<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_48" id="Page_48" href="#Page_48">[Pg 48]</a></span>
+Then seizing the ape, he fastened one end of the
+cord to the belt about the animal's body, and despite
+its unwillingness to be thus treated began to lower it
+into the shaft.</p>
+
+<p>Totally unable to account for his actions, the boys
+stood speechless, watching the operations.</p>
+
+<p>After some minutes, the cord slackened.</p>
+
+<p>"He's reached the bottom," was the information
+vouchsafed. Then a moment later: "Help me to
+pull him up, one of you."</p>
+
+<p>Billie hastened to lend a hand and in a short time
+the head of the ape appeared above the edge of the
+shaft. In his hand he held one end of a good-sized
+rope, which the mountebank took and tied around
+one of the stone pillars which supported the roof.</p>
+
+<p>"Now, then," he said, "we are ready to descend
+into the old mine. Which one of you will go first?"</p>
+
+<p>The boys looked at each other, but there was no
+reply until Donald asked:</p>
+
+<p>"Why should we go down at all?"</p>
+
+<p>"Why," was the somewhat quizzical reply, "to
+show your nerve."</p>
+
+<p>"Unless there is some good reason other than
+that, there are plenty of ways to show our nerve
+without lowering ourselves to the bottom of an
+old mine."</p>
+
+<p>"There is a good reason," was the reply.</p>
+
+<p>"Then tell us. If it is good, there can be no objection."</p>
+
+<p>"The object of this descent," said the stranger
+<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_49" id="Page_49" href="#Page_49">[Pg 49]</a></span>
+calmly, "is to see if we cannot solve the mystery of
+the abandonment of the mine."</p>
+
+<p>"Have you ever been down?" asked Billie.</p>
+
+<p>"Often."</p>
+
+<p>"There is no foul gas at the bottom?"</p>
+
+<p>"Not now, as you may see by the condition of
+Ambrosio, who has been clear to the bottom."</p>
+
+<p>"Then I am willing to be the first to descend;
+but first I must know more about you than I do."</p>
+
+<p>"What difference does that make? You will have
+three friends here with me. They are all armed and
+I can see they know how to use their weapons. I
+cannot possibly harm you. I will be the third to
+descend. I assure you that the descent and the ascent
+are comparatively easy for athletic young chaps,
+as the sides of the shaft are very uneven. By the
+aid of this rope you can come up almost as easily
+as you would climb a ladder. The adventure is well
+worth your while."</p>
+
+<p>"And you won't tell us who you are?"</p>
+
+<p>"I have already told you. I am an American soldier
+of fortune. My name, if that means anything
+to you, is Francis Strong, and I have assumed this
+character of a mountebank solely for the purpose
+of going about the country without being molested.
+What I hope to do, is of no interest to any one but
+myself."</p>
+
+<p>It was a straightforward statement and the boys
+saw no reason to doubt its truthfulness.</p>
+
+<p>"All right, then," exclaimed Billie. "Here goes!"</p>
+
+<p>He grasped the rope and lowered himself over<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_50" id="Page_50" href="#Page_50">[Pg 50]</a></span>
+the side. It was as Strong had said and in a very
+few minutes he found himself at the bottom. He
+could see nothing except the dim light at the mouth
+of the shaft.</p>
+
+<p>Giving the rope a vigorous shake, as had been
+agreed upon, he saw another figure begin to descend,
+and in a short time Pedro stood beside him. Strong
+was next to descend, then came Ambrosio, and after
+him Adrian and Donald in the order named&mdash;Donald
+having determined to be the last, that he might
+be sure that everything was safe above ground.</p>
+
+<p>"I should have given you this," was Strong's
+first remark upon alighting at Billie's side, and he
+drew from his pocket an electric torch. "But it
+slipped my mind."</p>
+
+<p>"We all have them in our trunk in the City of
+Mexico," replied Billie, "but I doubt if either of us
+has one with him."</p>
+
+<p>"This is sufficient, for I shall light some torches
+I have prepared as soon as we are ready for our
+work."</p>
+
+<p>When Donald had descended, Strong led the way
+through a lateral about thirty or forty feet, at the
+end of which another vertical shaft had been sunk.
+Around the mouth of this Strong had set a number
+of torches, which he now proceeded to light. By
+their glare it was possible to see part way down the
+hole.</p>
+
+<p>"The thing I hope to find," explained Strong, "is<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_51" id="Page_51" href="#Page_51">[Pg 51]</a></span>
+at the bottom of that hole, if it exists at all."</p>
+
+<p>"What is that?" asked Billie.</p>
+
+<p>"I think I can best answer your question," was
+the reply, "by reading you a translation of a paper
+which is said to have been found in the shaft above,
+where the bandits have made their rendezvous. How
+it came into my possession, matters not. I believe
+there are now enough of us here to prove or disprove
+its truthfulness, unless some one has been
+here before us."</p>
+
+<p>Seating himself on a jutting boulder, Strong took
+from his pocket a paper, which he read as follows
+under the flickering torchlight:</p>
+
+<div class='blockquot'>
+
+<p>"Being about to leave this world, I desire to obtain
+forgiveness for the great and only crime of my
+life, hence this confession.</p>
+
+<p>"There were five of us. Names do not matter.
+They were my fellow workmen. We had been entrusted
+with the output of the Rosario for the year
+and had promised to guard it with our lives. We
+heard the soldiers of Maximilian coming. We were
+not enough to withstand them. We determined to
+hide the treasure in the western shaft. We carried
+it to the edge and threw it in. My four companions
+went down to cover it over with dirt, which I
+brought from the other shaft and gave them, shovel
+by shovel. A mad idea seized me. If they were
+dead, no one but I would know the hiding place of
+<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_52" id="Page_52" href="#Page_52">[Pg 52]</a></span>
+the treasure. I would kill them; but how? I
+glanced about. Great pieces of rock were on every
+hand. Without stopping to consider the foulness
+of the deed I rolled a huge piece to the mouth of
+the shaft and pushed it in. There was a cry of
+terror and I heard a voice call out to know what had
+happened. I said a piece of rock had broken loose
+and asked what damage it had done. Only one replied.
+The others had been stricken down. Madly
+I pushed over another rock and then another and
+still another. Then there was silence and I fled.
+The soldiers found me unconscious at the bottom of
+the shaft. Ere I became conscious, Maximilian was
+no more. When I returned hither, the mine had
+been abandoned. Here I have lived for years alone
+with my misery. Now I die. May God forgive me.</p>
+
+<p class="letter"><span class="smcap">Jos&eacute; Rodriguez.</span></p></div>
+
+<p><br /></p>
+
+<hr style="width: 65%;" />
+<h2><a name="CHAPTER_VI" id="CHAPTER_VI"></a>CHAPTER VI.</h2>
+
+<h3>A FEARFUL EXPERIENCE.</h3>
+
+
+<p>"Well?" queried Donald when Strong had finished
+reading the paper, "what are we going to do
+about it?"</p>
+
+<p>"We are going to find out, if we can, whether
+Jos&eacute; Rodriguez told the truth, and if he did, whether
+any one else has tried to prove it."</p>
+
+<p>"What do you think of it, Pedro?" asked Billie,
+indicating the opening at their feet.</p>
+
+<p>"Exactly."<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_53" id="Page_53" href="#Page_53">[Pg 53]</a></span></p>
+
+<p>"Have you ever been down in it?" asked Adrian
+of Strong.</p>
+
+<p>"No! I did not feel equal to the task and I was
+afraid to ask help of any of these cutthroats."</p>
+
+<p>"What do you think of it, Pedro?" asked Billie,
+turning to the Mexican lad, who had made no comment
+whatever.</p>
+
+<p>"It's an old tale," was the reply, "this story of
+the Rosario viejo. I have heard it many times and
+I presume this shaft has been explored by every
+prospector in this section. In my opinion it is a
+huge hoax."</p>
+
+<p>At Pedro's words, Strong's face became ashen.</p>
+
+<p>"Are you telling the truth?" he asked hoarsely.</p>
+
+<p>"Indeed I am. My father knows of several who
+have searched the place and nothing has ever been
+found."</p>
+
+<p>Strong drew a long breath and passed his hand
+over his face.</p>
+
+<p>"I have believed it true," he finally said, "ever
+since I first came into possession of this paper.
+There is something about it that rings true and I
+have counted upon finding sufficient wealth to enable
+me to achieve a long cherished plan. If what
+you say," turning to Pedro, "is true, my chance of
+attaining my ambition is very slim."</p>
+
+<p>"I'm sorry, sir, but if I had known for certain
+what your object was in coming down here I might
+<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_54" id="Page_54" href="#Page_54">[Pg 54]</a></span>
+have saved you the trouble. Isn't there any other
+way you might obtain the money you wish?"</p>
+
+<p>"If there is, I don't know it."</p>
+
+<p>"Pedro may be right," spoke up Billie suddenly,
+"but I am in favor of making an inspection of our
+own, now that we are here. What do you say,
+Don?"</p>
+
+<p>"I'm with you." Then to Strong: "How are we
+to get to the bottom?"</p>
+
+<p>Strong reached over and from behind a nearby
+boulder produced another bundle of rope.</p>
+
+<p>"I had intended making a rope ladder," he said.</p>
+
+<p>"All right, then," from Donald, "a rope ladder it
+shall be."</p>
+
+<p>The boys set to work and in the course of an
+hour had made a rope ladder more than fifty feet
+in length. Lowering it into the shaft, it seemed to
+reach to the bottom and Billie started to go down,
+but Strong prevented him.</p>
+
+<p>"I shall go first," he said. "If there is any danger
+from poisonous gas, or from reptiles, I shall take
+the risk. You boys have parents and homes. I
+have no one. If I should suffer any mishap, do not
+attempt to rescue me. It would not be worth while."</p>
+
+<p>"Nothing will happen," declared Adrian. "I have
+a hunch and my hunches are usually right."</p>
+
+<p>The rope having been properly fastened and
+warded off the side by an ingenious arrangement of
+several large rocks, Strong began his descent. In
+his left hand he carried a flaming torch and Donald
+<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_55" id="Page_55" href="#Page_55">[Pg 55]</a></span>
+leaned over the edge, looking down, with rifle
+sighted, to fire upon any reptile which might be
+brought to light by the torch's ruddy glare.</p>
+
+<p>Step by step Strong went down, stopping every
+now and then to hold his torch below him, if perchance
+it might come into contact with fire damp or
+any other noxious gas.</p>
+
+<p>He had descended at least three-fourths of the
+way, when, as he swung his torch below, he uttered
+a cry that was almost a shriek and the torch fell
+from his hand.</p>
+
+<p>At the same instant Donald gave vent to a loud
+exclamation and his rifle cracked.</p>
+
+<p>"Hold on," he cried as he arose from the ground,
+"as you value your life, don't lose your hold."</p>
+
+<p>"What is it?" asked the others in one voice.</p>
+
+<p>"Snakes! Dozens of them," replied Donald.
+"Climb up, Strong, as fast as you can."</p>
+
+<p>"All right," came a feeble reply, followed almost
+immediately by a louder call of "Help!"</p>
+
+<p>"Hold fast," called Donald. "I'm coming."</p>
+
+<p>But before he could turn to step down the ladder,
+a chattering figure sprang past him and shot down
+the rope.</p>
+
+<p>It was the ape. He had heard his master's call
+and had gone to his assistance.</p>
+
+<p>A moment later came a joyful cry that told as
+plainly as words that Ambrosio had reached his master
+in time.</p>
+
+<p>"Are you all right now?" called Donald.</p>
+
+<p>"Yes. I'll be up in a minute. Good old boy,"<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_56" id="Page_56" href="#Page_56">[Pg 56]</a></span>
+the last remark evidently addressed to the ape.</p>
+
+<p>When Strong's head appeared above the edge of
+the shaft a couple of minutes later he was as pale as
+a ghost and when he at length came into the full
+light of the torches, it was seen that his hair was as
+white as snow. The fright had completely changed
+its color.</p>
+
+<p>"Let's get out of here," he gasped as soon as he
+was helped to his feet. "I wouldn't go down into
+that place again for all the gold and silver in the
+world."</p>
+
+<p>"It was pretty rough for sure," admitted Donald.
+"I just caught a glimpse as the torch fell among
+them, but it was so quickly extinguished by the
+wriggling mass I only shot once for fear of hitting
+you."</p>
+
+<p>"It was the darkness that frightened me," Strong
+explained feebly. "If I hadn't let go my torch to
+hold on with both hands, I don't think I would have
+minded so much. But the darkness hid what was
+below and it just seemed as though they were right
+after me. I'd have been a goner sure if it hadn't
+been for good old Ambrosio," and he laid his hand
+affectionately on the ape's head.</p>
+
+<p>"Do you think you'll be able to climb out of the
+mine?" asked Billie as they reached the main shaft.</p>
+
+<p>"Yes, with Ambrosio's aid; but I'm going out
+first. I don't think I have nerve enough left right
+now to be the last out."</p>
+
+<p>The exit from the mine was much slower than the<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_57" id="Page_57" href="#Page_57">[Pg 57]</a></span>
+descent had been, but in the course of an hour they
+were all once more out under the stars.</p>
+
+<p>"What about the bandits?" queried Billie.</p>
+
+<p>"Take my advice," said Strong, "and let them
+alone. This is none of your quarrel. If the Mexicans
+want to fight among themselves, let them. It's
+a family quarrel and you will only make matters
+worse by interfering. The time may come when
+these very men may prove your best friends."</p>
+
+<p>"That's the advice I gave when we first discovered
+them to-day. I wish now we had all followed
+it."</p>
+
+<p>"If we are not going to do anything," declared
+Adrian, "the quicker we get out of here the better."</p>
+
+<p>"I consider that more good advice," laughed Billie,
+"especially as I am just reminded that I haven't
+had a bite to eat since noon. But I have no horse."</p>
+
+<p>"That's easily remedied," replied Strong.</p>
+
+<p>He went into the old ruin and in a few minutes
+returned with a very good animal, all saddled and
+bridled.</p>
+
+<p>"It will not be missed," he said. "Now ride for
+your lives. Take the trail to the left and don't let
+moonlight catch you within five miles of here."</p>
+
+<p>"Aren't you coming with us?" asked Donald.</p>
+
+<p>"No! I am better off here."</p>
+
+<p>"How will you account for your white hair?"</p>
+
+<p>"I'll tell them it is a charm. They'll believe it
+<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_58" id="Page_58" href="#Page_58">[Pg 58]</a></span>
+and it will make me that much more valuable. Now
+go!"</p>
+
+<p>Without wasting more words the boys put spurs
+to their horses and were soon out of the basin and
+on their way to Pachuca.</p>
+
+<p>"It seems like a year since we came down here,"
+remarked Adrian to Billie as they galloped along.</p>
+
+<p>"It sure does," was the reply as Billie rubbed his
+stomach suggestively. "I'll never go out again as
+long as I'm in this revolutionary republic without a
+haversack full of grub."</p>
+
+<p>"Who said grub?" called back Donald.</p>
+
+<p>"What a question," laughed Adrian. "Who is it
+that's always hungry? It's all he thinks about."</p>
+
+<p>"Oh, it is, eh?" from Billie. "Well, I'm thinking
+about something else now. There's the moon coming
+up over the valley and we're not three miles from
+the old Rosario. We'd better keep our eyes peeled
+and see that our shooting irons are in shape. We
+may have to fight our way home even yet."</p>
+
+<p>As though to verify the prediction there appeared
+at the moment the figure of a solitary horseman silhouetted
+against the rising moon.</p>
+
+<p>"You're a prophet of evil all right," said Adrian.
+"Now what?"</p>
+
+<p>"Just keep on riding."</p>
+
+<p>"But that chap is right in our way."</p>
+
+<p>"Then ride him down. He'll be worse scared than
+we are."</p>
+
+<p>The advice seemed good and the boys spurred<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_59" id="Page_59" href="#Page_59">[Pg 59]</a></span>
+forward.</p>
+
+<p>"If you think he means us any harm," Donald
+remarked, "I might take a shot at him."</p>
+
+<p>"I don't believe he does."</p>
+
+<p>Again Billie proved a good prophet as the rider
+rode directly toward them, waving his hat in his
+hand.</p>
+
+<p>"It's Tony," exclaimed Pedro as the rider approached
+a little nearer.</p>
+
+<p>Tony was one of Gen. Sanchez' servants.</p>
+
+<p>"Why, so it is," laughed Donald. "I suppose he
+is out looking for us."</p>
+
+<p>Which was exactly the case. The news of the
+fight had reached Pachuca along with the part the
+boys had played in saving the bullion, and Pedro's
+father had heard it along with the others.</p>
+
+<p>Later, word had been brought that one of the boys
+was missing and the others had gone to look for
+him. When none of them returned after all these
+hours, Gen. Sanchez had organized a searching
+party, of which Tony proved to be the advance
+guard.</p>
+
+<p>A few minutes later, several horsemen dashed up
+and the boys were given a rousing reception.</p>
+
+<p>"The <i>Jefe politico</i> is waiting to greet you," Tony
+told the boys.</p>
+
+<p>The jefe politico is the mayor.</p>
+
+<p>Billie smiled broadly and once more rubbed his
+stomach.</p>
+
+<p>"This begins to look encouraging," he remarked<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_60" id="Page_60" href="#Page_60">[Pg 60]</a></span>
+to Pedro. "I think I can taste the good things
+already."</p>
+
+<p>Half an hour later the boys reached the city and
+were given a cheer as they passed through the main
+street and up to Gen. Sanchez' home, which was
+located half a block from the plaza. And in another
+ten minutes Billie was facing the mayor over a plate
+of steaming soup, while a mozo stood at his back
+waiting to serve the leg of a twenty-five pound turkey.
+Raising his eyes from the table, he caught
+sight of what was coming and gave Donald, who
+sat next to him, a dig in the ribs with his elbow.</p>
+
+<p>"How's this for a prophet of evil?" he asked.</p>
+
+<p>Donald took a look at the great bird which was
+rapidly falling into pieces under Gen. Sanchez' skillful
+hand, and remarked with a wink:</p>
+
+<p>"Great!"</p>
+
+
+
+<hr style="width: 65%;" />
+<h2><a name="CHAPTER_VII" id="CHAPTER_VII"></a>CHAPTER VII.</h2>
+
+<h3>THE INSULT TO THE FLAG.</h3>
+
+
+<p>A week later, or, to be more exact, on April 10,
+1914, the Broncho Rider Boys and their friend
+Pedro were back in the City of Mexico. During the
+two weeks they had been at Pachuca, many changes
+had taken place and on the morning in question
+they had just finished their coffee in the breakfast
+<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_61" id="Page_61" href="#Page_61">[Pg 61]</a></span>
+room when Guadalupe, Pedro's sister, brought in
+the morning paper.</p>
+
+<p>"What's the news?" asked Adrian.</p>
+
+<p>Guadalupe glanced at the paper and hid it behind
+her back without making any reply.</p>
+
+<p>"Why, Sister!" exclaimed Pedro with all the dignity
+of his sixteen years. "How can you be so
+rude?"</p>
+
+<p>"She's only joking," laughed Billie, who was always
+found on Guadalupe's side when any argument
+took place. "Come, tell us! What is it?"</p>
+
+<p>Guadalupe shook her head.</p>
+
+<p>"Oh, I can't," she replied in a pained voice.</p>
+
+<p>"Why not?" from Billie.</p>
+
+<p>"It says we are going to have war with the United
+States and I don't believe it."</p>
+
+<p>"Of course you don't," replied Billie. "Neither
+does any one else."</p>
+
+<p>"Let me see," said Pedro sternly.</p>
+
+<p>Slowly the girl handed her brother the paper.</p>
+
+<p>He opened it and read.</p>
+
+<p>"A party of American marines was arrested in
+Tampico yesterday for landing on Mexican soil with
+arms in their hands. They were marched through
+the streets under a heavy guard and lodged in jail.
+After a parley with the American Admiral, Mayo,
+the commandant of the city finally released them
+upon the assurance of the Admiral that it should not
+occur again."</p>
+
+<p>"Well, if it was only a mistake, that doesn't mean
+<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_62" id="Page_62" href="#Page_62">[Pg 62]</a></span>
+war," laughed Billie, but Donald's face took on a
+more serious look.</p>
+
+<p>"That isn't all," said Pedro.</p>
+
+<p>"Well," from Billie, "let's have the rest of it."</p>
+
+<p>"The American Admiral has now declared that
+the men did not land on Mexican soil with arms in
+their hands, but that they were in their boat at the
+pier when arrested. He claims that they were taken
+from under the American flag&mdash;&mdash;"</p>
+
+<p>"What?" almost shouted Billie, springing to his
+feet. "Taken from under the American flag?
+Well, I'll bet that will mean war&mdash;unless," he added
+after a brief pause, "Gen. Huerta apologizes."</p>
+
+<p>"Why should he apologize?" asked Pedro.</p>
+
+<p>"For insulting the American flag."</p>
+
+<p>"That's what the American Admiral says," interrupted
+Guadalupe, "and he threatens to fire on the
+city."</p>
+
+<p>"And I'll bet he'll do it," said Adrian.</p>
+
+<p>"If he does we'll sink his ships," said Pedro.</p>
+
+<p>"What with?" asked Billie sarcastically. "Why,
+Admiral Mayo could blow Tampico out of the
+water."</p>
+
+<p>"If he does, the Mexicans will march on Washington,"
+from Pedro.</p>
+
+<p>"What?" from Donald. "March on Washington?
+Why, Huerta can't hardly keep Carranza out of the
+City of Mexico."</p>
+
+<p>"But if your admiral fires on Tampico, Carranza
+will help Gen. Huerta," declared Pedro.</p>
+
+<p>"Do you really think so?" asked Adrian.<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_63" id="Page_63" href="#Page_63">[Pg 63]</a></span></p>
+
+<p>"I know it. We may have our little family troubles
+down here in Mexico, but if the United States
+should interfere, we'd all turn in and fight her."</p>
+
+<p>Billie was about to reply when Gen. Sanchez entered
+the room.</p>
+
+<p>"I see you have been reading the news," he said
+calmly.</p>
+
+<p>"And discussing it too," said Donald.</p>
+
+<p>"Which we had better not at present," replied
+the General. "You boys are our guests and as long
+as you are, you are our friends; but I am afraid
+there is serious trouble coming and I think it will
+be much better if you make arrangements at once to
+return to the United States. As you know, I am not
+a favorite with the present administration and I
+might not be able to protect you."</p>
+
+<p>"We can ask the protection of the American Ambassador,"
+said Donald.</p>
+
+<p>Gen. Sanchez smiled kindly.</p>
+
+<p>"The American Ambassador may be asked to
+leave."</p>
+
+<p>The boys looked serious.</p>
+
+<p>"Do you really think it is as bad as that?" asked
+Adrian.</p>
+
+<p>"I fear so. Later dispatches from Tampico state
+that the American Admiral has demanded a salute
+of twenty-one guns to the American flag. I know
+Gen. Huerta well enough to know that he will never
+order the salute."</p>
+
+<p>"Then what will happen?" asked Donald.<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_64" id="Page_64" href="#Page_64">[Pg 64]</a></span></p>
+
+<p>"No one can say. I understand that the American
+government has placed the matter in the hands of
+Admiral Fletcher, the ranking officer, who is in
+charge of the Atlantic fleet off Vera Cruz."</p>
+
+<p>"Do you think we should go at once?" queried
+Billie.</p>
+
+<p>"Yes, I think it would be better. I will make
+such arrangements as I can for your transportation
+to Vera Cruz. In the meantime you had better go
+and register yourselves at the United States Embassy.
+I am never sure of Gen. Huerta."</p>
+
+<p>Without further discussion the boys prepared to
+take Gen. Sanchez' advice, and, donning their hats,
+started for the embassy, leaving Pedro much chagrined
+and Guadalupe in tears.</p>
+
+<p>"I can't see why there has to be war!" she declared.
+"Why can't men behave themselves?"</p>
+
+<p>"What do girls know about war?" asked Pedro.</p>
+
+<p>"They know it's terrible and takes their fathers
+and brothers, that's what they know, and they wish
+they didn't have to know that."</p>
+
+<p>Pedro made no reply, but went to his room, where
+he selected from among his most cherished belongings
+a gift for each of his guests&mdash;three beautiful
+opals&mdash;and laid them upon their respective suit
+cases.</p>
+
+<p>When the Broncho Rider Boys arrived at the embassy
+they found a large crowd of Americans already
+assembled. Word had been circulated that it
+would be wise for all of them to leave Mexico and<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_65" id="Page_65" href="#Page_65">[Pg 65]</a></span>
+those who could were going, while many men whose
+business detained them in Mexico were sending their
+families. All had come to the embassy for information
+and to register.</p>
+
+<p>As a result it was late in the afternoon before
+the boys returned to Gen. Sanchez' residence. But
+late as they were, the general had not yet come in.
+They went to their room and when they saw the
+gifts which Pedro had laid on each valise, they could
+not keep back the tears.</p>
+
+<p>"Well, there's one thing," declared Billie as he
+drew the back of his hand across his eyes, "we don't
+have to fight Pedro, no matter what comes. I'm
+going to hunt him up and tell him so."</p>
+
+<p>And he did.</p>
+
+<p>It was some hours later when Gen. Sanchez returned
+and announced that it would be impossible
+for the boys to get transportation to Vera Cruz for
+two or three days, as the track had been torn up in
+the neighborhood of Cordoba, but that he had been
+promised that they would be given safe conduct as
+soon as the track was repaired.</p>
+
+<p>It was three days later, therefore, before the boys
+were able to leave, during which time they remained
+in the house at Gen. Sanchez' request to avoid any
+unpleasantness, which might make trouble for him.</p>
+
+<p>On the morning of the 13th the boys bade good-bye
+to their host and his family and were driven in
+an automobile to the station. Already there were
+<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_66" id="Page_66" href="#Page_66">[Pg 66]</a></span>
+more than enough persons to fill four trains, and
+the guards were permitting only those to board the
+cars who had passes signed by the Mexican provost
+marshal.</p>
+
+<p>Thanks to Gen. Sanchez, our boys had been provided
+with such passes, but they were not allowed to
+take their rifles or revolvers aboard the train. They
+had no more than found seats and made themselves
+comfortable than the conductor shouted "Vamanos,"
+and the train pulled slowly out of the shed.</p>
+
+<p>"Well," remarked Donald as they rolled slowly
+along, "this is a pretty tough ending to a friendly
+visit. I think I've seen about all I want of Mexico
+for some time to come."</p>
+
+<p>"What do you suppose will happen?" asked Billie.
+"Do you think we'll really go to war with
+Mexico unless Gen. Huerta orders the salute?"</p>
+
+<p>"I don't know," was Donald's cautious reply. "I
+hope not."</p>
+
+<p>"And I hope we do!" exclaimed a somewhat
+florid gentleman who sat in the seat ahead and who
+had overheard the conversation. "I'd just like an
+opportunity to come down here with an army and
+wipe the whole nation off the earth."</p>
+
+<p>Donald made no reply, but Adrian asked sympathetically:
+"Have they treated you badly, sir?"</p>
+
+<p>"Have they treated me badly? Well, I should
+say so. They wouldn't let me out of my hotel for
+two days and now they have refused to carry my
+<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_67" id="Page_67" href="#Page_67">[Pg 67]</a></span>
+trunk and made me leave it with the express company.
+I guess they don't know who I am."</p>
+
+<p>"I'm sure they do not, sir."</p>
+
+<p>"Well, I'll show them who I am as soon as I get
+to Vera Cruz and can see Admiral Fletcher. He'll
+know how to protect Americans!"</p>
+
+<p>"I'm sure he will, sir."</p>
+
+<p>"And when the first marine lands, I want to be
+right there with a rifle to help drive the Mexicans off
+the earth."</p>
+
+<p>"It would be wise not to say too much," whispered
+Adrian. "I see that officer in the end of the
+car has his eye on you. He may speak English."</p>
+
+<p>"I don't care who hears me," said the florid man
+angrily. "I mean it."</p>
+
+<p>At the same moment a guard who had approached
+from the other end of the car laid his hand upon the
+angry man's shoulder.</p>
+
+<p>"If the Se&ntilde;or is not satisfied," he said, "we shall
+be pleased to send him back to the City of Mexico."</p>
+
+<p>"Oh, no-no-no," was the stammering reply. "I
+am very well satisfied. All I want is to get out of
+the country."</p>
+
+<p>"Let us hope there will be no trouble about that,"
+was the polite response, and the florid man lapsed
+into silence.</p>
+
+<p>Ordinarily it is a pleasant day's journey from the
+City of Mexico to the seaport city of Vera Cruz; or
+if one prefers he may make a night ride of it in
+times of peace. The train which left the City of
+<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_68" id="Page_68" href="#Page_68">[Pg 68]</a></span>
+Mexico that April morning made no such time.
+After a tiresome all-day ride with numerous aggravating
+stops, when darkness fell they were still
+on the plateau of Mexico, some miles west of Orizaba,
+running slowly for fear some stray bunch of
+Carranzistas or Zapatistas might have torn up a
+length or two of track.</p>
+
+<p>It was possibly an hour later that the engine gave
+a furious jerk, followed by a bump and another jerk,
+and then the train came to a dead stop.</p>
+
+<p>In a minute everybody was on his feet asking
+everybody else what had happened. As no one
+knew, there was a general movement for the doors,
+as it was too dark to see much from the windows.</p>
+
+<p>"Sit down, everybody," ordered the guard.
+"There is no danger, but we have stopped on a high
+trestle."</p>
+
+<p>The passengers obeyed, realizing the danger of
+leaving the coaches. There was a general round of
+conversation, and then as the train did not start,
+people settled back in their seats and tried to sleep.</p>
+
+<p>Some minutes later Billie gave Adrian a nudge
+with his elbow.</p>
+
+<p>"Are you asleep?" he asked.</p>
+
+<p>"No. Why?"</p>
+
+<p>"I've just been looking out of the window. We're
+not on a trestle."</p>
+
+<p>"No? Well, what of it?"</p>
+
+<p>"Only that the guard was lying. What did he do
+it for?"</p>
+
+<p>"I don't know. Because he was a Mexican, I<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_69" id="Page_69" href="#Page_69">[Pg 69]</a></span>
+guess. Go on to sleep."</p>
+
+<p>"That isn't the answer, although it's pretty good.
+They have some scheme. I wouldn't be surprised if
+they were going to keep us prisoners somewhere
+around here."</p>
+
+<p>"Nonsense. Go on to sleep."</p>
+
+<p>But Billie was not satisfied. He leaned over and
+tried to talk to Donald, but he was fast asleep.</p>
+
+<p>"I think I'll go on a little scouting expedition,"
+he muttered. "I need some exercise."</p>
+
+<p>He arose, stretched himself and walked slowly
+toward the door, which stood wide open.</p>
+
+<p>"I wonder where the guard is?" he thought. "It's
+mighty funny he'd go and leave the coach like this."</p>
+
+<p>He stepped on to the coach ahead. The same condition
+existed.</p>
+
+<p>Billie's curiosity got the best of him and he
+jumped out onto the ground. It was pitch dark, but
+he had not advanced more than twenty steps before
+he discovered groups of men seated upon the grass.
+A second glance convinced him they were armed.</p>
+
+<p>He drew back and stood beside the coach, where
+he thought fast.</p>
+
+<p>"There's one of two things," he soliloquized. "We
+are either prisoners or else we are being guarded
+against an expected attack. Whichever it is, this
+is no time for the Broncho Rider Boys to be asleep.
+I'll go and tell the others."</p>
+
+<p>He started to climb onto the car, but a guard
+<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_70" id="Page_70" href="#Page_70">[Pg 70]</a></span>
+appeared on the platform and ordered him away at
+the point of his bayonet.</p>
+
+<p>"I'm a passenger," explained Billie.</p>
+
+<p>"Go away!" was the reply, emphasized by a quick
+advance of the bayonet.</p>
+
+<p>Seeing that it was no time to argue, Billie slid
+back into the darkness.</p>
+
+
+
+<hr style="width: 65%;" />
+<h2><a name="CHAPTER_VIII" id="CHAPTER_VIII"></a>CHAPTER VIII.</h2>
+
+<h3>TREACHERY FOILED.</h3>
+
+
+<p>Broncho Billie had been in too many unpleasant
+places to be at all worried over his predicament, but
+he was much concerned about the condition of the
+train and its passengers, practically all of whom were
+Americans and a large majority of whom were
+women and children.</p>
+
+<p>"It would be fierce," he mused, "to have them
+held here, or in a detention camp as prisoners; and
+it would be worse if we should be attacked by an
+overwhelming force of revolutionists. I've just got
+to know the truth."</p>
+
+<p>He glanced up at the coach with its dimly lighted
+windows.</p>
+
+<p>"I wish I could talk to old Don. He most always
+knows what to do. But how can I get at him?"</p>
+
+<p>He sneaked out to where he could see the coach
+<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_71" id="Page_71" href="#Page_71">[Pg 71]</a></span>
+platform. The guard was still there, as well as the
+guard on the other car.</p>
+
+<p>"Worse and more of it," he exclaimed.</p>
+
+<p>Then he examined the car, trying to determine
+at which window he had been seated. Several were
+open, and he determined to try and speak to some
+one.</p>
+
+<p>"Our seats are not far from here," he thought as
+he stopped under the second one. "I'll try this."</p>
+
+<p>He picked up a stone about as big as an egg and
+tossed it into the window. A howl from a child
+followed the act and Billie ducked under the car.
+He could hear the mother pacifying it, but evidently
+she, too, had been asleep and had not discovered the
+stone.</p>
+
+<p>"I think I know just which child it is," said Billie
+with a grin, "and this next open window must be
+ours."</p>
+
+<p>He picked up another stone and tossed it in to his
+second choice, this time with better results.</p>
+
+<p>Donald had just aroused from a nap, and, missing
+Billie, was looking for him. Not seeing him in the
+car, he was about to look out of the window when
+the stone hit him on the chin.</p>
+
+<p>"Ouch!" he exclaimed as he started back.</p>
+
+<p>Billie heard the exclamation and gave the familiar
+whistle.</p>
+
+<p>Donald was on the alert in an instant. Looking
+up and down the car to be sure he was not being
+watched, he stuck his head out of the window.</p>
+
+<p>"What is it?" he asked.<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_72" id="Page_72" href="#Page_72">[Pg 72]</a></span></p>
+
+<p>"Trouble," was Billie's laconic reply. "Come
+out."</p>
+
+<p>"How can I? The guard is at the door."</p>
+
+<p>"Jump out of the window."</p>
+
+<p>"They might see me."</p>
+
+<p>Billie thought fast.</p>
+
+<p>"Let Ad stand between you and the door."</p>
+
+<p>"Great," from Donald.</p>
+
+<p>He aroused Adrian and told him the situation.</p>
+
+<p>"You stay in the train," he said, "and we'll keep
+you posted as to what is going on outside. If there
+is any real danger we will give the alarm."</p>
+
+<p>He picked up his overcoat and pretended to be fixing
+a pillow. Adrian did the same. Then, while
+the guard's back was turned, he dropped out of the
+window.</p>
+
+<p>Billie was beside him when he rose to his feet.</p>
+
+<p>"This way, Don," he whispered. "Let's get out
+into the dark and hold a council of war."</p>
+
+<p>They glided out into darkness, but where they
+could keep their eyes on the engine.</p>
+
+<p>"Now tell me about it," said Don.</p>
+
+<p>Billie told him what he had discovered.</p>
+
+<p>"It does look strange," Donald admitted. "Have
+you any plan?"</p>
+
+<p>"I haven't an idea above an oyster," was the
+characteristic reply.</p>
+
+<p>Donald scratched his ear reflectively.</p>
+
+<p>"How would it do," he finally asked, "to sneak
+<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_73" id="Page_73" href="#Page_73">[Pg 73]</a></span>
+over by the soldiers and see if we can't pick up some
+scrap of conversation that may give us a clue as to
+what is going on?"</p>
+
+<p>"Fine. We must keep together, though. We
+might never find each other in the dark if we should
+become separated."</p>
+
+<p>Silently they crawled toward the spot where Billie
+had seen the soldiers. When they did not hear any
+sign of them after several minutes' crawling they
+stopped to listen.</p>
+
+<p>"There surely was a squad here a few minutes
+ago," declared Billie. "They must have moved."</p>
+
+<p>They remained silently thoughtful for several
+minutes, but all was as silent as a graveyard.</p>
+
+<p>"That's mighty funny," said Billie. "I know I
+was not mistaken. Let's go back by the train."</p>
+
+<p>They turned for that purpose and could see a
+group of figures at the platform of each coach.</p>
+
+<p>"That's the answer," exclaimed Billie. "They
+have surrounded the train. Now let's see what will
+happen."</p>
+
+<p>They had not long to wait as an officer shortly
+boarded each car and a minute later there was a commotion
+among the passengers.</p>
+
+<p>Drawing a little nearer, the boys could hear the
+officer in the car nearest them explaining that the
+passengers would be obliged to alight and change
+trains.</p>
+
+<p>"The track has been torn up ahead of us," he said,
+<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_74" id="Page_74" href="#Page_74">[Pg 74]</a></span>
+"and we shall have to walk nearly a mile to where
+the train is that came up from Vera Cruz."</p>
+
+<p>This had been quite the customary thing in Mexico
+for some months and the passengers prepared to
+obey.</p>
+
+<p>"I don't believe it is true," said Billie to Donald.</p>
+
+<p>"We can soon find out," declared Donald. "Let's
+walk down the track a piece. We can easily keep
+ahead of the crowd."</p>
+
+<p>Avoiding the glare of the locomotive's headlight,
+the boys hurried down the track and when far
+enough away from the train to feel secure, they took
+the middle of the track.</p>
+
+<p>"This is far enough ahead," said Donald, "to keep
+out of sight and the track is all right so far. I don't
+believe it is torn up at all."</p>
+
+<p>"Then what is up?"</p>
+
+<p>"That is what I've been trying to decide for nearly
+an hour," replied Billie. "It looks as though they
+intended to make all the Americans prisoners."</p>
+
+<p>"But what for?"</p>
+
+<p>"Why, for hostages, to be sure. Don't you remember
+how C&aelig;sar took a lot of the Helvetians for
+hostages?"</p>
+
+<p>"By George!" from Donald. "I believe you are
+right. Do you suppose it is Huerta's orders?"</p>
+
+<p>"I expect so. He hates Americans."</p>
+
+<p>While the boys had been talking the passengers
+had been taken from the train and were now coming
+toward them.</p>
+
+<p>"Let's keep just far enough ahead to see what<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_75" id="Page_75" href="#Page_75">[Pg 75]</a></span>
+will happen," said Donald. "We must get in touch
+with Adrian somehow."</p>
+
+<p>They started ahead, but it speedily developed that
+the others were not following. Instead they had
+been halted a short distance from the locomotive,
+back from the track, and surrounded by soldiers.</p>
+
+<p>"There seems to be a hitch somewhere," Don
+finally remarked. "They don't seem to know just
+what they do want to do."</p>
+
+<p>"Come on back and find out," said Billie. "It's up
+to us to do something."</p>
+
+<p>Cautiously they crept back to where they could
+hear the conversation among the passengers and the
+questions they asked the guard. Some were laughing
+and more were expressing indignation. A few
+of the women were crying, but above all they could
+hear the voice of the florid-faced man telling what
+he would do as soon as he could get into touch with
+Admiral Fletcher.</p>
+
+<p>"Which won't be very soon, unless I'm mistaken,"
+laughed Donald.</p>
+
+<p>Presently some one began to whistle a popular air,
+but in such a way that the boys recognized the well-known
+whistle of Adrian.</p>
+
+<p>"Do you hear that?" asked Billie. "Ad wants to
+know what we are doing."</p>
+
+<p>"He'll have to want for the present," said Don,
+"but there go a couple of officers back to the train.
+Let's follow them."</p>
+
+<p>The boys darted into the shadow of the coaches<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_76" id="Page_76" href="#Page_76">[Pg 76]</a></span>
+and crept back only a few steps behind what proved
+to be the captain in charge of the company and his
+second lieutenant.</p>
+
+<p>"If I only had my automatic, I'd soon settle this
+whole matter," declared Billie.</p>
+
+<p>"You wouldn't hurt anybody, would you?"</p>
+
+<p>"I'd capture the officer and make him take us to
+Vera Cruz."</p>
+
+<p>"Of course," from Donald. "Why didn't I think
+of it before? Let's do it."</p>
+
+<p>"But we have no weapons."</p>
+
+<p>"Then we must get some."</p>
+
+<p>"How?"</p>
+
+<p>"Keep your eyes open. There must be some way."</p>
+
+<p>The officers kept on their way until they reached
+the first Pullman, where they stopped for a minute.</p>
+
+<p>"Are the orders in here?" asked the captain.</p>
+
+<p>"No; the conductor has them. He wouldn't stop
+the train without I gave them to him."</p>
+
+<p>"Carramba! Why didn't you tell me so before?
+Go and take them from him and bring them here
+at once."</p>
+
+<p>"Bueno, Capitan! Will you wait here?"</p>
+
+<p>"Yes, I'll go inside. Hurry."</p>
+
+<p>The lieutenant turned and hurried back. The
+boys only saved themselves from being detected by
+throwing themselves flat on the ground.</p>
+
+<p>For a moment the captain remained looking after
+his companion and then turned and entered the car.</p>
+
+<p>"We must have that order," said Donald.<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_77" id="Page_77" href="#Page_77">[Pg 77]</a></span></p>
+
+<p>"We must!" echoed Billie.</p>
+
+<p>"Then we'll get it," they exclaimed as one.</p>
+
+<p>So alike were the thoughts that passed through
+their minds that they did not even feel obliged to
+speak the plan aloud.</p>
+
+<p>"Which one of us will stop him?" asked Donald.</p>
+
+<p>"You'd better. I'm heavier and I can handle him
+easier."</p>
+
+<p>They walked back some ten feet, where Donald
+stopped, while Billie went about ten feet farther and
+drew off into the darkness.</p>
+
+<p>A couple of minutes later they heard the lieutenant
+coming. He passed Billie without seeing him.</p>
+
+<p>Then Donald advanced and met him as by chance.</p>
+
+<p>"Who comes there?" asked the lieutenant in a
+sharp tone, drawing his revolver.</p>
+
+<p>"Why, hello, lieutenant," said Donald as he came
+close to him. "What's happened?"</p>
+
+<p>The lieutenant eyed him suspiciously.</p>
+
+<p>"Where did you come from?" he asked.</p>
+
+<p>"From the rear sleeper. I woke up and found
+myself all alone."</p>
+
+<p>"Humph!" grunted the lieutenant. "You must
+have been overlooked. Come with me."</p>
+
+<p>He started to replace his revolver in its holster
+when a slight noise behind him caused him to turn
+his head. As he did so, Billie's fist caught him under
+the chin and he fell in a heap without making a
+sound.</p>
+
+<p>"Good work!" muttered Donald as he picked up<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_78" id="Page_78" href="#Page_78">[Pg 78]</a></span>
+the revolver which the lieutenant had let fall. "Now
+to business."</p>
+
+
+
+<hr style="width: 65%;" />
+<h2><a name="CHAPTER_IX" id="CHAPTER_IX"></a>CHAPTER IX.</h2>
+
+<h3>DONALD'S STRATEGY.</h3>
+
+
+<p>Lifting the unconscious man in their arms, they
+bore him into the darkness away from the train,
+where he was soon deprived of his coat, hat, and
+weapons. Then he was gagged and securely tied
+with his own sabretasche.</p>
+
+<p>Donald, being nearest the lieutenant's size, donned
+his uniform, buckled on his sword, and with the order
+in his hand hastily entered the car, closely followed
+by Billie, with the ready revolver in his hand.</p>
+
+<p>The captain had thrown aside his hat and was
+smoking a cigarette in one of the easy seats as the
+boys entered. He gave them only a hasty glance as
+he blew a cloud of smoke into the air, and the next
+minute he was covered by Billie's weapon.</p>
+
+<p>"Up with your hands!" was the stern order.</p>
+
+<p>The captain hesitated, but a sharp prick from
+Donald's sword sent the hands into the air.</p>
+
+<p>In another minute the captain was disarmed.</p>
+
+<p>"Now," said Donald sternly, "we'll see what all
+this trouble is about."</p>
+
+<p>He opened the telegram he held in his hand and
+read:
+</p>
+
+<p><br /></p>
+
+<p>"American Admiral has given an ultimatum.<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_79" id="Page_79" href="#Page_79">[Pg 79]</a></span>
+Hold train and passengers until further orders.</p>
+
+<div style="margin-left: 30.7em;"><p>
+Maas."</p></div>
+
+<p><br /></p>
+
+<p>"Who is Maas?" asked Donald sternly.</p>
+
+<p>The captain shrugged his shoulders, but said
+nothing.</p>
+
+<p>"You'll answer in just one minute, or you'll never
+have a chance to answer another question," said
+Donald, as he stood with drawn sword, while Billie
+covered the captain with his revolver.</p>
+
+<p>"Would you murder an unarmed man?" asked
+the captain.</p>
+
+<p>"I wouldn't consider it murder. Answer."</p>
+
+<p>The look in Donald's eyes was not to be mistaken.</p>
+
+<p>"Gen. Maas is in command of Vera Cruz," the
+captain said.</p>
+
+<p>"Good. I think I see it all. If it is decided not
+to accede to the ultimatum, it is proposed to hold the
+train load as hostages."</p>
+
+<p>The captain smiled.</p>
+
+<p>"Now listen!" and Donald spoke very slowly so
+that every word might find lodgment. "You have
+one chance for your life. Can you guess what it
+is?"</p>
+
+<p>The captain shook his head.</p>
+
+<p>"To do just exactly as I bid. Just one little attempt
+to do differently, and you are a dead man."</p>
+
+<p>The captain scowled, but made no reply.</p>
+
+<p>"Put on your hat and come with me. Order the
+<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_80" id="Page_80" href="#Page_80">[Pg 80]</a></span>
+passengers back on to the train and give your engineer
+instructions to cover just as much of the distance
+between here and Vera Cruz by daylight as he
+knows how!"</p>
+
+<p>The captain shrugged his shoulders as he arose
+from his seat.</p>
+
+<p>"I see you think it will be easy to escape. Just
+put any such idea out of your mind. There is
+no possible chance."</p>
+
+<p>Donald turned to Billie.</p>
+
+<p>"This is what must be done. We shall walk
+directly back to where the passengers are. The captain
+will give his order without any hesitation.
+Otherwise I shall shoot him through my pocket.
+You will keep right behind us. If I fire, you fire
+also. One of us will be sure to kill him."</p>
+
+<p>Donald led the way from the car and Billie
+brought up the rear.</p>
+
+<p>Through the dark they marched, each with a hand
+on the captain, so they might feel his slightest
+tremor.</p>
+
+<p>Arriving at the engine the captain summoned the
+sergeant.</p>
+
+<p>"Order the passengers to board the train," was
+the brief command.</p>
+
+<p>The sergeant hastened to obey.</p>
+
+<p>"Bueno!" said Donald, as the passengers rushed
+back.</p>
+
+<p>Then under his breath to Billie: "Call Adrian."</p>
+
+<p>Billie did so.</p>
+
+<p>"Where are you?" Adrian called back.<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_81" id="Page_81" href="#Page_81">[Pg 81]</a></span></p>
+
+<p>"Down near the engine."</p>
+
+<p>A moment later Adrian appeared coming through
+the crowd of hurrying passengers.</p>
+
+<p>"Where's Don?" he asked as soon as he caught
+sight of Billie.</p>
+
+<p>"Not far. Stay here. We may need you."</p>
+
+<p>Adrian's face showed some surprise, but he said
+nothing.</p>
+
+<p>"Now, captain," said Don quietly, "your orders
+to the engineer," and under cover of the darkness
+he pushed the point of his revolver into the captain's
+side, while Billie touched him significantly in the
+back.</p>
+
+<p>The captain gave the order as he had been instructed.</p>
+
+<p>"Now for the conductor," ordered Donald.</p>
+
+<p>The order was given, but the conductor refused
+to obey.</p>
+
+<p>"I must have a written order," he said.</p>
+
+<p>"Why?" asked Donald, in his r&ocirc;le of lieutenant.</p>
+
+<p>"To countermand the order of Gen. Maas."</p>
+
+<p>"Captain," was Donald's quiet hint, "don't you
+think it would be well to place the conductor under
+arrest?" and again he poked his revolver into the
+captain's side.</p>
+
+<p>The order for the conductor's arrest was quickly
+given.</p>
+
+<p>"Now, then, vamose," called Adrian. Then to
+the engineer, "I will act as conductor."</p>
+
+<p>The guards and extra soldiers who had been detailed<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_82" id="Page_82" href="#Page_82">[Pg 82]</a></span>
+for this special service, sprang aboard; the
+engineer pulled open the throttle and the train began
+to move.</p>
+
+<p>"Aren't you going, too?" asked Adrian.</p>
+
+<p>"Yes," whispered Billie to Donald, "hurry aboard
+with your prisoner."</p>
+
+<p>The captain was evidently of the same mind, for
+he started to board the already moving train.</p>
+
+<p>"No you don't," exclaimed Donald, pulling him
+back. "You're going to stay here with us!"</p>
+
+<p>"Do you mean it, Don?" asked Billie in surprise.</p>
+
+<p>"Sure! What do you think he'd do to us as soon
+as it was light?"</p>
+
+<p>By this time the train was under headway; a
+second later the last coach passed them and in another
+minute the tail lights were disappearing in the
+darkness.</p>
+
+<p>"It looks to me," remarked Adrian with a long
+breath, "as though we were in the consomm&eacute;."</p>
+
+<p>"Perhaps," was Donald's laconic reply, "but
+those women and children will be safe in Vera Cruz
+under the guns of Admiral Fletcher's fleet by daylight,
+or I'm greatly mistaken."</p>
+
+<p>"And what are we going to do with our friend
+the captain?" queried Billie.</p>
+
+<p>"He'll have to accept our hospitality under the
+stars until morning and then we'll see."</p>
+
+<p>In telling about his experiences later Billie said it
+was the longest and the shortest night he ever knew.
+<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_83" id="Page_83" href="#Page_83">[Pg 83]</a></span>
+It seemed a long time for daylight, but it seemed a
+short time for the train which was bearing his countrymen
+to safety.</p>
+
+<p>When day finally began to break, the first thing
+that became visible was the snow-tipped peak of Mt.
+Orizaba, against which the sun threw his brilliant
+rays long before he could be seen above the horizon.
+It was a beautiful sight and the boys voiced their
+admiration with many exclamations of delight.
+Then they turned their attention to the more serious
+thoughts for the day.</p>
+
+<p>The first thing they did was to release the lieutenant
+from his unpleasant predicament and restore
+to him his uniform.</p>
+
+<p>"We should like to return you your arms also,"
+said Donald, "but your government took ours from
+us and I think we shall have to keep yours in their
+place."</p>
+
+<p>Neither of the officers made any reply, but their
+dark looks boded no good for the boys.</p>
+
+<p>"You might just as well look pleasant," laughed
+Billie. "All is fair in love and war."</p>
+
+<p>"We'll make you sing a different song when we
+get you in Vera Cruz," said the captain.</p>
+
+<p>"And when do you think that will be, Captain?"
+queried Adrian.</p>
+
+<p>"As soon as the next train comes along."</p>
+
+<p>"Oh, that's it, is it?" said Donald. "That being
+the case, I guess we will not wait for another train.
+By the way, how far is it to Vera Cruz?"</p>
+
+<p>"About a hundred kilometers."<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_84" id="Page_84" href="#Page_84">[Pg 84]</a></span></p>
+
+<p>"That's about eighty-four miles, isn't it, Ad?"</p>
+
+<p>"Just about."</p>
+
+<p>"And it's down hill pretty much all the way, isn't
+it?"</p>
+
+<p>"I should say so by looking down the valley."</p>
+
+<p>"A right nice little walk, Captain. Let's be going.
+We ought to make it easily in four days."</p>
+
+<p>At this cordial invitation the captain lost his temper.</p>
+
+<p>"Carramba!" he exclaimed. "Am I a boy to be
+made sport of? I will not go. If you wish me to
+go you will have to carry me," and he deliberately
+laid himself down on the ground.</p>
+
+<p>In spite of themselves the boys were obliged to
+laugh.</p>
+
+<p>"We carried the lieutenant last night, but we don't
+desire your company badly enough to carry you,"
+laughed Billie. "If you don't want to go, I for one
+vote to leave you. We have to forage for something
+to eat and the fewer there are, the easier it will be.
+And speaking of eats, it seems to me I smell something
+cooking right now."</p>
+
+<p>At Billie's words the others sniffed up their noses.</p>
+
+<p>"It's a fact as sure as you're born," declared
+Donald.</p>
+
+<p>"And I'm going to find out where the odor comes
+from," said Billie. "There must be a house around
+here somewhere."</p>
+
+<p>Again he sniffed the air and smiled jubilantly.</p>
+
+<p>"The wind's in the east," he laughed. "It must<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_85" id="Page_85" href="#Page_85">[Pg 85]</a></span>
+be somewhere in this direction. Come on, Captain."</p>
+
+<p>The captain refused to move, but Billie led the
+way, followed by the two boys. They had not gone
+many rods when through an opening in the trees
+they beheld a good-sized adobe house. Pushing
+hastily toward it, they soon reached a cleared space,
+and there, gathered about a bunch of some forty or
+fifty horses, were a dozen men, while through the
+open door of the house many more were to be seen
+seated at a table&mdash;eating.</p>
+
+<p>"Come on!" exclaimed Billie. "I'm going to have
+something to eat; I don't care who they are."</p>
+
+<p>"We might as well make the best of it," declared
+Donald. "We are discovered any way and the best
+thing we can do is to put on a bold front."</p>
+
+<p>Without further words the three boys walked
+boldly toward the house.</p>
+
+
+
+<hr style="width: 65%;" />
+<h2><a name="CHAPTER_X" id="CHAPTER_X"></a>CHAPTER X.</h2>
+
+<h3>A TIMELY RESCUE.</h3>
+
+
+<p>The minute the boys' presence became known,
+there was a commotion in the house and in the clearing
+surrounding it. Those in the yard sprang toward
+their guns and those in the house jumped from
+the table.</p>
+
+<p>"Don't move," called out Billie. "We are<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_86" id="Page_86" href="#Page_86">[Pg 86]</a></span>
+friends."</p>
+
+<p>But the men were not sure and at once surrounded
+the boys.</p>
+
+<p>They appeared to be soldiers, but their uniforms
+were of a great variety and many hues. Only the
+officer in command had anything the appearance of
+a real soldier.</p>
+
+<p>"Who are you?" he demanded as he came forward.</p>
+
+<p>"Friends! Americanos!" replied Donald.</p>
+
+<p>"Yes; and hungry ones," added Billie with a gesture
+that brought a smile to the officer's face.</p>
+
+<p>"Where did you come from?" was the next inquiry.</p>
+
+<p>Donald explained that they had been left by a
+train that had stopped nearby. He did not think it
+necessary to enlighten the officer as to the circumstances.</p>
+
+<p>"If you don't believe us," broke in Billie, "you can
+ask the officers we left back there by the track."</p>
+
+<p>Donald made a gesture of impatience, which Billie
+failed to understand, but which the officer was quick
+to interpret.</p>
+
+<p>"Officers? Of which army?" he quickly asked.</p>
+
+<p>"Gen. Huerta's."</p>
+
+<p>"Carramba!" exclaimed the officer in command.
+"Go quick, corporal, and bring them to me."</p>
+
+<p>Then to Billie: "If you are telling me the truth
+you have done me a great favor."</p>
+
+<p>The boys looked surprised.<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_87" id="Page_87" href="#Page_87">[Pg 87]</a></span></p>
+
+<p>"How is that?" asked Donald.</p>
+
+<p>"Do you not know that we are of the army of
+Gen. Carranza?" was the interrogative reply.</p>
+
+<p>"Why, no!" exclaimed the boys in unison.</p>
+
+<p>"It is true," said the officer. "I am Captain Lopez.
+Now tell me, who are you?"</p>
+
+<p>Briefly Donald told of their acquaintance with
+Gen. Sanchez and of their adventures of the night
+before, at which the captain laughed heartily.</p>
+
+<p>"You are smart boys," he declared.</p>
+
+<p>"And hungry ones," again added Billie.</p>
+
+<p>"You must be. Here, Juan," calling a soldier to
+him. "Take these <i>muchachos</i> to the house and feed
+them. I'll have a look at these rebels."</p>
+
+<p>"Rebels," said Adrian to Donald under his breath
+as they walked toward the house. "Now what do
+you think of that?"</p>
+
+<p>"That's his viewpoint," replied Don. "He thinks
+of the men who overthrew President Madero as
+rebels."</p>
+
+<p>By this time they were near enough the house for
+Billie to smell the aroma of the coffee and he quickened
+his pace.</p>
+
+<p>"I'll talk politics after I've sampled the breakfast,"
+he declared. "If the breakfast is good, I'll
+join the band."</p>
+
+<p>It was nearly half an hour later that the boys
+stood before the captain. With a good breakfast
+<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_88" id="Page_88" href="#Page_88">[Pg 88]</a></span>
+under their belts they felt fit for anything that
+might offer.</p>
+
+<p>"I'm afraid you boys are in a bad fix," said Captain
+Lopez. "I suppose you want to get to Vera
+Cruz and on to some ship that will take you to the
+United States; but I don't know how you are going
+to make it."</p>
+
+<p>"Why, can't we get another train somewhere
+down the line?" asked Adrian.</p>
+
+<p>"There may not be any more trains for some
+time."</p>
+
+<p>"How's that?"</p>
+
+<p>"We are here to stop them."</p>
+
+<p>"Does that mean you are going out to tear up the
+track?"</p>
+
+<p>"Not right here, but a little nearer Vera Cruz.
+There is a much larger body of troops about five
+miles below."</p>
+
+<p>Billie uttered a prolonged whistle.</p>
+
+<p>"That does look bad, sure enough," he declared.
+Then, after a pause: "What's the matter with
+walking?"</p>
+
+<p>"It's a long ways and the mountains are full of
+our men."</p>
+
+<p>"Can't you give us a safe passage? You say we
+have done you a favor by turning these two officers
+over to you," suggested Donald, indicating with a
+nod of his head the captain and lieutenant of the
+train guard who were now held prisoners.</p>
+
+<p>"I'll do the best I can," was the reply, "but you
+<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_89" id="Page_89" href="#Page_89">[Pg 89]</a></span>
+will have to remain with me to-day. We are on
+scout duty and shall not return to the main body
+until to-night."</p>
+
+<p>"That'll suit me all right," laughed Billie, "and
+if you don't mind I think I'll go into the house
+somewhere and take a nap."</p>
+
+<p>"Bueno," laughed the captain. "You might as
+well all take a nap. If we have occasion to leave
+the neighborhood we will call you."</p>
+
+<p>Ten minutes later the three were fast asleep on
+a pile of Mexican blankets in the best room in the
+house.</p>
+
+<p>Three hours later they were awakened by a fusillade
+of shots.</p>
+
+<p>They sprang to their feet and looked around.
+For just a moment they could not remember where
+they were. Then they recalled their situation and
+became on the alert.</p>
+
+<p>"Trouble outside," was Don's laconic statement.</p>
+
+<p>He and Billie drew the revolvers they had captured
+the night before.</p>
+
+<p>"Put 'em up," advised Adrian. "We're not here
+to fight."</p>
+
+<p>"We might have to," from Billie.</p>
+
+<p>"Not at all. If one side wins, we are safe. If
+the other side wins, we are prisoners and the attackers
+will be our rescuers."</p>
+
+<p>"Great head, Ad," was Billie's comment. "But
+I'd like to know what is going on," as another
+fusillade was heard.</p>
+
+<p>"Better stay where we are till the shooting stops,"<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_90" id="Page_90" href="#Page_90">[Pg 90]</a></span>
+said Don.</p>
+
+<p>It was good advice and the boys waited as quietly
+as they could.</p>
+
+<p>A few minutes later there was a volley and a
+shout, followed by the sound of rushing feet. Then
+there was quiet as the shots were heard receding.</p>
+
+<p>When none of their friends returned after a few
+minutes, the boys ventured to the door. There was
+no one in sight.</p>
+
+<p>"I wonder where they have all gone?" ventured
+Billie.</p>
+
+<p>"I expect that our friends have run away and
+some of Huerta's soldiers are chasing them."</p>
+
+<p>"If they do, they will run into an ambush," said
+Adrian.</p>
+
+<p>Which is exactly what happened.</p>
+
+<p>"That won't do us any good," said Don. "Now
+that we are alone, I vote that we get back to the
+railroad track. We won't get lost if we follow that
+and a train may come along."</p>
+
+<p>The advice seemed good and they started to go.</p>
+
+<p>"Hold on," exclaimed Billie. "Let's see if we
+can't find some grub to take with us."</p>
+
+<p>"Great head!" laughed Adrian.</p>
+
+<p>"Great stomach, you mean," from Donald. "It
+never lets him forget."</p>
+
+<p>The boys plundered through the house. The
+owners must have been scared away, for nothing
+had been disturbed. In the kitchen they found a
+<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_91" id="Page_91" href="#Page_91">[Pg 91]</a></span>
+big plate of <i>tortillas</i>, half a baked kid, and some
+wheat bread. This they appropriated.</p>
+
+<p>"We might as well have a blanket apiece," said
+Donald. "It is only another case of a fair exchange.
+The Mexicans have our suit cases."</p>
+
+<p>Each took a blanket and Adrian was so fortunate
+after searching all over the house as to find a shotgun
+and a belt full of loaded shells that went with it.</p>
+
+<p>"If those shells were loaded with buckshot you'd
+be all right," said Billie. "They're the&mdash;&mdash;"</p>
+
+<p>His speech was interrupted by a cry that fairly
+made their blood run cold.</p>
+
+<p>"What's that?" and the three stopped as though
+they had been paralysed.</p>
+
+<p>Again came the cry, and with a single bound the
+boys were out in the open, each with his weapon
+ready for instant use.</p>
+
+<p>They could see no one, but there was the sound
+of something crashing through the brush which hid
+the railroad from the house.</p>
+
+<p>"Sounded like a wild cat," declared Donald.</p>
+
+<p>"Or a coyote," said Billie.</p>
+
+<p>"I'm sure it was a human voice," remarked
+Adrian. "Do you remember the Zu&ntilde;is?" referring
+to another adventure told in the story of the
+"Broncho Rider Boys Along the Border."</p>
+
+<p>Even as he spoke there emerged from the brush
+the figure of a woman carrying in her arms a small
+child. Winged by fear, she was bounding along like
+an antelope.</p>
+
+<p>A moment later, and not two rods behind her,<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_92" id="Page_92" href="#Page_92">[Pg 92]</a></span>
+came forth a figure which the boys instantly recognized
+as a mountain lion.</p>
+
+<p>How the woman had succeeded in escaping it
+even for a moment was a mystery.</p>
+
+<p>In a second the three weapons spoke. The report
+was followed by a scream from the beast and
+a cry from the woman, both of whom fell lifeless
+to the earth&mdash;the beast dead and the woman in a
+swoon.</p>
+
+<p>"Take care of the woman, you two," said Adrian.
+"I'll examine the beast."</p>
+
+<p>No one stopped to question the order.</p>
+
+<p>Billie picked up the child which the woman had
+let fall, while Donald stooped down and felt the
+woman's pulse. Then he darted into the house and
+was back in a minute with a bucket half filled with
+water. With it he bathed the woman's temples and
+poured a little down her throat.</p>
+
+<p>In a couple of minutes she revived and looked
+around.</p>
+
+<p>"Mi ni&ntilde;a!" she gasped.</p>
+
+<p>"She's asking for her child," said Donald.</p>
+
+<p>Billie carried the little one over and stood it
+beside her.</p>
+
+<p>With a glad cry she snatched it in her arms
+and burst into tears.</p>
+
+<p>"She's all right," laughed Donald. "Now let's
+have a look at that animal."</p>
+
+<p>They walked over to where Adrian was watching<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_93" id="Page_93" href="#Page_93">[Pg 93]</a></span>
+the inanimate carcass.</p>
+
+<p>"Where did we hit him?" asked Billie.</p>
+
+<p>"I can see three places and one is big enough to
+throw a baseball through it."</p>
+
+<p>"That's from the shotgun," said Donald. "It's
+what did the business. Must have been buckshot
+and we were so close it didn't have a chance to
+scatter."</p>
+
+<p>"I'd sure like that hide," said Adrian.</p>
+
+<p>"We'll be in luck if we save our own," remarked
+Billie. "Unless we can do something for the woman,
+we'd better be jogging along."</p>
+
+<p>By this time the woman had risen to her feet and
+the boys could see that she was not a peon as they
+had supposed, but of the better class.</p>
+
+<p>"Where could she have come from?" queried
+Donald under his breath.</p>
+
+<p>"Suppose you ask her," laughed Adrian.</p>
+
+<p>Donald did so. At first she was too dazed to
+answer, but after Donald spoke a few words quietly
+and in his very best Spanish, she was able to answer
+his questions.</p>
+
+<p>"Is this your house?" he asked.</p>
+
+<p>"No, Se&ntilde;or; my house is down the mountain."</p>
+
+<p>"What are you doing here alone?"</p>
+
+<p>She gave him a startled glance and then hugged
+the child closer to her breast.</p>
+
+<p>"You need not fear us," were the reassuring
+words.</p>
+
+<p>"The soldiers came," she said slowly. "They had<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_94" id="Page_94" href="#Page_94">[Pg 94]</a></span>
+already killed the others. They would have killed
+me."</p>
+
+<p>"The soldiers?"</p>
+
+<p>"Yes. They were looking for my husband. They
+said he was hidden in the house; but he was not.
+He is with Gen. Carranza."</p>
+
+<p>"When was this?"</p>
+
+<p>"Yesterday. I have been in the mountains all
+night. There was a fight a few minutes ago and I
+saw them pass. Then I came here, when the awful
+beast sprang out," and again she drew the child to
+her.</p>
+
+<p>"Are you hungry?"</p>
+
+<p>"Si, se&ntilde;or!"</p>
+
+<p>It was the child that answered.</p>
+
+<p>In an instant Billie's hand was in his pack and
+he held out the <i>tortillas</i>, which both mother and
+child took and ate ravenously.</p>
+
+<p>After their hunger had been appeased, they questioned
+the woman further, telling her they were going
+to Vera Cruz.</p>
+
+<p>"If you will come with me down the mountain,
+you can hide in my house," she said.</p>
+
+<p>"We don't want to hide," laughed Billie. "We
+want to get to Vera Cruz. However, we'll see you
+home, if you don't mind."</p>
+
+<p>Without more words the woman led the way,
+Billie insisting upon carrying the little girl.</p>
+
+<p>After a walk of more than two hours, the woman
+<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_95" id="Page_95" href="#Page_95">[Pg 95]</a></span>
+stopped in a little clearing from which a view of the
+mountainside for miles could be gained.</p>
+
+<p>"There is my house," she said, pointing to the
+roof of a really noble mansion constructed of stone.
+"But what is that flag I see on top of it?"</p>
+
+<p>The boys took one good look at it and then they
+let out a wild yell.</p>
+
+<p>"Hurrah!" they cried. "It's the Stars and
+Stripes."</p>
+
+<p>"I don't know what it means away out here," said
+Donald, "but wherever it is it means something.
+Come on!" and he dashed down the mountainside,
+followed by the others.</p>
+
+
+
+<hr style="width: 65%;" />
+<h2><a name="CHAPTER_XI" id="CHAPTER_XI"></a>CHAPTER XI.</h2>
+
+<h3>FRIENDS IN DISTRESS.</h3>
+
+
+<p>Half an hour later the boys stopped beside a
+ruined wall in which was a still more ruined gate.</p>
+
+<p>It was the home of Gen. Luiz Blanco, whose wife
+and child it was that the boys had saved from the
+mountain lion.</p>
+
+<p>Above the house, on a lofty turret, waved the
+American flag&mdash;a fact which caused the boys to
+enter the gate and approach the house without hesitation.</p>
+
+<p>But when they reached the great front door leading
+into the patio, they found it shut and barred.</p>
+
+<p>Here they knocked loudly.<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_96" id="Page_96" href="#Page_96">[Pg 96]</a></span></p>
+
+<p>For some minutes there was no reply, despite
+repeated knocks, but finally a voice called out in
+English:</p>
+
+<p>"Who's there?"</p>
+
+<p>"American boys in trouble."</p>
+
+<p>"What?" was the surprised reply. "Say it again,
+till I see if it is true."</p>
+
+<p>"It's true all right, all right," said Billie. "If
+you don't believe it we'll sing the 'Star Spangled
+Banner,' or 'Hail Columbia'."</p>
+
+<p>They could hear some one removing the bars and
+a moment later the gate swung open, and a huge,
+bewhiskered man in ragged garments and a Winchester
+rifle in his hand stood before them.</p>
+
+<p>"Come in quick," he commanded, "and let's get
+this gate barred. There is no knowing when that
+band of robbers will be back."</p>
+
+<p>"Robbers?" queried Billie, as he set the little girl
+on the ground and extended his hand to the man.
+"What robbers?"</p>
+
+<p>"They call themselves soldiers," and the man
+seized Billie's hand and gave it a mighty grip, which
+made even Broncho Billie wince, "but what do we
+care for them? With four Americans we can defy
+a hundred of them." Then, as Donald and Adrian
+finished barring the gate: "It's certainly good for
+sore eyes to see such faces," and he grasped each
+boy in turn.</p>
+
+<p>"Well, we're mighty glad to see you," replied<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_97" id="Page_97" href="#Page_97">[Pg 97]</a></span>
+Donald. "We expected to find the place deserted."</p>
+
+<p>"How did you know anything about the place?"</p>
+
+<p>"This lady told us it is her home."</p>
+
+<p>"What?" from the man. "Do you mean to tell
+me this is the Se&ntilde;ora Blanco?"</p>
+
+<p>"Even so, Se&ntilde;or," replied the lady. "No one
+would recognize me in these rags and grief. Oh,
+Se&ntilde;or, had it not been for these brave Americans I
+should have been devoured by a lion."</p>
+
+<p>"You don't tell me. But I'd know they were the
+real thing. Their faces show it. But come, let's go
+into the house. You'll excuse me, Se&ntilde;ora, for taking
+possession of your castle."</p>
+
+<p>"It is yours, Se&ntilde;or. Do with it as you will. But
+will you not do me the favor of your name?"</p>
+
+<p>"I beg your pardon, Se&ntilde;ora. I had forgotten. I
+am Ebenezer Black, who owns the ranch across the
+valley. My daughter and I were out on a hunt for
+some lost cattle when we were waylaid by this so-called
+company of soldiers. I drove them off but
+my daughter was wounded and I made for this
+place. Finding no one at home, I took possession."</p>
+
+<p>"I am so glad, Se&ntilde;or. And where is your daughter
+now?"</p>
+
+<p>"Sitting in a big armchair, nursing a wounded
+arm."</p>
+
+<p>"Oh, let us hasten," cried the se&ntilde;ora. "I may be
+of some assistance."</p>
+
+<p>They hurried into the house and into the great
+<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_98" id="Page_98" href="#Page_98">[Pg 98]</a></span>
+library, now all in disorder and strewn with bits of
+cigars and cigarettes. In one of the big leather
+chairs sat a girl of some sixteen or seventeen, with
+her left arm in a sling, but in her right hand she
+held a glistening revolver. She was very slight, but
+dressed in a riding costume of unique design, and
+with a wealth of soft brown hair hanging just to
+her collar. With just a touch of pallor due to the
+wound, the boys thought her the most beautiful girl
+they had ever seen, not excepting Pedro's sister
+Guadalupe.</p>
+
+<p>That the girl was surprised at the addition to the
+party goes without saying. She looked first at her
+father, then at the newcomers and then back to her
+father, as much as to ask: "Who are they?"</p>
+
+<p>"This," said Mr. Black as the se&ntilde;ora came forward,
+"is the lady of the house and her daughter.
+These are American boys, as you can see, although
+you haven't had a chance to know many American
+boys. I don't know their names, but names don't
+count. I'll vouch for them."</p>
+
+<p>"We are very highly complimented," laughed
+Donald, "but I shall be pleased to introduce us. I
+am Donald Mackay. Now that you know me, I
+will introduce my friends, Adrian Sherwood, ranch
+owner and good fellow, and William Stonewall
+Jackson Winkle, better known as 'Broncho Billie.'
+We are known as the Broncho Rider Boys."</p>
+
+<p>"Oh, Father," exclaimed the girl, "I've read
+about them. I have a book some one sent me from
+<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_99" id="Page_99" href="#Page_99">[Pg 99]</a></span>
+the United States telling about their adventures at
+the Keystone ranch."</p>
+
+<p>"You don't say so," from her father. "I didn't
+know they were such celebrities. Such being the
+case, young gentlemen, allow me to introduce my
+daughter, Josephine, commonly called Josie. Now
+then, how did you all come here?"</p>
+
+<p>As briefly as possible Adrian related their adventures
+since they left the City of Mexico the previous
+morning; told about the information contained in
+the telegram from Gen. Maas, and wound up by
+saying: "We may be at war with Mexico right
+now for all we know."</p>
+
+<p>"Well, now what do you think of that?" exclaimed
+Mr. Black. "I just knew I had a reason
+when I hoisted that flag. It's one Josie always carries
+in her saddle bags. It makes her feel safer, she
+says."</p>
+
+<p>"And I hope she is safer," exclaimed Billie, "with
+it waving over her to-day, than she would be without
+it."</p>
+
+<p>"At any rate she has more protection than she
+had a few hours ago," ventured the se&ntilde;ora. "I
+shall never forget how I was protected."</p>
+
+<p>"I'd feel a whole lot better," said Donald, "if I
+had some other weapon. A Colt does very well in
+a tight place; but I certainly miss my Marlin."</p>
+
+<p>"We formerly had quite a supply of arms," was
+the explanation offered by the se&ntilde;ora, "but when
+Gen. Blanco went to join Gen. Carranza he armed
+<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_100" id="Page_100" href="#Page_100">[Pg 100]</a></span>
+all his men and it took about everything we had.
+However, there are a few weapons left&mdash;unless,"
+she added as an afterthought, "the Huerta soldiers
+have discovered their hiding place."</p>
+
+<p>She led the way to the cellar and pointed to a
+spot at one side.</p>
+
+<p>"If you will brush away the dirt that covers the
+floor about there," she said, "you will find a large
+slab. This can be raised, and underneath there
+should still be several good rifles."</p>
+
+<p>Donald and Billie, who had accompanied her,
+while Adrian remained up stairs with the others,
+quickly followed her instructions. The edges of
+the slab were exposed to view and after some effort
+the opening was revealed. In it were four rifles
+and an old-fashioned cannon. The rifles were not
+of the latest make, but two were magazine rifles
+and were a decided improvement over revolvers in
+case it came to defending the house.</p>
+
+<p>"I suppose that old cannon might be mounted on
+the roof somehow and made effective," said Donald
+after he and Billie had inspected the other arms.
+Then to the se&ntilde;ora: "Is there any ammunition?"</p>
+
+<p>"There was powder in that wine cask," she replied,
+"but I don't know whether there is any left.
+The balls for the cannon are on the roof."</p>
+
+<p>The boys examined the cask and found it contained
+quite a quantity of powder. Then they all
+returned to the library and made their report.</p>
+
+<p>"Not a very heavy armament to withstand a siege,
+<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_101" id="Page_101" href="#Page_101">[Pg 101]</a></span>
+is it?" was Mr. Black's comment. "Half a dozen
+rifles with about a hundred cartridges, an old cannon
+that might explode any minute, and four revolvers.
+It won't do."</p>
+
+<p>"What else can we do?" asked Billie.</p>
+
+<p>"Why, now that there are four of us, we'll cross
+the valley to my house. It is just as well located
+to withstand a siege as this and it is thoroughly
+armed and provisioned."</p>
+
+<p>"Suppose we have to fight?"</p>
+
+<p>"Then we'll fight."</p>
+
+<p>"But you forget your daughter and the se&ntilde;ora
+and her child."</p>
+
+<p>"I didn't forget Josie," was the reply, "and,
+wounded as she is, she can take care of herself; but
+I don't know about the others. They would be a
+handicap. Have you anything better to offer?"</p>
+
+<p>Billie scratched his head.</p>
+
+<p>"Not for the moment."</p>
+
+<p>"Well, I have," exclaimed Adrian.</p>
+
+<p>"I thought it was about time Ad woke up,"
+laughed Donald. "Let's have it."</p>
+
+<p>"Captain Lopez told us that there was a large
+body of Carranza's troops down the railroad a short
+distance. If he meant by a short distance six or
+eight miles they can not be more than a couple of
+miles from where we now are. I feel sure that the
+skirmish we passed through has proved disastrous
+to the Huerta forces and I am willing to go out and
+find Captain Lopez and bring relief."</p>
+
+<p>"And I'll go with you," said Billie.<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_102" id="Page_102" href="#Page_102">[Pg 102]</a></span></p>
+
+<p>"I can do just as well alone. If I am not captured
+by the other side I shall make it easily, and,"
+he added, "I am sure I shall not be captured, for I
+can lick any squad of peons that I'm likely to meet."</p>
+
+<p>"You are a brave boy," said Josie, a bit of praise
+which brought the color to Adrian's cheeks and was
+an added incentive for bravery.</p>
+
+<p>"But why shouldn't I go?" insisted Billie.</p>
+
+<p>"You may be needed here. This house is a
+marked place and if a small band of the Huerta
+forces has escaped, this will be one of the places
+where they will rally."</p>
+
+<p>"Your friend is right," agreed Mr. Black. "I
+admire the pluck of all of you, but his plan is best.
+The sooner he goes the better and we will make the
+house as impregnable as we can. Let us hope he is
+successful."</p>
+
+<p>"You can bet on me," was Adrian's reply as he
+shouldered his rifle, looked to the fastening of his
+belt, and descended to the gate, where Mr. Black
+let him out.</p>
+
+<p>After Adrian had gone the others inspected the
+house and its approaches for the purpose of determining
+where they might mount the cannon. They
+finally decided upon a spot in an angle of the roof,
+where a chimney offered some protection and from
+which it commanded the main approach to the
+house.</p>
+
+<p>"I'm not sure we will be able to get the cannon
+<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_103" id="Page_103" href="#Page_103">[Pg 103]</a></span>
+up there," laughed Billie as they passed through the
+library on their way to the cellar, "but we'll do the
+best we can."</p>
+
+<p>"Don't worry," was Josie's reply. "You don't
+know how strong Dad is."</p>
+
+<p>The boys thought they could guess, but when they
+saw Mr. Black pick up the cannon as though it had
+been a log of cord wood and carry it upstairs they
+concluded that Josie was right.</p>
+
+<p>"When I was a young man," was Mr. Black's only
+comment, "I was considered the strongest man in
+our county. I reckon if it came to a pinch I'd be a
+pretty hard man to handle even yet."</p>
+
+<p>The boys had no doubt of it.</p>
+
+<p>By the time the cannon was mounted and loaded
+the sun was nearing the top of the mountains behind
+them and a few minutes later it sank from sight.</p>
+
+<p>"It won't be long now until we shall have to
+depend upon our ears instead of our eyes for our
+protection," said Donald. "Where is the best place
+to watch?"</p>
+
+<p>"I'll tell you what I think," said Billie. "Let one
+watch from the roof and the other down by the gate.
+The one on the roof can hear noises from a distance.
+The one by the gate can hear any one who
+may be sneaking around."</p>
+
+<p>"I'll watch on the roof," said the se&ntilde;ora. "I know
+the chirp of every bird that belongs here. I shall
+know in a minute if anything happens that is unusual."</p>
+
+<p>"And I'll watch by the gate," declared Donald.<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_104" id="Page_104" href="#Page_104">[Pg 104]</a></span></p>
+
+<p>"Only till midnight," said Billie, "when I'll relieve
+you."</p>
+
+<p>"And I'll relieve the se&ntilde;ora," said Josie.</p>
+
+<p>"Where do I come in?" queried Mr. Black.</p>
+
+<p>"You are the general, Dad. You can be everywhere."</p>
+
+<p>Sentry duty is always nerve-racking business. If
+you have ever been obliged to sit alone in the dark
+and watch with your ears, you will understand
+this and you will understand how Donald felt
+sitting alone by the barred gate in the dark,
+3,000 miles from home and in the midst of a
+war-stricken country.</p>
+
+<p>Even the north star looked unfamiliar, so close
+was it to the northern horizon. Once in a while he
+fancied he could hear the se&ntilde;ora weeping, but for at
+least three hours this was all he heard.</p>
+
+<p>Then he heard a distinct "S-s-s-s," which was
+the signal agreed upon between him and the se&ntilde;ora
+if she heard anything unusual.</p>
+
+<p>In an instant he was on the alert. Yes, he was
+sure he heard footsteps near the gate, without. Then
+there were some minutes of silence, then the hiss of
+a fuse and a moment later an explosion which blew
+the gate from its hinges.</p>
+
+
+<hr style="width: 65%;" /><div><span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_105" id="Page_105" href="#Page_105">[Pg 105]</a></span></div>
+<h2><a name="CHAPTER_XII" id="CHAPTER_XII"></a>CHAPTER XII.</h2>
+
+<h3>A NIGHT ATTACK.</h3>
+
+
+<p>Realizing in an instant that the hiss of the fuse,
+like the rattle of the snake, betokened danger, Donald
+drew hastily back into the patio in time to be
+out of reach of the explosion which splintered the
+gate and tore it from its hinges.</p>
+
+<p>Then, with finger on trigger, he awaited the coming
+of the foe.</p>
+
+<p>It was a tense moment and the boy's heart beat
+fast. He had been in many trying situations, but
+never in one where the safety of so many others
+seemed to depend upon him.</p>
+
+<p>He heard the sound of oncoming feet and intuitively
+threw himself upon the ground behind a
+little stone paling which surrounded a dismantled
+fountain.</p>
+
+<p>The act undoubtedly saved his life, for an instant
+later there was a scattering volley and he could
+hear the bullets hit against the stone wall of the
+house behind him.</p>
+
+<p>In an instant he pressed the trigger and a yell
+which followed gave evidence that the bullet found
+a mark.</p>
+
+<p>He fired again, but evidently without effect, and a
+minute later a light at one side of the patio told
+<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_106" id="Page_106" href="#Page_106">[Pg 106]</a></span>
+him that the enemy, or a part of them at least, were
+inside the gate.</p>
+
+<p>As the light flared up Donald fired again, but
+again without avail; but a moment later the cannon
+on the roof spoke.</p>
+
+<p>"So," he thought, "Billie and Mr. Black are at
+last awake."</p>
+
+<p>At the report of the cannon the light went out and
+there was the rush of scurrying feet, followed by
+a shout.</p>
+
+<p>The shout indicated that those within the patio
+had withdrawn to the other side of the gate.</p>
+
+<p>Feeling sure that the patio was now free of the
+enemy for a time at least, Donald retreated in the
+dark to the house and was soon inside. At the first
+landing he encountered Josie, sitting on a step with
+a ready revolver. He was able to see her by the
+dim light of an oil lamp which hung from the
+ceiling.</p>
+
+<p>"Where are the others?" he asked.</p>
+
+<p>"On the roof. They are trying to locate the
+enemy."</p>
+
+<p>Donald ascended to the roof.</p>
+
+<p>"I have a plan," he said, "which will enable us to
+get in another shot. Load with shrapnel and I will
+see if I can't make some sort of a light outside the
+gate. Be ready on the instant."</p>
+
+<p>He ran downstairs and again crept out into the
+dark patio. He had noticed in the afternoon that
+there were several bundles of straw in the stable.</p>
+
+<p>Taking one of these under his arm, he approached<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_107" id="Page_107" href="#Page_107">[Pg 107]</a></span>
+the angle in the wall near the outer gate. He lighted
+a match and as the flame caught the straw he flung
+the bundle over the wall, at the same time darting
+inside the stable.</p>
+
+<p>He had hardly found a safe position when the
+cannon spoke again and evidently with telling effect.</p>
+
+<p>But before those inside the walls had time to
+think, the enemy rushed in, determined to capture
+the place.</p>
+
+<p>In the dark they rushed to the house, but once
+under the gallery which extended all around the
+inside of the patio, they produced a light which
+enabled them to find the doors.</p>
+
+<p>The light also enabled Donald to see those at the
+door and he fired from the stable.</p>
+
+<p>For a moment the fire in the rear disconcerted
+the enemy and several fled, but others took possession
+of the doorway and forced their way in.</p>
+
+<p>The first one who entered fell by a bullet from
+Josie's revolver; but realizing her weakness she
+jumped and fled to the floor above, where she met
+her father coming down.</p>
+
+<p>"They have gained possession of the house," Mr.
+Black told Billie as he and the se&ntilde;ora also descended
+from the roof. "We must now guard the stairway.
+We should be able to hold it indefinitely."</p>
+
+<p>This prediction seemed correct, as the first four
+or five men who attempted to reach the second
+<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_108" id="Page_108" href="#Page_108">[Pg 108]</a></span>
+story never got more than their heads above the
+floor.</p>
+
+<p>After several trials of this sort, they withdrew
+and held a council of war. The result was that a
+few minutes later a voice called out from below:</p>
+
+<p>"If you will surrender, your lives will be spared."</p>
+
+<p>In reply Mr. Black shouted: "If you do not
+withdraw and leave us in peace you will meet a fearful
+punishment."</p>
+
+<p>His reply was greeted with jeers.</p>
+
+<p>"I wonder how many of them there are?" queried
+Billie.</p>
+
+<p>"Quite a bunch from the sound." Then, a moment
+later, "They seem to be going out."</p>
+
+<p>"Maybe they think we will come down," said
+Josie.</p>
+
+<p>"But we must not," exclaimed the se&ntilde;ora. "They
+would kill us. Surely our friend must bring us
+aid soon."</p>
+
+<p>"Let us hope so," was Mr. Black's reply.</p>
+
+<p>And hope was the best they could do.</p>
+
+<p>There was no further attack, although they could
+hear the sound of voices in the patio below.</p>
+
+<p>After a long period of quiet Mr. Black ventured
+the assertion that they were waiting for daylight,
+and his surmise proved correct.</p>
+
+<p>No attempt was made to force an entrance until
+the first faint light of day began to appear. Then
+there was renewed activity below and a few minutes
+later the sound of a single shot.</p>
+
+<p>"I wonder what that was," exclaimed Billie.<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_109" id="Page_109" href="#Page_109">[Pg 109]</a></span></p>
+
+<p>No one could answer, but had Billie been where he
+could see, he would have known that it was Donald
+who fired.</p>
+
+<p>As the light came, Donald, peering through a
+crack in the stable, had seen a man climbing up the
+side of the house toward the roof. Without a
+moment's hesitation he fired and the man dropped,
+shot through the right hand.</p>
+
+<p>But the shot was Donald's undoing. The flash of
+his gun was detected and half a dozen men rushed
+his hiding place and took him prisoner.</p>
+
+<p>He was at once taken before the captain of the
+band and questioned as to the number of defenders
+and as to the whereabouts of Gen. Blanco.</p>
+
+<p>To all the questions Donald gave an evasive
+answer.</p>
+
+<p>"If you will tell me where Gen. Blanco is," said
+the captain, "I will give you your freedom."</p>
+
+<p>"That's easy," was Donald's reply. "He is with
+Gen. Carranza."</p>
+
+<p>"I don't believe it."</p>
+
+<p>"Well, I can't help that, nor does what you believe
+make any difference. It is the truth and what
+you may believe has nothing whatever to do with
+it."</p>
+
+<p>The captain scowled.</p>
+
+<p>"Who is it then, that is defending the house?"</p>
+
+<p>"Americans. You had better let us go, or it will
+<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_110" id="Page_110" href="#Page_110">[Pg 110]</a></span>
+be the worse for you. We had a safe conduct from
+Gen. Huerta, but we were betrayed."</p>
+
+<p>"If I had my way," said the captain, "I'd shoot
+every American in the whole of Mexico."</p>
+
+<p>"I don't see why," from Donald. "We have
+nothing against you."</p>
+
+<p>"Take him away," ordered the captain, "and see
+that he does not escape. Now let us capture the
+others."</p>
+
+<p>There was a rush for the house as Donald was
+led back to the stable.</p>
+
+<p>Billie and Mr. Black heard them coming.</p>
+
+<p>"Go to the roof," commanded Mr. Black, speaking
+to the two females, "and keep yourselves and
+the little girl out of sight. We will hold them back
+here as long as we can and then we will also come
+to the roof."</p>
+
+<p>The command had hardly been obeyed than the
+Mexicans began to crowd up the stairs. They were
+met with shot after shot, but at last all the weapons
+were empty.</p>
+
+<p>"Run for the roof," said Mr. Black as he arose
+to his feet and with his heavy boot kicked a head
+which was just coming up the stairs.</p>
+
+<p>Billie obeyed and a minute later the fugitives had
+gathered upon the last place of safety left.</p>
+
+<p>"If we only had some ammunition," moaned Billie.
+"Can't we do something?"</p>
+
+<p>Then, as in answer to his own query, he picked
+up a twelve-pound cannon ball that lay on the roof
+<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_111" id="Page_111" href="#Page_111">[Pg 111]</a></span>
+and, raising it above his head with both hands,
+hurled it through the opening upon those below.</p>
+
+<p>This unexpected attack caused the besiegers to
+draw back, but only for a moment. Then they came
+on again. In his desperation, Mr. Black, with almost
+superhuman strength, picked up the cannon
+itself, just as Billie had picked up the ball, and
+hurled it down the stairs.</p>
+
+<p>Half a dozen men fell beneath its weight, while
+the others, frightened at such an exhibition of
+strength, fell back in dismay.</p>
+
+<p>A shout from the captain urged them forward,
+but ere they could gather their courage for another
+rush there came the sound of a volley in the patio
+below and a minute later Adrian rushed up the
+stairs, followed by Captain Lopez and a squad of
+his soldiers.</p>
+
+<p>Taken in the rear and entirely by surprise, the
+Huerta forces threw down their arms and cried for
+mercy, and in less than five minutes after the arrival
+of Captain Lopez and his men, the entire force, or
+as many as remained, were prisoners.</p>
+
+
+
+<hr style="width: 65%;" />
+<h2><a name="CHAPTER_XIII" id="CHAPTER_XIII"></a>CHAPTER XIII.</h2>
+
+<h3>A NARROW ESCAPE.</h3>
+
+
+<p>Two days later the three boys sat on the verandah
+of Mr. Black's commodious house awaiting the call
+<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_112" id="Page_112" href="#Page_112">[Pg 112]</a></span>
+to breakfast. Under escort of Captain Lopez' men
+they had crossed the valley between Mr. Black's and
+Gen. Blanco's the day after the night attack and had
+spent the time since in getting a much needed rest.</p>
+
+<p>"It's less than four days since we left the City of
+Mexico," remarked Donald, "but it seems like a
+month. I wonder how matters stand at Vera
+Cruz?"</p>
+
+<p>"From that telegram from Gen. Maas, that we
+took from the lieutenant, Admiral Fletcher may
+have taken the city," said Billie.</p>
+
+<p>"I hope not," from Adrian.</p>
+
+<p>"Why?" asked both the others.</p>
+
+<p>"'Cause I'd like to be there when it happens."</p>
+
+<p>"Yes, so would I," echoed Billie.</p>
+
+<p>"If he has taken it," ventured Donald, "we may
+have difficulty getting through the Mexican lines."</p>
+
+<p>"Well, the best thing we can do," asserted Adrian,
+"is to get somewhere and find out what is going
+on just as soon as we can."</p>
+
+<p>The call to breakfast interrupted their conversation,
+but as soon as they were seated at the table,
+they broached the matter to Mr. Black.</p>
+
+<p>"I expect you are right," he said, "but I'd like to
+have you stay with me a while. It's mighty lonesome
+here for Josie and me."</p>
+
+<p>"If we are at war with the Mexicans," remarked
+Billie, "this will be an unhealthy place for an American,
+I imagine. I should think you would want to
+take your daughter away from here."
+</p>
+
+<p>"Oh, Josie and I are not afraid, are we, Josie?"<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_113" id="Page_113" href="#Page_113">[Pg 113]</a></span></p>
+
+<p>"No indeed, Dad. We are a match for a regiment
+of Mexicans when we are on our own ground."</p>
+
+<p>But in spite of the assertion made by Mr. Black
+he admitted to the boys after breakfast when Josie
+was not present that he wished his daughter was
+safe in Vera Cruz.</p>
+
+<p>"Why don't you go with us?" asked Adrian.
+"We should be pleased to act as an escort."</p>
+
+<p>"Yes," echoed Billie. "We'll see you through."</p>
+
+<p>"I'll tell you what I had thought of doing," said
+Mr. Black. "It's only a good day's ride a-horseback
+to Moreno. We have many friends there with
+whom I could leave her. If you boys would act as
+an escort that far you would be no farther from
+Vera Cruz than you are now and I believe you
+would have a better chance in reaching the port over
+the Tierra Blanca division than on the main line."</p>
+
+<p>"Whether we would or not," replied Adrian, "we
+should be glad to act as your escort."</p>
+
+<p>"There is another thing in favor of that route,"
+continued Mr. Black. "The farther we keep from
+the main line of railroad, the less likely we are to
+fall in with the Huerta forces. The southern territory
+as far as Santa Lucrecia is practically in the
+hands of Carranza."</p>
+
+<p>"From what you say," was Donald's comment,
+"it is greatly to our advantage to do as you wish.
+Let's consider the matter settled and start at once."</p>
+
+<p>"It's too late in the day to start now," was Mr.
+<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_114" id="Page_114" href="#Page_114">[Pg 114]</a></span>
+Black's reply. "We shall wait until to-morrow
+morning and be on our way by daylight. I don't
+want to be riding through the mountains after dark.
+There are wild animals that are worse than the
+soldiers."</p>
+
+<p>"As the Se&ntilde;ora Blanco can testify," laughed Billie.
+"Every time I think of what a close shave
+she had, it gives me a chill."</p>
+
+<p>That afternoon Mr. Black brought out half a
+dozen horses for the inspection of his guests.</p>
+
+<p>"A day's ride on a strange horse isn't always an
+easy task," he explained, "and I thought you might
+amuse yourself trying these. You can each pick
+out the one that suits him best."</p>
+
+<p>It was a task which suited the boys better than
+any they had undertaken in days, and as they had
+not only Mr. Black, but Josie and the General's
+wife for spectators, they were more than pleased
+to show their dexterity after true cowboy fashion.</p>
+
+<p>The remainder of the afternoon was therefore
+spent in riding, throwing the lariat and in shooting,
+much to the gratification of Mr. Black, who
+declared he had never seen a better exhibition of its
+kind.</p>
+
+<p>As a result of their experience, the boys picked
+out three medium-sized horses, which Mr. Black
+emphatically stated showed their good judgment of
+horse flesh, as completely as their riding had proved
+their horsemanship.</p>
+
+<p>They were all in the saddle early the following
+<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_115" id="Page_115" href="#Page_115">[Pg 115]</a></span>
+morning, Josie's wound having healed sufficiently
+to permit her to ride without danger.</p>
+
+<p>Early morning in the tropics is the pleasantest
+time of the day, and although the road from Mr.
+Black's hacienda to Moreno would take them from
+an altitude of over four thousand feet down to
+about two thousand feet above sea level, they
+would be sufficiently up in the mountains to make
+riding fairly comfortable.</p>
+
+<p>The route chosen took the little party first to
+the headquarters of the Carranza force operating
+in that section. They were warmly greeted by
+General Dorantes, the commanding officer, who furnished
+them with a guard of four men and passes
+through the lines, "if," he added as he bade them
+good luck, "you should find it necessary to pass our
+lines. If my reports are correct, we are in possession
+of all the territory to the south."</p>
+
+<p>For hours the cavalcade rode on without incident,
+stopping only long enough to partake of a
+mid-day meal at the hacienda of Don Alvaro Flores,
+a friend of Mr. Black's. Late in the afternoon,
+however, when about six miles from their destination,
+there came to their ears the sound of heavy
+firing&mdash;of field pieces mingled with the occasional
+roll of a machine gun.</p>
+
+<p>They stopped and listened intently.</p>
+
+<p>"Which direction do you make the firing to be?"
+asked Mr. Black of the corporal in command of the
+escort.</p>
+
+<p>"In the direction of Tierra Blanca, sir. It sounds<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_116" id="Page_116" href="#Page_116">[Pg 116]</a></span>
+as though our forces might have been attacked."</p>
+
+<p>"How will that affect our journey?"</p>
+
+<p>"Hard to tell, sir. If we win, as we shall, the
+enemy may fall back toward Santa Lucrecia, or they
+may retreat toward Moreno. If you will take my
+advice, you will halt here until the action is over."</p>
+
+<p>The advice seemed most excellent and the cavalcade
+came to a halt and the riders dismounted to
+give themselves a much-needed rest.</p>
+
+<p>The firing lasted something like twenty minutes,
+then suddenly ceased, with the exception of an
+occasional "Boom!"</p>
+
+<p>"It sounds as though we had beaten them off,"
+said the corporal.</p>
+
+<p>"Is there any way that we can tell in which direction
+they have retreated?"</p>
+
+<p>"Only by a reconnoiter."</p>
+
+<p>"Which is our long suit," declared Billie. "You
+just stay here with the guard, Mr. Black, and we
+three will soon have a report."</p>
+
+<p>Looking to their arms, with which they had
+been well supplied by their host before leaving the
+hacienda, the boys rode forward toward an elevation
+something like a mile distant. From this
+they hoped to get a view of the country.</p>
+
+<p>There was a fairly level road and they dashed
+along at a good rate despite their long ride. The
+horses were as hard as iron and the boys did not
+know the meaning of the word tired.</p>
+
+<p>Reaching the top of the hill, they found a space,<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_117" id="Page_117" href="#Page_117">[Pg 117]</a></span>
+from which they could see clear across the valley
+through which ran the railroad from Santa Lucrecia
+to Vera Cruz. To the right, some miles away, they
+could see a good-sized little city which their common
+sense told them must be Tierra Blanca. To
+the left, but nearer, was the smaller town of Moreno,
+for which they were headed.</p>
+
+<p>Between the two towns, and coming directly toward
+them, was a band of galloping horsemen, probably
+one hundred or more in number.</p>
+
+<p>"Great Scott!" was Billie's ejaculation as he
+caught sight of the horsemen, "they're coming right
+at us."</p>
+
+<p>"I believe you are right," from Donald. "They
+seem to be on this very road."</p>
+
+<p>"What would you take them to be?" was Billie's
+next question.</p>
+
+<p>"Give it up," replied Donald.</p>
+
+<p>"I'll bet I can make a good guess," said Adrian.
+"They are a flying column of Huerta cavalry, sent
+out to test the Carranza lines. They have paid
+their respects to Tierra Blanca and now they are
+headed for Cordoba."</p>
+
+<p>"They'll never get there," said Billie. "They'll
+run into General Dorante's men."</p>
+
+<p>"But if it's a surprise, they'll cut their way
+through."</p>
+
+<p>"It's up to us to see that it is not a surprise!"
+<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_118" id="Page_118" href="#Page_118">[Pg 118]</a></span>
+cried Donald. "Come on!" and he turned and
+dashed back the road they had come.</p>
+
+<p>In less than five minutes they were where they
+had left their companions. In another two minutes
+they had told their story and in another minute
+the corporal and his men were on their way back
+toward General Dorante's headquarters.</p>
+
+<p>"It's only a question of whose horses are the
+best," said Mr. Black. "And now let us to cover."</p>
+
+<p>Leaving the highway, the Americans turned
+sharply to the left and dashed for the shelter of
+a piece of woodland something like a half a mile
+away. Pell-mell they went over rocks and shrubs,
+regardless of themselves or their horses, and succeeded
+in reaching the friendly cover just about
+three minutes before the cavalry came into sight
+over the hill.</p>
+
+<p>"We're all right now," said Mr. Black, "if the
+troopers will stick to the road, but if they should
+take it into their heads to scatter, we might have
+trouble."</p>
+
+<p>With eager eyes the boys watched the oncoming
+horsemen, prepared to flee for their lives if they
+should be discovered, as they realized how useless
+would be any resistance.</p>
+
+<p>Nearer and nearer they came until the leaders
+were at the very spot they had just left, and then
+with a rush they passed by, turning neither to the
+right nor to the left.</p>
+
+<p>Every one in the party heaved a deep sigh of<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_119" id="Page_119" href="#Page_119">[Pg 119]</a></span>
+relief.</p>
+
+<p>"It's a wonder some of them didn't stop," said
+Billie.</p>
+
+<p>"Oh, I don't know," laughed Adrian. "Look
+yonder," and he pointed to the brow of the hill,
+where another, but much smaller body of horsemen
+had appeared. "They evidently didn't intend to
+have their mission interfered with by fighting a rear-guard
+skirmish."</p>
+
+<p>"I think the best thing we can do," said Mr.
+Black, "is to surrender ourselves to the pursuers.
+They are evidently Carranzistas and our passes will
+protect us."</p>
+
+<p>Breaking off a piece of bamboo, Mr. Black tied a
+handkerchief to it and raising it above his head the
+little party rode out of the woods. They were
+sighted at once and a party of horsemen dashed toward
+them, and surrounded them.</p>
+
+<p>It was as they had expected and Gen. Dorantes'
+passes were immediately recognized by the officer in
+command. He was much pleased at the information
+given him concerning the corporal and thanked the
+boys in the name of Gen. Carranza for their good
+offices. He furthermore detached an escort of a
+dozen men to see that they reached Moreno in safety
+and commended them to the care of the jefe politico,
+with the verbal instruction that the boys be allowed
+to proceed on their way to Vera Cruz at their will.</p>
+
+
+<hr style="width: 65%;" />
+<div><span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_120" id="Page_120" href="#Page_120">[Pg 120]</a></span></div>
+<h2><a name="CHAPTER_XIV" id="CHAPTER_XIV"></a>CHAPTER XIV.</h2>
+
+<h3>APRIL TWENTY-ONE.</h3>
+
+
+<p>"Boys," said Mr. Black the following morning
+as they were preparing to pay a visit to the jefe
+politico, "I want you to do me a favor."</p>
+
+<p>The boys looked at him in surprise.</p>
+
+<p>"Well, what is it?" asked Donald, when Mr.
+Black did not immediately continue.</p>
+
+<p>"I want you to accept, as a mark of my appreciation
+of your bravery and good services, the horses
+upon which you are mounted and the accoutrements."</p>
+
+<p>The look of surprise on the faces of the boys
+deepened.</p>
+
+<p>"I am sure, sir," replied Donald, speaking for the
+others, "we should be pleased to accept them if we
+were expecting to remain in the country. We hope,
+however, to leave Vera Cruz in a very few days."</p>
+
+<p>"Boys," and Mr. Black's face was most serious,
+"there is no knowing when you will reach Vera
+Cruz; much less leave it."</p>
+
+<p>"What do you mean?" from Billie.</p>
+
+<p>"I had a long talk with my friend, Don Ramon,
+last night after you were in bed and he tells me that
+the railroad between here and Vera Cruz is in the
+hands of Gen. Maas, the other side of Guayabo, and
+<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_121" id="Page_121" href="#Page_121">[Pg 121]</a></span>
+there is almost no chance of your being allowed to
+pass through the lines."</p>
+
+<p>"Why not?" from Adrian.</p>
+
+<p>"Well, you see, since we have heard anything,
+relations between the two countries have become
+more and more strained and the United States has
+practically declared a blockade on Vera Cruz. The
+entire Atlantic fleet is assembled outside and there
+is liable to be a clash at any time."</p>
+
+<p>"Then we'll accept the horses, Mr. Black," spoke
+up Donald, "and we'll ride to Vera Cruz. It can't
+be more than fifty miles."</p>
+
+<p>"Forty-six by rail," said Mr. Black. "I kind of
+thought you might like to try and make it, is why I
+want to give you the horses," and the speaker smiled
+knowingly.</p>
+
+<p>"The sooner we start the better, I expect," said
+Adrian.</p>
+
+<p>"Yes; after you pay your respects to the mayor."</p>
+
+<p>The foregoing conversation explains how it happened
+that on the morning of April 21, 1914, the
+Broncho Rider Boys looked down from a little hill,
+the top of which was covered by tropical foliage,
+upon the harbor of Vera Cruz, with the American
+fleet in the offing.</p>
+
+<p>By a circuitous route and by two nights of riding,
+hiding in the day, the boys had reached this spot
+about an hour after sunrise.</p>
+
+<p>"Whew!" was Billie's exclamation as he looked
+out across the harbor at the men-of-war flying the
+<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_122" id="Page_122" href="#Page_122">[Pg 122]</a></span>
+American flag. "There's a bunch of them, isn't
+there?"</p>
+
+<p>"Sure is," from Adrian, "and they look peaceable,
+too."</p>
+
+<p>"You never can tell by the looks of a toad how
+far it will jump," laughed Donald. "But peaceable
+or warlike, I'd like mighty well to be on board one
+of them."</p>
+
+<p>"Here, too," from Billie. "I wonder how we're
+going to make it."</p>
+
+<p>"How would it do for one of us to try and get
+into town and find the American consul?" queried
+Adrian.</p>
+
+<p>"Fine," from Donald, "if he succeeded; but bad
+if he did not."</p>
+
+<p>"Then what had we better do?"</p>
+
+<p>"Give it up. Suppose we wait here a while and
+something may turn up."</p>
+
+<p>"I'd like to know what can turn up?" asked
+Billie.</p>
+
+<p>"I don't know; but I was thinking that one of
+the ships might happen to send a boat ashore for
+something. If we saw it coming, we could ride
+quickly into town."</p>
+
+<p>Adrian laughed. "I reckon it would be just as
+hard to get through the Mexican lines then as now.
+No! I'm going out to reconnoiter."</p>
+
+<p>It was an hour later when he returned.</p>
+
+<p>"I've found a way," he said as he threw himself
+on the ground and fanned himself vigorously with
+<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_123" id="Page_123" href="#Page_123">[Pg 123]</a></span>
+his hat. "It's down by the water works. There
+are several Americans down there."</p>
+
+<p>"Good," said Billie. "Let's go. I'm getting
+mighty hungry."</p>
+
+<p>"Now don't be in a rush," cautioned Adrian.
+"There's a picket between here and there. We'll
+have to ride easy. You put the saddles on the
+horses. I'm pretty well tired. I want to tell you
+it's hot."</p>
+
+<p>Billie was busy with the horses when Don suddenly
+pointed out toward the American men-of-war.</p>
+
+<p>"Look!" he exclaimed. "There's something doing."</p>
+
+<p>And sure enough there was.</p>
+
+<p>Out from behind two of the largest vessels there
+suddenly darted a number of launches loaded with
+blue-jackets and marines.</p>
+
+<p>In another instant they had headed for the shore,
+while out behind them trailed the American flag.</p>
+
+<p>The boys sprang to their feet and watched the
+approaching boats with the utmost interest.</p>
+
+<p>"There must be a thousand of them!" exclaimed
+Billie.</p>
+
+<p>"More than that," said Donald, as his eyes ran
+over the oncoming boats. "There's nearer fifteen
+hundred."</p>
+
+<p>"And look there," cried Adrian. "See those two
+smaller ships moving in toward shore."</p>
+
+<p>"What do you suppose they are going to do?"
+asked Billie, all in a tremor of excitement.</p>
+
+<p>"Looks to me," replied Donald, "like they were<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_124" id="Page_124" href="#Page_124">[Pg 124]</a></span>
+going to capture the town."</p>
+
+<p>"Why, that's war!" from Adrian.</p>
+
+<p>"Well, isn't that what we've been expecting? I
+wish I knew what it all means."</p>
+
+<p>As some of the readers may not know what was
+the cause of the action it may be explained that a
+German steamship had arrived the night before
+loaded with arms for Huerta's army. Admiral
+Fletcher had no right to seize the German ship, so
+he determined to seize the port of Vera Cruz. Then
+if the arms were landed they would be in the hands
+of the Americans.</p>
+
+<p>"Well," declared Adrian, "whatever else it means,
+it means business."</p>
+
+<p>"Do you suppose the Mexicans will try to prevent
+the landing?" asked Billie.</p>
+
+<p>"We'll know in a minute, for they are most
+ashore," said Donald.</p>
+
+<p>Donald was right and in another minute a shot
+rang out followed by a rattle of musketry.</p>
+
+<p>"Flash! Flash! Bang! Bang!" spoke the howitzers
+in the foremost of the launches.</p>
+
+<p>Boom! Boom! Boom! came the sound of three
+guns from the ship nearest the city, which proved
+to be the <i>Prairie</i>.</p>
+
+<p>The crash of the six-inch shells as they struck in
+the city could be heard above the rattle of the rifle
+fire which had now become continuous.</p>
+
+<p>"It's a sure enough battle," cried Billie. "Come
+<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_125" id="Page_125" href="#Page_125">[Pg 125]</a></span>
+on! Let's go down!" and he flung himself onto his
+horse.</p>
+
+<p>"What would you do?" cried Donald, seizing
+Billie's horse by the bridle. "You'd be killed by the
+fire from our own guns. This is the best place we
+could be in while the firing is going on. As soon as
+our men have driven the Mexicans out of town,
+then we can go in."</p>
+
+<p>"But I want to take a hand in the fun," said
+Billie.</p>
+
+<p>"It's no fun, as you'll find after it's all over. No
+knowing how many of our boys are being lost, to
+say nothing of the Mexicans."</p>
+
+<p>"Look!" cried Adrian, who had not taken his
+eyes from the scene in the harbor. "There are a
+couple of other ships going into action."</p>
+
+<p>Billie turned at sound of Adrian's words. Sure
+enough, there came flashes from more guns, as the
+<i>Chester</i> and <i>San Francisco</i> moved up into striking
+distance, although at that time the boys did not
+know the vessels' names.</p>
+
+<p>"What show will the Mexicans have against those
+guns!" exclaimed Donald. "They'll be driven out
+of town in short order."</p>
+
+<p>Once more Donald was right and after some minutes
+of firing, the boys realized that the rifle fire
+was becoming less.</p>
+
+<p>"If they retreat, which way do you suppose they
+will go?" queried Adrian.</p>
+
+<p>"I was just thinking about that," was Donald's<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_126" id="Page_126" href="#Page_126">[Pg 126]</a></span>
+reply. "What do you think, Billie?"</p>
+
+<p>"I should think along the main line of railroad."</p>
+
+<p>"And I imagine they'll retreat in every direction,"
+said Adrian.</p>
+
+<p>"In which case," advised Donald, "we'd better
+be prepared to make a dash through."</p>
+
+<p>"Look here," from Billie. "Can't you see that
+the shots are all aimed at one particular place? I'm
+sure if we come around by the south, we can get in
+behind our men some way. It's a good deal better
+chance than to stay here to be shot down by the
+retreating Mexicans."</p>
+
+<p>The others were forced to admit the wisdom of
+Billie's advice and they proceeded to follow it.</p>
+
+<p>Mounting their horses, they rapidly retraced their
+steps for a couple of hundred yards and then headed
+for the harbor.</p>
+
+<p>They had not gone more than half a mile when
+they caught a glimpse of foot soldiers forming in
+line on what appeared to be a parade ground.</p>
+
+<p>"This is no place for us," exclaimed Donald.
+"Back to the woods."</p>
+
+<p>"I'm afraid it's too late," from Adrian.</p>
+
+<p>"I hate to run for it," was Billie's comment, "but
+it's the best we can do. I have no mind to fall into
+Mexican hands right now."</p>
+
+<p>He put spurs to his horse and dashed through a
+little clump of trees which grew by the way, closely
+followed by the other two.</p>
+
+<p>They seemed to have done just the right thing and<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_127" id="Page_127" href="#Page_127">[Pg 127]</a></span>
+were congratulating themselves upon their lucky
+escape, when they heard horses coming from the
+other way.</p>
+
+<p>Billie drew his horse up with a sudden turn.</p>
+
+<p>"It looks as though we'd have to fight for it,
+boys! If we do let's give a good account of ourselves."</p>
+
+<p>They drew their Winchesters for instant use.</p>
+
+<p>The sound of hoofbeats drew nearer and then
+there burst into sight from around a turn in the
+road a sight which caused the boys nearly to fall
+from their horses with laughter.</p>
+
+<p>Riding on a mule and followed by several peons
+on burros was the florid-faced gentleman whom they
+had met on the train the day they left the City of
+Mexico. He was bare-headed and his coat tails
+streamed out in the breeze. He had no saddle and
+was clinging onto the mule by grasping him around
+the neck.</p>
+
+<p>"Help! Help!" he cried as he caught sight of the
+boys. "I surrender. I surrender."</p>
+
+<p>Seeing the boys' horses directly in his path, the
+mule came to a sudden stop, with both feet stuck
+out before him. The result was that the florid-faced
+gentleman, who wished to head a company of marines
+to drive the Mexicans off the earth, shot forward
+over the mule's head and landed in a cactus
+bush.</p>
+
+<p>Now a cactus is not a pleasant thing to sit upon,
+<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_128" id="Page_128" href="#Page_128">[Pg 128]</a></span>
+even when the greatest care is used; but to be shot
+into it as from a catapult is more than any one
+can bear.</p>
+
+<p>With a yell that might have been heard half a
+mile, had it not been for the noise of the guns, the
+man scrambled to his feet and darted away down
+the hill, while the peons stopped at the unexpected
+sight of the boys.</p>
+
+<p>"Americanos!" they cried, and, tumbling off their
+burros, fell on their knees in abject terror, as though
+expecting that their end had come.</p>
+
+
+
+<hr style="width: 65%;" />
+<h2><a name="CHAPTER_XV" id="CHAPTER_XV"></a>CHAPTER XV.</h2>
+
+<h3>THE INSULT AVENGED.</h3>
+
+
+<p>Perceiving that the advantage was on their side,
+the boys did not hesitate to profit by it.</p>
+
+<p>"Do as we bid," ordered Donald sternly, "and
+your lives will be saved. Disobey and we will not
+answer for the consequences."</p>
+
+<p>The kneeling peons uttered never a word, but
+raised their eyes with a look of surprise.</p>
+
+<p>"Get up," was the next command.</p>
+
+<p>The peons obeyed.</p>
+
+<p>"Now conduct us to the water front by a route
+where there are no Mexican soldiers."</p>
+
+<p>"Do you think you can trust them?" asked Billie.</p>
+
+<p>"At any sign of treachery, our first shot will be<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_129" id="Page_129" href="#Page_129">[Pg 129]</a></span>
+for them." Then to the peons: "Now march."</p>
+
+<p>Without a word the peons, five in number, started
+back over the route by which they had come but
+a minute before.</p>
+
+<p>"Where did the other American come from?"
+asked Billie of the peon nearest him as they rode
+along.</p>
+
+<p>"Quien sabe, se&ntilde;or," was the hesitating response.
+"We saw him riding by and we followed him."</p>
+
+<p>"That's the way with loud talkers," remarked
+Adrian. "When the test comes they usually
+weaken."</p>
+
+<p>The firing, which had somewhat subsided for a
+few minutes, suddenly began again with renewed
+vigor, especially on the part of the ships.</p>
+
+<p>"Our boys are getting ready for another advance,"
+said Billie, and his manner became greatly
+excited. "Let's get there in time to take part."</p>
+
+<p>"I'm willing," declared Adrian. "Come on!"</p>
+
+<p>The two boys dug their spurs into their horses
+and dashed forward, upsetting a couple of the peons
+in their flight.</p>
+
+<p>"Hold on!" called out Donald. "You'll get into
+trouble."</p>
+
+<p>Billie and Adrian paid no attention to his cry,
+whereupon he also put spurs to his horse, leaving
+the peons gaping with astonishment in the middle
+of the road.</p>
+
+<p>And now the boys came into sight of the water
+<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_130" id="Page_130" href="#Page_130">[Pg 130]</a></span>
+front where the fighting was going on. It was at
+the instant that the order had been given to clear
+the space around the custom house, and the boys
+saw the marines advance on the double quick.</p>
+
+<p>The Mexicans gave way, but volley after volley
+was poured down upon the advancing Americans
+from the roofs of houses and from nearby
+church towers.</p>
+
+<p>There were several shots in rapid succession from
+the <i>Chester</i>, which had drawn in more closely, every
+one of which struck a tower where a large force
+of Mexicans had gathered.</p>
+
+<p>The tower toppled and fell, carrying many with
+it.</p>
+
+<p>"Hurrah!" cried Billie. "Give it to them!" and,
+firing his rifle as he went, he rode right down into
+the main street.</p>
+
+<p>"He'll be killed by our own men!" cried Donald.</p>
+
+<p>But he was not. Instead he dashed into the open
+space in front of the custom house, just as the
+marines swept by, his hat off and his rifle cracking
+as fast as he could fire.</p>
+
+<p>Seeing that the danger from the marines was
+past, Donald and Adrian fell in behind Billie, just
+as an officer came around the corner at the head
+of another company.</p>
+
+<p>Espying the boys, he halted his command.</p>
+
+<p>"What are you doing here?" he demanded.</p>
+
+<p>"We just came to town," replied Billie, "and
+we're trying to help avenge the insult to the flag."</p>
+
+<p>"Good!" was the emphatic reply. "Fall in behind<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_131" id="Page_131" href="#Page_131">[Pg 131]</a></span>
+us. You may be of service."</p>
+
+<p>The boys obeyed and followed the company as
+it swept up the street. Presently they came to
+a barricade, behind which the marines had taken
+a stand. The boys expected the command to halt,
+but instead they passed the barricade and pushed
+onward toward the outskirts of the city.</p>
+
+<p>All the time there was a continuous fire upon
+them by men secreted on the roofs of houses.</p>
+
+<p>"I'd clean out those snipers if I were in command,"
+said Donald to his companions.</p>
+
+<p>The words were hardly out of his mouth ere another
+company of marines made its appearance and
+the men dashed into the houses on either side of
+the street.</p>
+
+<p>"Somebody has the same idea, Don," was Billie's
+comment as they rode along.</p>
+
+<p>Two blocks farther came the order to halt and
+entrench. A minute later the officer called the boys
+toward him.</p>
+
+<p>"Would you rather lend us your horses, or act
+as orderlies?" he asked.</p>
+
+<p>"If it's all the same to you," was the reply, "we'll
+serve as orderlies."</p>
+
+<p>"Very well. Will you," turning to Adrian, "go
+back to the custom house and tell Captain Rush
+that we have reached our position. You," to Billie,
+"ride with all speed to the landing and say that the
+enemy has retreated toward the water works. They
+<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_132" id="Page_132" href="#Page_132">[Pg 132]</a></span>
+should not be allowed to stop long enough to do
+any damage."</p>
+
+<p>The two boys were off like the wind to carry the
+orders.</p>
+
+<p>"Anything for me?" asked Donald.</p>
+
+<p>"Not for the present. Better dismount and get
+behind something."</p>
+
+<p>Two minutes later Adrian pulled up in front of
+the Custom House and delivered his message, while
+Billie kept on to the water's edge.</p>
+
+<p>"Do you know where the water works are?"
+asked the officer to whom Billie gave his order.</p>
+
+<p>"Yes, sir!"</p>
+
+<p>"Then lead us to it."</p>
+
+<p>Without a word Billie obeyed and the Jackies
+followed on the run.</p>
+
+<p>The information was evidently received none too
+soon, for they encountered quite a force of Mexicans,
+guarding the works.</p>
+
+<p>A volley from the bluejackets was returned by
+a scattering fire and the Mexicans turned and fled.</p>
+
+<p>But the volley had been sufficient to lose Billie
+his mount, as his horse came to his knees with a
+bullet in his shoulder.</p>
+
+<p>Without waiting to see the cause of Billie's fall
+any more than to ask if he was hit, the Jackies
+pushed on toward the water works, leaving Billie
+to look out for himself as best he could until the
+work in hand was completed.</p>
+
+<p>"This is sure enough tough luck," was Billie's
+<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_133" id="Page_133" href="#Page_133">[Pg 133]</a></span>
+comment as he helped the horse to his feet and
+examined the wound. "It will lay him up for a
+week."</p>
+
+<p>He took the horse by the bridle and led him
+slowly back toward the Custom House, where he
+reported to an officer and hunted up Adrian.</p>
+
+<p>"What had we better do now?" he asked. "I'd
+like to find a place to tend to my horse."</p>
+
+<p>"The fighting seems about over," was Adrian's
+reply, "and I reckon the horse will be given attention
+by some one."</p>
+
+<p>"Oh, I don't want to make any trouble, Ad! If
+nobody objects, suppose we go hunt a stable."</p>
+
+<p>They were about to leave when a sergeant
+stopped them.</p>
+
+<p>"You're to follow me to the Captain," he said.
+"Here," to a marine who stood by, "take charge
+of these horses and see that the lame one is cared
+for."</p>
+
+<p>"I wonder if they will take our horses away from
+us?" muttered Adrian as they followed the sergeant.</p>
+
+<p>"Give it up. I wonder what he wants of us?"</p>
+
+<p>It did not take them long to find out.</p>
+
+<p>"Are you the boys that brought the messages
+from Lieutenant Blunt?" asked Captain Rush.</p>
+
+<p>"Yes, sir."</p>
+
+<p>"Will you undertake another mission?"</p>
+
+<p>"With pleasure," replied Adrian.</p>
+
+<p>"Same here, sir," from Billie, "but my horse has
+been wounded."</p>
+
+<p>"That's bad. However, I guess we can find another."<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_134" id="Page_134" href="#Page_134">[Pg 134]</a></span></p>
+
+<p>"Sure, sir. I can borrow Don's."</p>
+
+<p>"Who is Don?"</p>
+
+<p>"He's the other one of us, sir. He is still out
+with Lieutenant Blunt."</p>
+
+<p>"Well," said the Captain, "either two of you
+will do. What I want is to find out to just what
+point the Mexican army is falling back. Do you
+think you can find out?"</p>
+
+<p>"Sure."</p>
+
+<p>"Very well. My compliments to Lieutenant Blunt
+and give him this order. He will pass two of you
+through the lines. The other can remain with him.
+Sergeant, their horses."</p>
+
+<p>Five minutes later, both astride Adrian's horse
+and leading the other, they appeared at the outpost
+and delivered the order.</p>
+
+<p>"Which two shall it be?" laughed the lieutenant
+as he looked the boys over.</p>
+
+<p>"I guess it will have to be Adrian and Don," replied
+Billie ruefully. "I've had glory enough for
+one day. The insult to the flag has been avenged
+and the Stars and Stripes are floating over Vera
+Cruz."</p>
+
+<p>"I think it's only fair that Don, as you call him,
+should share in the adventure," said the lieutenant,
+"and the sooner you go the better. It is almost
+sundown now."</p>
+
+<p>Then as Donald and Adrian started on their mission:<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_135" id="Page_135" href="#Page_135">[Pg 135]</a></span></p>
+
+<p>"Success to you and report here when you
+return."</p>
+
+<p>"Is there any place near here where I can care
+for my horse?" asked Billie as soon as the others
+had passed out of sight.</p>
+
+<p>"Why, yes. There are stables in almost any of
+these houses. Here, try this one," and the lieutenant
+indicated the one before which they were
+standing.</p>
+
+<p>Billie knocked on the big door, but there was
+no reply.</p>
+
+<p>"Knock louder," laughed the lieutenant. "Use
+your boot."</p>
+
+<p>Billie used his foot and with such vigor that
+the gate flew open.</p>
+
+<p>When no one appeared to answer his summons,
+he stuck his head inside the patio and called lustily.</p>
+
+<p>"Must be deserted," he finally remarked. "Such
+being the case, lieutenant, I reckon I might as well
+take possession."</p>
+
+<p>"Sure. Go ahead. If every one has gone, I
+may join you later."</p>
+
+<p>Billie led his horse within and looked around.
+It was a large house and the patio was the most
+elaborate Billie had ever seen. He had thought that
+Pedro's home in Mexico City was fine, but this was
+much finer.</p>
+
+<p>"They must be swells," was the lad's comment.
+<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_136" id="Page_136" href="#Page_136">[Pg 136]</a></span>
+"I reckon they became frightened and have run
+away with General Maas."</p>
+
+<p>He started to lead the horse to the stable and
+then stopped.</p>
+
+<p>"I might as well shut this big gate," he thought.
+"I'll leave the little gate open so the lieutenant can
+come in."</p>
+
+<p>He pushed the big gate together and dropped the
+bolt in its place.</p>
+
+<p>"Now to do something for the horse," and he
+turned to the animal which stood patiently by.</p>
+
+<p>Then he stopped and stood in mute astonishment
+at what his eyes beheld.</p>
+
+<p>In the center of the patio, with rifle in hand,
+aimed squarely at his head, stood a figure he had
+last seen on the banks of the Rio Grande more than
+a year before&mdash;the figure of a man whom he had
+known only as Santiago.</p>
+
+<p>The recognition was mutual, but instead of the
+friendliness which had always before marked the
+attitude of the strange man, there was now upon his
+face a look of the most bitter hatred.</p>
+
+
+
+<hr style="width: 65%;" />
+<h2><a name="CHAPTER_XVI" id="CHAPTER_XVI"></a>CHAPTER XVI.</h2>
+
+<h3>SHADOWING AN ARMY.</h3>
+
+
+<p>When Donald and Adrian left the city they rode
+slowly along for some distance without any sign
+<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_137" id="Page_137" href="#Page_137">[Pg 137]</a></span>
+of the retreating Mexicans, except the occasional
+sight of some camp utensil which had been thrown
+aside as too heavy to carry. Occasionally they met
+peons or women, who looked at them curiously, but
+all of whom were more than willing to tell of the
+army that had so recently passed.</p>
+
+<p>"How many men do you suppose General Maas
+has?" queried Adrian.</p>
+
+<p>"The lieutenant said it was supposed he had about
+seven thousand. It may be more, and it may be
+less."</p>
+
+<p>"Well, they're certainly light-footed," laughed
+Adrian. "Don't you think we ought to get closer?"</p>
+
+<p>"If we can without being seen."</p>
+
+<p>They put spurs to their horses and for a mile
+or more galloped along at a fair speed.</p>
+
+<p>Then from a little eminence they saw the rear
+guard of the retreating army.</p>
+
+<p>"This is near enough," cautioned Donald.</p>
+
+<p>They halted and watched the marching men.</p>
+
+<p>"How far would you say we are from town,
+Don?"</p>
+
+<p>"At least seven or eight miles."</p>
+
+<p>"Do you know what towns are in this direction?"</p>
+
+<p>"Not the slightest idea. That's the next thing
+we must find out."</p>
+
+<p>The enemy having by this time passed out of
+sight, they again spurred forward, but holding their
+distance.</p>
+
+<p>Darkness had now fallen and the boys were<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_138" id="Page_138" href="#Page_138">[Pg 138]</a></span>
+obliged to pick their way more carefully.</p>
+
+<p>For half an hour they rode silently and then
+Donald spoke:</p>
+
+<p>"They certainly will not march all night. They
+must have some place in mind."</p>
+
+<p>"So I think," from Adrian. "But there seems
+no sign of a halt."</p>
+
+<p>Ten minutes later, however, they caught sight
+of a fire light.</p>
+
+<p>"That looks like it might be a camp," suggested
+Adrian.</p>
+
+<p>They rode cautiously forward.</p>
+
+<p>"It surely is," affirmed Donald a couple of minutes
+later. "We'd better dismount and do a little
+reconnoitering on foot."</p>
+
+<p>The suggestion was immediately put into effect.</p>
+
+<p>Leaving their horses tethered beneath a giant
+palm, which would serve as a landmark, the boys
+crept stealthily forward. In a few minutes they
+were near enough to see figures about the fire.</p>
+
+<p>"They are evidently getting ready to pass the
+night," said Donald.</p>
+
+<p>"Yes," from Adrian, "and there is another fire
+off yonder," and he pointed to the right.</p>
+
+<p>"They are getting ready to post their pickets,"
+explained Donald.</p>
+
+<p>"Then we'd better get busy, Don. There must
+be some way of finding out where the army is going
+to stop."</p>
+
+<p>As with one accord they drew still nearer the<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_139" id="Page_139" href="#Page_139">[Pg 139]</a></span>
+camp, they could smell the coffee and their appetites
+began to assert themselves.</p>
+
+<p>"Wish I had some," whispered Adrian.</p>
+
+<p>"You'll get to be as bad as Billie first thing you
+know," was the retort. "But, hush! There comes
+some one."</p>
+
+<p>They lay flat on the ground and listened.</p>
+
+<p>Whoever it might be was coming directly toward
+them.</p>
+
+<p>Not a move did the boys make, hoping that they
+might not be discovered, but ready to act if they
+were.</p>
+
+<p>When within ten feet of them the footsteps halted
+and they heard a voice say:</p>
+
+<p>"This will be far enough. You are the end man
+on the line."</p>
+
+<p>"Bueno, caporal!"</p>
+
+<p>"Keep a close watch," cautioned the corporal.
+"You never know what these Americans may do."</p>
+
+<p>"Si, Se&ntilde;or. How far are we from Vera Cruz?"</p>
+
+<p>"About four leagues" (twelve miles). "General
+Maas will make a stand at Tejeria, about a league
+further on."</p>
+
+<p>Then as he moved away. "Remember now, no
+sleeping. This is a real war."</p>
+
+<p>"Bueno, mi caporal. I understand."</p>
+
+<p>The corporal departed and the sentry, shouldering
+his rifle, began pacing his station.</p>
+
+<p>A minute later Donald gave Adrian a dig with
+<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_140" id="Page_140" href="#Page_140">[Pg 140]</a></span>
+his elbow as a signal, and they slowly crawled
+away.</p>
+
+<p>"That's the information we are after," whispered
+Donald when they were out of earshot. "Now to
+get back to Vera Cruz as quickly as possible."</p>
+
+<p>They rose to their feet and ran swiftly but silently
+toward the palm tree, where their horses were
+tethered.</p>
+
+<p>Suddenly Adrian stopped and grabbed Donald by
+the arm.</p>
+
+<p>"What is it, Ad?" asked Donald.</p>
+
+<p>"Can't you see! There is some one there with
+the horses."</p>
+
+<p>They both peered through the darkness and Donald
+quickly perceived that Adrian was right.</p>
+
+<p>Then as by one impulse they drew a few steps
+nearer.</p>
+
+<p>In the dim starlight they were able to make out
+the figures of several men.</p>
+
+<p>"Do you think they are soldiers?" whispered Don.</p>
+
+<p>Adrian shook his head.</p>
+
+<p>"Camp followers. Thieves," he whispered.</p>
+
+<p>Donald nodded his head in acquiescence.</p>
+
+<p>The boys lay down upon the ground and put
+their heads together.</p>
+
+<p>"It wouldn't be any trick at all," whispered Donald,
+"if it were not for the pickets. But any noise
+will bring down upon us a couple of hundred men.
+Maybe more. We have simply got to dispose of
+that outfit without noise. But how?"</p>
+
+<p>"Bad job," was Adrian's only reply.<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_141" id="Page_141" href="#Page_141">[Pg 141]</a></span></p>
+
+<p>"If the horses were only our Wyoming cow
+ponies, they'd come at our call."</p>
+
+<p>"But they're not," replied Adrian.</p>
+
+<p>For several minutes neither spoke, but lay silently
+watching the movements of the men about
+the horses.</p>
+
+<p>"How many can you make out, Ad?"</p>
+
+<p>"Five."</p>
+
+<p>"I don't see but four."</p>
+
+<p>Adrian pointed to the left, about ten or twelve
+feet, to one who stood alone.</p>
+
+<p>"What's he doing there?"</p>
+
+<p>"Give it up." Then a moment later: "I have
+it!"</p>
+
+<p>"Well, what is it?"</p>
+
+<p>"He's watching for us to return. That's what
+they're all waiting for. They think we'll be a great
+catch."</p>
+
+<p>"That's just it," from Donald. "Let's fool
+them!"</p>
+
+<p>"Well, first, let's capture the one yonder. We'll
+show them a Wyoming Indian trick."</p>
+
+<p>Slowly and silently the boys wiggled their way
+to where the lone robber stood. Then as silently as
+a ghost Donald arose, while Adrian bent on his
+knees.</p>
+
+<p>There was a swift movement and Donald's arm
+was around the Mexican's neck, shutting off his
+wind, while Adrian pulled his feet from beneath
+<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_142" id="Page_142" href="#Page_142">[Pg 142]</a></span>
+him. In another minute he was bound by his own
+sash and gagged with a handful of grass.</p>
+
+<p>"That's one!" exclaimed Donald, as he sat upon
+his prisoner's chest. "Now, how about the others?"</p>
+
+<p>"Not so easy, Don."</p>
+
+<p>"But it has to be done," declared Donald.
+"Scratch your head."</p>
+
+<p>Adrian did so, but to no avail.</p>
+
+<p>Time was passing and they did not know how
+long ere something would turn up, when Donald
+gave Adrian a kick.</p>
+
+<p>"Look! They're getting uneasy."</p>
+
+<p>This was undoubtedly true, as the men were moving
+about and one of them even had the temerity
+to light a cigarette.</p>
+
+<p>Then of a sudden Adrian spoke.</p>
+
+<p>"I've got it!" he exclaimed under his breath.
+"Help drag this chap farther away."</p>
+
+<p>They picked him up bodily and carried him fifteen
+or twenty feet.</p>
+
+<p>"Now, listen," said Adrian, "both of you. You,
+Don, sneak as near the horses as you dare. I'll
+give you just five minutes by my watch. Then I
+am going to give this man one chance for his life.
+I am going to take the gag from his mouth and
+let him give one call for help. If he makes another
+sound, it will be his last."</p>
+
+<p>"Then what?"</p>
+
+<p>"Those fellows have waited so long that they are
+tired. They will all rush to where they expect to
+<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_143" id="Page_143" href="#Page_143">[Pg 143]</a></span>
+find him. Then you will rush in and cut the tethers.
+By the time they find this man I will be with you.
+Sabe?"</p>
+
+<p>"Good!" from Donald. "I'm off."</p>
+
+<p>In exactly five minutes by his watch Adrian gave
+the prisoner a rough shake.</p>
+
+<p>"You know what I said?"</p>
+
+<p>The man nodded his head.</p>
+
+<p>"Well, I am now going to take out your gag.
+If you make more than one cry, or utter more than
+one word, your own knife will finish you."</p>
+
+<p>He held the knife before the man's eyes. Then
+with the knife in one hand, Adrian pulled the wad
+of grass from between the prisoner's teeth.</p>
+
+<p>No sooner had the man drawn one long breath
+than he let out a yell that might have been heard
+half a mile and which he was about to repeat with
+variations, when with a swift movement, Adrian
+forced the grass back into his mouth and the yell
+died in a dismal gurgle.</p>
+
+<p>"I ought to use the knife," said Adrian, "but I
+guess this will do."</p>
+
+<p>With a bound he sprang to his feet and dashed
+to where Donald was already performing his part
+of the work.</p>
+
+<p>The plan had worked exactly as Adrian had figured,
+and in another moment the boys were astride
+the horses and away toward Vera Cruz.</p>
+
+<p>But one thing they had not taken into consideration.
+That single yell of their erstwhile prisoner
+<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_144" id="Page_144" href="#Page_144">[Pg 144]</a></span>
+had aroused the Mexican pickets and from half
+a dozen directions came the sound of rifle shots and
+then the sound of a bugle calling to arms.</p>
+
+<p>Even while Adrian was running toward the
+horses, the excitement had begun, and as the boys
+started on their homeward ride, a volley from the
+encamped forces sent the bullets whistling by their
+ears.</p>
+
+<p>"This is no place for us!" cried Donald. "Don't
+be afraid to use the spur. It is our only chance."</p>
+
+<p>And now as they rode furiously forward, came
+the sound of firing on their left and some distance
+ahead.</p>
+
+<p>"What does it mean?" called out Adrian as they
+rode neck and neck through the darkness.</p>
+
+<p>"Search me, Ad; but our only chance is in our
+horses," and Donald again plied the spur.</p>
+
+<p>Outlined against the sky at the top of a small
+knoll, they could see a small body of horsemen.</p>
+
+<p>"Keep away to the right," said Donald. "Keep
+in the valley and in the shadow," and he drew off
+the beaten highway, with Adrian close behind.</p>
+
+<p>On the soft earth their horses' hoofs made no
+sound and in a couple of minutes more they descended
+into a little valley and the noise of the alarm
+passed out of hearing.</p>
+
+<p>"It was a mighty close shave," declared Adrian
+a few minutes later, when they pulled their horses
+down to a walk to allow them to catch their breath.</p>
+
+<p>"Sure was," from Donald, "but we got the information<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_145" id="Page_145" href="#Page_145">[Pg 145]</a></span>
+we went after."</p>
+
+<p>Half an hour later they were challenged by the
+American pickets, which had been thrown even
+further forward than where the boys had passed
+through the lines. They stated their mission and
+were at once sent under guard to the officer of
+the day.</p>
+
+<p>"Oh, it's you!" was the lieutenant's salutation as
+he saw who it was. "Did you get what you went
+after?"</p>
+
+<p>"Yes, sir," from Donald. "The enemy has halted
+at Tejeria, fifteen miles away."</p>
+
+<p>"Well done. I'll send an orderly to carry the
+report to headquarters. You boys are entitled to
+a rest."</p>
+
+<p>"Where's Billie?" asked Adrian, looking around
+after the orderly had departed.</p>
+
+<p>"Who?"</p>
+
+<p>"Billie. Our chum."</p>
+
+<p>"Oh, yes," replied the lieutenant. "He's disappeared."</p>
+
+<p>"Disappeared?"</p>
+
+<p>"Yes. He went into this house here," pointing
+to the building before which he had stationed himself,
+"and when I went in later to see how he was
+coming on with his wounded horse, I found the
+horse standing in the middle of the patio, but your
+chum had disappeared."</p>
+
+<p>"And then what?" queried Donald.</p>
+
+<p>"Nothing. I made up my mind he had gone<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_146" id="Page_146" href="#Page_146">[Pg 146]</a></span>
+after something to put on his horse and I haven't
+thought much about him since."</p>
+
+<p>"Then it's up to us to find him. Can we go inside?"</p>
+
+<p>"Sure," laughed the lieutenant. "Go as far as
+you like, only keep inside the lines."</p>
+
+<p>Without more words the boys entered the patio.</p>
+
+
+
+<hr style="width: 65%;" />
+<h2><a name="CHAPTER_XVII" id="CHAPTER_XVII"></a>CHAPTER XVII.</h2>
+
+<h3>BILLIE GETS A SURPRISE.</h3>
+
+
+<p>When Billie found himself looking into the
+muzzle of a rifle in the hands of Santiago, his first
+impulse was to call out; but the expression on Santiago's
+face caused him to remain silent.</p>
+
+<p>While the strange man owed his life to the lad,
+as is related in the story of the "Broncho Rider
+Boys with the Texas Rangers," there was that in
+the man's face which told that he was under a
+severe mental strain, and Billie did not think it wise
+to presume upon his former friendship.</p>
+
+<p>Therefore, he remained quiet, waiting for Santiago
+to speak.</p>
+
+<p>If he recognized Billie, he gave no intimation of
+the fact; but in a harsh voice commanded: "Up
+with your hands!"</p>
+
+<p>Billie obeyed.</p>
+
+<p>"Turn to the left and march. In there," he continued<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_147" id="Page_147" href="#Page_147">[Pg 147]</a></span>
+a moment later as Billie approached an open
+door in the rear of the patio.</p>
+
+<p>Into the house Billie went&mdash;into a large room,
+but dimly lighted. Santiago followed, closing the
+door behind him with a kick.</p>
+
+<p>"Why shouldn't I shoot you down like a dog?"
+asked Santiago as soon as the door was closed.</p>
+
+<p>"I can't see any reason," was the reply, "except
+that it might cause you a lot of trouble when it
+was found out. I imagine that Admiral Fletcher
+is going to be pretty severe upon snipers and others
+who shoot Americans."</p>
+
+<p>"Bah!" exclaimed Santiago angrily. "I spit upon
+Americans! Bah!"</p>
+
+<p>"That's all right," Billie agreed, "if it's the way
+you feel about it."</p>
+
+<p>"Just because you Americans have driven away
+a few soldiers with the guns of your great fleet, you
+don't think you can conquer Mexico, do you?"</p>
+
+<p>"I hadn't thought much about it."</p>
+
+<p>"Then it's time you did, as you may never have
+another chance."</p>
+
+<p>"Well, then," explained Billie, "I'll tell you how
+it looks to me. You might a great deal better be
+governed by the United States than by a man like
+Huerta."</p>
+
+<p>"Huerta! Huerta!" fairly screamed Santiago.
+"He is not the governor of Mexico."</p>
+
+<p>"No," from Billie. "He calls himself the provisional<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_148" id="Page_148" href="#Page_148">[Pg 148]</a></span>
+president. In reality he is a dictator."</p>
+
+<p>"He is a murderer!" shouted the thoroughly excited
+man.</p>
+
+<p>"Then what are you worrying about? All that
+the Americans want is to get rid of Huerta. They
+don't want Mexico. Didn't you know that,
+Santiago?"</p>
+
+<p>"What? Who calls me Santiago? I am Ixtazhl,
+Prince of the Aztecs and guardian of the treasures
+of Montezuma. Who calls me Santiago?"</p>
+
+<p>In his excitement he rested the stock of his rifle
+upon the floor and bent upon Billie a gaze so fierce
+as greatly to disconcert him for the moment.</p>
+
+<p>But Billie was not a lad to be easily unnerved
+and after a moment he replied calmly:</p>
+
+<p>"I call you by the only name I know. It was
+the one you used on the Rio Grande when you sent
+me on a mission to Pancho Villa."</p>
+
+<p>"Villa! Villa!" repeated Santiago, as though
+trying to recall something that had passed from
+his memory. "Villa! Where have I heard that
+name before?"</p>
+
+<p>"On the Rio Grande is all I can tell you. Do
+you remember Don Rafael?"</p>
+
+<p>At mention of the name the expression on Santiago's
+face changed again, this time to one of fiercest
+rage.</p>
+
+<p>"Don Rafael!" he cried. "Don Rafael! Now I
+<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_149" id="Page_149" href="#Page_149">[Pg 149]</a></span>
+know you! You are Don Rafael. That is why I
+should kill you!"</p>
+
+<p>"Great Scott, no, I am not Don Rafael!" shouted
+Billie as Santiago again raised his rifle and the
+lad perceived that he had to do with a crazy man.
+"I'm the boy that saved your life when Don Rafael
+tried to kill you. Don't you remember?"</p>
+
+<p>Again Santiago lowered his weapon, and again
+there came upon his face that puzzled expression.</p>
+
+<p>"Tell me, Santiago&mdash;I mean Prince Iztazil, or
+whatever you call it, what are you doing here?"</p>
+
+<p>Santiago eyed him suspiciously, but finally laid his
+rifle across a table in the center of the room and
+approached nearer the lad.</p>
+
+<p>"Listen!" he said in a whisper. "I am the guardian
+of the treasure of Montezuma. It is to be used
+to free Mexico from the Spaniard. He must be
+driven out. The land belongs to the Aztec."</p>
+
+<p>"But where is the Aztec?" queried Billie. "I
+know him not."</p>
+
+<p>"I am he. The peons are my people. The Spaniard&mdash;bah!
+He owns the houses and he owns the
+lands; but he must be driven out."</p>
+
+<p>"Isn't that what Villa says?"</p>
+
+<p>"Villa? Villa?" again repeated Santiago, and
+again he lapsed into silence.</p>
+
+<p>For some minutes he remained motionless ere
+he stepped back, picked up his rifle and started for
+a door leading to a stairway.</p>
+
+<p>"Come!" he commanded. "I will show you."</p>
+
+<p>"Hadn't we better take care of the horse first?"<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_150" id="Page_150" href="#Page_150">[Pg 150]</a></span>
+asked Billie, not at all anxious to be wandering
+around with an armed lunatic. "He may die."</p>
+
+<p>"What is a horse when the future of Mexico is
+at stake, my son? Come with me and you shall
+hear a strange tale."</p>
+
+<p>"I have heard one already," was Billie's mental
+comment, but realizing by the term son which Santiago
+had applied to him that he was in no immediate
+danger and trusting to his wits to finally overcome
+the strange man should it become necessary,
+he followed.</p>
+
+<p>At the head of the stairs was another door, which
+Santiago opened and entered. It was a sort of ante-room,
+much like the entrance into a lodge room.
+Around the walls was a motley collection of firearms,
+swords, spears and smaller weapons.</p>
+
+<p>Stopping in front of one of the racks, Santiago
+placed his rifle in it, and then from another took a
+couple of small swords, one of which he handed
+to Billie.</p>
+
+<p>"This is a bug house sure enough," muttered the
+boy as he took the sword and examined it curiously.
+"I wonder what next?"</p>
+
+<p>He had not long to wait, for opening a closet,
+Santiago took therefrom two beautifully embroidered
+robes, one of which he threw over his own
+shoulders and the other of which he put on Billie.</p>
+
+<p>"It doesn't hardly match my hat," laughed Billie.</p>
+
+<p>Without a word, Santiago removed Billie's sombrero
+<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_151" id="Page_151" href="#Page_151">[Pg 151]</a></span>
+and hung it on a peg in the closet, which he
+closed.</p>
+
+<p>Then he opened another door and led Billie into
+a large, brilliantly lighted room, hung with the richest
+tapestries.</p>
+
+<p>"Looks like we had strayed into some Turkish
+bath house," thought Billie, "but I might as well
+see the thing through."</p>
+
+<p>"Sit here beside me, my son," Santiago finally
+said. "You shall become my heir. I will introduce
+you to the court."</p>
+
+<p>Santiago clapped his hands, as though bidding
+a servant to attend; but there was no response.</p>
+
+<p>He turned his head from one side to the other
+as though in amazement and again clapped his
+hands, this time with vigor.</p>
+
+<p>After a moment's delay, there was a movement
+behind one of the draperies and presently the curtain
+was drawn back and a man's face appeared.</p>
+
+<p>"Come hither," commanded Santiago.</p>
+
+<p>The man obeyed.</p>
+
+<p>"Where are the others?" demanded Santiago.</p>
+
+<p>"Oh, se&ntilde;or," cried the man, "the others have hidden
+themselves in the cellar!"</p>
+
+<p>"Slaves! Cowards!" exclaimed Santiago. "What
+do they fear?"</p>
+
+<p>"The great guns, se&ntilde;or. We might all be killed."</p>
+
+<p>"You will certainly be killed if you do not mind
+what I say," was the reply as Santiago drew his
+<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_152" id="Page_152" href="#Page_152">[Pg 152]</a></span>
+sword. "Now summon the court that I may introduce
+my son."</p>
+
+<p>The man bowed and left the room, and in a few
+minutes returned accompanied by two more men
+and several women, all arrayed in fantastic costumes.</p>
+
+<p>All bowed as they entered, and Santiago waved
+his hand.</p>
+
+<p>"This is my son and heir," he said. "Come and
+kiss his hand."</p>
+
+<p>They all came forward and kissed Billie's hand,
+which he held out in order to facilitate the job.</p>
+
+<p>"Now," said Santiago, "we&mdash;&mdash;"</p>
+
+<p>"Now," interrupted Billie, "if it is all the same
+to you, Prince, we'll have supper. I haven't had
+a mouthful to eat since daylight. I'm 'most starved
+to death."</p>
+
+<p>"It is well," agreed Santiago. "It is well that
+my heir should not die of hunger. Let the table
+be placed."</p>
+
+<p>The order seemed to meet with general approval,
+and in the course of half an hour there was spread
+what would have proved a feast at any time, but
+which was beyond description to a hungry boy; and
+the way he waded into the food was a caution.</p>
+
+<p>During all this time Santiago had uttered never
+a word, nor would he eat but the smallest portion
+of food&mdash;a taste of every dish which he set before
+his guest.</p>
+
+<p>"My son tells the truth," Santiago finally remarked
+<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_153" id="Page_153" href="#Page_153">[Pg 153]</a></span>
+as Billie pushed back his chair with the
+single word "Bastante," meaning enough.</p>
+
+<p>"I always try to," was the smiling rejoinder, for
+Billie was now in the very best humor. Eating was
+his strong point and he had gone the limit.</p>
+
+<p>"Clear away the feast and then reassemble," was
+Santiago's next order.</p>
+
+<p>This order was carried into effect, and the servants
+also must have enjoyed a square meal, for it
+was more than an hour ere they again assembled,
+during which time Billie sank back in his chair and
+slumbered peacefully.</p>
+
+<p>He was finally awakened by a hand laid upon his
+arm.</p>
+
+<p>"Awake, my son," were the words he heard. "It
+is now time that I reveal to you the secret of my
+life. It is now time that I should tell you the
+secret of the treasure of Montezuma."</p>
+
+<p>"That's right, Prince," said Billie sleepily. "Let
+her go."</p>
+
+<p>Santiago regarded him interrogatively.</p>
+
+<p>"What said my son?"</p>
+
+<p>"Oh, yes, Prince. I forgot you only understood
+good English. Let her go, means proceed with the
+secret."</p>
+
+<p>"Let her go. Let her go," Santiago repeated a
+couple of times. "Yes," he continued, "I had forgotten
+about her."</p>
+
+<p>He clapped his hands and the same servant who
+had first appeared approached his chair.</p>
+
+<p>Santiago gave an order in a language which<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_154" id="Page_154" href="#Page_154">[Pg 154]</a></span>
+Billie did not understand, but which he imagined
+was Indian, and the servant withdrew, only to reappear
+a few minutes later with a young woman
+who greatly resembled Santiago and who was also
+arrayed in a gorgeous costume.</p>
+
+<p>She had evidently not expected to meet a
+stranger, for she drew back upon seeing Billie and
+the color rushed to her face.</p>
+
+<p>"Come hither, daughter," was Santiago's command.</p>
+
+<p>The young woman obeyed.</p>
+
+<p>"Lucia," said Santiago, "this is the honorable
+young man whom I have chosen for my heir.
+Henceforth consider him your betrothed. The marriage
+shall take place one new moon from to-day."</p>
+
+<p>"Oh, Father," cried the girl, her face becoming
+even more scarlet than before, "I cannot&mdash;&mdash;"</p>
+
+<p>"No!" interrupted Billie, springing to his feet,
+"neither can I. You ought to be ashamed of yourself,
+Santiago&mdash;&mdash;"</p>
+
+<p>"What!" cried Santiago, springing to his feet and
+again drawing his sword. "Who calls me Santiago?
+I am Prince Ixtazhl of the great Aztec nation
+and guardian of the treasure of Montezuma!"</p>
+
+<p>He raised his sword and would have stricken
+Billie down ere the boy could have prevented had
+not the young woman thrown herself between them
+and seized his arm.</p>
+
+<p>At the same instant the door from the ante-room<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_155" id="Page_155" href="#Page_155">[Pg 155]</a></span>
+opened and Donald and Adrian entered.</p>
+
+
+
+<hr style="width: 65%;" />
+<h2><a name="CHAPTER_XVIII" id="CHAPTER_XVIII"></a>CHAPTER XVIII.</h2>
+
+<h3>A MISSION FOR FUNSTON.</h3>
+
+
+<p>"Santiago!" exclaimed Donald.</p>
+
+<p>"By all that's great!" from Adrian.</p>
+
+<p>"Help!" cried Lucia. "He will do something
+desperate!"</p>
+
+<p>Donald and Adrian sprang forward, but their
+assistance was not needed. Billie had by this time
+gathered his wits and in a twinkling the mad-man
+was disarmed.</p>
+
+<p>"Shall we bind him?" asked Adrian as they came
+forward.</p>
+
+<p>"No, indeed," replied Billie as the now helpless
+man sank down upon the chair. "He isn't dangerous."</p>
+
+<p>"What's it all about?" queried Donald.</p>
+
+<p>"Oh, nothing much! He simply wanted to make
+me his heir and marry me to his daughter."</p>
+
+<p>Donald and Adrian cast an admiring gaze upon
+Lucia, who was now kneeling at her father's side.</p>
+
+<p>"Well," said Adrian in an aside, "I don't see why
+you should object to that."</p>
+
+<p>"Who said I objected?" demanded Billie. "It is
+the young woman who objects."</p>
+
+<p>"But whoever supposed he had a daughter?" said<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_156" id="Page_156" href="#Page_156">[Pg 156]</a></span>
+Donald.</p>
+
+<p>"Not I," from Billie. "But this is certainly a
+queer mess."</p>
+
+<p>Then to Lucia: "How long has he been in this
+way, Se&ntilde;orita?"</p>
+
+<p>"Only a few days. Since this trouble with the
+Americanos."</p>
+
+<p>"But how could that affect him?"</p>
+
+<p>"It is a long story, se&ntilde;or. For years he has been
+trying to overthrow the government. When Madero
+was made president, he was happy. Then came
+that awful tragedy, by which Madero was killed.
+Since that time he has not been himself. But when
+it became evident that the United States would interfere
+he became as you have seen him to-day."</p>
+
+<p>"When I told him that all the United States
+wanted was to get rid of Huerta, he was much
+pleased," explained Billie. "That was when he proposed
+to make me his heir."</p>
+
+<p>Lucia's cheeks grew red, as she asked: "And did
+you accept his proposal?"</p>
+
+<p>"I neither accepted nor rejected. I just followed
+him in to see what would happen next."</p>
+
+<p>"But would you accept?" insisted Lucia.</p>
+
+<p>"That depends," replied Billie, with a touch of
+color in his own face. "But what had we better
+do now? You and I will discuss the other question
+later."</p>
+
+<p>"The best thing we can do," interposed Donald,
+<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_157" id="Page_157" href="#Page_157">[Pg 157]</a></span>
+"is to report to Lieutenant Blunt. Isn't there some
+place, Se&ntilde;orita, where your father can be placed for
+safe-keeping?"</p>
+
+<p>"He will be perfectly safe here with me, se&ntilde;ors,
+if the servants are allowed to remain."</p>
+
+<p>"They certainly will be," declared Billie. "I will
+personally vouch for that. We have done Captain
+Rush a good turn to-day and I know he will be
+glad to do that much for us. And besides, the
+Americans will harm no one."</p>
+
+<p>Lucia gave Billie a grateful look as she replied:</p>
+
+<p>"Ah, se&ntilde;or, I shall trust it all to you. I can
+see that you are a friend of my father and I know
+you are telling the truth."</p>
+
+<p>"You bet you can trust me," was Billie's emphatic
+reply. "Come on, fellows, let's go look after
+my horse."</p>
+
+<p>In the door Billie turned:</p>
+
+<p>"I'll leave my robe in the cupboard, Se&ntilde;orita;
+and, if you don't mind, I'll ask Lieutenant Blunt to
+make himself at home in the patio."</p>
+
+<p>"The house is yours, se&ntilde;or. Do as you think
+best."</p>
+
+<p>"By George!" exclaimed Adrian as they descended
+the stairs to the patio, "this is getting
+serious."</p>
+
+<p>"What?" queried Donald.</p>
+
+<p>"Why this affair of Billie and the young lady
+we have just left."</p>
+
+<p>"Nonsense!" from Billie. "It isn't half as serious<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_158" id="Page_158" href="#Page_158">[Pg 158]</a></span>
+as what I saw at Moreno."</p>
+
+<p>"No!" laughed Donald. "I saw that myself; but
+Josie is an American. Hey, Ad?"</p>
+
+<p>"I don't think it's very nice to be making remarks
+about young ladies in their absence," retorted
+Adrian, bristling up.</p>
+
+<p>"Oh, come now, Adrian!" laughed Billie. "You
+started it. But what do you make out of Santiago?"</p>
+
+<p>"He's evidently a rich old chap with a bug.
+That's all."</p>
+
+<p>"Well," commented Billie, with a nod of his head,
+"strange things do happen when you travel.
+Who'd have thought we'd ever see the old chap
+again, and at a time like this?" and he went back
+to where Adrian and Donald had stabled the horses,
+to see if there was anything he could do for the
+wounded animal.</p>
+
+<p>When Lieutenant Blunt was made acquainted
+with the conditions prevailing in the house, he immediately
+took possession of the lower floor and
+from that time on until the arrival of General
+Funston with the Fifth Brigade, it was made one
+of the official residences.</p>
+
+<p>The week following the occupation of Vera Cruz
+by the American forces was a busy one for our
+boys. Because of their intimate knowledge with
+the Spanish language, they were continually in
+demand. There was never a verbal message from
+<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_159" id="Page_159" href="#Page_159">[Pg 159]</a></span>
+the American Admiral to some Mexican official but
+what they were called upon, and they very soon
+made friends of every Jackie and marine in the
+city.</p>
+
+<p>Ten days later the boys stood upon the wharf
+awaiting the arrival of the first boatload of General
+Funston's regulars from the big transports which
+had anchored in the harbor the night before. Because
+of the shallowness of the water, everything in
+Vera Cruz harbor has to be brought ashore in
+small boats, known as lighters. As the boys watched
+the first of these to approach there was something
+in the face and bearing of the officer in command
+which attracted their attention.</p>
+
+<p>"By George!" exclaimed Donald, "I seem to
+know that face. Don't you, Billie?"</p>
+
+<p>"Does look kind o' familiar. Where have we
+seen him?"</p>
+
+<p>"I'll tell you!" cried Adrian. "It's the lieutenant
+who was in charge of the patrol on the Rio Grande."</p>
+
+<p>"Lieutenant Grant!" exclaimed Billie. "Sure as
+you're born. Well this is luck!"</p>
+
+<p>"Luck? What do you mean?"</p>
+
+<p>"Why, maybe he'll be able to tell me whatever
+became of those drafts for ten thousand pounds
+that I took from old Don Pablo."</p>
+
+<p>His companions laughed.</p>
+
+<p>"Still thinking about that, are you?" said Donald.
+"Why of course you'll never hear of them
+again. The bank is simply in that much."</p>
+
+<p>"Maybe so," admitted Billie, "but I'll get something<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_160" id="Page_160" href="#Page_160">[Pg 160]</a></span>
+official."</p>
+
+<p>And he did.</p>
+
+<p>It was several days later, though, after the regulars
+had taken possession of the city and the navy
+forces had withdrawn to their ships. The boys
+were sitting in Lieutenant Grant's quarters, to whom
+they had offered their services as soon after his
+landing as they were able, and were laughing over
+their adventures on the border.</p>
+
+<p>"It was certainly a close call you boys had," the
+lieutenant was saying. "I'm not sure but our neutrality
+was mighty near a breaking point. What do
+you think, Billie?"</p>
+
+<p>"Possibly so; Americans will be Americans. But
+say, Lieutenant, whatever was done about those
+drafts I took from Don Pablo? I've never been
+called upon to tell my story, nor have they ever
+come back to me."</p>
+
+<p>"That's because you were out of the United
+States," replied Lieutenant Grant. "It was less than
+a month ago that I was asked if I knew your whereabouts.
+Uncle Sam has decided that he has no claim
+to the drafts and they were returned to me. I
+have them in my army chest. If they are any good
+to you, I shall be pleased to hand them over."</p>
+
+<p>"I guess they are not much use to any one,"
+sighed Billie mournfully. "My father says no bank
+would cash them without Don Pablo's signature,
+and no one can get that."</p>
+
+<p>"I'm glad you take it so philosophically," laughed<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_161" id="Page_161" href="#Page_161">[Pg 161]</a></span>
+the lieutenant. "I hope you'll have better luck next
+time."</p>
+
+<p>The boys arose to leave.</p>
+
+<p>"Which way?" asked the lieutenant.</p>
+
+<p>"No place in particular. We thought we'd go
+home."</p>
+
+<p>"You mean to the United States?"</p>
+
+<p>"Not to-night," laughed Adrian. "Just to the
+house where we are living. It belongs to old Santiago."</p>
+
+<p>"Who is he?"</p>
+
+<p>Briefly the boys narrated what they knew about
+him on the Rio Grande, how they had met him
+here, and why they were staying at his house.</p>
+
+<p>"Has he no other name?"</p>
+
+<p>"Why, yes, I suppose so," replied Billie. "We
+always call him Prince to his face, and his daughter
+as the Princess Lucia. Of course, it is all make-believe,
+but it is one way of keeping him quiet."</p>
+
+<p>He called to one of Santiago's servants, whom
+Lucia had lent them to look after their horses.</p>
+
+<p>"Oh, Chomo!" he said. "Do you know what
+Santiago's surname is?"</p>
+
+<p>"Si, se&ntilde;or. It is Ojeda."</p>
+
+<p>"What?" cried all the boys at once. "Ojeda?
+Why, that was old Don Pablo's name."</p>
+
+<p>The boys stood and eyed each other in speechless
+wonder. The same thought was in all their
+minds.</p>
+
+<p>"Do you think it is possible?" asked Billie at<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_162" id="Page_162" href="#Page_162">[Pg 162]</a></span>
+last.</p>
+
+<p>"Do I think what is possible?" asked Lieutenant
+Grant.</p>
+
+<p>"Why, that Santiago could have given those
+drafts to the stranger so as not to be known in
+the matter."</p>
+
+<p>"Possibly. He seems a man of mystery."</p>
+
+<p>"Well," declared Billie, "I am going to find out."</p>
+
+<p>"How, I should like to know," asked Donald.
+"He's too crazy to remember anything, even if he
+wanted to tell you."</p>
+
+<p>"You forget Lucia," said Billie.</p>
+
+<p>"Oh, no, I haven't," laughed Donald, "and I have
+no doubt she would tell you all about it if she knew;
+but I do not believe she does. Santiago is too deep
+to have entrusted his secrets to a girl not yet out
+of her teens."</p>
+
+<p>"You never can tell," remarked the lieutenant.
+"Men with a hobby do strange things. You'd better
+ride along with me to headquarters. I'd like
+to introduce you to General Funston. He's a man
+after your own hearts. You know how he went
+out and captured Aguinaldo when he was in the
+Philippines."</p>
+
+<p>"I've read about it," replied Adrian. "It was a
+bold deed."</p>
+
+<p>"Sure was," said Donald. "We'll be mighty
+glad to meet him."</p>
+
+<p>It may also be said that General Funston was
+<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_163" id="Page_163" href="#Page_163">[Pg 163]</a></span>
+glad to meet the Broncho Rider Boys, especially
+after Lieutenant Grant told him in a few words of
+the good work they had done on the border and
+on the day that Vera Cruz was taken.</p>
+
+<p>"And when do you expect to return to the United
+States?" asked the general.</p>
+
+<p>"Just as soon as we can obtain passage," replied
+Donald.</p>
+
+<p>"I think we can arrange that for you in a few
+days," replied the general. "In the meantime come
+in occasionally."</p>
+
+<p>The boys thanked him and started to leave, when
+the telephone in the general's quarters rang. He
+looked for some one to answer, but no one being
+at hand, he picked up the 'phone himself.</p>
+
+<p>"What's that?" he asked after a brief moment.
+"The water works. You think they are attempting
+to cut you off. All right, I'll rush help."</p>
+
+<p>He set down the 'phone and turned to Lieutenant
+Grant.</p>
+
+<p>"The enemy has gathered in force about the
+water works," he said sharply. "They evidently
+intend cutting off the water supply. Tell Colonel
+Bright to send them reinforcements at once. Do
+you boys know the way there?"</p>
+
+<p>"Yes, sir," from all three.</p>
+
+<p>"Then show the men the nearest way! Now
+go! The safety of the city may depend upon you!"</p>
+
+
+<hr style="width: 65%;" />
+<div><span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_164" id="Page_164" href="#Page_164">[Pg 164]</a></span></div>
+<h2><a name="CHAPTER_XIX" id="CHAPTER_XIX"></a>CHAPTER XIX.</h2>
+
+<h3>AN UNUSUAL RIDING PARTY.</h3>
+
+
+<p>Flinging themselves into the saddle, the boys
+rode rapidly after Lieutenant Grant and were at
+Colonel Bright's quarters by the time the bugle
+had called to boots and saddle. In another minute,
+at the head of a squadron of cavalry, they
+dashed over the road they had come to know so
+well.</p>
+
+<p>What happened during the next twenty minutes
+is history.</p>
+
+<p>Guided by the boys, the reinforcements arrived
+opportunely to stop the advance of a large body of
+Mexicans who would have destroyed the water
+works and have left the inhabitants and the American
+troops entirely without water.</p>
+
+<p>A few minutes later two batteries with rapid-fire
+guns put in an appearance, and in less time than
+it takes to tell it, the Mexicans turned and fled.</p>
+
+<p>It was not General Funston's mission in Vera
+Cruz to overrun any more Mexican territory, so
+the Mexicans were allowed to retreat without pursuit;
+but the lines were strengthened so that from
+that time on there was never any danger from
+Huerta's forces, although there were numerous
+alarms and plenty of scout duty.</p>
+
+<p>During the few minutes of fighting, the boys were
+<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_165" id="Page_165" href="#Page_165">[Pg 165]</a></span>
+in the midst of it and all came through it without
+a scratch. But it was exciting work and when it
+was over they were publicly thanked by Colonel
+Bright for their good work.</p>
+
+<p>"Well," laughed Billie as the three rode slowly
+back to their home, "that's glory enough for one
+day. I don't care to be a soldier."</p>
+
+<p>"Nor I!" agreed Donald. "I prefer a quiet life
+on the ranch."</p>
+
+<p>"Which we are in a fair way to see in a few
+weeks," commented Adrian. "I have no doubt
+that General Funston will do as he agreed and find
+us passage."</p>
+
+<p>"I for one shall be glad to return to the States,"
+said Donald.</p>
+
+<p>"So shall I after I have found out about Santiago's
+connection with that ten thousand pounds."</p>
+
+<p>"That's right," was the laughing rejoinder.
+"Stick to it, Billie, and who knows what may
+happen?"</p>
+
+<p>"Do you know," remarked Adrian slowly, "I'm
+beginning to be considerably worried for the Americans
+scattered throughout Mexico."</p>
+
+<p>"Why should you be?" from Donald.</p>
+
+<p>"I remember Pedro's words that, if the United
+States did anything, Carranza would unite with
+Huerta."</p>
+
+<p>"I don't believe he would."</p>
+
+<p>"Maybe not. But the Zapata brothers will think
+<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_166" id="Page_166" href="#Page_166">[Pg 166]</a></span>
+this a good time to make the Americans trouble.
+I was thinking of Mr. Black and Josie."</p>
+
+<p>"I'll bet you were," laughed Billie. "I wouldn't
+be surprised if they were thinking about you. Hey,
+Don?"</p>
+
+<p>"Well, they might do worse," said Donald.
+"There are worse fellows than Adrian."</p>
+
+<p>"That's right," retorted Adrian good-humoredly.
+"I can stand it. But, just the same, I wish I knew
+they were safe."</p>
+
+<p>"Well, what's the matter with our paying them
+a visit?" queried Billie.</p>
+
+<p>"Nix," from Donald. "We'll stay inside the
+lines. I've had enough of this bush fighting."</p>
+
+<p>They approached Santiago's residence, where
+they had decided to remain until they sailed, when
+they perceived a peon on a pony standing by the
+gate. As they drew near they recognized him as
+one of the peons who had served as Mr. Black's
+mozo.</p>
+
+<p>"Why, hello, Jos&eacute;!" exclaimed Donald. "What
+brings you here?"</p>
+
+<p>The mozo drew a letter from beneath his poncho
+and handed it to Donald.</p>
+
+<p>"For me?" asked Donald. "I thought it must
+be for Adrian. I didn't think the&mdash;&mdash;"</p>
+
+<p>"It is from the jefe," interrupted the mozo.</p>
+
+<p>"Oh, it's from Mr. Black!" with an accent on the
+Mr. "That's different."</p>
+
+<p>Donald opened the letter and read it hastily.</p>
+
+<p>"Well, by George!" he exclaimed, "what do you<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_167" id="Page_167" href="#Page_167">[Pg 167]</a></span>
+think of that?"</p>
+
+<p>"I can tell you better when I know what that
+is," replied Billie.</p>
+
+<p>"Why, Mr. Black is becoming alarmed over the
+activities of the Carranza forces and wants us to
+ask General Funston if he won't send out enough
+cavalry to escort him and his daughter to Vera Cruz
+in safety."</p>
+
+<p>"Of course we'll ask him!" exclaimed Adrian.
+"Let's do it at once."</p>
+
+<p>"Now wait a minute," said Donald. "Let's see
+about it."</p>
+
+<p>"What is there to see?"</p>
+
+<p>"There's a good deal to see. You remember
+our experiences on the Rio Grande?"</p>
+
+<p>"But this is different! We are at war with Mexico
+now."</p>
+
+<p>"No, we are not. We have simply seized one
+port as a reprisal. To send a cavalry force out
+into the country might bring on more trouble."</p>
+
+<p>"Well, I don't care!" exclaimed Adrian hotly.
+"I'll go and ask him alone if you are afraid to go
+with me. I'm not going to leave Jos&mdash;I mean Mr.
+Black and his daughter out there at the mercies of
+these greasers. You hear me!"</p>
+
+<p>"Oh, we'll go with you, all right!" said Billie.
+"But don't be surprised if you don't get what you
+ask."</p>
+
+<p>Accordingly the trio started for General Funston's
+<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_168" id="Page_168" href="#Page_168">[Pg 168]</a></span>
+headquarters. After some delay they were
+admitted to his presence and Donald showed him
+Mr. Black's letter.</p>
+
+<p>The general perused it carefully and then remained
+silently thoughtful for some moments.</p>
+
+<p>"I wish I could do what our countryman asks,"
+he finally said, "but I do not see how I can. To
+send a force out nearly fifty miles, even for such
+a service, would be overstepping the purpose for
+which I am here. I&mdash;&mdash;"</p>
+
+<p>"But you wouldn't leave them out there to be
+mistreated and perhaps killed, would you?" interrupted
+Adrian.</p>
+
+<p>The general smiled.</p>
+
+<p>"Such is not my intention; but we must plan
+some other way. We must use a little strategy."</p>
+
+<p>"That's right!" exclaimed Billie, "and I'll bet
+the man who went out and rounded up Aguinaldo
+will know how to do it!"</p>
+
+<p>Again the general smiled broadly, evidently well
+pleased at the implied compliment.</p>
+
+<p>"I'll do the best I can," he said quietly, "but I
+am not very familiar with the lay of the land. You
+boys have had some experience. Perhaps you can
+suggest something."</p>
+
+<p>Adrian said nothing, and Donald scratched his
+head. It was Billie who spoke.</p>
+
+<p>"I was just wondering, General," he said, "if
+some of the men wouldn't like to take a little horseback
+ride and see something of the country."</p>
+
+<p>"Well, now, perhaps they might," assented the<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_169" id="Page_169" href="#Page_169">[Pg 169]</a></span>
+general.</p>
+
+<p>"We could show them some mighty fine scenery,
+sir."</p>
+
+<p>"By the moonlight, I suppose?"</p>
+
+<p>"Yes, sir. By the moonlight and early sunrise."</p>
+
+<p>"And about how many would you like to take
+on this picnic?"</p>
+
+<p>"Well," replied Billie, squinting up one eye, "I
+was thinking that Adrian and I might take out
+about ten to-night. Then about the same time
+to-morrow night Don could take another ten. We
+would probably meet somewhere in the mountains
+and watch the sun rise."</p>
+
+<p>"A very nice plan," said the general, "and one
+of which I approve. You may ask Lieutenant Grant
+to make enquiries among the men in his company
+and see if there are any who would like to be
+given two or three days' leave for such a purpose."</p>
+
+<p>"Thank you, sir!" and Billie touched his hat in
+true military style.</p>
+
+<p>"And you might say to the lieutenant," was General
+Funston's parting words, "that I should be glad
+to hear later how the men enjoyed their ride. I
+think, now that the boys are down here, they should
+be given a chance to see the country."</p>
+
+<p>"Billie, you have the making of a great general,"
+was Donald's comment as they left the general's
+quarters. "How did you think of it?"</p>
+
+<p>"I remembered my experience when I wanted men
+<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_170" id="Page_170" href="#Page_170">[Pg 170]</a></span>
+to help me get you and Ad out of trouble in Presidio.
+Lieutenant Grant will know all about it."</p>
+
+<p>And so he did. In less than half an hour ten
+regulars, some of them but very little older than
+Billie and Adrian, were ready for the ride which
+Billie had proposed and which in his mind would be
+as far as Moreno.</p>
+
+<p>"You are sure ten will be enough?" asked Lieutenant
+Grant.</p>
+
+<p>"Sure! Twelve Americans are enough to lick
+fifty Mexicans if it comes to that; and besides we
+shall have Mr. Black and Josie. He's as good as
+four."</p>
+
+<p>"And don't forget the reinforcements, if they are
+needed," laughed Donald. "We will be right on
+the spot where we saw the sun rise the first morning
+after we left Moreno."</p>
+
+<p>"It looks all right," was Lieutenant Grant's comment,
+"but it is always well to have a big enough
+force. Success to you!"</p>
+
+<p>"You'll make all the necessary explanations to
+the crowd you bring out, Don," was Billie's parting
+words. "Adrian and I will explain the nature
+of the trip to our fellows as we ride along."</p>
+
+<p>This they did, and gave the soldier boys a little
+history of their own troubles in reaching Vera Cruz.</p>
+
+<p>"No explanations are necessary," remarked a
+young chap by the name of Brooks, a corporal.
+"We saw you out at the water works and we know
+<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_171" id="Page_171" href="#Page_171">[Pg 171]</a></span>
+you are made of the right stuff. You lead! We'll
+follow, won't we, boys?"</p>
+
+<p>"You bet!" replied the others in one voice.</p>
+
+
+
+<hr style="width: 65%;" />
+<h2><a name="CHAPTER_XX" id="CHAPTER_XX"></a>CHAPTER XX.</h2>
+
+<h3>ADRIAN FOILS A TRAITOR.</h3>
+
+
+<p>It was nine o'clock of the second night that
+Adrian and Billie, accompanied by Mr. Black's
+mozo, Jos&eacute;, and the ten troopers, reached the outskirts
+of Moreno.</p>
+
+<p>They had made good headway the first night,
+had slept in the hills during the day and had come
+this far without molestation.</p>
+
+<p>"If everything goes to the end as it has this far,"
+remarked Corporal Brooks to Billie as they neared
+the little town, "it will be nothing but a pleasant
+outing, sure enough."</p>
+
+<p>Arriving at the edge of the town, the boys sent
+Jos&eacute; forward to see how the land lay and to bring
+them word.</p>
+
+<p>"Do you think you can trust him?" asked the
+corporal.</p>
+
+<p>"We'll have to," replied Adrian. "I believe he is
+loyal, and Mr. Black seems to have complete confidence
+in him."</p>
+
+<p>"Let's hope so, anyway," said Billie. "It seems
+to be the best we can do to get word to Mr. Black
+of our presence."</p>
+
+<p>"Hurry back, Jos&eacute;," urged Adrian as the mozo<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_172" id="Page_172" href="#Page_172">[Pg 172]</a></span>
+departed.</p>
+
+<p>"Si, se&ntilde;or," was the brief reply. "You may depend
+on me."</p>
+
+<p>"It ought not to take him more than half an
+hour," explained Billie. "It isn't more than a
+mile."</p>
+
+<p>But a half hour passed and then another and
+still no Jos&eacute;.</p>
+
+<p>"Something must have happened to him," said
+Adrian.</p>
+
+<p>"That's the charitable way to look at it," laughed
+the corporal. "It's more likely, however, that he's
+making arrangements to have something happen
+to us."</p>
+
+<p>"I hardly think so," was Billie's comment, "but,
+if he is, we'll fool him."</p>
+
+<p>"How?"</p>
+
+<p>"We'll move."</p>
+
+<p>"But he may come back."</p>
+
+<p>"We'll leave one man here on guard. The rest
+of us will go around to the other side of town."</p>
+
+<p>"Good!" from the corporal. "You are a strategist."</p>
+
+<p>The plan was at once carried into effect.</p>
+
+<p>"Now then," said Billie, "I'm going in to town
+myself."</p>
+
+<p>"Not much," declared Adrian. "I'm going."</p>
+
+<p>"I'd offer to go myself," laughed the corporal,
+"but I don't know the place."</p>
+
+<p>"We'll toss for it," said Billie.<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_173" id="Page_173" href="#Page_173">[Pg 173]</a></span></p>
+
+<p>"All right," and Adrian produced a coin.
+"Heads I win. Tails you lose."</p>
+
+<p>"No funny business," said Billie. "Choose heads
+if you want."</p>
+
+<p>Adrian flipped the coin. It came down heads
+up.</p>
+
+<p>"All right," agreed Billie. "Now for some set
+of signals."</p>
+
+<p>"Our old Broncho Rider whistle if I need help,"
+said Adrian. "If everything is O. K., I'll give the
+whip-poor-will."</p>
+
+<p>Adrian slid from his horse.</p>
+
+<p>"What are you doing?" asked Billie.</p>
+
+<p>"I'm going afoot. I didn't spend my boyhood
+among the Indians for nothing. Good-bye!" and a
+moment later he disappeared in the fading moonlight.</p>
+
+<p>"Whatever the conditions," said Billie, "we'll
+soon know," as he settled back in his saddle.</p>
+
+<p>Running swiftly along, Adrian made straight for
+the barracks in which he knew would be found
+whatever soldiers might be in the city.</p>
+
+<p>"If I find everything quiet at the barracks," was
+his thought, "I can go straight to where Mr. Black
+is stopping without fear. If I find there is any
+disturbance, I'll be more careful."</p>
+
+<p>Ten minutes of running brought him to the barracks.
+All was as quiet as the hour demanded. He
+stood under the shadow of the back wall long
+<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_174" id="Page_174" href="#Page_174">[Pg 174]</a></span>
+enough to hear the sentry's call and then he turned
+in the direction of the house where the two Americans
+were stopping.</p>
+
+<p>It was only a few blocks away and he reached
+it without incident.</p>
+
+<p>"Kind o' funny," he mused, "that I haven't seen
+or heard a soul on the street. I wonder what's become
+of Jos&eacute;?"</p>
+
+<p>He stopped a minute to ponder.</p>
+
+<p>"Things are going almost too smooth. I'll just
+stop a bit."</p>
+
+<p>He stole past the house and a moment later threw
+himself into the gutter, where he lay as one dead.</p>
+
+<p>The wisdom of his action soon became apparent.</p>
+
+<p>He hadn't been lying there two minutes until
+a solitary figure passed him and stopped in front of
+the house, evidently listening to hear what might
+be going on inside.</p>
+
+<p>A moment later he was joined by another figure.
+Adrian could just make them out in the darkness.</p>
+
+<p>"Have they come?" was the whispered question.</p>
+
+<p>"I can't tell," was the whispered reply.</p>
+
+<p>Adrian heard both the question and the answer
+distinctly.</p>
+
+<p>"It's Jos&eacute;," he said to himself. "He knew that
+it was the plan for Billie and I both to come to
+the house. The traitor! I have a notion to shoot
+him in his tracks."</p>
+
+<p>Only the fear of creating a disturbance kept the<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_175" id="Page_175" href="#Page_175">[Pg 175]</a></span>
+lad from carrying out his notion.</p>
+
+<p>"Why don't you knock and tell the Gringo you
+are here?" was the next question.</p>
+
+<p>"They might be in there."</p>
+
+<p>"Well, what of that? You can tell them you
+were stopped by the guard and have just been released.
+That'll seem reasonable."</p>
+
+<p>Jos&eacute; stepped to the door and knocked.</p>
+
+<p>There was no response and he knocked again.</p>
+
+<p>"Who is there?" asked a voice.</p>
+
+<p>"Jos&eacute;. I just come from Vera Cruz. Let me in."</p>
+
+<p>There was a movement within and presently the
+door opened and Jos&eacute; entered, closing the door behind
+him.</p>
+
+<p>Adrian slowly arose to a kneeling posture.</p>
+
+<p>"I wonder what the other will do now?" he
+wondered.</p>
+
+<p>He did not have long to wait, for the other
+knocked on the pavement with his gun and presently
+several more figures appeared. Adrian had
+just time to throw himself to the ground and escape
+detection.</p>
+
+<p>The men in front of the house exchanged whispered
+confidences and then all but one started to
+leave.</p>
+
+<p>"If any one attempts to leave the house," was
+the command, "fire! If any one attempts to enter,
+allow them to do so and then give the customary
+call."</p>
+
+<p>"Bueno!" was the response, and all but the one<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_176" id="Page_176" href="#Page_176">[Pg 176]</a></span>
+withdrew.</p>
+
+<p>A minute later Adrian again arose to a crouching
+posture and as the sentry cautiously approached
+the door, he crept up behind him. An instant more
+and he was upon the man and had him by the
+throat.</p>
+
+<p>The man was a wiry Mexican and evidently in
+training, for he squirmed and kicked vigorously;
+but Adrian's grip was too firm upon him and in a
+couple of minutes he sank down limp upon the
+ground.</p>
+
+<p>The noise of the scuffle must have been heard
+inside, for the door cautiously opened and a head
+peered out.</p>
+
+<p>Without a question Adrian sprang within, dragging
+the lifeless form of the sentry with him.</p>
+
+<p>"Quick, bar the gate!" he commanded.</p>
+
+<p>The command was obeyed.</p>
+
+<p>"Now where is Mr. Black?" he asked.</p>
+
+<p>"Upstairs talking with Jos&eacute;."</p>
+
+<p>"All right. Bind this man while I go up. Don't
+let him escape or he is liable to cut your throat."</p>
+
+<p>"<i>No temer V, se&ntilde;or</i>" was the response, meaning
+"Have no fear."</p>
+
+<p>Adrian ran lightly up the stairs, revolver in hand.
+He heard voices talking and had no doubt that
+Jos&eacute; was narrating some trumped-up story.</p>
+
+<p>"Yes, se&ntilde;or," he heard the mozo say, "they are
+expecting you. It is necessary that you go at once."</p>
+
+<p>Adrian flung open the door and covered Jos&eacute;<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_177" id="Page_177" href="#Page_177">[Pg 177]</a></span>
+with his revolver.</p>
+
+<p>"Put up your hands," he commanded. Then to
+Mr. Black, to whom Jos&eacute; was talking: "Take his
+weapons away from him, Mr. Black."</p>
+
+<p>Realizing at once that something was wrong, Mr.
+Black obeyed.</p>
+
+<p>"Now tie him."</p>
+
+<p>This was also quickly done, Mr. Black asking at
+the same time what had happened.</p>
+
+<p>"I can't tell you exactly, Mr. Black, but this
+man has betrayed us and we are now watched by
+a squad of soldiers."</p>
+
+<p>Mr. Black's face turned as black as his name.</p>
+
+<p>"Is that true?" he demanded, seizing Jos&eacute; by
+the shoulder with such a powerful grip that the
+man cried out with pain.</p>
+
+<p>"Oh, se&ntilde;or," he cried, "don't kill me! I will
+tell you all."</p>
+
+<p>"See that you do," was the command. "One lie
+and I will wring your neck as I would a chicken.
+You know me."</p>
+
+<p>"I'll tell the truth. I told the captain at the barracks.
+He is going to capture all the Americanos
+and hold them for ransom and I am to have half."</p>
+
+<p>"That is evidently the truth," declared Adrian,
+and he proceeded to tell Mr. Black what was being
+done to get him and his daughter to Vera Cruz,
+and how Jos&eacute; had played them false.</p>
+
+<p>For a moment it looked as though Mr. Black
+<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_178" id="Page_178" href="#Page_178">[Pg 178]</a></span>
+might wreak his vengeance on Jos&eacute;, but after a
+minute he thought better of it.</p>
+
+<p>"You ought to die this minute," he declared, "but
+I'll wait till I have more time." Then to Adrian:
+"What had we better do now?"</p>
+
+<p>Before Adrian could reply the clear note of a
+bugle rang out upon the night air.</p>
+
+
+
+<hr style="width: 65%;" />
+<h2><a name="CHAPTER_XXI" id="CHAPTER_XXI"></a>CHAPTER XXI.</h2>
+
+<h3>ADRIAN HAS AN ACCIDENT.</h3>
+
+
+<p>"What do you suppose that means?" asked
+Adrian.</p>
+
+<p>Mr. Black made no reply and a moment later
+the bugle call was repeated.</p>
+
+<p>"It sounds to me," said Mr. Black, "as though
+some fresh troops were coming in."</p>
+
+<p>"That's bad," was Adrian's comment.</p>
+
+<p>"Perhaps not, my lad, if we act quickly."</p>
+
+<p>"How so?"</p>
+
+<p>"The new arrivals may take up the attention of
+the gang of bandits outside and we may get away
+ere they return."</p>
+
+<p>"Good," was Adrian's comment. "Where is Miss
+Josie?"</p>
+
+<p>"Waiting in the next room with the family of
+my host."</p>
+
+<p>Mr. Black stepped to the door and called to
+<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_179" id="Page_179" href="#Page_179">[Pg 179]</a></span>
+those within. In a few words he explained the
+situation and in less than three minutes he and
+the girl were mounted and ready to ride.</p>
+
+<p>"Where is your horse?" he asked Adrian.</p>
+
+<p>"I left it with the boys at the cocoanut grove."</p>
+
+<p>"But we can't go and leave you here."</p>
+
+<p>"Of course not. I shall run alongside of your
+horse, holding to its mane, Indian fashion. Now
+then, are we ready?"</p>
+
+<p>"All ready!"</p>
+
+<p>The great gate was opened noiselessly and, bidding
+a subdued good-bye to the family, the three
+passed out into the night.</p>
+
+<p>"I should have throttled Jos&eacute; ere I left," declared
+Mr. Black as they passed down the street.</p>
+
+<p>"I wish we were as safe as he is," laughed
+Adrian.</p>
+
+<p>For three blocks they wended their way as silently
+as possible and just as they came out into
+the open there came another bugle call.</p>
+
+<p>"That's for us," said Adrian. "There is no
+mistaking that command. Now to run for it."</p>
+
+<p>The two riders put spurs to their horses and
+Adrian bounded along at their side, running as
+lightly as an antelope. They were rapidly nearing
+the spot where the Americans were in waiting, when
+Adrian stepped into a hole and pitched forward
+onto his face.</p>
+
+<p>"Don't stop for me!" he called. "I'll be there as
+quick as you are!"</p>
+
+<p>He picked himself up and started to run, but his<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_180" id="Page_180" href="#Page_180">[Pg 180]</a></span>
+ankle gave him such a pain that he almost fainted.</p>
+
+<p>"Great Scott!" he exclaimed, "I've sprained my
+ankle."</p>
+
+<p>He sat down and rubbed the maimed member
+for a couple of minutes and then attempted to hobble
+on. It was more than he could bear and he
+sat down again.</p>
+
+<p>"By George," he groaned, "this is tough! I'll
+have to call for help."</p>
+
+<p>He gave the well-known whistle, but there was
+no response.</p>
+
+<p>He gave it again; but still no answer.</p>
+
+<p>"Worse and more of it," he muttered. "Something
+has happened to Billie."</p>
+
+<p>What it might be Adrian could not imagine, but
+he was sure that his chum was not at the appointed
+spot, as he was near enough to have heard the
+whistle and would surely have answered.</p>
+
+<p>"Well, I can't stay here. The greasers will be
+coming pretty soon. I must get along some way."</p>
+
+<p>He got up and walked a few steps and again sat
+down. There was no sound of a pursuit and the
+hoofbeats of Mr. Black's horses had ceased.</p>
+
+<p>"They have reached the grove," Adrian muttered.
+"I must get there some way."</p>
+
+<p>Once more he arose to his feet and took several
+steps and then sank down in a faint, so great was
+the pain.</p>
+
+<p>When he came to himself he was lying upon a
+<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_181" id="Page_181" href="#Page_181">[Pg 181]</a></span>
+matting of some kind and to his ears came the
+faint sound of a guitar, followed a few moments
+later by sounds of girlish laughter.</p>
+
+<p>He sat up and looked around, but could see nothing,
+except a ray of light coming in through a little
+crack between a couple of blankets that formed a
+curtain in a doorway.</p>
+
+<p>"Where in the name of common sense am I?"
+he muttered.</p>
+
+<p>He attempted to get to his feet, but the pain in
+his ankle brought him quickly to himself.</p>
+
+<p>"Now I remember!" he exclaimed. "I fell and
+sprained my ankle. But how did I get here?"</p>
+
+<p>He started to call, but at that moment the music
+ceased and a minute later he heard voices saying
+good night. Then a door was closed and immediately
+the curtains were thrown open and a peon
+woman stood in the door.</p>
+
+<p>"Oh!" she exclaimed, upon seeing Adrian sitting
+up and looking at her. "Then you are not
+dead?"</p>
+
+<p>"I should say not. Did you think I was?"</p>
+
+<p>"I was afraid so."</p>
+
+<p>"Why?"</p>
+
+<p>"Because your death might be laid at my door."</p>
+
+<p>"Evidently she hasn't discovered I am an American,"
+thought Adrian. "Well, I'll not tell her until
+I have to."</p>
+
+<p>The woman turned around and called to some one
+<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_182" id="Page_182" href="#Page_182">[Pg 182]</a></span>
+in the other room and another figure appeared in
+the door&mdash;that of a girl some fifteen years of age.</p>
+
+<p>"Look, Peppita," and the elder woman pointed
+at Adrian.</p>
+
+<p>The girl gave a little scream.</p>
+
+<p>"<i>Madre mia!</i>" she exclaimed. "Who is it?"</p>
+
+<p>"I know not, my child. I found him unconscious
+at our back door and dragged him inside."</p>
+
+<p>"I beg your pardon," said Adrian. "I didn't
+know I was near any house."</p>
+
+<p>"It is a very poor one, se&ntilde;or. I and my daughter
+are all alone since my poor Leocadio was killed."</p>
+
+<p>"Who killed him?" asked Adrian, becoming interested.</p>
+
+<p>"The Huertistas. He was a soldier under Gen.
+Dorantes."</p>
+
+<p>"Is that so?" exclaimed Adrian. "I know Gen.
+Dorantes well. He is a fine man. But you will
+soon be avenged, for Huerta's days are short."</p>
+
+<p>The woman's eyes snapped.</p>
+
+<p>"<i>Es verdad?</i>" meaning, "Is it true?"</p>
+
+<p>"It certainly is. Since the Americans have taken
+Vera Cruz, Gen. Huerta will have to go. It is
+only a question of a few days."</p>
+
+<p>"<i>Bienissimo!</i> The Americans are brave men!
+My Leocadio was fond of the Americans."</p>
+
+<p>"I am glad of that, se&ntilde;ora, for I am an American."</p>
+
+<p>The woman and girl both started back as in fear
+and then came forward again.</p>
+
+<p>"How did you come here, se&ntilde;or?"<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_183" id="Page_183" href="#Page_183">[Pg 183]</a></span></p>
+
+<p>"I fell from a horse and sprained my ankle. I
+tried to walk and must have fainted."</p>
+
+<p>"Have you friends in Moreno?"</p>
+
+<p>"I did have, but they have gone and I want to
+get to Vera Cruz."</p>
+
+<p>"Vera Cruz is a long way, se&ntilde;or. I never expect
+to go that far from home&mdash;me and my little Peppa."</p>
+
+<p>Adrian smiled.</p>
+
+<p>"I expect it does look like a long ways to you,
+se&ntilde;ora; but it is not far. Do you think I can stay
+here with you until my ankle is well enough to
+walk? I have a little money. I will pay you something."</p>
+
+<p>"Oh, Mother!" exclaimed the girl, who now
+spoke for the first time. "You will let him stay,
+won't you?"</p>
+
+<p>"The wife of Leocadio would not turn a lame
+dog out, much less a lame boy."</p>
+
+<p>"<i>Mil gracias, se&ntilde;ora!</i>" exclaimed Adrian, with
+much gratitude. "Yes, more than a thousand
+thanks. You will never regret it."</p>
+
+<p>"The wife of Leocadio is not learned," was the
+reply, "but she knows an honest youth when she
+sees one. Come, Peppita, let the young man go
+to sleep. We will make our bed out here."</p>
+
+<p>She drew the curtains together and Adrian was
+left alone to his own reflections.</p>
+
+<p>"By George!" he exclaimed under his breath,
+"if I ever get out of this measly country, I'll be
+<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_184" id="Page_184" href="#Page_184">[Pg 184]</a></span>
+glad. I wonder what has become of Billie? Of
+course he'll look for me, and old Don, too; but
+it looks as though it might be weeks before I could
+walk. Well, I don't care. If Mr. Black and Josie
+got away, that's glory enough for one day."</p>
+
+<p>He settled himself down and tried to go to sleep,
+but his leg hurt him so that he could not. In
+fact, the pain was so great that every once in a
+while he groaned.</p>
+
+<p>After a few of these groans the woman appeared
+in the door with an earthen vessel filled with hot
+water.</p>
+
+<p>"If the se&ntilde;or will bind this on his ankle, it will
+do it much good," she said.</p>
+
+<p>"I'll do anything to get rid of this pain," said
+Adrian.</p>
+
+<p>He took the jar and, dipping his handkerchief
+in it, bathed his ankle freely and finally bound the
+cloth around the swollen part.</p>
+
+<p>"There," he muttered as he at last succeeded
+in finding a comfortable position, "now I think I
+can get a little sleep."</p>
+
+<p>How long thereafter it was before he came
+to himself he did not know, but when he opened his
+eyes the first streak of daylight was creeping in
+through a little window.</p>
+
+<p>A minute later there was the rattle of musketry,
+followed by a hearty American cheer. He raised
+up to look out of the window, when the side of the
+room came in with a crash.</p>
+
+
+<hr style="width: 65%;" />
+<div><span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_185" id="Page_185" href="#Page_185">[Pg 185]</a></span></div>
+<h2><a name="CHAPTER_XXII" id="CHAPTER_XXII"></a>CHAPTER XXII.</h2>
+
+<h3>A RESCUE AND A SURPRISE.</h3>
+
+
+<p>It would be hard to describe Adrian's surprise
+at the unexpected event which closed the preceding
+chapter. His first thought was that a cannon ball
+had struck the house, but a second thought convinced
+him that such was not the case. Before
+he had time to think further he heard a big voice
+call out:</p>
+
+<p>"Here he is!"</p>
+
+<p>A moment later Mr. Black burst in through the
+opening in the wall and, picking Adrian up in his
+arms as though he had been a baby, started on a
+run with him for the nearest horse.</p>
+
+<p>"There you are!" he exclaimed as he set the
+boy on the horse. "Now to run for it!"</p>
+
+<p>Adrian needed no second bidding, but digging
+his heels into the horse's side he dashed away toward
+the cocoanut grove, his flight being protected
+by the Americans with Billie at their head.</p>
+
+<p>A couple of minutes after, the entire band had
+rallied in the shelter of the trees, where they stopped
+to plan for the next move.</p>
+
+<p>"How did you ever find me?" asked Adrian as
+he and Billie peered out toward the town.</p>
+
+<p>"Mr. Black knew about where he lost you and
+we tracked you by your trail. Whoever dragged
+<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_186" id="Page_186" href="#Page_186">[Pg 186]</a></span>
+you into the house, left a trail as wide as your
+body."</p>
+
+<p>"It was a woman," explained Adrian, "and she
+was hiding me. But where were you when I whistled
+for help?"</p>
+
+<p>"That's a long story," was the reply, "which I
+will tell you when we have time; but briefly we
+were on the other side of the town, where we left
+the man on guard. It appears that our friend Jos&eacute;
+was a first-class traitor."</p>
+
+<p>"As I discovered," said Adrian.</p>
+
+<p>"Yes," continued Billie, "he sent a bunch of soldiers
+to capture us. The sentry heard them coming
+and gave the alarm. We went to his aid and
+succeeded in rescuing him, but that is what got
+us into this trouble."</p>
+
+<p>"And now what?"</p>
+
+<p>"Now we have to get away just as soon as we
+can."</p>
+
+<p>"Right," said Mr. Black. "There is no enemy
+in sight at this moment and the best thing we can
+do is to run for it. If we can cross the valley
+safely, we shall have little trouble."</p>
+
+<p>"I'd like to stay and give them a few shots,"
+said the corporal, "but it would probably be unwise."</p>
+
+<p>"I'll tell you what, Brooks," suggested Billie,
+"suppose you and I remain behind until we see
+the others well across the valley. If there is any
+pursuit, we can hold them back for a few minutes.
+<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_187" id="Page_187" href="#Page_187">[Pg 187]</a></span>
+They will not know how many we are and
+it will give the others a chance to escort Mr. Black
+and his daughter to a place of safety. You know
+that is what we really came for."</p>
+
+<p>"Fine!" was the corporal's reply.</p>
+
+<p>Mr. Black and Adrian protested, but they were
+overruled.</p>
+
+<p>"It's a good idea," said the oldest of the troopers,
+"and now to run for it."</p>
+
+<p>It was fully five minutes after the others had
+left that Billie and Brooks saw the Mexican infantry,
+some fifty in number, emerge from the town
+and come slowly toward them.</p>
+
+<p>Looking across the valley, they could perceive
+that the little band under the direction of Mr.
+Black was nearing the protection of the forest that
+covered the next hillside.</p>
+
+<p>"Two minutes more and they will be safe," said
+Billie.</p>
+
+<p>"Then we'll give them the two minutes," replied
+the corporal. "Cut loose at the bunch as soon as
+it is near enough."</p>
+
+<p>A moment later two rifles spoke out and then
+they turned loose their automatics, to give the impression
+of a much larger force.</p>
+
+<p>Two men fell and a minute later two more, as
+the boys' Winchesters again spoke.</p>
+
+<p>"Now for the horses!" cried Billie as the Mexicans
+threw themselves upon the ground.</p>
+
+<p>They sprang to their horses and dashed away<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_188" id="Page_188" href="#Page_188">[Pg 188]</a></span>
+down the valley.</p>
+
+<p>They were not discovered until they had cleared
+the shelter of the trees and then a volley was fired
+after them. The bullets sang all around them, but
+they escaped unhurt, and before another volley
+they were out of range.</p>
+
+<p>"It's a good thing for us that they have no
+cavalry," said Brooks as they sped along.</p>
+
+<p>"Sure is," was the response, "and I hope they
+don't succeed in getting word ahead of us."</p>
+
+<p>"We'll fix that," said Brooks. "We cross the
+railroad just at the foot of the hill and I'll climb
+up and cut the telegraph wires."</p>
+
+<p>"They may have sent word already."</p>
+
+<p>"Hardly. They may have tried to, but it's dollars
+to doughnuts that there was nobody at Joachin or
+Rio Blanco to receive it. The nearest night operator,
+I imagine, is at Piedras Negras."</p>
+
+<p>"They may send a force from there to head us
+off," suggested Billie.</p>
+
+<p>"That's so; but I'm not sure whether Piedras
+Negras is held by the Carranza or the Huerta
+forces."</p>
+
+<p>"It's a terrible mix-up, isn't it?" laughed Billie.
+"But I guess either side would be glad to
+get us."</p>
+
+<p>They had reached the tracks by this time and a
+couple of minutes later Brooks was up a pole and
+with the aid of his bayonet broke the wires.</p>
+
+<p>"If it isn't too late, that'll hold 'em for a while,"<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_189" id="Page_189" href="#Page_189">[Pg 189]</a></span>
+he remarked as he descended from the pole and
+mounted his horse.</p>
+
+<p>When they joined the main company, Billie told
+Mr. Black what they had done and repeated to him
+what Brooks had said.</p>
+
+<p>"I think he is right," said Mr. Black, "and my
+advice is that we should give Piedras Negras a
+wide berth."</p>
+
+<p>"We can't get too far away from the railroad,"
+explained Billie, "or we shall miss Don and his
+company. They are coming out for just such an
+emergency."</p>
+
+<p>They rode rapidly forward for a couple of hours
+and then, turning sharply off the highway, took to
+the woods which now grew dense all along the
+mountain sides.</p>
+
+<p>About ten o'clock they stopped for breakfast
+and then all took a nap until the sun drew near
+the western horizon.</p>
+
+<p>"We should reach our rendezvous with Don about
+dark," explained Billie, "and that would get us
+into Vera Cruz about daylight."</p>
+
+<p>As they approached the appointed spot, Billie
+and Adrian, ever on the alert, noticed almost as
+one that the place had a changed appearance and
+mentioned it to the others.</p>
+
+<p>"What do you mean?" asked the corporal.</p>
+
+<p>"I can't exactly explain," was Adrian's reply,
+<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_190" id="Page_190" href="#Page_190">[Pg 190]</a></span>
+"but my prairie training always warns me to go
+slow when I sense danger."</p>
+
+<p>"A mighty good idea," muttered one of the
+troopers, an old campaigner who had seen service
+with Funston in the Philippines. "These are slippery
+chaps."</p>
+
+<p>"If I could walk," was Adrian's comment, "I'd
+soon find out what is wrong; but you can't scout
+on horseback."</p>
+
+<p>The cavalcade came to a halt and the men examined
+their weapons to be sure they were in
+order.</p>
+
+<p>"What do you think we'd better do, Ad?" queried
+Billie.</p>
+
+<p>"I don't know. How far are we from the rendezvous?"</p>
+
+<p>"Not more than half a mile."</p>
+
+<p>"If it were not for the possibility of making matters
+worse," suggested Adrian, "I'd fire a few shots;
+but of course what we want is to get into Vera
+Cruz without a fight. What do you think, Mr.
+Black?"</p>
+
+<p>"This is new business to me, boys," was the
+reply. "I'll have to leave it to you."</p>
+
+<p>"What's the matter with my going on a scout?"
+asked Billie.</p>
+
+<p>"Nothing the matter with your going," laughed
+Adrian, "but there might be with your coming
+back. No, I shall have to go, ankle or no ankle."</p>
+
+<p>He slid from his horse, and almost before any
+<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_191" id="Page_191" href="#Page_191">[Pg 191]</a></span>
+one realized what he was doing he had slipped
+away on his hands and knees.</p>
+
+<p>"He is certainly a brave boy," was Josie's remark,
+"and I hate to think of his taking all this
+risk on my account."</p>
+
+<p>"Not so much risk for him as for us, I'm thinking,"
+muttered the old trooper. "They are looking
+for mounted men&mdash;if they're looking at all&mdash;and
+not for crawling boys."</p>
+
+<p>The old trooper was right, and ten minutes later
+Adrian returned to say that there was a small body
+of horsemen at the next turn of the road.</p>
+
+<p>"Did you see anything of Don?" queried Billie.</p>
+
+<p>"Not a sign."</p>
+
+<p>"That's mighty funny. Where do you suppose he
+can be?"</p>
+
+<p>"He may be hiding back in the woods, just as we
+are."</p>
+
+<p>"Well," said the corporal, "now that we know
+where the greasers are, what's the matter of going
+forward?"</p>
+
+<p>"No matter at all," replied Adrian. "We can
+easily bear away to the left and give them the
+shake, but I don't know what to do about the
+others."</p>
+
+<p>"The others will have to look out for themselves,"
+replied Brooks. "They are able to do
+it."</p>
+
+<p>The words had hardly left his lips ere there came
+the sound of a single shot away to the left.</p>
+
+<p>"There they are!" cried Billie. "Come on!"<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_192" id="Page_192" href="#Page_192">[Pg 192]</a></span></p>
+
+<p>The little cavalcade started forward, but ere they
+had gone a dozen rods they could hear the sound of
+approaching horsemen, crashing through the woods
+to their right.</p>
+
+<p>"The Mexicans!" said Adrian.</p>
+
+<p>"To cover, every man!" cried the corporal.</p>
+
+<p>A minute later every horse lay flat on the ground
+with his rider concealed behind him.</p>
+
+
+
+<hr style="width: 65%;" />
+<h2><a name="CHAPTER_XXIII" id="CHAPTER_XXIII"></a>CHAPTER XXIII.</h2>
+
+<h3>A DINNER AND ITS RESULT.</h3>
+
+
+<p>With a shout the Mexicans broke into the clearing
+which the Americans had just left. They were
+a motley crowd, not much like the cavalry that
+forms such a great part of Uncle Sam's army.</p>
+
+<p>"It seems a shame to hurt them," muttered the
+corporal. "They look as though they would run
+if you said boo!"</p>
+
+<p>Seeing no one, the Mexicans, some twenty or
+twenty-five in number, came to a halt and their
+leaders held a council of war.</p>
+
+<p>The Americans, a couple of rods back in the
+woods, partly concealed by the trees and partly by
+the deepening twilight, watched them silently.</p>
+
+<p>After a couple of minutes' confab, the captain
+of the band gave an order which the boys could
+<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_193" id="Page_193" href="#Page_193">[Pg 193]</a></span>
+not hear and a couple of Mexicans dismounted
+and began carefully to examine the ground. They
+were looking for the prints of horses' hoofs.</p>
+
+<p>"<i>Aqui'sta!</i>" exclaimed one of the men on foot,
+pointing to the ground.</p>
+
+<p>The captain drew near and leaned over from his
+horse to see more clearly.</p>
+
+<p>He was evidently satisfied, for he straightened
+up and gave another command and the two horsemen
+sprang to their saddles.</p>
+
+<p>Another command and every man's sabre flashed
+in the air.</p>
+
+<p>Raising his own sabre aloft, the captain was
+about to give another command, when there was
+the sound of a single shot from the rear and the
+captain's sabre went flying from his hand, struck
+by a rifle ball.</p>
+
+<p>"<i>Carramba!</i>" he cried. "<i>Emboscado!</i>" meaning
+"an ambush," and putting spurs to his horse he
+turned and fled in the direction from which he
+had come, followed by the entire band, while the
+Americans fired a volley into the air.</p>
+
+<p>"They'll never stop running," laughed the corporal,
+"until they reach home&mdash;wherever that is."</p>
+
+<p>"And in the meantime we'll get out of here,"
+said Mr. Black.</p>
+
+<p>The men sprang to their feet and to their horses.
+At the same moment there came from the woods
+to the left the well-known whistle of the Broncho
+Rider Boys.</p>
+
+<p>"It's Don!" cried Billie, as he gave the answering<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_194" id="Page_194" href="#Page_194">[Pg 194]</a></span>
+call, and an instant later Donald came into
+view through the trees, closely followed by half
+a score of Uncle Sam's troopers.</p>
+
+<p>"Just too late," said Adrian.</p>
+
+<p>"Too late for what?" queried Donald.</p>
+
+<p>"To see a masterly retreat," and in a few words
+he told Donald what had occurred.</p>
+
+<p>"Well," was the rejoinder, "I am glad no blood
+was shed. But who fired the shot from the rear?"</p>
+
+<p>"I," came a voice, and out of the shadows appeared
+a figure which had a most familiar appearance.
+"If you don't recognize me," he continued,
+"you may recognize Ambrosio."</p>
+
+<p>"By George!" exclaimed Billie, "if it isn't our
+old friend Strong. Where on earth did you come
+from?"</p>
+
+<p>"I suppose I might ask you the same thing,"
+was the laughing reply. "Briefly, I am on my way
+to Vera Cruz. I heard there was a band of American
+brigands out in the mountains and I thought
+I might fall in with them."</p>
+
+<p>"So that's what they call us, is it?" said Billie.
+"I never expected to be called a brigand."</p>
+
+<p>"Strange things happen to men who travel," declared
+Strong facetiously; "but you'd better be going.
+There are some good troops in this section
+and they are on the lookout."</p>
+
+<p>"Good advice," muttered the old trooper. "This
+ain't no pleasure excursion."</p>
+
+<p>"Sorry we haven't a horse for you," said Adrian<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_195" id="Page_195" href="#Page_195">[Pg 195]</a></span>
+to Strong, "but I guess you are used to walking."</p>
+
+<p>"A good deal more so than riding. But, if one
+of you don't mind giving Ambrosio a lift, it will
+help some."</p>
+
+<p>Several expressed their willingness to take the
+ape on behind, but he would go to no one but
+Billie.</p>
+
+<p>"All right, old man," laughed the boy; "but no
+funny business," and he broke off a twig and shook
+it at Ambrosio. "You see this."</p>
+
+<p>Now that the two companies had united, they
+broke away from the railroad and made a bee line
+toward Vera Cruz, arriving in sight of the city
+at daybreak.</p>
+
+<p>"Here's where we part company with the troopers,"
+explained Donald. "We six and Ambrosio
+will ride into town together and the boys will come
+in as they wish. There must be no suggestion of
+a military expedition."</p>
+
+<p>"I see," said Mr. Black, "and I want to thank
+you all for your kindness to my daughter and to
+me. That is about all I can do now. Perhaps some
+day I can do more."</p>
+
+<p>"That's enough," muttered the old trooper, "unless
+you can get us all sent back home. I can't
+see any use of keeping us here."</p>
+
+<p>"That's all right, old man," laughed the corporal.
+"You know you would not go home if you
+could."</p>
+
+<p>"Better not give me a chance," was the grumbling<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_196" id="Page_196" href="#Page_196">[Pg 196]</a></span>
+reply, as the trooper bit off a big piece of
+tobacco and tucked it away in his cheek.</p>
+
+<p>Reveille was just sounding when the boys, accompanied
+by their three friends and Ambrosio,
+perched upon Billie's horse, drew up in front of
+Lieut. Grant's quarters. They had been recognized
+and passed through the lines, and as the men caught
+sight of them they were given a hearty cheer.</p>
+
+<p>"You seem to have made friends," laughed the
+lieutenant as he greeted them, "and there is every
+reason why you should. The general will be glad
+to see you and hear your report. I have no doubt
+you have a good story to tell, and he likes a good
+story."</p>
+
+<p>When the boys reached home they found the gate
+still locked, although it was now considerably past
+the time when the household was astir. Their knock
+was answered by the <i>portero</i>, who, in response to a
+question by Billie, said that Santiago was seriously
+ill and had been for thirty-six hours.</p>
+
+<p>"What is the matter?" asked Donald.</p>
+
+<p>"Fever."</p>
+
+<p>"I am not surprised," declared Adrian. "The
+strange thoughts he has been thinking so many
+days were bound to result in something serious."</p>
+
+<p>"Perhaps it is not convenient for us to remain
+here," said Mr. Black. "We can, I am sure, find
+some other place."</p>
+
+<p>But at this moment Lucia appeared at the head
+<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_197" id="Page_197" href="#Page_197">[Pg 197]</a></span>
+of the stairs. When made acquainted with Mr.
+Black's words she would not hear of his taking
+Josie to any other house and gave orders for making
+her perfectly at home. The only one who did
+not remain was Strong.</p>
+
+<p>"I'll come back this evening," he said. "I have
+a strange story to tell you boys and I may need
+your help in locating a man I am most anxious to
+find."</p>
+
+<p>But he did not come back that evening, and when
+he did come the next night the boys were not
+there, having been invited to dine with Gen. Funston.
+Had things not happened thus, a part of
+this story could never have been written, for it
+was while dining with the general that the boys
+were given a duty to perform, which was the most
+arduous of all their adventures in the land of the
+Montezumas.</p>
+
+<p>And this was the manner of it.</p>
+
+<p>They were just finishing dinner and Billie was
+congratulating himself that he had had his fill of
+good American cooking, when an aide announced
+that a Mexican gentleman, Don Esteban Mendoza,
+craved an immediate audience with Gen. Funston.</p>
+
+<p>"I am sure you young gentlemen will excuse me
+a few minutes," said the general, "as Don Esteban
+is one of the prominent bankers of the city and I
+know his business must be of importance."</p>
+
+<p>The boys were glad to accept the proffered excuse
+and the general withdrew, leaving them in the
+<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_198" id="Page_198" href="#Page_198">[Pg 198]</a></span>
+company of several members of his staff, to whom
+they briefly related their recent adventure. When
+they told of the "ambush" there was much amusement.</p>
+
+<p>In the midst of their conversation the general
+returned accompanied by Don Esteban.</p>
+
+<p>"These are the young gentlemen to whom I referred,"
+explained the general, introducing the
+boys. "They are typical Americans and, being
+civilians and speaking Spanish fluently, will be just
+the ones to help you in your trouble."</p>
+
+<p>Then to the boys: "Don Esteban has a very delicate
+mission for which he asks the assistance of
+Americans. He wished me to detail three young
+officers for the work, but this I do not feel I can
+do, as it is strictly a private mission. If you feel
+that you can undertake it, he will be glad to explain
+it to you."</p>
+
+<p>"Anything that you recommend, General, we shall
+be glad to undertake," replied Donald, acting as
+spokesman for the trio.</p>
+
+<p>"Then I shall turn you over to Don Esteban, and
+as his business is pressing, I will excuse you if
+you wish to accompany him home."</p>
+
+<p>"A thousand thanks, General," said Don Esteban
+effusively. Then to the boys: "My automobile is
+at the door. If you will take seats in it, we shall
+be speedily at my house. You will pardon me if
+I speak nothing but Spanish, as I know very little
+<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_199" id="Page_199" href="#Page_199">[Pg 199]</a></span>
+English, although"&mdash;with an expressive glance at
+Gen. Funston&mdash;"I hope to know it better."</p>
+
+<p>Following Don Esteban, they were soon speeding
+through the streets and five minutes later entered
+a handsome patio.</p>
+
+<p>"This is my house," said Don Esteban. "Be
+pleased to consider it your own. Now, if you will
+follow me to the library, I will explain the mission
+I wish you to undertake."</p>
+
+<p>The boys followed without a word, but as they
+passed up the stairs Billie muttered under his
+breath:</p>
+
+<p>"Did you notice, boys, that this house backs right
+up against Santiago's?"</p>
+
+
+
+<hr style="width: 65%;" />
+<h2><a name="CHAPTER_XXIV" id="CHAPTER_XXIV"></a>CHAPTER XXIV.</h2>
+
+<h3>DON ESTEBAN'S STRANGE LOSS.</h3>
+
+
+<p>"Before I explain to you the mission I wish you
+to undertake," said Don Esteban, "I must narrate
+briefly a story that has been handed down from
+the days of Montezuma. It is to the effect that
+when the Spanish conqueror, Cortez, was about
+to capture the City of Mexico, most of the treasure
+of the Aztecs was sunk in the lake, which at
+that time covered a portion of the Mexican plateau.</p>
+
+<p>"A part of this treasure is said to have been recovered,
+but the mine from which the gold of
+<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_200" id="Page_200" href="#Page_200">[Pg 200]</a></span>
+Montezuma was taken has never been discovered,
+although search has been made for upward of five
+hundred years. Some have supposed that the mine
+was adjacent to the City of Mexico and that it
+was flooded at the time the treasure was sunk in
+the lake. Others have thought it was located in
+the state of Michoacan, while still others have believed
+it located in the vicinity of Mt. Orizaba.</p>
+
+<p>"My reason for telling you this is that some
+years ago a strange appearing man came to our
+bank and made a large deposit of money, all in
+gold. He did not deposit it all at once, but brought
+it in a few thousand dollars at a time until it
+amounted to more than a million dollars. Then
+he disappeared and we have never seen him since."</p>
+
+<p>"And has he never called for any of the money?"
+asked Billie.</p>
+
+<p>"Not in person, although he has drawn upon it
+at frequent intervals. The name under which it
+was deposited is James Moon."</p>
+
+<p>"An American?" asked Donald.</p>
+
+<p>"I could not say whether he was an American
+or an Englishman. We took him for the latter.
+But now I am coming to the real part of the
+story.</p>
+
+<p>"In addition to the money which he deposited,
+he also left with us a small brass-bound box, in
+which he said there were valuable papers. He gave
+orders that it should be delivered to no one but
+himself in person, or until the expiration of ten
+years. The ten years will be up in a few days<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_201" id="Page_201" href="#Page_201">[Pg 201]</a></span>
+and this afternoon I bethought me of the box.
+But when I went into the vault in which it has been
+kept for so many years, the place upon an upper
+shelf, where it has always stood, was vacant. The
+box was gone!"</p>
+
+<p>"Gone?" exclaimed all the boys in unison. "Do
+you mean stolen?"</p>
+
+<p>"So it would appear."</p>
+
+<p>"How could it have been done?" asked Adrian.</p>
+
+<p>"I cannot say; but the strange thing about the
+whole matter is that in place of the box, there lay
+upon the shelf an envelope&mdash;yellow with age, upon
+which was written in ink that had scarcely faded
+the words: 'Montezuma's Mine.'"</p>
+
+<p>"Well, what do you think of that?" queried Billie,
+looking at the others in amazement.</p>
+
+<p>"I don't think," laughed Adrian. "It's up to you
+to do the thinking."</p>
+
+<p>"Is there no clue whatever?" asked Donald.</p>
+
+<p>"Not that could be really called a clue. The
+only suspicious thing that has happened to-day at
+all, was that a mountebank came into our bank&mdash;&mdash;"</p>
+
+<p>"A mountebank!" from all.</p>
+
+<p>"Yes."</p>
+
+<p>"Did he have an ape with him?"</p>
+
+<p>"No! He was quite alone. He did not come in
+to make merry, but to get a bill changed. While
+he was there he was observed to scrutinize the
+place very closely."</p>
+
+<p>"But he did not go into your vault?"<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_202" id="Page_202" href="#Page_202">[Pg 202]</a></span></p>
+
+<p>"No! He took his change and went peaceably
+out."</p>
+
+<p>"Then, why should you suspect him?" insisted
+Donald, casting a knowing glance at the other boys.</p>
+
+<p>"Because, an hour later, he came in again and
+said that one of the bills we gave him as change
+was a counterfeit."</p>
+
+<p>"Was it?"</p>
+
+<p>"No, it was not, although it was an old issue.
+The teller who waited upon him had no recollection
+of ever having seen the bill before, but rather
+than have a scene, we gave him another bill for
+it."</p>
+
+<p>"How large a bill was it?" asked Adrian.</p>
+
+<p>"Only a peso"&mdash;that is a dollar&mdash;"and it seemed
+hardly worth talking about; but you'd have thought
+it was a hundred."</p>
+
+<p>"Perhaps it seemed a large amount to him,"
+ventured Billie.</p>
+
+<p>"Perhaps," admitted Don Esteban. "But be that
+as it may, I should like to see the man again, and
+especially would I like to know where he got that
+old dollar."</p>
+
+<p>"Why?"</p>
+
+<p>"Because it may have come out of that box."</p>
+
+<p>"Well, yes," said Donald, with a shake of his
+head, "it might have; but how could the mountebank
+have gotten the box?"</p>
+
+<p>"That is the mystery," was Don Esteban's reply.</p>
+
+<p>"And how do you wish us to help you?" asked<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_203" id="Page_203" href="#Page_203">[Pg 203]</a></span>
+Adrian.</p>
+
+<p>"Why," explained the banker, "I asked Gen. Funston
+to find the mountebank for me. He said you
+boys would do better than any one else."</p>
+
+<p>"But why us? Why not a Mexican policeman?"</p>
+
+<p>"Because the mountebank was an American. He
+may even have been a soldier and have hidden himself
+among your men."</p>
+
+<p>"Oh, he was an American, was he?" laughed Donald.
+"Then I believe we can put our finger on him
+with ease. But the man we have in mind always
+carried with him an ape."</p>
+
+<p>"Then it may not be the same," replied Don Esteban,
+"for this one had no ape with him either
+time."</p>
+
+<p>"It certainly does look like a mystery," was Adrian's
+comment. "Where is the vault from which
+the box was taken?"</p>
+
+<p>"On the other side of the patio."</p>
+
+<p>"May we examine it?"</p>
+
+<p>"Certainly. I'll show it to you now."</p>
+
+<p>Don Esteban led the way downstairs and across
+the patio. Opening the rear door of the bank, he
+escorted them within and closed the door.</p>
+
+<p>Passing behind the counter, he opened the iron
+door of the vault, disclosing within a good-sized
+chamber, in the rear of which was set the great
+steel safe, locked with a time lock.</p>
+
+<p>"There," explained Don Esteban, pointing to<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_204" id="Page_204" href="#Page_204">[Pg 204]</a></span>
+an upper shelf, "is where the box stood."</p>
+
+<p>"Oh, it was not a large box, then!" said Adrian.</p>
+
+<p>"Oh, no! Not more than eight or nine inches
+cube."</p>
+
+<p>The boy examined the vault carefully by the
+light of a gas jet.</p>
+
+<p>"There seems no way that any one could have
+entered except by the door," said Donald.</p>
+
+<p>"None whatever!"</p>
+
+<p>"You are sure there is no opening in the ceiling?"</p>
+
+<p>"Absolutely."</p>
+
+<p>Don Esteban led the boys out and locked the
+door of the vault.</p>
+
+<p>"Well," declared Donald as they came out into
+the patio after finishing their inspection, not only
+of the vault but of the rest of the office, "I guess
+we had better go home and study over the matter
+a little. I should not be surprised if we could
+put our hands upon the mountebank with very little
+trouble; but I feel sure he had nothing to do with
+the disappearance of the box."</p>
+
+<p>"I wish I could feel that way," said Adrian
+after they were out of hearing of Don Esteban. "I
+have never quite trusted Strong. There is something
+strange about him."</p>
+
+<p>"Yes, he is a bit queer; but how on earth could
+he have stolen the box if he did not even go behind
+the counter?"</p>
+
+<p>"He couldn't; but still I mistrust him."<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_205" id="Page_205" href="#Page_205">[Pg 205]</a></span></p>
+
+<p>"I wonder where Ambrosio was all this time?"
+mused Billie.</p>
+
+<p>"Tied up at home, most likely. An American
+among Americans would hardly feel like traveling
+around with a hand organ and a monkey," was
+Don's emphatic reply.</p>
+
+<p>Upon arriving at Santiago's residence they were
+told that Strong had been there earlier in the
+evening and seemed much disappointed at not finding
+them at home.</p>
+
+<p>"Did he leave any word?" asked Billie of the
+portero.</p>
+
+<p>"None, se&ntilde;or; but Donna Lucia would like to see
+you in the library."</p>
+
+<p>"What is the matter? Is Santiago worse?"</p>
+
+<p>"No, se&ntilde;or. He is sleeping quietly. I could not
+say what she wants, but she seemed considerably
+disturbed."</p>
+
+<p>"Better go up alone, Billie," said Donald. "If
+we are needed, you can call us. We'll wait here
+in the patio for a few minutes before we turn in."</p>
+
+<p>Billie ran up the stairs and tapped at the library
+door. He was immediately admitted by Lucia and
+the door was closed behind him.</p>
+
+<p>"It is getting to be a good deal of a family affair,"
+laughed Adrian.</p>
+
+<p>"Yes," replied Donald, with a grin. "I wonder
+where Josie and Mr. Black are?"</p>
+
+<p>Adrian colored.</p>
+
+<p>"I don't know why you should have thought of<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_206" id="Page_206" href="#Page_206">[Pg 206]</a></span>
+them!"</p>
+
+<p>"Oh," replied Donald nonchalantly, "speaking of
+family affairs naturally reminded me that you&mdash;&mdash;"</p>
+
+<p>"Oh, Don!" came Billie's voice, breaking in upon
+the conversation.</p>
+
+<p>"Yes. What is it?"</p>
+
+<p>"Come up here, the both of you! Quick!"</p>
+
+<p>The boys ran up the stairs two steps at a time.</p>
+
+<p>"In here," and Billie held the library door open.
+"I've something I want to show you."</p>
+
+<p>He led the way to the table, and there, under
+the glow of the lamp, stood a brass-bound box
+about eight or nine inches cube.</p>
+
+
+
+<hr style="width: 65%;" />
+<h2><a name="CHAPTER_XXV" id="CHAPTER_XXV"></a>CHAPTER XXV.</h2>
+
+<h3>DONALD IS KIDNAPED.</h3>
+
+
+<p>"Great Scott!" was the spontaneous exclamation
+of both the newcomers. "Where did it come
+from?"</p>
+
+<p>"You tell," replied Billie. "Lucia says it was
+not here an hour ago. Neither has any one been
+in the room so far as she knows."</p>
+
+<p>"Has she been here all the time?" asked Adrian.</p>
+
+<p>"No, she was with Josie in her room for a time;
+but the door into the patio was locked."</p>
+
+<p>"Some one might have come in through the window."<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_207" id="Page_207" href="#Page_207">[Pg 207]</a></span></p>
+
+<p>"A fat chance, isn't there!" laughed Billie, pointing
+to the only window in the room which was protected
+with long and heavy iron bars, set so closely
+together that a child would have had trouble in
+squeezing through&mdash;much less a man.</p>
+
+<p>"Does look a little difficult," replied Adrian.</p>
+
+<p>"Worse than difficult. Impossible," was Donald's
+comment.</p>
+
+<p>"Did you hear any noise?" asked Billie of Lucia.</p>
+
+<p>"None whatever."</p>
+
+<p>"And you have never seen the box before?"</p>
+
+<p>Lucia wrinkled her brows and thought deeply.</p>
+
+<p>"Do you know," she finally said, "I have a sort
+of a dim recollection that, away back in my childhood
+somewhere, I have seen it or one just like
+it."</p>
+
+<p>"Away back in your childhood," laughed Donald,
+"couldn't have been so very far, Se&ntilde;orita."</p>
+
+<p>Lucia made a little grimace.</p>
+
+<p>"I'm nearly seventeen," she said.</p>
+
+<p>"Botheration!" said Billie. "We are not here to
+discuss ages, but to find out how this box came here.
+I have no doubt that Lucia has seen many similar
+boxes in her time."</p>
+
+<p>"Well," asked Donald, somewhat nettled, "what
+do you propose to do?"</p>
+
+<p>"In the first place, I want to search the house."</p>
+
+<p>"That's a good idea," declared Adrian. "Donna<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_208" id="Page_208" href="#Page_208">[Pg 208]</a></span>
+Lucia, will you lead the way?"</p>
+
+<p>"Certainly. Right this way; but don't go into
+father's room. I know there is no one in there.
+One of the servants has been with him every minute
+of the time."</p>
+
+<p>Headed by Lucia, the boys explored the house
+from top to bottom, but not a sign of any one
+could they find. So far as they could determine,
+the box must have come in of its own self.</p>
+
+<p>"I'll tell you one thing we can and must do,"
+said Billie, after they had returned to the library.
+"We must keep a watch in this room to-night.
+Whoever put the box here may return."</p>
+
+<p>"Right!" from Don. "You do have occasional
+lucid intervals, Billie."</p>
+
+<p>Billie grinned, but made no reply.</p>
+
+<p>"I think we may all stay here for a few hours,"
+suggested Lucia. "Father is so much better that
+I think we may have a little music. I will play
+some accompaniments on the guitar and Josie can
+sing."</p>
+
+<p>"That will seem a good deal like being back in
+the States," declared Adrian. "With the Stars and
+Stripes flying over my head, a brigade of American
+troops on guard and an American girl singing,
+I can almost forget I am on Mexican soil."</p>
+
+<p>"How about the accompanist?" queried Billie.</p>
+
+<p>"Oh!" laughed Adrian, "we're quite willing to
+adopt her. Hey, Donald?"</p>
+
+<p>"Don't ask me, Ad. Ask Billie."<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_209" id="Page_209" href="#Page_209">[Pg 209]</a></span></p>
+
+<p>"I am sure we could do no better," was Billie's
+gallant reply.</p>
+
+<p>Lucia's suggestion was carried out and for a
+couple of hours there was a merry little party under
+Santiago's hospitable roof. Even the mysterious
+box was forgotten and the young people were
+giving themselves up to a jolly good time, when suddenly
+there came a scream which caused every one
+to turn their eyes toward the room in which the
+sick man was supposed to be lying.</p>
+
+<p>But there in the doorway he stood, his long night
+robe reaching nearly to the floor and his thin black
+hair standing almost on end.</p>
+
+<p>"Father!" cried Lucia, rushing toward him
+"What is it?"</p>
+
+<p>He waved her off, but made no reply, while with
+his long bony finger he pointed at the brass-bound
+box.</p>
+
+<p>"Where did it come from?" he asked in a shrill,
+querulous tone. "Who brought back my secret
+casket?"</p>
+
+<p>"Yours?" came from every one in the room.</p>
+
+<p>"Yes! Mine! Mine!!" he almost screamed.</p>
+
+<p>"He's raving!" cried Josie. "Can't some one do
+something for him?"</p>
+
+<p>"No," he replied, and his voice became more
+calm, "I am not raving. I know whereof I speak.
+Quick! Let me look within it to see that all is
+safe."</p>
+
+<p>"It is locked, Father," said Lucia, coming to his<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_210" id="Page_210" href="#Page_210">[Pg 210]</a></span>
+side, "and we have no key."</p>
+
+<p>"I can unlock it," he cried. "I can unlock it.
+Give it to me. Give it to me."</p>
+
+<p>He staggered forward and seized the box in
+his hands. For several seconds he fumbled with
+it, turning it first upon one side and then upon another,
+and at last raised the lid. He thrust in his
+hand and then stopped as one stupefied.</p>
+
+<p>"Empty! Empty!" he gasped in an almost audible
+whisper. "The plan of Montezuma's mine is
+gone! Gone!!"</p>
+
+<p>A moment he stood and gazed around upon the
+faces of those in the room and then collapsed upon
+the floor.</p>
+
+<p>Quickly the boys picked him up and carried him
+to his bed and the attending physician was summoned.</p>
+
+<p>Billie picked up the box and examined it curiously.</p>
+
+<p>"I wonder how he opened it?" he mused. "There
+must be some sort of a spring somewhere."</p>
+
+<p>He felt the box all over, but could find nothing.
+Then he closed it and set it upon the table. A
+moment later Donald picked it up and tried to open
+it, but it was locked fast.</p>
+
+<p>"Nothing but mysteries," he said. "I'm getting
+tired of them. But before anything else happens,
+I'm going around and notify Don Esteban that the
+box is here."</p>
+
+<p>"I'll go with you," said Adrian.<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_211" id="Page_211" href="#Page_211">[Pg 211]</a></span></p>
+
+<p>"No, you'd better stay here. I'll take a mozo
+with me."</p>
+
+<p>He ran hastily down the stairs and a minute later
+the boys heard the gate close behind him.</p>
+
+<p>"I guess this is the quickest way," thought Donald
+as he gained the sidewalk. "I'll not bother with
+a mozo. With American soldiers on guard and my
+automatic in my pocket, I have nothing to fear."</p>
+
+<p>A couple of minutes later he was ringing the bell
+at Don Esteban's house. He was hastily admitted
+and at once conducted to that gentleman's presence,
+where he narrated hastily what had occurred
+at the other house.</p>
+
+<p>"Who is this old man?" Don Esteban asked of
+Donald.</p>
+
+<p>Donald explained as best he could.</p>
+
+<p>"Which is mighty little," he declared when he
+had finished. "He is the greatest mystery we have
+ever encountered. There is no doubt that he is
+an Indian, but he speaks English like an Englishman."</p>
+
+<p>"I must go and see him at once," declared Don
+Esteban, rising.</p>
+
+<p>"I don't think you can, sir, to-night. I don't
+think the physician would permit it."</p>
+
+<p>"Well, then, the first thing in the morning. I
+thank you, young sir. Won't you have a glass of
+wine before you go?"</p>
+
+<p>"No, I think not," replied Donald. "I've never<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_212" id="Page_212" href="#Page_212">[Pg 212]</a></span>
+acquired that Mexican habit yet. Good night, sir."</p>
+
+<p>He left the house feeling greatly relieved that he
+had reported the finding of the box and walked
+slowly along whistling merrily. As he turned off
+the street upon which Don Esteban lived he heard
+soft footsteps behind him and turned hastily.</p>
+
+<p>But he was too late.</p>
+
+<p>Before he could see who it was, or ere he could
+cry out, a cloak was thrown over his head and he
+was picked up and carried away bodily.</p>
+
+<p>Donald was not the boy to give in without a
+struggle, but kick and squirm as he might, he could
+not free himself. Presently those who were carrying
+him stopped and laid him on the sidewalk. Then
+he heard a knock and a gate opened. Then he
+was lifted up again and, almost before he knew it,
+he was thrust into a little room&mdash;a closet it seemed&mdash;and
+the door closed upon him.</p>
+
+<p>It was a hot night and the little place was stifling.</p>
+
+<p>"I'll smother if I don't get out of this," he muttered.</p>
+
+<p>Slowly he unwrapped the cloak from about his
+head and at last freed himself completely from its
+folds; but he secured little relief from the heat.</p>
+
+<p>The room could not have been more than six feet
+square and it did not take Donald long to run his
+hand clear around the wall.</p>
+
+<p>There was only one door, that through which he
+had been thrust, and it was locked. He pounded
+<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_213" id="Page_213" href="#Page_213">[Pg 213]</a></span>
+upon it, but to no avail. Then he sat down to
+think.</p>
+
+<p>"There is certainly no use to sweat myself to
+death," he told himself. "I'd better be as quiet
+as I can. There is air enough coming under the
+door so I won't suffocate, so I might just as well
+wait and see what will turn up."</p>
+
+<p>He ran his hand all over his automatic and found
+it in good shape. Then he leaned back against the
+wall opposite the door and waited. Ten minutes
+later the door was suddenly yanked open, another
+figure was bundled into the closet and the door
+slammed shut, almost before Donald could think.</p>
+
+
+
+<hr style="width: 65%;" />
+<h2><a name="CHAPTER_XXVI" id="CHAPTER_XXVI"></a>CHAPTER XXVI.</h2>
+
+<h3>A PLOT AGAINST FUNSTON.</h3>
+
+
+<p>A muttered imprecation was the only intimation
+that the figure which had been so unceremoniously
+bundled into the closet was alive.</p>
+
+<p>"Who are you?" asked Donald in Spanish.</p>
+
+<p>"Let me out of this," was the unsatisfactory response
+in English.</p>
+
+<p>"Oh!" from Donald. "You are an American.
+Well, keep still and I'll help you to get rid of the
+blanket."</p>
+
+<p>He grabbed hold of the covering and the newcomer
+was soon uncovered.</p>
+
+<p>"Now, then, who are you?" asked Donald again.<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_214" id="Page_214" href="#Page_214">[Pg 214]</a></span></p>
+
+<p>"I'll show you who I am if I get hold of you,"
+was the uncivil answer, and an arm shot out.</p>
+
+<p>"Now look here," said Donald, "if you don't stop
+that I'll let daylight through you. We are in a
+bad box and the only thing to do is to make the
+best of it."</p>
+
+<p>"We?" exclaimed the newcomer. "Why do you
+say we?"</p>
+
+<p>"Because I am a prisoner the same as you are.
+Now, who are you?"</p>
+
+<p>"I'm Lieutenant Grimes of the general's staff.
+Who are you?"</p>
+
+<p>"I am Donald Mackay, on a special mission for
+Gen. Funston."</p>
+
+<p>"How did they get you?"</p>
+
+<p>"Kidnaped me on the street. How did they get
+you?"</p>
+
+<p>"Same way. I had just left the general's quarters."</p>
+
+<p>"I can see that some one might want to capture
+you, lieutenant, but I cannot see what they want
+of me."</p>
+
+<p>"How long have you been here?" asked the lieutenant.</p>
+
+<p>"About half an hour. By the way, are you
+armed?"</p>
+
+<p>"No; they took away my weapons. How about
+you?"</p>
+
+<p>"I have my automatic. I'd have used it when
+<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_215" id="Page_215" href="#Page_215">[Pg 215]</a></span>
+you came in, only you were dumped in so suddenly."</p>
+
+<p>"What do you suppose the game is?"</p>
+
+<p>"I don't know; but we'll find out. I've been in
+tighter places than this&mdash;but no hotter," after a
+pause.</p>
+
+<p>"Have you tried to get out?"</p>
+
+<p>"Yes; but it was too hot work. The door seemed
+pretty strong."</p>
+
+<p>"Perhaps the two of us might force it," suggested
+Grimes. "I'm a pretty husky chap."</p>
+
+<p>"We might try," replied Donald. "The place is
+so narrow we can get a good brace."</p>
+
+<p>They put their feet against the opposite wall
+and pushed against the door.</p>
+
+<p>"We'll never make it that way," said the lieutenant.
+"We'll have to throw ourselves at it."</p>
+
+<p>"Not much room for that, Lieutenant, but you
+give the word and we'll have a try."</p>
+
+<p>Getting their bearings as well as they could in
+the dark, they drew themselves back and then literally
+threw themselves at the door. It gave way
+with a snap and both fell to their feet on the outside.</p>
+
+<p>Quick as a flash they were on their feet, Donald
+with his weapon ready for instant action.</p>
+
+<p>But there was no one in sight.</p>
+
+<p>"That's mighty funny!" exclaimed the lieutenant.
+"Lock two strong men up in a place like that and
+not guard it."</p>
+
+<p>"It's a mighty good thing for us they didn't,"<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_216" id="Page_216" href="#Page_216">[Pg 216]</a></span>
+laughed Donald. "I wonder where we are?"</p>
+
+<p>He glanced about the room which was dimly
+lighted by a couple of lamps, fastened to the wall
+by brackets. It was well&mdash;yes, elegantly furnished.
+At one side of the room was the closet out of which
+they had just emerged, while at the opposite side
+were three doors. On a third side were two windows
+and the fourth side was a plain wall.</p>
+
+<p>"Not a bad-looking place," observed the lieutenant.</p>
+
+<p>"Not at all," echoed Donald, "and there seem
+plenty of means of exit."</p>
+
+<p>"Sure, my boy; and if it's all the same to you,
+we'll go. The sooner I get back the quicker I'll
+be able to start something in this direction. Come
+on!"</p>
+
+<p>They crossed over to the doors and tried the first
+one. It was locked. They tried the second and
+it opened into another closet.</p>
+
+<p>"Three times and out," laughed Donald as he
+took hold of the knob of the last door.</p>
+
+<p>It yielded to his touch and he opened it gently.
+Then he quickly and quietly closed it.</p>
+
+<p>"What's up?" asked the lieutenant.</p>
+
+<p>Donald put his fingers to his lips.</p>
+
+<p>"How many?" queried Lieut. Grimes.</p>
+
+<p>"Three," was the whispered response. "Let's
+hear what they have to say."</p>
+
+<p>He opened the door a crack, through which they
+<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_217" id="Page_217" href="#Page_217">[Pg 217]</a></span>
+could see three men seated at a table. One wore
+the uniform of a Mexican officer, the other was
+dressed in Mexican costume, while the third was
+unquestionably an American, although they could
+only see his back.</p>
+
+<p>"I have carried out my part of the agreement,"
+the American was saying, "and now I want my
+money."</p>
+
+<p>"How do we know you have?" asked the officer.</p>
+
+<p>"Haven't I put Gen. Funston into your hands?"</p>
+
+<p>"We are not sure it is Funston," said the other.</p>
+
+<p>"Then bring him out and look at him. You
+know the general when you see him, don't you?"</p>
+
+<p>"I think so, although I've never seen him but
+once."</p>
+
+<p>"Well, that is he, all right," declared the American.</p>
+
+<p>Donald turned and looked at his companion.
+Then he chuckled.</p>
+
+<p>The lieutenant said nothing, but stroked his whiskers
+which he wore in exact imitation of his chief.</p>
+
+<p>"Lucky for the general," he whispered, and Donald
+nodded his head that he understood.</p>
+
+<p>The two Mexicans exchanged a few words under
+their breath which Donald could not hear and
+then the officer took from his breast pocket a large
+wallet, from which he counted out ten bank notes.
+They were yellow backs and Donald was not at
+all surprised when the officer said:</p>
+
+<p>"Here are ten one-thousand-dollar bills in American
+<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_218" id="Page_218" href="#Page_218">[Pg 218]</a></span>
+money. We believe you are telling us the
+truth, as your words are corroborated by the men
+who brought him here. But if you are playing
+us false, we shall know how to reach you."</p>
+
+<p>The American shrugged his shoulders as he took
+the bills, rolled them up nonchalantly and placed
+them in his trousers pocket.</p>
+
+<p>"You can find me at the Hidalgo Hotel whenever
+you want me," he said, "and now I must be
+going."</p>
+
+<p>He arose from his seat, and as he did so, Donald
+caught sight of his face. It was the mountebank,
+Strong, but in his stylish clothing Don had
+failed to recognize him.</p>
+
+<p>"Great Scott!" he muttered to himself, "the plot
+thickens!"</p>
+
+<p>"What's that?" queried the lieutenant, who
+caught the muttered exclamation.</p>
+
+<p>"Nothing much," replied Donald as the three men
+walked toward a door in the farther end of the
+room and he was enabled to speak without being
+heard, "only that is the man I'm looking for. Let's
+get out of the window and see if we can't head
+him off."</p>
+
+<p>He closed the door and turned the key which he
+had quietly taken from the other side.</p>
+
+<p>The windows were open and they looked out.
+They were on the side of the house overlooking a
+good-sized lawn.</p>
+
+<p>"That's the reason they are not barred," explained
+<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_219" id="Page_219" href="#Page_219">[Pg 219]</a></span>
+Donald. "Had they been front windows,
+we might as well have been in jail. You go first
+and I'll cover the retreat."</p>
+
+<p>Lieut. Grimes sprang into the window and lowered
+himself to the ground, just as a hand turned
+the knob.</p>
+
+<p>"Good-bye!" muttered Donald. "Sorry I can't
+wait to receive you," and he followed the lieutenant.</p>
+
+<p>On the ground they could hear the men trying
+to open the door and as they sped across the lawn
+toward a high brick wall, the door gave way with
+a crash and they could hear surprised voices.</p>
+
+<p>"They have discovered our wreckage!" cried
+Donald. "Over the wall you go!"</p>
+
+<p>"You first this time," said the lieutenant.</p>
+
+<p>"No, you first. I can boost you up, but I couldn't
+pull you. You can pull me."</p>
+
+<p>The argument was good and the lieutenant acted
+upon it.</p>
+
+<p>A minute later he was on top of the wall.</p>
+
+<p>"Great C&aelig;sar!" he exclaimed. "There's nothing
+under me but water."</p>
+
+<p>"Never mind that," was the response. "Haul me
+up."</p>
+
+<p>The lieutenant leaned down and gave the lad a
+hand.</p>
+
+<p>"Here we are," he said a minute later. "We
+can't jump in, for there is no knowing where we
+are."</p>
+
+<p>"Sure," from Donald. "Let's run along the<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_220" id="Page_220" href="#Page_220">[Pg 220]</a></span>
+wall."</p>
+
+<p>This they did for about a hundred yards and
+then the wall ended abruptly against what appeared
+to be an abutment.</p>
+
+<p>"We must act quickly," declared Donald. "They
+think you are Funston and won't hurt you. Keep
+up the deception. I'm going to swim for it. I'll
+have help here just as quick as I can. So long,"
+and, throwing off his coat, he jumped into the
+water some twenty feet below.</p>
+
+
+
+<hr style="width: 65%;" />
+<h2><a name="CHAPTER_XXVII" id="CHAPTER_XXVII"></a>CHAPTER XXVII.</h2>
+
+<h3>THE ADMIRAL TO THE RESCUE.</h3>
+
+
+<p>When Donald struck the water he allowed himself
+to go clear to the bottom, as he wanted to find
+out just about how deep it was.</p>
+
+<p>It was, as he had expected, about the depth of
+the water in the harbor and he made up his mind
+that he could not be far from some of the wharves
+that constitute the water front.</p>
+
+<p>When he came to the surface, he struck out away
+from the wall, and by the light of the moon was
+soon able to see the vessels in the offing. He could
+also see that he was well north of the principal
+docks.</p>
+
+<p>"I guess I'll land at the first place that offers,"
+<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_221" id="Page_221" href="#Page_221">[Pg 221]</a></span>
+he thought, "and find my way to headquarters from
+there."</p>
+
+<p>He struck out lustily, but had not been swimming
+more than a couple of minutes, when he heard the
+sharp exhaust of a gasoline launch.</p>
+
+<p>Realizing that it must be an American craft, he
+shouted at the top of his voice.</p>
+
+<p>At first there was no response, but as the boat
+came nearer and he shouted even more loudly, a
+friendly hail came over the waters.</p>
+
+<p>"Where are you?" came the voice as the boat
+came to a stop.</p>
+
+<p>"Here, to your port side," he replied.</p>
+
+<p>The launch was started again slowly and Donald
+was soon able to make himself visible.</p>
+
+<p>"Who are you?" was the first question pumped
+at him by the officer in command.</p>
+
+<p>"Special messenger for Gen. Funston," was the
+response.</p>
+
+<p>"Where is your uniform?"</p>
+
+<p>"I'm not a soldier. I am a civilian."</p>
+
+<p>"A likely story," snapped the officer, who chanced
+to be an ensign.</p>
+
+<p>"I can't help how likely it is," snapped Donald
+in return. "It's true, and I want to be put ashore
+as quickly as possible. I have an important message
+and the safety of one of his staff is involved.
+There is also a plot on foot to capture the general
+himself."</p>
+
+<p>"Nonsense! And besides, I can't put you ashore.<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_222" id="Page_222" href="#Page_222">[Pg 222]</a></span>
+I am carrying a message to Admiral Fletcher."</p>
+
+<p>"But my business is important," insisted Donald.</p>
+
+<p>"So is mine," declared the ensign.</p>
+
+<p>He ordered his launch full speed ahead in the
+direction of the flagship.</p>
+
+<p>"It's pretty tough," commented Donald, "but I'll
+prove I am right when I get to the ship."</p>
+
+<p>"I hope so," was the reply. "I haven't anything
+against you and you may be telling the truth, but
+I can't take any chances."</p>
+
+<p>Fifteen minutes later they drew up beside the
+flagship.</p>
+
+<p>"Up you go," said the ensign, motioning Donald
+up the ladder. "I'll present you to the officer of
+the deck," which he quickly did.</p>
+
+<p>"Here's a man I picked up in the water, sir, who
+says he has a message for Gen. Funston, but I
+had no time to put him ashore."</p>
+
+<p>"Looks more like a boy than a man," replied the
+officer. Then to Donald: "What's this about you
+having a message for Gen. Funston?"</p>
+
+<p>Donald repeated what he had told the ensign.</p>
+
+<p>"What's that?" asked another officer, coming forward
+out of the shadow of the after turret.</p>
+
+<p>The first officer saluted.</p>
+
+<p>"Tell the Admiral your story, my lad," he said.</p>
+
+<p>Again Donald repeated his story, this time going
+more into detail.</p>
+
+<p>"Come with me," ordered the Admiral, and he<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_223" id="Page_223" href="#Page_223">[Pg 223]</a></span>
+led the way to the wireless operator.</p>
+
+<p>"Get into communication with Gen. Funston at
+once," was the admiral's order.</p>
+
+<p>"Here he is, sir," was the report a couple of
+minutes later.</p>
+
+<p>"Ask him if he has three American boys on a
+special mission."</p>
+
+<p>The answer came back promptly that he had.</p>
+
+<p>"Ask him if Lieut. Grimes is missing."</p>
+
+<p>Again came back the answer that he was.</p>
+
+<p>"Tell the general that we have one of the lads
+on the <i>Arkansas</i>, and that he has had a strange adventure.
+Tell him I will send the lad ashore immediately."</p>
+
+<p>"Thank you, sir," said Donald. "I knew some
+one would know what to do."</p>
+
+<p>"You're a brave lad," was the Admiral's comment,
+"and I shall be glad to hear the end of the
+adventure. You and your companions must come
+out and dine with us as soon as your mission is
+ended."</p>
+
+<p>Donald thanked him for his kindness and hastened
+to the launch which was to take him back.</p>
+
+<p>Twenty minutes later he stood before Gen.
+Funston.</p>
+
+<p>"You seem to have been in the water," was the
+general's first words.</p>
+
+<p>"Yes, sir," laughed Donald. "I jumped from a
+<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_224" id="Page_224" href="#Page_224">[Pg 224]</a></span>
+wall north of town, leaving Lieut. Grimes on top
+of it."</p>
+
+<p>"What! Lieut. Grimes on top of a wall? How
+did he get there?"</p>
+
+<p>"He was kidnapped, sir! It was a case of mistaken
+identity!"</p>
+
+<p>"Mistaken identity! I don't understand!"</p>
+
+<p>"They took him for you, sir, because his beard
+is trimmed like yours."</p>
+
+<p>The general smiled grimly.</p>
+
+<p>"Think I shall have all my staff officers do the
+same," he commented. Then more seriously: "Can
+you lead us to the house?"</p>
+
+<p>"I'm not sure about the house; but I can take
+you to the stone wall from which I jumped. That
+ought to guide us to the house."</p>
+
+<p>"Right," said the general.</p>
+
+<p>He called another member of his staff and gave
+a few brief orders.</p>
+
+<p>In another ten minutes two launches loaded with
+regulars and armed with a rapid-fire gun in each,
+steamed swiftly up the harbor.</p>
+
+<p>"There's the wall!" exclaimed Donald a few minutes
+later, "and there's where I jumped," pointing
+to a spot near the abutment.</p>
+
+<p>The officer in command headed the boats for
+the shore.</p>
+
+<p>"It is not only a question of freeing Lieut.
+Grimes," said the officer, "but we also want to capture
+<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_225" id="Page_225" href="#Page_225">[Pg 225]</a></span>
+the conspirators. This is a much more serious
+matter than Gen. Funston is willing to admit."</p>
+
+<p>"Then if you will take my suggestion, sir," said
+Donald modestly, "I would let a few soldiers go
+over the wall as well as entering the front of the
+house."</p>
+
+<p>The officer looked up twenty feet. The wall was
+absolutely perpendicular and as smooth as the side
+of a house.</p>
+
+<p>"I'm afraid none of my men can scale it," he
+said.</p>
+
+<p>"Can't we throw a grapnel over it, sir?"</p>
+
+<p>"We might; but it would be a very slight hold."</p>
+
+<p>"If you can make it hold at all," laughed Donald,
+"I'm willing to make the effort. At best I
+can only fall back into the water."</p>
+
+<p>"True," declared the officer. "We'll try it."</p>
+
+<p>A grapnel was tied to a long line, such as is used
+in tying the launch to the shore, and after several
+vain attempts the grapnel caught in the top of
+the wall.</p>
+
+<p>Donald sprang forward and tested it with his
+weight and it held. Then, without another word,
+he braced his feet against the wall and in almost
+less time than it takes to write it, he was at the
+top.</p>
+
+<p>"Do you see any one?" asked the officer from
+below.</p>
+
+<p>"No, sir; but there is the sound of pacing footsteps
+<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_226" id="Page_226" href="#Page_226">[Pg 226]</a></span>
+on the walk that runs along the side of the
+house."</p>
+
+<p>"Good! Now make fast the grapnel and we will
+see if there are a dozen men here who can climb to
+the top."</p>
+
+<p>The dozen were quickly found and they were soon
+at the top of the wall. The officer finally decided
+to add to their armament one of the rapid-firers.</p>
+
+<p>"If there is any resistance," he said, "we'll knock
+the side of the house in."</p>
+
+<p>"What shall I do?" asked Donald.</p>
+
+<p>"You'd better come back into the boat. You
+can help us to enter the house in front."</p>
+
+<p>Donald slid down the rope and the expedition
+quickly made a landing. Silently, so as not to
+alarm those within the house, the men took their
+way to the front of the mansion, which was at once
+recognized as one of the finest in Vera Cruz.</p>
+
+<p>"Do you know who lives here?" asked the officer.</p>
+
+<p>"No, sir," replied Donald.</p>
+
+<p>"I was told it was the residence of one of Huerta's
+generals," said a soldier. "It was pointed out
+to me the first day we landed."</p>
+
+<p>"Good!" from the officer. "I shall now have
+no compunction about entering the place."</p>
+
+<p>With Donald and a couple of soldiers, the officer
+approached the door and gave a vigorous knock.</p>
+
+<p>There was no response and he knocked again.</p>
+
+<p>"Who is there?" finally came a voice, evidently
+a mozo.</p>
+
+<p>"An American officer. Open the door in the<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_227" id="Page_227" href="#Page_227">[Pg 227]</a></span>
+name of the law."</p>
+
+<p>There was a still further delay and then another
+voice asked: "How do we know it is an officer?"</p>
+
+<p>"Open and find out, before I force the door."</p>
+
+<p>There was a still further delay.</p>
+
+<p>"It's a good thing we guarded the rear," said
+Donald. "They are evidently trying to gain time
+to spirit Lieut. Grimes away, thinking it is Gen.
+Funston."</p>
+
+<p>"True," said the officer. "We'll wait no longer.
+Corporal, force the door!"</p>
+
+<p>The corporal placed a small stick of dynamite
+under the door and fixed a fuse.</p>
+
+<p>"Step back a little," he said.</p>
+
+<p>All obeyed, when at the instant the door was
+thrown open and a hand, in which was an automatic
+revolver, was thrust out, directly in the face
+of the officer.</p>
+
+<p>But quick as was the action, Donald was not
+taken off his guard.</p>
+
+<p>With a single swift blow he struck the weapon
+into the air.</p>
+
+<p>At the same instant a fusillade from the rear
+of the house gave evidence that the men stationed
+upon the wall had done their work.</p>
+
+
+<hr style="width: 65%;" />
+<div><span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_228" id="Page_228" href="#Page_228">[Pg 228]</a></span></div>
+<h2><a name="CHAPTER_XXVIII" id="CHAPTER_XXVIII"></a>CHAPTER XXVIII.</h2>
+
+<h3>BILLIE MAKES A DISCOVERY.</h3>
+
+
+<p>Having released Lieut. Grimes and taken the
+plotters into custody, the next task was to locate
+Strong, the mountebank, and to solve the mystery
+of the box.</p>
+
+<p>Outside the one exclamation which Donald had
+uttered when he recognized Strong as the third of
+the plotters, he had not betrayed his secret to any
+one, and when Lieut. Grimes told his story to Gen.
+Funston and described the American, Donald
+vouchsafed no information which might help to
+apprehend him.</p>
+
+<p>"The plotter told the Mexicans that he could be
+found at the Hidalgo Hotel whenever he was
+wanted," explained Lieut. Grimes. "While he may
+have lied about it, I think we should send a force
+and try to locate him."</p>
+
+<p>The advice was acted upon and a corporal and
+four soldiers sent to the hotel, but to no purpose.
+No such man was known there.</p>
+
+<p>"What was the use of my saying anything about
+it?" asked Donald of the other two boys when
+he returned to Santiago's house and narrated to
+them the story of his evening's adventure. "I was
+sure he was not there and I have no idea where he
+<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_229" id="Page_229" href="#Page_229">[Pg 229]</a></span>
+is; but we'll find him and the ten thousand dollars
+given him by the Mexicans for his treachery."</p>
+
+<p>"That's right, Don," was Billie's comment. "If
+you can get that money and I can get my ten thousand
+pounds, this trip won't be so bad."</p>
+
+<p>"In the meantime," said Adrian, "I propose that
+some of us go to bed. It's nearly two o'clock and
+there is mighty little chance that any one will try
+to steal the box again."</p>
+
+<p>"I think you are right," said Billie. "We might
+as well all go. The doctor is still with Santiago and
+will stay until he is better. It isn't at all likely
+that any one will try to come into this room while
+he is here."</p>
+
+<p>Billie voiced the unanimous opinion, and a few
+minutes later the young people had all sought their
+beds, leaving instructions with the physician and
+the servants that they were to be called if any change
+for the worse occurred in Santiago's condition.</p>
+
+<p>It was probably two hours later, just about daylight,
+that the entire household was awakened by
+a terrible shriek and one of the maids rushed out
+into the patio.</p>
+
+<p>The boys came to their feet with a bound and
+hurried from their room on the ground floor, while
+the others appeared at the head of the stairs.</p>
+
+<p>"What is it?" asked Donald as soon as he could
+quiet the shrieking maid. "What are you yelling
+about?"</p>
+
+<p>"Oh, se&ntilde;or!" she cried. "I have seen the devil."</p>
+
+<p>"Nonsense," laughed the boy. "You had a nightmare."<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_230" id="Page_230" href="#Page_230">[Pg 230]</a></span></p>
+
+<p>"No, se&ntilde;or. It was the devil. He had horns and
+a tail and he had the little box under his arm. I
+saw him!"</p>
+
+<p>"The box!" cried Billie. "Quick, Lucia, look and
+see if the box is gone!"</p>
+
+<p>The girl rushed back into the library and she, too,
+gave a shriek.</p>
+
+<p>"It's gone!" she cried. "It's gone!"</p>
+
+<p>The boys sprang up the stairs three at a time
+and into the library. Lucia was right. The box
+was gone.</p>
+
+<p>"It must be the old boy, sure enough," said Billie,
+"or at least one of his imps." Then to the maid:
+"How did he get in?"</p>
+
+<p>"I don't know, se&ntilde;or. I only saw him go out.
+He went right through the door without opening
+it."</p>
+
+<p>"Nonsense!" from Donald. "His Satanic majesty
+might go through a solid door, but the box
+wouldn't. There is some other explanation."</p>
+
+<p>"But who could it be?" queried Lucia in great
+fear.</p>
+
+<p>"Some one who knows the house," declared
+Adrian emphatically. "He may have put on some
+masquerade costume just to frighten these superstitious
+servants in case he was discovered."</p>
+
+<p>"I believe Ad is right," agreed Donald. "What
+do you think, Billie?"</p>
+
+<p>"Maybe, Don; but I have a theory of my own.<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_231" id="Page_231" href="#Page_231">[Pg 231]</a></span>
+If I am right, I can work it better if I tell no one."</p>
+
+<p>At this moment the physician entered the room.</p>
+
+<p>"How is Santiago?" asked Donald.</p>
+
+<p>"Better! He has gone to sleep, and if he is not
+disturbed, I expect him to be greatly improved when
+he awakens. I should not be surprised if this
+were the turning point in his illness."</p>
+
+<p>"Then we had all better go down on to the first
+floor and leave him alone with his nurses."</p>
+
+<p>"I'd give a good deal to know where Strong is,"
+remarked Donald as they were drinking their coffee
+an hour later.</p>
+
+<p>"So would I," declared Billie. "I believe, if we
+can find him, we can solve this entire mystery."</p>
+
+<p>"As soon as we finish our coffee," suggested Donald,
+"let's get busy and find him. He can't be far."</p>
+
+<p>"That's right," said Adrian. "We'll round him
+up in short order. Hey, Billie?"</p>
+
+<p>"We ought to; but I'll tell you what. You fellows
+go out and see if you can get a line on him,
+and I'll hang round the house to see that the devil
+doesn't come and steal the rest of the house."</p>
+
+<p>"Especially Lucia," laughed Donald.</p>
+
+<p>"That's all right," was the good-natured reply;
+"but I have an idea that the devil and Strong may
+have something in common."</p>
+
+<p>"You don't think it was Strong who came and
+took the box, do you?" queried Adrian.</p>
+
+<p>"I don't know just what I do think, Ad; but
+<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_232" id="Page_232" href="#Page_232">[Pg 232]</a></span>
+I'm going to do a little detective work and I want
+to give the impression that we are all out. When
+you fellows go out, don't say anything that would
+cause any one in hiding to think we are not all
+going out together. Do you sabe?"</p>
+
+<p>"Sure. I hope you'll get a clue if we do not."</p>
+
+<p>When the others had gone, Billie sat quietly in
+his room for a long time. He could easily have
+gone to sleep, as he had had only a couple of hours'
+rest, but he made up his mind that he would not
+be caught napping again if anything should happen.</p>
+
+<p>But nothing happened.</p>
+
+<p>The minutes passed into hours and it was rapidly
+nearing noon when Billie made up his mind that
+it was a bad job.</p>
+
+<p>"We had our chance at daylight," he muttered,
+"and now we will not get another. Whoever is
+after the box, has it and is not going to take any
+further chance of being caught."</p>
+
+<p>He went out into the patio and looked up at the
+sun. It was almost in the zenith and the air was
+stifling.</p>
+
+<p>"Any one would be a fool to go out at this time
+of day," he mused. "I wonder where the fellows
+are?"</p>
+
+<p>He stepped back under the shade of the arcade
+that extended clear around the patio and threw
+himself onto a stone seat.</p>
+
+<p>"Queer old place," he thought, "and a queer old
+seat."</p>
+
+<p>He laid his hand on one of the carved arms and<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_233" id="Page_233" href="#Page_233">[Pg 233]</a></span>
+mechanically toyed with an eagle's head that formed
+one of the decorations. To his surprise the head
+turned in his hand.</p>
+
+<p>"I hope I haven't broken it," he said as he examined
+it more closely.</p>
+
+<p>It was clearly made to revolve and so he turned
+it clear around, when of a sudden the arm of the
+seat fell apart and the bottom collapsed, disclosing
+to Billie's astonished eyes a pair of stairs.</p>
+
+<p>Almost thrown to the pavement by the giving
+way of the seat, Billie picked himself up and looked
+about to see if he were observed.</p>
+
+<p>There was no one in sight and he stooped down
+and examined the stairs carefully. Then he
+straightened up and rubbed his chin as a sudden
+gleam of intelligence passed through his brain.</p>
+
+<p>"So," he muttered, "this is why Santiago dwells
+in a house that is directly back of the banker's.
+That was his box and he is the strange man who
+made the million-dollar deposit in Don Esteban's
+bank."</p>
+
+<p>Then he stopped and pondered.</p>
+
+<p>"But who stole the box? Not Santiago, for he
+has not left his room for days. If it was Strong,
+he must have entered the bank from some direction
+other than this. I don't understand, but I'm going
+to make some further investigation."</p>
+
+<p>He re&euml;ntered his room, buckled on his automatic
+and took from his suit case&mdash;which, by the way, he
+<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_234" id="Page_234" href="#Page_234">[Pg 234]</a></span>
+had located at the railway station along with that
+of his companions after the occupation of the city
+by the marines&mdash;his electric torch. Then he went
+out and descended the stairs, which he discovered
+were twenty-four in number.</p>
+
+<p>Reaching the bottom he found himself upon a
+landing some six or eight feet square, from the
+opposite side of which another flight of stairs
+ascended.</p>
+
+<p>"I reckon I better see where they lead to," was
+his comment as he slowly began their ascent.</p>
+
+<p>After going up eighteen stairs his head touched
+the floor above. He counted the remaining steps
+by the light of his torch and found that there were
+six more. This would make the floor over his head
+on an exact level with the floor of Santiago's
+house.</p>
+
+<p>"It's just as I expected," he muttered. "If I can
+get through this floor, I shall find myself in Don
+Esteban's residence&mdash;somewhere. But just where?
+That's the question."</p>
+
+<p>He pushed upon the stone above his head, but
+it refused to move. Then he held up his torch
+and examined the ceiling carefully. Whatever the
+method by which the stones could be moved, it
+was carefully concealed.</p>
+
+<p>Much chagrined, Billie at length decided to retrace
+his steps and await the coming of his companions.
+He reached the landing and crossed over
+to the steps by which he had descended.</p>
+
+<p>Glancing up, he uttered an exclamation of surprise,<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_235" id="Page_235" href="#Page_235">[Pg 235]</a></span>
+for there at the opening and peering down
+the stairs was Ambrosio, the ape.</p>
+
+<p>With a cry of recognition the simian started to
+descend the stairs, but at a noise from above he
+hesitated and then sprang back and out of sight.</p>
+
+<p>An instant later the opening was closed and Billie
+was left in the darkness, except for the light
+of his torch.</p>
+
+
+
+<hr style="width: 65%;" />
+<h2><a name="CHAPTER_XXIX" id="CHAPTER_XXIX"></a>CHAPTER XXIX.</h2>
+
+<h3>THE MYSTERY DEEPENS.</h3>
+
+
+<p>While Billie was making his discoveries Donald
+and Adrian had also been busy.</p>
+
+<p>When they left the house, at Donald's suggestion,
+they went first to the bank and told Don Esteban
+about the disappearance of the box and what
+the maid had seen. He was much disappointed until
+it was explained to him that they also had another
+clue.</p>
+
+<p>"We shall spend our time in the slums," said Donald,
+"while our chum keeps watch at the house. We
+feel sure that between us we shall solve the mystery."</p>
+
+<p>"I hope so," was Don Esteban's response. "Do
+you think I might be able to see this man Santiago?"</p>
+
+<p>"I'm afraid not, sir! The doctor wants him to
+<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_236" id="Page_236" href="#Page_236">[Pg 236]</a></span>
+sleep as long as he can. We will let you know
+later in the day."</p>
+
+<p>Leaving Don Esteban, the boys started for the
+plaza, intending to play the part of sightseers and
+visit every place in which a mountebank might reasonably
+expect to go. They felt certain that Strong
+would keep away from the more aristocratic places.</p>
+
+<p>Keeping their eyes open and ever on the alert,
+they wandered about the streets and into many public
+places, but up to eleven o'clock had made no
+discovery. Then they entered a cantina for breakfast,
+purposely choosing one that was little frequented
+by Americans.</p>
+
+<p>Seating themselves at a table in one corner where
+they could see without being seen, the boys ordered
+a hearty breakfast and then turned their
+attention to the others in the place.</p>
+
+<p>At the table nearest them were three men of
+ordinary appearance, busy with their meal. Beyond
+them was an American soldier, who seemed to have
+dropped in out of curiosity. He was paying very
+little attention to his meal, but was eyeing a young
+woman who was seated behind the cash counter.</p>
+
+<p>On the other side of the room, and partially hidden
+from our boys by the cash counter, was another
+man, smoking, and evidently waiting for
+some one. He kept his eye on the door and every
+once in a while glanced nervously at his watch.</p>
+
+<p>"Not much going on in here," said Donald in
+English.</p>
+
+<p>"No; but we are a little early. There may be<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_237" id="Page_237" href="#Page_237">[Pg 237]</a></span>
+more in before we finish our breakfast."</p>
+
+<p>It was a true prediction, for within the next
+five minutes as many more persons entered and disposed
+themselves around the various tables. Then
+the boys' breakfast was served and for a few minutes
+they were more absorbed in the food than
+in the guests.</p>
+
+<p>As Donald raised his eyes for a moment, however,
+he caught sight of a man talking to the one
+sitting back of the cash counter. They were evidently
+arguing about something in an undertone
+and a minute later the newcomer took a seat with
+his back to the boys.</p>
+
+<p>"Look!" was Donald's smothered exclamation,
+"over there by the cashier. Isn't that our man?"</p>
+
+<p>Adrian raised his eyes and gazed hard at the
+back of the man's head.</p>
+
+<p>"I could tell better if he would remove his hat.
+It does look like him, but he has disguised himself
+some way."</p>
+
+<p>"Sure," laughed Donald. "That's part of his
+trade; but I'm dead sure it is Strong."</p>
+
+<p>"What had we better do?"</p>
+
+<p>"I don't know. He'll recognize us the minute he
+sees us. If he is keeping away from us, he will
+leave. If he is not, he may come over and speak
+to us. There is no reason why he should not, so far
+as he knows."</p>
+
+<p>"How would it do to make ourselves visible?"</p>
+
+<p>"I hardly know." Then after a pause: "I'll tell<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_238" id="Page_238" href="#Page_238">[Pg 238]</a></span>
+you what. As soon as we finish we'll go out, as
+though we did not see him, but we will be sure to
+make enough commotion to attract his attention.
+Then we'll station ourselves where we can see him
+as he comes out."</p>
+
+<p>"That's all right, Don; but suppose he doesn't
+come out?"</p>
+
+<p>Donald scratched his head.</p>
+
+<p>"Oh!" he exclaimed, "I knew I had a thought
+back of that. When he sees us, if he is not trying
+to avoid us, he will speak to us. If he does not
+speak to us, we will know there is something wrong
+and take immediate steps to have him arrested."</p>
+
+<p>"But he may escape."</p>
+
+<p>"How can he?"</p>
+
+<p>"I suppose he could go out through the kitchen
+if he had to," was the ready reply.</p>
+
+<p>"Yes, I suppose he could. We must do better
+than that."</p>
+
+<p>"I'll tell you," said Adrian. "I'll go over and
+speak to that soldier in English. If it is Strong, he
+will hear me and will involuntarily make some move.
+If he wants to make himself known, he will. If
+he does not do so, we will simply sit here till he
+goes out and then shadow him."</p>
+
+<p>"That sounds good. Go over and say 'Howdy'
+to the soldier."</p>
+
+<p>Adrian arose from his seat and stepped over to
+the soldier.</p>
+
+<p>"Hello, partner!" was his somewhat noisy greeting.<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_239" id="Page_239" href="#Page_239">[Pg 239]</a></span>
+"Won't you come over to our table?"</p>
+
+<p>"Why, sure, neighbor! I was just thinking that
+I was getting mighty lonesome."</p>
+
+<p>He arose from his chair and took a seat beside
+Donald, who had been observing Strong closely.
+There could be no doubt that he had been attracted
+by Adrian's voice, but he gave no intimation that
+he knew the boys.</p>
+
+<p>"Glad to see you," said Donald, without taking
+his eyes from his man. "Won't you have another
+cup of coffee?"</p>
+
+<p>"Bet your life, neighbor!" Then as he lighted
+a fresh cigarette: "Smoke?"</p>
+
+<p>"Never learned!" laughed Donald. "Seems
+mighty funny down here, doesn't it?"</p>
+
+<p>"Sure does; but you're just as well off without it.
+Live here?"</p>
+
+<p>"No," replied Adrian; "we were on our way
+home and got stuck!"</p>
+
+<p>"What's the matter?" asked the soldier, with
+much concern. "Out of coin?"</p>
+
+<p>"We haven't much; but Gen. Funston has promised
+to find us passage home in a few days. Our
+friend saw him early this morning," this latter
+remark expressly for Strong's ears.</p>
+
+<p>"If he told you he'd do it, he will," said the soldier.
+"You can bet on him every time."</p>
+
+<p>It was very evident from Strong's actions that
+he was taking in every word of the conversation,
+<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_240" id="Page_240" href="#Page_240">[Pg 240]</a></span>
+which was in English and in an unusually loud
+voice. He pretended to eat, then leaned over and
+said something to his companion, and a minute
+later arose from the table and hastily quitted the
+place.</p>
+
+<p>But the boys were not to be fooled. They sprang
+from the table and hastily followed, Donald throwing
+a greenback to the cashier which more than
+doubly paid the bill.</p>
+
+<p>Their sudden action did not escape the soldier,
+who, attributing it to another cause, also hastily
+quitted the cantina.</p>
+
+<p>As the boys emerged into the street, they saw
+Strong hastening away in the direction of the custom
+house.</p>
+
+<p>"Going to lose himself in the crowd," said Donald.
+"Don't let him get out of your sight."</p>
+
+<p>"What's the matter?" asked the soldier, running
+to catch up with the boys. "Ugly greasers?"</p>
+
+<p>"No," replied Donald, "we're shadowing a man
+who is wanted by Gen. Funston. That's him,"
+pointing; "keep your eye on him."</p>
+
+<p>"I thought you chaps had something on," laughed
+the soldier. "You can bet on me!"</p>
+
+<p>Now that they approached nearer the center of
+the business portion of the city, there were more
+people on the street; but they were so near their
+quarry that they easily kept him in sight. Only
+once had he glanced back, but that was enough to
+convince him that he was followed.</p>
+
+<p>"He's headed for somewhere," said Adrian. "He<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_241" id="Page_241" href="#Page_241">[Pg 241]</a></span>
+doesn't expect to get away from us simply by walking."</p>
+
+<p>"Right," agreed Donald. "There he goes into
+the post office."</p>
+
+<p>"Yes," from Adrian, "and it has two doors. You
+stop at the first one and I'll run to the other."</p>
+
+<p>He started on a run and the soldier followed
+suit.</p>
+
+<p>The sight of a man running and a soldier following,
+quickly attracted attention and pedestrians
+began to stop and see what the matter might be.
+In less than a minute a crowd had collected, among
+them several soldiers, who quickly brought Adrian
+to a halt.</p>
+
+<p>"What's the matter?" asked one. Then as the
+soldier came up: "What are you chasing him for?"</p>
+
+<p>"I'm not chasing him," laughed the seeming pursuer.
+"He and I are after another chap."</p>
+
+<p>The delay occasioned by this interference was
+not great, but it was sufficient to allow Strong
+to escape, had it not been for Donald. He had
+seen the crowd gathering and, realizing what would
+happen, ran around the other way, just in time to
+see Strong disappearing around the corner of the
+street on which the bank was located.</p>
+
+<p>Madly he dashed down the street and turned the
+corner in time to see Strong enter the big gate
+leading into the patio of Don Esteban's residence.</p>
+
+<p>Putting on more steam, a couple of minutes later
+<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_242" id="Page_242" href="#Page_242">[Pg 242]</a></span>
+Donald also dashed into the patio; but Strong was
+nowhere to be seen.</p>
+
+<p>"He must be in the bank," muttered the boy, and
+he quickly entered the door.</p>
+
+<p>But Strong had disappeared as completely as
+though the earth had opened and swallowed him
+up.</p>
+
+
+
+<hr style="width: 65%;" />
+<h2><a name="CHAPTER_XXX" id="CHAPTER_XXX"></a>CHAPTER XXX.</h2>
+
+<h3>THE MYSTERY SOLVED.</h3>
+
+
+<p>When the opening at the head of the stairs had
+closed upon Billie and he realized that he was shut
+in a subterranean passage, for a minute his heart
+sank within him.</p>
+
+<p>He had tried to find an opening at the top of
+the opposite stairs and had failed, and he did not
+know that he would have any better success in
+trying to find a way to open the place through which
+he had descended.</p>
+
+<p>"Nobody on earth knows that I am down here,"
+he thought, "and with Santiago sick and maybe
+dying, no one on earth probably knows that there
+is such a passage."</p>
+
+<p>But Billie was not the lad to sit down and cry.
+He had been in tight places before and he had
+an abiding faith in his own ability to do things.
+Therefore, he called up his courage and slowly
+mounted the stairs leading to Santiago's patio.</p>
+
+<p>At the top of the stairs he found himself confronted<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_243" id="Page_243" href="#Page_243">[Pg 243]</a></span>
+by exactly the same condition as he had
+found on the opposite side.</p>
+
+<p>"But there is this difference," muttered Billie. "I
+know that there must be some sort of a crack where
+that slab fell back."</p>
+
+<p>He held the electric bull's-eye close to the stone
+and scrutinized every spot.</p>
+
+<p>Not a single crack could he spy.</p>
+
+<p>Then he took out his big jack-knife and prodded
+with it clear across the width of the stairway.</p>
+
+<p>There was nothing but solid stone.</p>
+
+<p>"Looks kind o' desperate," he told himself, "but
+I have simply got to find an opening."</p>
+
+<p>Again he prodded the place over without result.</p>
+
+<p>"It's no use," he finally said to himself. "If I
+am to get out of here, help will have to come from
+somewhere outside. But how can it?"</p>
+
+<p>He sat down on the stairs and thought deeply.</p>
+
+<p>"If it is as I think," he mused, "these stairs have
+been used recently. The very fact that Ambrosio
+is prowling around here is proof that Strong must
+have been here at some time. But where is
+Strong?"</p>
+
+<p>He slid down several steps and threw the light
+of his torch across to the opposite stairs.</p>
+
+<p>"Bang!" went something that sounded like a
+falling stone.</p>
+
+<p>Billie sprang to his feet.</p>
+
+<p>"Click! Bang!" and down the opposite stairway<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_244" id="Page_244" href="#Page_244">[Pg 244]</a></span>
+streamed a ray of light.</p>
+
+<p>Billie shut off his electric torch and waited.</p>
+
+<p>Then on the steps there appeared a foot, then
+another, until a whole human body was in sight.
+Then "click, snap!" and the light disappeared.</p>
+
+<p>"By George!" exclaimed Billie under his breath,
+"there's a man on the stairs right opposite to me.
+Who on earth can it be?"</p>
+
+<p>His first inclination was to turn on the light, but
+on second thought he decided not to.</p>
+
+<p>"I'll let him set the copy," thought Billie. "It's
+a mighty good thing to be able to spring the surprise."</p>
+
+<p>He drew his automatic and stood ready for any
+emergency.</p>
+
+<p>It was still as a tomb.</p>
+
+<p>He could hear his own heart beat and he could
+also hear the heavy breathing of the other man.</p>
+
+<p>"Sounds like he had been running and was just
+catching his breath," was Billie's mental comment.</p>
+
+<p>After some minutes the man's breathing became
+more quiet and Billie heard him slowly descending
+the stairs.</p>
+
+<p>"This won't do," thought Billie. "He probably
+has some kind of a light, and if he gets on the landing
+and I'm up here, I'll be like a man up a tree."</p>
+
+<p>The lad sat down and slowly slid toward the
+bottom.</p>
+
+<p>Being only a few steps from the landing, Billie
+<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_245" id="Page_245" href="#Page_245">[Pg 245]</a></span>
+was down first. He crowded to the right and
+listened.</p>
+
+<p>The other was now nearly on the landing. Now
+he was on the landing, hugging the wall on the
+side opposite Billie. Now they passed each other,
+or rather the man passed Billie, for Billie stood
+perfectly still.</p>
+
+<p>It seemed as though he must hear Billie's breathing,
+but if he heard anything he must have thought
+it his own echo, never dreaming that he was not
+alone in the passage.</p>
+
+<p>Now Billie could hear him ascending the stairs
+leading to Santiago's house, and his hope rose
+high.</p>
+
+<p>"He must know how to open the floor," thought
+Billie. "I'll be right there when he does."</p>
+
+<p>Silently as a cat Billie crept up the stairs behind
+his unknown companion.</p>
+
+<p>Near the top the man stopped and a minute later
+he flashed an electric light against the stone overhead.
+Another minute and he heaved with the top
+of his head and the slab slid back.</p>
+
+<p>"And now," exclaimed Billie in a deep voice, "put
+your hands over your head!"</p>
+
+<p>Whether from fear or from the unparalleled surprise
+caused by hearing a human voice at such a
+time and in such a place, instead of obeying Billie's
+command, Strong's hands&mdash;for Strong it was&mdash;fell
+limp at his side and his electric torch fell to
+the stones beneath his feet.</p>
+
+<p>"All right," continued Billy, "if that's the way<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_246" id="Page_246" href="#Page_246">[Pg 246]</a></span>
+you feel about it; but just remember that a single
+false move and I'll cut this automatic loose among
+your ribs. Now climb out a step at a time."</p>
+
+<p>With face as white as marble at the shock he
+had just sustained, Strong obeyed implicitly and
+Billie was soon standing on the stone patio, looking
+Strong in the face.</p>
+
+<p>"You're a good one, you are," he said sarcastically.
+"I should think you'd be ashamed to call
+yourself an American."</p>
+
+<p>"What do you mean?" asked Strong in a trembling
+voice.</p>
+
+<p>"Why, first of all, stealing from the bank, and
+then selling your own countrymen to the Mexicans."</p>
+
+<p>"Who have I sold?"</p>
+
+<p>"Do you mean to say that you didn't sell Gen.
+Funston to the greasers for ten thousand dollars?"</p>
+
+<p>"Of course I do!" in a somewhat stronger voice.</p>
+
+<p>"Perhaps you'll deny that you are Strong, the
+mountebank. You don't think for one minute that
+I don't know you in spite of your make-up, do
+you?"</p>
+
+<p>"No, I'll admit that I'm the mountebank. As for
+my name that is of small importance in a country
+like this. But I did not sell Gen. Funston, as you
+put it. I knew the man I pointed out was not Funston
+and I knew that as soon as the Mexicans
+found it out they would let him go. Some one
+<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_247" id="Page_247" href="#Page_247">[Pg 247]</a></span>
+might have told them rightly. As it was I spoiled
+their game and I got the money. Do you think it
+any crime to do that?"</p>
+
+<p>"That's a matter I am not in a position to discuss,"
+was Billie's answer. "But how about robbing
+the bank?"</p>
+
+<p>"I had as much right to the box as any one."</p>
+
+<p>"You'll have to prove that to some one besides
+me; all I can do is to turn you over to the authorities."</p>
+
+<p>"Never!" cried Strong. "I'll die before I'll rot
+in a Mexican jail!"</p>
+
+<p>He uttered a peculiar noise and before Billie
+could imagine what it meant, he felt himself seized
+from behind by a pair of hairy hands.</p>
+
+<p>He had been in that clutch once before and
+recognized in an instant that he was in the grip of
+the ape.</p>
+
+<p>He gave one loud cry for help and then turned
+loose with his automatic.</p>
+
+<p>The tumult which followed is beyond description.
+Billie's shout was as nothing compared to
+the cry of the ape as one of the bullets struck
+him in the leg and another pierced his foot. Loosing
+his hold upon the lad, he grabbed for the
+weapon, but Billie managed to evade him and would
+undoubtedly have slain the animal had not Strong
+sprung to his assistance, with the result that in another
+minute Billie was disarmed.</p>
+
+<p>Ill would the lad have fared then, at the hands
+<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_248" id="Page_248" href="#Page_248">[Pg 248]</a></span>
+of his two assailants, had not the noise attracted
+to the scene several soldiers, while an instant later
+came a loud shout as Donald and Adrian dashed
+into the patio.</p>
+
+<p>On the other side of the square they had heard
+Billie's shout, followed by the automatic, and had
+rushed to his aid.</p>
+
+<p>In another minute both Strong and his hairy
+friend were overcome and securely bound.</p>
+
+<p>"Where did you find him?" asked Donald, pointing
+to Strong.</p>
+
+<p>"Down there," was Billie's reply, as he pointed
+toward the still open underground passage way.</p>
+
+<p>"How did he get there?"</p>
+
+<p>"I suppose he entered from a similar entrance
+in Don Esteban's patio. I have had an idea all
+the time that there was some reason for the position
+of these two houses."</p>
+
+<p>"But it doesn't lead into the bank. How could
+he steal the box out of the vault?"</p>
+
+<p>"There is the real thief!" exclaimed Billie, pointing
+to the ape. "He sneaked in while Strong kept
+the bank employ&eacute;s engaged. By some mistake in
+his understanding he put the envelope back in the
+bank the next day instead of putting back the box.
+It was he who crawled through the bars into Santiago's
+library. He was also the devil who scared
+the maid almost into fits."</p>
+
+<p>"Well! Well!" exclaimed a voice from the
+gateway. "I never could have believed it."</p>
+
+<p>The voice was that of Don Esteban, who had<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_249" id="Page_249" href="#Page_249">[Pg 249]</a></span>
+entered while Billie was speaking.</p>
+
+<p>"I have come to see this strange man, Santiago
+Ojeda," he explained. "What says the doctor?"</p>
+
+<p>"Here comes the doctor now," announced
+Adrian as the physician made his appearance in
+the gateway. "He can speak for himself."</p>
+
+
+
+<hr style="width: 65%;" />
+<h2><a name="CHAPTER_XXXI" id="CHAPTER_XXXI"></a>CHAPTER XXXI.</h2>
+
+<h3>THE TREASURE OF MONTEZUMA.</h3>
+
+
+<p>The shadows of evening had fallen and a cool
+breeze was blowing in off the Gulf of Mexico when
+a group of persons, among whom were the Broncho
+Rider Boys, gathered around the bedside of the sick
+man.</p>
+
+<p>It was as the physician had predicted, and when
+Santiago had awakened after his long sleep, he
+had regained his senses, although he was very weak.
+But as the day declined and the heat lessened he
+had become stronger, and now at his own request,
+Lucia and her friends drew around to listen to his
+tale.</p>
+
+<p>At one side of the bed stood Lucia, the three boys
+and Don Esteban. At the other stood Mr. Black,
+Josie and the physician, while at the foot of the
+bed was Strong, with Ambrosio in his arms, and a
+<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_250" id="Page_250" href="#Page_250">[Pg 250]</a></span>
+couple of soldiers who had the mountebank in
+custody.</p>
+
+<p>"As my daughter knows," began Santiago in a
+feeble voice, "I am a direct descendant of the great
+Montezuma. My ancestor was the guardian of
+the treasure which had been accumulated by the
+Aztec kings for years. After the overthrow of my
+race by the Spanish conquerors, there was given to
+my first great ancestor the keeping of the secret
+of the source of the gold which had made the city
+of Anahuac such a rich prize.</p>
+
+<p>"This secret has been handed down through all
+these generations, the one object being to use this
+knowledge in freeing Mexico from the Spanish
+yoke. This secret I, as the last of my race,
+possess."</p>
+
+<p>The aged man paused, his strength being hardly
+able to the task he had set himself.</p>
+
+<p>"It is much as I suspected," whispered Don
+Esteban to Donald, while Lucia bent over and
+smoothed the brow of the sick man.</p>
+
+<p>"A few years ago," Santiago finally continued,
+"I began to see an opportunity for the people to
+assert their rights. In our good Se&ntilde;or Madero I
+saw the one who should lead the common people out
+of their bondage. I went to him and offered him
+all the wealth at my command. He accepted the
+trust and we began our work. It was at that time
+that I placed the money with Don Esteban. Also
+the box, containing the secret of the mine, of<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_251" id="Page_251" href="#Page_251">[Pg 251]</a></span>
+which only I and Madero knew.</p>
+
+<p>"You all know what has happened since that
+time. Madero won, but he was betrayed. His betrayer
+now seeks to rule the republic, but he can
+never do it. He must be overthrown."</p>
+
+<p>The aged man became greatly excited and the
+physician cautioned him to be careful. In a few
+minutes he became more peaceful and continued:</p>
+
+<p>"I have always been a great friend of the Americans.
+I admired their integrity and their government.
+I spent many years of my youth in the
+United States. I have known many of their great
+men. I was sure they would be pleased with Madero,
+and they were. But after he was betrayed,
+then I began to fear them, as I was told that the
+usurper, Huerta, had been helped by them."</p>
+
+<p>"Who told you that?" asked Billie, almost without
+thinking.</p>
+
+<p>"That man there," and Santiago pointed with his
+long bony finger at the mountebank, Strong.
+"That man, Francisco Rodriguez, who claims to
+be an American, but who is a traitor to his country.
+He fed me with lies, as I now know, and he
+wormed out of me the secret of Montezuma's
+Mine."</p>
+
+<p>Again the aged man's excitement nearly overcame
+him, but again he rallied with an almost superhuman
+effort.</p>
+
+<p>"It was because of his lies that I made him my
+<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_252" id="Page_252" href="#Page_252">[Pg 252]</a></span>
+trusted agent; but he betrayed me as he has others.
+It was to him I gave the ten thousand pounds which
+the young se&ntilde;or took away from my servant, Pablo
+Ojeda&mdash;who is not an Ojeda, but whom I have
+allowed to use that name. I desire that the money
+become the property of the young se&ntilde;or," and he
+feebly extended his hand toward Billie, "who has
+always been such a good friend to me and mine.
+The secret of the mine is to be found in the box
+which I left with Don Esteban. I am getting to be
+an old man, and if you will now bring in the box,
+I will turn it over to my daughter Lucia, who is
+my only descendant."</p>
+
+<p>Don Esteban made no move to comply with the
+request, but looked at the boys in such a perplexed
+manner that the sick man was quick to take notice.</p>
+
+<p>"What is it?" he asked, rising on his elbow and
+looking at Don Esteban with burning gaze. "What
+is it? Has anything happened to the box?"</p>
+
+<p>"Yes," faltered the banker, "it has been stolen."</p>
+
+<p>"Stolen!" almost shrieked Santiago. "Stolen!
+Then there stands the thief!" and he pointed to
+Strong, who stood with blanched face.</p>
+
+<p>"We know that," said Billie, "but the box has
+been stolen again and no one knows where it has
+gone."</p>
+
+<p>"You are wrong," muttered Strong. "It has not
+been stolen. It is in the bank where it always was."</p>
+
+<p>"Impossible!" cried Don Esteban. "How could
+it be back in the vault?"</p>
+
+<p>"Ask Ambrosio," replied Strong, with a wan<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_253" id="Page_253" href="#Page_253">[Pg 253]</a></span>
+smile. "He can tell."</p>
+
+<p>"Of course he cannot tell," almost shouted Don
+Esteban.</p>
+
+<p>"Then we shall never know; but I am sure the
+box is there."</p>
+
+<p>"Send for it! Send for it!" cried Santiago.
+"Send for it at once that I may turn over to my
+daughter the secret of the mine."</p>
+
+<p>"That you will never be able to do," said Strong.
+"It has been destroyed."</p>
+
+<p>"Destroyed!" burst from almost every lip. "Destroyed?
+How?"</p>
+
+<p>Strong shook his head.</p>
+
+<p>"I can't tell. Again you'll have to ask Ambrosio.
+It is he who destroyed it."</p>
+
+<p>"By George!" exclaimed Billie, "I knew I ought
+to have killed that monk the first time I had any dealings
+with him. I'm sorry now that I didn't."</p>
+
+<p>"At any rate," declared Don Esteban, "I shall
+send for the box."</p>
+
+<p>He turned to Santiago, who had fallen back upon
+his pillow, and over whom the physician was bending
+and feeling his pulse.</p>
+
+<p>"I shall send for it at once," he repeated.</p>
+
+<p>Slowly the physician raised his head and loosed
+his hold upon the sick man's wrist.</p>
+
+<p>"It is too late," he said. "He will not need it.
+He is dead."</p>
+
+<hr style='width: 45%;' />
+
+<p>On board a returning army transport bound for<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_254" id="Page_254" href="#Page_254">[Pg 254]</a></span>
+New York stood the Broncho Rider Boys casting
+their last glance shoreward as the sun was setting
+behind the mountains that form the background
+of the city of Vera Cruz. Over the city still waved
+the Stars and Stripes, and as the darkness fell and
+the tip of Mt. Orizaba gradually faded from sight,
+Billie turned to the others and in a voice tinged with
+sadness remarked:</p>
+
+<p>"There's only one thing about the whole country
+that I admire."</p>
+
+<p>"What's, that?" asked Adrian. "Lucia?"</p>
+
+<p>"No; it's the wholesome respect the Mexicans
+show for Brigadier-General Funston."</p>
+
+<p>"Yes, and if he is let alone, he'll make them
+respect the American flag," echoed Donald.</p>
+
+<p>"Long may it wave!" was Adrian's sententious
+comment.</p>
+
+<p>But it did not wave long over Vera Cruz, for
+the following November, Huerta having been
+obliged to leave the country in the meantime and
+Gen. Carranza having established himself for the
+time being in the City of Mexico, the American
+forces were withdrawn and the Carranza forces
+took possession of Vera Cruz. Some months later
+Carranza was recognized by the United States, and
+at this writing is establishing his government, which
+promises to be a continuation of the one established
+by Madero.</p>
+
+<p>Thus it will be seen that Santiago's work for
+<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_255" id="Page_255" href="#Page_255">[Pg 255]</a></span>
+his country was productive of good, as are all efforts
+to bring liberty to the people and to free them
+from the rule of a few.</p>
+
+<p>Before sailing for home, the boys had the satisfaction
+of knowing that the man known as Strong
+had been properly punished, and that, in accordance
+with Santiago's dying wish, the ten thousand
+pounds which he had practically given to Billie
+months before on the Rio Grande, were placed to
+the lad's credit in the banking house of Don
+Esteban.</p>
+
+<p>The fate of Ambrosio, the ape which caused so
+much trouble, was left in the hands of the keeper
+of the prison to which Strong was sentenced. It is
+to be hoped that his behavior will improve.</p>
+
+
+<h4>THE END.</h4>
+
+<hr style="width: 65%;" />
+
+<table border="1" cellpadding="10" summary="Transcriber's Notes">
+<tr><td><b>TRANSCRIBER'S NOTES</b>
+
+<p>Front matter: Added table of contents.</p>
+
+<p>Page 48: Removed extra quotation mark.</p>
+
+<p>Page 60: Changed "moso" to "mozo."</p>
+
+<p>Page 62: Changed typo "gaurd" to "guard."</p>
+
+<p>Page 87: Changed typo "variey" to "variety."</p>
+
+<p>Pages 123, 132: Left words "blue-jackets" and "bluejackets" as
+printed.</p>
+
+<p>Page 140: Added closing quotation mark.</p>
+
+<p>Page 197: Added missing period.</p>
+
+<p>Pages 206, 214, 224: Left words "kipnaped" and "kipnapped" as
+printed.</p>
+</td></tr></table>
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+<pre>
+
+
+
+
+
+End of the Project Gutenberg EBook of The Broncho Rider Boys with Funston at
+Vera Cruz, by Frank Fowler
+
+*** END OF THIS PROJECT GUTENBERG EBOOK THE BRONCHO RIDER BOYS WITH ***
+
+***** This file should be named 19538-h.htm or 19538-h.zip *****
+This and all associated files of various formats will be found in:
+        http://www.gutenberg.org/1/9/5/3/19538/
+
+Produced by Juliet Sutherland, Suzan Flanagan and the
+Online Distributed Proofreading Team at http://www.pgdp.net
+
+
+Updated editions will replace the previous one--the old editions
+will be renamed.
+
+Creating the works from public domain print editions means that no
+one owns a United States copyright in these works, so the Foundation
+(and you!) can copy and distribute it in the United States without
+permission and without paying copyright royalties.  Special rules,
+set forth in the General Terms of Use part of this license, apply to
+copying and distributing Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works to
+protect the PROJECT GUTENBERG-tm concept and trademark.  Project
+Gutenberg is a registered trademark, and may not be used if you
+charge for the eBooks, unless you receive specific permission.  If you
+do not charge anything for copies of this eBook, complying with the
+rules is very easy.  You may use this eBook for nearly any purpose
+such as creation of derivative works, reports, performances and
+research.  They may be modified and printed and given away--you may do
+practically ANYTHING with public domain eBooks.  Redistribution is
+subject to the trademark license, especially commercial
+redistribution.
+
+
+
+*** START: FULL LICENSE ***
+
+THE FULL PROJECT GUTENBERG LICENSE
+PLEASE READ THIS BEFORE YOU DISTRIBUTE OR USE THIS WORK
+
+To protect the Project Gutenberg-tm mission of promoting the free
+distribution of electronic works, by using or distributing this work
+(or any other work associated in any way with the phrase "Project
+Gutenberg"), you agree to comply with all the terms of the Full Project
+Gutenberg-tm License (available with this file or online at
+http://gutenberg.org/license).
+
+
+Section 1.  General Terms of Use and Redistributing Project Gutenberg-tm
+electronic works
+
+1.A.  By reading or using any part of this Project Gutenberg-tm
+electronic work, you indicate that you have read, understand, agree to
+and accept all the terms of this license and intellectual property
+(trademark/copyright) agreement.  If you do not agree to abide by all
+the terms of this agreement, you must cease using and return or destroy
+all copies of Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works in your possession.
+If you paid a fee for obtaining a copy of or access to a Project
+Gutenberg-tm electronic work and you do not agree to be bound by the
+terms of this agreement, you may obtain a refund from the person or
+entity to whom you paid the fee as set forth in paragraph 1.E.8.
+
+1.B.  "Project Gutenberg" is a registered trademark.  It may only be
+used on or associated in any way with an electronic work by people who
+agree to be bound by the terms of this agreement.  There are a few
+things that you can do with most Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works
+even without complying with the full terms of this agreement.  See
+paragraph 1.C below.  There are a lot of things you can do with Project
+Gutenberg-tm electronic works if you follow the terms of this agreement
+and help preserve free future access to Project Gutenberg-tm electronic
+works.  See paragraph 1.E below.
+
+1.C.  The Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation ("the Foundation"
+or PGLAF), owns a compilation copyright in the collection of Project
+Gutenberg-tm electronic works.  Nearly all the individual works in the
+collection are in the public domain in the United States.  If an
+individual work is in the public domain in the United States and you are
+located in the United States, we do not claim a right to prevent you from
+copying, distributing, performing, displaying or creating derivative
+works based on the work as long as all references to Project Gutenberg
+are removed.  Of course, we hope that you will support the Project
+Gutenberg-tm mission of promoting free access to electronic works by
+freely sharing Project Gutenberg-tm works in compliance with the terms of
+this agreement for keeping the Project Gutenberg-tm name associated with
+the work.  You can easily comply with the terms of this agreement by
+keeping this work in the same format with its attached full Project
+Gutenberg-tm License when you share it without charge with others.
+
+1.D.  The copyright laws of the place where you are located also govern
+what you can do with this work.  Copyright laws in most countries are in
+a constant state of change.  If you are outside the United States, check
+the laws of your country in addition to the terms of this agreement
+before downloading, copying, displaying, performing, distributing or
+creating derivative works based on this work or any other Project
+Gutenberg-tm work.  The Foundation makes no representations concerning
+the copyright status of any work in any country outside the United
+States.
+
+1.E.  Unless you have removed all references to Project Gutenberg:
+
+1.E.1.  The following sentence, with active links to, or other immediate
+access to, the full Project Gutenberg-tm License must appear prominently
+whenever any copy of a Project Gutenberg-tm work (any work on which the
+phrase "Project Gutenberg" appears, or with which the phrase "Project
+Gutenberg" is associated) is accessed, displayed, performed, viewed,
+copied or distributed:
+
+This eBook is for the use of anyone anywhere at no cost and with
+almost no restrictions whatsoever.  You may copy it, give it away or
+re-use it under the terms of the Project Gutenberg License included
+with this eBook or online at www.gutenberg.org
+
+1.E.2.  If an individual Project Gutenberg-tm electronic work is derived
+from the public domain (does not contain a notice indicating that it is
+posted with permission of the copyright holder), the work can be copied
+and distributed to anyone in the United States without paying any fees
+or charges.  If you are redistributing or providing access to a work
+with the phrase "Project Gutenberg" associated with or appearing on the
+work, you must comply either with the requirements of paragraphs 1.E.1
+through 1.E.7 or obtain permission for the use of the work and the
+Project Gutenberg-tm trademark as set forth in paragraphs 1.E.8 or
+1.E.9.
+
+1.E.3.  If an individual Project Gutenberg-tm electronic work is posted
+with the permission of the copyright holder, your use and distribution
+must comply with both paragraphs 1.E.1 through 1.E.7 and any additional
+terms imposed by the copyright holder.  Additional terms will be linked
+to the Project Gutenberg-tm License for all works posted with the
+permission of the copyright holder found at the beginning of this work.
+
+1.E.4.  Do not unlink or detach or remove the full Project Gutenberg-tm
+License terms from this work, or any files containing a part of this
+work or any other work associated with Project Gutenberg-tm.
+
+1.E.5.  Do not copy, display, perform, distribute or redistribute this
+electronic work, or any part of this electronic work, without
+prominently displaying the sentence set forth in paragraph 1.E.1 with
+active links or immediate access to the full terms of the Project
+Gutenberg-tm License.
+
+1.E.6.  You may convert to and distribute this work in any binary,
+compressed, marked up, nonproprietary or proprietary form, including any
+word processing or hypertext form.  However, if you provide access to or
+distribute copies of a Project Gutenberg-tm work in a format other than
+"Plain Vanilla ASCII" or other format used in the official version
+posted on the official Project Gutenberg-tm web site (www.gutenberg.org),
+you must, at no additional cost, fee or expense to the user, provide a
+copy, a means of exporting a copy, or a means of obtaining a copy upon
+request, of the work in its original "Plain Vanilla ASCII" or other
+form.  Any alternate format must include the full Project Gutenberg-tm
+License as specified in paragraph 1.E.1.
+
+1.E.7.  Do not charge a fee for access to, viewing, displaying,
+performing, copying or distributing any Project Gutenberg-tm works
+unless you comply with paragraph 1.E.8 or 1.E.9.
+
+1.E.8.  You may charge a reasonable fee for copies of or providing
+access to or distributing Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works provided
+that
+
+- You pay a royalty fee of 20% of the gross profits you derive from
+     the use of Project Gutenberg-tm works calculated using the method
+     you already use to calculate your applicable taxes.  The fee is
+     owed to the owner of the Project Gutenberg-tm trademark, but he
+     has agreed to donate royalties under this paragraph to the
+     Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation.  Royalty payments
+     must be paid within 60 days following each date on which you
+     prepare (or are legally required to prepare) your periodic tax
+     returns.  Royalty payments should be clearly marked as such and
+     sent to the Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation at the
+     address specified in Section 4, "Information about donations to
+     the Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation."
+
+- You provide a full refund of any money paid by a user who notifies
+     you in writing (or by e-mail) within 30 days of receipt that s/he
+     does not agree to the terms of the full Project Gutenberg-tm
+     License.  You must require such a user to return or
+     destroy all copies of the works possessed in a physical medium
+     and discontinue all use of and all access to other copies of
+     Project Gutenberg-tm works.
+
+- You provide, in accordance with paragraph 1.F.3, a full refund of any
+     money paid for a work or a replacement copy, if a defect in the
+     electronic work is discovered and reported to you within 90 days
+     of receipt of the work.
+
+- You comply with all other terms of this agreement for free
+     distribution of Project Gutenberg-tm works.
+
+1.E.9.  If you wish to charge a fee or distribute a Project Gutenberg-tm
+electronic work or group of works on different terms than are set
+forth in this agreement, you must obtain permission in writing from
+both the Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation and Michael
+Hart, the owner of the Project Gutenberg-tm trademark.  Contact the
+Foundation as set forth in Section 3 below.
+
+1.F.
+
+1.F.1.  Project Gutenberg volunteers and employees expend considerable
+effort to identify, do copyright research on, transcribe and proofread
+public domain works in creating the Project Gutenberg-tm
+collection.  Despite these efforts, Project Gutenberg-tm electronic
+works, and the medium on which they may be stored, may contain
+"Defects," such as, but not limited to, incomplete, inaccurate or
+corrupt data, transcription errors, a copyright or other intellectual
+property infringement, a defective or damaged disk or other medium, a
+computer virus, or computer codes that damage or cannot be read by
+your equipment.
+
+1.F.2.  LIMITED WARRANTY, DISCLAIMER OF DAMAGES - Except for the "Right
+of Replacement or Refund" described in paragraph 1.F.3, the Project
+Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation, the owner of the Project
+Gutenberg-tm trademark, and any other party distributing a Project
+Gutenberg-tm electronic work under this agreement, disclaim all
+liability to you for damages, costs and expenses, including legal
+fees.  YOU AGREE THAT YOU HAVE NO REMEDIES FOR NEGLIGENCE, STRICT
+LIABILITY, BREACH OF WARRANTY OR BREACH OF CONTRACT EXCEPT THOSE
+PROVIDED IN PARAGRAPH F3.  YOU AGREE THAT THE FOUNDATION, THE
+TRADEMARK OWNER, AND ANY DISTRIBUTOR UNDER THIS AGREEMENT WILL NOT BE
+LIABLE TO YOU FOR ACTUAL, DIRECT, INDIRECT, CONSEQUENTIAL, PUNITIVE OR
+INCIDENTAL DAMAGES EVEN IF YOU GIVE NOTICE OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH
+DAMAGE.
+
+1.F.3.  LIMITED RIGHT OF REPLACEMENT OR REFUND - If you discover a
+defect in this electronic work within 90 days of receiving it, you can
+receive a refund of the money (if any) you paid for it by sending a
+written explanation to the person you received the work from.  If you
+received the work on a physical medium, you must return the medium with
+your written explanation.  The person or entity that provided you with
+the defective work may elect to provide a replacement copy in lieu of a
+refund.  If you received the work electronically, the person or entity
+providing it to you may choose to give you a second opportunity to
+receive the work electronically in lieu of a refund.  If the second copy
+is also defective, you may demand a refund in writing without further
+opportunities to fix the problem.
+
+1.F.4.  Except for the limited right of replacement or refund set forth
+in paragraph 1.F.3, this work is provided to you 'AS-IS', WITH NO OTHER
+WARRANTIES OF ANY KIND, EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO
+WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTIBILITY OR FITNESS FOR ANY PURPOSE.
+
+1.F.5.  Some states do not allow disclaimers of certain implied
+warranties or the exclusion or limitation of certain types of damages.
+If any disclaimer or limitation set forth in this agreement violates the
+law of the state applicable to this agreement, the agreement shall be
+interpreted to make the maximum disclaimer or limitation permitted by
+the applicable state law.  The invalidity or unenforceability of any
+provision of this agreement shall not void the remaining provisions.
+
+1.F.6.  INDEMNITY - You agree to indemnify and hold the Foundation, the
+trademark owner, any agent or employee of the Foundation, anyone
+providing copies of Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works in accordance
+with this agreement, and any volunteers associated with the production,
+promotion and distribution of Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works,
+harmless from all liability, costs and expenses, including legal fees,
+that arise directly or indirectly from any of the following which you do
+or cause to occur: (a) distribution of this or any Project Gutenberg-tm
+work, (b) alteration, modification, or additions or deletions to any
+Project Gutenberg-tm work, and (c) any Defect you cause.
+
+
+Section  2.  Information about the Mission of Project Gutenberg-tm
+
+Project Gutenberg-tm is synonymous with the free distribution of
+electronic works in formats readable by the widest variety of computers
+including obsolete, old, middle-aged and new computers.  It exists
+because of the efforts of hundreds of volunteers and donations from
+people in all walks of life.
+
+Volunteers and financial support to provide volunteers with the
+assistance they need, is critical to reaching Project Gutenberg-tm's
+goals and ensuring that the Project Gutenberg-tm collection will
+remain freely available for generations to come.  In 2001, the Project
+Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation was created to provide a secure
+and permanent future for Project Gutenberg-tm and future generations.
+To learn more about the Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation
+and how your efforts and donations can help, see Sections 3 and 4
+and the Foundation web page at http://www.pglaf.org.
+
+
+Section 3.  Information about the Project Gutenberg Literary Archive
+Foundation
+
+The Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation is a non profit
+501(c)(3) educational corporation organized under the laws of the
+state of Mississippi and granted tax exempt status by the Internal
+Revenue Service.  The Foundation's EIN or federal tax identification
+number is 64-6221541.  Its 501(c)(3) letter is posted at
+http://pglaf.org/fundraising.  Contributions to the Project Gutenberg
+Literary Archive Foundation are tax deductible to the full extent
+permitted by U.S. federal laws and your state's laws.
+
+The Foundation's principal office is located at 4557 Melan Dr. S.
+Fairbanks, AK, 99712., but its volunteers and employees are scattered
+throughout numerous locations.  Its business office is located at
+809 North 1500 West, Salt Lake City, UT 84116, (801) 596-1887, email
+business@pglaf.org.  Email contact links and up to date contact
+information can be found at the Foundation's web site and official
+page at http://pglaf.org
+
+For additional contact information:
+     Dr. Gregory B. Newby
+     Chief Executive and Director
+     gbnewby@pglaf.org
+
+Section 4.  Information about Donations to the Project Gutenberg
+Literary Archive Foundation
+
+Project Gutenberg-tm depends upon and cannot survive without wide
+spread public support and donations to carry out its mission of
+increasing the number of public domain and licensed works that can be
+freely distributed in machine readable form accessible by the widest
+array of equipment including outdated equipment.  Many small donations
+($1 to $5,000) are particularly important to maintaining tax exempt
+status with the IRS.
+
+The Foundation is committed to complying with the laws regulating
+charities and charitable donations in all 50 states of the United
+States.  Compliance requirements are not uniform and it takes a
+considerable effort, much paperwork and many fees to meet and keep up
+with these requirements.  We do not solicit donations in locations
+where we have not received written confirmation of compliance.  To
+SEND DONATIONS or determine the status of compliance for any
+particular state visit http://pglaf.org
+
+While we cannot and do not solicit contributions from states where we
+have not met the solicitation requirements, we know of no prohibition
+against accepting unsolicited donations from donors in such states who
+approach us with offers to donate.
+
+International donations are gratefully accepted, but we cannot make
+any statements concerning tax treatment of donations received from
+outside the United States.  U.S. laws alone swamp our small staff.
+
+Please check the Project Gutenberg Web pages for current donation
+methods and addresses.  Donations are accepted in a number of other
+ways including checks, online payments and credit card
+donations.  To donate, please visit: http://pglaf.org/donate
+
+
+Section 5.  General Information About Project Gutenberg-tm electronic
+works.
+
+Professor Michael S. Hart is the originator of the Project Gutenberg-tm
+concept of a library of electronic works that could be freely shared
+with anyone.  For thirty years, he produced and distributed Project
+Gutenberg-tm eBooks with only a loose network of volunteer support.
+
+Project Gutenberg-tm eBooks are often created from several printed
+editions, all of which are confirmed as Public Domain in the U.S.
+unless a copyright notice is included.  Thus, we do not necessarily
+keep eBooks in compliance with any particular paper edition.
+
+Most people start at our Web site which has the main PG search facility:
+
+     http://www.gutenberg.org
+
+This Web site includes information about Project Gutenberg-tm,
+including how to make donations to the Project Gutenberg Literary
+Archive Foundation, how to help produce our new eBooks, and how to
+subscribe to our email newsletter to hear about new eBooks.
+
+*** END: FULL LICENSE ***
+
+
+
+</pre>
+
+</body>
+</html>
+
diff --git a/19538-h/images/cover258tn.jpg b/19538-h/images/cover258tn.jpg
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..cb1b52d
--- /dev/null
+++ b/19538-h/images/cover258tn.jpg
diff --git a/19538-h/images/frontis257tn.jpg b/19538-h/images/frontis257tn.jpg
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..fce6928
--- /dev/null
+++ b/19538-h/images/frontis257tn.jpg
diff --git a/19538-h/images/illus2tn.jpg b/19538-h/images/illus2tn.jpg
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..2e3894e
--- /dev/null
+++ b/19538-h/images/illus2tn.jpg
diff --git a/19538.txt b/19538.txt
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..326f040
--- /dev/null
+++ b/19538.txt
@@ -0,0 +1,9182 @@
+The Project Gutenberg EBook of The Broncho Rider Boys with Funston at Vera
+Cruz, by Frank Fowler
+
+This eBook is for the use of anyone anywhere at no cost and with
+almost no restrictions whatsoever.  You may copy it, give it away or
+re-use it under the terms of the Project Gutenberg License included
+with this eBook or online at www.gutenberg.org
+
+
+Title: The Broncho Rider Boys with Funston at Vera Cruz
+       Or, Upholding the Honor of the Stars and Stripes
+
+Author: Frank Fowler
+
+Release Date: October 14, 2006 [EBook #19538]
+
+Language: English
+
+Character set encoding: ASCII
+
+*** START OF THIS PROJECT GUTENBERG EBOOK THE BRONCHO RIDER BOYS WITH ***
+
+
+
+
+Produced by Juliet Sutherland, Suzan Flanagan and the
+Online Distributed Proofreading Team at http://www.pgdp.net
+
+
+
+
+
+[Illustration: "THIS IS NO PLACE FOR ME," COMMENTED BILLIE AS HE
+KEPT HIMSELF WELL HIDDEN BEHIND A GIANT CACTUS.
+
+_The Broncho Rider Boys with Funston at Vera Cruz. Page 33._]
+
+               The Broncho Rider Boys
+
+               With Funston at Vera Cruz
+
+                         OR
+
+     Upholding the Honor of the Stars and Stripes
+
+                    By FRANK FOWLER
+
+                       AUTHOR OF
+
+"The Broncho Rider Boys with the Texas Rangers," "The Broncho
+  Rider Boys at Keystone Ranch," "The Broncho Rider
+    Boys Down in Arizona," "The Broncho Rider Boys
+       Along the Border," "The Broncho Rider
+            Boys on the Wyoming Trail."
+
+[Illustration]
+
+       A. L. BURT COMPANY
+           NEW YORK.
+
+-----------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+        Copyright, 1916
+     BY A. L. BURT COMPANY
+
+THE BRONCHO RIDER BOYS WITH FUNSTON AT VERA CRUZ
+
+-----------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+
+
+
+THE BRONCHO RIDER BOYS WITH
+  FUNSTON AT VERA CRUZ.
+
+
+
+
+CHAPTER I.
+
+A DARING ADVENTURE.
+
+
+"Let me look, Billie," and Donald reached out his hand for the
+field glass through which Broncho Billie was gazing down from the
+summit of Real del Monte upon the plain of Quesco, through which
+the Pachuca river winds its way. "Maybe I can make out who they
+are."
+
+Billie handed over the glass without a word and stood expectant,
+while Donald scrutinized closely a body of horsemen--twenty or
+more in number--which had halted beside the railroad that
+connects the little city of Pachuca with the City of Mexico.
+
+"They are not soldiers, that's certain," was Donald's comment
+after he had inspected the riders carefully for a couple of
+minutes.
+
+"That's what I thought," from Billie. "They look like a bunch of
+_vaqueros_ to me; but what would a crowd of fifty cowpunchers be
+doing in a country where the only cattle are goats?"
+
+"That's right!" laughed Donald, greatly amused at Billie's odd
+expression, "but still that is what they appear to be. Perhaps
+they are expecting a drove of cattle up on the train."
+
+"More likely they are expecting a load of bullion going down to
+the City of Mexico," remarked the third of the party. "What do
+you think, Pedro?" turning to the fourth of the boys who composed
+the quartette.
+
+"I am afraid you are right, Adrian," replied Pedro, with an
+accent which denoted that of the four he was the only one who was
+not of an English-speaking race.
+
+"You don't think they would hold up a train in broad daylight,
+and that not more than five miles from town, do you?" queried
+Billie.
+
+"If they are what I suspect," declared Pedro, "I think they would
+hold it up at the station, if there were only a few more of
+them."
+
+"And what do you think they are?"
+
+"I think they are Zapatistas."
+
+"What are they?" asked Donald.
+
+"Followers of the bandit leader, Emilio Zapata."
+
+"Which side does he belong to?" asked Adrian. "Huerta or
+Carranza?"
+
+"Neither. He is simply a bandit, and his followers prey upon any
+whom they find unprotected."
+
+"And do you really think they are going to hold up and rob the
+train from Pachuca?"
+
+"_Sin duda!_" meaning without doubt.
+
+"Then we must prevent them," declared Donald emphatically.
+
+"What business is it of ours?" asked Billie. "If one bunch of
+Mexicans wants to rob another bunch, especially if the second
+bunch are Huertistas, I don't know that it is for us to
+interfere. I'm not looking for trouble."
+
+"You're not afraid, are you? If----"
+
+"Say, Don," interrupted Billie, "what's the use of always asking
+such foolish questions? If I remember rightly, the last time you
+asked me that question was up on the Rio Grande a year ago, about
+the time that I was swimming rivers and breaking into prisons
+with the Texas Rangers to get you and Ad out of trouble. Now
+why----"
+
+Donald held up both hands.
+
+"That's enough, Billie," he laughed. "I'll take it all back. Of
+course you're not afraid. But I insist we must prevent this
+hold-up."
+
+"And again I ask, why?"
+
+"Because there may be women and children on the train and----"
+
+"That's enough," exclaimed Billie. "You needn't go on with the
+rest. But what's the plan? We're a good ten miles from those
+chaps--unless we had an airship."
+
+"And then how far do you think it is?" queried Adrian.
+
+"Well," replied Billie slowly, as he squinted up one eye, "I
+should say they are about four miles away as the crow flies. But
+we are not crows. By the Real road, it is at least ten miles."
+
+"There must be a short cut somewhere," insisted Donald.
+
+"There is," explained Pedro. "Just around the next turn in the
+road there is a goat path that leads down to the river. If you
+are not afraid of getting wet----"
+
+"There you go," laughed Billie. "Afraid of getting wet! Just
+let's settle it once for all that we are not afraid of anything
+that it is right for us to do."
+
+Pedro laughed good-naturedly.
+
+"Well, then, since we are not afraid of getting wet, we can
+follow the river for about two miles by fording it several times,
+and emerge on the plain a mile this side of the clump of trees
+which hides those fellows from the highway."
+
+"And then what?" from Billie.
+
+"That is as far as I've gone."
+
+"Then you'll have to do better. Just as soon as we emerge from
+behind those trees, we'll be a fair target. Four against twenty
+is 'most too much on an open plain."
+
+For several minutes no one spoke. It was Adrian who broke the
+silence.
+
+"I think I see a way, not only to save the train, but possibly to
+capture the bandits."
+
+The boys looked up in surprise.
+
+"Do you notice how the railroad curves in toward the hills just
+after it crosses the river bridge?" he continued, pointing out
+the place he meant.
+
+"Sure, we see it," from Billie.
+
+"Well, when we leave the river, instead of riding toward that
+bunch of trees, we'll ride the other way. That will bring us to
+the railroad track near the curve. Then we'll ride up the track.
+If we do not reach the station before the train leaves, we can
+flag it. There is sure to be at least half a dozen guards aboard.
+We will make ten. Most of the men aboard will have revolvers. The
+result will be that instead of the bandits taking the train by
+surprise, we will take them by surprise, and----"
+
+"And the army that takes the other by surprise wins," finished
+Billie, taking off his sombrero and bowing to Adrian in mock
+gravity. Then to Pedro, "Let the scout lead the way and the army
+will fall in behind, with the general at the head."
+
+A laugh followed Billie's words, and putting spurs to their
+horses, the four lads dashed down the mountain road upon their
+self-appointed mission, which was by no means the first daring
+adventure in which they had engaged; for the stories of the
+doings of the three American lads in the quartette have furnished
+interesting reading for thousands of American boys.
+
+It is because of their numerous adventures and their skill as
+horsemen that the trio has become known as the Broncho Rider
+Boys. Their names are Donald Mackay, Adrian Sherwood and William
+Stonewall Jackson Winkle, better known as "Broncho Billie." This
+latter name was given him some two years before when he went to
+visit his cousin Donald at the latter's home on the Keystone
+Ranch in Wyoming. It was not given him because he was such an
+expert rider, but because he could fall from his broncho pony
+easier than any boy in that section. Rotund in appearance, he was
+as jolly as he was fat, and his chief failing was his appetite.
+No matter what the hour, no one ever mentioned eats that Billie
+was not hungry.
+
+When he first came West he was supposed to be in poor health. It
+speedily developed that such was not the case. He was simply
+hungry. Months in the open air had enabled him to eat without
+fear and he was now about the most robust specimen of boy that
+any one ever saw.
+
+Donald, the oldest of the trio, was one of those level-headed
+chaps who had a knack of doing the right thing at the right time.
+His judgment had been proven good in many a tight place and under
+many thrilling conditions. As a result, he was generally looked
+up to as a leader by the others, although it must be admitted
+that Adrian was also a lad of sense and plenty of nerve.
+
+Adrian was the owner of a large Wyoming ranch, and one of the
+books which has proved most interesting to American boys is known
+as The Broncho Rider Boys on the Wyoming Trail, a story of how
+Adrian saved his property from being taken away from him by a
+dishonest uncle.
+
+About a year previous to the time this story opens, these three
+boys had been on a trip along the Rio Grande, when they fell in
+with Capt. June Peak and a company of Texas Rangers, who had been
+detailed to keep watch of the actions of a band of cattle
+smugglers. Sent across the river into Mexican territory on a
+secret mission, the Broncho Rider Boys had the good fortune to
+rescue Pedro Sanchez, the fourth member of the quartette, from
+the hands of a band of ruffians. Pedro turned out to be the son
+of Gen. Sanchez of the Mexican army, who was visiting an uncle in
+northern Mexico. After a series of thrilling adventures, which
+are told in full in The Broncho Rider Boys with the Texas
+Rangers, Donald, Adrian and Billie returned to their homes,
+promising to visit Pedro in the City of Mexico whenever the time
+was ripe.
+
+During the time that the boys were scouting in Mexico they had
+learned to speak Spanish quite well, and this knowledge had been
+so improved during their visit with Pedro that they now spoke the
+language well, an accomplishment which proved of much value to
+them later on.
+
+About a month prior to the day upon which this story opens, the
+three Americans had met by appointment at New York City and had
+come to Vera Cruz by boat and thence to the City of Mexico, where
+they found everything in a greatly disturbed condition because
+of the revolution which had been started some months previous by
+Gen. Carranza.
+
+It might be well right here to state briefly the history of the
+previous few months in Mexico, so that all may understand how it
+happened that none of the four boys had a very high opinion of
+Gen. Huerta, at that time dictator of Mexico.
+
+For nearly 35 years, up to 1911, Mexico had a peaceful existence
+under a republican form of government. During the last 32 years
+of that time Porfirio Diaz was president. Just prior to 1912 a
+revolution was begun against what had come to be called the Diaz
+government, and Diaz was compelled to flee from Mexico. The
+revolution was headed by Francisco Madero, who was then made
+president.
+
+In February of 1913 a revolution was started against President
+Madero by Felix Diaz, nephew of Porfirio Diaz, and the City of
+Mexico was attacked. At that time Gen. Huerta was in command of
+Madero's forces in the City of Mexico. He proved a traitor to
+Madero, went over to Diaz, arrested Madero and confined him in
+prison. Two days later, April 22, 1913, President Madero was shot
+by order of Huerta, who then declared himself dictator. At the
+same time he asked that the other nations of the earth recognize
+him as the head of the Mexican government, a thing which the
+government of the United States refused to do.
+
+March 26, 1913, another revolution was started, this time
+against Gen. Huerta by Gen. Carranza, governor of the state of
+Chihuahua. This revolution had been in progress more than a year
+when this story opens.
+
+Pedro's father, Gen. Sanchez, had been a friend of President
+Madero. When Madero was shot, Gen. Sanchez fled to Pachuca where
+he had a large hacienda and also owned vast interests in the
+silver mines at Real del Monte, some six miles up the mountains.
+Later, however, he was promised protection by Gen. Huerta, who
+was anxious to have the friendship of such a prominent man, and
+returned to the City of Mexico. It was some time after this,
+about March 1, 1914--when matters had quieted down in the City of
+Mexico--that the three American boys went to visit Pedro.
+
+A few days previous to the one on which we find the four boys
+headed for the railroad to foil the would-be train robbers, they
+had come to Pachuca, which is located some sixty miles from the
+City of Mexico, on horses furnished them by Gen. Sanchez, to see
+the mines and the beautiful mountains overlooking the plains of
+Quesco. Every day they took long rides in various directions, in
+spite of the unsettled condition of the country--a condition
+which compelled them always to go armed with their trusty Marlins
+and Colts--and that is how they happened to be on the Real road
+at such an opportune time.
+
+With these explanations, it is no wonder that the boys were keen
+for the adventure upon which they were now embarked.
+
+A sharp ride of fifteen minutes brought them to the river and
+into it the horses plunged. At places it was only knee deep and
+at other places where they were obliged to cross it was necessary
+for the horses to swim; but this was only fun for the Broncho
+Rider Boys.
+
+Half an hour after sighting the bandits, the boys halted on the
+railroad track, well secreted from their quarry by the curve
+before mentioned.
+
+"And none too soon," declared Donald as the sharp whistle of the
+engine was heard perhaps half a mile away.
+
+"How shall we flag her?" asked Pedro.
+
+"With that red bandana handkerchief on Billie's neck," replied
+Donald as he reached over and snatched the neckwear from its
+place.
+
+Springing from his horse, he ran up the track waving the red
+signal as he ran.
+
+A sharp blast from the whistle a couple of minutes later gave
+proof that the danger signal had been seen, and the grinding of
+the brakes told that the train was coming to a stop. Even before
+this was an accomplished fact the conductor swung himself from
+the front car and came running down the track to see what was the
+matter, while the guards covered the boys with their carbines.
+
+"What do you mean by stopping the train?" he demanded angrily.
+
+Donald explained in as few words as possible.
+
+The conductor signalled the guards to him and told them what
+Donald had said.
+
+"What had we better do?" asked the conductor.
+
+"We had better go back to Pachuca for help," replied the guards.
+
+"And let the Zapatistas escape!" exclaimed Billie hotly. "What do
+you want to do that for?"
+
+"We have only six guards," the conductor explained, "and----"
+
+"And that, with us, makes ten," interrupted Billie.
+
+The conductor regarded the boy with surprise.
+
+"Do you mean you will join us to help capture the bandits?"
+
+"What do you think we're here for?" asked Billie.
+
+"Yes," chimed in Adrian. "What do you suppose we stopped the
+train for?"
+
+"But even ten are no match for twenty or more," declared the
+guard.
+
+"Of course they are," said Donald, "if the twenty are taken by
+surprise."
+
+"Which they will not be if we don't act pretty quick," insisted
+Billie. "Come on! Let's go after them," and he climbed up onto
+the car.
+
+"That's what I say," said Pedro, following Billie's example.
+
+Without more words the others followed and the conductor gave the
+signal to go ahead.
+
+"How about the horses?" asked Donald, turning to Pedro.
+
+"They'll be all right; but if we capture the Zapatistas we'll
+have horses enough any way."
+
+"And if we don't," remarked Billie grimly, "there'll be some
+riderless horses any way."
+
+"Let us hope that they will not be the ones we have left behind,"
+said Donald gravely.
+
+
+
+
+CHAPTER II.
+
+A STRANGE MIX-UP.
+
+
+While the train was gathering headway the conductor and the
+guards rounded up all the men they could find on the train who
+were armed. There were more than a dozen, so that in point of
+numbers, the force on the train nearly equalled the Zapatistas.
+These were so stationed at the windows that they could give the
+would-be robbers a warm reception.
+
+"We must use some strategy," declared Adrian, "or we will simply
+succeed in killing a few and scaring away the others. That will
+not be a very brilliant deed."
+
+"No," from Donald, "but it will save the bullion. What's your
+plan?"
+
+"Well, I was thinking it would be a good plan to separate the
+train."
+
+"How?"
+
+"You can see it is all down grade from here to where the bandits
+are waiting for us."
+
+"Yes."
+
+"As soon as we get to running a good speed, Billie and I will go
+into the express car with the three guards. You and Pedro stay
+here with the other guards and the passengers. As we near the
+bandits, uncouple the train, put on the brakes and stop the
+coaches. We will rush by with the engine and express car, firing
+as we go----"
+
+"Which will be all right," interrupted Billie, "if they don't
+ditch the engine."
+
+Adrian's face fell.
+
+"I hadn't thought of that."
+
+"Well, you'd better."
+
+After a moment Adrian's face brightened.
+
+"They might better ditch the engine and express car than the
+whole train," he declared.
+
+"Right you are," from Donald. "If you and Billie are game enough
+to try it, I say it is the proper thing. If they ditch the
+engine, we will be back a ways and can run down to your
+assistance. If they don't ditch you, we will have them between
+two fires."
+
+"Just what I thought," replied Adrian. "How about it, Billie?"
+
+"I'm game. My head may be a little thick, but I can see just as
+far through a two-inch plank as the next one."
+
+"All right, then. Come on," and Adrian led the way into the car
+ahead, while Donald and Pedro stood by to uncouple as soon as
+they passed the clump of trees before alluded to.
+
+Almost at the same instant several sharp blasts from the whistle
+gave the danger signal, and Donald threw over the coupling lever
+and put on the brake. The coaches slowed quickly down, but the
+engine and express car dashed in between the horsemen stationed
+on either side of the track.
+
+Prepared for what they knew was coming, the engineer and fireman
+had thrown themselves down on the floor of the cab, while Adrian,
+Billie and the three guards poured a volley into the robbers as
+they passed and several horses lost their mounts.
+
+This fire was followed by a fusillade from the horsemen and a
+minute later the engine, striking an unspiked rail, rolled
+completely over into the ditch, wrenching itself clear from the
+express car, which, after bumping over the ties for several
+seconds, suddenly ceased its antics and glided smoothly along.
+
+As by a miracle it had run completely over the space from which
+the rail had been loosed and landed upon the good track, down
+which it now sped.
+
+So unexpected was the change from ties to track that Adrian and
+Billie were unable for a few moments to understand what had
+happened. Then Billie rushed to the door and seized the hand
+brake.
+
+"Grab hold and help stop this car," he yelled to Adrian, "or
+there is no knowing where we'll land."
+
+Adrian hastened to obey, but the wrench that had been given the
+car when the engine broke loose had put the brake out of
+commission and the car sped on.
+
+The three Mexican guards now appeared on the platform and gazed
+wildly up the track where they could see the fight going on
+between the bandits and their companions.
+
+"What shall we do, Senor?" asked one of them.
+
+"Search me," from Billie. "How long is this grade?"
+
+"It is down hill all the way to Pitahaya."
+
+"How far is that?"
+
+"Ten kilometers from Pachuca."
+
+"That must be about three miles farther," said Adrian.
+
+"Correct," from Billie, "but unless it's a mighty steep up-grade
+the other side of Pita-what's-its-name, we're going so fast we'll
+not stop till we've run away past it."
+
+"Well, what of it? We can coast back, can't we?"
+
+The car gave a lurch to one side that almost threw the boys off
+the platform.
+
+"We're certainly going some," called Adrian. "Hang on!"
+
+And hang on they did until they dashed past the little station of
+Pitahaya and after several minutes began to slow down.
+
+"This is a little better," Adrian finally remarked as the car
+showed some sign of coming to a stop.
+
+"Yes, indeed," from Billie. "I suppose we'll come to a dead stop
+soon. Do you think she'll start back on her own hook, or shall we
+have to start her?"
+
+"We'll soon see," and see they did, for a couple of minutes later
+the car came to a stop.
+
+For some minutes the five occupants of the car waited to see if
+it would start back down the grade. When it did not they got off
+to decide what could be done.
+
+"It's a mighty steep hill," Billie ventured. "Looks as though the
+five of us ought to start it. Let's try."
+
+The five put their shoulders against the car and pushed with all
+their might, but it refused to budge.
+
+"If we only had a crowbar," said Adrian, "we could start it in a
+jiffy. Suppose some of you look in the car. There might be one
+there."
+
+The three Mexicans jumped to obey.
+
+Directly they appeared in the doorway with a large claw-bar in
+their hands.
+
+"Will this do?" asked one.
+
+"Sure! Throw it off," said Billie, "and I'll soon start the old
+caboose."
+
+Picking up the bar, Billie inserted the claw under one of the
+wheels while Adrian stood with his hand on the car rail ready to
+spring aboard.
+
+At the first attempt the claw slipped and nothing happened, but
+at the second attempt the wheels yielded a little.
+
+"This time she'll go," Billie called. "All aboard!"
+
+Adrian sprang onto the car as Billie bore down upon the bar and
+the wheels began to revolve.
+
+"Never mind the bar," cried Adrian as he saw that Billie was
+raising the implement to throw it onto the platform. "Jump
+aboard!"
+
+Billie started to obey, but the advice came too late. As he
+dropped the bar it struck one end of a tie, flopped over and hit
+him on the shin.
+
+"Wow!" he yelled, grabbing his ankle with both hands.
+
+"Never mind your leg," shouted Adrian. "Jump on or you'll be
+left."
+
+Billie tried to obey, but the car was now under headway and
+although he sprinted his best, he was soon left behind.
+
+Adrian started to jump off the car, but seeing his intention
+Billie called to him not to do it.
+
+"I'll get there some time," he called. "Just tell them I'm
+coming," and he stood in the middle of the track looking ruefully
+after the rapidly disappearing car.
+
+After some moments he picked up the claw-bar and threw it
+spitefully into the ditch beside the track, as much as to say,
+"Lay there! You're the cause of all the trouble." Then he started
+slowly after the car.
+
+In the meantime Adrian was flying as fast back toward Pachuca as
+he had been flying away from it only a few minutes before. It
+could not have been more than ten minutes altogether since the
+wreck of the engine and Adrian figured that if the grade were
+steep enough the car might gain momentum enough to carry it back
+to the scene of the trouble; but he had little hope that it
+would.
+
+When he shot through Pitahaya on his return trip, however, he saw
+that the car was going at a terrific rate of speed.
+
+"What do you think?" he asked one of the Mexicans. "Do you think
+we'll get all the way back?"
+
+"Cierto," was the reply. "When they first built this road they
+used to have mules haul the car to the top of this hill and then
+turn it loose and it would run almost to Pachuca. That was before
+it had any engines."
+
+Adrian looked at the man and winked one eye very slowly.
+
+"Senor, it is true," spoke up another. "I was a guard at the
+time."
+
+Adrian could scarcely believe the statement, but he afterward
+learned that the men spoke the truth.
+
+"Well, then," he said, "we had better look to our arms, for we
+may need them. There is no knowing how this affair has turned
+out."
+
+The advice was well taken, for as they drew near the scene of the
+wreck, they saw that they were badly needed. More than a dozen
+horsemen were in sight at some distance from the wreck and with
+their long-range rifles were doing their best to pick off any one
+who showed his head.
+
+"Our party must be out of ammunition," suggested Adrian, "or they
+would give a better account of themselves."
+
+"Our carbines would not carry that far," explained one of the
+guards.
+
+"Our Marlins will," replied Adrian, and as he spoke there were
+two simultaneous flashes from two of the car windows and two of
+the bandits fell, one shot from his horse and the other with his
+horse shot under him.
+
+For a moment the other horsemen hesitated as to the course they
+should pursue and then, putting spurs to their horses, they
+dashed toward the train, just as the express car, having reached
+the end of the track, bumped onto the ties and came to a stop.
+
+"Now!" cried Adrian as the riders drew near, firing as they came,
+and four shots rang out.
+
+The volley from so unexpected a quarter took the horsemen
+completely by surprise, and they pulled up with a jerk. The
+action proved their undoing, for as they stood thus for a moment,
+they gave those in the train the opportunity they desired and the
+volley that followed turned four more riderless horses upon the
+plain.
+
+It was more than flesh and blood could stand, and the seven or
+eight remaining horsemen turned and fled, followed by at least
+three whistling bullets from as many Marlins.
+
+The fight was over and the bullion had been saved, but what of
+Broncho Billie, who had been left at the top of the hill four
+miles away?
+
+That was the first question asked by Donald when he greeted
+Adrian two minutes later.
+
+"Oh, he's all right," was the laughing reply. "He's just taking a
+little walk for his health."
+
+But when Billie failed to put in an appearance an hour later, the
+boys mounted their horses and started up the track to meet him,
+leading Billie's mount between them.
+
+
+
+
+CHAPTER III.
+
+BILLIE LOSES HIS NERVE.
+
+
+Broncho Billie was not a rapid walker. In fact, if there was any
+one thing in which Billie was not a success, it was walking. He
+could ride a horse all day, but when it came to depending upon
+his own legs as a means of locomotion, he was a dead failure.
+
+Therefore he walked slowly along, counting the ties as he went.
+
+"They certainly do lay 'em thick," he mused after some minutes.
+"Three hundred and one, three hundred and two, three hundred and
+three, three hundred and four, three hun----"
+
+He stopped short and looked behind him.
+
+"I sure thought I heard some one," he muttered. "It must have
+been a bird."
+
+He turned and started forward.
+
+"Let's see, where was I? Oh, yes, three hundred and five, three
+hundred and six, three hundred and----"
+
+Again he stopped, but did not turn around. Instead he stooped
+down as though to pick up a stone, which enabled him to look
+backward between his knees.
+
+He caught a movement in the grass at the edge of the right of
+way.
+
+"I thought so," he muttered. "Now to find out who it is, and what
+he wants."
+
+He picked up a small stone and threw it at a tall cactus which
+grew near the track some distance ahead.
+
+"Good shot," he said aloud as the stone hit the stalk. "I wonder
+if I could do it again."
+
+He stooped down and picked up another stone, taking a good look
+backward from his stooping position. There was not a movement to
+indicate the presence of a living thing.
+
+"This is getting on my nerves," the boy mused as he picked up
+several small stones and again walked forward. "I don't mind
+being followed by a white man, but I'm a whole lot leary of these
+greasers. They're bad enough when they're friendly."
+
+Then aloud, as he threw a couple of stones: "I'll never get
+anywhere if I don't make better time than this. I'll just sprint
+a few."
+
+Suiting the action to the word, he started on a run.
+
+Almost immediately he was aware of a soft pat-pat in his rear. He
+had heard a similar sound in the wilds of Wyoming and he
+recognized it at once.
+
+It was the footfall of a four-legged animal.
+
+"So!" he ejaculated. "I wonder what it is. If there were wolves
+down here I would say it was a wolf, but I don't believe there
+are." Then a minute later, "Well, whatever it is, I'm going to
+find out."
+
+He whipped out his automatic and turned suddenly.
+
+As before, not a single living thing was in sight, only in the
+grass a movement as before.
+
+Without a moment's aim, he fired a single shot at the spot. It
+was an act born of fear and Billie knew it, but for the life of
+him he could not have done otherwise, so nervous had he become.
+
+The report was followed by a cry of pain and an instant later
+there came running directly toward him out of the tall grass a
+figure so weird that Billie stood as one paralysed.
+
+The figure was that of a man not more than two feet high, with
+long arms and a head of diminutive size. While it stood upright
+at times, at others it came forward on all fours. To Billie it
+seemed a cross between a man and a monkey.
+
+Gathering his wits in an instant, Billie would have fired
+again--in fact, raised his revolver to do so, when the strange
+creature fell to its knees and raised its hands in supplication.
+
+"By George!" exclaimed the lad as he stood with lowered weapon.
+"What kind of a thing is this? I wonder if it can talk?"
+
+Then as he took a step toward it: "I'm not going to hurt you.
+Come here."
+
+The creature arose to its feet and came slowly toward him. As it
+did so Billie noticed that blood was running from a wound in its
+scalp.
+
+"Poor thing," he said. "That must have been where the bullet hit
+him. It was a close shave."
+
+"Can you talk?" he finally asked.
+
+The strange creature turned its head to one side and eyed him
+closely, but no sound came from its lips.
+
+"It must be an ape of some sort," mused the boy; "but how did it
+become so tame?"
+
+He slowly returned his automatic to its holster, thinking in the
+meantime how he could dress the creature's wound; but no sooner
+had his hand left his weapon than the ape sprang at him with the
+utmost fury. It landed on his shoulder, wound its legs about his
+neck, and with its long arms made a wild grab for the revolver.
+
+Then began a strange and terrible struggle for the possession of
+the weapon. Even as he fought the beast, Billie realized that in
+some manner the ape had learned to fear firearms, but whether it
+had ever learned to use them he could not venture a guess. He
+felt certain if he could draw the weapon and point it at the ape,
+it would at once cringe in fear. What might happen if the ape
+should get possession of it, he could only imagine.
+
+For a youth of eighteen, there were few whom Billie met that were
+his match physically, but this diminutive man-animal held him as
+in a vise. Billie exerted every ounce of his strength to free
+himself from the terrible hold, while the ape fought even more
+fiercely to retain its grip and to gain possession of the weapon.
+
+It was a weird and fearful struggle waged there in the stillness
+of the tropical woodland--a stillness broken only by the
+occasional wild scream of the ape, or the hoarse breathing of the
+boy as he fought to free himself from that horrible grasp.
+
+The struggle must have lasted for two or three minutes--to Billie
+it seemed hours--when by a sudden wrench the lad managed to free
+his left arm sufficiently to get the beast by the throat. For an
+instant it loosed its hold on his right arm and that act decided
+the battle.
+
+Finding his right arm free, Billie seized his revolver and
+without drawing it from the holster pulled the trigger.
+
+At the sound of the shot, the ape uttered a plaintive cry,
+relaxed its hold upon the lad and fell upon its knees on the
+ground with its hands raised in supplication as previously.
+
+"I ought to shoot you," declared the lad between his gasps for
+breath as he drew the weapon from its holster and pointed it at
+the animal, "but I won't. I'll take you with me and maybe I can
+sell you for enough to pay me for the scare you've given me. Now,
+march!"
+
+He pointed with his finger down the track, but the beast would
+not stir.
+
+"Don't you intend to do what I tell you?"
+
+The animal perked up his head and kept his eye upon the revolver.
+
+"Well," exclaimed Billie as he drew a long breath, "this is the
+limit. I can't make you mind and I won't hurt you. I guess the
+only thing I can do is to go and leave you."
+
+Suiting the action to the word, Billie turned and started down
+the track, his revolver still in his hand.
+
+He had not gone more than a dozen steps, before he heard the soft
+pat-pat behind him, and on looking back could see nothing but the
+waving grass to indicate the whereabouts of his erstwhile
+assailant.
+
+"So I am to be followed, am I? Well, all right." Then, as an
+afterthought: "I wonder how I can catch him when I want him. I
+wonder if this will do," and he raised his weapon and pointed it
+toward the moving grass.
+
+With the same plaintive cry which Billie had come to recognize
+as one of fear, the animal ran toward him and sank to his knees.
+
+Billie smiled.
+
+"It's all right, old chap. As long as I know how to handle you,
+why you can follow me right back to the train."
+
+Again he started down the track at a brisk walk, it having just
+occurred to him that there might be something doing at the other
+end of his journey.
+
+Twenty minutes later he reached the station at Pitahaya where he
+had expected to find Adrian and the three Mexicans awaiting him,
+but, as we know, they had gone on to the scene of the wreck. Not
+realizing just what had happened, but always on the alert for the
+unexpected, Billie, therefore, began an inspection of the
+station.
+
+It did not take him long to discover that Pitahaya was little
+more than a siding with a one-room building, which was used as a
+freight house and a waiting room. It did not even boast of a
+station master.
+
+"There must be some reason for having a building here," he mused.
+"There must be some sort of a settlement around somewhere. But
+what's that to me? I might as well be jogging along towards
+Pachuca."
+
+Then he bethought him of the ape, which he had no mind to lose
+after his exciting experience. But the animal was nowhere to be
+seen.
+
+"I wonder if I could raise him with a shot," soliloquized
+Billie.
+
+He raised his weapon, which he still carried in his hand, and
+fired aimlessly, while he turned his eyes in various directions,
+but there was nothing to be seen.
+
+"Oh, well," he thought, "what's the difference? He'd just be a
+nuisance anyway. I might as well be trudging along."
+
+He jumped off the station platform and proceeded down the track,
+filling the magazine to his automatic as he went. Then having
+finished the task, he returned it to his holster and once more
+began counting the ties.
+
+"One, two, three, four, five, six----"
+
+Bing! And a stone whistled by his head.
+
+Billie turned, and as he did so a second stone from the same
+source struck him on the temple, and he fell to the ground.
+
+A second later the ape sprang from a palm beside the station and
+ran toward him, stopping every few feet to see if the lad would
+rise.
+
+When within a few feet of the prostrate lad the animal made a
+leap and landed upon his body. In another instant it had gained
+possession of Billie's weapon, which it examined curiously for a
+moment, ere it sprang away and stationed itself some two rods
+distant, where it sat watching with the weapon aimed directly at
+him.
+
+For perhaps five minutes the two retained their relative
+positions and then Billie began to regain consciousness. Several
+times he moved uneasily and then he suddenly sat up and looked
+around.
+
+"I wonder what happened," he finally thought, and then he became
+conscious of a pain in his head.
+
+He raised his hand to the aching spot and his fingers encountered
+a big lump.
+
+The truth came upon him like a flash. He dropped his hand to his
+holster, and sprang to his feet.
+
+As he did so he caught sight of the ape and found himself looking
+into the business end of his own weapon.
+
+With a yell he dropped to the ground as though the expected had
+happened.
+
+But when no shot followed, he began to regain his wits and lay
+still trying to figure out once more just how much the ape might
+know about the use of the weapon.
+
+He remembered the old saying that a gun was a dangerous weapon
+without lock, stock or barrel, because a man killed his wife
+with the ramrod; and so he figured that an animal which had
+intelligence enough to throw a stone and knock him senseless,
+might have sense enough to fire a revolver.
+
+"If I only knew something about his history," soliloquized
+Billie, "I might be able to guess how much he knew. But he is a
+perfect stranger to me. I don't even know his name."
+
+After several minutes and nothing had happened, Billie decided to
+make some effort to get away.
+
+"I might as well be shot as to be prisoner to an ape," he
+thought, and so he arose to a sitting posture and surveyed the
+scene.
+
+There sat the ape as before, with the automatic pointed at
+Billie, but with a puzzled look upon its face. When the lad
+finally arose, the ape appeared still more puzzled and at length,
+turning the weapon away from Billie, looked into the muzzle.
+
+"That settles it," exclaimed Billie. "He doesn't know how to fire
+it. I'll go and take it away from him."
+
+He started toward the animal, which at once pointed the revolver
+in Billie's direction. There came a sharp report and a bullet
+whizzed by the boy's head.
+
+"Worse and more of it," exclaimed Billie. "He doesn't know how to
+use the thing, but he's liable to shoot me as long as I stay in
+range. I'll just make myself scarce."
+
+Stooping down, he picked up a good-sized stone and hurled it at
+the ape and then, without waiting to see the result of his throw,
+jumped into the jungle which lined both sides of the track,
+determined to make a detour and if possible lose his unpleasant
+companion.
+
+He had not run far before he realized that the ape was following,
+but this he did not mind. There were plenty of trees between
+them, and he felt sure he would soon be able to reach some sort
+of a habitation, when he suddenly found himself on the edge of a
+deep basin into which he plunged before he was able to gain his
+equilibrium.
+
+
+
+
+CHAPTER IV.
+
+THE ROSARIO VIEJO.
+
+
+To be suddenly pitched head-foremost down a rocky declivity into
+a mass of prickly pear bushes and other tropical brambles is by
+no means pleasant; and as a result Billie was not in the best of
+humor when he picked himself up and looked to the top of the
+60-foot embankment down which he had slid.
+
+"It's a wonder they wouldn't hang out a red light when they dig a
+hole like this," he declared angrily, "and not let a fellow most
+break his neck, to say nothing of scratching his eyes out! This
+is worse than a subway cave-in."
+
+He pulled himself together and surveyed his surroundings.
+
+The basin looked very much like an old quarry--so old that the
+shrubbery on the sides had grown into good-sized trees, and the
+whole place was covered with herbage of one sort or another. In
+one corner of the excavation, which must have covered some two
+acres, there was the ruin of an adobe house, while near the
+center was a stone structure made of four stone pillars about
+twenty feet apart and roofed over with two huge stone slabs, set
+so as to form a gable roof. Except for its size, it had the
+appearance of the old-fashioned well houses, which were once so
+common in New England.
+
+"It's a tough-looking place, whatever it is," was Billie's
+comment. "I wish the fellows were here."
+
+And then for the first time in more than half an hour Billie
+bethought him of his companions. His strange experience with the
+ape had driven all other thoughts out of his mind.
+
+"By George!" he exclaimed aloud, "I wonder how the fight with the
+bandits came out?"
+
+Almost as in answer to his words, there appeared upon the edge of
+the excavation into which he had fallen, but upon the opposite
+side from that on which he had taken his slide, ten horsemen,
+three of whom carried across the pommel of their saddles the
+bodies of three men. They halted and surveyed the basin
+critically. Then, single file, they slowly descended into the
+quarry.
+
+Billie recognized them the minute he laid eyes upon them. They
+were the remnant of the bandit band, and the bodies carried
+across the pommels of the saddles were three of their wounded
+companions.
+
+"This is no place for me," commented Billie as he kept himself
+well hidden behind a giant cactus. "It reminds me of Ali Baba and
+the forty thieves. I hope I have better luck than Ali Baba."
+
+As though to carry out the trend of Billie's thoughts, the
+horsemen halted near the ruin of the adobe house before mentioned
+and two of their number dismounted and entered. A minute later
+the rest of the band rode into the ruins and disappeared,
+followed by the riderless horses of the two dismounted men.
+
+Billie rubbed his eyes.
+
+"I wonder if I'm getting dippy," he muttered. "Maybe that crack
+on the side of my head has made me see things."
+
+He sat down to think.
+
+"If I only had some kind of a gun," he mused, "I wouldn't feel so
+everlasting helpless. Confound that ape! If I ever see him again
+I'll break his neck."
+
+Then, after a moment's thought: "I don't believe the beast would
+give up the chase. He's likely to show up at any minute.
+Something has to be done."
+
+The boy scanned the edge of the embankment, if perchance he might
+see anything of his persecutor. There was nothing in sight and he
+decided to go on a tour of inspection. As quietly as possible he
+stole along the side of the excavation toward the spot where the
+ruin stood, when once more he had that sense of being watched.
+
+Turning his head quickly, he saw the ape about twenty paces to
+one side aiming the revolver at him.
+
+Then Billie lost his temper.
+
+"This thing has got to stop," he exclaimed. "I'll be doggoned if
+I'm going to stand for it any longer."
+
+He ran quickly toward the ape, and fell on his knees as he had
+seen the ape do, and raised his hands in supplication.
+
+The animal quirked its head and fairly beamed with pleasure as it
+slowly advanced and stood beside him.
+
+But its simian smile was quickly turned to surprise, for like a
+flash Billie snatched the weapon from its hand and aimed it at
+the animal's head.
+
+"Now," he said, "you come with me."
+
+The animal made no move.
+
+"We'll see whether you will come or not," said Billie, and
+stooping down he broke off a good-sized sprout from a live oak.
+"Now, march!" and he raised the whip.
+
+It was the one thing needed. The beast had evidently felt the
+touch of a whip before, for it raised its arm and danced about as
+though going through some circus maneuver.
+
+"The first mystery is solved," laughed Billie. "Now for the
+second one. Come on, Ab," unconsciously naming his companion
+after the hero of Stanley Waterloo's famous story.
+
+The ape seemed to know what was wanted and the two proceeded
+slowly and silently toward the ruin.
+
+"I've been in a whole lot of queer scrapes," mused Billie as he
+crept along, "but this is surely the queerest--tramping around
+with an ape to solve the disappearance of ten cutthroats. I hope
+I wake up pretty soon."
+
+But it was no dream, as Billie was soon to discover.
+
+Arriving at the ruined building, Billie crawled along by the wall
+until he came directly under what had once been a window. Then,
+after listening a long time and hearing no sound, he ventured to
+raise his head and peep in.
+
+The old ruin was as empty as though there were not a living
+person within fifty miles.
+
+"Great Scott!" gasped the boy. "What do you think of that! Now I
+know I'm dreaming!"
+
+He turned to the ape, waving his whip.
+
+"Here you, Ab," he said, "go in there and see what you can find."
+
+He pointed to the window and the animal sprang lightly in and a
+minute later perched itself on one of the decaying rafters.
+
+"If there were any one around, they would certainly see Ab,"
+reasoned Billie, "and would make some noise about it. I guess
+it's safe to go in."
+
+He crawled around to the door and entered. There were the tracks
+of the horses, but the horses had disappeared as completely as
+though they had been swallowed up.
+
+Billie called softly to Ab, who did not see fit to obey until he
+waved his whip. Then the animal sprang lightly to the ground.
+Billie showed him the tracks.
+
+"Where do you suppose they went?" he asked.
+
+Ab blinked his eyes and, for the first time since Billie had
+become acquainted with him, made a noise in his throat, much like
+the voice of a child.
+
+Billie smiled in spite of himself.
+
+"I'm glad you've decided to become sociable," he said, "What do
+you make of this? You look as though you could think."
+
+Ab blinked his eyes stupidly and then suddenly became alert as
+though listening.
+
+"What is it?" asked Billie, impressed by the ape's attitude.
+
+For a reply Ab sprang through the window and made straight for
+the structure in the middle of the quarry. In another instant he
+was on the roof.
+
+Billie followed as fast as he could and as he stepped beneath the
+roof started back in the utmost amazement, for up through what
+looked like a huge well there came the distinct sound of human
+voices.
+
+For several seconds he stood as one in a spell and then he
+started forward to peer into the well, but on a second thought
+did not.
+
+"I couldn't see anything if I did," he thought, "but any one
+looking up could see me. I'll do better by listening."
+
+The words came to him almost as distinctly as though he were in
+the same room with the speakers, and there was no longer any
+doubt that the voices were those of the Zapatistas who had
+attempted to rob the train.
+
+From their conversation Billie learned the outcome of the fight,
+and he was greatly amused at the attempt of the bandits to figure
+out who had betrayed them. Each one had a different theory, but
+all agreed that there must have been a traitor in the band. It
+was all the lad could do to prevent himself from calling out to
+them, just to see what effect his words would have.
+
+After discovering from the conversation that the bandits felt
+themselves perfectly secure where they were and that they were
+likely to stay there for some time, he finally decided to get
+back to the railroad and thence to Pachuca and give the alarm.
+
+Acting upon the decision, he made his way across the basin to
+where he had slid down the embankment and slowly and laboriously
+climbed to the top, followed by Ab.
+
+Retracing his steps, he soon reached the railroad and looking
+down the track toward Pachuca gave a shout of delight as he saw
+his three chums approaching, leading a fourth horse between them.
+
+"Just in time," he said, as they drew near enough to exchange
+greetings.
+
+"Just in time for what?" queried the others as one.
+
+"To capture the bandits that you let escape."
+
+"How do you know that we let any escape?" asked Adrian.
+
+"I'm a mind reader."
+
+The other three looked incredulous.
+
+"Oh, it's a fact," declared Billie. "I can tell you all about the
+fight just as well as though I had been there," and he proceeded
+to prove his words.
+
+"Some one told you," said Adrian.
+
+"Sure," laughed Billie, thoroughly enjoying the perplexity of
+his companions. "My friend Ab. Come here, old man, and be
+introduced," and Billie waved his whip, which he still carried.
+
+With a little cry the ape sprang to his side, an act which only
+added to the amazement of the others.
+
+"Allow me," said Billie with mock gravity, "to introduce my
+friend Mr. Ab from No-man's-land. Ab, these are the rest of the
+Broncho Rider Boys. How would you like to join the company?"
+
+Ab scratched his ear and looked wise.
+
+"Oh, come," interrupted Donald. "Tell us what's up and what we
+must do to capture the rest of this band of cutthroats."
+
+Thinking that he had carried the joke far enough, and realizing
+also that he might be wasting valuable time, Billie related his
+adventure, describing the place he had discovered.
+
+"It is the Rosario viejo," said Pedro, as soon as Billie had
+finished his story.
+
+"What's that?" asked Billie.
+
+"An abandoned mine. It is called the old Rosario to distinguish
+it from the new Rosario, which is now one of the most valuable
+mines in this region. The station at Pitahaya was built
+especially to serve it."
+
+"I see," said Billie. "Where is the new mine?"
+
+"Down there," and Pedro pointed to a trail leading in the
+opposite direction. "It is just about as far from the station on
+that side of the railroad as the old Rosario is on this."
+
+"Don't you think we had better summon some assistance from the
+mine workers?" asked Adrian.
+
+"They may be in cahoots with the bandits," laughed Donald. "I
+have lost my confidence in about every one in this bandit-ridden
+land."
+
+"I don't blame you," said Pedro, "and I hope the day will soon
+come when all this trouble will be over."
+
+"Then you agree with me that we should tackle the bandits alone,
+do you?" asked Donald.
+
+"It is the only safe way."
+
+"All right, then," exclaimed Billie. "Let's be off. If we use a
+little strategy, I'm sure we shall succeed."
+
+He turned to mount the horse, which a minute before had been
+standing a few feet away, but it was gone.
+
+"Where's my horse?" he cried.
+
+The others turned in surprise.
+
+"It certainly was here a minute ago," declared Adrian.
+
+"Then it can't be very far away," insisted Donald.
+
+"It's so far I can't see it," replied Billie.
+
+"There it goes!" shouted Pedro, who had jumped his mount across
+the track as soon as he heard Billie's cry.
+
+The others looked in the direction indicated, and sure enough,
+there went the horse about a quarter of a mile away on a dead run
+and on its back was Billie's late acquaintance, Ab.
+
+"By George," exclaimed Billie angrily as he snatched a rifle from
+Donald's holster, "I've had enough of that ape. I'll put a stop
+to his foolishness," and he leveled the rifle.
+
+But ere he could press the trigger, there was a report from
+another quarter and the horse and its rider hit the dust.
+
+
+
+
+CHAPTER V.
+
+WHEN THE OLD WAS NEW.
+
+
+A cry of astonishment went up from the quartette and then they
+stood silent to see what would be the next move.
+
+They did not have long to wait, for presently a tall, gaunt
+figure strode out of the brambles some yards from the fallen
+horse and uttered a hoarse shout, upon which Ab sprang from the
+spot where he had fallen and ran toward the newcomer, giving vent
+to shrill cries as he ran.
+
+"That must be his master," muttered Billie. "I'm glad I didn't
+shoot the little beggar."
+
+"I'm more interested in the master than in the monkey," said
+Donald. "He is evidently not a Mexican. Who and what do you
+suppose he is?"
+
+"An animal trainer from a circus," replied Adrian.
+
+"There are no circuses in this part of the world," commented
+Billie.
+
+"If he only had a hand organ instead of a gun, I could place
+him," laughed Donald. "What do you make out of him, Pedro?"
+
+"It's a _saltimbanco_."
+
+"What is that?"
+
+"A man who goes about making people laugh."
+
+"Oh!" from Adrian. "You mean a mountebank?"
+
+"I think so."
+
+"And this chap," ventured Billie, "isn't satisfied with making a
+monkey of himself, but carries a real one with him."
+
+Pedro laughed. "That seems to be it."
+
+"I'm sorry he killed the horse," said Donald. "We need him."
+
+"Perhaps he didn't," suggested Adrian. "Suppose we ride over and
+see."
+
+Suiting the action to the word, the boys rode out into the open,
+much to the newcomer's surprise and consternation.
+
+"Senors," he exclaimed, as he came running toward them, "I am
+sorry I had to hurt your horse; but I couldn't lose my brother."
+
+"Your what?" asked Billie.
+
+"My brother. My little brother. Could I, Ambrosio?" and he patted
+the ape on the cheek.
+
+"What do you call him?" asked Donald.
+
+"I call him Ambrosio because he is so sweet."
+
+"Bah!" exclaimed Billie. "I called him Ab, but he ought to be
+named Diabolo. But how about the horse?"
+
+"I am afraid I have rendered him quite useless for the present,
+Senor. I may have broken his leg."
+
+An examination of the fallen animal revealed the fact that while
+the leg was not splintered, it was so badly injured that the
+animal was quite useless.
+
+"Have you far to go, Senors?" queried the mountebank.
+
+"Only as far as the Rosario viejo for the present," answered
+Adrian. "After that----"
+
+"After that," interrupted Billie, "we may not want to go
+anywhere."
+
+The mountebank looked at Billie questioningly.
+
+"That's what I mean," reiterated Billie. "We are going there to
+capture a band of cutthroats, but we may have a fight."
+
+The man made a grimace, which was intended for a smile.
+
+"I understand. Can I be of any service?"
+
+Donald eyed him suspiciously.
+
+"What do you think?" he asked.
+
+"You may have noticed how I stopped the runaway," he remarked.
+
+"Very neatly."
+
+"Sure," from Billie. "It was a short stop."
+
+"I perceive that you are an American. I am also a fan."
+
+"What!" from the three Americans.
+
+"True. I am even worse. I formerly shot the pill in one of the
+bush leagues. I aspired to a place in the box of one of the major
+league clubs, but instead I joined the Madero revolution. I had
+all the sport I wanted and finding my brother in this forsaken
+land, I joined him as a public entertainer. Shall we give you a
+sample of our performance?"
+
+"Not now," from Donald. "Let's go and round up this bunch of
+revolutionists first."
+
+"But why?" queried the mountebank. "To-morrow they may be the
+government."
+
+The boys looked at each other with an expression that said as
+plainly as words: "True! We never thought of that."
+
+"Now, I have a better plan," continued the mountebank. "Let's go
+and entertain the revolutionists. Let's be neutral."
+
+"I'm afraid we are already belligerents," laughed Adrian. "We
+have had one brush with them."
+
+The mountebank heaved a sigh.
+
+"Of course, if you have declared war, we shall have to fight to a
+finish, unless," with a grin, "we can intrench."
+
+"It is they who are intrenched," explained Billie. "They are at
+the bottom of the old mine, although I don't know how they got
+there."
+
+"So," laughed the mountebank. "Suppose we go and find out."
+
+Arrived at the shaft house, for that is what the gable-roofed
+building was, the boys and their new-found friend approached and
+listened to the sound of voices which still arose to the top of
+the shaft.
+
+Evidently considering themselves free and safe, the bandits were
+preparing their evening meal, for it was now well on toward
+sunset. They were singing and joking as though they had not just
+lost half or two-thirds their number.
+
+From a few remarks made now and then, it appeared that they
+proposed on the following day to recruit the band up to its
+former strength.
+
+"That is the thing we must prevent," declared Donald.
+
+"A very easy thing," said the mountebank, "if we had enough
+provisions to remain here for twenty-four hours, or more."
+
+"How so?" asked Billie.
+
+"Why, they will doubtless send out two or three to do the
+recruiting. We can capture them as they leave the ruins."
+
+Billie glanced at the man from under his broad-rimmed sombrero as
+he asked: "How did you know they came out through the ruins?"
+
+The mountebank smiled.
+
+"Now, don't go to mistrusting me, young fellow, for I'm on the
+level. But I've been in this place before, and I know that the
+only way to where your friends down there are camping is through
+the ruins."
+
+"Have you ever been down there?"
+
+"Yes. They are only about sixty feet below the ground, in a
+chamber which was originally a gallery in the mine. The shaft
+over which this house is built is over two hundred feet deep."
+
+"I'd like to explore it," remarked Adrian.
+
+"Do you think you have the nerve?" and the stranger bent upon him
+a penetrating gaze.
+
+Billie laughed softly.
+
+"Say, stranger," he finally said. "I guess you never heard of the
+Broncho Rider Boys. We've got the nerve to do anything that any
+other human being dare do."
+
+"Then we'll get rid of these bandits in short notice," declared
+the mountebank emphatically. "You are just the chaps I have been
+looking for."
+
+He leaned over the mouth of the shaft and gave a shrill whistle.
+
+In an instant all was silent below.
+
+Half a minute later he repeated the whistle thrice.
+
+There was a clatter below of arms and accoutrements.
+
+"Over behind those big cactus with you, quick," was the next
+command. "If you insist on fighting these men later, you can.
+Now let's get rid of them."
+
+For just a moment the boys hesitated, but there was something in
+the man's manner that seemed to force obedience and they obeyed.
+
+They were not a moment too soon, for they had no more than
+secreted themselves than the back wall of the ruin flew open and
+the men rode out. Of those who had been at the mouth of the shaft
+only a few moments before, only the mountebank with his ape was
+in sight.
+
+"What is it?" asked one of the band, riding up to him.
+
+"Guard the track at the summit. Let no train pass, even if you
+have to tear up the track."
+
+"By whose order?"
+
+The mountebank made a mysterious sign with his left hand.
+
+"_Bueno!_" from the horseman. "Close up the doors and care for
+the wounded," and putting spurs to his horse, he led the bandits
+from the basin.
+
+As soon as they were out of sight, the mountebank summoned the
+boys to the shaft house by a wave of his hand.
+
+"Now," he said, "you'll have a chance to test your nerve, and we
+must work rapidly to get where we wish to go before dark."
+
+He took from a crude knapsack which he wore upon his shoulders a
+coil of cord about half the size of a lead pencil, but evidently
+of much strength. Then seizing the ape, he fastened one end of
+the cord to the belt about the animal's body, and despite its
+unwillingness to be thus treated began to lower it into the
+shaft.
+
+Totally unable to account for his actions, the boys stood
+speechless, watching the operations.
+
+After some minutes, the cord slackened.
+
+"He's reached the bottom," was the information vouchsafed. Then a
+moment later: "Help me to pull him up, one of you."
+
+Billie hastened to lend a hand and in a short time the head of
+the ape appeared above the edge of the shaft. In his hand he held
+one end of a good-sized rope, which the mountebank took and tied
+around one of the stone pillars which supported the roof.
+
+"Now, then," he said, "we are ready to descend into the old mine.
+Which one of you will go first?"
+
+The boys looked at each other, but there was no reply until
+Donald asked:
+
+"Why should we go down at all?"
+
+"Why," was the somewhat quizzical reply, "to show your nerve."
+
+"Unless there is some good reason other than that, there are
+plenty of ways to show our nerve without lowering ourselves to
+the bottom of an old mine."
+
+"There is a good reason," was the reply.
+
+"Then tell us. If it is good, there can be no objection."
+
+"The object of this descent," said the stranger calmly, "is to
+see if we cannot solve the mystery of the abandonment of the
+mine."
+
+"Have you ever been down?" asked Billie.
+
+"Often."
+
+"There is no foul gas at the bottom?"
+
+"Not now, as you may see by the condition of Ambrosio, who has
+been clear to the bottom."
+
+"Then I am willing to be the first to descend; but first I must
+know more about you than I do."
+
+"What difference does that make? You will have three friends here
+with me. They are all armed and I can see they know how to use
+their weapons. I cannot possibly harm you. I will be the third to
+descend. I assure you that the descent and the ascent are
+comparatively easy for athletic young chaps, as the sides of the
+shaft are very uneven. By the aid of this rope you can come up
+almost as easily as you would climb a ladder. The adventure is
+well worth your while."
+
+"And you won't tell us who you are?"
+
+"I have already told you. I am an American soldier of fortune. My
+name, if that means anything to you, is Francis Strong, and I
+have assumed this character of a mountebank solely for the
+purpose of going about the country without being molested. What I
+hope to do, is of no interest to any one but myself."
+
+It was a straightforward statement and the boys saw no reason to
+doubt its truthfulness.
+
+"All right, then," exclaimed Billie. "Here goes!"
+
+He grasped the rope and lowered himself over the side. It was as
+Strong had said and in a very few minutes he found himself at the
+bottom. He could see nothing except the dim light at the mouth of
+the shaft.
+
+Giving the rope a vigorous shake, as had been agreed upon, he saw
+another figure begin to descend, and in a short time Pedro stood
+beside him. Strong was next to descend, then came Ambrosio, and
+after him Adrian and Donald in the order named--Donald having
+determined to be the last, that he might be sure that everything
+was safe above ground.
+
+"I should have given you this," was Strong's first remark upon
+alighting at Billie's side, and he drew from his pocket an
+electric torch. "But it slipped my mind."
+
+"We all have them in our trunk in the City of Mexico," replied
+Billie, "but I doubt if either of us has one with him."
+
+"This is sufficient, for I shall light some torches I have
+prepared as soon as we are ready for our work."
+
+When Donald had descended, Strong led the way through a lateral
+about thirty or forty feet, at the end of which another vertical
+shaft had been sunk. Around the mouth of this Strong had set a
+number of torches, which he now proceeded to light. By their
+glare it was possible to see part way down the hole.
+
+"The thing I hope to find," explained Strong, "is at the bottom
+of that hole, if it exists at all."
+
+"What is that?" asked Billie.
+
+"I think I can best answer your question," was the reply, "by
+reading you a translation of a paper which is said to have been
+found in the shaft above, where the bandits have made their
+rendezvous. How it came into my possession, matters not. I
+believe there are now enough of us here to prove or disprove its
+truthfulness, unless some one has been here before us."
+
+Seating himself on a jutting boulder, Strong took from his
+pocket a paper, which he read as follows under the flickering
+torchlight:
+
+  "Being about to leave this world, I desire to obtain forgiveness
+  for the great and only crime of my life, hence this confession.
+
+  "There were five of us. Names do not matter. They were my fellow
+  workmen. We had been entrusted with the output of the Rosario for
+  the year and had promised to guard it with our lives. We heard
+  the soldiers of Maximilian coming. We were not enough to
+  withstand them. We determined to hide the treasure in the western
+  shaft. We carried it to the edge and threw it in. My four
+  companions went down to cover it over with dirt, which I brought
+  from the other shaft and gave them, shovel by shovel. A mad idea
+  seized me. If they were dead, no one but I would know the hiding
+  place of the treasure. I would kill them; but how? I glanced
+  about. Great pieces of rock were on every hand. Without stopping
+  to consider the foulness of the deed I rolled a huge piece to the
+  mouth of the shaft and pushed it in. There was a cry of terror
+  and I heard a voice call out to know what had happened. I said a
+  piece of rock had broken loose and asked what damage it had done.
+  Only one replied. The others had been stricken down. Madly I
+  pushed over another rock and then another and still another. Then
+  there was silence and I fled. The soldiers found me unconscious
+  at the bottom of the shaft. Ere I became conscious, Maximilian
+  was no more. When I returned hither, the mine had been abandoned.
+  Here I have lived for years alone with my misery. Now I die. May
+  God forgive me.
+
+                                                    JOSE RODRIGUEZ.
+
+
+
+
+CHAPTER VI.
+
+A FEARFUL EXPERIENCE.
+
+
+"Well?" queried Donald when Strong had finished reading the
+paper, "what are we going to do about it?"
+
+"We are going to find out, if we can, whether Jose Rodriguez told
+the truth, and if he did, whether any one else has tried to prove
+it."
+
+"What do you think of it, Pedro?" asked Billie, indicating the
+opening at their feet.
+
+"Exactly."
+
+"Have you ever been down in it?" asked Adrian of Strong.
+
+"No! I did not feel equal to the task and I was afraid to ask
+help of any of these cutthroats."
+
+"What do you think of it, Pedro?" asked Billie, turning to the
+Mexican lad, who had made no comment whatever.
+
+"It's an old tale," was the reply, "this story of the Rosario
+viejo. I have heard it many times and I presume this shaft has
+been explored by every prospector in this section. In my opinion
+it is a huge hoax."
+
+At Pedro's words, Strong's face became ashen.
+
+"Are you telling the truth?" he asked hoarsely.
+
+"Indeed I am. My father knows of several who have searched the
+place and nothing has ever been found."
+
+Strong drew a long breath and passed his hand over his face.
+
+"I have believed it true," he finally said, "ever since I first
+came into possession of this paper. There is something about it
+that rings true and I have counted upon finding sufficient wealth
+to enable me to achieve a long cherished plan. If what you say,"
+turning to Pedro, "is true, my chance of attaining my ambition is
+very slim."
+
+"I'm sorry, sir, but if I had known for certain what your object
+was in coming down here I might have saved you the trouble.
+Isn't there any other way you might obtain the money you wish?"
+
+"If there is, I don't know it."
+
+"Pedro may be right," spoke up Billie suddenly, "but I am in
+favor of making an inspection of our own, now that we are here.
+What do you say, Don?"
+
+"I'm with you." Then to Strong: "How are we to get to the
+bottom?"
+
+Strong reached over and from behind a nearby boulder produced
+another bundle of rope.
+
+"I had intended making a rope ladder," he said.
+
+"All right, then," from Donald, "a rope ladder it shall be."
+
+The boys set to work and in the course of an hour had made a rope
+ladder more than fifty feet in length. Lowering it into the
+shaft, it seemed to reach to the bottom and Billie started to go
+down, but Strong prevented him.
+
+"I shall go first," he said. "If there is any danger from
+poisonous gas, or from reptiles, I shall take the risk. You boys
+have parents and homes. I have no one. If I should suffer any
+mishap, do not attempt to rescue me. It would not be worth
+while."
+
+"Nothing will happen," declared Adrian. "I have a hunch and my
+hunches are usually right."
+
+The rope having been properly fastened and warded off the side by
+an ingenious arrangement of several large rocks, Strong began his
+descent. In his left hand he carried a flaming torch and Donald
+leaned over the edge, looking down, with rifle sighted, to fire
+upon any reptile which might be brought to light by the torch's
+ruddy glare.
+
+Step by step Strong went down, stopping every now and then to
+hold his torch below him, if perchance it might come into contact
+with fire damp or any other noxious gas.
+
+He had descended at least three-fourths of the way, when, as he
+swung his torch below, he uttered a cry that was almost a shriek
+and the torch fell from his hand.
+
+At the same instant Donald gave vent to a loud exclamation and
+his rifle cracked.
+
+"Hold on," he cried as he arose from the ground, "as you value
+your life, don't lose your hold."
+
+"What is it?" asked the others in one voice.
+
+"Snakes! Dozens of them," replied Donald. "Climb up, Strong, as
+fast as you can."
+
+"All right," came a feeble reply, followed almost immediately by
+a louder call of "Help!"
+
+"Hold fast," called Donald. "I'm coming."
+
+But before he could turn to step down the ladder, a chattering
+figure sprang past him and shot down the rope.
+
+It was the ape. He had heard his master's call and had gone to
+his assistance.
+
+A moment later came a joyful cry that told as plainly as words
+that Ambrosio had reached his master in time.
+
+"Are you all right now?" called Donald.
+
+"Yes. I'll be up in a minute. Good old boy," the last remark
+evidently addressed to the ape.
+
+When Strong's head appeared above the edge of the shaft a couple
+of minutes later he was as pale as a ghost and when he at length
+came into the full light of the torches, it was seen that his
+hair was as white as snow. The fright had completely changed its
+color.
+
+"Let's get out of here," he gasped as soon as he was helped to
+his feet. "I wouldn't go down into that place again for all the
+gold and silver in the world."
+
+"It was pretty rough for sure," admitted Donald. "I just caught a
+glimpse as the torch fell among them, but it was so quickly
+extinguished by the wriggling mass I only shot once for fear of
+hitting you."
+
+"It was the darkness that frightened me," Strong explained
+feebly. "If I hadn't let go my torch to hold on with both hands,
+I don't think I would have minded so much. But the darkness hid
+what was below and it just seemed as though they were right after
+me. I'd have been a goner sure if it hadn't been for good old
+Ambrosio," and he laid his hand affectionately on the ape's head.
+
+"Do you think you'll be able to climb out of the mine?" asked
+Billie as they reached the main shaft.
+
+"Yes, with Ambrosio's aid; but I'm going out first. I don't think
+I have nerve enough left right now to be the last out."
+
+The exit from the mine was much slower than the descent had been,
+but in the course of an hour they were all once more out under
+the stars.
+
+"What about the bandits?" queried Billie.
+
+"Take my advice," said Strong, "and let them alone. This is none
+of your quarrel. If the Mexicans want to fight among themselves,
+let them. It's a family quarrel and you will only make matters
+worse by interfering. The time may come when these very men may
+prove your best friends."
+
+"That's the advice I gave when we first discovered them to-day. I
+wish now we had all followed it."
+
+"If we are not going to do anything," declared Adrian, "the
+quicker we get out of here the better."
+
+"I consider that more good advice," laughed Billie, "especially
+as I am just reminded that I haven't had a bite to eat since
+noon. But I have no horse."
+
+"That's easily remedied," replied Strong.
+
+He went into the old ruin and in a few minutes returned with a
+very good animal, all saddled and bridled.
+
+"It will not be missed," he said. "Now ride for your lives. Take
+the trail to the left and don't let moonlight catch you within
+five miles of here."
+
+"Aren't you coming with us?" asked Donald.
+
+"No! I am better off here."
+
+"How will you account for your white hair?"
+
+"I'll tell them it is a charm. They'll believe it and it will
+make me that much more valuable. Now go!"
+
+Without wasting more words the boys put spurs to their horses and
+were soon out of the basin and on their way to Pachuca.
+
+"It seems like a year since we came down here," remarked Adrian
+to Billie as they galloped along.
+
+"It sure does," was the reply as Billie rubbed his stomach
+suggestively. "I'll never go out again as long as I'm in this
+revolutionary republic without a haversack full of grub."
+
+"Who said grub?" called back Donald.
+
+"What a question," laughed Adrian. "Who is it that's always
+hungry? It's all he thinks about."
+
+"Oh, it is, eh?" from Billie. "Well, I'm thinking about something
+else now. There's the moon coming up over the valley and we're
+not three miles from the old Rosario. We'd better keep our eyes
+peeled and see that our shooting irons are in shape. We may have
+to fight our way home even yet."
+
+As though to verify the prediction there appeared at the moment
+the figure of a solitary horseman silhouetted against the rising
+moon.
+
+"You're a prophet of evil all right," said Adrian. "Now what?"
+
+"Just keep on riding."
+
+"But that chap is right in our way."
+
+"Then ride him down. He'll be worse scared than we are."
+
+The advice seemed good and the boys spurred forward.
+
+"If you think he means us any harm," Donald remarked, "I might
+take a shot at him."
+
+"I don't believe he does."
+
+Again Billie proved a good prophet as the rider rode directly
+toward them, waving his hat in his hand.
+
+"It's Tony," exclaimed Pedro as the rider approached a little
+nearer.
+
+Tony was one of Gen. Sanchez' servants.
+
+"Why, so it is," laughed Donald. "I suppose he is out looking for
+us."
+
+Which was exactly the case. The news of the fight had reached
+Pachuca along with the part the boys had played in saving the
+bullion, and Pedro's father had heard it along with the others.
+
+Later, word had been brought that one of the boys was missing and
+the others had gone to look for him. When none of them returned
+after all these hours, Gen. Sanchez had organized a searching
+party, of which Tony proved to be the advance guard.
+
+A few minutes later, several horsemen dashed up and the boys were
+given a rousing reception.
+
+"The _Jefe politico_ is waiting to greet you," Tony told the
+boys.
+
+The jefe politico is the mayor.
+
+Billie smiled broadly and once more rubbed his stomach.
+
+"This begins to look encouraging," he remarked to Pedro. "I think
+I can taste the good things already."
+
+Half an hour later the boys reached the city and were given a
+cheer as they passed through the main street and up to Gen.
+Sanchez' home, which was located half a block from the plaza. And
+in another ten minutes Billie was facing the mayor over a plate
+of steaming soup, while a mozo stood at his back waiting to serve
+the leg of a twenty-five pound turkey. Raising his eyes from the
+table, he caught sight of what was coming and gave Donald, who
+sat next to him, a dig in the ribs with his elbow.
+
+"How's this for a prophet of evil?" he asked.
+
+Donald took a look at the great bird which was rapidly falling
+into pieces under Gen. Sanchez' skillful hand, and remarked with
+a wink:
+
+"Great!"
+
+
+
+
+CHAPTER VII.
+
+THE INSULT TO THE FLAG.
+
+
+A week later, or, to be more exact, on April 10, 1914, the
+Broncho Rider Boys and their friend Pedro were back in the City
+of Mexico. During the two weeks they had been at Pachuca, many
+changes had taken place and on the morning in question they had
+just finished their coffee in the breakfast room when Guadalupe,
+Pedro's sister, brought in the morning paper.
+
+"What's the news?" asked Adrian.
+
+Guadalupe glanced at the paper and hid it behind her back without
+making any reply.
+
+"Why, Sister!" exclaimed Pedro with all the dignity of his
+sixteen years. "How can you be so rude?"
+
+"She's only joking," laughed Billie, who was always found on
+Guadalupe's side when any argument took place. "Come, tell us!
+What is it?"
+
+Guadalupe shook her head.
+
+"Oh, I can't," she replied in a pained voice.
+
+"Why not?" from Billie.
+
+"It says we are going to have war with the United States and I
+don't believe it."
+
+"Of course you don't," replied Billie. "Neither does any one
+else."
+
+"Let me see," said Pedro sternly.
+
+Slowly the girl handed her brother the paper.
+
+He opened it and read.
+
+"A party of American marines was arrested in Tampico yesterday
+for landing on Mexican soil with arms in their hands. They were
+marched through the streets under a heavy guard and lodged in
+jail. After a parley with the American Admiral, Mayo, the
+commandant of the city finally released them upon the assurance
+of the Admiral that it should not occur again."
+
+"Well, if it was only a mistake, that doesn't mean war," laughed
+Billie, but Donald's face took on a more serious look.
+
+"That isn't all," said Pedro.
+
+"Well," from Billie, "let's have the rest of it."
+
+"The American Admiral has now declared that the men did not land
+on Mexican soil with arms in their hands, but that they were in
+their boat at the pier when arrested. He claims that they were
+taken from under the American flag----"
+
+"What?" almost shouted Billie, springing to his feet. "Taken
+from under the American flag? Well, I'll bet that will mean
+war--unless," he added after a brief pause, "Gen. Huerta
+apologizes."
+
+"Why should he apologize?" asked Pedro.
+
+"For insulting the American flag."
+
+"That's what the American Admiral says," interrupted Guadalupe,
+"and he threatens to fire on the city."
+
+"And I'll bet he'll do it," said Adrian.
+
+"If he does we'll sink his ships," said Pedro.
+
+"What with?" asked Billie sarcastically. "Why, Admiral Mayo could
+blow Tampico out of the water."
+
+"If he does, the Mexicans will march on Washington," from Pedro.
+
+"What?" from Donald. "March on Washington? Why, Huerta can't
+hardly keep Carranza out of the City of Mexico."
+
+"But if your admiral fires on Tampico, Carranza will help Gen.
+Huerta," declared Pedro.
+
+"Do you really think so?" asked Adrian.
+
+"I know it. We may have our little family troubles down here in
+Mexico, but if the United States should interfere, we'd all turn
+in and fight her."
+
+Billie was about to reply when Gen. Sanchez entered the room.
+
+"I see you have been reading the news," he said calmly.
+
+"And discussing it too," said Donald.
+
+"Which we had better not at present," replied the General. "You
+boys are our guests and as long as you are, you are our friends;
+but I am afraid there is serious trouble coming and I think it
+will be much better if you make arrangements at once to return to
+the United States. As you know, I am not a favorite with the
+present administration and I might not be able to protect you."
+
+"We can ask the protection of the American Ambassador," said
+Donald.
+
+Gen. Sanchez smiled kindly.
+
+"The American Ambassador may be asked to leave."
+
+The boys looked serious.
+
+"Do you really think it is as bad as that?" asked Adrian.
+
+"I fear so. Later dispatches from Tampico state that the American
+Admiral has demanded a salute of twenty-one guns to the American
+flag. I know Gen. Huerta well enough to know that he will never
+order the salute."
+
+"Then what will happen?" asked Donald.
+
+"No one can say. I understand that the American government has
+placed the matter in the hands of Admiral Fletcher, the ranking
+officer, who is in charge of the Atlantic fleet off Vera Cruz."
+
+"Do you think we should go at once?" queried Billie.
+
+"Yes, I think it would be better. I will make such arrangements
+as I can for your transportation to Vera Cruz. In the meantime
+you had better go and register yourselves at the United States
+Embassy. I am never sure of Gen. Huerta."
+
+Without further discussion the boys prepared to take Gen.
+Sanchez' advice, and, donning their hats, started for the
+embassy, leaving Pedro much chagrined and Guadalupe in tears.
+
+"I can't see why there has to be war!" she declared. "Why can't
+men behave themselves?"
+
+"What do girls know about war?" asked Pedro.
+
+"They know it's terrible and takes their fathers and brothers,
+that's what they know, and they wish they didn't have to know
+that."
+
+Pedro made no reply, but went to his room, where he selected from
+among his most cherished belongings a gift for each of his
+guests--three beautiful opals--and laid them upon their
+respective suit cases.
+
+When the Broncho Rider Boys arrived at the embassy they found a
+large crowd of Americans already assembled. Word had been
+circulated that it would be wise for all of them to leave Mexico
+and those who could were going, while many men whose business
+detained them in Mexico were sending their families. All had come
+to the embassy for information and to register.
+
+As a result it was late in the afternoon before the boys returned
+to Gen. Sanchez' residence. But late as they were, the general
+had not yet come in. They went to their room and when they saw
+the gifts which Pedro had laid on each valise, they could not
+keep back the tears.
+
+"Well, there's one thing," declared Billie as he drew the back of
+his hand across his eyes, "we don't have to fight Pedro, no
+matter what comes. I'm going to hunt him up and tell him so."
+
+And he did.
+
+It was some hours later when Gen. Sanchez returned and announced
+that it would be impossible for the boys to get transportation to
+Vera Cruz for two or three days, as the track had been torn up in
+the neighborhood of Cordoba, but that he had been promised that
+they would be given safe conduct as soon as the track was
+repaired.
+
+It was three days later, therefore, before the boys were able to
+leave, during which time they remained in the house at Gen.
+Sanchez' request to avoid any unpleasantness, which might make
+trouble for him.
+
+On the morning of the 13th the boys bade good-bye to their host
+and his family and were driven in an automobile to the station.
+Already there were more than enough persons to fill four trains,
+and the guards were permitting only those to board the cars who
+had passes signed by the Mexican provost marshal.
+
+Thanks to Gen. Sanchez, our boys had been provided with such
+passes, but they were not allowed to take their rifles or
+revolvers aboard the train. They had no more than found seats and
+made themselves comfortable than the conductor shouted "Vamanos,"
+and the train pulled slowly out of the shed.
+
+"Well," remarked Donald as they rolled slowly along, "this is a
+pretty tough ending to a friendly visit. I think I've seen about
+all I want of Mexico for some time to come."
+
+"What do you suppose will happen?" asked Billie. "Do you think
+we'll really go to war with Mexico unless Gen. Huerta orders the
+salute?"
+
+"I don't know," was Donald's cautious reply. "I hope not."
+
+"And I hope we do!" exclaimed a somewhat florid gentleman who sat
+in the seat ahead and who had overheard the conversation. "I'd
+just like an opportunity to come down here with an army and wipe
+the whole nation off the earth."
+
+Donald made no reply, but Adrian asked sympathetically: "Have
+they treated you badly, sir?"
+
+"Have they treated me badly? Well, I should say so. They wouldn't
+let me out of my hotel for two days and now they have refused to
+carry my trunk and made me leave it with the express company. I
+guess they don't know who I am."
+
+"I'm sure they do not, sir."
+
+"Well, I'll show them who I am as soon as I get to Vera Cruz and
+can see Admiral Fletcher. He'll know how to protect Americans!"
+
+"I'm sure he will, sir."
+
+"And when the first marine lands, I want to be right there with a
+rifle to help drive the Mexicans off the earth."
+
+"It would be wise not to say too much," whispered Adrian. "I see
+that officer in the end of the car has his eye on you. He may
+speak English."
+
+"I don't care who hears me," said the florid man angrily. "I mean
+it."
+
+At the same moment a guard who had approached from the other end
+of the car laid his hand upon the angry man's shoulder.
+
+"If the Senor is not satisfied," he said, "we shall be pleased to
+send him back to the City of Mexico."
+
+"Oh, no-no-no," was the stammering reply. "I am very well
+satisfied. All I want is to get out of the country."
+
+"Let us hope there will be no trouble about that," was the polite
+response, and the florid man lapsed into silence.
+
+Ordinarily it is a pleasant day's journey from the City of Mexico
+to the seaport city of Vera Cruz; or if one prefers he may make a
+night ride of it in times of peace. The train which left the City
+of Mexico that April morning made no such time. After a tiresome
+all-day ride with numerous aggravating stops, when darkness fell
+they were still on the plateau of Mexico, some miles west of
+Orizaba, running slowly for fear some stray bunch of Carranzistas
+or Zapatistas might have torn up a length or two of track.
+
+It was possibly an hour later that the engine gave a furious
+jerk, followed by a bump and another jerk, and then the train
+came to a dead stop.
+
+In a minute everybody was on his feet asking everybody else what
+had happened. As no one knew, there was a general movement for
+the doors, as it was too dark to see much from the windows.
+
+"Sit down, everybody," ordered the guard. "There is no danger,
+but we have stopped on a high trestle."
+
+The passengers obeyed, realizing the danger of leaving the
+coaches. There was a general round of conversation, and then as
+the train did not start, people settled back in their seats and
+tried to sleep.
+
+Some minutes later Billie gave Adrian a nudge with his elbow.
+
+"Are you asleep?" he asked.
+
+"No. Why?"
+
+"I've just been looking out of the window. We're not on a
+trestle."
+
+"No? Well, what of it?"
+
+"Only that the guard was lying. What did he do it for?"
+
+"I don't know. Because he was a Mexican, I guess. Go on to
+sleep."
+
+"That isn't the answer, although it's pretty good. They have some
+scheme. I wouldn't be surprised if they were going to keep us
+prisoners somewhere around here."
+
+"Nonsense. Go on to sleep."
+
+But Billie was not satisfied. He leaned over and tried to talk to
+Donald, but he was fast asleep.
+
+"I think I'll go on a little scouting expedition," he muttered.
+"I need some exercise."
+
+He arose, stretched himself and walked slowly toward the door,
+which stood wide open.
+
+"I wonder where the guard is?" he thought. "It's mighty funny
+he'd go and leave the coach like this."
+
+He stepped on to the coach ahead. The same condition existed.
+
+Billie's curiosity got the best of him and he jumped out onto the
+ground. It was pitch dark, but he had not advanced more than
+twenty steps before he discovered groups of men seated upon the
+grass. A second glance convinced him they were armed.
+
+He drew back and stood beside the coach, where he thought fast.
+
+"There's one of two things," he soliloquized. "We are either
+prisoners or else we are being guarded against an expected
+attack. Whichever it is, this is no time for the Broncho Rider
+Boys to be asleep. I'll go and tell the others."
+
+He started to climb onto the car, but a guard appeared on the
+platform and ordered him away at the point of his bayonet.
+
+"I'm a passenger," explained Billie.
+
+"Go away!" was the reply, emphasized by a quick advance of the
+bayonet.
+
+Seeing that it was no time to argue, Billie slid back into the
+darkness.
+
+
+
+
+CHAPTER VIII.
+
+TREACHERY FOILED.
+
+
+Broncho Billie had been in too many unpleasant places to be at
+all worried over his predicament, but he was much concerned about
+the condition of the train and its passengers, practically all of
+whom were Americans and a large majority of whom were women and
+children.
+
+"It would be fierce," he mused, "to have them held here, or in a
+detention camp as prisoners; and it would be worse if we should
+be attacked by an overwhelming force of revolutionists. I've just
+got to know the truth."
+
+He glanced up at the coach with its dimly lighted windows.
+
+"I wish I could talk to old Don. He most always knows what to do.
+But how can I get at him?"
+
+He sneaked out to where he could see the coach platform. The
+guard was still there, as well as the guard on the other car.
+
+"Worse and more of it," he exclaimed.
+
+Then he examined the car, trying to determine at which window he
+had been seated. Several were open, and he determined to try and
+speak to some one.
+
+"Our seats are not far from here," he thought as he stopped under
+the second one. "I'll try this."
+
+He picked up a stone about as big as an egg and tossed it into
+the window. A howl from a child followed the act and Billie
+ducked under the car. He could hear the mother pacifying it, but
+evidently she, too, had been asleep and had not discovered the
+stone.
+
+"I think I know just which child it is," said Billie with a grin,
+"and this next open window must be ours."
+
+He picked up another stone and tossed it in to his second choice,
+this time with better results.
+
+Donald had just aroused from a nap, and, missing Billie, was
+looking for him. Not seeing him in the car, he was about to look
+out of the window when the stone hit him on the chin.
+
+"Ouch!" he exclaimed as he started back.
+
+Billie heard the exclamation and gave the familiar whistle.
+
+Donald was on the alert in an instant. Looking up and down the
+car to be sure he was not being watched, he stuck his head out of
+the window.
+
+"What is it?" he asked.
+
+"Trouble," was Billie's laconic reply. "Come out."
+
+"How can I? The guard is at the door."
+
+"Jump out of the window."
+
+"They might see me."
+
+Billie thought fast.
+
+"Let Ad stand between you and the door."
+
+"Great," from Donald.
+
+He aroused Adrian and told him the situation.
+
+"You stay in the train," he said, "and we'll keep you posted as
+to what is going on outside. If there is any real danger we will
+give the alarm."
+
+He picked up his overcoat and pretended to be fixing a pillow.
+Adrian did the same. Then, while the guard's back was turned, he
+dropped out of the window.
+
+Billie was beside him when he rose to his feet.
+
+"This way, Don," he whispered. "Let's get out into the dark and
+hold a council of war."
+
+They glided out into darkness, but where they could keep their
+eyes on the engine.
+
+"Now tell me about it," said Don.
+
+Billie told him what he had discovered.
+
+"It does look strange," Donald admitted. "Have you any plan?"
+
+"I haven't an idea above an oyster," was the characteristic
+reply.
+
+Donald scratched his ear reflectively.
+
+"How would it do," he finally asked, "to sneak over by the
+soldiers and see if we can't pick up some scrap of conversation
+that may give us a clue as to what is going on?"
+
+"Fine. We must keep together, though. We might never find each
+other in the dark if we should become separated."
+
+Silently they crawled toward the spot where Billie had seen the
+soldiers. When they did not hear any sign of them after several
+minutes' crawling they stopped to listen.
+
+"There surely was a squad here a few minutes ago," declared
+Billie. "They must have moved."
+
+They remained silently thoughtful for several minutes, but all
+was as silent as a graveyard.
+
+"That's mighty funny," said Billie. "I know I was not mistaken.
+Let's go back by the train."
+
+They turned for that purpose and could see a group of figures at
+the platform of each coach.
+
+"That's the answer," exclaimed Billie. "They have surrounded the
+train. Now let's see what will happen."
+
+They had not long to wait as an officer shortly boarded each car
+and a minute later there was a commotion among the passengers.
+
+Drawing a little nearer, the boys could hear the officer in the
+car nearest them explaining that the passengers would be obliged
+to alight and change trains.
+
+"The track has been torn up ahead of us," he said, "and we shall
+have to walk nearly a mile to where the train is that came up
+from Vera Cruz."
+
+This had been quite the customary thing in Mexico for some months
+and the passengers prepared to obey.
+
+"I don't believe it is true," said Billie to Donald.
+
+"We can soon find out," declared Donald. "Let's walk down the
+track a piece. We can easily keep ahead of the crowd."
+
+Avoiding the glare of the locomotive's headlight, the boys
+hurried down the track and when far enough away from the train to
+feel secure, they took the middle of the track.
+
+"This is far enough ahead," said Donald, "to keep out of sight
+and the track is all right so far. I don't believe it is torn up
+at all."
+
+"Then what is up?"
+
+"That is what I've been trying to decide for nearly an hour,"
+replied Billie. "It looks as though they intended to make all the
+Americans prisoners."
+
+"But what for?"
+
+"Why, for hostages, to be sure. Don't you remember how Caesar took
+a lot of the Helvetians for hostages?"
+
+"By George!" from Donald. "I believe you are right. Do you
+suppose it is Huerta's orders?"
+
+"I expect so. He hates Americans."
+
+While the boys had been talking the passengers had been taken
+from the train and were now coming toward them.
+
+"Let's keep just far enough ahead to see what will happen," said
+Donald. "We must get in touch with Adrian somehow."
+
+They started ahead, but it speedily developed that the others
+were not following. Instead they had been halted a short distance
+from the locomotive, back from the track, and surrounded by
+soldiers.
+
+"There seems to be a hitch somewhere," Don finally remarked.
+"They don't seem to know just what they do want to do."
+
+"Come on back and find out," said Billie. "It's up to us to do
+something."
+
+Cautiously they crept back to where they could hear the
+conversation among the passengers and the questions they
+asked the guard. Some were laughing and more were expressing
+indignation. A few of the women were crying, but above all they
+could hear the voice of the florid-faced man telling what he
+would do as soon as he could get into touch with Admiral
+Fletcher.
+
+"Which won't be very soon, unless I'm mistaken," laughed Donald.
+
+Presently some one began to whistle a popular air, but in such a
+way that the boys recognized the well-known whistle of Adrian.
+
+"Do you hear that?" asked Billie. "Ad wants to know what we are
+doing."
+
+"He'll have to want for the present," said Don, "but there go a
+couple of officers back to the train. Let's follow them."
+
+The boys darted into the shadow of the coaches and crept back
+only a few steps behind what proved to be the captain in charge
+of the company and his second lieutenant.
+
+"If I only had my automatic, I'd soon settle this whole matter,"
+declared Billie.
+
+"You wouldn't hurt anybody, would you?"
+
+"I'd capture the officer and make him take us to Vera Cruz."
+
+"Of course," from Donald. "Why didn't I think of it before? Let's
+do it."
+
+"But we have no weapons."
+
+"Then we must get some."
+
+"How?"
+
+"Keep your eyes open. There must be some way."
+
+The officers kept on their way until they reached the first
+Pullman, where they stopped for a minute.
+
+"Are the orders in here?" asked the captain.
+
+"No; the conductor has them. He wouldn't stop the train without I
+gave them to him."
+
+"Carramba! Why didn't you tell me so before? Go and take them
+from him and bring them here at once."
+
+"Bueno, Capitan! Will you wait here?"
+
+"Yes, I'll go inside. Hurry."
+
+The lieutenant turned and hurried back. The boys only saved
+themselves from being detected by throwing themselves flat on the
+ground.
+
+For a moment the captain remained looking after his companion and
+then turned and entered the car.
+
+"We must have that order," said Donald.
+
+"We must!" echoed Billie.
+
+"Then we'll get it," they exclaimed as one.
+
+So alike were the thoughts that passed through their minds that
+they did not even feel obliged to speak the plan aloud.
+
+"Which one of us will stop him?" asked Donald.
+
+"You'd better. I'm heavier and I can handle him easier."
+
+They walked back some ten feet, where Donald stopped, while
+Billie went about ten feet farther and drew off into the
+darkness.
+
+A couple of minutes later they heard the lieutenant coming. He
+passed Billie without seeing him.
+
+Then Donald advanced and met him as by chance.
+
+"Who comes there?" asked the lieutenant in a sharp tone, drawing
+his revolver.
+
+"Why, hello, lieutenant," said Donald as he came close to him.
+"What's happened?"
+
+The lieutenant eyed him suspiciously.
+
+"Where did you come from?" he asked.
+
+"From the rear sleeper. I woke up and found myself all alone."
+
+"Humph!" grunted the lieutenant. "You must have been overlooked.
+Come with me."
+
+He started to replace his revolver in its holster when a slight
+noise behind him caused him to turn his head. As he did so,
+Billie's fist caught him under the chin and he fell in a heap
+without making a sound.
+
+"Good work!" muttered Donald as he picked up the revolver which
+the lieutenant had let fall. "Now to business."
+
+
+
+
+CHAPTER IX.
+
+DONALD'S STRATEGY.
+
+
+Lifting the unconscious man in their arms, they bore him into the
+darkness away from the train, where he was soon deprived of his
+coat, hat, and weapons. Then he was gagged and securely tied with
+his own sabretasche.
+
+Donald, being nearest the lieutenant's size, donned his uniform,
+buckled on his sword, and with the order in his hand hastily
+entered the car, closely followed by Billie, with the ready
+revolver in his hand.
+
+The captain had thrown aside his hat and was smoking a cigarette
+in one of the easy seats as the boys entered. He gave them only a
+hasty glance as he blew a cloud of smoke into the air, and the
+next minute he was covered by Billie's weapon.
+
+"Up with your hands!" was the stern order.
+
+The captain hesitated, but a sharp prick from Donald's sword sent
+the hands into the air.
+
+In another minute the captain was disarmed.
+
+"Now," said Donald sternly, "we'll see what all this trouble is
+about."
+
+He opened the telegram he held in his hand and read:
+
+  "American Admiral has given an ultimatum. Hold train and
+  passengers until further orders.
+                                                    Maas."
+
+"Who is Maas?" asked Donald sternly.
+
+The captain shrugged his shoulders, but said nothing.
+
+"You'll answer in just one minute, or you'll never have a chance
+to answer another question," said Donald, as he stood with drawn
+sword, while Billie covered the captain with his revolver.
+
+"Would you murder an unarmed man?" asked the captain.
+
+"I wouldn't consider it murder. Answer."
+
+The look in Donald's eyes was not to be mistaken.
+
+"Gen. Maas is in command of Vera Cruz," the captain said.
+
+"Good. I think I see it all. If it is decided not to accede to
+the ultimatum, it is proposed to hold the train load as
+hostages."
+
+The captain smiled.
+
+"Now listen!" and Donald spoke very slowly so that every word
+might find lodgment. "You have one chance for your life. Can you
+guess what it is?"
+
+The captain shook his head.
+
+"To do just exactly as I bid. Just one little attempt to do
+differently, and you are a dead man."
+
+The captain scowled, but made no reply.
+
+"Put on your hat and come with me. Order the passengers back on
+to the train and give your engineer instructions to cover just as
+much of the distance between here and Vera Cruz by daylight as he
+knows how!"
+
+The captain shrugged his shoulders as he arose from his seat.
+
+"I see you think it will be easy to escape. Just put any such
+idea out of your mind. There is no possible chance."
+
+Donald turned to Billie.
+
+"This is what must be done. We shall walk directly back to where
+the passengers are. The captain will give his order without any
+hesitation. Otherwise I shall shoot him through my pocket. You
+will keep right behind us. If I fire, you fire also. One of us
+will be sure to kill him."
+
+Donald led the way from the car and Billie brought up the rear.
+
+Through the dark they marched, each with a hand on the captain,
+so they might feel his slightest tremor.
+
+Arriving at the engine the captain summoned the sergeant.
+
+"Order the passengers to board the train," was the brief command.
+
+The sergeant hastened to obey.
+
+"Bueno!" said Donald, as the passengers rushed back.
+
+Then under his breath to Billie: "Call Adrian."
+
+Billie did so.
+
+"Where are you?" Adrian called back.
+
+"Down near the engine."
+
+A moment later Adrian appeared coming through the crowd of
+hurrying passengers.
+
+"Where's Don?" he asked as soon as he caught sight of Billie.
+
+"Not far. Stay here. We may need you."
+
+Adrian's face showed some surprise, but he said nothing.
+
+"Now, captain," said Don quietly, "your orders to the engineer,"
+and under cover of the darkness he pushed the point of his
+revolver into the captain's side, while Billie touched him
+significantly in the back.
+
+The captain gave the order as he had been instructed.
+
+"Now for the conductor," ordered Donald.
+
+The order was given, but the conductor refused to obey.
+
+"I must have a written order," he said.
+
+"Why?" asked Donald, in his role of lieutenant.
+
+"To countermand the order of Gen. Maas."
+
+"Captain," was Donald's quiet hint, "don't you think it would be
+well to place the conductor under arrest?" and again he poked his
+revolver into the captain's side.
+
+The order for the conductor's arrest was quickly given.
+
+"Now, then, vamose," called Adrian. Then to the engineer, "I will
+act as conductor."
+
+The guards and extra soldiers who had been detailed for this
+special service, sprang aboard; the engineer pulled open the
+throttle and the train began to move.
+
+"Aren't you going, too?" asked Adrian.
+
+"Yes," whispered Billie to Donald, "hurry aboard with your
+prisoner."
+
+The captain was evidently of the same mind, for he started to
+board the already moving train.
+
+"No you don't," exclaimed Donald, pulling him back. "You're going
+to stay here with us!"
+
+"Do you mean it, Don?" asked Billie in surprise.
+
+"Sure! What do you think he'd do to us as soon as it was light?"
+
+By this time the train was under headway; a second later the last
+coach passed them and in another minute the tail lights were
+disappearing in the darkness.
+
+"It looks to me," remarked Adrian with a long breath, "as though
+we were in the consomme."
+
+"Perhaps," was Donald's laconic reply, "but those women and
+children will be safe in Vera Cruz under the guns of Admiral
+Fletcher's fleet by daylight, or I'm greatly mistaken."
+
+"And what are we going to do with our friend the captain?"
+queried Billie.
+
+"He'll have to accept our hospitality under the stars until
+morning and then we'll see."
+
+In telling about his experiences later Billie said it was the
+longest and the shortest night he ever knew. It seemed a long
+time for daylight, but it seemed a short time for the train which
+was bearing his countrymen to safety.
+
+When day finally began to break, the first thing that became
+visible was the snow-tipped peak of Mt. Orizaba, against which
+the sun threw his brilliant rays long before he could be seen
+above the horizon. It was a beautiful sight and the boys voiced
+their admiration with many exclamations of delight. Then they
+turned their attention to the more serious thoughts for the day.
+
+The first thing they did was to release the lieutenant from his
+unpleasant predicament and restore to him his uniform.
+
+"We should like to return you your arms also," said Donald, "but
+your government took ours from us and I think we shall have to
+keep yours in their place."
+
+Neither of the officers made any reply, but their dark looks
+boded no good for the boys.
+
+"You might just as well look pleasant," laughed Billie. "All is
+fair in love and war."
+
+"We'll make you sing a different song when we get you in Vera
+Cruz," said the captain.
+
+"And when do you think that will be, Captain?" queried Adrian.
+
+"As soon as the next train comes along."
+
+"Oh, that's it, is it?" said Donald. "That being the case, I
+guess we will not wait for another train. By the way, how far is
+it to Vera Cruz?"
+
+"About a hundred kilometers."
+
+"That's about eighty-four miles, isn't it, Ad?"
+
+"Just about."
+
+"And it's down hill pretty much all the way, isn't it?"
+
+"I should say so by looking down the valley."
+
+"A right nice little walk, Captain. Let's be going. We ought to
+make it easily in four days."
+
+At this cordial invitation the captain lost his temper.
+
+"Carramba!" he exclaimed. "Am I a boy to be made sport of? I will
+not go. If you wish me to go you will have to carry me," and he
+deliberately laid himself down on the ground.
+
+In spite of themselves the boys were obliged to laugh.
+
+"We carried the lieutenant last night, but we don't desire your
+company badly enough to carry you," laughed Billie. "If you don't
+want to go, I for one vote to leave you. We have to forage for
+something to eat and the fewer there are, the easier it will be.
+And speaking of eats, it seems to me I smell something cooking
+right now."
+
+At Billie's words the others sniffed up their noses.
+
+"It's a fact as sure as you're born," declared Donald.
+
+"And I'm going to find out where the odor comes from," said
+Billie. "There must be a house around here somewhere."
+
+Again he sniffed the air and smiled jubilantly.
+
+"The wind's in the east," he laughed. "It must be somewhere in
+this direction. Come on, Captain."
+
+The captain refused to move, but Billie led the way, followed by
+the two boys. They had not gone many rods when through an opening
+in the trees they beheld a good-sized adobe house. Pushing
+hastily toward it, they soon reached a cleared space, and there,
+gathered about a bunch of some forty or fifty horses, were a
+dozen men, while through the open door of the house many more
+were to be seen seated at a table--eating.
+
+"Come on!" exclaimed Billie. "I'm going to have something to eat;
+I don't care who they are."
+
+"We might as well make the best of it," declared Donald. "We are
+discovered any way and the best thing we can do is to put on a
+bold front."
+
+Without further words the three boys walked boldly toward the
+house.
+
+
+
+
+CHAPTER X.
+
+A TIMELY RESCUE.
+
+
+The minute the boys' presence became known, there was a commotion
+in the house and in the clearing surrounding it. Those in the
+yard sprang toward their guns and those in the house jumped from
+the table.
+
+"Don't move," called out Billie. "We are friends."
+
+But the men were not sure and at once surrounded the boys.
+
+They appeared to be soldiers, but their uniforms were of a great
+variety and many hues. Only the officer in command had anything
+the appearance of a real soldier.
+
+"Who are you?" he demanded as he came forward.
+
+"Friends! Americanos!" replied Donald.
+
+"Yes; and hungry ones," added Billie with a gesture that brought
+a smile to the officer's face.
+
+"Where did you come from?" was the next inquiry.
+
+Donald explained that they had been left by a train that had
+stopped nearby. He did not think it necessary to enlighten the
+officer as to the circumstances.
+
+"If you don't believe us," broke in Billie, "you can ask the
+officers we left back there by the track."
+
+Donald made a gesture of impatience, which Billie failed to
+understand, but which the officer was quick to interpret.
+
+"Officers? Of which army?" he quickly asked.
+
+"Gen. Huerta's."
+
+"Carramba!" exclaimed the officer in command. "Go quick,
+corporal, and bring them to me."
+
+Then to Billie: "If you are telling me the truth you have done me
+a great favor."
+
+The boys looked surprised.
+
+"How is that?" asked Donald.
+
+"Do you not know that we are of the army of Gen. Carranza?" was
+the interrogative reply.
+
+"Why, no!" exclaimed the boys in unison.
+
+"It is true," said the officer. "I am Captain Lopez. Now tell me,
+who are you?"
+
+Briefly Donald told of their acquaintance with Gen. Sanchez and
+of their adventures of the night before, at which the captain
+laughed heartily.
+
+"You are smart boys," he declared.
+
+"And hungry ones," again added Billie.
+
+"You must be. Here, Juan," calling a soldier to him. "Take these
+_muchachos_ to the house and feed them. I'll have a look at these
+rebels."
+
+"Rebels," said Adrian to Donald under his breath as they walked
+toward the house. "Now what do you think of that?"
+
+"That's his viewpoint," replied Don. "He thinks of the men who
+overthrew President Madero as rebels."
+
+By this time they were near enough the house for Billie to smell
+the aroma of the coffee and he quickened his pace.
+
+"I'll talk politics after I've sampled the breakfast," he
+declared. "If the breakfast is good, I'll join the band."
+
+It was nearly half an hour later that the boys stood before the
+captain. With a good breakfast under their belts they felt fit
+for anything that might offer.
+
+"I'm afraid you boys are in a bad fix," said Captain Lopez. "I
+suppose you want to get to Vera Cruz and on to some ship that
+will take you to the United States; but I don't know how you are
+going to make it."
+
+"Why, can't we get another train somewhere down the line?" asked
+Adrian.
+
+"There may not be any more trains for some time."
+
+"How's that?"
+
+"We are here to stop them."
+
+"Does that mean you are going out to tear up the track?"
+
+"Not right here, but a little nearer Vera Cruz. There is a much
+larger body of troops about five miles below."
+
+Billie uttered a prolonged whistle.
+
+"That does look bad, sure enough," he declared. Then, after a
+pause: "What's the matter with walking?"
+
+"It's a long ways and the mountains are full of our men."
+
+"Can't you give us a safe passage? You say we have done you a
+favor by turning these two officers over to you," suggested
+Donald, indicating with a nod of his head the captain and
+lieutenant of the train guard who were now held prisoners.
+
+"I'll do the best I can," was the reply, "but you will have to
+remain with me to-day. We are on scout duty and shall not return
+to the main body until to-night."
+
+"That'll suit me all right," laughed Billie, "and if you don't
+mind I think I'll go into the house somewhere and take a nap."
+
+"Bueno," laughed the captain. "You might as well all take a nap.
+If we have occasion to leave the neighborhood we will call you."
+
+Ten minutes later the three were fast asleep on a pile of Mexican
+blankets in the best room in the house.
+
+Three hours later they were awakened by a fusillade of shots.
+
+They sprang to their feet and looked around. For just a moment
+they could not remember where they were. Then they recalled their
+situation and became on the alert.
+
+"Trouble outside," was Don's laconic statement.
+
+He and Billie drew the revolvers they had captured the night
+before.
+
+"Put 'em up," advised Adrian. "We're not here to fight."
+
+"We might have to," from Billie.
+
+"Not at all. If one side wins, we are safe. If the other side
+wins, we are prisoners and the attackers will be our rescuers."
+
+"Great head, Ad," was Billie's comment. "But I'd like to know
+what is going on," as another fusillade was heard.
+
+"Better stay where we are till the shooting stops," said Don.
+
+It was good advice and the boys waited as quietly as they could.
+
+A few minutes later there was a volley and a shout, followed by
+the sound of rushing feet. Then there was quiet as the shots were
+heard receding.
+
+When none of their friends returned after a few minutes, the boys
+ventured to the door. There was no one in sight.
+
+"I wonder where they have all gone?" ventured Billie.
+
+"I expect that our friends have run away and some of Huerta's
+soldiers are chasing them."
+
+"If they do, they will run into an ambush," said Adrian.
+
+Which is exactly what happened.
+
+"That won't do us any good," said Don. "Now that we are alone, I
+vote that we get back to the railroad track. We won't get lost if
+we follow that and a train may come along."
+
+The advice seemed good and they started to go.
+
+"Hold on," exclaimed Billie. "Let's see if we can't find some
+grub to take with us."
+
+"Great head!" laughed Adrian.
+
+"Great stomach, you mean," from Donald. "It never lets him
+forget."
+
+The boys plundered through the house. The owners must have been
+scared away, for nothing had been disturbed. In the kitchen they
+found a big plate of _tortillas_, half a baked kid, and some
+wheat bread. This they appropriated.
+
+"We might as well have a blanket apiece," said Donald. "It is
+only another case of a fair exchange. The Mexicans have our suit
+cases."
+
+Each took a blanket and Adrian was so fortunate after searching
+all over the house as to find a shotgun and a belt full of loaded
+shells that went with it.
+
+"If those shells were loaded with buckshot you'd be all right,"
+said Billie. "They're the----"
+
+His speech was interrupted by a cry that fairly made their blood
+run cold.
+
+"What's that?" and the three stopped as though they had been
+paralysed.
+
+Again came the cry, and with a single bound the boys were out in
+the open, each with his weapon ready for instant use.
+
+They could see no one, but there was the sound of something
+crashing through the brush which hid the railroad from the house.
+
+"Sounded like a wild cat," declared Donald.
+
+"Or a coyote," said Billie.
+
+"I'm sure it was a human voice," remarked Adrian. "Do you
+remember the Zunis?" referring to another adventure told in the
+story of the "Broncho Rider Boys Along the Border."
+
+Even as he spoke there emerged from the brush the figure of a
+woman carrying in her arms a small child. Winged by fear, she was
+bounding along like an antelope.
+
+A moment later, and not two rods behind her, came forth a figure
+which the boys instantly recognized as a mountain lion.
+
+How the woman had succeeded in escaping it even for a moment was
+a mystery.
+
+In a second the three weapons spoke. The report was followed by a
+scream from the beast and a cry from the woman, both of whom fell
+lifeless to the earth--the beast dead and the woman in a swoon.
+
+"Take care of the woman, you two," said Adrian. "I'll examine the
+beast."
+
+No one stopped to question the order.
+
+Billie picked up the child which the woman had let fall, while
+Donald stooped down and felt the woman's pulse. Then he darted
+into the house and was back in a minute with a bucket half filled
+with water. With it he bathed the woman's temples and poured a
+little down her throat.
+
+In a couple of minutes she revived and looked around.
+
+"Mi nina!" she gasped.
+
+"She's asking for her child," said Donald.
+
+Billie carried the little one over and stood it beside her.
+
+With a glad cry she snatched it in her arms and burst into tears.
+
+"She's all right," laughed Donald. "Now let's have a look at that
+animal."
+
+They walked over to where Adrian was watching the inanimate
+carcass.
+
+"Where did we hit him?" asked Billie.
+
+"I can see three places and one is big enough to throw a baseball
+through it."
+
+"That's from the shotgun," said Donald. "It's what did the
+business. Must have been buckshot and we were so close it didn't
+have a chance to scatter."
+
+"I'd sure like that hide," said Adrian.
+
+"We'll be in luck if we save our own," remarked Billie. "Unless
+we can do something for the woman, we'd better be jogging along."
+
+By this time the woman had risen to her feet and the boys could
+see that she was not a peon as they had supposed, but of the
+better class.
+
+"Where could she have come from?" queried Donald under his
+breath.
+
+"Suppose you ask her," laughed Adrian.
+
+Donald did so. At first she was too dazed to answer, but after
+Donald spoke a few words quietly and in his very best Spanish,
+she was able to answer his questions.
+
+"Is this your house?" he asked.
+
+"No, Senor; my house is down the mountain."
+
+"What are you doing here alone?"
+
+She gave him a startled glance and then hugged the child closer
+to her breast.
+
+"You need not fear us," were the reassuring words.
+
+"The soldiers came," she said slowly. "They had already killed
+the others. They would have killed me."
+
+"The soldiers?"
+
+"Yes. They were looking for my husband. They said he was hidden
+in the house; but he was not. He is with Gen. Carranza."
+
+"When was this?"
+
+"Yesterday. I have been in the mountains all night. There was a
+fight a few minutes ago and I saw them pass. Then I came here,
+when the awful beast sprang out," and again she drew the child to
+her.
+
+"Are you hungry?"
+
+"Si, senor!"
+
+It was the child that answered.
+
+In an instant Billie's hand was in his pack and he held out the
+_tortillas_, which both mother and child took and ate ravenously.
+
+After their hunger had been appeased, they questioned the woman
+further, telling her they were going to Vera Cruz.
+
+"If you will come with me down the mountain, you can hide in my
+house," she said.
+
+"We don't want to hide," laughed Billie. "We want to get to Vera
+Cruz. However, we'll see you home, if you don't mind."
+
+Without more words the woman led the way, Billie insisting upon
+carrying the little girl.
+
+After a walk of more than two hours, the woman stopped in a
+little clearing from which a view of the mountainside for miles
+could be gained.
+
+"There is my house," she said, pointing to the roof of a really
+noble mansion constructed of stone. "But what is that flag I see
+on top of it?"
+
+The boys took one good look at it and then they let out a wild
+yell.
+
+"Hurrah!" they cried. "It's the Stars and Stripes."
+
+"I don't know what it means away out here," said Donald, "but
+wherever it is it means something. Come on!" and he dashed down
+the mountainside, followed by the others.
+
+
+
+
+CHAPTER XI.
+
+FRIENDS IN DISTRESS.
+
+
+Half an hour later the boys stopped beside a ruined wall in which
+was a still more ruined gate.
+
+It was the home of Gen. Luiz Blanco, whose wife and child it was
+that the boys had saved from the mountain lion.
+
+Above the house, on a lofty turret, waved the American flag--a
+fact which caused the boys to enter the gate and approach the
+house without hesitation.
+
+But when they reached the great front door leading into the
+patio, they found it shut and barred.
+
+Here they knocked loudly.
+
+For some minutes there was no reply, despite repeated knocks, but
+finally a voice called out in English:
+
+"Who's there?"
+
+"American boys in trouble."
+
+"What?" was the surprised reply. "Say it again, till I see if it
+is true."
+
+"It's true all right, all right," said Billie. "If you don't
+believe it we'll sing the 'Star Spangled Banner,' or 'Hail
+Columbia'."
+
+They could hear some one removing the bars and a moment later the
+gate swung open, and a huge, bewhiskered man in ragged garments
+and a Winchester rifle in his hand stood before them.
+
+"Come in quick," he commanded, "and let's get this gate barred.
+There is no knowing when that band of robbers will be back."
+
+"Robbers?" queried Billie, as he set the little girl on the
+ground and extended his hand to the man. "What robbers?"
+
+"They call themselves soldiers," and the man seized Billie's hand
+and gave it a mighty grip, which made even Broncho Billie wince,
+"but what do we care for them? With four Americans we can defy a
+hundred of them." Then, as Donald and Adrian finished barring the
+gate: "It's certainly good for sore eyes to see such faces," and
+he grasped each boy in turn.
+
+"Well, we're mighty glad to see you," replied Donald. "We
+expected to find the place deserted."
+
+"How did you know anything about the place?"
+
+"This lady told us it is her home."
+
+"What?" from the man. "Do you mean to tell me this is the Senora
+Blanco?"
+
+"Even so, Senor," replied the lady. "No one would recognize me in
+these rags and grief. Oh, Senor, had it not been for these brave
+Americans I should have been devoured by a lion."
+
+"You don't tell me. But I'd know they were the real thing. Their
+faces show it. But come, let's go into the house. You'll excuse
+me, Senora, for taking possession of your castle."
+
+"It is yours, Senor. Do with it as you will. But will you not do
+me the favor of your name?"
+
+"I beg your pardon, Senora. I had forgotten. I am Ebenezer Black,
+who owns the ranch across the valley. My daughter and I were out
+on a hunt for some lost cattle when we were waylaid by this
+so-called company of soldiers. I drove them off but my daughter
+was wounded and I made for this place. Finding no one at home, I
+took possession."
+
+"I am so glad, Senor. And where is your daughter now?"
+
+"Sitting in a big armchair, nursing a wounded arm."
+
+"Oh, let us hasten," cried the senora. "I may be of some
+assistance."
+
+They hurried into the house and into the great library, now all
+in disorder and strewn with bits of cigars and cigarettes. In one
+of the big leather chairs sat a girl of some sixteen or
+seventeen, with her left arm in a sling, but in her right hand
+she held a glistening revolver. She was very slight, but dressed
+in a riding costume of unique design, and with a wealth of soft
+brown hair hanging just to her collar. With just a touch of
+pallor due to the wound, the boys thought her the most beautiful
+girl they had ever seen, not excepting Pedro's sister Guadalupe.
+
+That the girl was surprised at the addition to the party goes
+without saying. She looked first at her father, then at the
+newcomers and then back to her father, as much as to ask: "Who
+are they?"
+
+"This," said Mr. Black as the senora came forward, "is the lady
+of the house and her daughter. These are American boys, as you
+can see, although you haven't had a chance to know many American
+boys. I don't know their names, but names don't count. I'll vouch
+for them."
+
+"We are very highly complimented," laughed Donald, "but I shall
+be pleased to introduce us. I am Donald Mackay. Now that you know
+me, I will introduce my friends, Adrian Sherwood, ranch owner and
+good fellow, and William Stonewall Jackson Winkle, better known
+as 'Broncho Billie.' We are known as the Broncho Rider Boys."
+
+"Oh, Father," exclaimed the girl, "I've read about them. I have a
+book some one sent me from the United States telling about their
+adventures at the Keystone ranch."
+
+"You don't say so," from her father. "I didn't know they were
+such celebrities. Such being the case, young gentlemen, allow me
+to introduce my daughter, Josephine, commonly called Josie. Now
+then, how did you all come here?"
+
+As briefly as possible Adrian related their adventures since they
+left the City of Mexico the previous morning; told about the
+information contained in the telegram from Gen. Maas, and wound
+up by saying: "We may be at war with Mexico right now for all we
+know."
+
+"Well, now what do you think of that?" exclaimed Mr. Black. "I
+just knew I had a reason when I hoisted that flag. It's one Josie
+always carries in her saddle bags. It makes her feel safer, she
+says."
+
+"And I hope she is safer," exclaimed Billie, "with it waving over
+her to-day, than she would be without it."
+
+"At any rate she has more protection than she had a few hours
+ago," ventured the senora. "I shall never forget how I was
+protected."
+
+"I'd feel a whole lot better," said Donald, "if I had some other
+weapon. A Colt does very well in a tight place; but I certainly
+miss my Marlin."
+
+"We formerly had quite a supply of arms," was the explanation
+offered by the senora, "but when Gen. Blanco went to join Gen.
+Carranza he armed all his men and it took about everything we
+had. However, there are a few weapons left--unless," she added as
+an afterthought, "the Huerta soldiers have discovered their
+hiding place."
+
+She led the way to the cellar and pointed to a spot at one side.
+
+"If you will brush away the dirt that covers the floor about
+there," she said, "you will find a large slab. This can be
+raised, and underneath there should still be several good
+rifles."
+
+Donald and Billie, who had accompanied her, while Adrian remained
+up stairs with the others, quickly followed her instructions. The
+edges of the slab were exposed to view and after some effort the
+opening was revealed. In it were four rifles and an old-fashioned
+cannon. The rifles were not of the latest make, but two were
+magazine rifles and were a decided improvement over revolvers in
+case it came to defending the house.
+
+"I suppose that old cannon might be mounted on the roof somehow
+and made effective," said Donald after he and Billie had
+inspected the other arms. Then to the senora: "Is there any
+ammunition?"
+
+"There was powder in that wine cask," she replied, "but I don't
+know whether there is any left. The balls for the cannon are on
+the roof."
+
+The boys examined the cask and found it contained quite a
+quantity of powder. Then they all returned to the library and
+made their report.
+
+"Not a very heavy armament to withstand a siege, is it?" was Mr.
+Black's comment. "Half a dozen rifles with about a hundred
+cartridges, an old cannon that might explode any minute, and four
+revolvers. It won't do."
+
+"What else can we do?" asked Billie.
+
+"Why, now that there are four of us, we'll cross the valley to my
+house. It is just as well located to withstand a siege as this
+and it is thoroughly armed and provisioned."
+
+"Suppose we have to fight?"
+
+"Then we'll fight."
+
+"But you forget your daughter and the senora and her child."
+
+"I didn't forget Josie," was the reply, "and, wounded as she is,
+she can take care of herself; but I don't know about the others.
+They would be a handicap. Have you anything better to offer?"
+
+Billie scratched his head.
+
+"Not for the moment."
+
+"Well, I have," exclaimed Adrian.
+
+"I thought it was about time Ad woke up," laughed Donald. "Let's
+have it."
+
+"Captain Lopez told us that there was a large body of Carranza's
+troops down the railroad a short distance. If he meant by a short
+distance six or eight miles they can not be more than a couple of
+miles from where we now are. I feel sure that the skirmish we
+passed through has proved disastrous to the Huerta forces and I
+am willing to go out and find Captain Lopez and bring relief."
+
+"And I'll go with you," said Billie.
+
+"I can do just as well alone. If I am not captured by the other
+side I shall make it easily, and," he added, "I am sure I shall
+not be captured, for I can lick any squad of peons that I'm
+likely to meet."
+
+"You are a brave boy," said Josie, a bit of praise which brought
+the color to Adrian's cheeks and was an added incentive for
+bravery.
+
+"But why shouldn't I go?" insisted Billie.
+
+"You may be needed here. This house is a marked place and if a
+small band of the Huerta forces has escaped, this will be one of
+the places where they will rally."
+
+"Your friend is right," agreed Mr. Black. "I admire the pluck of
+all of you, but his plan is best. The sooner he goes the better
+and we will make the house as impregnable as we can. Let us hope
+he is successful."
+
+"You can bet on me," was Adrian's reply as he shouldered his
+rifle, looked to the fastening of his belt, and descended to the
+gate, where Mr. Black let him out.
+
+After Adrian had gone the others inspected the house and its
+approaches for the purpose of determining where they might mount
+the cannon. They finally decided upon a spot in an angle of the
+roof, where a chimney offered some protection and from which it
+commanded the main approach to the house.
+
+"I'm not sure we will be able to get the cannon up there,"
+laughed Billie as they passed through the library on their way to
+the cellar, "but we'll do the best we can."
+
+"Don't worry," was Josie's reply. "You don't know how strong Dad
+is."
+
+The boys thought they could guess, but when they saw Mr. Black
+pick up the cannon as though it had been a log of cord wood and
+carry it upstairs they concluded that Josie was right.
+
+"When I was a young man," was Mr. Black's only comment, "I was
+considered the strongest man in our county. I reckon if it came
+to a pinch I'd be a pretty hard man to handle even yet."
+
+The boys had no doubt of it.
+
+By the time the cannon was mounted and loaded the sun was nearing
+the top of the mountains behind them and a few minutes later it
+sank from sight.
+
+"It won't be long now until we shall have to depend upon our ears
+instead of our eyes for our protection," said Donald. "Where is
+the best place to watch?"
+
+"I'll tell you what I think," said Billie. "Let one watch from
+the roof and the other down by the gate. The one on the roof can
+hear noises from a distance. The one by the gate can hear any one
+who may be sneaking around."
+
+"I'll watch on the roof," said the senora. "I know the chirp of
+every bird that belongs here. I shall know in a minute if
+anything happens that is unusual."
+
+"And I'll watch by the gate," declared Donald.
+
+"Only till midnight," said Billie, "when I'll relieve you."
+
+"And I'll relieve the senora," said Josie.
+
+"Where do I come in?" queried Mr. Black.
+
+"You are the general, Dad. You can be everywhere."
+
+Sentry duty is always nerve-racking business. If you have ever
+been obliged to sit alone in the dark and watch with your ears,
+you will understand this and you will understand how Donald felt
+sitting alone by the barred gate in the dark, 3,000 miles from
+home and in the midst of a war-stricken country.
+
+Even the north star looked unfamiliar, so close was it to the
+northern horizon. Once in a while he fancied he could hear the
+senora weeping, but for at least three hours this was all he
+heard.
+
+Then he heard a distinct "S-s-s-s," which was the signal agreed
+upon between him and the senora if she heard anything unusual.
+
+In an instant he was on the alert. Yes, he was sure he heard
+footsteps near the gate, without. Then there were some minutes of
+silence, then the hiss of a fuse and a moment later an explosion
+which blew the gate from its hinges.
+
+
+
+
+CHAPTER XII.
+
+A NIGHT ATTACK.
+
+
+Realizing in an instant that the hiss of the fuse, like the
+rattle of the snake, betokened danger, Donald drew hastily back
+into the patio in time to be out of reach of the explosion which
+splintered the gate and tore it from its hinges.
+
+Then, with finger on trigger, he awaited the coming of the foe.
+
+It was a tense moment and the boy's heart beat fast. He had been
+in many trying situations, but never in one where the safety of
+so many others seemed to depend upon him.
+
+He heard the sound of oncoming feet and intuitively threw himself
+upon the ground behind a little stone paling which surrounded a
+dismantled fountain.
+
+The act undoubtedly saved his life, for an instant later there
+was a scattering volley and he could hear the bullets hit against
+the stone wall of the house behind him.
+
+In an instant he pressed the trigger and a yell which followed
+gave evidence that the bullet found a mark.
+
+He fired again, but evidently without effect, and a minute later
+a light at one side of the patio told him that the enemy, or a
+part of them at least, were inside the gate.
+
+As the light flared up Donald fired again, but again without
+avail; but a moment later the cannon on the roof spoke.
+
+"So," he thought, "Billie and Mr. Black are at last awake."
+
+At the report of the cannon the light went out and there was the
+rush of scurrying feet, followed by a shout.
+
+The shout indicated that those within the patio had withdrawn to
+the other side of the gate.
+
+Feeling sure that the patio was now free of the enemy for a time
+at least, Donald retreated in the dark to the house and was soon
+inside. At the first landing he encountered Josie, sitting on a
+step with a ready revolver. He was able to see her by the dim
+light of an oil lamp which hung from the ceiling.
+
+"Where are the others?" he asked.
+
+"On the roof. They are trying to locate the enemy."
+
+Donald ascended to the roof.
+
+"I have a plan," he said, "which will enable us to get in another
+shot. Load with shrapnel and I will see if I can't make some sort
+of a light outside the gate. Be ready on the instant."
+
+He ran downstairs and again crept out into the dark patio. He had
+noticed in the afternoon that there were several bundles of straw
+in the stable.
+
+Taking one of these under his arm, he approached the angle in the
+wall near the outer gate. He lighted a match and as the flame
+caught the straw he flung the bundle over the wall, at the same
+time darting inside the stable.
+
+He had hardly found a safe position when the cannon spoke again
+and evidently with telling effect.
+
+But before those inside the walls had time to think, the enemy
+rushed in, determined to capture the place.
+
+In the dark they rushed to the house, but once under the gallery
+which extended all around the inside of the patio, they produced
+a light which enabled them to find the doors.
+
+The light also enabled Donald to see those at the door and he
+fired from the stable.
+
+For a moment the fire in the rear disconcerted the enemy and
+several fled, but others took possession of the doorway and
+forced their way in.
+
+The first one who entered fell by a bullet from Josie's revolver;
+but realizing her weakness she jumped and fled to the floor
+above, where she met her father coming down.
+
+"They have gained possession of the house," Mr. Black told Billie
+as he and the senora also descended from the roof. "We must now
+guard the stairway. We should be able to hold it indefinitely."
+
+This prediction seemed correct, as the first four or five men who
+attempted to reach the second story never got more than their
+heads above the floor.
+
+After several trials of this sort, they withdrew and held a
+council of war. The result was that a few minutes later a voice
+called out from below:
+
+"If you will surrender, your lives will be spared."
+
+In reply Mr. Black shouted: "If you do not withdraw and leave us
+in peace you will meet a fearful punishment."
+
+His reply was greeted with jeers.
+
+"I wonder how many of them there are?" queried Billie.
+
+"Quite a bunch from the sound." Then, a moment later, "They seem
+to be going out."
+
+"Maybe they think we will come down," said Josie.
+
+"But we must not," exclaimed the senora. "They would kill us.
+Surely our friend must bring us aid soon."
+
+"Let us hope so," was Mr. Black's reply.
+
+And hope was the best they could do.
+
+There was no further attack, although they could hear the sound
+of voices in the patio below.
+
+After a long period of quiet Mr. Black ventured the assertion
+that they were waiting for daylight, and his surmise proved
+correct.
+
+No attempt was made to force an entrance until the first faint
+light of day began to appear. Then there was renewed activity
+below and a few minutes later the sound of a single shot.
+
+"I wonder what that was," exclaimed Billie.
+
+No one could answer, but had Billie been where he could see, he
+would have known that it was Donald who fired.
+
+As the light came, Donald, peering through a crack in the stable,
+had seen a man climbing up the side of the house toward the roof.
+Without a moment's hesitation he fired and the man dropped, shot
+through the right hand.
+
+But the shot was Donald's undoing. The flash of his gun was
+detected and half a dozen men rushed his hiding place and took
+him prisoner.
+
+He was at once taken before the captain of the band and
+questioned as to the number of defenders and as to the
+whereabouts of Gen. Blanco.
+
+To all the questions Donald gave an evasive answer.
+
+"If you will tell me where Gen. Blanco is," said the captain, "I
+will give you your freedom."
+
+"That's easy," was Donald's reply. "He is with Gen. Carranza."
+
+"I don't believe it."
+
+"Well, I can't help that, nor does what you believe make any
+difference. It is the truth and what you may believe has nothing
+whatever to do with it."
+
+The captain scowled.
+
+"Who is it then, that is defending the house?"
+
+"Americans. You had better let us go, or it will be the worse
+for you. We had a safe conduct from Gen. Huerta, but we were
+betrayed."
+
+"If I had my way," said the captain, "I'd shoot every American in
+the whole of Mexico."
+
+"I don't see why," from Donald. "We have nothing against you."
+
+"Take him away," ordered the captain, "and see that he does not
+escape. Now let us capture the others."
+
+There was a rush for the house as Donald was led back to the
+stable.
+
+Billie and Mr. Black heard them coming.
+
+"Go to the roof," commanded Mr. Black, speaking to the two
+females, "and keep yourselves and the little girl out of sight.
+We will hold them back here as long as we can and then we will
+also come to the roof."
+
+The command had hardly been obeyed than the Mexicans began to
+crowd up the stairs. They were met with shot after shot, but at
+last all the weapons were empty.
+
+"Run for the roof," said Mr. Black as he arose to his feet and
+with his heavy boot kicked a head which was just coming up the
+stairs.
+
+Billie obeyed and a minute later the fugitives had gathered upon
+the last place of safety left.
+
+"If we only had some ammunition," moaned Billie. "Can't we do
+something?"
+
+Then, as in answer to his own query, he picked up a twelve-pound
+cannon ball that lay on the roof and, raising it above his head
+with both hands, hurled it through the opening upon those below.
+
+This unexpected attack caused the besiegers to draw back, but
+only for a moment. Then they came on again. In his desperation,
+Mr. Black, with almost superhuman strength, picked up the cannon
+itself, just as Billie had picked up the ball, and hurled it down
+the stairs.
+
+Half a dozen men fell beneath its weight, while the others,
+frightened at such an exhibition of strength, fell back in
+dismay.
+
+A shout from the captain urged them forward, but ere they could
+gather their courage for another rush there came the sound of a
+volley in the patio below and a minute later Adrian rushed up the
+stairs, followed by Captain Lopez and a squad of his soldiers.
+
+Taken in the rear and entirely by surprise, the Huerta forces
+threw down their arms and cried for mercy, and in less than five
+minutes after the arrival of Captain Lopez and his men, the
+entire force, or as many as remained, were prisoners.
+
+
+
+
+CHAPTER XIII.
+
+A NARROW ESCAPE.
+
+
+Two days later the three boys sat on the verandah of Mr. Black's
+commodious house awaiting the call to breakfast. Under escort of
+Captain Lopez' men they had crossed the valley between Mr.
+Black's and Gen. Blanco's the day after the night attack and had
+spent the time since in getting a much needed rest.
+
+"It's less than four days since we left the City of Mexico,"
+remarked Donald, "but it seems like a month. I wonder how matters
+stand at Vera Cruz?"
+
+"From that telegram from Gen. Maas, that we took from the
+lieutenant, Admiral Fletcher may have taken the city," said
+Billie.
+
+"I hope not," from Adrian.
+
+"Why?" asked both the others.
+
+"'Cause I'd like to be there when it happens."
+
+"Yes, so would I," echoed Billie.
+
+"If he has taken it," ventured Donald, "we may have difficulty
+getting through the Mexican lines."
+
+"Well, the best thing we can do," asserted Adrian, "is to get
+somewhere and find out what is going on just as soon as we can."
+
+The call to breakfast interrupted their conversation, but as soon
+as they were seated at the table, they broached the matter to Mr.
+Black.
+
+"I expect you are right," he said, "but I'd like to have you stay
+with me a while. It's mighty lonesome here for Josie and me."
+
+"If we are at war with the Mexicans," remarked Billie, "this will
+be an unhealthy place for an American, I imagine. I should think
+you would want to take your daughter away from here."
+
+"Oh, Josie and I are not afraid, are we, Josie?"
+
+"No indeed, Dad. We are a match for a regiment of Mexicans when
+we are on our own ground."
+
+But in spite of the assertion made by Mr. Black he admitted to
+the boys after breakfast when Josie was not present that he
+wished his daughter was safe in Vera Cruz.
+
+"Why don't you go with us?" asked Adrian. "We should be pleased
+to act as an escort."
+
+"Yes," echoed Billie. "We'll see you through."
+
+"I'll tell you what I had thought of doing," said Mr. Black.
+"It's only a good day's ride a-horseback to Moreno. We have many
+friends there with whom I could leave her. If you boys would act
+as an escort that far you would be no farther from Vera Cruz than
+you are now and I believe you would have a better chance in
+reaching the port over the Tierra Blanca division than on the
+main line."
+
+"Whether we would or not," replied Adrian, "we should be glad to
+act as your escort."
+
+"There is another thing in favor of that route," continued Mr.
+Black. "The farther we keep from the main line of railroad, the
+less likely we are to fall in with the Huerta forces. The
+southern territory as far as Santa Lucrecia is practically in the
+hands of Carranza."
+
+"From what you say," was Donald's comment, "it is greatly to our
+advantage to do as you wish. Let's consider the matter settled
+and start at once."
+
+"It's too late in the day to start now," was Mr. Black's reply.
+"We shall wait until to-morrow morning and be on our way by
+daylight. I don't want to be riding through the mountains after
+dark. There are wild animals that are worse than the soldiers."
+
+"As the Senora Blanco can testify," laughed Billie. "Every time I
+think of what a close shave she had, it gives me a chill."
+
+That afternoon Mr. Black brought out half a dozen horses for the
+inspection of his guests.
+
+"A day's ride on a strange horse isn't always an easy task," he
+explained, "and I thought you might amuse yourself trying these.
+You can each pick out the one that suits him best."
+
+It was a task which suited the boys better than any they had
+undertaken in days, and as they had not only Mr. Black, but Josie
+and the General's wife for spectators, they were more than
+pleased to show their dexterity after true cowboy fashion.
+
+The remainder of the afternoon was therefore spent in riding,
+throwing the lariat and in shooting, much to the gratification of
+Mr. Black, who declared he had never seen a better exhibition of
+its kind.
+
+As a result of their experience, the boys picked out three
+medium-sized horses, which Mr. Black emphatically stated showed
+their good judgment of horse flesh, as completely as their riding
+had proved their horsemanship.
+
+They were all in the saddle early the following morning, Josie's
+wound having healed sufficiently to permit her to ride without
+danger.
+
+Early morning in the tropics is the pleasantest time of the day,
+and although the road from Mr. Black's hacienda to Moreno would take
+them from an altitude of over four thousand feet down to about two
+thousand feet above sea level, they would be sufficiently up in
+the mountains to make riding fairly comfortable.
+
+The route chosen took the little party first to the headquarters
+of the Carranza force operating in that section. They were warmly
+greeted by General Dorantes, the commanding officer, who
+furnished them with a guard of four men and passes through the
+lines, "if," he added as he bade them good luck, "you should find
+it necessary to pass our lines. If my reports are correct, we are
+in possession of all the territory to the south."
+
+For hours the cavalcade rode on without incident, stopping only
+long enough to partake of a mid-day meal at the hacienda of Don
+Alvaro Flores, a friend of Mr. Black's. Late in the afternoon,
+however, when about six miles from their destination, there came
+to their ears the sound of heavy firing--of field pieces mingled
+with the occasional roll of a machine gun.
+
+They stopped and listened intently.
+
+"Which direction do you make the firing to be?" asked Mr. Black
+of the corporal in command of the escort.
+
+"In the direction of Tierra Blanca, sir. It sounds as though our
+forces might have been attacked."
+
+"How will that affect our journey?"
+
+"Hard to tell, sir. If we win, as we shall, the enemy may fall
+back toward Santa Lucrecia, or they may retreat toward Moreno. If
+you will take my advice, you will halt here until the action is
+over."
+
+The advice seemed most excellent and the cavalcade came to a halt
+and the riders dismounted to give themselves a much-needed rest.
+
+The firing lasted something like twenty minutes, then suddenly
+ceased, with the exception of an occasional "Boom!"
+
+"It sounds as though we had beaten them off," said the corporal.
+
+"Is there any way that we can tell in which direction they have
+retreated?"
+
+"Only by a reconnoiter."
+
+"Which is our long suit," declared Billie. "You just stay here
+with the guard, Mr. Black, and we three will soon have a report."
+
+Looking to their arms, with which they had been well supplied by
+their host before leaving the hacienda, the boys rode forward
+toward an elevation something like a mile distant. From this they
+hoped to get a view of the country.
+
+There was a fairly level road and they dashed along at a good
+rate despite their long ride. The horses were as hard as iron and
+the boys did not know the meaning of the word tired.
+
+Reaching the top of the hill, they found a space, from which they
+could see clear across the valley through which ran the railroad
+from Santa Lucrecia to Vera Cruz. To the right, some miles away,
+they could see a good-sized little city which their common sense
+told them must be Tierra Blanca. To the left, but nearer, was the
+smaller town of Moreno, for which they were headed.
+
+Between the two towns, and coming directly toward them, was a
+band of galloping horsemen, probably one hundred or more in
+number.
+
+"Great Scott!" was Billie's ejaculation as he caught sight of the
+horsemen, "they're coming right at us."
+
+"I believe you are right," from Donald. "They seem to be on this
+very road."
+
+"What would you take them to be?" was Billie's next question.
+
+"Give it up," replied Donald.
+
+"I'll bet I can make a good guess," said Adrian. "They are a
+flying column of Huerta cavalry, sent out to test the Carranza
+lines. They have paid their respects to Tierra Blanca and now
+they are headed for Cordoba."
+
+"They'll never get there," said Billie. "They'll run into General
+Dorante's men."
+
+"But if it's a surprise, they'll cut their way through."
+
+"It's up to us to see that it is not a surprise!" cried Donald.
+"Come on!" and he turned and dashed back the road they had come.
+
+In less than five minutes they were where they had left their
+companions. In another two minutes they had told their story and
+in another minute the corporal and his men were on their way back
+toward General Dorante's headquarters.
+
+"It's only a question of whose horses are the best," said Mr.
+Black. "And now let us to cover."
+
+Leaving the highway, the Americans turned sharply to the left and
+dashed for the shelter of a piece of woodland something like a
+half a mile away. Pell-mell they went over rocks and shrubs,
+regardless of themselves or their horses, and succeeded in
+reaching the friendly cover just about three minutes before the
+cavalry came into sight over the hill.
+
+"We're all right now," said Mr. Black, "if the troopers will
+stick to the road, but if they should take it into their heads to
+scatter, we might have trouble."
+
+With eager eyes the boys watched the oncoming horsemen, prepared
+to flee for their lives if they should be discovered, as they
+realized how useless would be any resistance.
+
+Nearer and nearer they came until the leaders were at the very
+spot they had just left, and then with a rush they passed by,
+turning neither to the right nor to the left.
+
+Every one in the party heaved a deep sigh of relief.
+
+"It's a wonder some of them didn't stop," said Billie.
+
+"Oh, I don't know," laughed Adrian. "Look yonder," and he pointed
+to the brow of the hill, where another, but much smaller body of
+horsemen had appeared. "They evidently didn't intend to have
+their mission interfered with by fighting a rear-guard skirmish."
+
+"I think the best thing we can do," said Mr. Black, "is to
+surrender ourselves to the pursuers. They are evidently
+Carranzistas and our passes will protect us."
+
+Breaking off a piece of bamboo, Mr. Black tied a handkerchief to
+it and raising it above his head the little party rode out of the
+woods. They were sighted at once and a party of horsemen dashed
+toward them, and surrounded them.
+
+It was as they had expected and Gen. Dorantes' passes were
+immediately recognized by the officer in command. He was much
+pleased at the information given him concerning the corporal and
+thanked the boys in the name of Gen. Carranza for their good
+offices. He furthermore detached an escort of a dozen men to see
+that they reached Moreno in safety and commended them to the care
+of the jefe politico, with the verbal instruction that the boys
+be allowed to proceed on their way to Vera Cruz at their will.
+
+
+
+
+CHAPTER XIV.
+
+APRIL TWENTY-ONE.
+
+
+"Boys," said Mr. Black the following morning as they were
+preparing to pay a visit to the jefe politico, "I want you to do
+me a favor."
+
+The boys looked at him in surprise.
+
+"Well, what is it?" asked Donald, when Mr. Black did not
+immediately continue.
+
+"I want you to accept, as a mark of my appreciation of your
+bravery and good services, the horses upon which you are mounted
+and the accoutrements."
+
+The look of surprise on the faces of the boys deepened.
+
+"I am sure, sir," replied Donald, speaking for the others, "we
+should be pleased to accept them if we were expecting to remain
+in the country. We hope, however, to leave Vera Cruz in a very
+few days."
+
+"Boys," and Mr. Black's face was most serious, "there is no
+knowing when you will reach Vera Cruz; much less leave it."
+
+"What do you mean?" from Billie.
+
+"I had a long talk with my friend, Don Ramon, last night after
+you were in bed and he tells me that the railroad between here
+and Vera Cruz is in the hands of Gen. Maas, the other side of
+Guayabo, and there is almost no chance of your being allowed to
+pass through the lines."
+
+"Why not?" from Adrian.
+
+"Well, you see, since we have heard anything, relations between
+the two countries have become more and more strained and the
+United States has practically declared a blockade on Vera Cruz.
+The entire Atlantic fleet is assembled outside and there is
+liable to be a clash at any time."
+
+"Then we'll accept the horses, Mr. Black," spoke up Donald, "and
+we'll ride to Vera Cruz. It can't be more than fifty miles."
+
+"Forty-six by rail," said Mr. Black. "I kind of thought you might
+like to try and make it, is why I want to give you the horses,"
+and the speaker smiled knowingly.
+
+"The sooner we start the better, I expect," said Adrian.
+
+"Yes; after you pay your respects to the mayor."
+
+The foregoing conversation explains how it happened that on the
+morning of April 21, 1914, the Broncho Rider Boys looked down
+from a little hill, the top of which was covered by tropical
+foliage, upon the harbor of Vera Cruz, with the American fleet in
+the offing.
+
+By a circuitous route and by two nights of riding, hiding in the
+day, the boys had reached this spot about an hour after sunrise.
+
+"Whew!" was Billie's exclamation as he looked out across the
+harbor at the men-of-war flying the American flag. "There's a
+bunch of them, isn't there?"
+
+"Sure is," from Adrian, "and they look peaceable, too."
+
+"You never can tell by the looks of a toad how far it will jump,"
+laughed Donald. "But peaceable or warlike, I'd like mighty well
+to be on board one of them."
+
+"Here, too," from Billie. "I wonder how we're going to make it."
+
+"How would it do for one of us to try and get into town and find
+the American consul?" queried Adrian.
+
+"Fine," from Donald, "if he succeeded; but bad if he did not."
+
+"Then what had we better do?"
+
+"Give it up. Suppose we wait here a while and something may turn
+up."
+
+"I'd like to know what can turn up?" asked Billie.
+
+"I don't know; but I was thinking that one of the ships might
+happen to send a boat ashore for something. If we saw it coming,
+we could ride quickly into town."
+
+Adrian laughed. "I reckon it would be just as hard to get through
+the Mexican lines then as now. No! I'm going out to reconnoiter."
+
+It was an hour later when he returned.
+
+"I've found a way," he said as he threw himself on the ground and
+fanned himself vigorously with his hat. "It's down by the water
+works. There are several Americans down there."
+
+"Good," said Billie. "Let's go. I'm getting mighty hungry."
+
+"Now don't be in a rush," cautioned Adrian. "There's a picket
+between here and there. We'll have to ride easy. You put the
+saddles on the horses. I'm pretty well tired. I want to tell you
+it's hot."
+
+Billie was busy with the horses when Don suddenly pointed out
+toward the American men-of-war.
+
+"Look!" he exclaimed. "There's something doing."
+
+And sure enough there was.
+
+Out from behind two of the largest vessels there suddenly darted
+a number of launches loaded with blue-jackets and marines.
+
+In another instant they had headed for the shore, while out
+behind them trailed the American flag.
+
+The boys sprang to their feet and watched the approaching boats
+with the utmost interest.
+
+"There must be a thousand of them!" exclaimed Billie.
+
+"More than that," said Donald, as his eyes ran over the oncoming
+boats. "There's nearer fifteen hundred."
+
+"And look there," cried Adrian. "See those two smaller ships
+moving in toward shore."
+
+"What do you suppose they are going to do?" asked Billie, all in
+a tremor of excitement.
+
+"Looks to me," replied Donald, "like they were going to capture
+the town."
+
+"Why, that's war!" from Adrian.
+
+"Well, isn't that what we've been expecting? I wish I knew what
+it all means."
+
+As some of the readers may not know what was the cause of the
+action it may be explained that a German steamship had arrived
+the night before loaded with arms for Huerta's army. Admiral
+Fletcher had no right to seize the German ship, so he determined
+to seize the port of Vera Cruz. Then if the arms were landed they
+would be in the hands of the Americans.
+
+"Well," declared Adrian, "whatever else it means, it means
+business."
+
+"Do you suppose the Mexicans will try to prevent the landing?"
+asked Billie.
+
+"We'll know in a minute, for they are most ashore," said Donald.
+
+Donald was right and in another minute a shot rang out followed
+by a rattle of musketry.
+
+"Flash! Flash! Bang! Bang!" spoke the howitzers in the foremost
+of the launches.
+
+Boom! Boom! Boom! came the sound of three guns from the ship
+nearest the city, which proved to be the _Prairie_.
+
+The crash of the six-inch shells as they struck in the city could
+be heard above the rattle of the rifle fire which had now become
+continuous.
+
+"It's a sure enough battle," cried Billie. "Come on! Let's go
+down!" and he flung himself onto his horse.
+
+"What would you do?" cried Donald, seizing Billie's horse by the
+bridle. "You'd be killed by the fire from our own guns. This is
+the best place we could be in while the firing is going on. As
+soon as our men have driven the Mexicans out of town, then we can
+go in."
+
+"But I want to take a hand in the fun," said Billie.
+
+"It's no fun, as you'll find after it's all over. No knowing how
+many of our boys are being lost, to say nothing of the Mexicans."
+
+"Look!" cried Adrian, who had not taken his eyes from the scene
+in the harbor. "There are a couple of other ships going into
+action."
+
+Billie turned at sound of Adrian's words. Sure enough, there came
+flashes from more guns, as the _Chester_ and _San Francisco_
+moved up into striking distance, although at that time the boys
+did not know the vessels' names.
+
+"What show will the Mexicans have against those guns!" exclaimed
+Donald. "They'll be driven out of town in short order."
+
+Once more Donald was right and after some minutes of firing, the
+boys realized that the rifle fire was becoming less.
+
+"If they retreat, which way do you suppose they will go?" queried
+Adrian.
+
+"I was just thinking about that," was Donald's reply. "What do
+you think, Billie?"
+
+"I should think along the main line of railroad."
+
+"And I imagine they'll retreat in every direction," said Adrian.
+
+"In which case," advised Donald, "we'd better be prepared to make
+a dash through."
+
+"Look here," from Billie. "Can't you see that the shots are all
+aimed at one particular place? I'm sure if we come around by the
+south, we can get in behind our men some way. It's a good deal
+better chance than to stay here to be shot down by the retreating
+Mexicans."
+
+The others were forced to admit the wisdom of Billie's advice and
+they proceeded to follow it.
+
+Mounting their horses, they rapidly retraced their steps for a
+couple of hundred yards and then headed for the harbor.
+
+They had not gone more than half a mile when they caught a
+glimpse of foot soldiers forming in line on what appeared to be a
+parade ground.
+
+"This is no place for us," exclaimed Donald. "Back to the woods."
+
+"I'm afraid it's too late," from Adrian.
+
+"I hate to run for it," was Billie's comment, "but it's the best
+we can do. I have no mind to fall into Mexican hands right now."
+
+He put spurs to his horse and dashed through a little clump of
+trees which grew by the way, closely followed by the other two.
+
+They seemed to have done just the right thing and were
+congratulating themselves upon their lucky escape, when they
+heard horses coming from the other way.
+
+Billie drew his horse up with a sudden turn.
+
+"It looks as though we'd have to fight for it, boys! If we do
+let's give a good account of ourselves."
+
+They drew their Winchesters for instant use.
+
+The sound of hoofbeats drew nearer and then there burst into
+sight from around a turn in the road a sight which caused the
+boys nearly to fall from their horses with laughter.
+
+Riding on a mule and followed by several peons on burros was the
+florid-faced gentleman whom they had met on the train the day
+they left the City of Mexico. He was bare-headed and his coat
+tails streamed out in the breeze. He had no saddle and was
+clinging onto the mule by grasping him around the neck.
+
+"Help! Help!" he cried as he caught sight of the boys. "I
+surrender. I surrender."
+
+Seeing the boys' horses directly in his path, the mule came to a
+sudden stop, with both feet stuck out before him. The result was
+that the florid-faced gentleman, who wished to head a company of
+marines to drive the Mexicans off the earth, shot forward over
+the mule's head and landed in a cactus bush.
+
+Now a cactus is not a pleasant thing to sit upon, even when the
+greatest care is used; but to be shot into it as from a catapult
+is more than any one can bear.
+
+With a yell that might have been heard half a mile, had it not
+been for the noise of the guns, the man scrambled to his feet and
+darted away down the hill, while the peons stopped at the
+unexpected sight of the boys.
+
+"Americanos!" they cried, and, tumbling off their burros, fell on
+their knees in abject terror, as though expecting that their end
+had come.
+
+
+
+
+CHAPTER XV.
+
+THE INSULT AVENGED.
+
+
+Perceiving that the advantage was on their side, the boys did not
+hesitate to profit by it.
+
+"Do as we bid," ordered Donald sternly, "and your lives will be
+saved. Disobey and we will not answer for the consequences."
+
+The kneeling peons uttered never a word, but raised their eyes
+with a look of surprise.
+
+"Get up," was the next command.
+
+The peons obeyed.
+
+"Now conduct us to the water front by a route where there are no
+Mexican soldiers."
+
+"Do you think you can trust them?" asked Billie.
+
+"At any sign of treachery, our first shot will be for them." Then
+to the peons: "Now march."
+
+Without a word the peons, five in number, started back over the
+route by which they had come but a minute before.
+
+"Where did the other American come from?" asked Billie of the
+peon nearest him as they rode along.
+
+"Quien sabe, senor," was the hesitating response. "We saw him
+riding by and we followed him."
+
+"That's the way with loud talkers," remarked Adrian. "When the
+test comes they usually weaken."
+
+The firing, which had somewhat subsided for a few minutes,
+suddenly began again with renewed vigor, especially on the part
+of the ships.
+
+"Our boys are getting ready for another advance," said Billie,
+and his manner became greatly excited. "Let's get there in time
+to take part."
+
+"I'm willing," declared Adrian. "Come on!"
+
+The two boys dug their spurs into their horses and dashed
+forward, upsetting a couple of the peons in their flight.
+
+"Hold on!" called out Donald. "You'll get into trouble."
+
+Billie and Adrian paid no attention to his cry, whereupon he
+also put spurs to his horse, leaving the peons gaping with
+astonishment in the middle of the road.
+
+And now the boys came into sight of the water front where the
+fighting was going on. It was at the instant that the order had
+been given to clear the space around the custom house, and the
+boys saw the marines advance on the double quick.
+
+The Mexicans gave way, but volley after volley was poured down
+upon the advancing Americans from the roofs of houses and from
+nearby church towers.
+
+There were several shots in rapid succession from the _Chester_,
+which had drawn in more closely, every one of which struck a
+tower where a large force of Mexicans had gathered.
+
+The tower toppled and fell, carrying many with it.
+
+"Hurrah!" cried Billie. "Give it to them!" and, firing his rifle
+as he went, he rode right down into the main street.
+
+"He'll be killed by our own men!" cried Donald.
+
+But he was not. Instead he dashed into the open space in front of
+the custom house, just as the marines swept by, his hat off and
+his rifle cracking as fast as he could fire.
+
+Seeing that the danger from the marines was past, Donald and
+Adrian fell in behind Billie, just as an officer came around the
+corner at the head of another company.
+
+Espying the boys, he halted his command.
+
+"What are you doing here?" he demanded.
+
+"We just came to town," replied Billie, "and we're trying to help
+avenge the insult to the flag."
+
+"Good!" was the emphatic reply. "Fall in behind us. You may be of
+service."
+
+The boys obeyed and followed the company as it swept up the
+street. Presently they came to a barricade, behind which the
+marines had taken a stand. The boys expected the command to halt,
+but instead they passed the barricade and pushed onward toward
+the outskirts of the city.
+
+All the time there was a continuous fire upon them by men
+secreted on the roofs of houses.
+
+"I'd clean out those snipers if I were in command," said Donald
+to his companions.
+
+The words were hardly out of his mouth ere another company of
+marines made its appearance and the men dashed into the houses on
+either side of the street.
+
+"Somebody has the same idea, Don," was Billie's comment as they
+rode along.
+
+Two blocks farther came the order to halt and entrench. A minute
+later the officer called the boys toward him.
+
+"Would you rather lend us your horses, or act as orderlies?" he
+asked.
+
+"If it's all the same to you," was the reply, "we'll serve as
+orderlies."
+
+"Very well. Will you," turning to Adrian, "go back to the custom
+house and tell Captain Rush that we have reached our position.
+You," to Billie, "ride with all speed to the landing and say that
+the enemy has retreated toward the water works. They should not
+be allowed to stop long enough to do any damage."
+
+The two boys were off like the wind to carry the orders.
+
+"Anything for me?" asked Donald.
+
+"Not for the present. Better dismount and get behind something."
+
+Two minutes later Adrian pulled up in front of the Custom House
+and delivered his message, while Billie kept on to the water's
+edge.
+
+"Do you know where the water works are?" asked the officer to
+whom Billie gave his order.
+
+"Yes, sir!"
+
+"Then lead us to it."
+
+Without a word Billie obeyed and the Jackies followed on the run.
+
+The information was evidently received none too soon, for they
+encountered quite a force of Mexicans, guarding the works.
+
+A volley from the bluejackets was returned by a scattering fire
+and the Mexicans turned and fled.
+
+But the volley had been sufficient to lose Billie his mount, as
+his horse came to his knees with a bullet in his shoulder.
+
+Without waiting to see the cause of Billie's fall any more than
+to ask if he was hit, the Jackies pushed on toward the water
+works, leaving Billie to look out for himself as best he could
+until the work in hand was completed.
+
+"This is sure enough tough luck," was Billie's comment as he
+helped the horse to his feet and examined the wound. "It will lay
+him up for a week."
+
+He took the horse by the bridle and led him slowly back toward
+the Custom House, where he reported to an officer and hunted up
+Adrian.
+
+"What had we better do now?" he asked. "I'd like to find a place
+to tend to my horse."
+
+"The fighting seems about over," was Adrian's reply, "and I
+reckon the horse will be given attention by some one."
+
+"Oh, I don't want to make any trouble, Ad! If nobody objects,
+suppose we go hunt a stable."
+
+They were about to leave when a sergeant stopped them.
+
+"You're to follow me to the Captain," he said. "Here," to a
+marine who stood by, "take charge of these horses and see that
+the lame one is cared for."
+
+"I wonder if they will take our horses away from us?" muttered
+Adrian as they followed the sergeant.
+
+"Give it up. I wonder what he wants of us?"
+
+It did not take them long to find out.
+
+"Are you the boys that brought the messages from Lieutenant
+Blunt?" asked Captain Rush.
+
+"Yes, sir."
+
+"Will you undertake another mission?"
+
+"With pleasure," replied Adrian.
+
+"Same here, sir," from Billie, "but my horse has been wounded."
+
+"That's bad. However, I guess we can find another."
+
+"Sure, sir. I can borrow Don's."
+
+"Who is Don?"
+
+"He's the other one of us, sir. He is still out with Lieutenant
+Blunt."
+
+"Well," said the Captain, "either two of you will do. What I want
+is to find out to just what point the Mexican army is falling
+back. Do you think you can find out?"
+
+"Sure."
+
+"Very well. My compliments to Lieutenant Blunt and give him this
+order. He will pass two of you through the lines. The other can
+remain with him. Sergeant, their horses."
+
+Five minutes later, both astride Adrian's horse and leading the
+other, they appeared at the outpost and delivered the order.
+
+"Which two shall it be?" laughed the lieutenant as he looked the
+boys over.
+
+"I guess it will have to be Adrian and Don," replied Billie
+ruefully. "I've had glory enough for one day. The insult to the
+flag has been avenged and the Stars and Stripes are floating over
+Vera Cruz."
+
+"I think it's only fair that Don, as you call him, should share
+in the adventure," said the lieutenant, "and the sooner you go
+the better. It is almost sundown now."
+
+Then as Donald and Adrian started on their mission:
+
+"Success to you and report here when you return."
+
+"Is there any place near here where I can care for my horse?"
+asked Billie as soon as the others had passed out of sight.
+
+"Why, yes. There are stables in almost any of these houses. Here,
+try this one," and the lieutenant indicated the one before which
+they were standing.
+
+Billie knocked on the big door, but there was no reply.
+
+"Knock louder," laughed the lieutenant. "Use your boot."
+
+Billie used his foot and with such vigor that the gate flew open.
+
+When no one appeared to answer his summons, he stuck his head
+inside the patio and called lustily.
+
+"Must be deserted," he finally remarked. "Such being the case,
+lieutenant, I reckon I might as well take possession."
+
+"Sure. Go ahead. If every one has gone, I may join you later."
+
+Billie led his horse within and looked around. It was a large
+house and the patio was the most elaborate Billie had ever seen.
+He had thought that Pedro's home in Mexico City was fine, but
+this was much finer.
+
+"They must be swells," was the lad's comment. "I reckon they
+became frightened and have run away with General Maas."
+
+He started to lead the horse to the stable and then stopped.
+
+"I might as well shut this big gate," he thought. "I'll leave the
+little gate open so the lieutenant can come in."
+
+He pushed the big gate together and dropped the bolt in its
+place.
+
+"Now to do something for the horse," and he turned to the animal
+which stood patiently by.
+
+Then he stopped and stood in mute astonishment at what his eyes
+beheld.
+
+In the center of the patio, with rifle in hand, aimed squarely at
+his head, stood a figure he had last seen on the banks of the Rio
+Grande more than a year before--the figure of a man whom he had
+known only as Santiago.
+
+The recognition was mutual, but instead of the friendliness which
+had always before marked the attitude of the strange man, there
+was now upon his face a look of the most bitter hatred.
+
+
+
+
+CHAPTER XVI.
+
+SHADOWING AN ARMY.
+
+
+When Donald and Adrian left the city they rode slowly along for
+some distance without any sign of the retreating Mexicans,
+except the occasional sight of some camp utensil which had been
+thrown aside as too heavy to carry. Occasionally they met peons
+or women, who looked at them curiously, but all of whom were more
+than willing to tell of the army that had so recently passed.
+
+"How many men do you suppose General Maas has?" queried Adrian.
+
+"The lieutenant said it was supposed he had about seven thousand.
+It may be more, and it may be less."
+
+"Well, they're certainly light-footed," laughed Adrian. "Don't
+you think we ought to get closer?"
+
+"If we can without being seen."
+
+They put spurs to their horses and for a mile or more galloped
+along at a fair speed.
+
+Then from a little eminence they saw the rear guard of the
+retreating army.
+
+"This is near enough," cautioned Donald.
+
+They halted and watched the marching men.
+
+"How far would you say we are from town, Don?"
+
+"At least seven or eight miles."
+
+"Do you know what towns are in this direction?"
+
+"Not the slightest idea. That's the next thing we must find out."
+
+The enemy having by this time passed out of sight, they again
+spurred forward, but holding their distance.
+
+Darkness had now fallen and the boys were obliged to pick their
+way more carefully.
+
+For half an hour they rode silently and then Donald spoke:
+
+"They certainly will not march all night. They must have some
+place in mind."
+
+"So I think," from Adrian. "But there seems no sign of a halt."
+
+Ten minutes later, however, they caught sight of a fire light.
+
+"That looks like it might be a camp," suggested Adrian.
+
+They rode cautiously forward.
+
+"It surely is," affirmed Donald a couple of minutes later. "We'd
+better dismount and do a little reconnoitering on foot."
+
+The suggestion was immediately put into effect.
+
+Leaving their horses tethered beneath a giant palm, which would
+serve as a landmark, the boys crept stealthily forward. In a few
+minutes they were near enough to see figures about the fire.
+
+"They are evidently getting ready to pass the night," said
+Donald.
+
+"Yes," from Adrian, "and there is another fire off yonder," and
+he pointed to the right.
+
+"They are getting ready to post their pickets," explained Donald.
+
+"Then we'd better get busy, Don. There must be some way of
+finding out where the army is going to stop."
+
+As with one accord they drew still nearer the camp, they could
+smell the coffee and their appetites began to assert themselves.
+
+"Wish I had some," whispered Adrian.
+
+"You'll get to be as bad as Billie first thing you know," was the
+retort. "But, hush! There comes some one."
+
+They lay flat on the ground and listened.
+
+Whoever it might be was coming directly toward them.
+
+Not a move did the boys make, hoping that they might not be
+discovered, but ready to act if they were.
+
+When within ten feet of them the footsteps halted and they heard
+a voice say:
+
+"This will be far enough. You are the end man on the line."
+
+"Bueno, caporal!"
+
+"Keep a close watch," cautioned the corporal. "You never know
+what these Americans may do."
+
+"Si, Senor. How far are we from Vera Cruz?"
+
+"About four leagues" (twelve miles). "General Maas will make a
+stand at Tejeria, about a league further on."
+
+Then as he moved away. "Remember now, no sleeping. This is a real
+war."
+
+"Bueno, mi caporal. I understand."
+
+The corporal departed and the sentry, shouldering his rifle,
+began pacing his station.
+
+A minute later Donald gave Adrian a dig with his elbow as a
+signal, and they slowly crawled away.
+
+"That's the information we are after," whispered Donald when they
+were out of earshot. "Now to get back to Vera Cruz as quickly as
+possible."
+
+They rose to their feet and ran swiftly but silently toward the
+palm tree, where their horses were tethered.
+
+Suddenly Adrian stopped and grabbed Donald by the arm.
+
+"What is it, Ad?" asked Donald.
+
+"Can't you see! There is some one there with the horses."
+
+They both peered through the darkness and Donald quickly
+perceived that Adrian was right.
+
+Then as by one impulse they drew a few steps nearer.
+
+In the dim starlight they were able to make out the figures of
+several men.
+
+"Do you think they are soldiers?" whispered Don.
+
+Adrian shook his head.
+
+"Camp followers. Thieves," he whispered.
+
+Donald nodded his head in acquiescence.
+
+The boys lay down upon the ground and put their heads together.
+
+"It wouldn't be any trick at all," whispered Donald, "if it were
+not for the pickets. But any noise will bring down upon us a
+couple of hundred men. Maybe more. We have simply got to dispose
+of that outfit without noise. But how?"
+
+"Bad job," was Adrian's only reply.
+
+"If the horses were only our Wyoming cow ponies, they'd come at
+our call."
+
+"But they're not," replied Adrian.
+
+For several minutes neither spoke, but lay silently watching the
+movements of the men about the horses.
+
+"How many can you make out, Ad?"
+
+"Five."
+
+"I don't see but four."
+
+Adrian pointed to the left, about ten or twelve feet, to one who
+stood alone.
+
+"What's he doing there?"
+
+"Give it up." Then a moment later: "I have it!"
+
+"Well, what is it?"
+
+"He's watching for us to return. That's what they're all waiting
+for. They think we'll be a great catch."
+
+"That's just it," from Donald. "Let's fool them!"
+
+"Well, first, let's capture the one yonder. We'll show them a
+Wyoming Indian trick."
+
+Slowly and silently the boys wiggled their way to where the lone
+robber stood. Then as silently as a ghost Donald arose, while
+Adrian bent on his knees.
+
+There was a swift movement and Donald's arm was around the
+Mexican's neck, shutting off his wind, while Adrian pulled his
+feet from beneath him. In another minute he was bound by his own
+sash and gagged with a handful of grass.
+
+"That's one!" exclaimed Donald, as he sat upon his prisoner's
+chest. "Now, how about the others?"
+
+"Not so easy, Don."
+
+"But it has to be done," declared Donald. "Scratch your head."
+
+Adrian did so, but to no avail.
+
+Time was passing and they did not know how long ere something
+would turn up, when Donald gave Adrian a kick.
+
+"Look! They're getting uneasy."
+
+This was undoubtedly true, as the men were moving about and one
+of them even had the temerity to light a cigarette.
+
+Then of a sudden Adrian spoke.
+
+"I've got it!" he exclaimed under his breath. "Help drag this
+chap farther away."
+
+They picked him up bodily and carried him fifteen or twenty feet.
+
+"Now, listen," said Adrian, "both of you. You, Don, sneak as near
+the horses as you dare. I'll give you just five minutes by my
+watch. Then I am going to give this man one chance for his life.
+I am going to take the gag from his mouth and let him give one
+call for help. If he makes another sound, it will be his last."
+
+"Then what?"
+
+"Those fellows have waited so long that they are tired. They will
+all rush to where they expect to find him. Then you will rush in
+and cut the tethers. By the time they find this man I will be
+with you. Sabe?"
+
+"Good!" from Donald. "I'm off."
+
+In exactly five minutes by his watch Adrian gave the prisoner a
+rough shake.
+
+"You know what I said?"
+
+The man nodded his head.
+
+"Well, I am now going to take out your gag. If you make more than
+one cry, or utter more than one word, your own knife will finish
+you."
+
+He held the knife before the man's eyes. Then with the knife in
+one hand, Adrian pulled the wad of grass from between the
+prisoner's teeth.
+
+No sooner had the man drawn one long breath than he let out a
+yell that might have been heard half a mile and which he was
+about to repeat with variations, when with a swift movement,
+Adrian forced the grass back into his mouth and the yell died in
+a dismal gurgle.
+
+"I ought to use the knife," said Adrian, "but I guess this will
+do."
+
+With a bound he sprang to his feet and dashed to where Donald was
+already performing his part of the work.
+
+The plan had worked exactly as Adrian had figured, and in another
+moment the boys were astride the horses and away toward Vera
+Cruz.
+
+But one thing they had not taken into consideration. That single
+yell of their erstwhile prisoner had aroused the Mexican pickets
+and from half a dozen directions came the sound of rifle shots
+and then the sound of a bugle calling to arms.
+
+Even while Adrian was running toward the horses, the excitement
+had begun, and as the boys started on their homeward ride, a
+volley from the encamped forces sent the bullets whistling by
+their ears.
+
+"This is no place for us!" cried Donald. "Don't be afraid to use
+the spur. It is our only chance."
+
+And now as they rode furiously forward, came the sound of firing
+on their left and some distance ahead.
+
+"What does it mean?" called out Adrian as they rode neck and neck
+through the darkness.
+
+"Search me, Ad; but our only chance is in our horses," and Donald
+again plied the spur.
+
+Outlined against the sky at the top of a small knoll, they could
+see a small body of horsemen.
+
+"Keep away to the right," said Donald. "Keep in the valley and in
+the shadow," and he drew off the beaten highway, with Adrian
+close behind.
+
+On the soft earth their horses' hoofs made no sound and in a
+couple of minutes more they descended into a little valley and
+the noise of the alarm passed out of hearing.
+
+"It was a mighty close shave," declared Adrian a few minutes
+later, when they pulled their horses down to a walk to allow them
+to catch their breath.
+
+"Sure was," from Donald, "but we got the information we went
+after."
+
+Half an hour later they were challenged by the American pickets,
+which had been thrown even further forward than where the boys
+had passed through the lines. They stated their mission and were
+at once sent under guard to the officer of the day.
+
+"Oh, it's you!" was the lieutenant's salutation as he saw who it
+was. "Did you get what you went after?"
+
+"Yes, sir," from Donald. "The enemy has halted at Tejeria,
+fifteen miles away."
+
+"Well done. I'll send an orderly to carry the report to
+headquarters. You boys are entitled to a rest."
+
+"Where's Billie?" asked Adrian, looking around after the orderly
+had departed.
+
+"Who?"
+
+"Billie. Our chum."
+
+"Oh, yes," replied the lieutenant. "He's disappeared."
+
+"Disappeared?"
+
+"Yes. He went into this house here," pointing to the building
+before which he had stationed himself, "and when I went in later
+to see how he was coming on with his wounded horse, I found the
+horse standing in the middle of the patio, but your chum had
+disappeared."
+
+"And then what?" queried Donald.
+
+"Nothing. I made up my mind he had gone after something to put on
+his horse and I haven't thought much about him since."
+
+"Then it's up to us to find him. Can we go inside?"
+
+"Sure," laughed the lieutenant. "Go as far as you like, only keep
+inside the lines."
+
+Without more words the boys entered the patio.
+
+
+
+
+CHAPTER XVII.
+
+BILLIE GETS A SURPRISE.
+
+
+When Billie found himself looking into the muzzle of a rifle in
+the hands of Santiago, his first impulse was to call out; but the
+expression on Santiago's face caused him to remain silent.
+
+While the strange man owed his life to the lad, as is related in
+the story of the "Broncho Rider Boys with the Texas Rangers,"
+there was that in the man's face which told that he was under a
+severe mental strain, and Billie did not think it wise to presume
+upon his former friendship.
+
+Therefore, he remained quiet, waiting for Santiago to speak.
+
+If he recognized Billie, he gave no intimation of the fact; but
+in a harsh voice commanded: "Up with your hands!"
+
+Billie obeyed.
+
+"Turn to the left and march. In there," he continued a moment
+later as Billie approached an open door in the rear of the patio.
+
+Into the house Billie went--into a large room, but dimly lighted.
+Santiago followed, closing the door behind him with a kick.
+
+"Why shouldn't I shoot you down like a dog?" asked Santiago as
+soon as the door was closed.
+
+"I can't see any reason," was the reply, "except that it might
+cause you a lot of trouble when it was found out. I imagine that
+Admiral Fletcher is going to be pretty severe upon snipers and
+others who shoot Americans."
+
+"Bah!" exclaimed Santiago angrily. "I spit upon Americans! Bah!"
+
+"That's all right," Billie agreed, "if it's the way you feel
+about it."
+
+"Just because you Americans have driven away a few soldiers with
+the guns of your great fleet, you don't think you can conquer
+Mexico, do you?"
+
+"I hadn't thought much about it."
+
+"Then it's time you did, as you may never have another chance."
+
+"Well, then," explained Billie, "I'll tell you how it looks to
+me. You might a great deal better be governed by the United
+States than by a man like Huerta."
+
+"Huerta! Huerta!" fairly screamed Santiago. "He is not the
+governor of Mexico."
+
+"No," from Billie. "He calls himself the provisional president.
+In reality he is a dictator."
+
+"He is a murderer!" shouted the thoroughly excited man.
+
+"Then what are you worrying about? All that the Americans want is
+to get rid of Huerta. They don't want Mexico. Didn't you know
+that, Santiago?"
+
+"What? Who calls me Santiago? I am Ixtazhl, Prince of the Aztecs
+and guardian of the treasures of Montezuma. Who calls me
+Santiago?"
+
+In his excitement he rested the stock of his rifle upon the floor
+and bent upon Billie a gaze so fierce as greatly to disconcert
+him for the moment.
+
+But Billie was not a lad to be easily unnerved and after a moment
+he replied calmly:
+
+"I call you by the only name I know. It was the one you used on
+the Rio Grande when you sent me on a mission to Pancho Villa."
+
+"Villa! Villa!" repeated Santiago, as though trying to recall
+something that had passed from his memory. "Villa! Where have I
+heard that name before?"
+
+"On the Rio Grande is all I can tell you. Do you remember Don
+Rafael?"
+
+At mention of the name the expression on Santiago's face changed
+again, this time to one of fiercest rage.
+
+"Don Rafael!" he cried. "Don Rafael! Now I know you! You are Don
+Rafael. That is why I should kill you!"
+
+"Great Scott, no, I am not Don Rafael!" shouted Billie as
+Santiago again raised his rifle and the lad perceived that he had
+to do with a crazy man. "I'm the boy that saved your life when
+Don Rafael tried to kill you. Don't you remember?"
+
+Again Santiago lowered his weapon, and again there came upon his
+face that puzzled expression.
+
+"Tell me, Santiago--I mean Prince Iztazil, or whatever you call
+it, what are you doing here?"
+
+Santiago eyed him suspiciously, but finally laid his rifle across
+a table in the center of the room and approached nearer the lad.
+
+"Listen!" he said in a whisper. "I am the guardian of the
+treasure of Montezuma. It is to be used to free Mexico from the
+Spaniard. He must be driven out. The land belongs to the Aztec."
+
+"But where is the Aztec?" queried Billie. "I know him not."
+
+"I am he. The peons are my people. The Spaniard--bah! He owns the
+houses and he owns the lands; but he must be driven out."
+
+"Isn't that what Villa says?"
+
+"Villa? Villa?" again repeated Santiago, and again he lapsed into
+silence.
+
+For some minutes he remained motionless ere he stepped back,
+picked up his rifle and started for a door leading to a stairway.
+
+"Come!" he commanded. "I will show you."
+
+"Hadn't we better take care of the horse first?" asked Billie,
+not at all anxious to be wandering around with an armed lunatic.
+"He may die."
+
+"What is a horse when the future of Mexico is at stake, my son?
+Come with me and you shall hear a strange tale."
+
+"I have heard one already," was Billie's mental comment, but
+realizing by the term son which Santiago had applied to him that
+he was in no immediate danger and trusting to his wits to finally
+overcome the strange man should it become necessary, he followed.
+
+At the head of the stairs was another door, which Santiago opened
+and entered. It was a sort of ante-room, much like the entrance
+into a lodge room. Around the walls was a motley collection of
+firearms, swords, spears and smaller weapons.
+
+Stopping in front of one of the racks, Santiago placed his rifle
+in it, and then from another took a couple of small swords, one
+of which he handed to Billie.
+
+"This is a bug house sure enough," muttered the boy as he took
+the sword and examined it curiously. "I wonder what next?"
+
+He had not long to wait, for opening a closet, Santiago took
+therefrom two beautifully embroidered robes, one of which he
+threw over his own shoulders and the other of which he put on
+Billie.
+
+"It doesn't hardly match my hat," laughed Billie.
+
+Without a word, Santiago removed Billie's sombrero and hung it
+on a peg in the closet, which he closed.
+
+Then he opened another door and led Billie into a large,
+brilliantly lighted room, hung with the richest tapestries.
+
+"Looks like we had strayed into some Turkish bath house," thought
+Billie, "but I might as well see the thing through."
+
+"Sit here beside me, my son," Santiago finally said. "You shall
+become my heir. I will introduce you to the court."
+
+Santiago clapped his hands, as though bidding a servant to
+attend; but there was no response.
+
+He turned his head from one side to the other as though in
+amazement and again clapped his hands, this time with vigor.
+
+After a moment's delay, there was a movement behind one of the
+draperies and presently the curtain was drawn back and a man's
+face appeared.
+
+"Come hither," commanded Santiago.
+
+The man obeyed.
+
+"Where are the others?" demanded Santiago.
+
+"Oh, senor," cried the man, "the others have hidden themselves in
+the cellar!"
+
+"Slaves! Cowards!" exclaimed Santiago. "What do they fear?"
+
+"The great guns, senor. We might all be killed."
+
+"You will certainly be killed if you do not mind what I say," was
+the reply as Santiago drew his sword. "Now summon the court that
+I may introduce my son."
+
+The man bowed and left the room, and in a few minutes returned
+accompanied by two more men and several women, all arrayed in
+fantastic costumes.
+
+All bowed as they entered, and Santiago waved his hand.
+
+"This is my son and heir," he said. "Come and kiss his hand."
+
+They all came forward and kissed Billie's hand, which he held out
+in order to facilitate the job.
+
+"Now," said Santiago, "we----"
+
+"Now," interrupted Billie, "if it is all the same to you, Prince,
+we'll have supper. I haven't had a mouthful to eat since
+daylight. I'm 'most starved to death."
+
+"It is well," agreed Santiago. "It is well that my heir should
+not die of hunger. Let the table be placed."
+
+The order seemed to meet with general approval, and in the course
+of half an hour there was spread what would have proved a feast
+at any time, but which was beyond description to a hungry boy;
+and the way he waded into the food was a caution.
+
+During all this time Santiago had uttered never a word, nor would
+he eat but the smallest portion of food--a taste of every dish
+which he set before his guest.
+
+"My son tells the truth," Santiago finally remarked as Billie
+pushed back his chair with the single word "Bastante," meaning
+enough.
+
+"I always try to," was the smiling rejoinder, for Billie was now
+in the very best humor. Eating was his strong point and he had
+gone the limit.
+
+"Clear away the feast and then reassemble," was Santiago's next
+order.
+
+This order was carried into effect, and the servants also must
+have enjoyed a square meal, for it was more than an hour ere they
+again assembled, during which time Billie sank back in his chair
+and slumbered peacefully.
+
+He was finally awakened by a hand laid upon his arm.
+
+"Awake, my son," were the words he heard. "It is now time that I
+reveal to you the secret of my life. It is now time that I should
+tell you the secret of the treasure of Montezuma."
+
+"That's right, Prince," said Billie sleepily. "Let her go."
+
+Santiago regarded him interrogatively.
+
+"What said my son?"
+
+"Oh, yes, Prince. I forgot you only understood good English. Let
+her go, means proceed with the secret."
+
+"Let her go. Let her go," Santiago repeated a couple of times.
+"Yes," he continued, "I had forgotten about her."
+
+He clapped his hands and the same servant who had first appeared
+approached his chair.
+
+Santiago gave an order in a language which Billie did not
+understand, but which he imagined was Indian, and the servant
+withdrew, only to reappear a few minutes later with a young woman
+who greatly resembled Santiago and who was also arrayed in a
+gorgeous costume.
+
+She had evidently not expected to meet a stranger, for she drew
+back upon seeing Billie and the color rushed to her face.
+
+"Come hither, daughter," was Santiago's command.
+
+The young woman obeyed.
+
+"Lucia," said Santiago, "this is the honorable young man whom I
+have chosen for my heir. Henceforth consider him your betrothed.
+The marriage shall take place one new moon from to-day."
+
+"Oh, Father," cried the girl, her face becoming even more scarlet
+than before, "I cannot----"
+
+"No!" interrupted Billie, springing to his feet, "neither can I.
+You ought to be ashamed of yourself, Santiago----"
+
+"What!" cried Santiago, springing to his feet and again drawing
+his sword. "Who calls me Santiago? I am Prince Ixtazhl of the
+great Aztec nation and guardian of the treasure of Montezuma!"
+
+He raised his sword and would have stricken Billie down ere the
+boy could have prevented had not the young woman thrown herself
+between them and seized his arm.
+
+At the same instant the door from the ante-room opened and Donald
+and Adrian entered.
+
+
+
+
+CHAPTER XVIII.
+
+A MISSION FOR FUNSTON.
+
+
+"Santiago!" exclaimed Donald.
+
+"By all that's great!" from Adrian.
+
+"Help!" cried Lucia. "He will do something desperate!"
+
+Donald and Adrian sprang forward, but their assistance was not
+needed. Billie had by this time gathered his wits and in a
+twinkling the mad-man was disarmed.
+
+"Shall we bind him?" asked Adrian as they came forward.
+
+"No, indeed," replied Billie as the now helpless man sank down
+upon the chair. "He isn't dangerous."
+
+"What's it all about?" queried Donald.
+
+"Oh, nothing much! He simply wanted to make me his heir and marry
+me to his daughter."
+
+Donald and Adrian cast an admiring gaze upon Lucia, who was now
+kneeling at her father's side.
+
+"Well," said Adrian in an aside, "I don't see why you should
+object to that."
+
+"Who said I objected?" demanded Billie. "It is the young woman
+who objects."
+
+"But whoever supposed he had a daughter?" said Donald.
+
+"Not I," from Billie. "But this is certainly a queer mess."
+
+Then to Lucia: "How long has he been in this way, Senorita?"
+
+"Only a few days. Since this trouble with the Americanos."
+
+"But how could that affect him?"
+
+"It is a long story, senor. For years he has been trying to
+overthrow the government. When Madero was made president, he was
+happy. Then came that awful tragedy, by which Madero was killed.
+Since that time he has not been himself. But when it became
+evident that the United States would interfere he became as you
+have seen him to-day."
+
+"When I told him that all the United States wanted was to get rid
+of Huerta, he was much pleased," explained Billie. "That was when
+he proposed to make me his heir."
+
+Lucia's cheeks grew red, as she asked: "And did you accept his
+proposal?"
+
+"I neither accepted nor rejected. I just followed him in to see
+what would happen next."
+
+"But would you accept?" insisted Lucia.
+
+"That depends," replied Billie, with a touch of color in his own
+face. "But what had we better do now? You and I will discuss the
+other question later."
+
+"The best thing we can do," interposed Donald, "is to report to
+Lieutenant Blunt. Isn't there some place, Senorita, where your
+father can be placed for safe-keeping?"
+
+"He will be perfectly safe here with me, senors, if the servants
+are allowed to remain."
+
+"They certainly will be," declared Billie. "I will personally
+vouch for that. We have done Captain Rush a good turn to-day and
+I know he will be glad to do that much for us. And besides, the
+Americans will harm no one."
+
+Lucia gave Billie a grateful look as she replied:
+
+"Ah, senor, I shall trust it all to you. I can see that you are a
+friend of my father and I know you are telling the truth."
+
+"You bet you can trust me," was Billie's emphatic reply. "Come
+on, fellows, let's go look after my horse."
+
+In the door Billie turned:
+
+"I'll leave my robe in the cupboard, Senorita; and, if you don't
+mind, I'll ask Lieutenant Blunt to make himself at home in the
+patio."
+
+"The house is yours, senor. Do as you think best."
+
+"By George!" exclaimed Adrian as they descended the stairs to the
+patio, "this is getting serious."
+
+"What?" queried Donald.
+
+"Why this affair of Billie and the young lady we have just
+left."
+
+"Nonsense!" from Billie. "It isn't half as serious as what I saw
+at Moreno."
+
+"No!" laughed Donald. "I saw that myself; but Josie is an
+American. Hey, Ad?"
+
+"I don't think it's very nice to be making remarks about young
+ladies in their absence," retorted Adrian, bristling up.
+
+"Oh, come now, Adrian!" laughed Billie. "You started it. But what
+do you make out of Santiago?"
+
+"He's evidently a rich old chap with a bug. That's all."
+
+"Well," commented Billie, with a nod of his head, "strange things
+do happen when you travel. Who'd have thought we'd ever see the
+old chap again, and at a time like this?" and he went back to
+where Adrian and Donald had stabled the horses, to see if there
+was anything he could do for the wounded animal.
+
+When Lieutenant Blunt was made acquainted with the conditions
+prevailing in the house, he immediately took possession of the
+lower floor and from that time on until the arrival of General
+Funston with the Fifth Brigade, it was made one of the official
+residences.
+
+The week following the occupation of Vera Cruz by the American
+forces was a busy one for our boys. Because of their intimate
+knowledge with the Spanish language, they were continually in
+demand. There was never a verbal message from the American
+Admiral to some Mexican official but what they were called upon,
+and they very soon made friends of every Jackie and marine in the
+city.
+
+Ten days later the boys stood upon the wharf awaiting the arrival
+of the first boatload of General Funston's regulars from the big
+transports which had anchored in the harbor the night before.
+Because of the shallowness of the water, everything in Vera Cruz
+harbor has to be brought ashore in small boats, known as
+lighters. As the boys watched the first of these to approach
+there was something in the face and bearing of the officer in
+command which attracted their attention.
+
+"By George!" exclaimed Donald, "I seem to know that face. Don't
+you, Billie?"
+
+"Does look kind o' familiar. Where have we seen him?"
+
+"I'll tell you!" cried Adrian. "It's the lieutenant who was in
+charge of the patrol on the Rio Grande."
+
+"Lieutenant Grant!" exclaimed Billie. "Sure as you're born. Well
+this is luck!"
+
+"Luck? What do you mean?"
+
+"Why, maybe he'll be able to tell me whatever became of those
+drafts for ten thousand pounds that I took from old Don Pablo."
+
+His companions laughed.
+
+"Still thinking about that, are you?" said Donald. "Why of course
+you'll never hear of them again. The bank is simply in that
+much."
+
+"Maybe so," admitted Billie, "but I'll get something official."
+
+And he did.
+
+It was several days later, though, after the regulars had taken
+possession of the city and the navy forces had withdrawn to their
+ships. The boys were sitting in Lieutenant Grant's quarters, to
+whom they had offered their services as soon after his landing as
+they were able, and were laughing over their adventures on the
+border.
+
+"It was certainly a close call you boys had," the lieutenant was
+saying. "I'm not sure but our neutrality was mighty near a
+breaking point. What do you think, Billie?"
+
+"Possibly so; Americans will be Americans. But say, Lieutenant,
+whatever was done about those drafts I took from Don Pablo? I've
+never been called upon to tell my story, nor have they ever come
+back to me."
+
+"That's because you were out of the United States," replied
+Lieutenant Grant. "It was less than a month ago that I was asked
+if I knew your whereabouts. Uncle Sam has decided that he has no
+claim to the drafts and they were returned to me. I have them in
+my army chest. If they are any good to you, I shall be pleased to
+hand them over."
+
+"I guess they are not much use to any one," sighed Billie
+mournfully. "My father says no bank would cash them without Don
+Pablo's signature, and no one can get that."
+
+"I'm glad you take it so philosophically," laughed the
+lieutenant. "I hope you'll have better luck next time."
+
+The boys arose to leave.
+
+"Which way?" asked the lieutenant.
+
+"No place in particular. We thought we'd go home."
+
+"You mean to the United States?"
+
+"Not to-night," laughed Adrian. "Just to the house where we are
+living. It belongs to old Santiago."
+
+"Who is he?"
+
+Briefly the boys narrated what they knew about him on the Rio
+Grande, how they had met him here, and why they were staying at
+his house.
+
+"Has he no other name?"
+
+"Why, yes, I suppose so," replied Billie. "We always call him
+Prince to his face, and his daughter as the Princess Lucia. Of
+course, it is all make-believe, but it is one way of keeping him
+quiet."
+
+He called to one of Santiago's servants, whom Lucia had lent them
+to look after their horses.
+
+"Oh, Chomo!" he said. "Do you know what Santiago's surname is?"
+
+"Si, senor. It is Ojeda."
+
+"What?" cried all the boys at once. "Ojeda? Why, that was old Don
+Pablo's name."
+
+The boys stood and eyed each other in speechless wonder. The same
+thought was in all their minds.
+
+"Do you think it is possible?" asked Billie at last.
+
+"Do I think what is possible?" asked Lieutenant Grant.
+
+"Why, that Santiago could have given those drafts to the stranger
+so as not to be known in the matter."
+
+"Possibly. He seems a man of mystery."
+
+"Well," declared Billie, "I am going to find out."
+
+"How, I should like to know," asked Donald. "He's too crazy to
+remember anything, even if he wanted to tell you."
+
+"You forget Lucia," said Billie.
+
+"Oh, no, I haven't," laughed Donald, "and I have no doubt she
+would tell you all about it if she knew; but I do not believe she
+does. Santiago is too deep to have entrusted his secrets to a
+girl not yet out of her teens."
+
+"You never can tell," remarked the lieutenant. "Men with a
+hobby do strange things. You'd better ride along with me to
+headquarters. I'd like to introduce you to General Funston. He's
+a man after your own hearts. You know how he went out and
+captured Aguinaldo when he was in the Philippines."
+
+"I've read about it," replied Adrian. "It was a bold deed."
+
+"Sure was," said Donald. "We'll be mighty glad to meet him."
+
+It may also be said that General Funston was glad to meet the
+Broncho Rider Boys, especially after Lieutenant Grant told him in
+a few words of the good work they had done on the border and on
+the day that Vera Cruz was taken.
+
+"And when do you expect to return to the United States?" asked
+the general.
+
+"Just as soon as we can obtain passage," replied Donald.
+
+"I think we can arrange that for you in a few days," replied the
+general. "In the meantime come in occasionally."
+
+The boys thanked him and started to leave, when the telephone in
+the general's quarters rang. He looked for some one to answer,
+but no one being at hand, he picked up the 'phone himself.
+
+"What's that?" he asked after a brief moment. "The water works.
+You think they are attempting to cut you off. All right, I'll
+rush help."
+
+He set down the 'phone and turned to Lieutenant Grant.
+
+"The enemy has gathered in force about the water works," he said
+sharply. "They evidently intend cutting off the water supply.
+Tell Colonel Bright to send them reinforcements at once. Do you
+boys know the way there?"
+
+"Yes, sir," from all three.
+
+"Then show the men the nearest way! Now go! The safety of the
+city may depend upon you!"
+
+
+
+
+CHAPTER XIX.
+
+AN UNUSUAL RIDING PARTY.
+
+
+Flinging themselves into the saddle, the boys rode rapidly after
+Lieutenant Grant and were at Colonel Bright's quarters by the
+time the bugle had called to boots and saddle. In another minute,
+at the head of a squadron of cavalry, they dashed over the road
+they had come to know so well.
+
+What happened during the next twenty minutes is history.
+
+Guided by the boys, the reinforcements arrived opportunely to
+stop the advance of a large body of Mexicans who would have
+destroyed the water works and have left the inhabitants and the
+American troops entirely without water.
+
+A few minutes later two batteries with rapid-fire guns put in an
+appearance, and in less time than it takes to tell it, the
+Mexicans turned and fled.
+
+It was not General Funston's mission in Vera Cruz to overrun any
+more Mexican territory, so the Mexicans were allowed to retreat
+without pursuit; but the lines were strengthened so that from
+that time on there was never any danger from Huerta's forces,
+although there were numerous alarms and plenty of scout duty.
+
+During the few minutes of fighting, the boys were in the midst
+of it and all came through it without a scratch. But it was
+exciting work and when it was over they were publicly thanked by
+Colonel Bright for their good work.
+
+"Well," laughed Billie as the three rode slowly back to their
+home, "that's glory enough for one day. I don't care to be a
+soldier."
+
+"Nor I!" agreed Donald. "I prefer a quiet life on the ranch."
+
+"Which we are in a fair way to see in a few weeks," commented
+Adrian. "I have no doubt that General Funston will do as he
+agreed and find us passage."
+
+"I for one shall be glad to return to the States," said Donald.
+
+"So shall I after I have found out about Santiago's connection
+with that ten thousand pounds."
+
+"That's right," was the laughing rejoinder. "Stick to it, Billie,
+and who knows what may happen?"
+
+"Do you know," remarked Adrian slowly, "I'm beginning to be
+considerably worried for the Americans scattered throughout
+Mexico."
+
+"Why should you be?" from Donald.
+
+"I remember Pedro's words that, if the United States did
+anything, Carranza would unite with Huerta."
+
+"I don't believe he would."
+
+"Maybe not. But the Zapata brothers will think this a good time
+to make the Americans trouble. I was thinking of Mr. Black and
+Josie."
+
+"I'll bet you were," laughed Billie. "I wouldn't be surprised if
+they were thinking about you. Hey, Don?"
+
+"Well, they might do worse," said Donald. "There are worse
+fellows than Adrian."
+
+"That's right," retorted Adrian good-humoredly. "I can stand it.
+But, just the same, I wish I knew they were safe."
+
+"Well, what's the matter with our paying them a visit?" queried
+Billie.
+
+"Nix," from Donald. "We'll stay inside the lines. I've had enough
+of this bush fighting."
+
+They approached Santiago's residence, where they had decided to
+remain until they sailed, when they perceived a peon on a pony
+standing by the gate. As they drew near they recognized him as
+one of the peons who had served as Mr. Black's mozo.
+
+"Why, hello, Jose!" exclaimed Donald. "What brings you here?"
+
+The mozo drew a letter from beneath his poncho and handed it to
+Donald.
+
+"For me?" asked Donald. "I thought it must be for Adrian. I
+didn't think the----"
+
+"It is from the jefe," interrupted the mozo.
+
+"Oh, it's from Mr. Black!" with an accent on the Mr. "That's
+different."
+
+Donald opened the letter and read it hastily.
+
+"Well, by George!" he exclaimed, "what do you think of that?"
+
+"I can tell you better when I know what that is," replied Billie.
+
+"Why, Mr. Black is becoming alarmed over the activities of the
+Carranza forces and wants us to ask General Funston if he won't
+send out enough cavalry to escort him and his daughter to Vera
+Cruz in safety."
+
+"Of course we'll ask him!" exclaimed Adrian. "Let's do it at
+once."
+
+"Now wait a minute," said Donald. "Let's see about it."
+
+"What is there to see?"
+
+"There's a good deal to see. You remember our experiences on the
+Rio Grande?"
+
+"But this is different! We are at war with Mexico now."
+
+"No, we are not. We have simply seized one port as a reprisal. To
+send a cavalry force out into the country might bring on more
+trouble."
+
+"Well, I don't care!" exclaimed Adrian hotly. "I'll go and ask
+him alone if you are afraid to go with me. I'm not going to leave
+Jos--I mean Mr. Black and his daughter out there at the mercies
+of these greasers. You hear me!"
+
+"Oh, we'll go with you, all right!" said Billie. "But don't be
+surprised if you don't get what you ask."
+
+Accordingly the trio started for General Funston's headquarters.
+After some delay they were admitted to his presence and Donald
+showed him Mr. Black's letter.
+
+The general perused it carefully and then remained silently
+thoughtful for some moments.
+
+"I wish I could do what our countryman asks," he finally said,
+"but I do not see how I can. To send a force out nearly fifty
+miles, even for such a service, would be overstepping the purpose
+for which I am here. I----"
+
+"But you wouldn't leave them out there to be mistreated and
+perhaps killed, would you?" interrupted Adrian.
+
+The general smiled.
+
+"Such is not my intention; but we must plan some other way. We
+must use a little strategy."
+
+"That's right!" exclaimed Billie, "and I'll bet the man who went
+out and rounded up Aguinaldo will know how to do it!"
+
+Again the general smiled broadly, evidently well pleased at the
+implied compliment.
+
+"I'll do the best I can," he said quietly, "but I am not very
+familiar with the lay of the land. You boys have had some
+experience. Perhaps you can suggest something."
+
+Adrian said nothing, and Donald scratched his head. It was Billie
+who spoke.
+
+"I was just wondering, General," he said, "if some of the men
+wouldn't like to take a little horseback ride and see something
+of the country."
+
+"Well, now, perhaps they might," assented the general.
+
+"We could show them some mighty fine scenery, sir."
+
+"By the moonlight, I suppose?"
+
+"Yes, sir. By the moonlight and early sunrise."
+
+"And about how many would you like to take on this picnic?"
+
+"Well," replied Billie, squinting up one eye, "I was thinking
+that Adrian and I might take out about ten to-night. Then about
+the same time to-morrow night Don could take another ten. We
+would probably meet somewhere in the mountains and watch the sun
+rise."
+
+"A very nice plan," said the general, "and one of which I
+approve. You may ask Lieutenant Grant to make enquiries among the
+men in his company and see if there are any who would like to be
+given two or three days' leave for such a purpose."
+
+"Thank you, sir!" and Billie touched his hat in true military
+style.
+
+"And you might say to the lieutenant," was General Funston's
+parting words, "that I should be glad to hear later how the men
+enjoyed their ride. I think, now that the boys are down here,
+they should be given a chance to see the country."
+
+"Billie, you have the making of a great general," was Donald's
+comment as they left the general's quarters. "How did you think
+of it?"
+
+"I remembered my experience when I wanted men to help me get you
+and Ad out of trouble in Presidio. Lieutenant Grant will know all
+about it."
+
+And so he did. In less than half an hour ten regulars, some of
+them but very little older than Billie and Adrian, were ready for
+the ride which Billie had proposed and which in his mind would be
+as far as Moreno.
+
+"You are sure ten will be enough?" asked Lieutenant Grant.
+
+"Sure! Twelve Americans are enough to lick fifty Mexicans if it
+comes to that; and besides we shall have Mr. Black and Josie.
+He's as good as four."
+
+"And don't forget the reinforcements, if they are needed,"
+laughed Donald. "We will be right on the spot where we saw the
+sun rise the first morning after we left Moreno."
+
+"It looks all right," was Lieutenant Grant's comment, "but it is
+always well to have a big enough force. Success to you!"
+
+"You'll make all the necessary explanations to the crowd you
+bring out, Don," was Billie's parting words. "Adrian and I will
+explain the nature of the trip to our fellows as we ride along."
+
+This they did, and gave the soldier boys a little history of
+their own troubles in reaching Vera Cruz.
+
+"No explanations are necessary," remarked a young chap by the
+name of Brooks, a corporal. "We saw you out at the water works
+and we know you are made of the right stuff. You lead! We'll
+follow, won't we, boys?"
+
+"You bet!" replied the others in one voice.
+
+
+
+
+CHAPTER XX.
+
+ADRIAN FOILS A TRAITOR.
+
+
+It was nine o'clock of the second night that Adrian and Billie,
+accompanied by Mr. Black's mozo, Jose, and the ten troopers,
+reached the outskirts of Moreno.
+
+They had made good headway the first night, had slept in the
+hills during the day and had come this far without molestation.
+
+"If everything goes to the end as it has this far," remarked
+Corporal Brooks to Billie as they neared the little town, "it
+will be nothing but a pleasant outing, sure enough."
+
+Arriving at the edge of the town, the boys sent Jose forward to
+see how the land lay and to bring them word.
+
+"Do you think you can trust him?" asked the corporal.
+
+"We'll have to," replied Adrian. "I believe he is loyal, and Mr.
+Black seems to have complete confidence in him."
+
+"Let's hope so, anyway," said Billie. "It seems to be the best we
+can do to get word to Mr. Black of our presence."
+
+"Hurry back, Jose," urged Adrian as the mozo departed.
+
+"Si, senor," was the brief reply. "You may depend on me."
+
+"It ought not to take him more than half an hour," explained
+Billie. "It isn't more than a mile."
+
+But a half hour passed and then another and still no Jose.
+
+"Something must have happened to him," said Adrian.
+
+"That's the charitable way to look at it," laughed the corporal.
+"It's more likely, however, that he's making arrangements to have
+something happen to us."
+
+"I hardly think so," was Billie's comment, "but, if he is, we'll
+fool him."
+
+"How?"
+
+"We'll move."
+
+"But he may come back."
+
+"We'll leave one man here on guard. The rest of us will go around
+to the other side of town."
+
+"Good!" from the corporal. "You are a strategist."
+
+The plan was at once carried into effect.
+
+"Now then," said Billie, "I'm going in to town myself."
+
+"Not much," declared Adrian. "I'm going."
+
+"I'd offer to go myself," laughed the corporal, "but I don't know
+the place."
+
+"We'll toss for it," said Billie.
+
+"All right," and Adrian produced a coin. "Heads I win. Tails you
+lose."
+
+"No funny business," said Billie. "Choose heads if you want."
+
+Adrian flipped the coin. It came down heads up.
+
+"All right," agreed Billie. "Now for some set of signals."
+
+"Our old Broncho Rider whistle if I need help," said Adrian. "If
+everything is O. K., I'll give the whip-poor-will."
+
+Adrian slid from his horse.
+
+"What are you doing?" asked Billie.
+
+"I'm going afoot. I didn't spend my boyhood among the Indians for
+nothing. Good-bye!" and a moment later he disappeared in the
+fading moonlight.
+
+"Whatever the conditions," said Billie, "we'll soon know," as he
+settled back in his saddle.
+
+Running swiftly along, Adrian made straight for the barracks in
+which he knew would be found whatever soldiers might be in the
+city.
+
+"If I find everything quiet at the barracks," was his thought, "I
+can go straight to where Mr. Black is stopping without fear. If I
+find there is any disturbance, I'll be more careful."
+
+Ten minutes of running brought him to the barracks. All was as
+quiet as the hour demanded. He stood under the shadow of the back
+wall long enough to hear the sentry's call and then he turned in
+the direction of the house where the two Americans were stopping.
+
+It was only a few blocks away and he reached it without incident.
+
+"Kind o' funny," he mused, "that I haven't seen or heard a soul
+on the street. I wonder what's become of Jose?"
+
+He stopped a minute to ponder.
+
+"Things are going almost too smooth. I'll just stop a bit."
+
+He stole past the house and a moment later threw himself into the
+gutter, where he lay as one dead.
+
+The wisdom of his action soon became apparent.
+
+He hadn't been lying there two minutes until a solitary figure
+passed him and stopped in front of the house, evidently listening
+to hear what might be going on inside.
+
+A moment later he was joined by another figure. Adrian could just
+make them out in the darkness.
+
+"Have they come?" was the whispered question.
+
+"I can't tell," was the whispered reply.
+
+Adrian heard both the question and the answer distinctly.
+
+"It's Jose," he said to himself. "He knew that it was the plan
+for Billie and I both to come to the house. The traitor! I have a
+notion to shoot him in his tracks."
+
+Only the fear of creating a disturbance kept the lad from
+carrying out his notion.
+
+"Why don't you knock and tell the Gringo you are here?" was the
+next question.
+
+"They might be in there."
+
+"Well, what of that? You can tell them you were stopped by the
+guard and have just been released. That'll seem reasonable."
+
+Jose stepped to the door and knocked.
+
+There was no response and he knocked again.
+
+"Who is there?" asked a voice.
+
+"Jose. I just come from Vera Cruz. Let me in."
+
+There was a movement within and presently the door opened and
+Jose entered, closing the door behind him.
+
+Adrian slowly arose to a kneeling posture.
+
+"I wonder what the other will do now?" he wondered.
+
+He did not have long to wait, for the other knocked on the
+pavement with his gun and presently several more figures
+appeared. Adrian had just time to throw himself to the ground and
+escape detection.
+
+The men in front of the house exchanged whispered confidences and
+then all but one started to leave.
+
+"If any one attempts to leave the house," was the command, "fire!
+If any one attempts to enter, allow them to do so and then give
+the customary call."
+
+"Bueno!" was the response, and all but the one withdrew.
+
+A minute later Adrian again arose to a crouching posture and as
+the sentry cautiously approached the door, he crept up behind
+him. An instant more and he was upon the man and had him by the
+throat.
+
+The man was a wiry Mexican and evidently in training, for he
+squirmed and kicked vigorously; but Adrian's grip was too firm
+upon him and in a couple of minutes he sank down limp upon the
+ground.
+
+The noise of the scuffle must have been heard inside, for the
+door cautiously opened and a head peered out.
+
+Without a question Adrian sprang within, dragging the lifeless
+form of the sentry with him.
+
+"Quick, bar the gate!" he commanded.
+
+The command was obeyed.
+
+"Now where is Mr. Black?" he asked.
+
+"Upstairs talking with Jose."
+
+"All right. Bind this man while I go up. Don't let him escape or
+he is liable to cut your throat."
+
+"_No temer V, senor_" was the response, meaning "Have no fear."
+
+Adrian ran lightly up the stairs, revolver in hand. He heard
+voices talking and had no doubt that Jose was narrating some
+trumped-up story.
+
+"Yes, senor," he heard the mozo say, "they are expecting you. It
+is necessary that you go at once."
+
+Adrian flung open the door and covered Jose with his revolver.
+
+"Put up your hands," he commanded. Then to Mr. Black, to whom
+Jose was talking: "Take his weapons away from him, Mr. Black."
+
+Realizing at once that something was wrong, Mr. Black obeyed.
+
+"Now tie him."
+
+This was also quickly done, Mr. Black asking at the same time
+what had happened.
+
+"I can't tell you exactly, Mr. Black, but this man has betrayed
+us and we are now watched by a squad of soldiers."
+
+Mr. Black's face turned as black as his name.
+
+"Is that true?" he demanded, seizing Jose by the shoulder with
+such a powerful grip that the man cried out with pain.
+
+"Oh, senor," he cried, "don't kill me! I will tell you all."
+
+"See that you do," was the command. "One lie and I will wring
+your neck as I would a chicken. You know me."
+
+"I'll tell the truth. I told the captain at the barracks. He is
+going to capture all the Americanos and hold them for ransom and
+I am to have half."
+
+"That is evidently the truth," declared Adrian, and he proceeded
+to tell Mr. Black what was being done to get him and his daughter
+to Vera Cruz, and how Jose had played them false.
+
+For a moment it looked as though Mr. Black might wreak his
+vengeance on Jose, but after a minute he thought better of it.
+
+"You ought to die this minute," he declared, "but I'll wait till
+I have more time." Then to Adrian: "What had we better do now?"
+
+Before Adrian could reply the clear note of a bugle rang out upon
+the night air.
+
+
+
+
+CHAPTER XXI.
+
+ADRIAN HAS AN ACCIDENT.
+
+
+"What do you suppose that means?" asked Adrian.
+
+Mr. Black made no reply and a moment later the bugle call was
+repeated.
+
+"It sounds to me," said Mr. Black, "as though some fresh troops
+were coming in."
+
+"That's bad," was Adrian's comment.
+
+"Perhaps not, my lad, if we act quickly."
+
+"How so?"
+
+"The new arrivals may take up the attention of the gang of
+bandits outside and we may get away ere they return."
+
+"Good," was Adrian's comment. "Where is Miss Josie?"
+
+"Waiting in the next room with the family of my host."
+
+Mr. Black stepped to the door and called to those within. In a
+few words he explained the situation and in less than three
+minutes he and the girl were mounted and ready to ride.
+
+"Where is your horse?" he asked Adrian.
+
+"I left it with the boys at the cocoanut grove."
+
+"But we can't go and leave you here."
+
+"Of course not. I shall run alongside of your horse, holding to
+its mane, Indian fashion. Now then, are we ready?"
+
+"All ready!"
+
+The great gate was opened noiselessly and, bidding a subdued
+good-bye to the family, the three passed out into the night.
+
+"I should have throttled Jose ere I left," declared Mr. Black as
+they passed down the street.
+
+"I wish we were as safe as he is," laughed Adrian.
+
+For three blocks they wended their way as silently as possible
+and just as they came out into the open there came another bugle
+call.
+
+"That's for us," said Adrian. "There is no mistaking that
+command. Now to run for it."
+
+The two riders put spurs to their horses and Adrian bounded along
+at their side, running as lightly as an antelope. They were
+rapidly nearing the spot where the Americans were in waiting,
+when Adrian stepped into a hole and pitched forward onto his
+face.
+
+"Don't stop for me!" he called. "I'll be there as quick as you
+are!"
+
+He picked himself up and started to run, but his ankle gave him
+such a pain that he almost fainted.
+
+"Great Scott!" he exclaimed, "I've sprained my ankle."
+
+He sat down and rubbed the maimed member for a couple of minutes
+and then attempted to hobble on. It was more than he could bear
+and he sat down again.
+
+"By George," he groaned, "this is tough! I'll have to call for
+help."
+
+He gave the well-known whistle, but there was no response.
+
+He gave it again; but still no answer.
+
+"Worse and more of it," he muttered. "Something has happened to
+Billie."
+
+What it might be Adrian could not imagine, but he was sure that
+his chum was not at the appointed spot, as he was near enough to
+have heard the whistle and would surely have answered.
+
+"Well, I can't stay here. The greasers will be coming pretty
+soon. I must get along some way."
+
+He got up and walked a few steps and again sat down. There was no
+sound of a pursuit and the hoofbeats of Mr. Black's horses had
+ceased.
+
+"They have reached the grove," Adrian muttered. "I must get there
+some way."
+
+Once more he arose to his feet and took several steps and then
+sank down in a faint, so great was the pain.
+
+When he came to himself he was lying upon a matting of some kind
+and to his ears came the faint sound of a guitar, followed a few
+moments later by sounds of girlish laughter.
+
+He sat up and looked around, but could see nothing, except a ray
+of light coming in through a little crack between a couple of
+blankets that formed a curtain in a doorway.
+
+"Where in the name of common sense am I?" he muttered.
+
+He attempted to get to his feet, but the pain in his ankle
+brought him quickly to himself.
+
+"Now I remember!" he exclaimed. "I fell and sprained my ankle.
+But how did I get here?"
+
+He started to call, but at that moment the music ceased and a
+minute later he heard voices saying good night. Then a door was
+closed and immediately the curtains were thrown open and a peon
+woman stood in the door.
+
+"Oh!" she exclaimed, upon seeing Adrian sitting up and looking at
+her. "Then you are not dead?"
+
+"I should say not. Did you think I was?"
+
+"I was afraid so."
+
+"Why?"
+
+"Because your death might be laid at my door."
+
+"Evidently she hasn't discovered I am an American," thought
+Adrian. "Well, I'll not tell her until I have to."
+
+The woman turned around and called to some one in the other room
+and another figure appeared in the door--that of a girl some
+fifteen years of age.
+
+"Look, Peppita," and the elder woman pointed at Adrian.
+
+The girl gave a little scream.
+
+"_Madre mia!_" she exclaimed. "Who is it?"
+
+"I know not, my child. I found him unconscious at our back door
+and dragged him inside."
+
+"I beg your pardon," said Adrian. "I didn't know I was near any
+house."
+
+"It is a very poor one, senor. I and my daughter are all alone
+since my poor Leocadio was killed."
+
+"Who killed him?" asked Adrian, becoming interested.
+
+"The Huertistas. He was a soldier under Gen. Dorantes."
+
+"Is that so?" exclaimed Adrian. "I know Gen. Dorantes well. He is
+a fine man. But you will soon be avenged, for Huerta's days are
+short."
+
+The woman's eyes snapped.
+
+"_Es verdad?_" meaning, "Is it true?"
+
+"It certainly is. Since the Americans have taken Vera Cruz, Gen.
+Huerta will have to go. It is only a question of a few days."
+
+"_Bienissimo!_ The Americans are brave men! My Leocadio was fond
+of the Americans."
+
+"I am glad of that, senora, for I am an American."
+
+The woman and girl both started back as in fear and then came
+forward again.
+
+"How did you come here, senor?"
+
+"I fell from a horse and sprained my ankle. I tried to walk and
+must have fainted."
+
+"Have you friends in Moreno?"
+
+"I did have, but they have gone and I want to get to Vera Cruz."
+
+"Vera Cruz is a long way, senor. I never expect to go that far
+from home--me and my little Peppa."
+
+Adrian smiled.
+
+"I expect it does look like a long ways to you, senora; but it is
+not far. Do you think I can stay here with you until my ankle is
+well enough to walk? I have a little money. I will pay you
+something."
+
+"Oh, Mother!" exclaimed the girl, who now spoke for the first
+time. "You will let him stay, won't you?"
+
+"The wife of Leocadio would not turn a lame dog out, much less a
+lame boy."
+
+"_Mil gracias, senora!_" exclaimed Adrian, with much gratitude.
+"Yes, more than a thousand thanks. You will never regret it."
+
+"The wife of Leocadio is not learned," was the reply, "but she
+knows an honest youth when she sees one. Come, Peppita, let the
+young man go to sleep. We will make our bed out here."
+
+She drew the curtains together and Adrian was left alone to his
+own reflections.
+
+"By George!" he exclaimed under his breath, "if I ever get out of
+this measly country, I'll be glad. I wonder what has become of
+Billie? Of course he'll look for me, and old Don, too; but it
+looks as though it might be weeks before I could walk. Well, I
+don't care. If Mr. Black and Josie got away, that's glory enough
+for one day."
+
+He settled himself down and tried to go to sleep, but his leg
+hurt him so that he could not. In fact, the pain was so great
+that every once in a while he groaned.
+
+After a few of these groans the woman appeared in the door with
+an earthen vessel filled with hot water.
+
+"If the senor will bind this on his ankle, it will do it much
+good," she said.
+
+"I'll do anything to get rid of this pain," said Adrian.
+
+He took the jar and, dipping his handkerchief in it, bathed his
+ankle freely and finally bound the cloth around the swollen part.
+
+"There," he muttered as he at last succeeded in finding a
+comfortable position, "now I think I can get a little sleep."
+
+How long thereafter it was before he came to himself he did not
+know, but when he opened his eyes the first streak of daylight
+was creeping in through a little window.
+
+A minute later there was the rattle of musketry, followed by a
+hearty American cheer. He raised up to look out of the window,
+when the side of the room came in with a crash.
+
+
+
+
+CHAPTER XXII.
+
+A RESCUE AND A SURPRISE.
+
+
+It would be hard to describe Adrian's surprise at the unexpected
+event which closed the preceding chapter. His first thought was
+that a cannon ball had struck the house, but a second thought
+convinced him that such was not the case. Before he had time to
+think further he heard a big voice call out:
+
+"Here he is!"
+
+A moment later Mr. Black burst in through the opening in the wall
+and, picking Adrian up in his arms as though he had been a baby,
+started on a run with him for the nearest horse.
+
+"There you are!" he exclaimed as he set the boy on the horse.
+"Now to run for it!"
+
+Adrian needed no second bidding, but digging his heels into the
+horse's side he dashed away toward the cocoanut grove, his flight
+being protected by the Americans with Billie at their head.
+
+A couple of minutes after, the entire band had rallied in the
+shelter of the trees, where they stopped to plan for the next
+move.
+
+"How did you ever find me?" asked Adrian as he and Billie peered
+out toward the town.
+
+"Mr. Black knew about where he lost you and we tracked you by
+your trail. Whoever dragged you into the house, left a trail as
+wide as your body."
+
+"It was a woman," explained Adrian, "and she was hiding me. But
+where were you when I whistled for help?"
+
+"That's a long story," was the reply, "which I will tell you when
+we have time; but briefly we were on the other side of the town,
+where we left the man on guard. It appears that our friend Jose
+was a first-class traitor."
+
+"As I discovered," said Adrian.
+
+"Yes," continued Billie, "he sent a bunch of soldiers to capture
+us. The sentry heard them coming and gave the alarm. We went to
+his aid and succeeded in rescuing him, but that is what got us
+into this trouble."
+
+"And now what?"
+
+"Now we have to get away just as soon as we can."
+
+"Right," said Mr. Black. "There is no enemy in sight at this
+moment and the best thing we can do is to run for it. If we can
+cross the valley safely, we shall have little trouble."
+
+"I'd like to stay and give them a few shots," said the corporal,
+"but it would probably be unwise."
+
+"I'll tell you what, Brooks," suggested Billie, "suppose you and
+I remain behind until we see the others well across the valley.
+If there is any pursuit, we can hold them back for a few
+minutes. They will not know how many we are and it will give the
+others a chance to escort Mr. Black and his daughter to a place
+of safety. You know that is what we really came for."
+
+"Fine!" was the corporal's reply.
+
+Mr. Black and Adrian protested, but they were overruled.
+
+"It's a good idea," said the oldest of the troopers, "and now to
+run for it."
+
+It was fully five minutes after the others had left that Billie
+and Brooks saw the Mexican infantry, some fifty in number, emerge
+from the town and come slowly toward them.
+
+Looking across the valley, they could perceive that the little
+band under the direction of Mr. Black was nearing the protection
+of the forest that covered the next hillside.
+
+"Two minutes more and they will be safe," said Billie.
+
+"Then we'll give them the two minutes," replied the corporal.
+"Cut loose at the bunch as soon as it is near enough."
+
+A moment later two rifles spoke out and then they turned loose
+their automatics, to give the impression of a much larger force.
+
+Two men fell and a minute later two more, as the boys'
+Winchesters again spoke.
+
+"Now for the horses!" cried Billie as the Mexicans threw
+themselves upon the ground.
+
+They sprang to their horses and dashed away down the valley.
+
+They were not discovered until they had cleared the shelter of
+the trees and then a volley was fired after them. The bullets
+sang all around them, but they escaped unhurt, and before another
+volley they were out of range.
+
+"It's a good thing for us that they have no cavalry," said Brooks
+as they sped along.
+
+"Sure is," was the response, "and I hope they don't succeed in
+getting word ahead of us."
+
+"We'll fix that," said Brooks. "We cross the railroad just at the
+foot of the hill and I'll climb up and cut the telegraph wires."
+
+"They may have sent word already."
+
+"Hardly. They may have tried to, but it's dollars to doughnuts
+that there was nobody at Joachin or Rio Blanco to receive it. The
+nearest night operator, I imagine, is at Piedras Negras."
+
+"They may send a force from there to head us off," suggested
+Billie.
+
+"That's so; but I'm not sure whether Piedras Negras is held by
+the Carranza or the Huerta forces."
+
+"It's a terrible mix-up, isn't it?" laughed Billie. "But I guess
+either side would be glad to get us."
+
+They had reached the tracks by this time and a couple of minutes
+later Brooks was up a pole and with the aid of his bayonet broke
+the wires.
+
+"If it isn't too late, that'll hold 'em for a while," he remarked
+as he descended from the pole and mounted his horse.
+
+When they joined the main company, Billie told Mr. Black what
+they had done and repeated to him what Brooks had said.
+
+"I think he is right," said Mr. Black, "and my advice is that we
+should give Piedras Negras a wide berth."
+
+"We can't get too far away from the railroad," explained Billie,
+"or we shall miss Don and his company. They are coming out for
+just such an emergency."
+
+They rode rapidly forward for a couple of hours and then, turning
+sharply off the highway, took to the woods which now grew dense
+all along the mountain sides.
+
+About ten o'clock they stopped for breakfast and then all took a
+nap until the sun drew near the western horizon.
+
+"We should reach our rendezvous with Don about dark," explained
+Billie, "and that would get us into Vera Cruz about daylight."
+
+As they approached the appointed spot, Billie and Adrian, ever on
+the alert, noticed almost as one that the place had a changed
+appearance and mentioned it to the others.
+
+"What do you mean?" asked the corporal.
+
+"I can't exactly explain," was Adrian's reply, "but my prairie
+training always warns me to go slow when I sense danger."
+
+"A mighty good idea," muttered one of the troopers, an old
+campaigner who had seen service with Funston in the Philippines.
+"These are slippery chaps."
+
+"If I could walk," was Adrian's comment, "I'd soon find out what
+is wrong; but you can't scout on horseback."
+
+The cavalcade came to a halt and the men examined their weapons
+to be sure they were in order.
+
+"What do you think we'd better do, Ad?" queried Billie.
+
+"I don't know. How far are we from the rendezvous?"
+
+"Not more than half a mile."
+
+"If it were not for the possibility of making matters worse,"
+suggested Adrian, "I'd fire a few shots; but of course what we
+want is to get into Vera Cruz without a fight. What do you think,
+Mr. Black?"
+
+"This is new business to me, boys," was the reply. "I'll have to
+leave it to you."
+
+"What's the matter with my going on a scout?" asked Billie.
+
+"Nothing the matter with your going," laughed Adrian, "but there
+might be with your coming back. No, I shall have to go, ankle or
+no ankle."
+
+He slid from his horse, and almost before any one realized what
+he was doing he had slipped away on his hands and knees.
+
+"He is certainly a brave boy," was Josie's remark, "and I hate to
+think of his taking all this risk on my account."
+
+"Not so much risk for him as for us, I'm thinking," muttered the
+old trooper. "They are looking for mounted men--if they're
+looking at all--and not for crawling boys."
+
+The old trooper was right, and ten minutes later Adrian returned
+to say that there was a small body of horsemen at the next turn
+of the road.
+
+"Did you see anything of Don?" queried Billie.
+
+"Not a sign."
+
+"That's mighty funny. Where do you suppose he can be?"
+
+"He may be hiding back in the woods, just as we are."
+
+"Well," said the corporal, "now that we know where the greasers
+are, what's the matter of going forward?"
+
+"No matter at all," replied Adrian. "We can easily bear away to
+the left and give them the shake, but I don't know what to do
+about the others."
+
+"The others will have to look out for themselves," replied
+Brooks. "They are able to do it."
+
+The words had hardly left his lips ere there came the sound of a
+single shot away to the left.
+
+"There they are!" cried Billie. "Come on!"
+
+The little cavalcade started forward, but ere they had gone a
+dozen rods they could hear the sound of approaching horsemen,
+crashing through the woods to their right.
+
+"The Mexicans!" said Adrian.
+
+"To cover, every man!" cried the corporal.
+
+A minute later every horse lay flat on the ground with his rider
+concealed behind him.
+
+
+
+
+CHAPTER XXIII.
+
+A DINNER AND ITS RESULT.
+
+
+With a shout the Mexicans broke into the clearing which the
+Americans had just left. They were a motley crowd, not much like
+the cavalry that forms such a great part of Uncle Sam's army.
+
+"It seems a shame to hurt them," muttered the corporal. "They
+look as though they would run if you said boo!"
+
+Seeing no one, the Mexicans, some twenty or twenty-five in
+number, came to a halt and their leaders held a council of war.
+
+The Americans, a couple of rods back in the woods, partly
+concealed by the trees and partly by the deepening twilight,
+watched them silently.
+
+After a couple of minutes' confab, the captain of the band gave
+an order which the boys could not hear and a couple of Mexicans
+dismounted and began carefully to examine the ground. They were
+looking for the prints of horses' hoofs.
+
+"_Aqui'sta!_" exclaimed one of the men on foot, pointing to the
+ground.
+
+The captain drew near and leaned over from his horse to see more
+clearly.
+
+He was evidently satisfied, for he straightened up and gave
+another command and the two horsemen sprang to their saddles.
+
+Another command and every man's sabre flashed in the air.
+
+Raising his own sabre aloft, the captain was about to give
+another command, when there was the sound of a single shot from
+the rear and the captain's sabre went flying from his hand,
+struck by a rifle ball.
+
+"_Carramba!_" he cried. "_Emboscado!_" meaning "an ambush," and
+putting spurs to his horse he turned and fled in the direction
+from which he had come, followed by the entire band, while the
+Americans fired a volley into the air.
+
+"They'll never stop running," laughed the corporal, "until they
+reach home--wherever that is."
+
+"And in the meantime we'll get out of here," said Mr. Black.
+
+The men sprang to their feet and to their horses. At the same
+moment there came from the woods to the left the well-known
+whistle of the Broncho Rider Boys.
+
+"It's Don!" cried Billie, as he gave the answering call, and an
+instant later Donald came into view through the trees, closely
+followed by half a score of Uncle Sam's troopers.
+
+"Just too late," said Adrian.
+
+"Too late for what?" queried Donald.
+
+"To see a masterly retreat," and in a few words he told Donald
+what had occurred.
+
+"Well," was the rejoinder, "I am glad no blood was shed. But who
+fired the shot from the rear?"
+
+"I," came a voice, and out of the shadows appeared a figure which
+had a most familiar appearance. "If you don't recognize me," he
+continued, "you may recognize Ambrosio."
+
+"By George!" exclaimed Billie, "if it isn't our old friend
+Strong. Where on earth did you come from?"
+
+"I suppose I might ask you the same thing," was the laughing
+reply. "Briefly, I am on my way to Vera Cruz. I heard there was a
+band of American brigands out in the mountains and I thought I
+might fall in with them."
+
+"So that's what they call us, is it?" said Billie. "I never
+expected to be called a brigand."
+
+"Strange things happen to men who travel," declared Strong
+facetiously; "but you'd better be going. There are some good
+troops in this section and they are on the lookout."
+
+"Good advice," muttered the old trooper. "This ain't no pleasure
+excursion."
+
+"Sorry we haven't a horse for you," said Adrian to Strong, "but I
+guess you are used to walking."
+
+"A good deal more so than riding. But, if one of you don't mind
+giving Ambrosio a lift, it will help some."
+
+Several expressed their willingness to take the ape on behind,
+but he would go to no one but Billie.
+
+"All right, old man," laughed the boy; "but no funny business,"
+and he broke off a twig and shook it at Ambrosio. "You see this."
+
+Now that the two companies had united, they broke away from the
+railroad and made a bee line toward Vera Cruz, arriving in sight
+of the city at daybreak.
+
+"Here's where we part company with the troopers," explained
+Donald. "We six and Ambrosio will ride into town together and the
+boys will come in as they wish. There must be no suggestion of a
+military expedition."
+
+"I see," said Mr. Black, "and I want to thank you all for your
+kindness to my daughter and to me. That is about all I can do
+now. Perhaps some day I can do more."
+
+"That's enough," muttered the old trooper, "unless you can get us
+all sent back home. I can't see any use of keeping us here."
+
+"That's all right, old man," laughed the corporal. "You know you
+would not go home if you could."
+
+"Better not give me a chance," was the grumbling reply, as the
+trooper bit off a big piece of tobacco and tucked it away in his
+cheek.
+
+Reveille was just sounding when the boys, accompanied by their
+three friends and Ambrosio, perched upon Billie's horse, drew up
+in front of Lieut. Grant's quarters. They had been recognized and
+passed through the lines, and as the men caught sight of them
+they were given a hearty cheer.
+
+"You seem to have made friends," laughed the lieutenant as he
+greeted them, "and there is every reason why you should. The
+general will be glad to see you and hear your report. I have no
+doubt you have a good story to tell, and he likes a good story."
+
+When the boys reached home they found the gate still locked,
+although it was now considerably past the time when the household
+was astir. Their knock was answered by the _portero_, who, in
+response to a question by Billie, said that Santiago was
+seriously ill and had been for thirty-six hours.
+
+"What is the matter?" asked Donald.
+
+"Fever."
+
+"I am not surprised," declared Adrian. "The strange thoughts he
+has been thinking so many days were bound to result in something
+serious."
+
+"Perhaps it is not convenient for us to remain here," said Mr.
+Black. "We can, I am sure, find some other place."
+
+But at this moment Lucia appeared at the head of the stairs.
+When made acquainted with Mr. Black's words she would not hear of
+his taking Josie to any other house and gave orders for making
+her perfectly at home. The only one who did not remain was
+Strong.
+
+"I'll come back this evening," he said. "I have a strange story
+to tell you boys and I may need your help in locating a man I am
+most anxious to find."
+
+But he did not come back that evening, and when he did come the
+next night the boys were not there, having been invited to dine
+with Gen. Funston. Had things not happened thus, a part of this
+story could never have been written, for it was while dining with
+the general that the boys were given a duty to perform, which was
+the most arduous of all their adventures in the land of the
+Montezumas.
+
+And this was the manner of it.
+
+They were just finishing dinner and Billie was congratulating
+himself that he had had his fill of good American cooking, when
+an aide announced that a Mexican gentleman, Don Esteban Mendoza,
+craved an immediate audience with Gen. Funston.
+
+"I am sure you young gentlemen will excuse me a few minutes,"
+said the general, "as Don Esteban is one of the prominent bankers
+of the city and I know his business must be of importance."
+
+The boys were glad to accept the proffered excuse and the general
+withdrew, leaving them in the company of several members of his
+staff, to whom they briefly related their recent adventure. When
+they told of the "ambush" there was much amusement.
+
+In the midst of their conversation the general returned
+accompanied by Don Esteban.
+
+"These are the young gentlemen to whom I referred," explained the
+general, introducing the boys. "They are typical Americans and,
+being civilians and speaking Spanish fluently, will be just the
+ones to help you in your trouble."
+
+Then to the boys: "Don Esteban has a very delicate mission for
+which he asks the assistance of Americans. He wished me to detail
+three young officers for the work, but this I do not feel I can
+do, as it is strictly a private mission. If you feel that you can
+undertake it, he will be glad to explain it to you."
+
+"Anything that you recommend, General, we shall be glad to
+undertake," replied Donald, acting as spokesman for the trio.
+
+"Then I shall turn you over to Don Esteban, and as his business
+is pressing, I will excuse you if you wish to accompany him
+home."
+
+"A thousand thanks, General," said Don Esteban effusively. Then
+to the boys: "My automobile is at the door. If you will take
+seats in it, we shall be speedily at my house. You will pardon me
+if I speak nothing but Spanish, as I know very little English,
+although"--with an expressive glance at Gen. Funston--"I hope to
+know it better."
+
+Following Don Esteban, they were soon speeding through the
+streets and five minutes later entered a handsome patio.
+
+"This is my house," said Don Esteban. "Be pleased to consider it
+your own. Now, if you will follow me to the library, I will
+explain the mission I wish you to undertake."
+
+The boys followed without a word, but as they passed up the
+stairs Billie muttered under his breath:
+
+"Did you notice, boys, that this house backs right up against
+Santiago's?"
+
+
+
+
+CHAPTER XXIV.
+
+DON ESTEBAN'S STRANGE LOSS.
+
+
+"Before I explain to you the mission I wish you to undertake,"
+said Don Esteban, "I must narrate briefly a story that has been
+handed down from the days of Montezuma. It is to the effect that
+when the Spanish conqueror, Cortez, was about to capture the City
+of Mexico, most of the treasure of the Aztecs was sunk in the
+lake, which at that time covered a portion of the Mexican
+plateau.
+
+"A part of this treasure is said to have been recovered, but the
+mine from which the gold of Montezuma was taken has never been
+discovered, although search has been made for upward of five
+hundred years. Some have supposed that the mine was adjacent to
+the City of Mexico and that it was flooded at the time the
+treasure was sunk in the lake. Others have thought it was located
+in the state of Michoacan, while still others have believed it
+located in the vicinity of Mt. Orizaba.
+
+"My reason for telling you this is that some years ago a strange
+appearing man came to our bank and made a large deposit of money,
+all in gold. He did not deposit it all at once, but brought it in
+a few thousand dollars at a time until it amounted to more than a
+million dollars. Then he disappeared and we have never seen him
+since."
+
+"And has he never called for any of the money?" asked Billie.
+
+"Not in person, although he has drawn upon it at frequent
+intervals. The name under which it was deposited is James Moon."
+
+"An American?" asked Donald.
+
+"I could not say whether he was an American or an Englishman. We
+took him for the latter. But now I am coming to the real part of
+the story.
+
+"In addition to the money which he deposited, he also left with
+us a small brass-bound box, in which he said there were valuable
+papers. He gave orders that it should be delivered to no one but
+himself in person, or until the expiration of ten years. The ten
+years will be up in a few days and this afternoon I bethought me
+of the box. But when I went into the vault in which it has been
+kept for so many years, the place upon an upper shelf, where it
+has always stood, was vacant. The box was gone!"
+
+"Gone?" exclaimed all the boys in unison. "Do you mean stolen?"
+
+"So it would appear."
+
+"How could it have been done?" asked Adrian.
+
+"I cannot say; but the strange thing about the whole matter
+is that in place of the box, there lay upon the shelf an
+envelope--yellow with age, upon which was written in ink that had
+scarcely faded the words: 'Montezuma's Mine.'"
+
+"Well, what do you think of that?" queried Billie, looking at the
+others in amazement.
+
+"I don't think," laughed Adrian. "It's up to you to do the
+thinking."
+
+"Is there no clue whatever?" asked Donald.
+
+"Not that could be really called a clue. The only suspicious
+thing that has happened to-day at all, was that a mountebank came
+into our bank----"
+
+"A mountebank!" from all.
+
+"Yes."
+
+"Did he have an ape with him?"
+
+"No! He was quite alone. He did not come in to make merry, but to
+get a bill changed. While he was there he was observed to
+scrutinize the place very closely."
+
+"But he did not go into your vault?"
+
+"No! He took his change and went peaceably out."
+
+"Then, why should you suspect him?" insisted Donald, casting a
+knowing glance at the other boys.
+
+"Because, an hour later, he came in again and said that one of
+the bills we gave him as change was a counterfeit."
+
+"Was it?"
+
+"No, it was not, although it was an old issue. The teller who
+waited upon him had no recollection of ever having seen the bill
+before, but rather than have a scene, we gave him another bill
+for it."
+
+"How large a bill was it?" asked Adrian.
+
+"Only a peso"--that is a dollar--"and it seemed hardly worth
+talking about; but you'd have thought it was a hundred."
+
+"Perhaps it seemed a large amount to him," ventured Billie.
+
+"Perhaps," admitted Don Esteban. "But be that as it may, I should
+like to see the man again, and especially would I like to know
+where he got that old dollar."
+
+"Why?"
+
+"Because it may have come out of that box."
+
+"Well, yes," said Donald, with a shake of his head, "it might
+have; but how could the mountebank have gotten the box?"
+
+"That is the mystery," was Don Esteban's reply.
+
+"And how do you wish us to help you?" asked Adrian.
+
+"Why," explained the banker, "I asked Gen. Funston to find the
+mountebank for me. He said you boys would do better than any one
+else."
+
+"But why us? Why not a Mexican policeman?"
+
+"Because the mountebank was an American. He may even have been a
+soldier and have hidden himself among your men."
+
+"Oh, he was an American, was he?" laughed Donald. "Then I believe
+we can put our finger on him with ease. But the man we have in
+mind always carried with him an ape."
+
+"Then it may not be the same," replied Don Esteban, "for this one
+had no ape with him either time."
+
+"It certainly does look like a mystery," was Adrian's comment.
+"Where is the vault from which the box was taken?"
+
+"On the other side of the patio."
+
+"May we examine it?"
+
+"Certainly. I'll show it to you now."
+
+Don Esteban led the way downstairs and across the patio. Opening
+the rear door of the bank, he escorted them within and closed the
+door.
+
+Passing behind the counter, he opened the iron door of the vault,
+disclosing within a good-sized chamber, in the rear of which was
+set the great steel safe, locked with a time lock.
+
+"There," explained Don Esteban, pointing to an upper shelf, "is
+where the box stood."
+
+"Oh, it was not a large box, then!" said Adrian.
+
+"Oh, no! Not more than eight or nine inches cube."
+
+The boy examined the vault carefully by the light of a gas jet.
+
+"There seems no way that any one could have entered except by the
+door," said Donald.
+
+"None whatever!"
+
+"You are sure there is no opening in the ceiling?"
+
+"Absolutely."
+
+Don Esteban led the boys out and locked the door of the vault.
+
+"Well," declared Donald as they came out into the patio after
+finishing their inspection, not only of the vault but of the rest
+of the office, "I guess we had better go home and study over the
+matter a little. I should not be surprised if we could put our
+hands upon the mountebank with very little trouble; but I feel
+sure he had nothing to do with the disappearance of the box."
+
+"I wish I could feel that way," said Adrian after they were out
+of hearing of Don Esteban. "I have never quite trusted Strong.
+There is something strange about him."
+
+"Yes, he is a bit queer; but how on earth could he have stolen
+the box if he did not even go behind the counter?"
+
+"He couldn't; but still I mistrust him."
+
+"I wonder where Ambrosio was all this time?" mused Billie.
+
+"Tied up at home, most likely. An American among Americans would
+hardly feel like traveling around with a hand organ and a
+monkey," was Don's emphatic reply.
+
+Upon arriving at Santiago's residence they were told that
+Strong had been there earlier in the evening and seemed much
+disappointed at not finding them at home.
+
+"Did he leave any word?" asked Billie of the portero.
+
+"None, senor; but Donna Lucia would like to see you in the
+library."
+
+"What is the matter? Is Santiago worse?"
+
+"No, senor. He is sleeping quietly. I could not say what she
+wants, but she seemed considerably disturbed."
+
+"Better go up alone, Billie," said Donald. "If we are needed, you
+can call us. We'll wait here in the patio for a few minutes
+before we turn in."
+
+Billie ran up the stairs and tapped at the library door. He was
+immediately admitted by Lucia and the door was closed behind him.
+
+"It is getting to be a good deal of a family affair," laughed
+Adrian.
+
+"Yes," replied Donald, with a grin. "I wonder where Josie and Mr.
+Black are?"
+
+Adrian colored.
+
+"I don't know why you should have thought of them!"
+
+"Oh," replied Donald nonchalantly, "speaking of family affairs
+naturally reminded me that you----"
+
+"Oh, Don!" came Billie's voice, breaking in upon the
+conversation.
+
+"Yes. What is it?"
+
+"Come up here, the both of you! Quick!"
+
+The boys ran up the stairs two steps at a time.
+
+"In here," and Billie held the library door open. "I've something
+I want to show you."
+
+He led the way to the table, and there, under the glow of the
+lamp, stood a brass-bound box about eight or nine inches cube.
+
+
+
+
+CHAPTER XXV.
+
+DONALD IS KIDNAPED.
+
+
+"Great Scott!" was the spontaneous exclamation of both the
+newcomers. "Where did it come from?"
+
+"You tell," replied Billie. "Lucia says it was not here an hour
+ago. Neither has any one been in the room so far as she knows."
+
+"Has she been here all the time?" asked Adrian.
+
+"No, she was with Josie in her room for a time; but the door into
+the patio was locked."
+
+"Some one might have come in through the window."
+
+"A fat chance, isn't there!" laughed Billie, pointing to the only
+window in the room which was protected with long and heavy iron
+bars, set so closely together that a child would have had trouble
+in squeezing through--much less a man.
+
+"Does look a little difficult," replied Adrian.
+
+"Worse than difficult. Impossible," was Donald's comment.
+
+"Did you hear any noise?" asked Billie of Lucia.
+
+"None whatever."
+
+"And you have never seen the box before?"
+
+Lucia wrinkled her brows and thought deeply.
+
+"Do you know," she finally said, "I have a sort of a dim
+recollection that, away back in my childhood somewhere, I have
+seen it or one just like it."
+
+"Away back in your childhood," laughed Donald, "couldn't have
+been so very far, Senorita."
+
+Lucia made a little grimace.
+
+"I'm nearly seventeen," she said.
+
+"Botheration!" said Billie. "We are not here to discuss ages, but
+to find out how this box came here. I have no doubt that Lucia
+has seen many similar boxes in her time."
+
+"Well," asked Donald, somewhat nettled, "what do you propose to
+do?"
+
+"In the first place, I want to search the house."
+
+"That's a good idea," declared Adrian. "Donna Lucia, will you
+lead the way?"
+
+"Certainly. Right this way; but don't go into father's room. I
+know there is no one in there. One of the servants has been with
+him every minute of the time."
+
+Headed by Lucia, the boys explored the house from top to bottom,
+but not a sign of any one could they find. So far as they could
+determine, the box must have come in of its own self.
+
+"I'll tell you one thing we can and must do," said Billie, after
+they had returned to the library. "We must keep a watch in this
+room to-night. Whoever put the box here may return."
+
+"Right!" from Don. "You do have occasional lucid intervals,
+Billie."
+
+Billie grinned, but made no reply.
+
+"I think we may all stay here for a few hours," suggested Lucia.
+"Father is so much better that I think we may have a little
+music. I will play some accompaniments on the guitar and Josie
+can sing."
+
+"That will seem a good deal like being back in the States,"
+declared Adrian. "With the Stars and Stripes flying over my head,
+a brigade of American troops on guard and an American girl
+singing, I can almost forget I am on Mexican soil."
+
+"How about the accompanist?" queried Billie.
+
+"Oh!" laughed Adrian, "we're quite willing to adopt her. Hey,
+Donald?"
+
+"Don't ask me, Ad. Ask Billie."
+
+"I am sure we could do no better," was Billie's gallant reply.
+
+Lucia's suggestion was carried out and for a couple of hours
+there was a merry little party under Santiago's hospitable roof.
+Even the mysterious box was forgotten and the young people were
+giving themselves up to a jolly good time, when suddenly there
+came a scream which caused every one to turn their eyes toward
+the room in which the sick man was supposed to be lying.
+
+But there in the doorway he stood, his long night robe reaching
+nearly to the floor and his thin black hair standing almost on
+end.
+
+"Father!" cried Lucia, rushing toward him "What is it?"
+
+He waved her off, but made no reply, while with his long bony
+finger he pointed at the brass-bound box.
+
+"Where did it come from?" he asked in a shrill, querulous tone.
+"Who brought back my secret casket?"
+
+"Yours?" came from every one in the room.
+
+"Yes! Mine! Mine!!" he almost screamed.
+
+"He's raving!" cried Josie. "Can't some one do something for
+him?"
+
+"No," he replied, and his voice became more calm, "I am not
+raving. I know whereof I speak. Quick! Let me look within it to
+see that all is safe."
+
+"It is locked, Father," said Lucia, coming to his side, "and we
+have no key."
+
+"I can unlock it," he cried. "I can unlock it. Give it to me.
+Give it to me."
+
+He staggered forward and seized the box in his hands. For several
+seconds he fumbled with it, turning it first upon one side and
+then upon another, and at last raised the lid. He thrust in his
+hand and then stopped as one stupefied.
+
+"Empty! Empty!" he gasped in an almost audible whisper. "The plan
+of Montezuma's mine is gone! Gone!!"
+
+A moment he stood and gazed around upon the faces of those in the
+room and then collapsed upon the floor.
+
+Quickly the boys picked him up and carried him to his bed and the
+attending physician was summoned.
+
+Billie picked up the box and examined it curiously.
+
+"I wonder how he opened it?" he mused. "There must be some sort
+of a spring somewhere."
+
+He felt the box all over, but could find nothing. Then he closed
+it and set it upon the table. A moment later Donald picked it up
+and tried to open it, but it was locked fast.
+
+"Nothing but mysteries," he said. "I'm getting tired of them. But
+before anything else happens, I'm going around and notify Don
+Esteban that the box is here."
+
+"I'll go with you," said Adrian.
+
+"No, you'd better stay here. I'll take a mozo with me."
+
+He ran hastily down the stairs and a minute later the boys heard
+the gate close behind him.
+
+"I guess this is the quickest way," thought Donald as he gained
+the sidewalk. "I'll not bother with a mozo. With American
+soldiers on guard and my automatic in my pocket, I have nothing
+to fear."
+
+A couple of minutes later he was ringing the bell at Don
+Esteban's house. He was hastily admitted and at once conducted to
+that gentleman's presence, where he narrated hastily what had
+occurred at the other house.
+
+"Who is this old man?" Don Esteban asked of Donald.
+
+Donald explained as best he could.
+
+"Which is mighty little," he declared when he had finished. "He
+is the greatest mystery we have ever encountered. There is no
+doubt that he is an Indian, but he speaks English like an
+Englishman."
+
+"I must go and see him at once," declared Don Esteban, rising.
+
+"I don't think you can, sir, to-night. I don't think the
+physician would permit it."
+
+"Well, then, the first thing in the morning. I thank you, young
+sir. Won't you have a glass of wine before you go?"
+
+"No, I think not," replied Donald. "I've never acquired that
+Mexican habit yet. Good night, sir."
+
+He left the house feeling greatly relieved that he had reported
+the finding of the box and walked slowly along whistling merrily.
+As he turned off the street upon which Don Esteban lived he heard
+soft footsteps behind him and turned hastily.
+
+But he was too late.
+
+Before he could see who it was, or ere he could cry out, a cloak
+was thrown over his head and he was picked up and carried away
+bodily.
+
+Donald was not the boy to give in without a struggle, but kick
+and squirm as he might, he could not free himself. Presently
+those who were carrying him stopped and laid him on the sidewalk.
+Then he heard a knock and a gate opened. Then he was lifted up
+again and, almost before he knew it, he was thrust into a little
+room--a closet it seemed--and the door closed upon him.
+
+It was a hot night and the little place was stifling.
+
+"I'll smother if I don't get out of this," he muttered.
+
+Slowly he unwrapped the cloak from about his head and at last
+freed himself completely from its folds; but he secured little
+relief from the heat.
+
+The room could not have been more than six feet square and it did
+not take Donald long to run his hand clear around the wall.
+
+There was only one door, that through which he had been thrust,
+and it was locked. He pounded upon it, but to no avail. Then he
+sat down to think.
+
+"There is certainly no use to sweat myself to death," he told
+himself. "I'd better be as quiet as I can. There is air enough
+coming under the door so I won't suffocate, so I might just as
+well wait and see what will turn up."
+
+He ran his hand all over his automatic and found it in good
+shape. Then he leaned back against the wall opposite the door and
+waited. Ten minutes later the door was suddenly yanked open,
+another figure was bundled into the closet and the door slammed
+shut, almost before Donald could think.
+
+
+
+
+CHAPTER XXVI.
+
+A PLOT AGAINST FUNSTON.
+
+
+A muttered imprecation was the only intimation that the figure
+which had been so unceremoniously bundled into the closet was
+alive.
+
+"Who are you?" asked Donald in Spanish.
+
+"Let me out of this," was the unsatisfactory response in English.
+
+"Oh!" from Donald. "You are an American. Well, keep still and
+I'll help you to get rid of the blanket."
+
+He grabbed hold of the covering and the newcomer was soon
+uncovered.
+
+"Now, then, who are you?" asked Donald again.
+
+"I'll show you who I am if I get hold of you," was the uncivil
+answer, and an arm shot out.
+
+"Now look here," said Donald, "if you don't stop that I'll let
+daylight through you. We are in a bad box and the only thing to
+do is to make the best of it."
+
+"We?" exclaimed the newcomer. "Why do you say we?"
+
+"Because I am a prisoner the same as you are. Now, who are you?"
+
+"I'm Lieutenant Grimes of the general's staff. Who are you?"
+
+"I am Donald Mackay, on a special mission for Gen. Funston."
+
+"How did they get you?"
+
+"Kidnaped me on the street. How did they get you?"
+
+"Same way. I had just left the general's quarters."
+
+"I can see that some one might want to capture you, lieutenant,
+but I cannot see what they want of me."
+
+"How long have you been here?" asked the lieutenant.
+
+"About half an hour. By the way, are you armed?"
+
+"No; they took away my weapons. How about you?"
+
+"I have my automatic. I'd have used it when you came in, only
+you were dumped in so suddenly."
+
+"What do you suppose the game is?"
+
+"I don't know; but we'll find out. I've been in tighter places
+than this--but no hotter," after a pause.
+
+"Have you tried to get out?"
+
+"Yes; but it was too hot work. The door seemed pretty strong."
+
+"Perhaps the two of us might force it," suggested Grimes. "I'm a
+pretty husky chap."
+
+"We might try," replied Donald. "The place is so narrow we can
+get a good brace."
+
+They put their feet against the opposite wall and pushed against
+the door.
+
+"We'll never make it that way," said the lieutenant. "We'll have
+to throw ourselves at it."
+
+"Not much room for that, Lieutenant, but you give the word and
+we'll have a try."
+
+Getting their bearings as well as they could in the dark, they
+drew themselves back and then literally threw themselves at the
+door. It gave way with a snap and both fell to their feet on the
+outside.
+
+Quick as a flash they were on their feet, Donald with his weapon
+ready for instant action.
+
+But there was no one in sight.
+
+"That's mighty funny!" exclaimed the lieutenant. "Lock two strong
+men up in a place like that and not guard it."
+
+"It's a mighty good thing for us they didn't," laughed Donald. "I
+wonder where we are?"
+
+He glanced about the room which was dimly lighted by a couple of
+lamps, fastened to the wall by brackets. It was well--yes,
+elegantly furnished. At one side of the room was the closet out
+of which they had just emerged, while at the opposite side were
+three doors. On a third side were two windows and the fourth side
+was a plain wall.
+
+"Not a bad-looking place," observed the lieutenant.
+
+"Not at all," echoed Donald, "and there seem plenty of means of
+exit."
+
+"Sure, my boy; and if it's all the same to you, we'll go. The
+sooner I get back the quicker I'll be able to start something in
+this direction. Come on!"
+
+They crossed over to the doors and tried the first one. It was
+locked. They tried the second and it opened into another closet.
+
+"Three times and out," laughed Donald as he took hold of the knob
+of the last door.
+
+It yielded to his touch and he opened it gently. Then he quickly
+and quietly closed it.
+
+"What's up?" asked the lieutenant.
+
+Donald put his fingers to his lips.
+
+"How many?" queried Lieut. Grimes.
+
+"Three," was the whispered response. "Let's hear what they have
+to say."
+
+He opened the door a crack, through which they could see three
+men seated at a table. One wore the uniform of a Mexican officer,
+the other was dressed in Mexican costume, while the third was
+unquestionably an American, although they could only see his
+back.
+
+"I have carried out my part of the agreement," the American was
+saying, "and now I want my money."
+
+"How do we know you have?" asked the officer.
+
+"Haven't I put Gen. Funston into your hands?"
+
+"We are not sure it is Funston," said the other.
+
+"Then bring him out and look at him. You know the general when
+you see him, don't you?"
+
+"I think so, although I've never seen him but once."
+
+"Well, that is he, all right," declared the American.
+
+Donald turned and looked at his companion. Then he chuckled.
+
+The lieutenant said nothing, but stroked his whiskers which he
+wore in exact imitation of his chief.
+
+"Lucky for the general," he whispered, and Donald nodded his head
+that he understood.
+
+The two Mexicans exchanged a few words under their breath which
+Donald could not hear and then the officer took from his breast
+pocket a large wallet, from which he counted out ten bank notes.
+They were yellow backs and Donald was not at all surprised when
+the officer said:
+
+"Here are ten one-thousand-dollar bills in American money. We
+believe you are telling us the truth, as your words are
+corroborated by the men who brought him here. But if you are
+playing us false, we shall know how to reach you."
+
+The American shrugged his shoulders as he took the bills, rolled
+them up nonchalantly and placed them in his trousers pocket.
+
+"You can find me at the Hidalgo Hotel whenever you want me," he
+said, "and now I must be going."
+
+He arose from his seat, and as he did so, Donald caught sight of
+his face. It was the mountebank, Strong, but in his stylish
+clothing Don had failed to recognize him.
+
+"Great Scott!" he muttered to himself, "the plot thickens!"
+
+"What's that?" queried the lieutenant, who caught the muttered
+exclamation.
+
+"Nothing much," replied Donald as the three men walked toward a
+door in the farther end of the room and he was enabled to speak
+without being heard, "only that is the man I'm looking for. Let's
+get out of the window and see if we can't head him off."
+
+He closed the door and turned the key which he had quietly taken
+from the other side.
+
+The windows were open and they looked out. They were on the side
+of the house overlooking a good-sized lawn.
+
+"That's the reason they are not barred," explained Donald. "Had
+they been front windows, we might as well have been in jail. You
+go first and I'll cover the retreat."
+
+Lieut. Grimes sprang into the window and lowered himself to the
+ground, just as a hand turned the knob.
+
+"Good-bye!" muttered Donald. "Sorry I can't wait to receive you,"
+and he followed the lieutenant.
+
+On the ground they could hear the men trying to open the door and
+as they sped across the lawn toward a high brick wall, the door
+gave way with a crash and they could hear surprised voices.
+
+"They have discovered our wreckage!" cried Donald. "Over the wall
+you go!"
+
+"You first this time," said the lieutenant.
+
+"No, you first. I can boost you up, but I couldn't pull you. You
+can pull me."
+
+The argument was good and the lieutenant acted upon it.
+
+A minute later he was on top of the wall.
+
+"Great Caesar!" he exclaimed. "There's nothing under me but
+water."
+
+"Never mind that," was the response. "Haul me up."
+
+The lieutenant leaned down and gave the lad a hand.
+
+"Here we are," he said a minute later. "We can't jump in, for
+there is no knowing where we are."
+
+"Sure," from Donald. "Let's run along the wall."
+
+This they did for about a hundred yards and then the wall ended
+abruptly against what appeared to be an abutment.
+
+"We must act quickly," declared Donald. "They think you are
+Funston and won't hurt you. Keep up the deception. I'm going to
+swim for it. I'll have help here just as quick as I can. So
+long," and, throwing off his coat, he jumped into the water some
+twenty feet below.
+
+
+
+
+CHAPTER XXVII.
+
+THE ADMIRAL TO THE RESCUE.
+
+
+When Donald struck the water he allowed himself to go clear to
+the bottom, as he wanted to find out just about how deep it was.
+
+It was, as he had expected, about the depth of the water in the
+harbor and he made up his mind that he could not be far from some
+of the wharves that constitute the water front.
+
+When he came to the surface, he struck out away from the wall,
+and by the light of the moon was soon able to see the vessels in
+the offing. He could also see that he was well north of the
+principal docks.
+
+"I guess I'll land at the first place that offers," he thought,
+"and find my way to headquarters from there."
+
+He struck out lustily, but had not been swimming more than a
+couple of minutes, when he heard the sharp exhaust of a gasoline
+launch.
+
+Realizing that it must be an American craft, he shouted at the
+top of his voice.
+
+At first there was no response, but as the boat came nearer and
+he shouted even more loudly, a friendly hail came over the
+waters.
+
+"Where are you?" came the voice as the boat came to a stop.
+
+"Here, to your port side," he replied.
+
+The launch was started again slowly and Donald was soon able to
+make himself visible.
+
+"Who are you?" was the first question pumped at him by the
+officer in command.
+
+"Special messenger for Gen. Funston," was the response.
+
+"Where is your uniform?"
+
+"I'm not a soldier. I am a civilian."
+
+"A likely story," snapped the officer, who chanced to be an
+ensign.
+
+"I can't help how likely it is," snapped Donald in return. "It's
+true, and I want to be put ashore as quickly as possible. I have
+an important message and the safety of one of his staff is
+involved. There is also a plot on foot to capture the general
+himself."
+
+"Nonsense! And besides, I can't put you ashore. I am carrying a
+message to Admiral Fletcher."
+
+"But my business is important," insisted Donald.
+
+"So is mine," declared the ensign.
+
+He ordered his launch full speed ahead in the direction of the
+flagship.
+
+"It's pretty tough," commented Donald, "but I'll prove I am right
+when I get to the ship."
+
+"I hope so," was the reply. "I haven't anything against you and
+you may be telling the truth, but I can't take any chances."
+
+Fifteen minutes later they drew up beside the flagship.
+
+"Up you go," said the ensign, motioning Donald up the ladder.
+"I'll present you to the officer of the deck," which he quickly
+did.
+
+"Here's a man I picked up in the water, sir, who says he has a
+message for Gen. Funston, but I had no time to put him ashore."
+
+"Looks more like a boy than a man," replied the officer. Then to
+Donald: "What's this about you having a message for Gen.
+Funston?"
+
+Donald repeated what he had told the ensign.
+
+"What's that?" asked another officer, coming forward out of the
+shadow of the after turret.
+
+The first officer saluted.
+
+"Tell the Admiral your story, my lad," he said.
+
+Again Donald repeated his story, this time going more into
+detail.
+
+"Come with me," ordered the Admiral, and he led the way to the
+wireless operator.
+
+"Get into communication with Gen. Funston at once," was the
+admiral's order.
+
+"Here he is, sir," was the report a couple of minutes later.
+
+"Ask him if he has three American boys on a special mission."
+
+The answer came back promptly that he had.
+
+"Ask him if Lieut. Grimes is missing."
+
+Again came back the answer that he was.
+
+"Tell the general that we have one of the lads on the _Arkansas_,
+and that he has had a strange adventure. Tell him I will send the
+lad ashore immediately."
+
+"Thank you, sir," said Donald. "I knew some one would know what
+to do."
+
+"You're a brave lad," was the Admiral's comment, "and I shall be
+glad to hear the end of the adventure. You and your companions
+must come out and dine with us as soon as your mission is ended."
+
+Donald thanked him for his kindness and hastened to the launch
+which was to take him back.
+
+Twenty minutes later he stood before Gen. Funston.
+
+"You seem to have been in the water," was the general's first
+words.
+
+"Yes, sir," laughed Donald. "I jumped from a wall north of town,
+leaving Lieut. Grimes on top of it."
+
+"What! Lieut. Grimes on top of a wall? How did he get there?"
+
+"He was kidnapped, sir! It was a case of mistaken identity!"
+
+"Mistaken identity! I don't understand!"
+
+"They took him for you, sir, because his beard is trimmed like
+yours."
+
+The general smiled grimly.
+
+"Think I shall have all my staff officers do the same," he
+commented. Then more seriously: "Can you lead us to the house?"
+
+"I'm not sure about the house; but I can take you to the stone
+wall from which I jumped. That ought to guide us to the house."
+
+"Right," said the general.
+
+He called another member of his staff and gave a few brief
+orders.
+
+In another ten minutes two launches loaded with regulars and
+armed with a rapid-fire gun in each, steamed swiftly up the
+harbor.
+
+"There's the wall!" exclaimed Donald a few minutes later, "and
+there's where I jumped," pointing to a spot near the abutment.
+
+The officer in command headed the boats for the shore.
+
+"It is not only a question of freeing Lieut. Grimes," said the
+officer, "but we also want to capture the conspirators. This is
+a much more serious matter than Gen. Funston is willing to
+admit."
+
+"Then if you will take my suggestion, sir," said Donald modestly,
+"I would let a few soldiers go over the wall as well as entering
+the front of the house."
+
+The officer looked up twenty feet. The wall was absolutely
+perpendicular and as smooth as the side of a house.
+
+"I'm afraid none of my men can scale it," he said.
+
+"Can't we throw a grapnel over it, sir?"
+
+"We might; but it would be a very slight hold."
+
+"If you can make it hold at all," laughed Donald, "I'm willing to
+make the effort. At best I can only fall back into the water."
+
+"True," declared the officer. "We'll try it."
+
+A grapnel was tied to a long line, such as is used in tying the
+launch to the shore, and after several vain attempts the grapnel
+caught in the top of the wall.
+
+Donald sprang forward and tested it with his weight and it held.
+Then, without another word, he braced his feet against the wall
+and in almost less time than it takes to write it, he was at the
+top.
+
+"Do you see any one?" asked the officer from below.
+
+"No, sir; but there is the sound of pacing footsteps on the walk
+that runs along the side of the house."
+
+"Good! Now make fast the grapnel and we will see if there are a
+dozen men here who can climb to the top."
+
+The dozen were quickly found and they were soon at the top of the
+wall. The officer finally decided to add to their armament one of
+the rapid-firers.
+
+"If there is any resistance," he said, "we'll knock the side of
+the house in."
+
+"What shall I do?" asked Donald.
+
+"You'd better come back into the boat. You can help us to enter
+the house in front."
+
+Donald slid down the rope and the expedition quickly made a
+landing. Silently, so as not to alarm those within the house, the
+men took their way to the front of the mansion, which was at once
+recognized as one of the finest in Vera Cruz.
+
+"Do you know who lives here?" asked the officer.
+
+"No, sir," replied Donald.
+
+"I was told it was the residence of one of Huerta's generals,"
+said a soldier. "It was pointed out to me the first day we
+landed."
+
+"Good!" from the officer. "I shall now have no compunction about
+entering the place."
+
+With Donald and a couple of soldiers, the officer approached the
+door and gave a vigorous knock.
+
+There was no response and he knocked again.
+
+"Who is there?" finally came a voice, evidently a mozo.
+
+"An American officer. Open the door in the name of the law."
+
+There was a still further delay and then another voice asked:
+"How do we know it is an officer?"
+
+"Open and find out, before I force the door."
+
+There was a still further delay.
+
+"It's a good thing we guarded the rear," said Donald. "They are
+evidently trying to gain time to spirit Lieut. Grimes away,
+thinking it is Gen. Funston."
+
+"True," said the officer. "We'll wait no longer. Corporal, force
+the door!"
+
+The corporal placed a small stick of dynamite under the door and
+fixed a fuse.
+
+"Step back a little," he said.
+
+All obeyed, when at the instant the door was thrown open and a
+hand, in which was an automatic revolver, was thrust out,
+directly in the face of the officer.
+
+But quick as was the action, Donald was not taken off his guard.
+
+With a single swift blow he struck the weapon into the air.
+
+At the same instant a fusillade from the rear of the house gave
+evidence that the men stationed upon the wall had done their
+work.
+
+
+
+
+CHAPTER XXVIII.
+
+BILLIE MAKES A DISCOVERY.
+
+
+Having released Lieut. Grimes and taken the plotters into
+custody, the next task was to locate Strong, the mountebank, and
+to solve the mystery of the box.
+
+Outside the one exclamation which Donald had uttered when he
+recognized Strong as the third of the plotters, he had not
+betrayed his secret to any one, and when Lieut. Grimes told his
+story to Gen. Funston and described the American, Donald
+vouchsafed no information which might help to apprehend him.
+
+"The plotter told the Mexicans that he could be found at the
+Hidalgo Hotel whenever he was wanted," explained Lieut. Grimes.
+"While he may have lied about it, I think we should send a force
+and try to locate him."
+
+The advice was acted upon and a corporal and four soldiers sent
+to the hotel, but to no purpose. No such man was known there.
+
+"What was the use of my saying anything about it?" asked Donald
+of the other two boys when he returned to Santiago's house and
+narrated to them the story of his evening's adventure. "I was
+sure he was not there and I have no idea where he is; but we'll
+find him and the ten thousand dollars given him by the Mexicans
+for his treachery."
+
+"That's right, Don," was Billie's comment. "If you can get that
+money and I can get my ten thousand pounds, this trip won't be so
+bad."
+
+"In the meantime," said Adrian, "I propose that some of us go to
+bed. It's nearly two o'clock and there is mighty little chance
+that any one will try to steal the box again."
+
+"I think you are right," said Billie. "We might as well all go.
+The doctor is still with Santiago and will stay until he is
+better. It isn't at all likely that any one will try to come into
+this room while he is here."
+
+Billie voiced the unanimous opinion, and a few minutes later the
+young people had all sought their beds, leaving instructions with
+the physician and the servants that they were to be called if any
+change for the worse occurred in Santiago's condition.
+
+It was probably two hours later, just about daylight, that the
+entire household was awakened by a terrible shriek and one of the
+maids rushed out into the patio.
+
+The boys came to their feet with a bound and hurried from their
+room on the ground floor, while the others appeared at the head
+of the stairs.
+
+"What is it?" asked Donald as soon as he could quiet the
+shrieking maid. "What are you yelling about?"
+
+"Oh, senor!" she cried. "I have seen the devil."
+
+"Nonsense," laughed the boy. "You had a nightmare."
+
+"No, senor. It was the devil. He had horns and a tail and he had
+the little box under his arm. I saw him!"
+
+"The box!" cried Billie. "Quick, Lucia, look and see if the box
+is gone!"
+
+The girl rushed back into the library and she, too, gave a
+shriek.
+
+"It's gone!" she cried. "It's gone!"
+
+The boys sprang up the stairs three at a time and into the
+library. Lucia was right. The box was gone.
+
+"It must be the old boy, sure enough," said Billie, "or at least
+one of his imps." Then to the maid: "How did he get in?"
+
+"I don't know, senor. I only saw him go out. He went right
+through the door without opening it."
+
+"Nonsense!" from Donald. "His Satanic majesty might go through
+a solid door, but the box wouldn't. There is some other
+explanation."
+
+"But who could it be?" queried Lucia in great fear.
+
+"Some one who knows the house," declared Adrian emphatically. "He
+may have put on some masquerade costume just to frighten these
+superstitious servants in case he was discovered."
+
+"I believe Ad is right," agreed Donald. "What do you think,
+Billie?"
+
+"Maybe, Don; but I have a theory of my own. If I am right, I can
+work it better if I tell no one."
+
+At this moment the physician entered the room.
+
+"How is Santiago?" asked Donald.
+
+"Better! He has gone to sleep, and if he is not disturbed, I
+expect him to be greatly improved when he awakens. I should not
+be surprised if this were the turning point in his illness."
+
+"Then we had all better go down on to the first floor and leave
+him alone with his nurses."
+
+"I'd give a good deal to know where Strong is," remarked Donald
+as they were drinking their coffee an hour later.
+
+"So would I," declared Billie. "I believe, if we can find him, we
+can solve this entire mystery."
+
+"As soon as we finish our coffee," suggested Donald, "let's get
+busy and find him. He can't be far."
+
+"That's right," said Adrian. "We'll round him up in short order.
+Hey, Billie?"
+
+"We ought to; but I'll tell you what. You fellows go out and see
+if you can get a line on him, and I'll hang round the house to
+see that the devil doesn't come and steal the rest of the house."
+
+"Especially Lucia," laughed Donald.
+
+"That's all right," was the good-natured reply; "but I have an
+idea that the devil and Strong may have something in common."
+
+"You don't think it was Strong who came and took the box, do
+you?" queried Adrian.
+
+"I don't know just what I do think, Ad; but I'm going to do a
+little detective work and I want to give the impression that we
+are all out. When you fellows go out, don't say anything that
+would cause any one in hiding to think we are not all going out
+together. Do you sabe?"
+
+"Sure. I hope you'll get a clue if we do not."
+
+When the others had gone, Billie sat quietly in his room for a
+long time. He could easily have gone to sleep, as he had had only
+a couple of hours' rest, but he made up his mind that he would
+not be caught napping again if anything should happen.
+
+But nothing happened.
+
+The minutes passed into hours and it was rapidly nearing noon
+when Billie made up his mind that it was a bad job.
+
+"We had our chance at daylight," he muttered, "and now we will
+not get another. Whoever is after the box, has it and is not
+going to take any further chance of being caught."
+
+He went out into the patio and looked up at the sun. It was
+almost in the zenith and the air was stifling.
+
+"Any one would be a fool to go out at this time of day," he
+mused. "I wonder where the fellows are?"
+
+He stepped back under the shade of the arcade that extended clear
+around the patio and threw himself onto a stone seat.
+
+"Queer old place," he thought, "and a queer old seat."
+
+He laid his hand on one of the carved arms and mechanically toyed
+with an eagle's head that formed one of the decorations. To his
+surprise the head turned in his hand.
+
+"I hope I haven't broken it," he said as he examined it more
+closely.
+
+It was clearly made to revolve and so he turned it clear around,
+when of a sudden the arm of the seat fell apart and the bottom
+collapsed, disclosing to Billie's astonished eyes a pair of
+stairs.
+
+Almost thrown to the pavement by the giving way of the seat,
+Billie picked himself up and looked about to see if he were
+observed.
+
+There was no one in sight and he stooped down and examined the
+stairs carefully. Then he straightened up and rubbed his chin as
+a sudden gleam of intelligence passed through his brain.
+
+"So," he muttered, "this is why Santiago dwells in a house that
+is directly back of the banker's. That was his box and he is the
+strange man who made the million-dollar deposit in Don Esteban's
+bank."
+
+Then he stopped and pondered.
+
+"But who stole the box? Not Santiago, for he has not left his
+room for days. If it was Strong, he must have entered the bank
+from some direction other than this. I don't understand, but I'm
+going to make some further investigation."
+
+He reentered his room, buckled on his automatic and took from his
+suit case--which, by the way, he had located at the railway
+station along with that of his companions after the occupation of
+the city by the marines--his electric torch. Then he went out and
+descended the stairs, which he discovered were twenty-four in
+number.
+
+Reaching the bottom he found himself upon a landing some six or
+eight feet square, from the opposite side of which another flight
+of stairs ascended.
+
+"I reckon I better see where they lead to," was his comment as he
+slowly began their ascent.
+
+After going up eighteen stairs his head touched the floor above.
+He counted the remaining steps by the light of his torch and
+found that there were six more. This would make the floor over
+his head on an exact level with the floor of Santiago's house.
+
+"It's just as I expected," he muttered. "If I can get
+through this floor, I shall find myself in Don Esteban's
+residence--somewhere. But just where? That's the question."
+
+He pushed upon the stone above his head, but it refused to move.
+Then he held up his torch and examined the ceiling carefully.
+Whatever the method by which the stones could be moved, it was
+carefully concealed.
+
+Much chagrined, Billie at length decided to retrace his steps and
+await the coming of his companions. He reached the landing and
+crossed over to the steps by which he had descended.
+
+Glancing up, he uttered an exclamation of surprise, for there at
+the opening and peering down the stairs was Ambrosio, the ape.
+
+With a cry of recognition the simian started to descend the
+stairs, but at a noise from above he hesitated and then sprang
+back and out of sight.
+
+An instant later the opening was closed and Billie was left in
+the darkness, except for the light of his torch.
+
+
+
+
+CHAPTER XXIX.
+
+THE MYSTERY DEEPENS.
+
+
+While Billie was making his discoveries Donald and Adrian had
+also been busy.
+
+When they left the house, at Donald's suggestion, they went first
+to the bank and told Don Esteban about the disappearance of the
+box and what the maid had seen. He was much disappointed until it
+was explained to him that they also had another clue.
+
+"We shall spend our time in the slums," said Donald, "while our
+chum keeps watch at the house. We feel sure that between us we
+shall solve the mystery."
+
+"I hope so," was Don Esteban's response. "Do you think I might be
+able to see this man Santiago?"
+
+"I'm afraid not, sir! The doctor wants him to sleep as long as
+he can. We will let you know later in the day."
+
+Leaving Don Esteban, the boys started for the plaza, intending to
+play the part of sightseers and visit every place in which a
+mountebank might reasonably expect to go. They felt certain that
+Strong would keep away from the more aristocratic places.
+
+Keeping their eyes open and ever on the alert, they wandered
+about the streets and into many public places, but up to eleven
+o'clock had made no discovery. Then they entered a cantina for
+breakfast, purposely choosing one that was little frequented by
+Americans.
+
+Seating themselves at a table in one corner where they could see
+without being seen, the boys ordered a hearty breakfast and then
+turned their attention to the others in the place.
+
+At the table nearest them were three men of ordinary appearance,
+busy with their meal. Beyond them was an American soldier, who
+seemed to have dropped in out of curiosity. He was paying very
+little attention to his meal, but was eyeing a young woman who
+was seated behind the cash counter.
+
+On the other side of the room, and partially hidden from our boys
+by the cash counter, was another man, smoking, and evidently
+waiting for some one. He kept his eye on the door and every once
+in a while glanced nervously at his watch.
+
+"Not much going on in here," said Donald in English.
+
+"No; but we are a little early. There may be more in before we
+finish our breakfast."
+
+It was a true prediction, for within the next five minutes as
+many more persons entered and disposed themselves around the
+various tables. Then the boys' breakfast was served and for a few
+minutes they were more absorbed in the food than in the guests.
+
+As Donald raised his eyes for a moment, however, he caught sight
+of a man talking to the one sitting back of the cash counter.
+They were evidently arguing about something in an undertone and a
+minute later the newcomer took a seat with his back to the boys.
+
+"Look!" was Donald's smothered exclamation, "over there by the
+cashier. Isn't that our man?"
+
+Adrian raised his eyes and gazed hard at the back of the man's
+head.
+
+"I could tell better if he would remove his hat. It does look
+like him, but he has disguised himself some way."
+
+"Sure," laughed Donald. "That's part of his trade; but I'm dead
+sure it is Strong."
+
+"What had we better do?"
+
+"I don't know. He'll recognize us the minute he sees us. If he is
+keeping away from us, he will leave. If he is not, he may come
+over and speak to us. There is no reason why he should not, so
+far as he knows."
+
+"How would it do to make ourselves visible?"
+
+"I hardly know." Then after a pause: "I'll tell you what. As soon
+as we finish we'll go out, as though we did not see him, but we
+will be sure to make enough commotion to attract his attention.
+Then we'll station ourselves where we can see him as he comes
+out."
+
+"That's all right, Don; but suppose he doesn't come out?"
+
+Donald scratched his head.
+
+"Oh!" he exclaimed, "I knew I had a thought back of that. When he
+sees us, if he is not trying to avoid us, he will speak to us. If
+he does not speak to us, we will know there is something wrong
+and take immediate steps to have him arrested."
+
+"But he may escape."
+
+"How can he?"
+
+"I suppose he could go out through the kitchen if he had to," was
+the ready reply.
+
+"Yes, I suppose he could. We must do better than that."
+
+"I'll tell you," said Adrian. "I'll go over and speak to that
+soldier in English. If it is Strong, he will hear me and will
+involuntarily make some move. If he wants to make himself known,
+he will. If he does not do so, we will simply sit here till he
+goes out and then shadow him."
+
+"That sounds good. Go over and say 'Howdy' to the soldier."
+
+Adrian arose from his seat and stepped over to the soldier.
+
+"Hello, partner!" was his somewhat noisy greeting. "Won't you
+come over to our table?"
+
+"Why, sure, neighbor! I was just thinking that I was getting
+mighty lonesome."
+
+He arose from his chair and took a seat beside Donald, who had
+been observing Strong closely. There could be no doubt that he
+had been attracted by Adrian's voice, but he gave no intimation
+that he knew the boys.
+
+"Glad to see you," said Donald, without taking his eyes from his
+man. "Won't you have another cup of coffee?"
+
+"Bet your life, neighbor!" Then as he lighted a fresh cigarette:
+"Smoke?"
+
+"Never learned!" laughed Donald. "Seems mighty funny down here,
+doesn't it?"
+
+"Sure does; but you're just as well off without it. Live here?"
+
+"No," replied Adrian; "we were on our way home and got stuck!"
+
+"What's the matter?" asked the soldier, with much concern. "Out
+of coin?"
+
+"We haven't much; but Gen. Funston has promised to find us
+passage home in a few days. Our friend saw him early this
+morning," this latter remark expressly for Strong's ears.
+
+"If he told you he'd do it, he will," said the soldier. "You can
+bet on him every time."
+
+It was very evident from Strong's actions that he was taking in
+every word of the conversation, which was in English and in an
+unusually loud voice. He pretended to eat, then leaned over and
+said something to his companion, and a minute later arose from
+the table and hastily quitted the place.
+
+But the boys were not to be fooled. They sprang from the table
+and hastily followed, Donald throwing a greenback to the cashier
+which more than doubly paid the bill.
+
+Their sudden action did not escape the soldier, who, attributing
+it to another cause, also hastily quitted the cantina.
+
+As the boys emerged into the street, they saw Strong hastening
+away in the direction of the custom house.
+
+"Going to lose himself in the crowd," said Donald. "Don't let him
+get out of your sight."
+
+"What's the matter?" asked the soldier, running to catch up with
+the boys. "Ugly greasers?"
+
+"No," replied Donald, "we're shadowing a man who is wanted by
+Gen. Funston. That's him," pointing; "keep your eye on him."
+
+"I thought you chaps had something on," laughed the soldier. "You
+can bet on me!"
+
+Now that they approached nearer the center of the business
+portion of the city, there were more people on the street; but
+they were so near their quarry that they easily kept him in
+sight. Only once had he glanced back, but that was enough to
+convince him that he was followed.
+
+"He's headed for somewhere," said Adrian. "He doesn't expect to
+get away from us simply by walking."
+
+"Right," agreed Donald. "There he goes into the post office."
+
+"Yes," from Adrian, "and it has two doors. You stop at the first
+one and I'll run to the other."
+
+He started on a run and the soldier followed suit.
+
+The sight of a man running and a soldier following, quickly
+attracted attention and pedestrians began to stop and see what
+the matter might be. In less than a minute a crowd had collected,
+among them several soldiers, who quickly brought Adrian to a
+halt.
+
+"What's the matter?" asked one. Then as the soldier came up:
+"What are you chasing him for?"
+
+"I'm not chasing him," laughed the seeming pursuer. "He and I are
+after another chap."
+
+The delay occasioned by this interference was not great, but it
+was sufficient to allow Strong to escape, had it not been for
+Donald. He had seen the crowd gathering and, realizing what would
+happen, ran around the other way, just in time to see Strong
+disappearing around the corner of the street on which the bank
+was located.
+
+Madly he dashed down the street and turned the corner in time to
+see Strong enter the big gate leading into the patio of Don
+Esteban's residence.
+
+Putting on more steam, a couple of minutes later Donald also
+dashed into the patio; but Strong was nowhere to be seen.
+
+"He must be in the bank," muttered the boy, and he quickly
+entered the door.
+
+But Strong had disappeared as completely as though the earth had
+opened and swallowed him up.
+
+
+
+
+CHAPTER XXX.
+
+THE MYSTERY SOLVED.
+
+
+When the opening at the head of the stairs had closed upon Billie
+and he realized that he was shut in a subterranean passage, for a
+minute his heart sank within him.
+
+He had tried to find an opening at the top of the opposite stairs
+and had failed, and he did not know that he would have any better
+success in trying to find a way to open the place through which
+he had descended.
+
+"Nobody on earth knows that I am down here," he thought, "and
+with Santiago sick and maybe dying, no one on earth probably
+knows that there is such a passage."
+
+But Billie was not the lad to sit down and cry. He had been in
+tight places before and he had an abiding faith in his own
+ability to do things. Therefore, he called up his courage and
+slowly mounted the stairs leading to Santiago's patio.
+
+At the top of the stairs he found himself confronted by exactly
+the same condition as he had found on the opposite side.
+
+"But there is this difference," muttered Billie. "I know that
+there must be some sort of a crack where that slab fell back."
+
+He held the electric bull's-eye close to the stone and
+scrutinized every spot.
+
+Not a single crack could he spy.
+
+Then he took out his big jack-knife and prodded with it clear
+across the width of the stairway.
+
+There was nothing but solid stone.
+
+"Looks kind o' desperate," he told himself, "but I have simply
+got to find an opening."
+
+Again he prodded the place over without result.
+
+"It's no use," he finally said to himself. "If I am to get out of
+here, help will have to come from somewhere outside. But how can
+it?"
+
+He sat down on the stairs and thought deeply.
+
+"If it is as I think," he mused, "these stairs have been used
+recently. The very fact that Ambrosio is prowling around here is
+proof that Strong must have been here at some time. But where is
+Strong?"
+
+He slid down several steps and threw the light of his torch
+across to the opposite stairs.
+
+"Bang!" went something that sounded like a falling stone.
+
+Billie sprang to his feet.
+
+"Click! Bang!" and down the opposite stairway streamed a ray of
+light.
+
+Billie shut off his electric torch and waited.
+
+Then on the steps there appeared a foot, then another, until a
+whole human body was in sight. Then "click, snap!" and the light
+disappeared.
+
+"By George!" exclaimed Billie under his breath, "there's a man on
+the stairs right opposite to me. Who on earth can it be?"
+
+His first inclination was to turn on the light, but on second
+thought he decided not to.
+
+"I'll let him set the copy," thought Billie. "It's a mighty good
+thing to be able to spring the surprise."
+
+He drew his automatic and stood ready for any emergency.
+
+It was still as a tomb.
+
+He could hear his own heart beat and he could also hear the heavy
+breathing of the other man.
+
+"Sounds like he had been running and was just catching his
+breath," was Billie's mental comment.
+
+After some minutes the man's breathing became more quiet and
+Billie heard him slowly descending the stairs.
+
+"This won't do," thought Billie. "He probably has some kind of a
+light, and if he gets on the landing and I'm up here, I'll be
+like a man up a tree."
+
+The lad sat down and slowly slid toward the bottom.
+
+Being only a few steps from the landing, Billie was down first.
+He crowded to the right and listened.
+
+The other was now nearly on the landing. Now he was on the
+landing, hugging the wall on the side opposite Billie. Now they
+passed each other, or rather the man passed Billie, for Billie
+stood perfectly still.
+
+It seemed as though he must hear Billie's breathing, but if he
+heard anything he must have thought it his own echo, never
+dreaming that he was not alone in the passage.
+
+Now Billie could hear him ascending the stairs leading to
+Santiago's house, and his hope rose high.
+
+"He must know how to open the floor," thought Billie. "I'll be
+right there when he does."
+
+Silently as a cat Billie crept up the stairs behind his unknown
+companion.
+
+Near the top the man stopped and a minute later he flashed an
+electric light against the stone overhead. Another minute and he
+heaved with the top of his head and the slab slid back.
+
+"And now," exclaimed Billie in a deep voice, "put your hands over
+your head!"
+
+Whether from fear or from the unparalleled surprise caused by
+hearing a human voice at such a time and in such a place, instead
+of obeying Billie's command, Strong's hands--for Strong it
+was--fell limp at his side and his electric torch fell to the
+stones beneath his feet.
+
+"All right," continued Billy, "if that's the way you feel about
+it; but just remember that a single false move and I'll cut this
+automatic loose among your ribs. Now climb out a step at a time."
+
+With face as white as marble at the shock he had just sustained,
+Strong obeyed implicitly and Billie was soon standing on the
+stone patio, looking Strong in the face.
+
+"You're a good one, you are," he said sarcastically. "I should
+think you'd be ashamed to call yourself an American."
+
+"What do you mean?" asked Strong in a trembling voice.
+
+"Why, first of all, stealing from the bank, and then selling your
+own countrymen to the Mexicans."
+
+"Who have I sold?"
+
+"Do you mean to say that you didn't sell Gen. Funston to the
+greasers for ten thousand dollars?"
+
+"Of course I do!" in a somewhat stronger voice.
+
+"Perhaps you'll deny that you are Strong, the mountebank. You
+don't think for one minute that I don't know you in spite of your
+make-up, do you?"
+
+"No, I'll admit that I'm the mountebank. As for my name that is
+of small importance in a country like this. But I did not sell
+Gen. Funston, as you put it. I knew the man I pointed out was not
+Funston and I knew that as soon as the Mexicans found it out they
+would let him go. Some one might have told them rightly. As it
+was I spoiled their game and I got the money. Do you think it any
+crime to do that?"
+
+"That's a matter I am not in a position to discuss," was Billie's
+answer. "But how about robbing the bank?"
+
+"I had as much right to the box as any one."
+
+"You'll have to prove that to some one besides me; all I can do
+is to turn you over to the authorities."
+
+"Never!" cried Strong. "I'll die before I'll rot in a Mexican
+jail!"
+
+He uttered a peculiar noise and before Billie could imagine what
+it meant, he felt himself seized from behind by a pair of hairy
+hands.
+
+He had been in that clutch once before and recognized in an
+instant that he was in the grip of the ape.
+
+He gave one loud cry for help and then turned loose with his
+automatic.
+
+The tumult which followed is beyond description. Billie's shout
+was as nothing compared to the cry of the ape as one of the
+bullets struck him in the leg and another pierced his foot.
+Loosing his hold upon the lad, he grabbed for the weapon, but
+Billie managed to evade him and would undoubtedly have slain the
+animal had not Strong sprung to his assistance, with the result
+that in another minute Billie was disarmed.
+
+Ill would the lad have fared then, at the hands of his two
+assailants, had not the noise attracted to the scene several
+soldiers, while an instant later came a loud shout as Donald and
+Adrian dashed into the patio.
+
+On the other side of the square they had heard Billie's shout,
+followed by the automatic, and had rushed to his aid.
+
+In another minute both Strong and his hairy friend were overcome
+and securely bound.
+
+"Where did you find him?" asked Donald, pointing to Strong.
+
+"Down there," was Billie's reply, as he pointed toward the still
+open underground passage way.
+
+"How did he get there?"
+
+"I suppose he entered from a similar entrance in Don Esteban's
+patio. I have had an idea all the time that there was some reason
+for the position of these two houses."
+
+"But it doesn't lead into the bank. How could he steal the box
+out of the vault?"
+
+"There is the real thief!" exclaimed Billie, pointing to the ape.
+"He sneaked in while Strong kept the bank employes engaged. By
+some mistake in his understanding he put the envelope back in the
+bank the next day instead of putting back the box. It was he who
+crawled through the bars into Santiago's library. He was also the
+devil who scared the maid almost into fits."
+
+"Well! Well!" exclaimed a voice from the gateway. "I never could
+have believed it."
+
+The voice was that of Don Esteban, who had entered while Billie
+was speaking.
+
+"I have come to see this strange man, Santiago Ojeda," he
+explained. "What says the doctor?"
+
+"Here comes the doctor now," announced Adrian as the physician
+made his appearance in the gateway. "He can speak for himself."
+
+
+
+
+CHAPTER XXXI.
+
+THE TREASURE OF MONTEZUMA.
+
+
+The shadows of evening had fallen and a cool breeze was blowing
+in off the Gulf of Mexico when a group of persons, among whom
+were the Broncho Rider Boys, gathered around the bedside of the
+sick man.
+
+It was as the physician had predicted, and when Santiago had
+awakened after his long sleep, he had regained his senses,
+although he was very weak. But as the day declined and the heat
+lessened he had become stronger, and now at his own request,
+Lucia and her friends drew around to listen to his tale.
+
+At one side of the bed stood Lucia, the three boys and Don
+Esteban. At the other stood Mr. Black, Josie and the physician,
+while at the foot of the bed was Strong, with Ambrosio in his
+arms, and a couple of soldiers who had the mountebank in
+custody.
+
+"As my daughter knows," began Santiago in a feeble voice, "I am a
+direct descendant of the great Montezuma. My ancestor was the
+guardian of the treasure which had been accumulated by the Aztec
+kings for years. After the overthrow of my race by the Spanish
+conquerors, there was given to my first great ancestor the
+keeping of the secret of the source of the gold which had made
+the city of Anahuac such a rich prize.
+
+"This secret has been handed down through all these generations,
+the one object being to use this knowledge in freeing Mexico from
+the Spanish yoke. This secret I, as the last of my race,
+possess."
+
+The aged man paused, his strength being hardly able to the task
+he had set himself.
+
+"It is much as I suspected," whispered Don Esteban to Donald,
+while Lucia bent over and smoothed the brow of the sick man.
+
+"A few years ago," Santiago finally continued, "I began to see an
+opportunity for the people to assert their rights. In our good
+Senor Madero I saw the one who should lead the common people out
+of their bondage. I went to him and offered him all the wealth at
+my command. He accepted the trust and we began our work. It was
+at that time that I placed the money with Don Esteban. Also the
+box, containing the secret of the mine, of which only I and
+Madero knew.
+
+"You all know what has happened since that time. Madero won, but
+he was betrayed. His betrayer now seeks to rule the republic, but
+he can never do it. He must be overthrown."
+
+The aged man became greatly excited and the physician cautioned
+him to be careful. In a few minutes he became more peaceful and
+continued:
+
+"I have always been a great friend of the Americans. I admired
+their integrity and their government. I spent many years of my
+youth in the United States. I have known many of their great men.
+I was sure they would be pleased with Madero, and they were. But
+after he was betrayed, then I began to fear them, as I was told
+that the usurper, Huerta, had been helped by them."
+
+"Who told you that?" asked Billie, almost without thinking.
+
+"That man there," and Santiago pointed with his long bony finger
+at the mountebank, Strong. "That man, Francisco Rodriguez, who
+claims to be an American, but who is a traitor to his country. He
+fed me with lies, as I now know, and he wormed out of me the
+secret of Montezuma's Mine."
+
+Again the aged man's excitement nearly overcame him, but again he
+rallied with an almost superhuman effort.
+
+"It was because of his lies that I made him my trusted agent;
+but he betrayed me as he has others. It was to him I gave the ten
+thousand pounds which the young senor took away from my servant,
+Pablo Ojeda--who is not an Ojeda, but whom I have allowed to use
+that name. I desire that the money become the property of the
+young senor," and he feebly extended his hand toward Billie, "who
+has always been such a good friend to me and mine. The secret of
+the mine is to be found in the box which I left with Don Esteban.
+I am getting to be an old man, and if you will now bring in the
+box, I will turn it over to my daughter Lucia, who is my only
+descendant."
+
+Don Esteban made no move to comply with the request, but looked
+at the boys in such a perplexed manner that the sick man was
+quick to take notice.
+
+"What is it?" he asked, rising on his elbow and looking at Don
+Esteban with burning gaze. "What is it? Has anything happened to
+the box?"
+
+"Yes," faltered the banker, "it has been stolen."
+
+"Stolen!" almost shrieked Santiago. "Stolen! Then there stands
+the thief!" and he pointed to Strong, who stood with blanched
+face.
+
+"We know that," said Billie, "but the box has been stolen again
+and no one knows where it has gone."
+
+"You are wrong," muttered Strong. "It has not been stolen. It is
+in the bank where it always was."
+
+"Impossible!" cried Don Esteban. "How could it be back in the
+vault?"
+
+"Ask Ambrosio," replied Strong, with a wan smile. "He can tell."
+
+"Of course he cannot tell," almost shouted Don Esteban.
+
+"Then we shall never know; but I am sure the box is there."
+
+"Send for it! Send for it!" cried Santiago. "Send for it at once
+that I may turn over to my daughter the secret of the mine."
+
+"That you will never be able to do," said Strong. "It has been
+destroyed."
+
+"Destroyed!" burst from almost every lip. "Destroyed? How?"
+
+Strong shook his head.
+
+"I can't tell. Again you'll have to ask Ambrosio. It is he who
+destroyed it."
+
+"By George!" exclaimed Billie, "I knew I ought to have killed
+that monk the first time I had any dealings with him. I'm sorry
+now that I didn't."
+
+"At any rate," declared Don Esteban, "I shall send for the box."
+
+He turned to Santiago, who had fallen back upon his pillow, and
+over whom the physician was bending and feeling his pulse.
+
+"I shall send for it at once," he repeated.
+
+Slowly the physician raised his head and loosed his hold upon the
+sick man's wrist.
+
+"It is too late," he said. "He will not need it. He is dead."
+
+       *       *       *       *       *
+
+On board a returning army transport bound for New York stood the
+Broncho Rider Boys casting their last glance shoreward as the sun
+was setting behind the mountains that form the background of the
+city of Vera Cruz. Over the city still waved the Stars and
+Stripes, and as the darkness fell and the tip of Mt. Orizaba
+gradually faded from sight, Billie turned to the others and in a
+voice tinged with sadness remarked:
+
+"There's only one thing about the whole country that I admire."
+
+"What's, that?" asked Adrian. "Lucia?"
+
+"No; it's the wholesome respect the Mexicans show for
+Brigadier-General Funston."
+
+"Yes, and if he is let alone, he'll make them respect the
+American flag," echoed Donald.
+
+"Long may it wave!" was Adrian's sententious comment.
+
+But it did not wave long over Vera Cruz, for the following
+November, Huerta having been obliged to leave the country in the
+meantime and Gen. Carranza having established himself for the
+time being in the City of Mexico, the American forces were
+withdrawn and the Carranza forces took possession of Vera Cruz.
+Some months later Carranza was recognized by the United States,
+and at this writing is establishing his government, which
+promises to be a continuation of the one established by Madero.
+
+Thus it will be seen that Santiago's work for his country was
+productive of good, as are all efforts to bring liberty to the
+people and to free them from the rule of a few.
+
+Before sailing for home, the boys had the satisfaction of knowing
+that the man known as Strong had been properly punished, and
+that, in accordance with Santiago's dying wish, the ten thousand
+pounds which he had practically given to Billie months before on
+the Rio Grande, were placed to the lad's credit in the banking
+house of Don Esteban.
+
+The fate of Ambrosio, the ape which caused so much trouble, was
+left in the hands of the keeper of the prison to which Strong was
+sentenced. It is to be hoped that his behavior will improve.
+
+THE END.
+
+-----------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+TRANSCRIBER'S NOTES
+
+Page 48: Removed extra quotation mark.
+
+Page 60: Changed "moso" to "mozo."
+
+Page 62: Changed typo "gaurd" to "guard."
+
+Page 87: Changed typo "variey" to "variety."
+
+Pages 123, 132: Left words "blue-jackets" and "bluejackets" as
+printed.
+
+Page 140: Added closing quotation mark.
+
+Page 197: Added missing period.
+
+Pages 206, 214, 224: Left words "kipnaped" and "kipnapped" as
+printed.
+
+
+
+
+
+
+End of the Project Gutenberg EBook of The Broncho Rider Boys with Funston at
+Vera Cruz, by Frank Fowler
+
+*** END OF THIS PROJECT GUTENBERG EBOOK THE BRONCHO RIDER BOYS WITH ***
+
+***** This file should be named 19538.txt or 19538.zip *****
+This and all associated files of various formats will be found in:
+        http://www.gutenberg.org/1/9/5/3/19538/
+
+Produced by Juliet Sutherland, Suzan Flanagan and the
+Online Distributed Proofreading Team at http://www.pgdp.net
+
+
+Updated editions will replace the previous one--the old editions
+will be renamed.
+
+Creating the works from public domain print editions means that no
+one owns a United States copyright in these works, so the Foundation
+(and you!) can copy and distribute it in the United States without
+permission and without paying copyright royalties.  Special rules,
+set forth in the General Terms of Use part of this license, apply to
+copying and distributing Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works to
+protect the PROJECT GUTENBERG-tm concept and trademark.  Project
+Gutenberg is a registered trademark, and may not be used if you
+charge for the eBooks, unless you receive specific permission.  If you
+do not charge anything for copies of this eBook, complying with the
+rules is very easy.  You may use this eBook for nearly any purpose
+such as creation of derivative works, reports, performances and
+research.  They may be modified and printed and given away--you may do
+practically ANYTHING with public domain eBooks.  Redistribution is
+subject to the trademark license, especially commercial
+redistribution.
+
+
+
+*** START: FULL LICENSE ***
+
+THE FULL PROJECT GUTENBERG LICENSE
+PLEASE READ THIS BEFORE YOU DISTRIBUTE OR USE THIS WORK
+
+To protect the Project Gutenberg-tm mission of promoting the free
+distribution of electronic works, by using or distributing this work
+(or any other work associated in any way with the phrase "Project
+Gutenberg"), you agree to comply with all the terms of the Full Project
+Gutenberg-tm License (available with this file or online at
+http://gutenberg.org/license).
+
+
+Section 1.  General Terms of Use and Redistributing Project Gutenberg-tm
+electronic works
+
+1.A.  By reading or using any part of this Project Gutenberg-tm
+electronic work, you indicate that you have read, understand, agree to
+and accept all the terms of this license and intellectual property
+(trademark/copyright) agreement.  If you do not agree to abide by all
+the terms of this agreement, you must cease using and return or destroy
+all copies of Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works in your possession.
+If you paid a fee for obtaining a copy of or access to a Project
+Gutenberg-tm electronic work and you do not agree to be bound by the
+terms of this agreement, you may obtain a refund from the person or
+entity to whom you paid the fee as set forth in paragraph 1.E.8.
+
+1.B.  "Project Gutenberg" is a registered trademark.  It may only be
+used on or associated in any way with an electronic work by people who
+agree to be bound by the terms of this agreement.  There are a few
+things that you can do with most Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works
+even without complying with the full terms of this agreement.  See
+paragraph 1.C below.  There are a lot of things you can do with Project
+Gutenberg-tm electronic works if you follow the terms of this agreement
+and help preserve free future access to Project Gutenberg-tm electronic
+works.  See paragraph 1.E below.
+
+1.C.  The Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation ("the Foundation"
+or PGLAF), owns a compilation copyright in the collection of Project
+Gutenberg-tm electronic works.  Nearly all the individual works in the
+collection are in the public domain in the United States.  If an
+individual work is in the public domain in the United States and you are
+located in the United States, we do not claim a right to prevent you from
+copying, distributing, performing, displaying or creating derivative
+works based on the work as long as all references to Project Gutenberg
+are removed.  Of course, we hope that you will support the Project
+Gutenberg-tm mission of promoting free access to electronic works by
+freely sharing Project Gutenberg-tm works in compliance with the terms of
+this agreement for keeping the Project Gutenberg-tm name associated with
+the work.  You can easily comply with the terms of this agreement by
+keeping this work in the same format with its attached full Project
+Gutenberg-tm License when you share it without charge with others.
+
+1.D.  The copyright laws of the place where you are located also govern
+what you can do with this work.  Copyright laws in most countries are in
+a constant state of change.  If you are outside the United States, check
+the laws of your country in addition to the terms of this agreement
+before downloading, copying, displaying, performing, distributing or
+creating derivative works based on this work or any other Project
+Gutenberg-tm work.  The Foundation makes no representations concerning
+the copyright status of any work in any country outside the United
+States.
+
+1.E.  Unless you have removed all references to Project Gutenberg:
+
+1.E.1.  The following sentence, with active links to, or other immediate
+access to, the full Project Gutenberg-tm License must appear prominently
+whenever any copy of a Project Gutenberg-tm work (any work on which the
+phrase "Project Gutenberg" appears, or with which the phrase "Project
+Gutenberg" is associated) is accessed, displayed, performed, viewed,
+copied or distributed:
+
+This eBook is for the use of anyone anywhere at no cost and with
+almost no restrictions whatsoever.  You may copy it, give it away or
+re-use it under the terms of the Project Gutenberg License included
+with this eBook or online at www.gutenberg.org
+
+1.E.2.  If an individual Project Gutenberg-tm electronic work is derived
+from the public domain (does not contain a notice indicating that it is
+posted with permission of the copyright holder), the work can be copied
+and distributed to anyone in the United States without paying any fees
+or charges.  If you are redistributing or providing access to a work
+with the phrase "Project Gutenberg" associated with or appearing on the
+work, you must comply either with the requirements of paragraphs 1.E.1
+through 1.E.7 or obtain permission for the use of the work and the
+Project Gutenberg-tm trademark as set forth in paragraphs 1.E.8 or
+1.E.9.
+
+1.E.3.  If an individual Project Gutenberg-tm electronic work is posted
+with the permission of the copyright holder, your use and distribution
+must comply with both paragraphs 1.E.1 through 1.E.7 and any additional
+terms imposed by the copyright holder.  Additional terms will be linked
+to the Project Gutenberg-tm License for all works posted with the
+permission of the copyright holder found at the beginning of this work.
+
+1.E.4.  Do not unlink or detach or remove the full Project Gutenberg-tm
+License terms from this work, or any files containing a part of this
+work or any other work associated with Project Gutenberg-tm.
+
+1.E.5.  Do not copy, display, perform, distribute or redistribute this
+electronic work, or any part of this electronic work, without
+prominently displaying the sentence set forth in paragraph 1.E.1 with
+active links or immediate access to the full terms of the Project
+Gutenberg-tm License.
+
+1.E.6.  You may convert to and distribute this work in any binary,
+compressed, marked up, nonproprietary or proprietary form, including any
+word processing or hypertext form.  However, if you provide access to or
+distribute copies of a Project Gutenberg-tm work in a format other than
+"Plain Vanilla ASCII" or other format used in the official version
+posted on the official Project Gutenberg-tm web site (www.gutenberg.org),
+you must, at no additional cost, fee or expense to the user, provide a
+copy, a means of exporting a copy, or a means of obtaining a copy upon
+request, of the work in its original "Plain Vanilla ASCII" or other
+form.  Any alternate format must include the full Project Gutenberg-tm
+License as specified in paragraph 1.E.1.
+
+1.E.7.  Do not charge a fee for access to, viewing, displaying,
+performing, copying or distributing any Project Gutenberg-tm works
+unless you comply with paragraph 1.E.8 or 1.E.9.
+
+1.E.8.  You may charge a reasonable fee for copies of or providing
+access to or distributing Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works provided
+that
+
+- You pay a royalty fee of 20% of the gross profits you derive from
+     the use of Project Gutenberg-tm works calculated using the method
+     you already use to calculate your applicable taxes.  The fee is
+     owed to the owner of the Project Gutenberg-tm trademark, but he
+     has agreed to donate royalties under this paragraph to the
+     Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation.  Royalty payments
+     must be paid within 60 days following each date on which you
+     prepare (or are legally required to prepare) your periodic tax
+     returns.  Royalty payments should be clearly marked as such and
+     sent to the Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation at the
+     address specified in Section 4, "Information about donations to
+     the Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation."
+
+- You provide a full refund of any money paid by a user who notifies
+     you in writing (or by e-mail) within 30 days of receipt that s/he
+     does not agree to the terms of the full Project Gutenberg-tm
+     License.  You must require such a user to return or
+     destroy all copies of the works possessed in a physical medium
+     and discontinue all use of and all access to other copies of
+     Project Gutenberg-tm works.
+
+- You provide, in accordance with paragraph 1.F.3, a full refund of any
+     money paid for a work or a replacement copy, if a defect in the
+     electronic work is discovered and reported to you within 90 days
+     of receipt of the work.
+
+- You comply with all other terms of this agreement for free
+     distribution of Project Gutenberg-tm works.
+
+1.E.9.  If you wish to charge a fee or distribute a Project Gutenberg-tm
+electronic work or group of works on different terms than are set
+forth in this agreement, you must obtain permission in writing from
+both the Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation and Michael
+Hart, the owner of the Project Gutenberg-tm trademark.  Contact the
+Foundation as set forth in Section 3 below.
+
+1.F.
+
+1.F.1.  Project Gutenberg volunteers and employees expend considerable
+effort to identify, do copyright research on, transcribe and proofread
+public domain works in creating the Project Gutenberg-tm
+collection.  Despite these efforts, Project Gutenberg-tm electronic
+works, and the medium on which they may be stored, may contain
+"Defects," such as, but not limited to, incomplete, inaccurate or
+corrupt data, transcription errors, a copyright or other intellectual
+property infringement, a defective or damaged disk or other medium, a
+computer virus, or computer codes that damage or cannot be read by
+your equipment.
+
+1.F.2.  LIMITED WARRANTY, DISCLAIMER OF DAMAGES - Except for the "Right
+of Replacement or Refund" described in paragraph 1.F.3, the Project
+Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation, the owner of the Project
+Gutenberg-tm trademark, and any other party distributing a Project
+Gutenberg-tm electronic work under this agreement, disclaim all
+liability to you for damages, costs and expenses, including legal
+fees.  YOU AGREE THAT YOU HAVE NO REMEDIES FOR NEGLIGENCE, STRICT
+LIABILITY, BREACH OF WARRANTY OR BREACH OF CONTRACT EXCEPT THOSE
+PROVIDED IN PARAGRAPH F3.  YOU AGREE THAT THE FOUNDATION, THE
+TRADEMARK OWNER, AND ANY DISTRIBUTOR UNDER THIS AGREEMENT WILL NOT BE
+LIABLE TO YOU FOR ACTUAL, DIRECT, INDIRECT, CONSEQUENTIAL, PUNITIVE OR
+INCIDENTAL DAMAGES EVEN IF YOU GIVE NOTICE OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH
+DAMAGE.
+
+1.F.3.  LIMITED RIGHT OF REPLACEMENT OR REFUND - If you discover a
+defect in this electronic work within 90 days of receiving it, you can
+receive a refund of the money (if any) you paid for it by sending a
+written explanation to the person you received the work from.  If you
+received the work on a physical medium, you must return the medium with
+your written explanation.  The person or entity that provided you with
+the defective work may elect to provide a replacement copy in lieu of a
+refund.  If you received the work electronically, the person or entity
+providing it to you may choose to give you a second opportunity to
+receive the work electronically in lieu of a refund.  If the second copy
+is also defective, you may demand a refund in writing without further
+opportunities to fix the problem.
+
+1.F.4.  Except for the limited right of replacement or refund set forth
+in paragraph 1.F.3, this work is provided to you 'AS-IS', WITH NO OTHER
+WARRANTIES OF ANY KIND, EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO
+WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTIBILITY OR FITNESS FOR ANY PURPOSE.
+
+1.F.5.  Some states do not allow disclaimers of certain implied
+warranties or the exclusion or limitation of certain types of damages.
+If any disclaimer or limitation set forth in this agreement violates the
+law of the state applicable to this agreement, the agreement shall be
+interpreted to make the maximum disclaimer or limitation permitted by
+the applicable state law.  The invalidity or unenforceability of any
+provision of this agreement shall not void the remaining provisions.
+
+1.F.6.  INDEMNITY - You agree to indemnify and hold the Foundation, the
+trademark owner, any agent or employee of the Foundation, anyone
+providing copies of Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works in accordance
+with this agreement, and any volunteers associated with the production,
+promotion and distribution of Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works,
+harmless from all liability, costs and expenses, including legal fees,
+that arise directly or indirectly from any of the following which you do
+or cause to occur: (a) distribution of this or any Project Gutenberg-tm
+work, (b) alteration, modification, or additions or deletions to any
+Project Gutenberg-tm work, and (c) any Defect you cause.
+
+
+Section  2.  Information about the Mission of Project Gutenberg-tm
+
+Project Gutenberg-tm is synonymous with the free distribution of
+electronic works in formats readable by the widest variety of computers
+including obsolete, old, middle-aged and new computers.  It exists
+because of the efforts of hundreds of volunteers and donations from
+people in all walks of life.
+
+Volunteers and financial support to provide volunteers with the
+assistance they need, is critical to reaching Project Gutenberg-tm's
+goals and ensuring that the Project Gutenberg-tm collection will
+remain freely available for generations to come.  In 2001, the Project
+Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation was created to provide a secure
+and permanent future for Project Gutenberg-tm and future generations.
+To learn more about the Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation
+and how your efforts and donations can help, see Sections 3 and 4
+and the Foundation web page at http://www.pglaf.org.
+
+
+Section 3.  Information about the Project Gutenberg Literary Archive
+Foundation
+
+The Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation is a non profit
+501(c)(3) educational corporation organized under the laws of the
+state of Mississippi and granted tax exempt status by the Internal
+Revenue Service.  The Foundation's EIN or federal tax identification
+number is 64-6221541.  Its 501(c)(3) letter is posted at
+http://pglaf.org/fundraising.  Contributions to the Project Gutenberg
+Literary Archive Foundation are tax deductible to the full extent
+permitted by U.S. federal laws and your state's laws.
+
+The Foundation's principal office is located at 4557 Melan Dr. S.
+Fairbanks, AK, 99712., but its volunteers and employees are scattered
+throughout numerous locations.  Its business office is located at
+809 North 1500 West, Salt Lake City, UT 84116, (801) 596-1887, email
+business@pglaf.org.  Email contact links and up to date contact
+information can be found at the Foundation's web site and official
+page at http://pglaf.org
+
+For additional contact information:
+     Dr. Gregory B. Newby
+     Chief Executive and Director
+     gbnewby@pglaf.org
+
+Section 4.  Information about Donations to the Project Gutenberg
+Literary Archive Foundation
+
+Project Gutenberg-tm depends upon and cannot survive without wide
+spread public support and donations to carry out its mission of
+increasing the number of public domain and licensed works that can be
+freely distributed in machine readable form accessible by the widest
+array of equipment including outdated equipment.  Many small donations
+($1 to $5,000) are particularly important to maintaining tax exempt
+status with the IRS.
+
+The Foundation is committed to complying with the laws regulating
+charities and charitable donations in all 50 states of the United
+States.  Compliance requirements are not uniform and it takes a
+considerable effort, much paperwork and many fees to meet and keep up
+with these requirements.  We do not solicit donations in locations
+where we have not received written confirmation of compliance.  To
+SEND DONATIONS or determine the status of compliance for any
+particular state visit http://pglaf.org
+
+While we cannot and do not solicit contributions from states where we
+have not met the solicitation requirements, we know of no prohibition
+against accepting unsolicited donations from donors in such states who
+approach us with offers to donate.
+
+International donations are gratefully accepted, but we cannot make
+any statements concerning tax treatment of donations received from
+outside the United States.  U.S. laws alone swamp our small staff.
+
+Please check the Project Gutenberg Web pages for current donation
+methods and addresses.  Donations are accepted in a number of other
+ways including checks, online payments and credit card
+donations.  To donate, please visit: http://pglaf.org/donate
+
+
+Section 5.  General Information About Project Gutenberg-tm electronic
+works.
+
+Professor Michael S. Hart is the originator of the Project Gutenberg-tm
+concept of a library of electronic works that could be freely shared
+with anyone.  For thirty years, he produced and distributed Project
+Gutenberg-tm eBooks with only a loose network of volunteer support.
+
+Project Gutenberg-tm eBooks are often created from several printed
+editions, all of which are confirmed as Public Domain in the U.S.
+unless a copyright notice is included.  Thus, we do not necessarily
+keep eBooks in compliance with any particular paper edition.
+
+Most people start at our Web site which has the main PG search facility:
+
+     http://www.gutenberg.org
+
+This Web site includes information about Project Gutenberg-tm,
+including how to make donations to the Project Gutenberg Literary
+Archive Foundation, how to help produce our new eBooks, and how to
+subscribe to our email newsletter to hear about new eBooks.
+
+*** END: FULL LICENSE ***
+
diff --git a/19538.zip b/19538.zip
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..8914510
--- /dev/null
+++ b/19538.zip
diff --git a/LICENSE.txt b/LICENSE.txt
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..6312041
--- /dev/null
+++ b/LICENSE.txt
@@ -0,0 +1,11 @@
+This eBook, including all associated images, markup, improvements,
+metadata, and any other content or labor, has been confirmed to be
+in the PUBLIC DOMAIN IN THE UNITED STATES.
+
+Procedures for determining public domain status are described in
+the "Copyright How-To" at https://www.gutenberg.org.
+
+No investigation has been made concerning possible copyrights in
+jurisdictions other than the United States. Anyone seeking to utilize
+this eBook outside of the United States should confirm copyright
+status under the laws that apply to them.
diff --git a/README.md b/README.md
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..8f08cb8
--- /dev/null
+++ b/README.md
@@ -0,0 +1,2 @@
+Project Gutenberg (https://www.gutenberg.org) public repository for
+eBook #19538 (https://www.gutenberg.org/ebooks/19538)